Comdial DXP Plus Series manual

Digital Communications System

R

Accredited by the Dutch Council for Certification for certification and registration activities.

Comdial’s Quality Management System Is

Certified To The ISO 9001 Standard.

Comdial strives to design the features in our communications systems to be fully interactive with one another.

However, this is not always possible, as the combinations of accessories and features are too varied and extensive to insure total feature compatibility. Accordingly, some features identified in this publication will not operate if some other feature is activated.

Comdial disclaims all liability relating to feature non-compatibility or associated in any way with problems which may be encountered by incompatible features. Notwithstanding anything contained in this publication to the contrary, Comdial makes no representation herein as to the compatibility of features.

DXP Plus General Description GCA40–130

Contents

1. Introducing The DXP Plus ............... ............................................ 1

1.1

Using This Publication.......................................................................................1

1.2

Understanding The DXP Plus...........................................................................2

2. Understanding The Telephone Features ........................................3

2.1

Using the Comdial Telephones ..........................................................................3

2.2

Understanding The Telephone Features............................................................4

2.3

Using DigiTech Telephones.............................................................................. 6

2.4

Using Impact Telephones.................................................................................. 8

2.5

Using ExecuTech Telephones..........................................................................10

3. Reviewing The Hardware ..............................................................12

3.1

Understanding Printed Wire Boards .............................................................. 12

3.2

Defining The Line Boards...............................................................................13

3.3

Defining The Station Boards.......................................................................... 14

3.4

Defining The Optional Circuit Boards .............................................................15

3.5

Locating The Boards ...................................................................................... 16

3.6

Using The Modem ...........................................................................................18

3.7

Using The Ring Generator ..............................................................................19

3.8

Understanding Board Configuration ............................................................... 20

3.9

Mounting Considerations ................................................................................ 22

3.10

Using The Power Supply .................................................................................24

3.11

Using The Battery Backup ...............................................................................26

4. Connecting The System..................................................................28

4.1

Connecting The Lines .....................................................................................28

4.2

Connecting The Stations .................................................................................30

4.3

Connecting The Paging Equipment And Music Sources .................................32

4.4

Connecting The Power Failure Telephone...................................................... 33

4.5

Connecting The Serial Data Ports ....................................................................34

4.6

Connecting The Slave Equipment Requiring Dry-Contact Relay Closures....35

5. Knowing The General Specifications............................................36

5.1

Knowing The FCC Rules And Regulations .................................................... 42

6. Understanding The System Features ............................................44

Contents – iii


1

Introducing The DXP Plus

1.1 Using This Publication

What this book does

This DXP Plus General Description provides an overview of the system and its features. The system’s general specifications are detailed in full in Section 5,

Knowing The General Specifications. Section 6, Understanding The Features, details all of the available features.

Where to find what you need

The General Description contains six sections. Use the following list as a guide to finding what you need in this book.

• Section One, Introducing The DXP Plus, gives you a general overview of the system and its capabilities.

• Section Two, Understanding The Telephone Features, lists the telephone models that function on the DXP Plus. This chapter also lists the major features of the telephones, and it gives you diagrams and dimensions of each telephone model.

@BULLET 2 = Section Three, Previewing The Hardware, details all of the hardware for the DXP

Plus. Use this chapter to find definitions of the printed-wire-boards. Along with general definitions, section three gives the product code numbers and the installation locations for each board.

• Section Four, Connecting The System, describes some basic installation instructions. You will find information on line and station connections in section four.

• Section Five, Knowing The Specifications, lists all of the product codes and specifications for the DXP Plus.

• Section Six, Understanding The Features, defines all of the system’s features.

Introducing The DXP Plus – 1

GCA40–130 DXP Plus General Description

1.2 Understanding The DXP Plus

Station and line capacity

The DXP Plus system is a 480-port, three-cabinet, digital communications system consisting of one main cabinet and two expansion cabinets. With analog, loop-start, DID, or multipurpose line boards, the maximum configuration is 0 lines and 480 stations, or 232 lines and 8 stations. By using the digital carrier transmission option (E1 or T1), however, you can enhance the system’s capacity to a maximum of 560 ports, with a 240 line and 320 station maximum configuration.

How the system works

The Comdial DXP Plus digital communications system provides cost-effective voice and data communications using the latest PCM-TDM (pulse code modulated/time division multiplexing) digital switching technology. The DXP

Plus switching architecture provides a non-blocking switching array that gives all ports simultaneous access through the system. The digital technology allows simultaneous voice and data transmission using 2B+D signaling (CCITT specification for basic access data transfer rate for ISDN on a single twisted pair) when data terminals become available. The design is a fully modular, ISDN

(integrated services digital communications network) system with 1024 usable time slots and the flexibility for upgrade and expansion as needed. The DXP Plus digital communications system supports the current Comdial line of DigiTech,

Impact, and ExecuTech telephones.

2 – Introducing The DXP Plus


2

Telephone Features

2.1 Using The Comdial Telephones

The DXP Plus system supports many of Comdial’s proprietary telephones as well as industry-standard telephones. The following list details the various telephone models.

• DigiTech Telephones

» 7700S — LCD Speakerphone

» 7714X — Multiline Telephone

» 7714S — Multiline Speakerphone

» 7701X —Single Line Proprietary Telephone

» DD32X — 32-Button DSS/BLF Console

•

»

Impact Telephones

8024S — 24 Line LCD Speakerphone

@BULLET TEXT 2 = 8124S — 24 Line Speakerphone

» 8012S — 12 Line LCD Speakerphone

» 8112S — 12 Line Speakerphone

» 8112N — Multiline Proprietary Telephone

» 8101N — Single Line Proprietary Telephone

» IB64X — 64-Button DSS/BLF Console

»

• ExecuTech Telephones

» 6620E — 23-Line Monitor Telephone

» 6620T — 23-Line Speakerphone

» 6614E — 22-Line Monitor Telephone

» 6600E — 17-Line LCD Speakerphone

» 6700S — 12-Line LCD Speakerphone

» 6701X — Single Line Proprietary Telephone

» 6706X — 6-Line Monitor Telephone

6714S — 14-Line Speakerphone

6714X — 14-Line Monitor Telephone

6614T — 22-Line Speakerphone

DB70 — 70-Button DSS/BLF Console

DB32S — 32-Button DSS/BLF Console

EB32X — 32-Button DSS/BLF Console

Telephone Features – 3


2.2 Understanding The Telephone Features

The DXP Plus supports the following telephone features on both analog and digital proprietary telephones. Some of these features are system-wide and others are specific to individual stations.

Alphanumeric Display

— Displays time, day and date

—

—

Keeps you apprised of the status of your telephone

Provides programming prompts

Auxiliary Jack (used only with

—

Impact and DigiTech LCD speakerphone)

Allows you to use your telephone privately and handsfree with headset

—

—

—

Allows you to plug in a tape recorder

Allows you to plug in a loud ringer

Helps improve operation of high-volume business applications by adding a paging speaker

Button Query

— Allows you to see the function of a programmed button on your LCD screen

Hold Button

— Places a line on hold

— Stores pauses in number sequences while programming

— Allows you to scroll through multiple held calls on display

Interactive Buttons

— Provide quick and easy access to system and call processing features

— Provide straightforward button programming without dialing codes

(the interactive buttons themselves, however, are not programmable)

Intercom Button

— Selects an intercom line

— Initiates many of the features of the telephone

Message Waiting Light

@BULLET TEXT 3 = Tells you that there is a message for you

Mute Button

— Keeps the person on the line or speakerphone from hearing your conversation

Programmable Buttons

— Allow you to program your telephone for automatic dialing functions

—

—

—

Allow you to program your telephone for Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Show which lines and intercoms are either in use or on hold

Allow you to store frequently used feature codes at unused buttons

4 – Telephone Features


Ringer Volume Control

— Lets you vary ringer volume

Shift Button

— Allows you to program and access preprogrammed feature codes or secondary speed dial numbers (each programmable button can accommodate two feature codes or speed dial numbers)

Speaker Button

— Turns your speaker on or off

—

—

Disconnects a call when your handset is on-hook

Ends or cancels programming

Status Lights

— Shows status of line when next to line button

—

—

Shows status of station when next to DSS button

Shows status of feature when next to programmable button

TAP Button

— Recalls dial tone, or activates host system features (must be programmed for either feature)

— Retrieves held calls (last call held is first call retrieved)

Transfer/Conference Button

— Transfers calls

— Sets up conference calls

Volume Control

— Regulates the volume of the speaker and the handset



2.3 Using DigiTech Telephones

The DXP Plus accepts all of the currently produced DigiTech telephones. Figure 1 details all of the

DigiTech telephones that operate on the DXP Plus. Figure 2 shows the dimensions of the DigiTech

Multiline telephone.

CAJS075

12X14LCD

COMDIAL DIGITECH DIGITECH COMDIAL

TRANS

CONF

TAP

SPKR MUTE

HOLD

7714X, 7714S

ITCM

TRANS

CONF

TAP

SPKR MUTE

HOLD

7700S

ITCM


1

GHI

4

PRS

7

TUV

8

OPER

0

ABC

2

JKL

5

DEF

3

MNO

6

WXY

9

#

HOLD TAP

7701X

Figure 1: DigiTech Station Configurations

DD32X

DXP Plus General Description

7.658"

8.625"

7714X

7714S

7700S

4.983"

GCA40–130

4.069"

1.112"

6.451"

4.007"

2.887"

8.625"

7701X

CAJS045

Figure 2:DigiTech Station Outline Dimensions

1.251"



2.4 Using Impact Telephones

The DXP Plus accepts all of the currently produced Impact telephones. Figure 3 details all of the Impact telephones that operate on the DXP Plus. Figure 4 shows the dimensions of the Impact Multiline telephone.

QZ

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

DEF

MNO

TUV

OPER

#

WXY

TRNS/CNF

HOLD TAP INTERCOM SPEAKER SHIFT MUTE

8024S

QZ

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

DEF

MNO

TUV

OPER

#

WXY

TRNS/CNF

HOLD TAP INTERCOM SPEAKER SHIFT MUTE

8124S

TRNS/CNF

HOLD

QZ

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

DEF

MNO

TUV

OPER

#

WXY

TAP INTERCOM

8012S

SHIFT

MUTE

SPEAKER

TRNS/CNF

HOLD

QZ

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

DEF

MNO

TUV

OPER

#

WXY

TAP INTERCOM

8112S

SHIFT

MUTE

SPEAKER

CAJS076

TRNS/CNF

HOLD

QZ

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

TUV

OPER

DEF

MNO

WXY

TAP

INTERCOM

8112N IB64X

Figure 3: Impact Station Configurations


TRNS/CNF

HOLD

QZ

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

TUV

OPER

DEF

MNO

WXY

TAP

INTERCOM

8101N


10.750

8.900

8024S, 8124S

GCA40–130

7.130

8.900

8101N,

8112N

CAJS077

8.900

9.080

4.640

3.731

8012S, 8112S

1.034

Figure 4: Impact Station Outline Dimensions



2.5 Using ExecuTech Telephones

The DXP Plus accepts all of the currently produced ExecuTech telephones. Figure 5 details all of the

ExecuTech telephones that operate on the DXP Plus. Figure 6 shows the dimensions of the ExecuTech

Multiline telephone.

TAP

TRANS

CONF

MUTE

SPKR

HOLD

GHI

PRS

SYS OPER

ABC

JKL

TUV

DEF

MNO

WXY

RDL

I TCM

6620T

6620E

DB70

S H I F T

M W

HOLD

TAP

TRANS

CONF

MUTE

SPKR

GH I

PRS

SYS

ABC

JKL

TUV

OPER RDL

DEF

MNO

WXY

I TCM

6614T

6614E

CAJS046A

1

GHI

4

PRS

7

TUV

8

OPER

0

ABC

2

JKL

5

DEF

3

MNO

6

WXY

9

#

HOLD TAP

6701X

TAP

TRANS

CONF

MUTE

SPKR

HOLD

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

TUV

SYS OPER

DEF

MNO

WXY

RDL

I TCM

6600E

DB32X

EB32X

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

TUV

OPER

SYS RDL

DEF

MNO

WXY

TAP SPKR MUTE

TRANS

CONF

HOLD I TCM

6700S

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

TUV

OPER

SYS RDL

DEF

MNO

WXY

TAP

SPKR

MUTE

TRANS

CONF

HOLD

I TCM

6702X

TAP

MNTR

TRANS

CONF

MUTE

GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

TUV

OPER

SYS RDL

DEF

MNO

WXY

HOLD

6706X

I TCM

Figure 5: ExecuTech Station Configurations


GHI

PRS

ABC

JKL

TUV

OPER

SYS RDL

DEF

MNO

WXY

TAP SPKR MUTE

TRANS

CONF

HOLD I TCM

6714S


7.658"

8.625"

4.983"

GCA40–130

4.069"

6.451"

4.007"

2.887"

1.112"

8.625"

CAJS045

1.251"

Figure 6: ExecuTech Station Outline Dimensions



3

Reviewing The Hardware

3.1 Understanding The Printed-Wire Boards

The basic system consists of a main cabinet, which accepts 14 printed-wire boards, and two expansion cabinets; the upper expansion cabinet accepts twelve printed-wire boards, and the lower cabinet accepts eleven (see Figure 7). Some of the printed-wire boards also hold smaller circuit cards that mount directly to the boards (See section 3.5 for card information) The line boards are listed in section 3.3; station boards are located in section 3.4. The complement of circuit boards include the following (for information on the main DXP Plus package, see section 3.6, Locating The Boards):

Auxiliary Board:

— A utility board that provides interface for a maximum of four special-purpose circuit cards.

Actual make-up requirements depend upon system configuration.

Central Processing Unit (CPU) Board:

— Provides central processing and control for the system and other miscellaneous functions. The

CPU board has the time switch and conference circuitry and two serial data ports, which have been dedicated for PC-based programming and a remote maintenance modem.

Conference Board:

— Provide additional conference capability. Each board provides 5 additional 3-way conferences.

Interface Boards:

— Ties the main cabinet to the expansion cabinet. Each expansion cabinet has an interface board; that connects the main cabinet with the expansion cabinets. Interface boards are included with the expansion cabinet packages.

Memory Card:

— Provides the memory storage and operating system control. The card mounts directly onto the

CPU board, and it is available with two (four megabyte as a future feature) of memory. The system uses re-programmable random access memory, known as “flash memory” or “flash

RAM” —not replaceable memory chips, known as “EPROM”.

Services Board:

— Provides an interface for music-on-hold and background music inputs; it also provides an output to an external paging amplifier. The services board includes four dry-contact relays for external control functions. You can also add up to three additional cards onto the services board for data communications, DTMF tone receiving, and E1 or T1 synchronization.

12 – Reviewing The Hardware


3.2 Defining The Line Boards

The DXP Plus accepts several different types of lines. In order to use these various lines, you must install the correct line board. The following list details all of the current DXP Plus line boards.

Direct Inward Dialing Line Board:

— Direct Inward Lines (DID) are incoming only and are employed to reduce the number of channels between the DXP Plus and the Central Office (CO). DID lines allow incoming CO calls to reach internal intercom extensions without going through the attendant station. DID operation requires a group of published directory numbers provided by the CO. The number of DID lines is limited only by the number of installed DID boards. The DID translation tables have limits that may affect DID capacities. The system supports a maximum of 400 DID lines.

Loop-Start Line Board:

— The loop-start line board provides system interface for loop start lines. Loop start lines are the most common CO line type (loop-start lines do not usually offer disconnect supervision)

Multi–Purpose Line Board:

— The multipurpose line board provides system interface for ground start lines, loop start lines, and

E & M Tie lines; these are typically the three line types that the central office (CO) makes available for connection. The multipurpose line board is programmable for each line type. You can have a maximum of two Tie lines on each multipurpose line board.

E1 Line Board (available for international applications):

— The E1 board provides 30 channels of voice transmissions over a single, four-wire, 120 ohm cable or over two 75 ohm coaxial cables using multiplexing techniques. The system accepts a maximum of eight E1 boards.

T1 Line Board (available for domestic U.S.A. applications)

— The T1 board provides eight, 16, or 24 channels of voice transmissions over a single, four-wire, cable using multiplexing techniques. The system accepts a maximum of ten E1 boards.

Reviewing The Hardware – 13


3.3 Defining The Station Boards

The DXP Plus accepts digital, analog, and industry standard telephones. In order to use these different types of stations, you must install the correct station board. The following list explains each station board.

Analog Station Board

— The analog station board provides support for Comdial’s proprietary analog telephones (such as the various ExecuTech models). Each board supports either 8 or 16 stations. A precharge port is provided for board removal or insertion without system power-down.

Digital Station Board

— The digital station board provides support for Comdial’s proprietary digital telephones (such as the Impact and DigiTech). Each board supports either 8 or 16 stations. A precharge port is provided for board removal or insertion without system power-down.

Industry Standard Telephone Board

— The industry-standard station board provides support for industry-standard telephones. Each board supports either 8 or 16 stations. A precharge port is provided for board removal or insertion without system power-down.



3.4 Defining The Option Circuit Cards

Many of the DXP Plus boards accept smaller circuit cards. These boards mount directly into the DXP

Plus, while the optional circuit cards mount only onto boards. You can install these optional cards on any of the following boards: the Auxiliary Board, the Services board, and the Interface boards.

Synchronization Card

— Adjusts the E1 or T1 transmit frequency to match the frequency from the CO. The synchronization card mounts onto the Services board only.

Communications Card:

— The optional communications card provides extra serial ports for the DXP Plus. The communications card contains four serial communication ports and is attached to either the

Auxiliary board, the interface boards, or the Services board. You can install two communications cards onto the lower two slots of any of these boards. The system supports a maximum of 18 serial data ports.

DTMF Tone Card

— The DTMF Tone card expands the system’s industry-standard dialing capability. The system has one IST DTMF receiver located on the services board while each DTMF card provides four additional DTMF receivers.



3.5 Locating The Boards

Main Cabinet

The 14-board capacity of the main cabinet breaks down as follows from left to right:

1 – interface board slot

2 – board slots for future features)

1 – CPU board slot

1 – services board slot

1 – auxiliary/universal slot (for auxiliary boards, station boards, conference boards, or line boards)

8 – universal slots (for station, conference, or line boards)

Upper Expansion Cabinet

The 12-board capacity of the upper expansion cabinet breaks down as follows:




Lower Expansion Cabinet

The 11-board capacity of the lower expansion cabinet breaks down as follows:






Upper Expansion Cabinet

1 Interface Slot

2 Aux./ Universal Slots

9 Universal Slots

Main Cabinet

1 Interface Slot

1 CPU Slot

1 Services Slot

1 Aux./ Universal Slot

8 Universal Slots

Lower Expansion Cabinet

1 Interface Slot

2 Aux./ Universal Slots

8 Universal Slots

Figure 7: Board Locations

PLUS067A



3.6 Using The Modem

The modem is a general-purpose, *Hayes TM compatible, 300, 1200, and 2400 automatic baud detect serial modem. The CPU board provides a dedicated serial data port and power port for the modem. If you connect the modem to a serial data port on one of the communications cards, you will have to program the system for modem operation on that port.

*Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products.

Power

Cord

PWR

Status

SER

IAL

Line

PLUS013

Serial Port

Cord

Figure 8: Modem



3.7

Using The Ring Generator

The DXP Plus digital communications system supports the use of industry-standard telephones (IST). To use ISTs, the system requires a ring generator assembly to supply ringing voltage and message waiting voltage to the industry-standard telephones.

Regardless of the number of installed industry-standard telephones, you will need to install one ring generator assembly in each common equipment cabinet that has IST telephones connected.

PLUS030

Ring

Generator

Cable

Power

Cable

Ring Generator

Assembly

Power Supply

Assembly

Figure 9: Ring Generator



3.8 Understanding The Board Configuration

Physical vs.

Logical board location

The DXP Plus uses two distinctions for station and line locations: the physical location and the logical location.

The physical location corresponds to the order of the universal slots in the system; these physical slot locations never change. There are a possible 30 physical slot locations in the DXP Plus (nine slots in the main cabinet, eleven slots in the upper expansion cabinet, and ten slots in the lower expansion cabinet–see figure 10 for physical board locations), and no matter what board you install in the first universal slot of the main cabinet, for example, that slot is always physical slot one. The physical slot numbers begin with the first universal slot in the main cabinet and move from left to right. The first universal slot in the upper expansion cabinet is physical slot number 10, and the first universal slot in the lower cabinet is physical slot 21. Installers need to know the physical location of the boards in order to properly wire the lines and stations.

The logical location of a station or a line corresponds to its relationship to the other stations or lines in the system and is not dependent upon the board’s location in the cabinet. Therefore, if you have installed your first station board into the fifth slot of the main cabinet, for example, the system still refers to the first station on that board as logical station one (station one always defaults with intercom 1001).

Physical Slots 10 –20




PLUS067

Figure 10: Physical Board Locations


How automatic configuration works

Because there are no dedicated station or line ports in the DXP

GCA40–130

Plus, the system uses an automatic configuration method to number the lines and stations. When you master clear the system, it automatically searches for all installed line and station boards in the main and expansion cabinets. Once the system has identified the board type and location, it automatically numbers the ports on every installed board (see the section below, “How the system renumbers logical ports,” for more information on renumbering).

How the system renumbers logical ports

The automatic renumbering configuration, which renumbers the logical ports, begins at the left-most universal slot in the main cabinet and proceeds left to right.

When the system has configured all of the boards in the main cabinet, it moves to the upper expansion cabinet and continues searching from left to right. Finally, the system searches the lower expansion cabinet, again from left to right, until it has numbered all of the lines and stations. When the configuration is finished, the line and station ports are numbered logically from left to right in each cabinet throughout the system.

Adding boards without renumbering

When you install additional boards or relocate existing boards after the system is in service, the logical numbers of the stations or lines on the added board continue from the last assigned logical number. For example, if your last assigned station number was 16, the next station number will be 17, regardless of the board’s physical slot.

After you remove and delete a board through programming, that board’s logical ports are available for reassignment. So an added or relocated board would then take the logical port numbers from the removed board and not from the end of the logical sequence. For example, if you had 64 stations and were to remove a station board that had held logical stations 1–16, the next station board that you installed would occupy logical station ports 1–16 and not ports 64–80. If you were to remove an 8-port board and replace it with a 16-port board, the first eight ports on the new board would replace the original eight logical port numbers, and the remaining eight ports would begin with the last assigned logical port. So using our same scenario, the new 16-port board would have logical ports 1–8 and

64–72.



3.9 Mounting Considerations

When installing the DXP Plus digital communications system, take note of the following requirements

(figure 11 shows the mounting dimensions):

NOTE: The following instructions describe how to mount the main cabinet using a backboard; however, you can mount the cabinet on a standard 23–inch equipment rack if you wish.

• Always choose a secure and dry mounting location that has plenty of ventilation. Be sure that the temperature range of the location is within 32-122 degrees F (0-50 degrees C) and that the humidity is less than 90 percent, non-condensing.

• Locate the equipment within four feet of a proper AC electrical outlet dedicated exclusively to this equipment. The outlet must be a 117 VAC 15 AMP circuit with a third-wire ground supplied to a standard electrical outlet (NEMA 5-15R)

• Locate the equipment within 25 feet of the TELCO/PBX jacks—this is an FCC requirement. A nominal distance of seven feet is ideal.

• Use a reliable earth ground—a metal cold water pipe or a metal building frame ground.

• Use a backboard of at least 3/4-inch thick plywood to mount the DXP Plus common equipment.

It is a good practice to make this backboard large enough to accommodate the main cabinet, the expansion cabinet, and a battery backup assembly even though the initial installation may not require all of this equipment.

• Always bridge underlying wall studs with the backboard and drive the attaching hardware through the backboard and through the underlying wall into the wall studs. Allow space between the top and bottom of the main cabinet for later placement of an expansion cabinet above the main cabinet.



48 10 1/2

4 3/4

10 1/2

12 3/4

Typical Backboard

48 X 96 3/4 Plywood Sheet

22 5/16

10 1/2

Expansion

Cabinet 1

Main

Cabinet

10 1/2

4 3/4

10 1/2

Panel

Retaining

Screws

Panel

Retaining

Screws

Expansion

Cabinet 2

10 1/2

Panel

Retaining

Screws

GCA40–130

PLUS024

Figure 11: Mounting The Cabinets



3.10 Using The Power Supply

What the power supply does

Each cabinet in the DXP Plus system has its own power supply. The power supply provides + and – 5 VDC operating power for the circuit boards and – 36

VDC for all of the telephone stations. Each power supply is located in the top right corner of the respective cabinet (see figure 12 for power supply locations).

Power supply requirements

For the AC power connection, employ a dedicated 117VAC 15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire ground, supplied to a standard electrical outlet (NEMA 5-15R).

Remember, this electrical outlet must be located within four feet of the common equipment cabinet. You must supply two dedicated electrical outlets, each protected by its own circuit breaker, if you plan to install expansion cabinets.

CAUTION

The dedicated AC circuit for the expansion cabinets must be different from the dedicated AC circuit that you provide for the main cabinet.

Where to connect the power supply

If you install the optional battery back-up assembly, you can use the main cabinet’s electrical outlet to supply AC power to that assembly’s battery charger.

To provide protection against surges and spikes that may appear on the AC line, install a plug-in power line surge protector between the AC power cord of the installed equipment and the AC outlet.

The common equipment cabinet employs a fan-cooled electronic switching power supply (ensure that the fan can always provide unobstructed air flow for cooling).

During operation, power supplies of this type generate an audible sound from their switching regulators. This sound is normal and is not an indication that the power supply is operating improperly.

CAUTION

DO NOT attach or secure the line cord to the surface of the mounting location in any manner.



PLUS038

GCA40–130

Two 15 AMP

Circuit Breakers

Ganged Together

Power

Cable

Two Dedicated

117 VAC 15 Amp

NEMA 5-15R

Electrical Outlets

With Third Wire

Ground

(Each Is Protected

By Its Own Circuit

Breaker.)

Plug-In

Power Line

Surge Protectors

Typical Earth

Ground

Figure 12: Power Connections



3.11 Using The Battery Backup

What the battery backup does

Should the AC power to the system be interrupted, one external battery assembly provides 1.0 hour of operation for a fully loaded system (for information on battery backup time using expansion cabinets, see the section below, “How to

calculate battery backup time”).

During AC operation, the external battery assembly accepts re-charging current to maintain the voltage potential of its batteries at an operational level. The measured voltage the battery backup is 34.5 volts when the batteries are fully charged.

Battery backup components

You can only install one battery backup per system. The battery backup assembly includes the following items:

• Batteries: Five 6-volt, 50 ampere-hour, (Comdial product code BT000-141), charger unit and interface cables.

• Metal enclosure with wire harness, includes combination circuit breaker, on/off switch.

How to calculate backup time

Calculate the minimum battery backup time provided by a battery backup assembly to a fully configured DXP Plus system using the following formula:

T =

Ke

1 + [(0.084) (N)]

T = Back-up time in hours

K = 0.85 (Constant)

e = 50 (ampere-hour capacity of battery backup assembly)

N = Total number of stations

Example:

Assume that you have installed a DXP Plus with three cabinets supporting 472 telephones and containing one line board along with a battery backup assembly to provide back-up power.

T =

(.82)(50)

1 + [(0.084) (472)]

=

41.0

40.65

= 1.0 Hour

NOTE: The external battery assembly requires a maximum of 10 hours to completely re-charge to full potential after it has been completely discharged and, in some cases, when initially installed.



PLUS004

Circuit Breaker

Power Line

Surge Protector

Dedicated

AC Outlet

Figure 13: Battery Backup Connections



4

Connecting The System

4.1 Connecting The Lines

How to connect the lines

Line terminations to the line boards vary depending upon the line board type.

Terminations for the loop start board are standard modular jack connections. Each jack on the loop-start board provides termination for two lines. Terminations for the loop start and the multipurpose boards are through a 50-pin amphenol-type connector, and the connection for the T1 board is an eight-pin modular jack. The demarcation point can be a type 66M-xx connector block or individual 6-position modular jacks. The wiring that you route between the demarcation-point and the line board termination should be #24 AWG or larger twisted-pair wiring (see figure 14 for line board connections).

How to protect the lines

Transient voltage spikes, if induced onto CO or CENTREX lines, can travel through the cable and into the common equipment. The telephone company offers basic protection against this condition, but it is usually designed to protect the central office circuits. While this CO or CENTREX service will also provide some protection to the common equipment, you should not rely upon it for total protection. To help ensure that external over-voltage surges do not damage the system, Comdial recommends that you install and properly ground gas discharge tubes, or similar primary protection devices, on all lines.

Each line board is shipped with a ferrite collar. Bundle the line cables together and snap the collar around the bundle to provide protection against radio frequency interference.

28 – Connecting The System


PLUS033

GCA40–130

Ferrite

Collar

Connect Line

Cable to

Outside Line

Termination

Figure 14: Typical Line Connections (loop-start board shown)

Connecting The System – 29


4.2 Connecting The Stations

How to connect the stations

Connections between the telephones and the station boards are typically via type

66M-xx connector blocks that are cable connected to the station boards (see figure 15).

The gauge size of the twisted-pair station wiring determines the maximum distance allowed from the common equipment to the stations.

Station Type

Digital Telephone

Analog Multiline Telephone

Analog Single-Line Proprietary

Telephone

Industry-Standard Telephone

20 AWG

2500 Feet

2500 Feet

4000 Feet

4000 Feet

Wire Gauge

22 AWG

2000 Feet

2000 Feet

3500 Feet

3500 Feet

24 AWG

1500 Feet

1500 Feet

3000 Feet

3000 Feet

Protecting the connections

If spare conductors exist in the cables that are run between the station boards and the 66M-xx connector blocks, it is a good practice to connect them to earth ground to help prevent them from inducing radio frequency and/or AC interference into the system.

Each station interface board is shipped with an appropriate supply of ferrite collars. Snap one of these around each station cable to provide protection against radio frequency interference.

Installing a DSS / BLF console

Install a DSS/BLF Console at any station in the system as a companion to a telephone. There is no limit to the maximum number of consoles that can be installed on a system. When you install a console, you must also define the station as a console with programming.



Typical Station

Connector Block

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

13

14

15

16

8

9

10

11

12

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

44

45

46

47

39

40

41

42

43

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

48

49

50

50

25

26

1

CLIP TERMINALS

Female 50-pin

Cable Connector

Ferrite

Collar

PLUS031

Typical Analog

Station Board

J1 (Male 50-pin

Connector)

J2 (Male 50-pin

Connector)

Figure 15: Station Connections



4.3 Connecting The Paging Equipment And Music Sources

The services board provides a standard 6-position modular jack for interfacing external paging equipment and external music sources to the DXP Plus system. This jack supplies audio output from the DXP Plus for paging purposes and accepts audio input from two separate audio sources. See Figure

16 for details.

External Paging Port

Pin No.

3 & 4

1 & 6

2 & 5

Signal

Paging

Music 2

Music 2

External

Loudspeaker

Front View Of Jack

Page

Music 1

Music 2

3

4

1

2

5

6

Audio Input To

Paging Amplifier

Services

Board

SPKR Output

External Paging

Amplifier

Enable Input

(If Required)

PLUS061

Relay 1 Relay 2

Relay 3 Relay 4

Front View Of Jacks

1

2

3

4

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6

Common Audible Interface Relays

Relay

Jack

Pin

No.

Signal

J3

J4

1

3

4

5

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

6

No Contact

Relay 1

Relay 2

Relay 2

Relay 1

No Contact

No Contact

Relay 3

Relay 4

Relay 4

Relay 3

No Contact

Figure 16: Paging Equipment and Music Source Interface



4.4 Connecting A Power Failure Telephone

Each line board provides one standard 6-position modular jack that interfaces an industry-standard telephone for power failure operation to line 1 of that board (see Figure 17 for jack details).

PLUS065

Line Board

6

5

4

3

2

1

(Front View Of Jack)

Typical Industry Standard

Non-Electronic Telephone

Figure 17: Line Board Power Fail Telephone Connection



4.5 Connecting The Serial Data Ports

The CPU board provides two serial data ports dedicated for PC-based programming and the remote-maintenance modem. You can add as many as 16 additional non-dedicated serial data ports by adding the communications card onto either the services board, the auxiliary board, or either of the two interface boards. Each of these boards will accept up to two communications cards onto its lower two slots. The following chart shows the locations for all of the non-dedicated serial data ports (Figure 18 shows the pin-outs for serial data ports).

Serial Data Port Designation

Serial Data Ports 3–10

DXOPT–COM Location

Lower two slots on the services board

Serial Data Ports 11–18

Lower two slots of one of the following:

—The interface board in the upper expansion cabinet,

—The interface board in the lower expansion cabinet,

—The auxiliary board in the main cabinet.

In order to use all 16 non-dedicated serial data ports you must install four communications cards.

PLUS044

NOTES:

1.

Maximum distance between each ofthe two dedicated serial data ports and its external data equipment is 25 feet.

2. Some data devices require

CTS signal for proper operation. Route to device as needed.

Serial Modem Port

4

5

6

1

2

3

Maintenance Port

4

5

6

1

2

3

(Front View of Jacks)

Modular Jacks

Pin 1 = Request To Send

Pin 2 = Clear To Send

Pin 3 = Receive Data

Pin 4 = Transmit Data

Pin 5 = Signal Ground

Pin 6 = Frame Ground

Figure 18: Serial Data Port Connections



4.6 Connecting The Slave Equipment Requiring

Dry-Contact Relay Closure For Actuation

The other ports provide dry-contact relay closures that are under software control. Figure 19 illustrates the relay jack details.

Wire to

Common

Audible

Interface

Relay

(Wiring shown for low current application - see caution text)

24V @ 1A Max.

48V @ .5A Max.

Signalling

Device

Power

Source for

Signalling

Device

AC or DC

Input as

Required

(Wiring shown with slave relay connection for high current application - see caution text)

Wire to

Common

Audible

Interface

Relay

24V @ 1A Max.

48V @ .5A Max.

Voltage Clamping Diode

Recommended

Power

Source for

Slave

Relay

AC or DC

Input as

Required

Slave

Relay

Signalling

Device

Power

Source for

Signalling

Device

CAJS007

AC or DC

Input as

Required

Relay 1 Relay 2

Front View Of Jacks

3

4

1

2

5

6

Relay 3 Relay 4

Services

Board

PLUS063

3

4

1

2

5

6


Relay

Jack

Pin

No.

Signal

J3

J4

1

4

5

6

6

1

2

3

4

5

2

3

No Contact

Relay 1

Relay 2

Relay 2

Relay 1

No Contact

No Contact

Relay 3

Relay 4

Relay 4

Relay 3

No Contact

Figure 19 Slave Equipment Connections



5

Knowing The Specifications

System Capacity (Maximums):

Attendant Consoles:

Telephone Attendant

Personal Computer Attendant

(Total Control)

4

Unlimited

Conferencing: (Simultaneous - without conference circuit board)

32 total conferencing circuits

Each conference party uses 2 circuits

Each SOHVA or Service Observe uses 3 circuits

Maximum of two 7-way conference (14 circuits)

Each conference circuit board adds 5 three-way conferences

DSS/BLF Consoles:

Assigned To Each Station

Intercom:

Conversations (Simultaneous)

Paths

Stations Assigned To Same Group

Intercom Number

Simultaneous Rings On Same Group

Intercom Number

Lines:

Line Groups (With unlimited members):

Paging:

External Paging Ports

Internal/External Paging Zones or All Call

Station Capacity Per Zone

Park Orbits:

Power Fail Circuits:

Ringing Capacities (Simultaneous):

Proprietary Telephones

Single-line IST

4 (Each console uses a separate station port)

Non-blocking

Non-blocking

480

480

72 (main cabinet)

16

88 (expansion cabinet 1)

80 (expansion cabinet 2)

1 plus 4 relays

8

480

9

One per line board

480

32 per ring phase, max. of 96 per cabinet, total of 288

36 – Knowing The Specifications


Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce Groups:

Receive

Transmit

16

16

SMDA Call Storage Capacity: with 2 megabytes of memory with 4 megabytes of memory

Approximately 15,000 calls

Approximately 30,000 calls

Speed Dials:

System Speed Dial

Station Speed Dial Numbers Per Set

Station Speed Dial Sets Per Station

Speed Dial Sets Per System

500 maximum

10

1 at default , 1 minimum, 10 maximum

960

Stations:

Station Class Of Service:

Toll Restriction Table Entries:

Traffic Capacities:

Power Requirements:

Domestic AC Power Supply

144 (main cabinet) 176 (upper expansion cabinet)

160 (lower expansion cabinet)

32

400

36 CCS (1 Erlang), non-blocking

International Power Supply

87 - 130 VAC Single phase -all models

6A maximum AC current

600W

700VA

87 - 130 VAC at 50/60 Hz, externally switchable,

187 - 264 VAC at 50/60 Hz


600W

700VA

(Approved to IEC 950 International Safety Standards)

Battery Back-up Reserve Powers:

1 Hour minimum for fully loaded system (main cabinet plus two expansion cabinets)

Domestic Battery Charger Input voltage: 87–130 VAC single phase


200W

320VA

Switchable Battery Charger Input voltage: 87–130 VAC 50/60 Hz, or

187–264 VAC 50/60 Hz externally—switchable

3A Maximum AC current

200W

256VA

Knowing The Specifications – 37


Dimensions (approximate):

Main Cabinet:

Width (inches)

Height(inches)

Depth (inches)

Weight (approximate pounds)

23.75

24.75

12.0

42 ( with cabinet, board cage, and backplane)

72 (with power supply and circuit boards added)

Expansion Cabinet:

Width (inches)

Height (inches)

Depth (inches)

Weight (approximate pounds)

# 1 (Upper)

23.75

24.75

12.0

# 2 (Lower)

23.75

24.75

12.0

72 -inc. cab., board cage, backplane, power supply, and circuit boards

Station Cable Requirements:

Type

Maximum Length

Digital Telephone

Analog Multiline Telephone

Analog Single Line Proprietary

Telephone

IST Telephone

#24 AWG minimum

2-wire (1-pair) twisted, non-shielded for IST

2-wire (1-pair) twisted, non-shielded for proprietary digital telephones

4-wire (2-pair) twisted, non-shielded for proprietary analog telephones

6-wire (3-pair) twisted, non-shielded for proprietary analog telephones with SOHVA.

With 20 AWG With 22 AWG With 24 AWG

2500 feet

2500 feet

2000 feet

2000 feet

1500 feet

1500 feet

4000 feet

4000 feet

3500 feet

3500 feet

3000 feet

3000 feet

Switching Principle Digital, pulse code modulated/time division multiplexed

(PCM-TDM)

Provides non-blocking switching with stored program control

Operating Environment:

Temperature 32-122 degrees F (0-50 degrees C)

Humidity 90 percent relative, non-condensing

Heat Dissipation (Fully loaded main cabinet) 1474 BTUs per hour

Heat Dissipation (Fully loaded exp. cabinet) 1474 BTUs per hour



Terminations:

Station:

Line:

Serial Data Ports:

CPU Board

Com Card on Services Board

Com Card on Auxiliary Board, or

Upper or Lower Interface Board

Format

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Baud Rate

Handshaking

Cable Length (serial data ports)

Music Interfaces (Two Inputs):

Input Level

Input Impedance

Connector

PA Port:

Output Level

Output Impedance

Connector

Central Office Limits:

Loop Limits

Cable Insulation Leakage

Industry/Regulatory Standards:

GCA40–130

Standard 50-pin male connectors for connection to external distribution field.

Standard, 6-conductor mini-jack (USOC 14C)

1 at 9600 bps, 1 at 2400 bps

4 at maximum of 19,200 bps

4 at maximum of 9600 bps

Serial, pseudo RS-232C

None, Even, Odd (Programmable)

7 or 8 (programmable)

1 or 2 (programmable)

Programmable in class of service

X on - X off

Hardware—CTS and RTS, None

25 feet for dedicated serial ports on CPU board

50 feet com card on services board at 19,200 baud

500 feet com. card on auxiliary or interface boards at 9600 baud

3 Volts peak-to-peak maximum

Approximately 500 Ohms

Modular jack

400 Millivolts peak-to-peak (typical speech)

Approximately 500 Ohms

Modular jack

1900 Ohms maximum loop

15,000 Ohms minimum

FCC Certified, Part 15 (Class A)

FCC registered (fully protected)

LISTED by OSHA-accredited, nationally recognized, test laboratory

EIA RS478

Bell publication 02 guidance

Hearing aid compatible handset


GCA40–130

Memory Retention After Power Loss:


65 hours typical - without battery back up

FCC Registration Number:

Key System

Hybrid System

Ringer Equivalence Number:

CVWUSA-65214-KF-E

CVWUSA-65213-MF-E

0.4B

Product Codes:

Main Cabinet

Expansion Cabinet

Power Supply

Power Supply (switchable)

Interface Board (main)

Interface Board (expansion) upper cabinet lower cabinet

Services Board

Central Processor Unit Board

Auxiliary Board

Conference Boards

DID Board

E1 Board (international applications)

T1 Board (domestic U.S.A. applications)

Total Control PC Attendant

Multipurpose Line Board

Communications Card

Digital Station Board

Analog Station Board

Industry Standard Station Board

Line Board

Software Card (Flash Memory)

Ring Generator For IST

DTMF Receiver Card

External Battery Assembly

External Battery Assembly (switchable)

PC Attendant Position

DXCBM–PLS

DXCBX–PLS

DXPSM–PLS

DXPSM–PLSSPS

DXINT–PLSMI

DXINT–PLSX2

DXINT–PLSX3

DXSRV–PLS

DXCPU–PLS

DXAUX

DXCNF

DXPCO–DD8,–DD4

DXPE1–PLSxxx

DXPT1

DXPTC–PLS

DXPCO–GD4,– GD8

DXOPT–COM

DXDST–8

DXDST–16

DXAST– 8

DXAST–16

DXIST–8

DXIST–16

DXPCO–LP4

DXPCO–LP8

DXPSW–PLS2

DXPSW–PLS4

DXRNG–PLS

DXOPT–TON

BBPLS

BBPLS–SPS

DXPTC–PLS



Product Codes–continued

Main Package

(includes main cabinet, power supply, CPU board, services board, and modem)

Upper Expansion Package

(includes upper cabinet, main interface board, upper interface board, and power supply)

Lower Expansion Package

(includes lower cabinet, lower interface board, and power supply)

Ringing Cadences:

Digital Intercom Ring

Digital Trunk Ring

Digital Recall Ring

Digital Camp–on Recall Ring

Analog Intercom Ring

Analog Trunk Ring

Analog Recall Ring

Analog Camp–on Recall Ring

GCA40–130

Domestic:

Switchable:

DXBKM–PLS

DXBKM–PLSS

Domestic:

Switchable:

DXBKX–PLSX2

DXBKX–PLSSX2

Domestic:

Switchable:

DXBKX–PLSX3

DXBKX–PLSSX3

150 msec. on, 75 msec. off, 4 sec. between rings

450 msec. on, 75 msec. off, 4 sec. between rings

275 msec.—300msec. on, 4 sec. between rings

150 msec. on, 75 msec. off

300 msec. on, 150 msec. off, 3.5 sec. between rings

900 msec. on, 125 msec off, 3.5 sec. between rings

500 msec. on, 3.5 sec. between rings

300 msec. on, 150 msec off



5.1 FCC Rules And Regulations

This electronic key system complies with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules, Part 68.

The FCC registration label on the DXP Plus contains the FCC registration number, the ringer equivalence number, the model number, and the serial number or production date of the system.

Notification To Telephone Company

Unless a telephone operating company provides and installs the system, the telephone operating company which provides the lines must be notified before a connection is made to them. The lines

(telephone numbers) involved, the FCC registration number, and the ringer equivalence number must be provided to the telephone company. The FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number of this equipment are provided on the label attached to the common equipment. The user/installer is required to notify the telephone company when final disconnection of this equipment from the telephone company line occurs.

Compatibility With Telephone Network

When necessary, the telephone operating company provides information on the maximum number of telephones or ringers that can be connected to one line, as well as any other applicable technical information. The telephone operating company can temporarily discontinue service and make changes which could affect the operation of this equipment. They must, however, provide adequate notice, in writing, of any future equipment changes that would make the system incompatible.

Installation Requirements

Connection of the electronic key system to the telephone lines must be through a universal service order code (USOC) outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating company. If the installation site does not have the proper outlet, ask the telephone company business office to install one. The correct outlet jack for this system is either a type RJ21X or type RJ14C.

Party Lines And Coin Lines

Local telephone company regulations may not permit connections to party lines and coin lines by anyone except the telephone operating company.

Troubleshooting

If a service problem occurs, first try to determine if the trouble is in the on-site system or in the telephone company equipment. Disconnect all equipment not owned by the telephone company.

If this corrects the problem, the faulty equipment must not be reconnected to the telephone line until the problem has been corrected. Any trouble that causes improper operation of the telephone network may require the telephone company to discontinue service to the trouble site after they notify the user of the reason.



Repair Authorization

FCC regulations do not permit repair of customer owned equipment by anyone except the manufacturer, their authorized agent, or others who might be authorized by the FCC. However, routine repairs can be made according to the maintenance instructions in this publication, provided that all FCC restrictions are obeyed.

Radio Frequency Interference

The electronic key system contains incidental radio frequency generating circuitry and, if not installed and used properly, may cause interference to radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part

15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception; in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient the television or radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the DXP Plus, the individual telephone stations, and the radio or TV with respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: “How to

Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems.” This booklet is available from the Government

Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.

This digital apparatus does not exceed the (Class A) limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

Le pre’sent appareil nume’rique n’emet pes de bruits radioe’lectriques de’passant les limites applicables aux appareils nume’riques (de la class A) prescrites dans le Re’glement sur le brouillage radioe’lectrique e’dicte’ par le ministe’re des Communications du Canada.

Ringer Equivalence Number

The REN of each line is 0.4B. The FCC requires the installer to determine the total REN for each line, and record it at the equipment..



6

Understanding The Features

6.1 DXP Plus Features List

This list details all of the features available on the DXP Plus. Use it as a pre-installation check list.

Abandoned Hold Release

Adjunct Feature Module

Access Denied

Account Code Button

Account Codes With Positive

Verification

All Call Paging

Allow Ringer Off (Ringer Volume Off)

Alpha-Numeric Calling Party and Line

Display

Alternate Attendant

Answer Button

Area Paging Interface

Attendant Position

Attendant Position, PC

Authorization Code

Automatic Dialing

Automatic Hold - Intercom To

Intercom/Line

Automatic Hold - Line To Intercom

Automatic Hold - Line To Line

Automatic Pause Insertion

Automatic Privacy

Automatic Number Identification (ANI)

Automatic Redial

Automatic Reports

Automatic Route Selection

Automatic Station Relocation

Auxiliary Equipment Interface

Auxiliary Station Ringer Interface

Background Music*

Battery Backup (Chassis, Cable, and

Batteries)

Battery Backup Interface

Block Programming

Busy Button Inquiry

Busy On SOHVA

Button Query

Call Announce Beeps

Call Announce With Handsfree

Answer-back

Call Costing and SMDA Reports

Call Forward - All Or Personal

Call Forward- Immediate

Call Forward - Busy Or RNA, All Or

Personal

Call Forward Outside System

Call Park

Call Park Recall

Call Pick-Up - Directed

Call Pick-Up - Group

Call Pick-Up - System

Call Transfer - Screened

Call Transfer - Unscreened

With Automatic Camp On

Call Waiting Tone

Caller ID

Caller ID–RNA

Camp-On With Automatic Call Back

Camp-On - Call Waiting

Camp-On - No Answer

Clear Major Alarm Ring

Central Message Desk

Central Processor Switched Data Port

Configuration

Centrex Compatible

Common Audible Ringer Interface

Conferencing - Multiline

Conference Advisory Tone

Console Support

Console-Less Operation

Communications Card Support

Consultation Hold

Copy Model

Data Base Program Storage Via PC

Interface

Data Base Programming From Main

Station (Limited)

Data Base Programming With Personal

Computer And Visual Man Machine

Interface (VMMI) Software

Day One and Day Two Ringing

Default Busy/RNA Call Forward

Default Functional Programming

Delayed Ringing

Dial 0 for System Attendant

Dial Plus Interdigit Time

Digital Voice Announce

Dialed Number Identification Service

(DNIS)

Digital Wireless Telephone Support

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Line Access by Station

Direct Line Group Selection

Directed Station Hold

Disconnect Supervision

Discriminating Ringing

Do Not Disturb

Do Not Disturb Inhibit

Do Not Disturb Override

DSS Status Button

Dynamic Save Button

E1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option

E&M tie Line support

End to End DTMF Signalling

End to End Signalling on Intercom

End to End Signalling on Lines

Enhanced LCD Display

Exclusive Hold

Executive Override

Executive Override Advisory Tone

Executive Override Block

Extended DTMF Tones

Understanding The Features – 45


Existing Comdial Telephone Support

ExecuMail Integration

External Paging Interface

Feature Inhibit

Feature Renumbering

Flexible Ringing Assignment

Flexible Ringing Assignment Of The External

Paging Port

Flexible Station Numbering Plan

Ground Start Lines

Group Intercoms

Handsfree Answer Inhibit

Handset Volume Control

Headset Capability

Hold

Hold, Exclusive

Hold Queuing

Hold Time Reporting

Hot Transfer

I Hold and I Use Indications

Idle Line Preference

Idle Line Priority

Industry Standard Telephone Support

IST Hold Confirmation

IST Offhook Treated As Busy

IST Message Wait Retrieval Access Code

IST Ring Frequency

IST Ring Patterns

Interactive Button Support

Intercom Call Progress Tones

Intercom Hunt List

Intercom Interdigit Dialing Time-out

Intercom Time-out

Intercom Number

Key/Hybrid Configuration

Last Number Redial

Line Access Restriction

Line Answer From Any Station

Line Appearance, Enhanced

Line Groups

Line Group Access

Line Names

Line Out Softkey Option

Line Queuing

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Messaging

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Support

Location Code

Lock Button

Manual Exclusion

Manual Reset

Mark Problem Line

Master Clear

Maximum Call Duration

Meet-Me Answer Page

Memory Retention Without Batteries

Message Deposit

Message Waiting

Mnemonic Programming

Modem Support

Modify Digits Table

Multiple Attendant Positions


Music Interface*

Music On Hold*

Mute

Names (Stations And Lines)

Night Service Automatic Switching

Night Transfer (Of Ringing)

Off-Premise Extension (OPX)

On-Hook Dialing

Operator Station

Originating Denied

Out Dial Delay Time

Password Protection

Pause Time

PBX/Centrex/Central Office Compatible

Personal Intercom Number

Paging Access

Periodic Line Tone

Personal Intercom Number Preference

Personalized Ringing Tone

Pooled Line Access

Power Failure Transfer

Preselection Prime Line

Printer Interface

Privacy

Privacy Release

Private Lines

Program Printout

Programmable Button Flexibility

Programming Port

Pulse/Tone Switchable

Quick Transfer

Remote Programming and Diagnostics

Remote Station Disable

Release Button

Reminder Alert

Restrict ARS Hookflash (Automatic Route

Selection, Hookflash Restriction)

Restricted Dial Error Tone

Response Messaging

Ring Back On Busy

* The system is equipped with two inputs for separate customer-supplied music sources.

Ring Back On Transfer

Ring Back Tone

Ring No Answer Call Forward

Ring On Busy

Ringing Line Preference

Secure Account Code Display

Save Button Dial Storage

Saved Number Redial

Self Diagnostics

Serial Data Port

Service Observing

Shift Button

Silent Mode Button

Single-Line Proprietary Telephone Support

SMDA Reports

SOHVA Beeps (SOHVA Tone Bursts)

Speakerphone Support

Split Button

Square/Non-Square Configuration

Station Hunting

Station Class Of Service

Station Message Detail Accounting (SMDA)

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Station Monitoring with DSS Call Pickup

Station Names

Station Speed Dial

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce Groups

Subdued Ringing

Synchronized Ringing

System Clock

System Speed Dial

System Status Reports

T1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option

Tap (Flash)/Recall

Telephony Services Application Programming

Interface (TSAPI) Support

Through Dialing

Tie Lines

Time And Date

Timed And Immediate Recall

Toll Restriction

Toll Restriction Pause Entries

Tone or Voice Signalling on Internal Calls

Transfer/Conference Button

Transfer Ring Cadence

Unsupervised Conference

Voice Announce Blocking

Voice Mail Integration Digits

Zone Paging

46 – Understanding The Features


6.2 Defining The Features

The following section defines all of the DXP Plus features. Read through all of these definitions before programming the DXP Plus to ensure that you are programming the desired feature.

A

Abandoned Hold Release

If a distant on-hold party hangs up, it may cause an interruption in the line current. The DXP Plus system then drops the line from the hold condition and returns it to service. You can program the time interval between hang-up and line-drop with choices of either 50 milliseconds or 350 milliseconds. The central office makes the arrangement for the time choice. Also refer to the discussion titled, Disconnect

Supervision.

Access Denied

If you have programmed the system to do so, it can deny access to particular lines and group intercoms at certain telephones. A user cannot select a line for use if it is access denied at his or her telephone.

Account Code Button

As part of the button mapping, the system installer can assign a special button that the user may use to apply an account code to a call. Refer to the discussion titled Account Codes With Positive Verification.

Account Codes With Positive Verification

Station users can assign account codes to specific calls. The system uses the account codes to identify calls by category, or special grouping, for call accounting purposes. All calls with the same account code are reported together by the station message detail accounting (SMDA) feature. The system attendant can obtain a separate printout of calls assigned to one account without causing any other calls to print or be deleted. The programmer can arrange for the system to verify that the user entered an account code and to sound an error tone if an invalid account code is entered. If the programmer arranges it, attendants can use account codes as a basis for SMDA print-outs. He or she may program the system to prompt station users to enter account codes for incoming calls and/or out-going calls if desired. The prompt can be with or without system verification of the entry. Alternately, account code prompting can be turned off completely. Depending upon the type of call, different users are associated with the call accounting record. The following list explains to whom the call record is associated:

• On out-going calls, the user who enters the account code

•

On transferred calls, the transferee

•

On incoming calls, the last user active on a call.

Account codes may be from three to 16 digits in length as set by class of service programming. The system will verify all digits. Also refer to the discussion titled Account Codes With Positive

Verification—forced.



Account Codes With Positive Verification—Forced

Station users can assign account codes to specific calls. The system uses the account codes to identify calls by category, or special grouping, for call accounting purposes. If the programmer programs the system to have forced account codes, the user must enter the account code before the call can be placed.

If the system does not find a match between a user entered account code and one that the programmer has set in the system, the call will not be allowed. Remember, verification alone does not deny users’ calls, only forced verification denies. The programmer can arrange for the system to verify that the user entered an account code and to sound an error tone if an invalid account code is entered. If the programmer arranges it, attendants can use account codes as a basis for SMDA print-outs. He or she may program the system to prompt station users to enter account codes for incoming calls and/or out-going calls if desired.

You can program the system to recognize emergency numbers that do not require account codes.

Account Code Display And Display Time

For LCD speakerphone users, a message appears in the telephone’s display prompting the user to enter an account code for incoming or outgoing calls. If the user does not require this prompt, the programmer should turn off the prompting message display.

Adjunct Feature Module Support

When the installer includes a 16-button adjunct feature module with certain model Comdial proprietary telephones, that module extends the programmable buttons of the telephone by 16 buttons and status lights. The users can program these buttons for speed dialing and direct station selection (DSS) with busy lamp field (BLF) status lights.

All-Call Paging

Refer to the discussion titled Zone Paging.

Allow Ringer Off (Ringer Volume Off)

On some proprietary telephones, the user selects the ringer volume level by pressing a rocker-type volume control repeatedly to select one of four different volume levels. The lowest volume setting is essentially an off condition as the telephone sounds only one low-volume ring burst when a call rings the station.

Sometimes users would rather not receive even one ring burst. For these cases, installers can program the system so that it completely silences the ringer at a telephone when its user selects the lowest volume setting.

Alpha-Numeric Calling Party And Line Display

An LCD speakerphone, when receiving an inside call, displays the caller’s name (up to seven characters), for example, “John L”. The system uses the remaining nine characters on the display for status messages

(for example, “Fwd from”). The system also displays the logical line number of the current line. Also see the discussion titled Liquid Crystal Display Support.

Alternate Attendant

Refer to the discussion titled Attendant Position.



Answer Button

When you map a telephone with this button, the user can press it to answer the call that is audibly ringing at his or her station. It is possible for more than one call to be ringing at the same time; however, only one of the first ringing calls is answered with the answer button.

Also refer to the discussion titled Programmable Button Flexibility.

Area Paging Interface

Refer to the discussion titled External Paging Interface.

Attendant Position

The attendant of a telephone system is typically the first person to answer an incoming call and usually directs incoming calls to the proper person or department within the system. In addition to call control, the attendant controls system-wide operating features such as night transfer (of ringing) and the system clock. Additionally the attendant is responsible for programming such items as system speed dial numbers and LCD messages that are available to many of the system users.

The DXP Plus provides two attendant positions at default (stations 1 and 2, intercom 101 and 102); however, the programmer can assign any or all stations (up to 480 total) as attendant stations if they wish.

The attendant can also assign up to four DSS/BLF consoles to each attendant position where needed. In addition to the many programmer–enabled feature buttons that the system can make available at any station, the DXP Plus provides the attendant position with several special purpose programmer-enabled feature buttons to enhance call processing. These special purpose buttons are described below.

Alternate Button

When an attendant presses this button, all calls that are normally routed to his or her telephone now route to an alternate attendant’s telephone instead.

Both Button

The “both” button provides a means for attendants to conference between themselves, a current call, and the last call that they placed on hold.

Overflow Button

When an attendant presses this button, calls that normally ring at his or her telephone also ring at an overflow attendant’s telephone as well.

Queue Button

When multiple calls are ringing at an attendant station or are on hold there, the system places them in a queue. The attendant can use this button to determine how many calls are queued and awaiting service.

Serial Call Button

When a caller wishes to speak to more than one person or department, the attendant uses this button to place the caller in a serial mode of multiple transfers to every desired party. In the serial mode, the system automatically transfers the caller to another party as soon as a present party hangs up (up to three stations can be part of a serial transfer). The system places the caller in the serial mode as soon as the attendant hangs up.

Test/Busy Button

This button provides the attendant a means to test the status of specific lines. Attendants can use this button to determine whether individual lines are idle, busy, on hold, or out of service.

Also refer to the discussions titled Answer Button, Lock Button, Release Button, Split Button, and Silent

Mode Button and to the discussion titled Programmable Button Flexibility.



Attendant Position, PC

The Total Control PC attendant position is a computerized attendant operating station that consists of an

IBM-compatible personal computer, a proprietary interface circuit board (factory-installed in one of the computer’s expansion slots), a customized keyboard that includes a handset cradle, a telephone handset, a program diskette, and all necessary cables for connecting the equipment to the DXP Plus. The DXP Plus can handle a maximum of four PC Attendants.

Among the many features that are available to the PC attendant is a feature that allows him or her to change the class of service of an individual station. This feature allows an attendant to control the calling parameters of a station (such as how much or little toll restriction to allow) at any time.

The installer can program function keys F1–F12 on the PC attendant keyboard with features that are in addition to the fixed features that these keys provide. To access the additional features, the attendant must press and hold the CONTROL key while pressing the desired function key on the keyboard.

Authorization Code

Authorization codes have a “walking class of service” option. Walking class of service provides system users the mobility to use their class of service (COS) features, prime line assignments, and exception numbers on any telephone in the system instead of being limited by what is available to the particular telephone they happen to be using. Authorization codes are associated with personal intercom numbers as is COS, prime markings, and exception numbers. Therefore, when a user enters his or her authorization code at any system telephone, the code alerts the system as to what features to make available to the user.

The user can use the telephone for anything allowed by his or her personal intercom number; however, a user cannot disturb the last number redial stored there by the normal user. Once a user accesses his or her telephone features, those features remain in effect until any idle time exceeds the authorization code time-out period. A telephone user activates walking class of service by pressing ITCM and then dialing

#08 followed by an authorization code. Also refer to the discussion titled Lock Button.

Automatic Dialing

Refer to the discussion titled Station Speed Dial.

Automatic Hold—Intercom To Intercom/Line

If a user selects a second intercom number during the time that he or she is already active on the first intercom number, this feature causes the first intercom number call to be automatically placed on hold.

This feature allows a user to move from intercom call to intercom call without having to press the HOLD button to place any current calls on hold. The programmer must enable this feature for it to be available.

Automatic Hold—Line To Intercom

If a telephone user selects an intercom number while a line call is active, this feature causes the system to automatically place the line call on hold . This is a fixed system feature and is always available.

Automatic Hold—Line To Line

If a user selects a second line during the time that he or she is already active on a line, this feature causes the system to automatically place the first line call on hold. The feature allows a user to move from line call to line call without pressing the HOLD button. The programmer must enable this feature for it to be available.



Automatic Number Identification (ANI)

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) is a T1 service feature for both E&M and DID lines. Long distance common carriers offer ANI as a feature to dial 800 and dial 900 lines. The ANI feature provides information to an internal telephone system that identifies the telephone number of the calling party.

Businesses served by a dial 800 or dial 900 service allow any available user to answer the calls and have their internal telephone system process the ANI information to identify the caller’s telephone number.

The common carrier supplies ANI information as DTMF digits. When the ANI feature is combined with the Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) feature, the common carrier also delimits the DNIS information from the ANI information with an asterisk (✻) tone so that the DXP Plus can process each portion properly.

Automatic Pause Insertion

When the system stores a dialed number for later redial, it automatically stores a pause whenever the user waits between digits for at least two seconds while dialing the number. The system inserts the automatic pause in the stored number sequence at the point where the manual pause in dialing occurred. The actual time length of the inserted pause is programmable.

Automatic Privacy

The programmer can make a line private or non-private. In the private mode, a station has exclusive use of the line during a call. No other station can access that line unless the original user includes it through the use of the add-on conference feature. In the non-private mode, any stations with that line appearance can gain access at the same time (sometimes known as common line pickup). Users may add up to five parties into one conversation. Also see the discussions titled: Conferencing —Multiline and Privacy

Release.

Automatic Redial

With this feature, the system automatically redials a busy or unanswered outside call. Once the user activates automatic redial, the station selects the line, automatically dials the number, and waits for a response. (It dials and then waits 30 seconds for an answer.) If the called station does not answer, the redialing station disconnects, waits one minute, and then repeats the sequence. The station will repeat this procedure for approximately 10 minutes. The feature cycle is timed and does not have busy and ring-no-answer detection circuitry. Because of this, if the redialing user is operating handsfree when the called party answers, he or she must take the handset off-hook to prevent being cut off by the timing cycle. The station users must program an Auto Redial button at one of the designated programmable button locations on their telephones before they can use it.

Automatic Reports

This feature makes the system automatically generate selected station message detail accounting and call costing reports for printing on a daily or weekly basis. The programmer sets the time that the report is to be printed, sets the type of report to be printed, and dictates whether the call records are to be erased from the system memory after they have been printed.



Automatic Route Selection

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) allows the system to automatically select the least costly line group available to a station to route a call. The system modifies the dialed number, if needed, to match the selected line group. Additionally, ARS provides the costing information for the dialed call that is reported by the station message detail accounting feature. ARS makes routing decisions (which lines to route a call over, if and how to modify a number, and costing information) based entirely upon the programming of the system.

When the ARS feature is active, the user selects ARS by dialing 9. Because direct line selection by the user bypasses the ARS route selection feature, the programmer normally does not give stations direct line appearance when ARS is part of the system operation.

The ARS feature can operate with the toll restriction feature or independently from it; however, both features use the same entry table for programming. The programmer enables or disables automatic route selection on a system-wide basis. A defaulted system has ARS disabled.

The programmer must program a number and the proper routing information before the system can perform ARS on that number when it is dialed. The programmer generally arranges routing from the least costly routing method to the most costly routing method. The cost of the route is determined by the line group over which the call is routed.

If a station does not have access, because of programmed restrictions, to a route that the ARS selects for it, the system denies the dialing and causes an error tone to sound at the station. If the station does have access, ARS routes calls from that station based on the routing information. If the call can not be made on the line group first selected by the routing, ARS will try the next route. Once again the route access is tested. This process is repeated, up to a maximum of six times. Each route is programmed from least to most costly. The more costly the route, the higher the access level needed to access it and the greater the chance that the station will be denied access. If ARS selects a more costly route because the least costly one is busy, a station user receives a warning tone when a call is attempted. Since this tone indicates that a more expensive line group was chosen by the system, the station user should hang up and try again later.

This warning tone feature is enabled through programming.

Before automatic route selection can operate efficiently in a cost saving manner, the programmer must group similar lines together into line groups.

Each route in every route table contains costing information. The costing information includes two programmable tiers of costing and a programmable surcharge amount. Even if a call is not routed through

ARS, (if the station user selects the line), the system still accesses this costing information to cost the call.

The programmer can arrange the automatic route selection feature so that it modifies the dialed number by adding or deleting digits until the number better fits the dialing needs of the selected route. Doing this results in situations such as the following example:

Assume a station user dials 12025551212 (Washington D.C. area), and further assume that the system has an FX line to the Washington D.C. area and ARS will route the call over it. ARS will delete the 1202 prefix and only dial 5551212 because the FX line does not require the prefix numbers to complete the call. Field maximum: 20 digits.

You can program the system for any one of three different dial tones that you will hear whenever you enter the ARS access code. The ARS dial tone choices are:

— Dial Tone 1 - steady intercom dial tone (dual tones of 480 Hz + 620 Hz),

— Dial Tone 2 - same as dial tone 1 only preceded by three short tones (200 ms on, 200 ms off),

— Dial Tone 3 - steady simulated central office ring back tone (dual tones of 440 Hz + 480 Hz).



Restrict ARS Hookflash (Automatic Route Selection, Hookflash Restriction)

This feature enhances ARS response to hookflash action on an outside line when that action is followed by dialed digits. With the feature enabled, the system delays response to a hookswitch flash until after the

ARS feature verifies as valid all subsequent dialed digits. With the feature disabled, the system sends the hookflash over the line without waiting for the ARS feature to verify the validity of subsequent dialed digits. This station class of service feature is applicable only when the ARS feature is active.

Automatic Route Selection For Speed Dials

The programmer can arrange for the system to route the system speed dial and any personal speed dial numbers that the user has programmed through the system’s automatic route selection feature (ARS).

Automatic Station Relocation

The system will automatically recognize a particular station should someone relocate it to a different station port. After being installed at a new port location, a relocated station will provide the same class of service parameters and station features that it provided at its original port location. Also, the relocated station will respond to the same personal intercom number that it responded to at its original port location.

A relocated station prompts the user to take action to either accept its original programming or accept the programming at the new port. If the user takes no action, the station assumes the parameters and personal intercom number that is determined by a system programming procedure. Consider these following points when you enable station relocation:

•

If someone does a station relocation, the programmer must save the database programming to make the relocation permanent.

•

•

•

This relocation feature only applies to digital telephones.

Users must ensure that the vacated port remains unused until they complete a relocation.

If someone connects a telephone to the vacated port before users complete a relocation, the relocated telephone will not retain its original programming.

•

When the user accept the original programming for the new port, the vacated port assumes the programming currently assigned to the new port (that is, a parameter exchange takes place between the vacated port and the new port).

• If a DSS/BLF console was assigned to the telephone at its original location, the console assignment follows the telephone to the new location even though the console is no longer located physically near the telephone. If the user relocates the console, the system programmer must reprogram the new port for console use.

The relocation feature also applies to relocated digital telephone boards, however, the installer must ensure that the vacated port remains unused until the relocation is complete. All stations connected to the relocated circuit board show the relocation prompt.

Auxiliary Equipment Interface (Busy Lead Detection)

One line port on every loop start line board will detect current flow on the line ahead of the common equipment. When an external device, such as a modem or fax, is connected to this line and is activated, current flow over the line occurs. When the port detects the current flow, the system causes a busy indication for this line to appear at every system telephone that has its appearance. Normally, the user cannot interrupt an external device by pressing the line button or by dialing a line group code; however, if the line is programmed to be non-private, a user can interrupt the device.



Auxiliary Station Ringer Interface

•

•

The central processor unit circuit board includes four dry-contact relay actuations. They may be used for the following:

• Programmable Station Ringer Interface

Paging Enable

Door Relay Lock/Unlock

• Zone Night Answer

The relay contacts for the station ringer interface follows the ring pattern of a ringing line or telephone.

These relay contacts close during ringing and open between rings and may be used to control an external signaling device. The relay contacts for the paging enable and door relay are closed while the activating station is off-hook and may be used to provide a path for an enabling signal where needed. Contacts on relay 1 is normally closed when idle and contacts on relays 2, 3, and 4 are normally open when idle.

Also refer to the discussions titled Common Audible Ringer Interface, External Paging Interface, Flexible

Ringing Assignments, Line Answer From Any Station, and Night Transfer (Of Ringing).

B

Background Music (Two Selections)

If the system includes an external music source, telephone users can turn background music on and off at their stations. The system uses two dedicated audio ports to interface the music sources, one for background music through the station speakers and the other for music on hold for both lines and intercom numbers. Therefore, the background music can be different from the music provided to held calls if the system installer connects two different sources to the system. When the two different choices are available, station users can dial a code to choose either source for their background music.

Also refer to the discussions titled Music Interface and Music On Hold.

Battery Back-Up (Chassis, Cable, and Batteries)

Battery back-up assemblies that include chassis, cable, and battery are available as optional kits (through normal distribution from Comdial). The battery back-up assembly connects directly to the battery interface connector on the system main power supply.

Battery Backup Interface

Attach a Comdial-provided optional battery backup kit to the DXP Plus digital communications system for full un-interruptable system power in case of an AC power loss. The switching and trickle charge circuitry are in the common equipment power supply assembly, but batteries, chassis, and cable are packaged as a separate option. When the installer plugs the system into an active AC power source, the common equipment power supply will constantly charge the attached batteries with a trickle current.

Built-in circuitry automatically switches to battery power when AC power is lost. With batteries at full charge, a fully loaded system (without expansion cabinets) will remain fully functional for a minimum of one hour without AC power.

If additional time is required, the backup time can be increased by adding additional batteries.



Block Programming

A programmer can assign the programmed features of a particular line or station, to other lines or stations.

He or she can also assign a particular arrangement of button functions (mapped buttons) of one telephone to a quantity of other telephones. This feature eliminates the need to individually program every station class of service, line and/or button function.

Busy Button Inquiry

This feature provides the user with a means to identify both a station that is busy on a line and the line the station is busy on as well. The system presents the identified line or station information on the user’s telephone display for 10 seconds after he or she requests that information. If the system installer has not given the user’s telephone this feature, the system presents busy information to the display without identifying the line or station involved.

Button Mapping

Refer to the discussion titled, Full Button Programmability Of Features, Programmable Button

Flexibility, and Square / Non Square Configuration.

Button Query

The button query feature allows users to display the function of programmable buttons on LCD telephones.

C

Call Announce With Handsfree Answer-back

The internal speaker at each full–featured multiline telephone provides call-announce capability over the personal intercom number. Users can call announce between all telephone types except between an analog monitor telephone and digital telephones. When a user makes a call-announce intercom call to the personal intercom number of another telephone, the user of that telephone can make a handsfree response to the call. If the personal intercom number is forwarded or is in a hunt group, the intercom call will appear as a tone signaled intercom call at the telephone to which the calls are forwarded. A tone burst, programmable by the installer, precedes the call announce.

Call Announce Beeps (Call Announce Tone Bursts)

Installers can set the number of call announce tone bursts for each station in the system to be a value of from one to five .

Call Costing And Station Message Detail Accounting Reports

The system provides built-in, estimated costing of all calls. It also provides station message detail accounting (SMDA) reports of all calls, and it displays call costs on LCD speakerphones. Call costing, in general, provides a means of establishing costs to be applied to outside calls made from system telephones. Call costing computes charges for a call after it is completed but does not restrict dialing as toll restriction does. Call costs are based on a two-tier time rate and include a line surcharge cost. The programmer can make allowances for call set-up and minimum call duration using the answer time and dial time parameters. The system determines call costing through the use of the toll restriction and automatic route selection (ARS) features; however, these features need not be active for costing to work.

Call costing is based on programmed estimates that best fit the particular area of the country the system is installed in.



Caller ID

DXP Plus caller ID provides relevant caller information (caller’s name and number, for example) to any called LCD stations. The installer can program any C.O. line as a caller ID line. The caller ID information is also reflected in the SMDA printout. The DXP Plus Caller ID feature package requires the use of a CID08 unit—hardware designed to support the Bell 202 Caller ID signal transmitted by the central office. The CID08 supports up to 8 CO lines (you can install up to 8 CID08 units), for a total of

64 caller ID lines.

Caller ID RNA—Ring–No–Answer

If a station with assigned caller ID lines receives a call but does not answer, the system will automatically archive the caller ID information. The installer can program any station or group of stations to receive Caller ID RNA information. Upon reviewing a Caller ID RNA record, the user can automatically redial that number by pressing the SAVE button. When the caller ID information goes to more than one telephone, the system will also display the last station user that viewed that record, thus preventing multiple call backs. Caller ID RNA is a programmable feature.

Call Forward—All Or Personal

Station users can forward the calls that normally ring at their telephones to another telephone for answering. They can forward just their prime line and intercom calls or forward every call that rings at their station. If users forward calls while the attendant has enabled the night transfer of ringing mode, the night mode ringing assignments at their stations are forwarded. There are multiple levels of forwarding.

Station A can forward to station B, then station B can forward to station C, thus making calls to station A forward all the way to station C. For each internal call received while call forward is enabled, the forwarding telephone sounds a ring reminder (short tone burst) to remind the users that their calls are being forwarded.

The programmer can assign a call forward button to individual telephones. If a telephone has a call forward button available at a programmable button location that includes an associated light, the light turns on when the user presses the button.

If a telephone has an LCD display, it will show a call forward message along with the extension number or name of the station receiving the forwarded calls.

Also see the discussions titled Call Forward— Busy Or Ring No-Answer, Call Forward—Manual, and

Default Busy Ring No-Answer Call Forward.



Call Forward—Busy Or Ring No-Answer, All Or Personal

Station users can forward the calls that normally ring at their telephones to another telephone for answering. They can forward just their prime line and intercom calls or forward every call that rings at their telephone. Users can control whether the calls forward immediately or after a preprogrammed number of rings (this is true of busy calls as well, which ring in a subdued manner) that is set by the programmer. When the telephone is set to ring several times before forwarding, the user has a chance to end the current call before the incoming call is forwarded. Certain conditions must exist before this enhancement will allow the call to a busy station to subdue-ring before forwarding. The called station must have an idle intercom available and this intercom number must be part of the intercom hunt list that the programmer arranged for the station, or the call to a busy station will forward automatically. The number of group intercoms in a station’s intercom hunt list determines the number of calls that can subdue ring on a busy station. After the system reaches that maximum number, any additional calls immediately follow the station’s forwarding assignment.

When a busy station receives a call on a line for which it has an appearance, the call will forward immediately. If the station does not have a line appearance but does have an idle intercom in its hunt list, the call will subdue–ring at the idle intercom for the programmed number of rings before it forwards.

When a busy station receives an intercom call or a transferred call and it has an idle intercom in its hunt list, the call will subdue ring at the idle intercom for the programmed number of rings before it forwards.

The programmer must enable the call forwarding enhancement as a separate programming choice in addition to class of service programming. Once the feature is enabled, it will enhance both the default call forward scheme and the call forward scheme that the users set up for themselves.

Also see the discussions titled Call Forward - All Or Personal, and Default Busy Ring No-Answer Call

Forward.

Call Forward—Immediate

The installer can map a call forward button on the user’s telephone that will allow the user to forward calls even if he or she is not busy. After a user determines where to forward a call and activates the call forward button, the system will immediately forward the call once the line rings.



Call Forward Outside System

The Call Forward Outside System (CFOS) feature allows the system to forward incoming or transferred line calls to telephone numbers that are outside the system. The CFOS feature forwards calls over any available outbound lines or line groups and does not use any conference circuits. Since CFOS involves outbound calls, those calls are subject to all line access, toll restriction, and automatic route selection restrictions normally imposed on the users. Any calls that CFOS can not service (no outbound line available, toll restricted, and so forth), ring the system as normal calls.

Note also that CFOS will not forward calls associated with group intercoms and hunt groups. The CFOS feature is useful for after-hours forwarding of business calls to alternate sites such as a home or cellular telephone. To help system managers keep account of CFOS activity , the system marks CFOS calls with an F in the SMDA records printout.

Users activate or deactivate CFOS by dialing a feature code, pressing a preprogrammed button or pressing an interactive button on an LCD speakerphone. Once users activate CFOS, they select the outbound line or line group in any of the normal line selections methods available to them. They also designate the forward destination by dialing the number or pressing a speed dial button. (If users do not make a line and destination choice, the system uses the most recently used selections.) DISA callers can activate and deactivate CFOS remotely. When DISA callers activate

CFOS, they receive several quick tone bursts and the system awaits any program changes. When they deactivate

CFOS, the system returns dial tone. After they gain access to the system, they can dial the CFOS code, dial an outbound line or line group selection, and dial the destination number. Once a user activates CFOS, it remains active and neither system resets nor power outages will deactivate it. After activation, incoming or transferred calls to an idle CFOS-enabled station forward outside the system to the CFOS destination over the selected outbound line or line group. CFOS-forwarded calls are subject to the line-to-line disconnect timer action. If time-out occurs, the system alerts the system operator. He or she can join the call as a conference member.

Before CFOS can occur for calls on incoming lines, programmers must enable those lines for CFOS capability.

Before a CFOS-enabled station can forward a call outside the system, the system must be able to associate the call receiving line with the station.

•

Programmers can take action to associate a CFOS-enabled line with an individual CFOS-enabled station. With this arrangement, this station is the only one that can forward to an outside destination for a call received on that line.

•

At sites served by DID line blocks, programmers must enable those lines for CFOS capability but they do not associate the individual lines with specific CFOS-enabled stations. The system uses the DID translated station extension to check for the station’s CFOS forwarding ability.

•

When another station transfers a call to a CFOS-enabled station, the feature does not require a line association with the CFOS-enabled station for it to forward the transferred call outside the system. In this case, the system identifies the CFOS-enabled station before it makes the transfer.

In addition to the line programming action discussed previously, programmers enable CFOS system-wide with a system programming choice. They then enable the feature in both station class of service and individual station programming, and may map a CFOS button on the applicable telephones. When mapping the button, programmers can also select a destination number; however, any user selected destination number overrides this selection.

Comdial has taken reasonable steps in the design of all product features, including CFOS, which protect against unauthorized or fraudulent access to, or use of, a system, or which protect against unauthorized, fraudulent or unaccounted-for access to, or use of, long distance lines. However, no system is entirely invulnerable or immune from unauthorized or fraudulent access or use, or unaccounted-for access or use, and therefore Comdial disclaims any and all liability, and makes no warranty, express or implied, relating to unauthorized or fraudulent access or use, or unaccounted-for access or use.

NOTES: (1) CFOS will not work on loop start lines without disconnect supervision.

(2) Calls forwarded through CFOS may experience lower audio levels due to the normal line resistance of CO lines. Low audio level is usually only noticeable on long line loops. If signal loss is a problem at a particular site, the installer may need to add a line amplifier (repeater) in the lines.



Call Forward, Recall

If the site includes ExecuMail equipment and the programmer has arranged for the ExecuMail to provide release transfer, she or he should also arrange for the ExecuMail station to have this call forward, recall feature. Also see the discussion titled Call Forward - Busy or Ring No-Answer, All Or Personal.

Call Park

The system can hold nine calls in park zones (also referred to as orbits) where they are retrievable by all users in the system.

Those calls that users can park include intercom calls, outside calls, and conference calls. Users park calls in predefined zones and then retrieve them by dialing an intercom feature code or by pressing a preprogrammed call park button. Call park, when used with paging features, allows a user to direct calls to roving personnel by first parking a call in an orbit and then paging the personal to tell them which orbit holds the call. When a user retrieve a call from park orbit, the system places the call on the user selected intercom. If the station has several intercoms arranged in a hunt list, the system always chooses the intercom that the user selected.

Also see the discussion titled Call Park Recall.

Call Park Recall

If a call remains unanswered after the park recall time has ended, the system returns the call to the parking station where it rings. If that telephone includes an LCD display, a message appears on it that shows the park orbit number of the returning call as well as the line number.

The system programmer sets the call park recall times. Prior to software release 3A, he or she could choose a minimum time of one minute; however, beginning with software release 3A, the minimum call park recall time that the programmer can choose is 30 seconds.

Also refer to the paragraph titled Call Park.

Call Pick-Up Directed

A station user can dial a code and the intercom number of a ringing station to answer the call.

Call Pick-Up Group

If a call rings to any station in a preprogrammed pick-up group, and a second user in the group wishes to answer the call, the second user can dial the group pick up code to answer the call. Up to 16 different groups can exist with any number of stations in a group. The system provides group overlap by allowing stations to be in more than one group at the same time thus enabling them to pick up calls for stations in each group. The programmer places the stations in their logical answering groups.

Call Pick-Up System

If a call rings at any station in the system, certain other station users, such as the attendant station, can pick up that call. That station user must dial the appropriate pick up code to answer the call, and the station must be programmed to pick up the call. The programmer places all telephones in the same pick-up group to enable this feature.



Call Transfer—Screened

Screened call transfer allows users to first announce and then transfer both line and intercom calls from one station to another station or group in one of two ways. If both stations have access to the line or intercom number, the user makes a common line pickup transfer. If the other station does not have access to the incoming line, the user makes a transfer using the system transfer feature. The user uses the

TRANS/CONF button to effect the call transfer. Also refer to the discussion titled Call

Transfer—Unscreened with Automatic Camp-On, and Hot Transfer.

Call Transfer —Unscreened With Automatic Camp-On

Unscreened call transfer allows users to transfer both line and intercom calls from one station to another station or group without first announcing them. The unscreened transferred call appears at the other station where it will ring if that station is idle or automatically camp-on and await an answer if that station is busy. The call automatically rings back to the transferring station after a programmed recall period.

There is no limit as to how many calls that can be camped onto another station. A transferred call will ring if the called intercom number is idle. If the handset is off-hook, the ringing is subdued.

Call Waiting Tone

A user can send a call waiting tone to signal to a busy station that he or she wishes that station to contact them. They do this by dialing a special code when they encounter a busy signal. The call waiting tone sounds at the busy station and reoccurs until the calling party hangs up. The frequency of the call waiting tone is preprogrammed by the programmer.

Camp-On With Automatic Call Back

After calling another station and encountering a busy signal or a ring with no answer, a user can camp on to that station, hang up, and wait to be called back by the system when that station becomes idle or when the user returns. Likewise, a user can camp-on to a busy line, hang up, and wait to be called back when it becomes idle.

When the busy station becomes idle, the system rings the originating station and starts a timer. The user of the originating station must take it off hook as soon as it rings and as soon as he or she does so, the camped-on telephone rings.

When the user of the ring no-answer station uses it for any call activity, the system detects this activity as a sign that the user has returned. As soon as that call activity is finished, the system rings the station that originated the camp-on and starts a timer. The user of the originating station must take it off hook, and as soon as he or she does so, the camped-on telephone rings.

When the busy line becomes idle, the system rings the originating station and starts a timer. The user of the originating station must take it off hook before a preprogrammed time out occurs. As soon as he or she does so, the camped-on line returns dial tone to the originating station. If the originating user does not take his or her station off– hook before the time-out period elapses, the system cancels the camp-on.

If, for some reason, the system cannot ring the camped-on facility after the user takes the originating station off hook, he or she hears busy tone and may camp-on again.

Camp–On—Call Waiting

If a user makes a call to a busy telephone, he or she can send a call waiting tone to the busy telephone and wait on line for an answer. As soon as the called telephone returns to idle, it will ring with the camped on call.

Also refer to the discussion titled Call Waiting Tone.



Camp–On—No Answer

Refer to the discussion titled Camp–On With Automatic Call Back.

Clear Major Alarm Ring

Major alarm rings occur whenever a number of faults exceed a programmed threshold. You can use a telephone station to clear a major alarm ring by pressing the INTERCOM button and then dialing a feature code (default code is #09). However, the telephone station must have a class of service (COS) assigned to it that has this feature enabled. The installer or programmer enables this feature through COS programming.

Central Message Desk

The programmer can designate one station as the central message desk and arrange for it to have exclusive message waiting control. A central message desk user takes messages for other system users, controls the message waiting light at their telephones, and delivers the messages upon request.

Also refer to the discussion titled Message Waiting.

Central Processor Switched Data Port Configuration

The CPU board provides a dual in-line pin (DIP) switch that enhances installer convenience in setting up data communications between the DXP Plus and an external data device. It is possible to mismatch the data port configurations between the DXP Plus and the external device in a manner that prevents data communications from occurring. The DIP switches provide a hardware way of setting the data configuration to a known set of parameters without the need for reprogramming the system. With the switch set to ON, the DXP Plus provides the following data parameters:

Parameter Maintenance Port Modem Port

Baud Rate In

Baud Rate Out

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity Bits

Flow Control

9600

9600

8

1

None

None

2400

2400

8

1

None

None

Common Audible Ringer Interface

Relay connections that provide dry-contact closure whenever ringing occurs are available on the central processor unit circuit board. The relay closure tracks the ringing pattern of the applied ring signal and is typically used to control an external ringer device. The installer can program the particular ringing assignment that is tracked, and the ringing assignment can be any one of those that are provided by the flexible ringing assignment feature.

Also refer to the discussions titled Auxiliary Ringer Interface, External Paging Interface, Flexible

Ringing Assignments, Line Answer From Any Station, and Night Transfer (Of Ringing).

Communications Card Support

The communications card provides serial data ports for interfacing such items as open architecture interface applications, PC attendant positions, and the SMDA data printer. Technicians install communications cards on the services board, the expansion cabinet interface boards, and the main cabinet’s auxiliary board. Each of these boards will accept two communications cards in its lower two slots. The DXP Plus supports a maximum of 18 serial data ports. Two of these ports are the dedicated ports provided by the CPU board while communications cards provide the remaining 16 undedicated ports. For related information, refer to the feature description titled, Serial Data Port.



Conferencing - Multiline

This feature allows one station to access other stations or lines at the same time resulting in a conference arrangement. Users press the TRANS/CONF button to establish conferencing.

A station user can make conference calls that encompass up to five parties, including the originating station, in any combination of lines and system stations. For example, a user can conference his or her telephone with three lines and one other station.

After establishing a conference between his or her station and two external parties, the user can drop out of the conference by dialing a special code. The conference between the two outside parties continues in an unsupervised condition. During unsupervised conferences, a line-to-line connection exists through the system.

The programmer can use the line-to-line connect duration feature to set the length of time that the system allows an unsupervised conference to continue . Prior to software release 3A the maximum time that he or she can choose is 30 minutes; however, beginning at software release 3A, the programmer can choose

never as a programming option. With this programming option active, an unsupervised conference will never recall.

NOTE: Be careful when choosing this never recall option for systems that have loop start lines without disconnect supervision. Both distant parties can leave an unsupervised conference thus leaving the line unused yet still active. The line will remain active until the person that set the conference rejoins it to disconnect the line.

Conference Advisory Tone

Beginning with software release 4A, the conference advisory tone feature allows programmers to configure the system to provide an audible tone whenever more than two parties are connected in a conference call. They may select this tone as either a one time tone or as a periodic reoccurring tone. If they choose a reoccurring tone, they must select the time interval between the reoccurring tones.

Console Support

The DXP Plus supports the operation of a DSS/BLF console. The system installer must use a station port to install each DSS/BLF console; however, the programmer can assign up to four DSS/BLF consoles to support the operation of one system station. When assigned to a station, a DSS/BLF console provides additional programmable buttons that the user can program as direct station select (DSS) buttons with associated busy lamp field (BLF) lights and as speed dial buttons (the console, however, does not support second-level speed dialing). The programmer can also assign both outside lines and intercom numbers to console buttons when necessary. The station with which the console is assigned to work does not have to be a paired station port.



Consoleless Operation

The system can operate with or without the use of an attendant console.

Consultation Hold

When the station user presses the TRANS/CONF button while on a call, the call is placed on consultation hold and dial tone is returned to the station. The user may then make another intercom or line call. After speaking with this “consulted” party, the station user may do any of the following: (1) return to the held call by selecting the line or intercom number for the held party, (2) effect a conference by pressing the

TRANS/CONF button (putting the held call, the consulted party and the station user in conference), (3) hang up and effect a transfer of the held party to the consulted party. If the user encounters a busy or a ring no-answer, he or she may press the TAP button to return to the held party.

Transfer considerations:

• The system default denies line-to-line transfers.

•

To make an unscreened or blind transfer, press the TRANS/CONF button, dial the desired intercom number, and hang up.

Copy Model

Refer to the discussion titled Block Programming.



D

Database Program Storage

Programmers can save and restore the DXP Plus data base using the visual man machine interface

(VMMI). They will find this feature useful for retaining existing operating parameters and later reloading this database after they upgrading the system’s software.

Database Programming (From Main Station)

The system administrator can use a system telephone to reprogram certain feature parameters away from the values set by the installer using the computer-based VMMI. Included among the features that the system administrator can program are the ability to assign prime line, prime group, or prime intercom to the stations, and the ability to assign day and night toll restriction exception numbers to the stations.

Database Programming

System programmers employing the visual man machine interface (VMMI) program running on a

DOS-based personal computer can customize the DXP Plus system parameters and change the system data base. The VMMI program causes the system to down load the existing database to the PC’s memory where the installer can make additions and changes to database. While the installer is reprogramming the database, the system allows users to continue to use their telephones but prevents them from making changes that affect the database’s structure. As the installer makes the changes to the database, the VMMI program sends these changes back to the DXP Plus memory.

Day One And Day Two Ringing

Refer to the discussion titled Flexible Ringing Assignments.

Day Restriction Level

Refer to the Discussion titled Toll Restrictions.

Default Busy/Ring No-Answer Call Forward

The programmer can arrange for the system to automatically forward any calls that ring at busy telephones or any calls that ring and are not answered after a preprogrammed number of rings. The programmer chooses the station to receive those calls forwarded with this feature on a station-by-station basis; he or she can also program the number of rings (0-6) the system requires until it rolls the call to the forwarding station. The system defaults to four rings, three rings for voice mail ports. Users do not select this operating feature since it is fully automatic; however, user-enabled call forwarding overrides this default busy ring no-answer call forwarding.

Also see the discussions titled Call Forward - All Or Personal; and Call Forward-Busy Ring No-Answer,

All Or Personal.



Default Functional Programming

At initial power up of the system, the system operating features consist of a specific group of conditions

(default conditions). These default conditions provide a completely operational system for normal use. A system installer can leave the system in a defaulted state or reprogram it as desired. After reprogramming, a programmer can restore default conditions to the system at any time they are needed as follows:

•

When a master clear is programmed, the entire system is restored to the basic default start-up operating mode. This action erases all customized program settings.

•

When a system default is programmed, all system parameters and timing are reset to the basic start-up settings. Further, system-wide customized data such as LCD messages and system speed dial numbers are erased.

•

When line default is programmed, all lines are set to the basic operating parameters. Any lines that are now programmed for rotary dial are reset as tone dial.

•

When station COS default is programmed, the station operating features are set to the basic operating mode.

•

When button mapping default is programmed, each button at every telephone connected to the system is reset to the basic settings for that particular model of telephone. This means that all unique button functions are erased.

•

When the table defaults are programmed, all customized data that the programmer has entered in any tables such as SOHVA groups and toll restriction tables are erased. See also—Master Clearing The

System.

Delayed Ringing

Ringing assignments are programmable. A programmer can program a station to provide delayed ringing on some lines while providing direct ringing on other lines.

Diagnostics (Limited)

The installer can use this feature to perform maintenance routines and diagnose certain system malfunctions.

Dial 0 For System Attendant

A user can signal the system attendant station (station 101 at default or any other station set by programming) by dialing the digit 0 on their personal or group intercom number.

Dial Pulse Interdigit Time

You can set the interdigit time between dial pulses when the system pulse–dials a number over a line.

The DXP Plus defaults this time to 200 milliseconds and provides a range of timing values in 100 millisecond intervals between 100 milliseconds and one second.

Dial Pulse Rate—Make / Break Ratio

You can set the line make / break ratio for rotary dial signaling in a more flexible manner. You can program the make and break times independently in one millisecond increments to any time from one to

99 milliseconds.



Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)

The DNIS feature allows the DXP Plus to read an inband DTMF digit string sent by a common carrier. It uses this information to identify the telephone number the caller dialed and appropriately route the call.

DNIS is a service that long distance carriers make available for dial 800 and dial 900 number subscribers on trunks that use E&M signalling over a E1 network. Also see the discussion titled Automatic Number

Identification (ANI).

Digital Wireless Telephone Support

The DXP Plus supports the operation of the Scout 900MX digital wireless telephone. The Scout 900MX is a full-featured proprietary multiline telephone consisting of a wireless handset that lets the user roam about and still make and receive telephone calls.

Direct-in Lines (DIL)

The direct-in lines (DIL) feature provides a line appearance at a dedicated button on one or more multiline telephones. The programmer can assign a DIL to a proprietary single-line telephone where it provides one-way (either incoming or outgoing) or two-way operation depending upon further programming action.

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

DID Hunting

When a DID call rings at a station that the programmer has disabled though programming action, the system routes the call through the disabled station’s hunt list until it locates a group intercom for the call to ring. Should all group intercoms be busy or should no one answer the call in a programmed number of rings, the system then routes the call along the station’s call forwarding arrangement. With a hunt list containing up to eight assigned group intercoms and access to each group intercom available to several system stations, many users have an opportunity to service a DID caller. Coupling this flexibility with the station’s call forwarding ability, provides many chances for system users to service DID calls. A programmer could program a hunt list and a call forwarding scheme to an unassigned station and provide a designated DID termination and routing center. There would be no need to connect a telephone to the station port to use the feature in this manner. The programmer could arrange several DID termination centers to service different DID numbers. Each DID number could represent different calling categories, and ring at different blocks of system stations (see Multipurpose Line Board for more information).

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA is a DXP Plus enhancement option that allows outside callers to directly call a station or access certain internal system features, including all line groups and ARS. The system allows up to eight DISA lines to be active at the same time. To prevent fraudulent access and unauthorized use, the caller must use an authorization code and system access code to gain access to outside lines as well as many of the advanced telephone features. The authorization and access codes are from one to six digits (including pauses). You can use any of the digits zero through nine.

The system denies access, and routes a DISA call to a pre-programmed device such as a station telephone, or proprietary voice mail, under the conditions listed below: a caller dialing an invalid authorization code, a caller dialing restricted or invalid features,

Comdial has taken reasonable steps in the design of all product features, including DISA, which protect against unauthorized or fraudulent access to, or use of, a system, or which protect against unauthorized, fraudulent or unaccounted-for access to, or use of, long distance lines. However, no system is entirely


DXP Plus General Description GCA40–130 invulnerable or immune from unauthorized or fraudulent access or use, or unaccounted-for access or use, and therefore Comdial disclaims any and all liability, and makes no warranty, express or implied, relating to unauthorized or fraudulent access or use, or unaccounted-for access or use.

NOTE: Comdial engineers do not recommend DISA for use on loop start lines without disconnect supervision.

While DISA will function, Comdial will not be liable for its performance under any condition where disconnect supervision is not provided.

NOTE: Callers that use DISA to access a trunk group and place calls (trunk to trunk calling) may experience low audio levels on their calls due to the normal line resistance of CO lines. A low audio level is usually only noticeable on long line loops. If signal loss is a problem at a particular site, the installer may need to add a line amplifier (repeater) in the DISA line.

In regard to the above note, software release 3A adds +3dB of gain to the DISA lines as a default setting, and provides a means for the programmer to disable this gain if necessary. The software enhancement also provides a means by which DISA callers can pre select the gain on a DISA line before they select the line for use. They can dial a code to select either 0dB, +3dB, or +6dB of gain.

It is important to note that uncompensated line–to–line DISA connections often exhibit low audio levels due to double loop copper losses. While adding gain to these connections will sometimes improve audio signal levels, the added gain may also result in circuit instability in some connections. This instability presents itself as a singing sound that can interfere with dialing or voice communications. If callers experience dialing problems or hear a singing sound in their calls, they should select a lower gain setting for use.

How DISA Functions

Caller Dials

DISA Number

Caller Hears DISA Tone or DVA Message

Caller Dials

Intercom

Number

Caller Dials

DISA Access

Number

Intercom

Station Rings

Caller Dials

Correct Code

Caller Dials

Correct Access

Number

Caller Dials

Authorization

Code

Caller Dials

Incorrect Code

Caller Dials

Incorrect

Access Number

System Disconnects

Caller or Provides

Call Routing

Caller Accesses Features

Available To Associated

Station Class Of Service

System Returns

Authorization Tone

System Allows Caller To Dial Code Twice More.

After Third Incorrect Number, System Disconnects Caller.



Direct Line Access By Station

Through program assignment, the system gives certain stations direct access to lines. The programmer must map line buttons for use at these stations. The users then press the line buttons to select lines for use.

Direct Line Group Selection

This feature allows the programmer to put lines into line groups. A line group appears to the station user as a single button. The system supports a maximum of 16 line groups with a line group containing any number of lines; however, all lines in a group must be the same type. A multiline telephone can have a line group button for each line group. A single-line proprietary telephone is either dedicated to a specific line group, or it’s user may dial a code to access a line group.

When a user presses an idle line group button or dials a line group access code, the system scans the lines in that group and picks the first available line in a reverse hunt group. The indicator associated with the line group button on multiline telephones is idle if at least one line in the group is idle.

Disconnect Supervision

When the programmer enables this feature for a line, the system detects any break in loop current anytime during a call and disconnects the line. Also refer to the discussion titled, Abandoned Hold Release.

Discriminating Ringing

The system provides two types of ringing to give an audible distinction between internal and external calls. Internal calls sound two quick bursts every four seconds and external calls sound one long burst every four seconds, except when synchronized ringing is enabled. When synchronized ringing is enabled, the central office ringing pattern is tracked on external calls. Incoming calls transferred by an attendant always ring as an external call.

Do Not Disturb (DND)

Users can set any multiline telephone to a do not disturb mode (DND) using the designated programmable button. The associated indicator turns on as an indication of active DND Plus an appropriate message appears in the display of LCD speakerphones. Under the DND condition, an outside call forwards to another station or to the attendant according to the call forwarding feature. An intercom number call will not ring a DND station and the system sends a fast busy signal to the caller to distinguish from a standard busy line. No paging announcements are received on the DND station. Even though a station is in the

DND mode, the user can make out-going calls and access other features.

You can set any multiline telephone to a do not disturb mode using the designated programmable button.

The associated indicator turns on as an indication of active DND Plus an appropriate message appears in the display of LCD speakerphones. Under the DND condition, an outside call forwards to another station or to the attendant according to the call forwarding feature. An intercom number call doesn’t ring a DND station and the system sends a fast busy signal to the caller to distinguish the DND condition from a standard busy line. No paging announcements are received on the DND station. Even though a station is in the DND mode, you can still make outgoing calls and access other features.

You can enable or disable this feature on an industry-standard telephone by dialing the feature code

(default is #01).



Do Not Disturb (DND) Inhibit

The programmer can inhibit DND on a station class of service basis.

Do Not Disturb (DND) Override

The programmer can provide stations with a Do Not Disturb (DND) override capability that will allow them to call a station that is set in the DND mode. The programmer must also enable the executive override feature for the DND override feature to function. Refer to the discussions titled: Do Not Disturb and Executive Override.

DSS/BLF Console Support

The DXP Plus system supports the use of both digital and analog proprietary DSS/BLF consoles. The installer can place a console at any station port and use database programming to identify it as a console port. The installer then uses database programming to enable the console to be a companion to a telephone that he or she has installed at any other station port. The system supports the use of up to four consoles for each telephone, and there is no limit to the maximum number of consoles that it will support.

The DSS/BLF console provides a one-button direct station selection (DSS) intercom, an associated busy lamp field (BLF), and additional autodial capability to the telephone user.

DSS Status Button

When the programmer assigns the personal intercom number of one telephone to appear at a button on another telephone, the button and its associated light provide a direct station select (DSS) busy lamp field

(BLF) feature. With this feature, the user can monitor the status of the appearing station. If the programmer also assigns a DSS status button to the telephone, the user can press it to select between monitoring all of the telephone status or just its personal intercom status.

Also refer to the discussion titled Intercom Number.



Digital Voice Announce

The DVA is a line-powered device that provides voice prompts for auto-attendant and transfer, or you can use it to enhance the operation of DISA and Tracker. However, you must have DISA assigned for DVA to function. The DVA is designed to interface with a digital station port and is easy to install and program. You perform all DVA programming through the “Attendant Level” programming, though there are some DXP Plus programming steps as well. It isn’t necessary to send DTMF or ringing signals to the unit to activate it because the DISA programming determines the DVA’s actions. When you use DVA in conjunction with DISA, the DXP Plus automatically answers CO lines and guides callers with voice prompts.

Connect the DVA to any vacant digital station port. The DVA self-identifies to the CPU in the DXP Plus, so you don’t have any phone-type programming to do.

The DVA accepts and stores up to four recorded messages, with a total maximum recorded time for all messages of two minutes. The system attendant or installer can divide this two-minute period as necessary among the four messages or use the entire two minutes for one message. These pre-recorded messages play during an in-process call. Single digit dialing is allowed during each of the four prompts.

The system attendant or installer can store the customized messages (prompts) into the DVA device by delivering them from the attendant’s station. The DVA interfaces with the DXP Plus through any of its unused digital telephone station ports. The maximum number of DVA units you can install is limited only by the number of DXP Plus station ports (480). If you install multiple DVAs, the DVA functions as an automatic attendant, and it enhances the operation of direct inward system access (DISA) by providing automated voice prompts and dialing instructions to callers. In general, the voice prompts are of the categories listed in the examples following this description.

You control the day versus night messages by programming the day 1, day 2, and night ringing begin and end times in the system parameters menu. The system goes into the night mode either manually by the attendant or automatically each day when the programmed times occur. When the system is in the night mode, the night menu message plays versus the day menu message; likewise, the night routing message plays versus the day routing message.

Message types, such as welcome greetings and recall-no-answer messages are indexed within the system by a two-digit number (example: 10 = Welcome Greeting 1, 11 = Welcome Greeting 2, and so forth).

A single-digit number appended to many of the message-type names (example: Welcome Greeting 1,

Welcome Greeting 2, and so forth) is used for grouping similar types of messages together to prompt callers. For example, a company sharing the telephone system with several departments may assign all messages in group 1 to the sales department and all messages in group 3 to the customer service department. This allows DISA lines coupled with voice prompt 1 to seek welcome group 1, and DISA lines coupled with voice prompt 2 to seek welcome greeting 2, for departmental applications.

When programming DVA voice menus (example, press 1 for sales, 2 for customer service ...), you can also enter feature codes as well as intercom numbers in the Voice Digit Translation menu. For example, if you have installed the Tracker Paging System option, you can program the Tracker Pager access code

(*8) into one of the single-digit translation locations. This allows callers to track the called party by pressing the appropriate single-digit button on their telephone when prompted by voice message. The caller then enters his or her call-back number and the # symbol to complete the page.

NOTE: DVA prompts are shared; for example, if you make eight different recordings, with two DVAs, they will be distributed in both units. If one DVA fails or is removed, then only the remaining messages will play.

DVA continued on next page. . .



DVA Continued . . .

Lines are associated with DVAs by “Line Pgm,” DVA voice option. For example, in the diagram below, lines 1, 2, and 3 are programmed for “voice option 1" and will be answered by any DVA unit with index group 1 prompts recorded. Lines 4, 5, and 6 are programmed with voice option 2 and will be answered by the DVA with index group 2 recorded.

DVA 1

Index Group 1

L1 line pgm / voice option = 1



DVA 2

Index Group 1

DVA 3

Index Group 1




DVA 4

Index Group 2

The following are examples of DVA voice messages.

Welcome greeting

This greeting identifies your company or business. Example: “Welcome to Acme Company, one of our agents will be with you as soon as possible.”

Day message

This message represents the main menu prompt used during normal daytime hours.

Example 1: “If you know your party’s extension, dial it now; otherwise, stay on the line—an operator will be with you shortly.”

Example 2: “To reach engineering, dial 1; to reach customer service, dial 2; to reach sales, dial 3; otherwise, stay on the line—an operator will be with you shortly.”

Night message

The night message is used after normal business hours have ended. Example: “Our office hours are from eight to five. Please call back tomorrow.”

Recall no answer messages

Whenever a station is dialed from a DISA line and is not answering, the system plays a recall no answer message to the caller. Example 1: “The party you have reached is unavailable at this time.” Example 2:

“The party you have reached is unavailable at this time. Dial 1 followed by your call-back number and pound symbol to track the called party or dial 2 to leave a voice message.”

NOTE: In example 2, the installer must install the Tracker Paging System and proprietary voice mail options.

Recall busy message

Whenever a station is dialed from a DISA line and is busy, the system plays a recall busy message to the caller. Example: “The party you have reached is unavailable at this time—please dial another extension or dial zero for the operator.”



Hold message

This prompt is used during DISA calls and is activated when the called party is being paged with the

Tracker Paging system. Example: “The party you have reached is being paged—please hold.”

DISA authorization code message

This message prompts callers to dial their DISA authorization code. Example: “Please enter your authorization code at this time.”

Feature access message

Before a caller using a DISA line can access system features, he or she must dial the proper feature code.

Example: “The following features are available. Dial ❋01 for system speed dial access, ❋8 for Tracker

Pager, or hold and you will be assisted by an operator.

Drop message

This prompt is used when a DISA call cannot be completed (not enough system resources available, wrong access code dialed, or feature dialed is busy).

NOTE: The call is not routed to the attendant–the message plays, then reorders.

Example: “Your call cannot be completed at this time. Please try again.”

DVA / DISA

You can enhance the security of DISA by using the DVA. The DXP Plus seizes the incoming call based on the “DISA assignment” parameters, and the DVA plays the appropriate prompts to enhance the following.

DISA access code,

Authorization code,

Feature access code.

For example:

Main Number xxx-xxxx

Index Prompt 10

“Welcome

Greeting”

Index Prompt 31

“Password

Prompt”

Index Prompt 33

“Dial Feature”

“You have reached ABC company. You may dial an extension at any time, or press 1 for advanced feature access.—Pause—

1 = Disa Access Code

“Dial your authorization number.”—Pause—

“Dial the feature access code.” —Pause—



DVA/ Auto Attendant with Single Digit Menu

The DVA functions as an auto attendant, giving callers single-digit dialing options. The DXP Plus seizes the incoming call based upon the “DISA assignment” parameters, and the DVA plays the appropriate prompts.

Welcome Greeting

Day Main Greeting—Menu choices

Recall Busy

Recall No Answer

For example:


Index Prompt 10

“Welcome

Greeting”

“You have reached ABC company.

Index Prompt 14

“Day / Night Menu”

“Dial 1 for Service

”Dial 2 for Advanced Features

“Dial 3 for Assistance

1 = (Group ITCM #) 2 = (DISA Access) 3 =(station#)

Service Department Index Prompt

31

“Password”

Dial your

Authorization

Code

All phones ring and flash group

ITCM.

Index Prompt

33

“Dial Feature

Code”

Dial your

Feature Access

Code

Station Number



DVA / Tracker

The DVA gives caller’s single digit dialing access to the Tracker paging system. The DXP Plus seizes the incoming call based upon the “DISA assignment” parameters, and the DVA plays the appropriate voice prompts.

Welcome Greeting

Day Main Greeting—Menu choices

Recall Busy

Recall No Answer

For Example:


Index Prompt 10

“Welcome

Greeting”

“You have reached ABC company.

Index Prompt 14

“Day / Night Menu” “If you are calling from a tone-dial telephone, you may dial the extension number at any time.”

Index Prompt

22

“Recall No

Answer”

“I’m sorry, that extension doesn’t answer.

Dial 1 to Track;

Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant;

Dial 3 to leave a message in the voice mail box

1 = ✳ 8 2 = Extension Number 3 = Voice Mail Port number

Index Prompt 26

“Recall Busy”

“I’m sorry, that extension doesn’t answer.

Dial 1 to Track;

Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant;

Dial 3 to leave a message in the voice mail box

1 = ✳ 8 2 = Extension Number 3 = Voice Mail Port number



Dynamic Save Button

Unprogrammed buttons at multiline telephones are available for the user to dynamically save dialed numbers. To save a number, the user presses any unprogrammed button before hanging up after he or she has dialed a number. To dial the saved number, the user presses the same button and the system automatically dials the saved number. Saving a number over a previously saved number erases the old one and stores the new one in place of it.

E

E1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option (International Applications)

The E1 digital carrier transmission option is designed for international applications and allows up to 30 channels of voice and/or data transmissions over a single four-wire cable using multiplexing techniques.

For convenience, a customer service unit (CSU) is built into the E1 option board to terminate the E1 channels, provide protection from transient voltages, and respond to loop-back requests from the central office.

Up to four E1 boards can be installed if the expansion cabinet has been added to the main cabinet – two boards in each cabinet. The DXOPT-SYN card on the Services board must be installed whenever one or more E1 boards is installed, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source. In installations where the local DXP Plus is supplying the clock signal for the far system, no DXOPT-SYN card is required in the local DXP Plus.

You can assign a system status button to a station and enable the system to report E1 transmission errors via the T1/E1 status log. Depending on how you program the system, the E1 status log either prints out on an optional printer or is displayed on an optional video display terminal (VDT). You can also view the E1 status log from an LCD speakerphone by programming a system status button.

Also, you can program the system to alert the system attendant whenever a major alarm alerting condition occurs by activating an external, customer-supplied audible or visual alarm. The external alarm connects to one of the relay jacks (J3 or J4) on the front of the CPU board. Make sure the alarming device complies with system voltage and power requirements. You determine when a major alarm alerting condition should occur by programming threshold values and corresponding time periods for each type of alarm caused by a transmission error. Whenever the threshold value is reached within the programmed time period, the selected relay on the CPU board is activated by the board’s circuits, which in turn, activates the external alarm. The system attendant can turn the alarm off from any specified station by dialing a feature code.

Pad Level—Transmit, Receive

(Gain And Attenuation Settings For Line Transmit And Receive)

This feature enhances the T1–E1 digital carrier transmission option, the pad level programming feature adjusts voice levels for both the transmit and receive circuits in the individual channels.

The choices include: Gain 2, Gain 1, Nominal, Loss 1, Loss 2, Loss 3, Loss 4, and Loss 5. These settings provide an approximate +6 to -15 dB range of choices. Starting at the Nominal setting, each gain level represents an approximate 3 dB amplification of the signal level from the previous setting, and each loss level represents an approximate 3 dB attenuation of the signal level from the previous setting. Because digital transmission does not lose volume level as readily as analog transmission does, it is likely that the receive level may be noticeably higher when using the E1 option. Therefore, you may need to select a low setting such as Loss 2 for the voice level receive parameter when programming this feature for E1 lines that are being used exclusively for voice transmission. Further, if you choose a setting to increase the receive gain, you should carefully examine speakerphone operation. It is possible to select a receive gain that will, under certain conditions, interfere with proper speakerphone operation.



E & M Tie Line Support

Extension Hunting

When an E and M tie line call rings at a station that the programmer has disabled though programming action, the system routes the call through the disabled station’s hunt list until it locates a group intercom for the call to ring. Should all group intercoms be busy or should no one answer the call in a programmed number of rings, the system then routes the call along the station’s call forwarding arrangement. With a hunt list containing up to eight assigned group intercoms and access to each group intercom available to several system stations, many users have an opportunity to service an E and M tie line caller. Coupling this flexibility with the station’s call forwarding ability, provides many chances for system users to service E and M tie line calls. A programmer could program a hunt list and a call forwarding scheme to an unassigned station and provide a designated E and M tie line termination and routing center. There would be no need to connect a telephone to the station port to use the feature in this manner. The programmer could arrange several E and M tie line termination centers to service different extension numbers. Each extension number could represent different calling categories, and ring at different blocks of system stations (Also see Multipurpose Line Board Support).

End-to-End DTMF Signaling

The system accepts DTMF tones or digital signals from proprietary telephones and sends them as DTMF tones through the public telephone network where they are received at a distant end for computer, voice mail, or other peripheral feature access.

End-to-End Signaling On Intercom

After establishing an intercom call, the system can continue to send and receive dialing signals (DTMF tones) through the intercom path. This feature can be performed from every station in the system and is used by peripherals such as a VMI–X or ATI–D–1PT accessory unit for voice mail.

End-to-End Signaling On Lines

After a user has established an outside call, the system can continue to send dialing signals (DTMF tones) through the public switched network and have them received at the distant end for inward call completion

(bank by telephone, voice mail). Users can perform this conventional, on or off-hook dialing feature from every station in the system.

Enhanced Line Appearance

Refer to Line Appearance, Enhanced

Exclusive Hold

Refer to Hold, Exclusive



ExecuMail Integration

The DXP Plus supports the ExecuMail voice mail system through an appropriate interface device. The

ExecuMail system provides voice mail boxes where callers can leave messages to station users when the users are not available to answer their telephones. The ExecuMail system camps incoming calls that encounter busy ports so that they can recall when a voice mail part becomes available.

Also refer to the paragraph titled Voice Mail Integration Digits.

Executive Override

This feature allows the user of a station, upon encountering a busy signal at another station, to dial a special code that will override the busy condition, sound a warning tone, and allow caller access to the existing conversation.

•

•

Conditions for executive override are as follows:

•

Calling station has class of service that enables busy override.

Calling station is switched to override voice path.

Called party may respond and will be heard by calling station and outside party.

•

When the calling party dials the override code, the called party receives several tone bursts.

Also refer to the feature discussion titled Do Not Disturb.

Executive Override Advisory Tone

Beginning with software 4A, the executive advisory tone allows programmers to configure the system to provide an audible tone whenever a system user activates the executive override feature. Programmers can select this tone as either a one time tone or as a periodic reoccurring tone. If they choose a reoccurring tone, they must select the time interval between the reoccurring tones.

Executive Override Block

As a class of service feature, the programmer can block executive override at a station. When a station is blocked, a caller cannot override a busy condition and break into an on-going conversation at the called station.

Extended DTMF Tones

The installer can program the length of the DTMF tones associated with automatically or manually dialed numbers on analog telephones. This feature allows the system to access equipment such as answering machines, banking computers, voice mail equipment, that requires DTMF tones longer than the defaulted

80 msec. tone. To use the feature, the user programs the digits that require longer DTMF tones into speed dial locations or waits until the DTMF dialing time threshold exceeds the limit.

Extended DTMF Tones For ExecuMail

The programmer can set different DTMF tones for ExecuMail Stations. The system defaults the length to

80 msec., but the programmer can set other tone lengths as needed.



External Paging Interface (External Paging Port)

The external paging port, available on the services circuit board, provides an interface for external paging equipment. When the programmer assigns the external paging port to a paging zone, announcements to that zone are sent through the external paging equipment installed at the port. When the programmer assigns one of the relays that are available on the central processor unit circuit board to the paging zone, it provides a dry-contact actuation for the duration of the page to that zone. Typically, the installer wires the system so that this actuation enables the external paging equipment while the paging signal is sent through it.

The programmer can program a line port as an external paging interface for an external paging amplifier.

When this feature is available, station users access the amplifier by selecting that line port. The paging line port accepts dialed DTMF tones to make a zone selection if the amplifier provides this function.

When the programmer assigns a flexible ringing assignment to the external paging port, the external paging equipment responds to a ring signal and sounds the ringing over the paging loudspeaker. The programmer can assign one of the common audible ringer interface relays to track the ring signal that is supplied to this external paging port. Typically, the installer wires this relay so that its contact actuation enables the paging equipment.

Also refer to the discussions titled Auxiliary Ringer Interface, Common Audible Ringer Interface, Flexible

Ringing Assignments, Line Answer From Any Station, and Night Transfer (Of Ringing)

F

Feature Inhibit

The programmer can disable a large array of individual features to provide a very basic telephone system when it is necessary. A basic system might be necessary at a site where a large proportion of the telephones are accessible to unauthorized users that may use them to tamper with the system, or such a system may be necessary for locations where users only need a narrow range of features to do their job.

Feature Renumbering

While the dialing codes for personal and group intercoms and for feature access are set by system default, they are flexible, and the programmer can renumber them when necessary. Feature renumbering may be necessary if personal or group intercom numbers must be in a certain block or sequence to match some site requirement (for example, numbering all telephones located on the third floor with 3nnn numbers). If a new number assignment conflicts with a defaulted dialing code, the defaulted code can be reassigned into a block of unassigned numbers set aside for that purpose.

At default, the blocks of numbers are as follows:

1001 – 1480 = personal intercom

4001 – 4480 = group intercom

5000 – 5039

6000 – 8999 = feature codes

5040 - 5999 = unassigned codes

9 = line group 1

The programmer can reassign any number between 1 and 9999 to any intercom or feature code in any combination of three- or four-digits; however, the assigned numbers must not conflict with one another.

For instance, if 2111 is assigned as an intercom number, there cannot be any intercom or feature code numbered 21, 21n, or 21nn. Similarly, since 9 is defaulted as the code for line group one, there cannot be any intercom or feature code numbered 9n, 9nn, or 9nnn.



Flexible Ringing Assignments

The programmer can arrange ringing assignments for every station. He or she can arrange for this ringing to sound immediately as soon as the call appears on specified lines at a telephone (direct ringing) or after a system imposed delay (delayed ringing). Further, he or she can arrange for a telephone to ring when calls appear on specified lines during certain periods of the day or night. To program for flexible ringing, the programmer assigns lines to the direct and delayed ringing modes. He or she also divides a 24-hour period into three time blocks designated as day 1, day 2, and night mode and assigns lines to each of these categories. The programmer then assigns the direct, delayed, day 1, day 2, and night mode ringing designations to the various stations.

During the day 1 time period, calls on lines assigned to direct, delayed and day 1 categories all ring.

During the day 2 time period, calls on lines assigned to direct, delayed and day 2 categories all ring.

During the night time period, calls on lines assigned to delayed and night both ring.

The system also provides a manual night transfer (of ringing) feature that the attendant activates by dialing a code or pressing a preprogrammed button. While this feature is active, calls on lines assigned to delayed and night ringing both ring at the various stations; however, no other ringing occurs.

Also refer to the discussions titled Auxiliary Ringer Interface, Common Audible Ringer Interface,

External Paging Interface, Line Answer From Any Station, and Night Transfer (Of Ringing).

Flexible Ringing Assignment Of The External Paging Interface

Refer to the discussion titled, External Paging Interface.

Flexible Station Numbering Plan

Refer to the discussions titled Feature Renumbering and Intercom Number.

Full Button Programmability Of Features

The programmer, and often the telephone users themselves, can make frequently dialed feature codes available at programmable buttons by storing the specific access codes necessary for dialing the features.

They can store every feature access code, except those requiring TRANS/CONF button action, in a continuous string including button actuations and keypad digits up to a maximum of 16 digits per programmable button.

Also refer to the discussion titled Programmable Button Flexibility.

G

Group Intercoms

Refer to the discussion titled Feature Renumbering and Intercom Number.

Ground Start Line Support

Refer to the discussion titled Multipurpose Line Board Support.



H

Handsfree Answer Inhibit

The MUTE button on a multiline telephone will block all handsfree answerback response. This arrangement prevents a station user from monitoring another station site using the monitoring ability of the voice announce feature. When a user presses the MUTE button at his or her telephone, all handsfree answerback is disabled thus inhibiting any off-site monitoring. The mute light will remain on to indicate that this feature is active on digital telephones. On analog telephones, the monitor light will flash. Also refer to the discussion titled Mute.

Handset Volume Level (On Impact Telephones)

The installer can program the handset volume feature on Impact telephones to offer the station user more choices when selecting the handset volume level locally from his or her telephone. Normally, users have up to 8 volume levels that they can select. However, this programmed feature increases the user’s handset volume choices to 13.

Headset Compatibility

Some proprietary multiline telephones are equipped with a headset jack. The programmer can enable a station port to allow headset operation with these telephone models. The programmer assigns, or in some cases the user can program, a programmable button at the telephone that the user can press to enable/disable headset port operation.

Hold

This feature allows a user to temporarily disconnect from a current call yet retain it so that it can be retrieved. When users place a call on hold, they are free to use their telephones for other calls or features and then return to the held call. At a multiline telephone, the user can put a call on hold manually, by pressing a HOLD button, or automatically (if programmed), by pressing another line button. Further, when a user presses the TRANS/CONF button to transfer a call, the system places the call on hold. The user can place a call on hold in either an exclusive or non-exclusive manner. Exclusive hold prevents a user at another telephone from retrieving a call held on a shared line. Non-exclusive hold allows any telephone that has line appearance of the held call to pick it up. The transfer hold is an exclusive hold condition. When a user answer a call on a group intercom and places it on hold, the system keeps this call on hold on the group intercom. This means that the user who placed the call on hold or any other user with access to that group intercom can pick up the held call.

The programmer must program each multiline telephone for manual or automatic and exclusive or non-exclusive hold. When he or she enables automatic hold at a telephone, it does not prevent users from using manual hold.

Also refer to the various discussions headed Automatic Hold.

Directed Station Hold

This feature allows station users to pick up the last call a user placed on hold at another station. This feature does not allow users to pick up exclusive hold calls or calls that are in the process of being transferred. Also, the feature does not allow users to send a directed call hold to a station where its user is scanning the currently held calls. In addition, this feature allows users to place a call on hold at another station and have this call appear to be the one that has been on hold there for the longest time. Features such as hold recall apply to the station that sent the directed call hold and not to the station that received the directed call hold.



Hold, Exclusive

Exclusive hold prohibits a user from retrieving a held call at any station other than the one where it was placed on hold. The exclusive hold condition also links the held call to the timed hold recall time-out feature. After time-out, audible and visual signaling occurs and the exclusive hold condition reverts to a normal hold condition. The programmer enables or disables exclusive hold as a class of service feature.

Hold Queuing

The hold queuing feature allows a station user to put multiple lines on hold. The LCD speakerphone user can scroll through this queue of held calls by repeatedly pressing the HOLD button. The numbers or names of the held lines are shown on the LCD display. When the desired line appears on the display, the user presses TAP to retrieve it.

Hold Time Reporting

A programmer can arrange for the SMDR/SMDA parameters to convey either the cost of calls that the stations make or the amount of time that lines have been on hold at the stations. This time includes the actual hold time as well as the time waiting for transfers and conferences to be completed.

Hot Transfer

A hot screened call transfer allows users to first announce and then transfer both line and intercom calls from one telephone to another in a special manner. Once users have announced that they are transferring a call to another telephone, they can then take action to make the transferred call appear at the other station as if that user has already answered it. If the recipient of a hot transferred call is using a speakerphone, he or she merely begins the conversation with the distant party. If the recipient of the hot transfer is using a monitor telephone, he or she must lift the handset to reply to the distant party.

Also refer to the discussion titled Call Transfer -Screened.

I

I Hold And I Use Indications

The light associated with a line button provides a visual indication of the status of that line. When a user has a line in-use or on-hold at his or her telephone, the light indication provided is of a different flash rate than the indication provided at the other telephones in the system.

Idle Line Preference

With idle line preference, a telephone automatically connects to an assigned outside line that is idle and arranged for this feature. Connection occurs as soon as the user lifts the telephone handset. He or she does not have to press a line button.

The programmer assigns idle line preference to a station class of service and then assigns that class of service to a particular telephone. He or she also assigns the lines that are associated with the feature and the priority that these lines are to be available. If the programmer enables this feature and the prime line automatic feature together, the user gets his or her prime line upon going off-hook or an idle line if the prime line is in use.

Also refer to the discussion titled Idle Line Priority.

Idle Line Priority

When a programmer arranges for a telephone to have idle line preference he or she also specifies the order in which the idle lines are given to the station. Also refer to the discussion titled Idle Line

Preference.



Industry Standard Telephone Support

The DXP Plus supports industry standard (IST) telephones.

Distinctive Ringing

An industry–standard telephone can sound one ring cadence for intercom calls and another for for outside calls. You must select the ringing style in station class of service programming.

DTMF Receiver–Time-out

You can program the amount of time that the system waits to receive a DTMF tone on an industry–standard telephone. The DTMF receiver–time-out feature applies to the time between a user’s lifting the handset and pressing a dialpad digit.

Do Not Disturb (DND)

You can dial a feature code (#01 by default) from your industry standard telephone and put the telephone into a do not disturb (DND) condition. While in this condition, an outside call forwards to another station or to the attendant according to the call forwarding feature. An intercom call will not ring the DND station and the system sends a fast busy signal to the caller to distinguish the DND from a standard busy line.

Flash Time

The flash time is the timed length of the signal delivered when a user presses the hookflash (or TAP) button. The installer can program both the minimum and maximum times that define the IST flash.

Hold Confirmation

Hold confirmation allows the industry–standard telephone users to have positive tone feedback while on hold.

Offhook Treated As Busy

When an industry-standard telephone user takes the telephone’s handset off hook, the IST station appears busy to the system. This feature prevents the system from ringing an IST station while the station is idle and off hook making it unable to sound audible ringing.

Message Wait Retrieval Access Code

This feature allows IST station users to respond to a message waiting condition without using the central message desk. They do this by dialing a special intercom feature code that lets them respond directly to a waiting message.

Ring Frequency

The system programmer can set a ring frequency of 25 Hz for international applications or set a ring frequency of 21 Hz for domestic applications. He or she must choose a setting that matches the frequency of the installed ring generator.

Ring Patterns

Installer can program the ringing pattern for either IST ring mode one or IST ring mode two. Mode one causes a two-second ring phase while mode two causes a shorter one second ring phase. For this feature to function properly, the industry-standard telephone interface board must contain firmware revision 2C

Ringing on Busy

When an industry–standard telephone is busy on a call and another call comes to that telephone, the system sounds three quick tone bursts to the telephone’s handset receiver. You must program the ringing on busy feature.

Industry-Standard Telephone Support continued on next page . . .



Industry-Standard Telephone Support continued . . .

Ringing Time-out

You can program the number of times that the system sends a ring signal to an industry–standard telephone on a system wide basis.

Ringing Patterns

The ringing pattern can be changed. Additionally, firmware revision 2C or higher must be installed on the

DXIST (industry-standard interface) board. A ringing pattern (mode 2) with pulse duration half the normal ones (mode 1) can be programmed. This results in shorter ring phases of one-second duration.

Ringing Per Phase

Installers can bridge two ISTs at a single station port but the telephones share the same intercom number.

When installers do this, it reduces the number of ISTs that can ring simultaneously from 96 per cabinet to

48 per cabinet. Bridged ISTs require programming action to match the systems ringing requirements to the installation parameters.

Ringing Time-out

You can program the number of times that the system sends a ring signal to an industry-standard telephone on a system-wide basis.

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce (SOHVA)

Users can perform a SOHVA from any telephone to an industry-standard telephone if the installer has programmed the IST in the SOHVA tables according to the SOHVA feature. Users can SOHVA the IST whenever it is busy on a line or the intercom. The IST user can not respond to a SOHVA call and his or her outside party will hear the SOHVA caller’s voice.

Station Lock

This feature allows you to lock any local industry standard telephone (IST) being used with a DXP system. You enable this feature by dialing the feature code (default is #04) followed by your authorization code. You disable this feature by dialing only your authorization code after hearing the “enter your authorization code” fast tone. Your authorization code is programmed into the system by the installer.

Also refer to the discussion titled Authorization Codes.

When this feature is enabled, access to lines and features on your telephone are denied to other users until you unlock or disable this feature.

Interactive Button Support

The system supports three interactive buttons on LCD speakerphones. These buttons and their associated expanded display messages provide quick easy access to system features and straight-forward button programming without the need for dialing codes.



Intercom Number

The DXP Plus system provides intercom support in several ways as described in the following paragraphs. The system provides 480 personal intercom slots and 520 group intercom slots for a total of

1000 available intercom slots.

Personal Intercom Number

The system assigns a unique personal intercom number to every station, and the user of that station has exclusive use of that intercom number for making calls. However, telephone users can answer personal intercom calls that ring at another telephone or pick up non-exclusive calls that are on hold there. At default, the personal intercom appears on a telephone at the intercom button, but it can appear at any button that the programmer maps for that purpose. Personal intercoms can hunt to other personal or to group intercoms, depending upon programming.

Group Intercom Number

Group intercom numbers are those that are shared for use by several stations. Any time someone calls a group intercom number, all stations assigned to the number will ring. The programmer, through station programming methods, enables a station’s ability to answer and originate calls on a group intercom number. He or she also maps the buttons on a telephone at which the group intercom numbers are to appear. The lights associated with these buttons show activity status of the group intercom numbers. In addition to normal intercom activity, a group intercom can show the appearance of a line that normally does not appear at the telephone (such as one carrying a transferred call). Group intercom numbers can appear in intercom hunt lists; however, a particular group intercom number can appear in only one hunt list at a time.

When a user selects a group intercom and dials a line group code to select a line or dials a code to retrieve a call from a park orbit, the system places the subsequent line appearance on the group intercom that the user preselected. the line appearance remains at that group intercom until the user finishes his or her call, parks it, or transfers it to another telephone.

Station Monitoring

The programmer can make the personal intercom number of one telephone appear at a button on other telephones in the system. Users at those telephones can use the light associated with this button to monitor the idle/busy status of that telephone and press the button to make a call to the idle monitored telephone.

The degree of monitoring that users can do is determined by whether the station monitoring feature that is assigned to the telephone is on or off. The type of monitoring that they can do is determined by whether their telephones have a status button that they can use to choose one type of monitoring in place of another.

When the station monitoring feature is off, the status light shows the state of the monitored telephone. If the user’s telephone has a status button, he or she can press it to show the busy/idle state of just the personal intercom number of the monitored telephone.

When the station monitoring feature is on, the status light shows activity status (idle, ringing, busy, and hold) of the monitored telephone.

The programmer must map a telephone button for each personal intercom that is to appear and, if desired, map a status button for the user to switch between the types of monitoring. Also, she or he must enable station monitoring as a class of service feature and assign that class of service to those telephones where monitoring is required.



Intercom Hunt List

The programmer can group up to eight intercom numbers together at an individual telephone to form an intercom hunt list. The eight numbers can include one personal intercom number and seven group intercom numbers or eight group intercom numbers.

When someone calls a telephone and it is busy, the call will go to the first idle number in that telephone’s hunt list and then ring every telephone that has access to that number. An outside line call to a busy telephone will always go to the hunt list; however, an intercom call will not. To make an intercom call route to the hunt list, the programmer must include the personal intercom number of that telephone in the hunt list. The system will not allow you to assign a group intercom number to more than one hunt list at a time.

When a user has set his or her telephone to forward just prime line and personal intercom calls, those calls will forward while any other calls to that telephone will go to the hunt list. When a user has set his or her telephone to forward all calls, then all calls forward and none go to the hunt list.

Also refer to the discussion titled Feature Renumbering.

Intercom Time-out

Should the user select the intercom for use and then perform no dialing or other action, the intercom will time-out after 10 seconds (at default) and return the telephone to an idle state.

Intercom Call Progress Tones

Internal call progress is marked by the following special tones: Dial tone sounds steady; ring back tone sounds one second on and three seconds off; tone signaled internal call sounds a two-tone burst every four seconds at a called station and returns to the caller as ring back; voice signaled internal call sounds a single tone burst at a called station and returns to the caller as two tone bursts; busy tone sounds one-half second on and one-half second off at the calling station, and do not disturb tone sounds a fast busy tone when the called station is in the do not disturb mode. (The system only supplies OPX ports with the regular busy tone since fast busy tones could interfere with the operation of some accessories that can be connected to these ports).

Intercom Inter-Digit Dialing

A timer begins timing out after the dialing of each number during intercom number dialing. It also begins a time-out whenever the station user accesses the intercom number path and does not dial any digits.

When the timer times out, the system returns the station to an idle state.

K

Key/Hybrid Configuration

Either key system or hybrid configuration is available with the DXP Plus digital communications system.

Whenever the programmer assigns outside lines into line groups and gives individual stations access to those line groups, the system automatically places itself into the hybrid configuration mode. The installer does not have to make any physical adjustment to the equipment to achieve the hybrid configuration mode. The Federal Communications Commission rules and regulations, Part 68, designate a fully protected hybrid configuration as an MF equipment type category and a key system configuration as a KF equipment type category. The installer must report the appropriate category registration number to the telephone company. Operationally, the hybrid configuration enables a PBX feature that may incur a higher monthly tariff to the telephone company.



L

Last Number Redial

The system provides each station with a last number redial feature. This feature saves 16 digits of the last outside number dialed at the station. A newly dialed number always replaces a previously dialed number.

When the user presses the last number redial button, the system will choose a line and redial the saved number. The system will choose the last line used and redial the number. If the last line used is busy or is unavailable, the system will choose the prime line. If they both are unavailable, the system will choose any line assigned to idle line preference. If this is busy or unavailable, no further system action is taken; you must hang up and retry later when a line is available.

Line Access Restriction

Refer to the discussion titled Access Denied.

Line Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

The programmer can assign one or more of the four relays, which are located on the central processor board, to track the ring signal on any or all lines that he or she assigns to them. The programmer can arrange for the tracked ringing to be during the direct, delayed, day 1, day 2, or night ringing modes.

Typically, the installer wires a relay so that its contact actuation causes an external bell or other device to sound. Station users can hear an external ringer and dial a code. When they do this, the system allows their stations to answer any line that the installer has assigned to that external ringer through the relay programming. Since each site installation can be unique, the installer must explain to the users which dialing code answers which external ringer.


External Paging Interface, Flexible Ringing Assignments, and Night Transfer (Of Ringing)

Line Appearance, Enhanced

When a telephone user selects a group intercom and dials a line group code to select a line or to retrieve a call from a park orbit, the system places the subsequent line appearance on the group intercom that the user preselected. The line appearance remains at that group intercom until the user finishes his or her call, parks that call, or transfers it to another telephone.

Line Groups

The programmer can assemble and program outside lines together in up to 16 different line groups. Users can access each group by dialing a different access code or by pressing a line group button. The programmer can use this feature to reserve certain lines for certain clusters of stations for a tenant-service arrangement.

Line Group Access

The programmer can assign certain line groups to certain stations for call origination purposes. Stations may also be denied access to certain line groups.

Line Out Softkey Option

Beginning with software release 4A, the programmer can select between two different interactive button menu options that LCD speakerphones display when connected to out-bound lines for outgoing calls.

Specifically, this action substitutes a release (RLSE) button for the automatic redial (ARDL) button. This feature enhances DXP Plus installations within the international community because some nations have specifications in place that disallow automatic redialing.



Line Queuing

When several telephones share a line and that line is busy, a user can dial a code and hang up to wait for the line to become idle. When the line becomes idle, the user’s telephone will ring.

Liquid Crystal Display Support

The system supports the use of LCD speakerphones having a liquid crystal display (LCD). The LCD speakerphone display may shows many useful messages that guide station users through many calling situations.

Enhanced LCD Display

The installer can program the system to enhance the display of an LCD-equipped telephone so that it shows both the name of the calling station and its personal intercom number.

Liquid Crystal Display Messaging

A user can set standard and system supplied custom display messages by dialing a specific code at any telephone. When a user places a call from an LCD speakerphone, the preset LCD message from the called station will flash on the caller’s LCD. When a user sets a message, the intercom number light at his or her telephone flashes to indicate that the feature is active. The attendant programs these messages form his or her position (30 messages are available).

Location Code

Software release 4A adds the location code feature to enhance system installation in the international community. When installers set this code for a particular nation where they have installed the DXP Plus, the DXP system automatically defaults certain system parameters to a setting that meets specifications set forth by that nation’s technical standards. Also see the discussions titled Conference Advisory Code,

Executive Override Advisory Tone and Line Out Softkey Option.

Location Code 1 (USA)

•

Standard system default codes for all system features.

Location Code 2 (South Africa)

Standard system default codes for all system features except:

— transmission and receive levels set to meet local standards,

—frequency and cadence of call progress tones set to local standards.

Location Code 3 (Brazil)

•


— transmission and receive levels set to meet locate standards,

—frequency and cadence of call progress tones set to local standards,

—conference advisory tone turned on and set to provide periodic reoccurring tone,

—executive advisory tone turned on and set to provide periodic reoccurring tone,

—Selectable interactive button menu for LCD speakerphone displays set to substitute a release (RLSE) button for the automatic redial (ARDL) button.

NOTE: Be sure to notify users of this button change as it is different from information provided in the user’s guides.

Location Code 4 (Argentina and Chile)

•



—frequency and cadence of call progress tones set to local standards.

Location Code 5 (Israel)

•



—frequency and cadence of call progress tones set to local standards



Lock Button

When the installer maps a telephone with this button, a user can press the button and dial an authorization code to deny other users access to lines and features at his or her telephone.

Also refer to the discussion titled Authorization Codes.

M

Manual Exclusion

Refer to the discussion titled Privacy Release.

Manual Reset

The system provides a button on the central processor unit circuit board for manually resetting the software. When someone presses this button, it causes the system to reset all lights, features, line states and station states.

Mark Problem Line

With this software release 4A feature, system users can mark a line that is not functioning properly as a problem line. They do this by dialing a feature code or pressing a pre-programmed button. After users have marked a particular line a programmed number of times, the system takes the line out of service

(unless programmed to prevent this from happening). When the system takes the line out of service, it logs the condition and triggers an alarm. The printed error log will then show which line is out of service and so will the displayed error log. An out of service line is only out of service for line group use; it is available for direct selection or prime line access. Further, an out of service line is available for all inbound calls unless it is a DID line. The CO will not send a call over a disabled DID line. Users can not mark a line during a conference call or when they are DISA callers. When users mark a line during an active call, the system records the mark for the active line. If users take marking action during an idle condition, the system records the mark for the last active line (this includes lines that are presently on hold).

System users can use the line disable feature at the programmer’s station to restore service on the out of service line. Programmers can restore service to individual disabled lines or they can take action to restore service to all marked lines in the system if they wish.

Master Clearing The System

When master clearing the system, the installer can set the parameters to one of three settings.

Mode 1—"Key-Like Mode"

At default, assigns line appearances for every multiline telephone but does not assign group intercoms in any station hunt list.

Mode 2—"PBX-Like Mode"

At default, assigns no line appearances but does default two unique group intercom appearances for every multiline telephone in the hunt list.

Mode 3—"All-clear"

This option defaults the system with no button mapping, group intercom access, or extension numbers for stations.



Maximum Call Duration

This feature automatically cuts off calls on certain lines after a preprogrammed time. The system will not cut off calls made to an emergency number. The system sounds a warning tone at the busy station 10 seconds before it disconnects the call. The warning tone consists of one 800 ms burst followed by eight

100 ms bursts.

Meet—Me Answer Page

Any station user can dial a code in response to an all-call or zone page and be connected to the paging party in a private conversation.

Memory Retention Without Batteries

The database programming is electronically protected during AC power failures by an internal electronic component sometimes known as a “supercap”. The stored data will remain in memory for a minimum of

30 hours provided that the system has been powered continuously for approximately 30 minutes prior to the power failure or disconnection. The system clock will continue to run for at least 30 minutes after an

AC power failure or disconnection.

Message Deposit

This messaging feature allows station users to call an LCD speakerphone and arrange for a message to be left on its display. The message is for the called party to read if he or she is unable to answer the caller.

Message Waiting

A special feature access code allows a station user to control the message waiting (MW) light at other stations in the system. When the message waiting light is turned on at a station, the user can automatically call the station that turned it on. Stations that include an LCD display show the source of the message.

The programmer can program one station as the central message desk and arrange it for exclusive message waiting control. The central message desk user can control message waiting lights and deliver messages to and from all other stations in the system. The programmer can also provide a programmable button for placing and retrieving message waiting calls. Single line telephones only utilize central message desk signaling. A station can have as many 8 message waiting lights stacked at one time.

Mnemonic Programming

Refer to the discussion titled Programmable Button Flexibility.

Modem Support

The system supports the operation of the DXMDM serial data modem. The DXMDM is a general-purpose, 300, 1200, and 2400 automatic baud detect, serial data modem that receives its operating power and configuration programming from the DXP Plus system. The CPU board provides a dedicated serial data port for DXMDM modem use. If your installer connects the modem to a serial data port that is supplied by a communications card, he or she will need to program the system for modem operation on this port. Regardless of where the modem is connected, the system arranges for that port to automatically match the baud rate and serial data parameters of the modem.

The system also supports the operation of a customer-supplied modem connected to a serial data port that is supplied by a communications card.. This customer-supplied modem must be self-powered and must provide its own terminal ready and auto answer capability.



Modify Digits Table

Refer to the discussion titled Automatic Route Selection.

Multiple Attendant Positions

The system supports the operation of an attendant position at more than one station port.

Also refer to the discussion titled Attendant Position.

Multipurpose Line Board

The multipurpose line board provides system interface for ground start lines, loop start lines, and E & M

Tie lines; these are typically the three line types that the central office (CO) makes available for connection. The multipurpose line board is programmable for each line type. You can have a maximum of two Tie lines on each multipurpose line board.

Music Interface

The services circuit board provides a modular jack where the installer can connect customer-provided music sources. Two different sources can be used so that the music supplied to parties while they are on hold is different than that supplied internally for background music. Also refer to the discussions titled

Background Music and Music On Hold.

Music On Hold (MOH)

When an installer connects a customer-supplied music source to the system and the programmer enables the feature, music is provided to outside lines and intercom calls while they are on hold. Music on hold can be turned on or off system-wide by attendant action. Also see discussions titled Music Interface and

Background Music. You can program each line for either music on hold source.

Mute

Each multiline telephone has a MUTE button that, when pressed by the user, will mute the handset transmitter (or internal microphone on speakerphones) to prevent the user’s voice from being heard by the distant party. The mute light flashes to indicate a muted condition. Users can respond to a SOHVA by pressing the MUTE button and speaking to the SOHVA sender and releasing the button when they have finished their response. The button provides push-on/push-off operation on speakerphones. Also refer to the discussion titled Handsfree Answer Inhibit and Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce.



N

Names (Station And Lines)

The programmer can name every station and line connected to the system for identification and programming purposes. On an LCD speakerphone, the name of called and calling stations appear in the display. When a user selects a line for use or when it is ringing on a call, the line name appears in the

LCD speakerphone display.

Night Service Automatic Switching

The programmer can arrange the system to automatically enter and exit the night transfer (of ringing) mode of operation on a timed basis.

Also refer to the discussion titled Night Transfer (Of Ringing).

Night Ringing

The attendant can manually place the system in the night ringing mode by dialing a code or pressing a preprogrammed button. This mode overrides the direct, day 1, and day 2 automatic ringing modes.

While this feature is active, calls on lines assigned to delayed and night ringing both ring at the various stations. No other ringing occurs unless the programmer has arranged for a loud ringing bell or other external ringing device to sound when calls appear on those assigned lines during the night ringing mode.

These calls may be answered at any telephone in the system if the user dials the proper code.

When the attendant station includes a preprogrammed night transfer (of ringing) button, its associated light conveys the following system ringing status: day 1 ringing = steady on, day 2 ringing = wink with off time, night ringing = continuous wink, and manual night transfer (of ringing) = flutter.


External Paging Interface, Flexible Ringing Assignments, and Line Answer From Any Station.

O

Off-Premise Extension (OPX)

Installers can locate any industry-standard telephone away from the main premises served by the system.

To enable this feature, they must use a proprietary interface device between the telephone and the DXP

Plus system and make the necessary programming entries.

On-Hook Dialing

Multiline speakerphones and monitor telephones provide manual and/or automatic dialing while it’s handset is on-hook. An internal loudspeaker monitors call progress for completion (the user must take the handset off-hook to provide the voice link on non-speakerphone monitor stations).

Operator Station

The system programmer designate the station that you want to ring when system users dial the operator.

Usually this station is an attendant position station; however, the operator station can be any station in the system. In other words, the operator station does not have to be an attendant position station if you do not want it to be one. Plus, the programmer can change the code that users dial to call the operator from a default of 0 to the dialing code of your choice.



Originating Denied

The programmer can deny users the ability to originate calls on certain lines or intercom numbers at certain stations. Originating denied does not prevent a user from answering a ringing line, retrieving a held call or receiving a transferred call.

Out-Dial Delay Time

With speed dialing, it is sometimes necessary for the system to wait a short time after selecting a line and before dialing the number. This wait period gives the telephone company switching equipment time to prepare to receive the dialed number. This feature provides a programmable wait time to match various types of telephone company switching equipment.

P

Paging Access

This feature allows station users to dial-up customer provided loudspeaker paging equipment and page over externally placed loudspeakers and determines what paging zones, if any, a station can page over.

Password Protection

No one can enter a programming mode to reprogram the system without first entering a password. The system provides two different entry levels for programming and allows for a different password for each entry. While the passwords are the same at default, a programmer can change them as needed to provide security against unauthorized program entries. The two programming entry levels are the installer level and the administrator level. Programmers can enter the installer level, using the installer password, to perform all programming functions including major changes such as master clearing or defaulting , feature renumbering, and diagnostics. They can enter the administrator level, using the administrator password, to perform most programming functions except those major changes just mentioned. When the system is initially installed and programmed, or at any later time as needed, the installer programmer can make the two passwords different to limit subsequent access to either programming level to certain special or authorized people.

The system also provides two entry levels for main station database programming and provides a different feature code for each entry. These feature codes default to certain values, but a programmer can change them as needed to provide security against unauthorized program entries. These two different programming entry levels are the system manager and the attendant levels. On-site system managers use the system manager feature code to make many program changes in the system, line, station, and station class of service parameters. Attendants use the attendant feature code to make routine changes in the day-to-day operating parameters of the system such as revamping LCD messages, adding system speed dial numbers, and setting the system clock.

The installer programmer can change the passwords and the feature codes from the default values to custom ones whenever a change is needed. Also, the system manager can change the feature codes at any time he or she chooses. When they change these passwords and feature codes, they should keep a record of the new ones since the default words and codes will no longer provide entry to the programming.

Pause Time

During speed dialing, it is sometimes necessary for the system to delay the sending of dialed digits to give telephone company switching equipment time to prepare to receive them. This feature allows users to store pauses as part of the stored number at the points in the numbering sequence where delays are required.



PBX/CENTREX/Central Office Compatible

System features and programmable buttons support the requirements of most PBXs, Central Offices, and

CENTREX systems. Users can make numbers, #, ✴, programmable pauses, and flash signals a part of every stored number for access to host system feature codes.

PC Attendant

Refer to Attendant Position, PC.

Periodic Line Tone

This feature provides periodic warning tones to station users while they are busy on certain lines. The warning tone consists of one 500 ms burst, a 100 ms off period, and one100 ms burst. The tone reminds the users to keep their conversations short on these lines. The system programmer can enable this feature for a class of service of telephones and then specify the applicable lines. Further, he or she can select how often the tone sounds.

Personal Intercom Number

Refer to the discussion titled Intercom Number.

Personal Intercom Number Preference

When a telephone goes off-hook, the system automatically connects it to the personal intercom number assigned to the station.

Personalized Ringing Tone

This feature allows a station user with certain model telephones to choose one of several different ring tones to aid in distinguishing one ringing station from another.

Pooled Line Access

Refer to the discussion titled Line Group Access.

Power Failure Transfer

A power failure line connection is available on each line interface board for connecting industry-standard telephones such as a Comdial ATC or MaxPlus model. The system automatically connects these power-fail telephones directly to certain lines whenever there is an AC power failure. During a power failure, users can originate and receive calls on a power-fail station. The power-fail stations automatically disconnect as soon as power is restored.

Preselection

This feature provides an override to the automatic line preference. If a station user presses a line button on his or her telephone before lifting the handset, the station will go off hook on the selected line.

Prime Line

With this feature, a station automatically selects a line, line group, or intercom number for use when the user takes it off hook. The feature can be over-ridden if the user preselects another line, line group, or intercom number before lifting the handset. If the prime line is ringing, it is automatically answered when the user lifts the handset—this feature can be used along with ringing line preference functions. Also see—Ringing Line Preference.



Printer Interface

The system makes a wide variety of printout records available through a serial data port provided by a communications card. The programmer can direct these printouts to the SMDR/SMDA data printer or to the screen of the programming PC. Also refer to the discussions titled Communications Card Support and

Serial Data Port.

Privacy

Refer to the discussion titled Automatic Privacy.

Privacy Release

The programmer can assign a privacy button to a telephone. If a line has privacy release programmed for it, a user can press the privacy button to change it into a non-private one.

Private Lines

Lines may appear at one station port or at selected station ports for call origination and reception yet may not appear at other stations.

See the discussion titled Direct In Lines.

Program Printout

The system supports an RS-232 compatible, asynchronous serial data printer to the system. When a data printer is connected to a serial port, the programmer can command it to provide a printout of all or selected database data, and the system administrator or attendant can command it to print selected data.

Programmable Button Flexibility

The programmable buttons accommodate any combination of line appearances, features, speed dial numbers and other intercom numbers. A shift operation permits the station user to program speed dial numbers on the second level. Through the button mapping programming procedure, the programmer can assign functions and features to each button on every system station using a list of mnemonics (shorthand titles for functions and features that the system software understands).

A button may be programmed as one of four things:

1. Feature button (including line group access)

2. Line direct appearance button

3. Intercom number button (DSS/ BLF)

4. Speed dial button - If shift is used, a second level of autodial storage is available.

Also refer to the discussions titled Button Mapping, Square / Non Square Configuration, and Full Button

Programmability Of Features.

Programming Port

Refer to the discussion titled Database Programming (From The Main Station).



Pulse/Tone Switchable

If the installation site is in an area that supplies rotary (pulse) dialing lines from the central office instead of, or in addition to, tone (DTMF) dialing lines, the programmer can match the dialing mode of the line port to that of the line. If a rotary dial line is matched, further programming action matches the system with the pulses-per-second rotary dial signaling of the line. The system defaults the line ports to match tone dialing lines.

On those occasions when a user needs to send DTMF tones after making a call on a rotary line (to generate banking-by-telephone codes for instance), he or she can dial a # to convert the dialing mode to tone for the duration of the present call. The system changes it back to pulse when that call is completed.

Q

Quick Transfer

The quick transfer feature allows users to perform an automatic screened or unscreened transfer of an incoming line call without pressing their telephone’s TRANS/CNF button. The transfer occurs automatically as soon as the user who answers the call dials the intercom number or access code for the transfer location. The system begins the call transfer process as soon as the user dials a digit on his or her dial pad, and effects the transfer as soon as the user hangs up or presses his or her telephone’s RELEASE button. When installers activate this feature, it greatly reduces the keystrokes that users must take to transfer calls over a tie line.

R

Recall

Refer to the discussion titled Timed Recall.

Recall/Flash (TAP)

Refer to the discussion titled TAP (Flash)/Recall.

Relays

Refer to the discussion titled Auxiliary Ringer Interface.

Release Button

When a telephone is mapped with this button and a user presses it, the system discontinues the current active operation and returns the station to an idle state. When used along with an answer button, the release button provides rapid call handling.

Also refer to the discussions titled Database Program Storage and Password Protection.

Reminder Alert

A user can set up to two reminder alerts to sound at his or her telephone. The alert sounds at the station as four short tone bursts, which continue until the user responds to the alert by pressing CLEAR. This feature only works on digital stations that have interactive buttons.



Remote Programming And Diagnostics

Programmers can program the DXP Plus system from a personal computer (PC) running the visual man machine interface (VMMI) program. The PC can be connected directly to the maintenance port on the services board or connected by modem through the public telephone network. For remote programming to take place, an installer must connect the DXP Plus modem between the maintenance port on the services board and an outside telephone line, and connect a customer-supplied modem between the PC and an outside telephone line. In addition to database programming, installers with the proper password entry can perform maintenance routines and diagnose system malfunctions to the board level.

Remote Station Disable

This feature allows users at stations with the proper class of service to dial a code and remotely disable or enable another station. Normally, the installer should give this capability to the system attendant but could assign it to any class of service that is appropriate.

Response Messaging

Users can set messages to be received and displayed by calling LCD speakerphones. These messages give information on the status of the called telephone. The system attendant usually programs customized messages for use by the other telephone users, although the defaulted system does provide several general purpose messages for use.

Telephone users can program a response message button on their telephones if they wish. This response message button lets them make a non-verbal response to subdued off-hook voice announce calls or intercom calls using the attendant-prepared response messages.

Restricted Dialing Error Tone

When you dial a toll-restricted number from your telephone, you will hear an intercom error tone frequency with a continuous pattern of 250 ms on and 250 ms off. With earlier software, no audible error indication is given.

If you have a LCD speakerphone, the message EXT or Code is displayed. The message Dialing Denied is displayed instead.

Ring No-Answer (RNA) Call Forward

Refer to the discussion titled Default Busy/Ring No-Answer.

Ring Back On Busy

With this feature disabled, when someone calls another telephone and the calling party is busy on an outside line, the caller hears a ring back tone—not a busy tone. In this case, when the caller is using a non-display telephone he or she has no means of knowing the busy status of the called party. (LCD speakerphones can display called party status— for details on this display feature, see the paragraph titled

Allow Busy Display). Installers can take programming action on a individual station basis that allows callers to hear a busy tone instead of a ring back tone when they call a party who is busy on an outside line.

Ring Back On Transfer

Beginning with software release 3A, installers have the ability to control what outside parties hear while the system transfers their calls to an internal extension. Prior to this software release, outside parties hear whatever the music on hold source provides. With software release 3A, programmers can select ringback tone in place of music on hold on a per line basis.



Ring Back Tone

By default, when callers call an intercom party, they receive an intercom ring back tone to tell them that the called intercom station is ringing. Also, when they call over the CO line, they receive a CO-style ring back tone to tell them that the distant CO telephone is ringing. Some system users find intercom ring back tone confusing. When installers encounter this situation, they can take this programming action to assign

CO-style ring back tone to intercom calls on a system-wide basis.

Ring On Busy

If a user is on a speakerphone call (on certain model telephones) and a second call comes in to that station, a quick subdued tone burst sounds. If the user does not wish to hear this tone burst, the programmer can eliminate any ringing. For industry standard telephones, the system will send three short tone bursts through the handset.

Ringing Line Preference

When this feature is active at a station, a ringing line is automatically connected to a station when the user takes the handset off hook or presses the speaker button. No manual line selection is required.

S

Save Button Dial Storage

A user can dial digits and save them while on a call, which is useful should the distant party tell the user of a number to call and the user wishes to save that number for later redial.

Saved Number Redial

Refer to the paragraph titled Dynamic Save Button.

Screened Call Transfer

Refer to the feature discussion titled, Call Transfer–Screened.

Secure Account Code Display

Software release 3A enhances the SMDA/SMDR feature. Prior to software release 3A when a caller dials his or her account code, the LCD speakerphone displays the dialed digits. With software release 3A, the system programmer can activate the secure account code display that causes the LCD speakerphone to display a ✳ for each digit instead of the dialed account code digits.

Self Diagnostics

Each station can execute a self test when so enabled. This test verifies processor, indicator, and tone function.



Serial Data Port

The DXP Plus provides two serial data ports on the CPU board and dedicates them to PC-based programming and the remote maintenance modem. The installer can add up to 16 additional serial data ports to the system for interfacing such items as open architecture interface applications, PC attendant positions, and the SMDA data printer. He or she adds these serial data ports by installing communications cards on the services board, the expansion cabinet interface board, and the main cabinet’s auxiliary board.

Each of these boards accepts two communications cards in its lower two slots.

The DXP Plus supports a maximum of 18 serial data ports. Serial data ports 1 and 2 are the dedicated ports provided by the cpu board while communications cards provide the remaining 16 undedicated ports

(serial data ports 3–18).

The maximum available serial data baud rate is dependent upon the location of the communications card.

For cards located on the services board, the maximum baud rate is 19200 baud. For cards located on the auxiliary board or on the interface boards, the maximum baud rate is 9600 baud. There are some limitations involved. If a device is transmitting / receiving from the DXP Plus at a high rate, engineering sources recommend the use of a communications protocol (RTS / CTS or XON / XOFF) to prevent buffer overrun and data loss.

The maximum cable distance between a serial data device and a serial data port varies with the port’s system location. The dedicated ports on the services board are limited to 25 feet of cable. The undedicated serial ports on the services board are limited to 500 feet of cable when operated at the 19200 baud rate.

The undedicated serial ports on the auxiliary and interface boards are limited to 50 feet when operated at the 9600 baud rate.

For related information, refer to the feature description titled, Communications Card Support.

Service Observing

Service observing is programmable as a station class of service feature. It allows users to enter an in-progress call in an unannounced muted mode, to monitor the conversation. No warning tones sound when users make the call entry. This feature is useful in allowing a supervisor to monitor the performance of an employee during a phone conversation with a client. In order for a station to use the service observing feature, that station must have the initiate observe feature allowed and the telephone being observed must be programmed as observable while service observing is activated. The station that is being observed can continue to answer or originate multiple calls without disrupting the observing station.

Shift Button

The programmer can button map a certain station to have a SHIFT button. If a telephone includes a

SHIFT button, the user can press it to reach a second level of speed dial storage.

Also see the paragraph titled Station Speed Dial.

Silent Mode Button

When a telephone is mapped with this button, the user can press it to turn off the ringer at his or her station for the duration of the current ringing call. Ringer operation is restored when a new call rings at the station.




Single-Line Proprietary Telephone Support

The system supports a proprietary single-line telephone. The single-line telephone provides basic intercom service coupled with the ability to access outside lines and system features through special access codes. The programmer identifies the station port for single-line telephone use.

SMDA Reports

The system will automatically provide an SMDA report whenever the costed call storage reaches 95 percent of capacity. The programmer can arrange the system to print the reports automatically at a specific time in the order that they are specified. The attendant can view the number of free records or delete all stored records. Deleting all stored records insures that the system is storing only the latest

SMDA reports and provides a known starting point for record storage. Also, the installer can use the programming terminal to view the number of free records and delete all the stored records. Any call records created between the time the report printout was started and completed will not be printed or deleted. If the reports are not deleted after they are printed, a later command to delete records will delete all records at that point and not just the ones that were printed in the previously generated reports. The programmer can arrange for the system to always delete the records after they have been printed. The attendant can request particular reports at any time they are required.

If the programmer arranges the system to use account codes, they can be used to identify calls by category or by any other desired grouping so that costing by that category or grouping can be reported.

There are four different Station Message Detail Accounting reports.

•

Detailed report sorted by stations

•

•

•

Detailed report sorted by account codes

Line summary report

A general output of all records

SMDA Reports—Call Costing / Hold Time

The programmer can also choose between call costing reports and hold time display reports. The hold time display feature reports the accumulated time a line has been on hold; call costing reports the estimated cost of the call.

Speakerphone Support

The optional speakerphone provides handsfree operation of all features.

Speed Dial Sets

Refer to the discussions titled System Speed Dials and Station Speed Dials.



Split Button

When a telephone is mapped with this feature, the user can press the button to switch between the last call

(intercom, outside line, or conference) that they placed on hold and their current active call.


Square/Non-Square Configuration (Button Mapping)

Refer to the discussion titled Programmable Button Flexibility, and Full Button Programmability of

Features.

Station By Station Privacy

See the discussion titled Automatic Privacy.

Station Call Transfer

Refer to the discussions titled Call Transfer -Unscreened, Call Transfer - Screened.

Station Camp-On, Callback

Refer to the discussion titled Camp-On With Automatic Callback

Station Class Of Service

The programmer can enable or disable a group of features and parameters to provide a particular class of service (COS). The system permits the arrangement of up to 32 different classes of service. After programming the COS features, the programmer then programs individual stations to exhibit one of these different classes of service. He or she usually chooses certain COS features to match a particular group of users and then programs the stations assigned to these users to exhibit that COS.



Station Hunting

Station hunting is available to systems with a software revision of 3.A and later. Station hunting provides a means of routing both intercom and outside calls through an installer-determined grouping of stations.

This call routing continues to a designated overflow location in case of no answer or if all stations in the hunt group are busy. Station hunting works equally well with intercom, standard central office (CO) lines, direct inward dialing (DID/DNIS) lines, direct inward system access (DISA) lines, and E&M tie lines.

For station hunting purposes, stations are considered busy under the following conditions:

• when they are currently connected with a call (internal or external),

• when they have an incoming call currently ringing,

• when they have a call on hold, in DND, call forwarded, out of service or being intercepted by an OAI application.

The installer can enable default call forwarding for a hunt group station. This feature allows the system to forward the non-hunt group routed calls that a station receives. Calls routed to a station by the station hunting feature ignore the default call forwarding settings. The installer can assign all types and any number of lines to ring at a hunt group. He or she can assign the lines as direct, delayed, day 1, day 2 or night ringing lines.

Hunt Group Attributes

Pilot Extension: This is the extension number that callers dial to call or route calls to this hunt group. The pilot extension number is similar to a personal intercom number, or extension number, and follows the same numbering plan restrictions. When station hunting is used with DID/DNIS, the pilot extension is the extension number assigned in the DID/DNIS translation table. When station hunting is used with DISA, the pilot extension can be the extension number assigned to the signals digit translation for the digital voice announce (DVA) message associated with the DISA line.

Name: The hunt group’s name is the seven character alphanumeric name of this group that is used for

LCD display and reference.

Full Name: The hunt group’s full name is the 20 alphanumeric character name of the group that is used by OAI applications. (Future development will support OAI access and control of station hunting.)

Direct Ring Lines: The list of lines that directly ring at this hunt group when the system is not in the night mode of operation. This list can contain any lines in the system.

Delayed Ring Lines: The list of lines that delay ring on this hunt group. This list can contain any lines in the system.

Day 1, Day 2, Night Ring Lines: The lists of lines that can ring this hunt group during these programmed times. These lists can contain any lines in the system.

Member Stations: The list of stations that are members of this hunt group. This list can contain all stations in the system but is limited to personal intercom numbers only.

Overflow Destination: The overflow destination is a station intercom number, a group intercom number, a voice mail number, or another hunt group pilot extension where the system routes unserviced hunt group calls.

Queue Ringing Calls: With the queue ringing calls feature disabled and if all stations in the hunt group are busy, the system immediately routes hunt group calls to the overflow destination. With the queue ringing calls enabled, in the case of no answer or if all stations in the hunt group are busy, hunt group calls wait in a queue to be answered until an overflow timer times out then route to the overflow destination.



Station Hunting, Hunt Group Attributes–continued

DID/DNIS Display for Station Hunt Groups: Beginning with software release 4A, if station hunt group members need to differentiate incoming DID/DNIS calls, programmers can take action to cause a different display to occur. With this feature active, the display shows the incoming digits or translated name instead of the station hunting name.

Multiple Call Handling For Station Hunt Groups: Beginning with software release 4A, programmers can arrange the system to allow member stations within station hunt groups to handle multiple calls. With this feature turned off, the system considers any hunt group member stations that have calls on hold or in a park orbit to be busy to the station hunting call delivery process even though these stations are otherwise idle. With this feature turned on, the system considers any hunt group member stations that have calls on hold or in a park orbit to be available for additional call deliveries as long as these stations have ring positions available (that is: an available personal intercom number, hunt list and so forth).

Types Of Hunting

Terminal Hunting: Terminal station hunting always delivers a call to the first idle station programmed in the hunt group. If the station does not answer within a programmed amount of time (programmed as the Call Advance Timer), the system delivers the call to the next sequential idle station programmed in the hunt group. The system makes no attempt to balance the distribution of incoming calls as this is a linear search through the programmed list. The search starts at the beginning of the list for each incoming call.

Distributed Hunting: Distributed station hunting delivers a call to the next idle station in the hunt group after the station that received the previous call. If that station does not answer within the programmed call advance time, the system delivers the call to the next sequential idle station programmed in the hunt group. This hunting method is a linear search through the programmed list; however, the search starts wherever it left off after the previous call.

Longest Idle Station Hunting: Longest idle station hunting delivers a call to the station that has been idle for the longest period of time since completing the last call that was routed to it by the station hunting feature. In the case of stations with equal idle times (such as at system startup), the system picks the first of the grouped stations with equal idle times. If that station does not answer within the call advance time, the system delivers the call to the station with the next longest idle period.

Ring All Station Hunting: Ring all station hunting is not a true hunting method. This method delivers a call to all idle stations simultaneously. This is a good method to use when the site requires that all calls be answered as quickly as possible.

None (No Hunting): This selection disables hunting for the group. It allows a hunt group to be completely programmed yet disabled. Any intercom calls to this group will receive busy and line ringing ignores any programming within this group.

Station Hunting Timers

Call Advance Timer: This is the time interval that a station within a hunt group rings unanswered before the system routes the call to the next station in the group. This timer is programmable from 10 seconds though 5 minutes.

Overflow Timer: This is the maximum time interval that an unanswered call hunts within a group before the system routes it to the designated overflow station for the group. This timer is programmable from 30 seconds through 15 minutes.

Recall Timer: This is the maximum time interval that an unanswered transferred call hunts within a group before recalling to the source of the transfer. This timer is programmable from 30 seconds through

15 minutes.



Station Hunting Operation

When a system station user makes an intercom call to the hunt group pilot extension, the system rings the first available station within the hunt group (based on the group’s selected hunting method). This ringing appears on the station’s personal intercom. The system ignores all call announce settings as all intercom calls into a hunt group are treated as voice announce block calls. If the station does not answer the call within the programmed call advance time limit, the system rings the next station of the group. If no station answers within the programmed overflow time, the call rings the designated overflow destination.

When a line rings at a hunt group, it rings at the first available station within the group (based on the group’s selected hunting method). As the ringing line appears at the station, it follows the DXP Plus conventions for line appearances. If the station does not answer the call within the programmed call advance time limit, the system rings the next member station. If no station answers within the programmed overflow time, the system sends the call to the designated overflow destination.

The DXP Plus supports a maximum of 64 hunt groups. Each hunt group can include the maximum number of stations that the system can support; however, due to system memory limitations, all hunt groups can not contain all stations simultaneously. Since the system makes a total of 32 Kbytes of memory available for station hunt groups, you can use the following formula to determine possible station hunt group capacities.

[32768 Kbytes] – [(Stations per group) x (2) + (220 bytes of memory)] = memory remaining for next hunt group

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Station message detail recording provides a record of the incoming and outgoing calls handled by the system on selected lines. This record provides information for accounting and traffic analysis studies.

When enabled, SMDR is invoked automatically. The SMDR feature generates a call record for printing as soon as it is collected by the system. The call record is presented as ASCII data in an eighty-column format to an RS-232 data port located on the central processor unit circuit board. SMDR requires customer-provided equipment such as a printer or other compatible data recording device.

Also see the discussion titled Call Costing and SMDA Reports.

Station Monitoring With DSS Call Pick Up

Refer to the discussion titled Intercom Number.



Station Name

The installer can assign a display name and a full name to a station. A display name is composed of a maximum of seven characters and shows in the display of an LCD speakerphone as a identification aid. A full name is composed of a maximum of 20 characters and shows in some voice mail and open architecture interface applications. The installer can compose a valid name from any alpha-numeric character; however, the first character of a display name must be an alphabetic character.

Station Speed Dial

Station speed dialing is a feature that lets the user dial lengthy numbers using one or two buttons, store frequently used feature dialing codes, and store intercom extension numbers of frequently called telephones. The user can store speed dial numbers at any unused programmable button, or if the programmer assigns a shift button to a telephone, or one exists as a fixed feature button, the user can store a speed dial number at a second level under any programmable button.

Speed dial buttons can store up to 16 digits, Plus trunk or intercom number selection. Stored digits include 0-9, ✼ and #. A pause is stored at any point where the HOLD button is pressed, and a hookflash is stored at any point where the TAP button is pressed. Also refer to the discussion titled Automatic

Pause Insertion.

There are two levels of storage on speed dial buttons. To access the second level, the user must press the programmed SHIFT button. The shift mode is then active for five seconds after the SHIFT button is pressed. If a SHIFT button is not available, the user has access to only one level of speed dial storage.

A speed dial set is a group of 10 speed dial locations. The DXP Plus system allocates one speed dial set to each telephone as a default but can allocate up to 10 sets to a telephone if a programmer makes it so.

When a DSS/BLF Console is operated as a companion to a telephone, the programmer must allocate it’s speed dial sets at the companion telephone to be shared with the console. The total system speed dial allocation that is available is 960 sets or 9600 individual speed dial locations.

Station Transfer Recall

Refer to the discussion titled Timed Recall.



Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce (SOHVA)

With the subdued off-hook voice announce (SOHVA) feature, a subdued announcement can be made from one station to another station that is off-hook and busy on a call. When a user is operating a telephone in a handsfree mode, it cannot receive a SOHVA. The telephone must be a model that includes

SOHVA capability. With SOHVA, the announcement is delivered and responded to in a subdued manner that prevents the distant party from hearing either the announcement or the response. A tone alert precedes the announcement and is delivered to the handset receiver of the telephone ahead of the announcement. The installer can program the number of tones that the system delivers. The announcing callers also receive a tone to alert them that they are making a SOHVA call. Users can response to the announcement in a verbal or non-verbal manner. They affect a verbal response by pressing and holding the MUTE button or appropriate interactive button and speaking into the handset. They effect non-verbal response by pressing a pre-programmed button to send a message to be shown on the display of the announcing station (if it is an LCD speakerphone). The announcing station is automatically disconnected after the response message is displayed. Stations that have the voice announce blocking feature turned on cannot receive a SOHVA call. Also refer to the discussion titled Call Announce with Handsfree

Answer-back and Response Messaging.

SOHVA installations for analog telephones requires two paired station ports. In addition to the wiring connections associated with the installation, the installer must take certain programming actions. He or she must mark the telephone type for the odd-numbered station port to support the connected telephone, and mark the telephone type for the even-numbered station port undefined.

Busy On SOHVA

A default, a system returns a ring back tone to users who make SOHVA calls to busy stations; however, the system programmer can arrange for telephone users to receive a busy signal instead of the ring back tone. This feature lets non-LCD telephone users know that a called station is busy.

SOHVA Beeps (SOHVA Tone Bursts)

Installers can choose the number of tone bursts that each telephone user hears preceding a SOHVA message to be a value of from one to six.

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce Groups

The SOHVA calling groups control the pattern that station ports receive and/or originate SOHVA calls to one another. The programmer first creates SOHVA groups and then assigns individual stations to each group.

Subdued Ringing

When a station is busy on a call and another call comes to the same station, the ringing of the second call will automatically be subdued to a lower volume.

Synchronized Ringing

When the programmer enables synchronized ringing, the central office ringing pattern is tracked on external calls that ring within the DXP Plus system.

Also refer to the discussion titled Discriminating Ringing.

System Clock

The system clock provides time and date information for display on LCD speakerphones and on

SMDR/SMDA printouts. The clock also provides the time for the user–set alert feature.



System Speed Dial

System speed dialing provides system users with a repertory of up to 500 numbers that they can dial from any telephone in the system. The programmer or the attendant is responsible for storing the system speed dial numbers. These numbers can be up to 32 digits long and can include line number selection, the dial pad digits 0-9, ✻, and #, Plus pauses and hookflash signals.

The programmer or attendant can divide the unused or available system speed dial numbers into up to 50 different groups with 10 numbers in each group and then assign different speed dial groups to each station class of service (total of 500).

The program can choose a line a line group that the system will automatically select for speed dialing.

Alternately, the programmer or attendant can choose the intercom to be automatically selected for speed dialing. This enhancement allows an intercom selection and feature codes to be stored together as speed dial numbers for true one-button access to features (for example; store INTERCOM ✼11 and

INTERCOM #1 at two locations for system wide availability to music on and music off). This enhancement will not accept ✼#0✼ or ✻#746✻ as programming entries and it ignores any entered pauses or hookflashes.

System Status And E1–T1 Status Log Viewing

When enabled, this feature permits the system to light a system status light to notify certain designated stations when a system error condition occurs. You can view the status log directly from an LCD speakerphone. If the E1 or T1 option is installed, you can also view the status log from an LCD speakerphone in the same manner.

Your LCD speakerphone must have a pre-programmed system status button to enter the status log viewing mode. The status button is programmed using the button mapping procedure in the Programming

Instructions. The LCD status log viewing feature allows you to view the log only. The installer must use programming to clear the log.

To enter the log viewing mode, you press the system status button (the system status button flashes red if any log entries exist). The LCD indicates SYSTEM and E1 (if the E1 option is installed) or T1 (if the T1 option is installed). Select the log you want to view by pressing the related interactive button. If you are using a telephone that is not equipped with interactive buttons, you can use dial pad buttons 1, 2, and 3 that perform the same functions as the interactive buttons. See the following chart.

Interactive Button

Location Displayed Function

Left SYSTEM,

Left REV

Center FWD

Right, T1

Right, INFO

1

1

2

3

3

Equivalent Dial Pad Button

After selecting the log you want to view, you can view the time and date of the current log entry by pressing the INFO interactive button (or dial pad button 3 when appropriate). You can scroll through the selected log to view all of the entries by pressing the REV and FWD interactive buttons (or dial pad buttons 1 and 2 when appropriate).

The number of entries in the log is displayed whenever you press the # button.

You exit the log viewing mode either by pressing the SPEAKER button, pressing the hookswitch, or waiting for the 15-second time-out.



T

T1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option (For Domestic U.S.A. Applications)

The T1 digital carrier transmission option is a domestic U.S.A. option that allows up to 24 channels of voice and/or data transmissions over a single four-wire cable using multiplexing techniques in superframe

(SF) or extended superframe (ESF) format. For convenience, a customer service unit (CSU) is built into the T1 option board to terminate the T1 channels, provide protection from transient voltages, and respond to loopback requests from the central office.

Since the DXP Plus supports a maximum of 240 lines, and each T1 board handles up to 24 channels, installers can place up to 10 T1 boards in the DXP Plus system. They can install these 10 boards in any available universal board slot in the main and expansion cabinets. Of course, any other installed line boards, such as loop start, DID or multipurpose, reduce the number of lines available for T1 service and thus reduces the number of T1 boards that installers can add to the system.

The installation must include the Syncronization card (DXOPT-SYN) on the Services board whenever one or more T1 boards is installed, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source. In installations where the local DXP Plus is supplying the clock signal for the far system, the local system does not require a DXOPT-SYN card.

Programmers can assign a system status button to a station and enable the system to report T1 transmission errors via the T1 status log. Depending on how they program the system, the T1 status log either prints out on an optional printer or is displayed on an optional video display terminal (VDT). A user can also view the T1 status log from an LCD speakerphone by programming a system status button.

Also, programmers can arrange the system to alert the system attendant whenever a major alarm alerting condition occurs by activating an external, customer-supplied audible or visual alarm. The external alarm connects to one of the relay jacks (J3 or J4) on the front of the DXCPU board. Installers must make sure the alarming device complies with system voltage and power requirements. Programmers determine when a major alarm alerting condition should occur by programming threshold values and corresponding time periods for each type of alarm caused by a transmission error. Whenever the threshold value is reached within the programmed time period, the selected relay on the DXCPU board is activated by the board’s circuits, which in turn, activates the external alarm. The system attendant can turn the alarm off from any specified station by dialing a feature code.

Pad Level—Transmit, Receive

(Gain And Attenuation Settings For Line Transmit And Receive)

This feature enhances the T1–E1 digital carrier transmission option, the pad level programming feature adjusts voice levels for both the transmit and receive circuits in the individual channels.

The choices include: Gain 2, Gain 1, Nominal, Loss 1, Loss 2, Loss 3, Loss 4, and Loss 5. These settings provide an approximate +6 to -15 dB range of choices. Starting at the Nominal setting, each gain level represents an approximate 3 dB amplification of the signal level from the previous setting, and each loss level represents an approximate 3 dB attenuation of the signal level from the previous setting. Because digital transmission does not lose volume level as readily as analog transmission does, it is likely that the receive level may be noticeably higher when using the E1 option. Therefore, you may need to select a low setting such as Loss 2 for the voice level receive parameter when programming this feature for E1 lines that are being used exclusively for voice transmission. Further, if you choose a setting to increase the receive gain, you should carefully examine speakerphone operation. It is possible to select a receive gain that will, under certain conditions, interfere with proper speakerphone operation.



TAP (Flash)/Recall

When host system custom calling features are available via a hook-flash signal while on line, the TAP button functions as a hook-flash button and generates a flash signal when the user presses it. When custom calling signals are not available, the TAP button functions as a positive disconnect and recalls dial tone when the user presses it. These features are mutually exclusive. The programmer sets the desired function for the system by programming action. With single–line proprietary telephones, the Tap function works for internal transferring only. An access code is required to activate custom calling features

Telephony Services Application Programming Interface (TSAPI) Support

The DXP Plus provides support for TSAPI applications. These applications are Novell Telephony

Services* applications developed by third-party software vendors. TSAPI applications run independently of the DXP Plus yet use its digital communications capability. The DXP Plus’ Enterprise open architecture interface (OAI) data port provides the hardware interface for the personal computer (PC) that runs the TSAPI software program. Depending upon the TSAPI application and its functions, there may or may not be a need to reprogram the DXP Plus’ database feature parameters.

*Novell, Novell Netware, and Novell Telephony Services are registered trademarks of Novell Inc. Orem, UT

Through Dialing

An installer can connect external telephony equipment to the DXP Plus through a proprietary interface device or through an IST port. When the programmer enables the through dialing feature, DTMF tones that the external device generates pass through the interface equipment, the DXP Plus system, and any line connection. Also see the paragraph titled Off Premise Extension.

Time And Date

The time designation will accept either a 12- or 24-hour format. Time and date appear on the LCD speakerphone and the SMDA/SMDR record printout.

Timed And Immediate Recall

If a telephone user places a call on hold and fails to pick it back up within a preprogrammed time, the call rings the user’s telephone again. While only the telephone that put the call on hold rings, all other telephones that share call appearance will flash the light for the held call at a hold recall rate.

Recall to an originating station also occurs from unanswered parked calls, transferred calls, and calls that are camped-on. Plus, unanswered calls (ring no-answer calls) recall to the attendant or other preprogrammed designation after exceeding a preprogrammed time-out period.

Any transfer attempt that fails will cause the held call to recall immediately. Examples of failed transfer attempts are calling any of the following:

- non-existent extension

- partial extension number

- invalid extension number

A calling party continues to hear music on hold (if provided) throughout the recall sequence.



Toll Restriction

With the toll restriction feature, the system allows or denies outgoing line calls to selected users over selected lines. Toll restriction meets different dialing needs by allowing users to dial numbers that they are required to dial yet restrict them from dialing numbers they are not allowed to dial. Toll restriction can be used together with the automatic route selection and call costing features if desired, or used separately as a stand alone feature or not used at all.

The programmer assigns toll restriction to stations based on system requirements. Telephones that are not assigned this feature are free to dial any number their users choose to dial. Plus, a toll restricted station can dial any telephone number that it is not restricted from dialing. If a station is restricted from dialing a certain telephone number on a certain line, it can, if programming permits, dial that number on another line that is not restricted. Further programming action specifies whether or not toll restriction applies to system speed dial numbers. The programmer can also differentiate between day toll restrictions and toll restrictions that only take effect in night mode. A defaulted system imposes no toll restriction on any station.

The toll restriction feature first compares a dialed number to a matching assigned restricted number up to the last digit in the assigned number. At that point it considers it a match and applies other toll restriction tests whether the station user keeps dialing or not. If all toll restriction tests are met, the station is not normally allowed to dial the number. There are 32 exception number test matches assigned to the station.

Exception numbers allow stations to dial numbers that they are not normally allowed to dial by their toll restriction.

Toll Restriction Pause Entries

When this feature is activated by installers, they can enter a pause at the end of a restricted number’s digit string to indicate that dialing is complete. They do this by typing a P or p after they type the digit string.

The pause entry distinguishes this restricted number as unique. They can enter the same digits without the pause but instead followed by additional digits as another unique number. They can assign different routing and toll restriction parameters to each of these entries. There are several applications for this feature. One application is in international dialing where different toll restriction parameters apply depending upon whether the caller dialed 0 or 011. In this case, installers can enter 0 pause to access local lines and 01 to access international lines. Another application is with tie line calling where a remote extension is the same digits as an office or area code that installers need to enter in the restriction table.

By entering nnn pause for tie line access and nnn@ for CO line access, the system can route the call over the proper line. A third application is brought forth with the advent of the new North American

Numbering Plan (NANP). With NANP, an area code may be the same digits as a local office code.

Installers can enter nnn@@@@ pause for local line access and nnn@@@@@@@ for long distance line access (the @ is a match anything character). In any application, the system resets its pause timer after receiving each caller dialed digit. If the timer expires before the caller dials another digit, the system routes the call based on the digits preceding the pause. If, instead, the system detects more digits instead of a pause, it routes the call based on the entire digit string.

Tone On Hold

This feature gives you an alternative to providing music or no music for callers who are placed on hold.

When you program this feature into the DXP Plus system, both internal and external callers hear a pattern of short tone bursts while they are on hold. The patterns consist of two 1/10-second tone bursts separated by 1/10-second. These tone patterns repeat every five seconds.

The installer enables this feature and assigns it to particular trunks through line programming or stations through class of service programming using the PC. The system manager can also select this feature from the applicable class of service from a programming station for intercom calls placed on hold. The choices when programming this feature are: music from source one, music from source 2, tone on hold, or nothing.



Tone Or Voice Signaling On Internal Calls

Intercom number calls can be tone signaled or voice signaled as desired. Programming determines which signaling method the system uses as the primary method when an intercom number call is made. Users can choose the alternate method at the station by pressing the intercom key. Intercom number call progress is marked by special tone signals.

Tracker Paging System

The Tracker Paging System interfaces a DXP system with individual Tracker pagers. The Tracker Paging

System informs users through their Tracker pagers that they have a call waiting for them. The Tracker base station connects to any of the DXP system’s serial ports or to the PC Attendant position. The DXP can accept up to four Tracker base stations supporting up to 600 Tracker pagers. Many different types of

Tracker pagers are supported—from those with numeric displays to those that display a pre-programmed message up to 32 alphanumeric characters long.

Creating Messages From The PC Attendant

Up to eight default messages can be programmed and delivered from the PC Attendant position only (see the Digital Communications System PC Attendant’s Console User’s Guide, GCA 70-230 for instructions).

The PC attendant can be in either the local or the system mode of operation.

RNA Or Busy Tracking

If the called station fails to answer or is busy, the caller can activate the Tracker Paging System by pressing the TRACK button on his or her telephone. The TRACK button is one of the telephone’s interactive buttons. On telephones not equipped with interactive buttons, the caller activates the Tracker

Paging System by dialing the Tracker access code (defaults to✳ 8). When the call is accepted, the caller will hear a confirmation tone, or if it is not accepted, a busy tone.

Direct Tracking

The caller can also do direct paging by pressing the TRACK programmed button or by dialing the

Tracker access code (defaults to ✳ 8). The telephone prompts the caller with its display to enter the assigned extension number for the pager along with the display message Enter Ext :

Transfer Tracking

If the system attendant attempts to transfer a call to an extension that does not answer (or is busy) and then activates the Tracker pager assigned to that extension, the incoming call is placed on a page orbit.

Once the system places the call on a page orbit, the user’s Tracker pager displays the orbit number so that he or she can retrieve the call by dialing the number of the orbit containing the call. If the user does not retrieve the call within the pre-programmed time-out, the call returns to the attendant. The Tracker Paging

System supports up to 100 page orbits.



Using Voice Mail With Tracking

When a caller reaches an extension with an assigned Tracker pager, and that extension is covered by proprietary voice mail, the system may prompt the caller to either select the assigned Tracker pager or leave a message. If the caller selects the Tracker pager, the system places the call in a page orbit, and displays that page orbit number on the user’s Tracker pager. The user retrieves the call by dialing the number of the page orbit containing the call. After a pre-programmed time-out, the call is returned to the proprietary voice mail where the caller can leave a message.

Accessing The Tracker Pager From DISA

The Tracker Paging System is accessible from DISA by using the DVA voice messages.

Programming Options

There are three levels of programming associated with Tracker operation.

The installer or programmer performs the DXP system level using a PC. Programming at this level installs Tracker operating parameters and pager-to-intercom assignments that can only be changed at this programming level.

The PC attendant level of programming, available when the PC attendant position is installed, operates in one of two modes–local or system. In the local mode, the attendant assigns pagers to intercoms and selects pager types. This programming is transparent to the DXP system and does not alter any Tracker programming done at the DXP system level. In the system mode of operation, all Tracker operating parameters and pager-to-intercom assignments are as programmed into the DXP system by the installer or system programmer.

The system manager level of programming allows the system administrator to use a programming station to select a Tracker base station and enable or disable the Tracker Paging system.

Transfer/Conference Button

Each multiline telephone and proprietary multiline telephone provides a fixed button that gives quick, easy transferring and conferencing of calls.

Transfer Recall

Refer to the discussion titled Timed Recall.

Transfer Ring Cadence

A telephone user can select the ringing cadence that announces a transferred line call. They have two choices as follows: one cadence provides a 2 sec. on—4 sec. off tone, the other cadence provides a 0.5 sec on—5.5 sec. off tone. The programmer can choose either cadence as the default setting.

U

Unscreened Call Transfer

Refer to the discussion titled, Call Transfer - Unscreened With Automatic Camp-On.

Unsupervised Conference

Refer to the discussion titled Conferencing - Multiline.



V

Voice Mail Integration Digits

Installers can choose the DTMF digits that the DXP Plus sends to a voice mail system. A voice mail system uses these DTMF digits to determine system and station status so that it can properly process a call. Installers must be versed in the voice mail’s requirements before they can assign DTMF integration digits in the DXP Plus. The system defaults the voice mail parameters to match the Comdial voice mail system. Certain applications in countries with dialing plans different than the United States may require different integration digits. The default digits are shown in the following list and discussed below:

Follow Extension ID = 2

Busy = 2

Incoming Intercom Answer = 9

Intercom/Answer Confirmation = 1

Do Not Disturb = 3

Disconnect = A

Follow Extension ID – When the voice mail system receives a forwarded call from a ring no-answer

(RNA) or busy station, the DXP Plus sends to the voice mail system the extension number of the forwarded call followed by this DTMF digit (n). The DXP Plus sends this digit within 500 ms of the time the voice mail system answers the call. For example, if extension 101 is forwarded to voice mail and voice mail answers a forward RNA or busy forwarded call, the DXP Plus sends 101n to the voice mail system within 500 ms of the answer time.

Intercom/Answer Confirmation – The DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system to confirm that an intercom path (without dial tone) is available for the voice mail system’s call transfer or dialing use. The DXP Plus sends this digit within 500 ms of the time it detects the voice mail system’s off-hook or hookflash condition. The DXP Plus also immediately sends this digit to the voice mail system when a station answers a voice mail transferred call. This action can alert the voice mail system to disconnect and leave the parties connected.

Busy – If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is busy on a call, the DXP Plus sends this

DTMF digit to the voice system. When the voice mail system receives this digit, it can abandon the transfer, reconnect to the call, and offer the caller whatever options the the voice mail system has available in its programming. If the DXP Plus auto attendant transfer on busy feature is active, the DXP

Plus will not send the DTMF digit to the voice mail system thus allowing the system to transfer a second call to the station.

DND – If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is in the do not disturb (DND) mode, the

DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice system. Receiving this digit allows the voice mail system to distinguish between a busy and a DND condition and offer the caller the appropriate choices.

Incoming Intercom Answer – The DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system when a station user makes an intercom call to the voice mail system. This action allows the voice mail system to distinguish between internal and external calls and offer the caller appropriate prompts and dialing options.

Disconnect – When an outside line or intercom party hangs up, the DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system to command an immediate disconnect. For outside calls, the central office (CO) must provide disconnect supervision to the DXP Plus and the installer must program the DXP Plus line for abandon hold release and disconnect supervision. At default, the DXP Plus sends the DTMF tone for the A character as the disconnect digit. Since a caller cannot dial an A from a telephone. This feature eliminates callers from causing an accidental disconnect by dialing this digit on their telephone’s dial pad.



Voice Announce Blocking

This feature allows the user of multiline telephones to block voice announced intercom calls by dialing a special code or by pressing a programmed button.

Z

Zone Paging

This feature arranges for stations to transmit and/or receive voice announcements to and from a particular group of stations or to all stations. This feature also arranges for all-call and zone paging to an external paging device. The programmer can assign stations to particular paging zones, up to eight zones, to permit station users to make announcements to one particular site, or he or she can assign all stations to the same zone to permit users to announce all areas at once.



Index

A


Access Denied

Accessing The Tracker Pager From DISA

Account Code Button

Account Code Display And Display Time

Account Codes With Positive Verification


Verification—Forced

Adjunct Feature Module Support

All-Call Paging

Allow Ringer Off (Ringer Volume Off)

Alpha-Numeric Calling Party

And Line Display

Alternate Attendant

Alternate Button

Answer Button


Attendant Position


Authorization Code

Automatic Dialing

Automatic Hold—Intercom To Intercom/Line

Automatic Hold—Line To Intercom

Automatic Hold—Line To Line



Automatic Privacy

Automatic Redial

Automatic Reports


Automatic Route Selection For Speed Dials




B

Background Music

Battery Back-Up


Battery Backup, Using The

Block Programming

Board Configuration, Understanding

Board Locations

Both Button

Busy Button Inquiry

Busy Lead Detection

Busy On SOHVA

Button Mapping

Button Query

C

Call Announce Beeps

Call Announce Tone Bursts

55

53

105

55, 100

55

55

20

16

49

54

54

54

26

47

47

110

47

48

47

48

48

48

48

49

49

50

50

48

48

49

49

50

50

50

50

51

52

53

53

53

54

51

51

51

51

55

55

Call Announce With Handsfree Answerback

Call Costing And Station Message Detail

Accounting Reports

Call Forward, Call Forward—All Or Personal

Call Forward—Busy Or Ring No-Answer,

All Or Personal

Call Forward-Immediate


Call Forward, Recall

Call Park

Call Pick-Up Directed

Call Pick-Up Group

Call Pick-Up System

Call Transfer —Unscreened With

Automatic Camp-On

Call Waiting Tone

Caller ID

Caller ID RNA—Ring–No–Answer

Caller ID


Camp–On—Call Waiting

Camp–On—No Answer


Central Processor Switched Data

Port Configuration


Circuit Boards, Defining The Optional

Circuit Boards





Connecting The Lines

Connecting The Paging Equipment

And Music Sources

Connecting The Power Failure Telephone

Connecting The Serial Data Ports

Connecting The Slave Equipment

Connecting The Stations

Connecting The System

Console Support

Consoleless Operation

Consultation Hold

Copy Model

D

Data Ports

Database Program Storage

Database Programming (From Main Station)

Database Programming

Day One And Day Two Ringing

Day Restriction Level

Default Busy/Ring No-Answer Call Forward


Defining The Features

58

58

56

56

56

60

60

61

61

59

59

59

59

57

57

58

59

55

55

56

30

29

62

63

32

33

34

36

63

63

61

61

62

62

29

61

61

15

12

64

64

64

65

47

34

64

64

64

Index I–1

GCA40–130

Defining The Line Boards

Defining The Optional Circuit Boards

Defining The Station Boards

Delayed Ringing

Diagnostics (Limited)

Dial 0 For System Attendant

Dial Pulse Interdigit Time

Dial Pulse Rate—Make / Break Ratio

Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)

DID Hunting



DigiTech Telephones

Direct-in Lines (DIL)



Direct Line Access By Station


Direct Tracking


DISA

DISA, Accessing Tracker From



Distinctive Ringing

Do Not Disturb (DND) Inhibit

Do Not Disturb (DND) Override

Do Not Disturb (DND)

DSS/BLF Console Support

DSS Status Button

DTMF Receiver–Timeout

DVA/ Auto Attendant with Single Digit Menu

DVA / DISA

DVA / Tracker

DXP Features List

Dynamic Save Button

E


E & M Tie Line Support

End-to-End DTMF Signalling

End-to-End Signaling On Intercom

End-to-End Signaling On Lines


Enhanced Line Appearance

Exclusive Hold


ExecuTech Telephones


Exectuive Override Advisory Tone

Executive Override

Extended DTMF Tones For ExecuMail

76

87

76, 86

76, 81

75

76

76

76

77

10

77

77

77

77

6

66

66

66

66

66

70

66

65

65

65

65

13

15

14

65

68

68

110

80

66

111

68

68

82

69

69

68, 82

69

69

82

73

72

74

45

75

Extended DTMF Tones

Extension Hunting



F

FCC Rules And Regulations, Knowing The

Feature Inhibit

Feature Renumbering

Features, Understanding The System

Flash Time


Of The External Paging Interface

Flexible Ringing Assignments


Full Button Programmability Of Features

G

Group Intercom Number

Group Intercoms

Ground Start Line Support


77

76

78

78

H

Handset Volume Level


Hardware, Reviewing The

Headset Compatibility

Hold, Exclusive

Hold Queuing

Hold Time Reporting

Hold

Hold Confirmation

Hookflash Restriction, ARS

Hot Transfer

Hunt Group, Attributes

Hunting, Types Of

I

I Hold And I Use Indications


Idle Line Priority

Impact Telephones




Intercom Hunt List

Intercom Inter-Digit Dialing

Intercom Number

Intercom Timeout

Introducing The DXP

79

79

79

79

43

78

78

45

82

84

79

79

82

83

85

85

81

81

81

8

85

84

85

1

81

81

81

80

80

80

12

80

82

53

81

101

102

I–2 Index


K


Knowing The FCC Rules And Regulations

Knowing The General Specifications

L

Last Number Redial


Line Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)


Line Boards, Defining The

Line Connections

Line Group Access

Line Groups


Line Queuing

Liquid Crystal Display Messaging

Liquid Crystal Display Support

Location Code

Locating The Boards

Lock Button

M

Manual Exclusion

Manual Reset

Mark Problem Line

Master Clearing The System


Meet—Me Answer Page


Message Deposit

Message Wait Retrieval Access Code

Message Waiting


Modem Support

Modem, Using The

Modify Digits Table

Mounting Considerations



Music Interface

Music On Hold (MOH)

Music Sources, Connecting

The Paging Equipment And

Mute

Names (Station And Lines)

N

Night Ringing


O


Offhook Treated As Busy

On-Hook Dialing

Operator Station

Operation, Station Hunting

Originating Denied

Out-Dial Delay Time

Overflow Button

91

91

103

91

91

49

91

82

91

91

18

90

22

90

82

89

89

89

89

89

89

89

88

88

88

88

90

90

90

32

90

91

85

43

37

86

87

87

87

87

16

88

13

28

86

86

86

86

86

86

GCA40–130

P

Pad Level–Transmit, Receive

Paging Access

Paging Equipment And Music Sources,

Connecting The

Password Protection

Pause Time

PBX/CENTREX/Central Office Compatible

PC Attendant Position

PC Attendant

PC Attendant, Creating Tracker Messages

Periodic Line Tone




Pooled Line Access

Power Failure Telephone, Connecting The


Power Supply, Using The

Preselection

Prime Line

Printed Wire Boards, Understanding The

Printer Interface

Privacy Release

Privacy

Private Lines

Program Printout


Programming Options, Tracker

Programming Port


Q

Queue Button

Quick Transfer

R

Recall/Flash (TAP)

Recall

Relays

Release Button

Reminder Alert

Remote Programming And Diagnostics


Response Messaging

Restrict ARS Hookflash

Restricted Dialing Error Tone

Reviewing The Hardware

Ring Back On Busy


Ring Back Tone

Ring Frequency

Ring Generator, Using The

Ring On Busy

Ring Patterns

Ringer Volume Off (Allow Ringer Off)


Ringing on Busy

Ringing Patterns

Ringing Per Phase

Ringing Timeout

RNA Or Busy Tracking

75, 107

92

94

94

94

94

93

12

94

94

111

94

95

93

84, 93

93

93

33

93

24

93

50

93

110

93

32

92

92

93

49

95

82

83

83

110

82

48

97

82

97

82

19

97

96

12

96

96

95

95

96

96

53

95

95

95

95

Index I–3

GCA40–130

S


Saved Number Redial

Screened Call Transfer


Self Diagnostics

Serial Call Button

Serial Data Port

Serial Data Ports, Connecting The

Service Observing

Shift Button

Silent Mode Button


Slave Equipment, Connecting The

SMDA Reports

SMDA Reports—Call Costing / Hold Time

SOHVA Beeps

SOHVA, Busy On

SOHVA Groups

SOHVA Tone Bursts

SOHVA


Specifications

Speed Dial Sets

Speed Dial, Station

Speed Dial, system

Split Button


Station Boards, Defining The

Station By Station Privacy

Station Call Transfer

Station Camp-On, Callback


Station Connections

System Grounding, Understanding The

Station Hunting

Station Hunting Operation

Station Hunting Timers

Station Lock


Station Monitoring With DSS Call Pick Up

Station Monitoring

Station Name

Station Speed Dial

Station Transfer Recall



Subdued Ringing


System Clock

System Connection

System Speed Dial

System Status And E1, T1 Status Log Viewing

103

103

84

104

104

104

82, 105

105

100

100

30

27

100

103

102

81

105

105

105

29

106

106

106

100

100

14

100

100

105

103

105

105

99

37

99

104

36

99

99

105

98

98

98

99

97

49

98

34

97

97

97

97


T


TAFAS

TAP (Flash)/Recall

Telephone Features, Understanding The

Telephone Features, Using The

Telephones, Using The Comdial

Telephones, Using The DigiTech

Telephones, Using The ExecuTech

Telephones, Using The Impact

Telephony Services Application

Programming Interface Support

Test/Busy Button

Through Dialing

Time And Date


Timers, Station Hunting


Toll Restriction

Tone On Hold

Tone Or Voice Signaling On Internal Calls

Tracker Paging System


Transfer Recall


Transfer Tracking

Transfer—Screened

Transmit Or Receive Gain, T1

TSAPI

U

Understanding Board Configuration

Understanding Printed Wire Boards

Understanding System Grounding

Understanding The DXP

Understanding The System Features

Understanding The Telephone Features

Understanding The Telephone Features

Unscreened Call Transfer


Using DigiTech Telephones

Using ExecuTech Telephones

Using Impact Telephones

Using the Comdial Telephones

Using The Battery Backup

Using The Modem

Using The Power Supply

Using The Ring Generator

Using This Publication

V



Voice Mail, Using With Tracking

Z

Zone Paging

4

111

111

6

10

8

3

26

18

24

19

1

20

12

27

2

45

3

113

111

111

113

109

110

110

111

111

111

110

58

107

108

108

48

108

108

108

102

109

109

107

86

108

3

6

10

4

3

8

I–4 Index

Installing The

DXP Plus Main Common Equipment Cabinet

1.0 Installing The Common Equipment Cabinet

1.1

Considering The Mounting Parameters

•

Choose a suitable location.

✔ A suitable location is within four feet of a proper electrical outlet. (The main cabinet and two expansion cabinets requires two dedicated 117VAC 15 AMP circuits, with a third-wire ground, supplied to standard

NEMA 5-15R electrical outlets. Each outlet must be supplied from the opposite phase of the AC power line.

✔ A suitable location provides a distance between the common equipment and the TELCO/PBX jacks of 25 feet or less as per FCC requirements. (Good engineering practices recommend a nominal distance of 7 feet.)

✔ A suitable location allows enough room between the top and bottom of the main cabinet and the ceiling or floor of the equipment room for placement of one expansion cabinet above and one expansion cabinet below the main cabinet.

✔ A suitable location is secure and dry and has adequate ventilation. The temperature range of a suitable location is within 32–122 degrees F (0-50 degrees C), and the relative humidity is less than 90 percent non-condensing .

1.2

Inventorying The Tools And Hardware

•

Round-head wood screws (typically

•

Round-head wood screws (typically

1

/

4 x 1–inch for mounting equipment cabinet to backboard)

1

/

4 x 1

1

/

2

–inch for mounting backboard to wall studs; longer screws are necessary if fasteners must also pass through a dry-wall covering)

•

Cross recessed screwdriver (phillips-head type)—to match front panel shipping screws

•

Flat blade screwdriver—to match front panel retaining screws

•

Electric drill—if prepared holes are required

•

Connecting tool—for fastening wires to a type–66 connector block.

•

Crimping tool—for 623-type modular plugs

•

Static discharge wrist strap and conductive floor mat

1.3

Complying With Underwriters Laboratories Regulations

Per The Underwriters Laboratories regulation 1459, 2nd edition, be aware of the following precautions when installing telephone equipment that is to be directly connected to the telephone company network:

•

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

•

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

•

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

•

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation (the “Company”) and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

While every effort has been made to eliminate errors, the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising from the interpretation of the information contained herein.

The information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance.

Should further information be desired, or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, contact Comdial, Inside Sales Department, Charlottesville, Virginia

22906.

Printed in U.S.A.

IMI66-105.02

7/95

R

IMI66–105 Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet

1.4

Mounting The Common Equipment Cabinet

1. Unpack and carefully inspect all equipment for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found. Verify that the packages contain all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation.

NOTE: The following instructions describe how to mount the main cabinet using a backboard; however, you can mount the cabinet on a standard 23–inch equipment rack if you wish.

2. Choose a place at the mounting location where the backboard will bridge underlying wall studs, and securely attach a suitable backboard to the mounting surface. (Suitable backboards are available commercially or you can construct one out of 3/4-inch plywood.) You must drive the hardware that secures the backboard to the mounting surface into the underlying wall studs instead of just into the wall material alone.

3. Refer to the illustration for the locating dimensions required for the mounting screws, and mark their locations on the backboard. You must attach the main common equipment cabinet vertically to the backboard.

4. Drill holes in the backboard of a proper size to accommodate the hardware being used.

5. Insert the two top screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.

6. Hang the cabinet on the top screws using the top mounting holes in the rear mounting flange of the cabinet.

Note that these holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end. This feature allows the cabinet to slide down on the screws to secure the mounting when the cabinet is hung on them.

7. Use the openings for the middle and lower set of mounting screws as a guide, and mark the location for the remaining screws.

8. Lift the cabinet from the top screws and set it aside while preparing the holes for the remaining screws.

9. Rehang the cabinet as discussed in step 6.

10. Insert the middle and lower screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.

Shipping screws attach the front panel to the main cabinet. These screws are in addition to the two retaining screws located at the lower corners of the panel. Remove and store the shipping screws. You will not need them to re-attach the panel to the cabinet after you have installed the power supply assembly, circuit boards, and wiring; however, you will need them to secure the panel in place if you should later transport the cabinet to a new location.

After you remove the screws, pivot the front panel upward until you can unhook the panel hangers from the slots in the cabinet top. To re-attach the front panel, pivot it upward so that you can hook the panel hangers into the slots at the top of the cabinet, and then pivot the panel down in place. Install the two retaining screws at the bottom right-hand and left-hand corners of the panel to secure it to the cabinet.

2 – Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet

Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet

Typical Backboard

48 X 96 X 3/4 Plywood Sheet

48

12 3/4

10 1/2

10 1/2

22 5/16

Retaining

Screws

(Two Places)

IMI66–105

PLUS025


Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet – 3


1.5

Understanding System Grounding Requirements

Transient voltage spikes, if induced onto CO or CENTREX lines, can travel through the cable and into the common equipment. The telephone company offers basic protection against this condition but it is usually designed to protect the central office circuits. While it will also provide some protection to the common equipment, you should not rely upon it for total protection. To help ensure that external over-voltage surges do not damage the system, you should install and properly ground primary protection devices, such as gas discharge tubes or similar devices, on all lines. While the line boards have internal secondary surge protection on all line ports, in order for this protection to be effective, you MUST connect the common equipment cabinet to a reliable, effective earth ground.

Proper DXP grounding is necessary for trouble-free operation and personnel safety. The DXP Plus has the following three types of grounds:

•

Service Ground—a neutral power line wire that is connected to the ground bus in the premises’ AC power panel,

•

System Ground—a non-current carrying power line wire that is connected to the ground bus in the premises’

AC power panel,

•

Frame Ground—a low impedance conductor that places the common equipment cabinet at reference ground potential. The frame ground provides the greatest safety by limiting electrical potential between non-current carrying parts of the system. The common equipment cabinet provides a ground stud on its cabinet for access to its frame ground.

Effective grounding requires that you connect the frame ground to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is one such as the ground bus in the premises’ AC power panel or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters, pumps, or insulating sections that have been added for vibration reduction. Avoid using the premises’ structural steel frame as it may not be at earth ground potential. Make the ground connection with #6 or larger insulated, solid copper grounding wire. Keep the ground wire separate from the three-wire AC line cord, do not splice it, and keep it as short as possible.

The impedance of the wiring between the DXP and the earth ground must not exceed 0.25 ohms and the impedance between the earth ground and the power company’s reference standard ground must not exceed 5 ohms. Use an acceptable low impedance measuring device to measure the impedance of these paths. The #6 or larger wire size will minimize the wiring impedance; however, if the impedance between earth ground and the power company’s standard reference ground exceeds 5 ohms, contact the local power company. The ground path must always be of sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages that may result in circuit noise, hazard to personnel, or equipment damage.

Be sure that all of the ground connections are visible for inspection and maintenance. Tag all of the ground connections with a sign that reads: Do Not Remove Or Disconnect.



PLUS040

IMI66–105

Grounding

Terminal

No. 6 Solid

Copper Wire

Typical Earth

Ground

Grounding The System



2.0 Installing The Power Supply

NOTE: The common equipment cabinet employs an electronic switching power supply. During operation, power supplies of this type generate an audible sound from their switching regulators. This sound is normal and is not an indication that the power supply is operating improperly.

Install the power supply assembly in the common equipment cabinet per the following discussion and illustration.

1. Be sure to ground the common equipment cabinet per the instructions in the previous paragraph before installing the power supply assembly.

2. Remove the power supply assembly from the carton. Be sure to save the small bag containing the mounting hardware.

3. Slide the power supply assembly into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly’s front panel contacts the side of the cabinet.

4. Locate the power cable routed from the backplane and connect it to the power supply’s connector.

5. Remove the #6 thread-forming screws from the hardware bag and secure the assembly to the cabinet.

6. The supplied power supply assembly accessories include a ferrite collar. Snap this collar around the AC power cord to provide protection against radio frequency interference.

Typical Common Equipment Cabinet

Power

Supply

Assembly

PLUS075

Installing The Power Supply


Machine Screw

(4 Places)

Installing The DXP Plus Main Cabinet IMI66–105

2.1

Making The AC Power Connection

•

For the main cabinet’s AC power connection, employ a dedicated 117 VAC 15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire ground, supplied to a standard electrical outlet (NEMA 5-15R). Remember, this electrical outlet must be located within four feet of the common equipment cabinet. Remember also, you must supply two dedicated electrical outlets if you plan to later install expansion cabinets.

NOTE: If you install the optional battery back-up assembly, you can use this same outlet to supply AC power to that assembly’s battery charger.

•

To provide protection against surges and spikes that may appear on the AC line, install a plug-in power line surge protector between the AC power cord of the installed equipment and the AC outlet..

CAUTION


Power

Cable

Two 15 AMP

Circuit Breakers

Ganged Together

PLUS041

Two Dedicated

117 VAC 15 Amp

NEMA 5-15R

Electrical Outlets

With Third Wire

Ground

(Each Is Protected

By Its Own Circuit

Breaker.)

Typical Earth

Ground

Making The AC Power Connections

Plug-In

Power Line

Surge Protectors



2.2

Measuring The Power Supply Voltages

If you need to measure power supply voltages, you can do so at the DC voltage connector. Measure the power under the following conditions:

•

AC line cord connected to the AC outlet,

•

DC power cable disconnected from power supply’s DC voltage connector,

•

AC power switch turned on.

Measurement details are shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

Once you have measured the power supply voltages, turn off the AC power switch and disconnect the AC line cord from the AC outlet. Leave the AC power disconnected until you have installed the circuit boards in the main cabinet.

2.3

Identifying The Fuse

The power supply fuse is a slow-blow type rated at 8 AMPS and 250 VOLTS. A replacement fuse must have the same rating.



Reset Switch

(Press If Thermal Overload

Indicator Turns On)

IMI66–105

On = -36 VDC

On = +5 VDC

On = -5 VDC

On = Thermal Overload

On = Battery Backup Connected

On/Off

Switch

Fuse

8A, 250V

Slow Blow

Type

Pins 1 & 2 = -36 V Ground

Pins 3 & 4 = -36 VDC

Pin 5 = +5 VDC

Pin 6 = -5 VDC

Pin 7 = Digital & Analog Ground

Pin 8 =Thermal Overload Signal

Power Supply Measurements

Measure Between Terminals

+ Voltmeter

Lead

- Voltmeter

Lead

Measured Values

Pin 1 Pin 3 - 36 VDC +/- 1.0V

Pin 5

Pin 6

Pin 8

Pin 7

Pin 7

Pin 7

+ 5 VDC +/- .3 V

- 5 VDC +/- .3 V

0 volts = normal operation

+ 5 V nominal = thermal overload condition

(press Reset switch)




3.0 Installing Circuit Boards In The Main Cabinet

CAUTION

Circuit boards for the DXP Plus system are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge, and you must keep this fact in mind as you handle the circuit boards. Refer to the Comdial publication

IMI01-005, Handling Of Electrostatically Sensitive Components, for general information. Specific handling precautions are also included in this installation instruction.

Each circuit board is supplied in a static protection bag. Do not open a static protection bag prior to board installation time.

The board slots are keyed so that only those boards that will operate from a particular slot will plug into that slot.

The main cabinet provides unique slots for the CPU board, the services board, and the interface board for the main cabinet). The remaining board slots are universal and will accept auxiliary boards, line boards, or station boards .

This publication provides installation instructions for the CPU and services boards. Since you will install line and station boards as well as auxiliary boards and other optional circuit boards on an as needed basis, each of these boards include its own installation instruction for your reference.

3.1

Creating A Static Safe Work Area

When servicing the common equipment cabinet at the installation location, it is a good practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground. (The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point.) The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path.

When removing the common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing, it is a good practice to prepare a static-safe work area on which to place the cabinet.

You should supply yourself with a static discharge wrist strap, and wear it every time you handle electronic circuit boards either at the cabinet mounting location or at your work area.



PLUS034

Backboard

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Conductive

Mat 1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground

Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location

Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat




3.2

Installing The System Software And CPU Board

1. Place the static protection bags that contain the CPU board and the system software card on the static safe work area.

2. Install your static discharge wrist strap on your bare wrist; adjust it for a snug fit. Be sure that the strap is touching bare skin and is not isolated by clothing. Connect the wrist strap cord between the wrist strap and an

AC or earth ground.

3. Remove the CPU board and system software card from their static protection bags, orient them as shown in the illustration, and attach them with the supplied hardware.

#4 Nut*

#4 Star Washer*

#4 X 1/2 Standoff*

*Factory Installed

4-40 X 3/8

Machine

Screw

CPU Board

System Software Card

Assembling The Software Board To The CPU Board


PLUS046


4. If the common equipment cabinet is not at the static safe work area, place the assembled CPU board and software card into a static protection bag and transport the board assembly to the cabinet.

5. Be sure that the AC power cord is not connected to an AC outlet and that the cable from the optional battery back-up assembly is not connected to the main cabinet power supply.

6. Locate the proper board slot. Remember, the CPU board plugs into a unique slot.

7. With your static discharge wrist strap properly grounded, remove the board and card assembly from the static protection bag. Orient it with the top and bottom guides in the main cabinet board cage, and press it in firmly until the board edge connector properly mates with the backplane connector.

CAUTION

When pressing the board and card assembly into place, press it only at the extractor lever locations. If you apply pressure at other locations, you may damage the board assembly.

8. Make a final inspection to ensure that the board and card assembly is in the correct slot, oriented correctly and mated properly; then install and tighten the supplied screws to secure it to the board cage.

CPU Board Slot

Clip to

Grounding

Terminal

Typical Extractor Lever

(Press boards into place by pressing at the extractor lever locations.)

PLUS042

Static Discharge

Wrist Strap

Installing The Assembled Software And CPU Board



3.3

Installing The Services Boards In The Equipment Cabinet



AC or earth ground

NOTE: With the common equipment in the installed position, the ground lug on the side of the cabinet is an appropriate grounding point since it should have a heavy ground wire connected between it and a good earth ground.

3. When you are ready to install the circuit board, remove it from its static protection bag.

4. Locate the proper board slot. Remember, the service board plugs into into a unique slot.

5. Orient the circuit board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage. and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane.

CAUTION

When pressing circuit boards into place, press them only at the extractor lever locations. If you apply pressure at other locations you may damage the board assembly.

6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all circuit boards are installed.

7. Make a final inspection to ensure that all circuit boards are, oriented correctly and mated properly.

8. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the circuit boards to the board cage.



PLUS043

Typical Extractor Lever

(Press boards into place by pressing at the extractor lever locations.)

Clip to

Grounding

Terminal

Services Board Slot

CPU Board Slot

Static Discharge

Wrist Strap

Viewing The Circuit Board Installation



4.0 Connecting Data Devices

The system provides two short-run serial data ports on the CPU board. The system designates these modular jacks as Modem and Maintenance. These two serial data ports are dedicated to the personal computer (PC) that you will use to load the programmed data base and to the remote servicing and programming modem that you will use to remotely load the programmed data base and troubleshoot the system. Since these serial data ports are short-run, you must keep the cabled distance between the data device and the data port to 25 feet or less.

NOTE: If you connect a modem other than the DXMDM, you must interface that modem through a comunications card that you have installed on the services board or an auxiliary board.

CAUTION

When you are not using a PC for programming purposes, you should disconnect it from the maintenance port. It is possible for the idle connected PC to induce electrical interference that may affect system performance.

Remember, a data cable must be no longer than 25 feet in length. When preparing a data cable for connection to a data device, refer to the manufacturer’s manual for the equipment being interfaced and make the following wiring connections:

•

Wire the common equipment RD (data from device to common equipment) connection to the device TD

(transmit data) connection.

•

Wire the common equipment TD (data to device from common equipment) connection to the device RD

(receive data) connection.

•

Wire the common equipment SG (signal ground) connection to the device SG (signal ground) connection.

•

If required for proper operation, wire the common equipment CTS (clear-to-send status from device to common equipment) connection to the device RTS (request-to-send) connection.

NOTE: The common equipment requires a positive voltage, with respect to signal ground, in order to send data.

•

If the cable has spare wires, be sure to ground them so that they will not act as antennas and induce interference into the system. Further, if there is a source of RF power nearby (such as a radio transmitter), use shielded cable and ground the shield at both ends.

The default data format is shown in the following chart. Configure the data device that you connect to the maintenance port to match the charted information.

Port Type

Maintenance Port

Modem Port

Baud Rate Data Bit Stop Bit Parity Bit

9600 8 1 0

2400 8 1 0

CAUTION

As an added precaution against induced interference, route the data cable as far away from any fluorescent lighting as you can reach, and make every effort to route the data cable perpendicular to other wiring.



PLUS044

NOTES:

1.

Maximum distance between each ofthe two dedicated serial data ports and its external data equipment is 25 feet.



Serial Modem Port

1

2

3

4

5

6

Maintenance Port

3

4

5

1

2

6


Modular Jacks







Detailing Typical Data Device Connections



5.0 Viewing The Circuit Board Status Indicators

Once you have installed the CPU board and services board in the main cabinet, turn on the AC power and observe the board’s status lights.

The status light on the front of the circuit boards shows the following conditions:

Circuit Board Status Light Condition

CPU Board

Services Board

Steady On = Normal Operation

Steady Off = System Malfunction

Green Steady On = Normal Operation

Green Steady Off = System Malfunction

Yellow Off, Red Off = Normal Operation

Yellow On, Red Off = Main Cabinet Using Battery Back Up Operation

Yellow Off, Red On = Main Cabinet Out Of Service

Green LED

Green LED

CPU Board

Yellow LED

Red LED

Services Board

PLUS045

Locating The Status Lights



6.0 Configuring The Common Audible Ringing Interface

The services board provides relay actuation dry-contact terminals that you can use for controlling external ringing equipment. These relays are under programming control. You can program them to provide dry-contact actuations that track the ringing pattern of any of the programmed flexible ringing assignment ringing patterns.

CAUTION

Do not exceed a 1 amp at 24 volts (0.5 amp at 48 volts) load on these control terminals. If the load requirements exceed this limit, connect the load through an external slave relay. DO NOT CONNECT

THESE CONTROL TERMINALS DIRECTLY TO THE 120VAC LINE.

Wire to

Common

Audible

Interface

Relay

(Wiring shown for low current application - see caution text)

24V @ 1A Max.

48V @ .5A Max.

Signalling

Device

Power

Source for

Signalling

Device

AC or DC

Input as

Required

(Wiring shown with slave relay connection for high current application - see caution text)

Wire to

Common

Audible

Interface

Relay

24V @ 1A Max.

48V @ .5A Max.

Voltage Clamping Diode

Recommended

Power

Source for

Slave

Relay

AC or DC

Input as

Required

Slave

Relay

Signalling

Device

Power

Source for

Signalling

Device

CAJS007

AC or DC

Input as

Required

Relay 1 Relay 2

Front View Of Jacks

3

4

1

2

5

6

Relay 3 Relay 4

Services

Board

PLUS063

3

4

1

2

5

6


Relay

Jack

Pin

No.

Signal

J3

J4

1

3

4

5

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

6

No Contact

Relay 1

Relay 2

Relay 2

Relay 1

No Contact

No Contact

Relay 3

Relay 4

Relay 4

Relay 3

No Contact

Detailing Typical Common Audible Interface Wiring



7.0 Configuring The External Paging Interface

A special transformer-isolated external paging port, located on the services board, provides system interface for an external paging amplifier. Connect a customer-supplied paging amplifier to the PAGE jack as shown in illustration.

Remember, the Services board provides relay actuation dry-contact terminals that you can use for controlling the external paging amplifier. Of course, you must make the necessary wiring arrangements to match the control that you want to occur.

Once you have made the necessary wiring connections, you may either:

• program any of the relays to provide dry-contact actuation that will turn on the paging amplifier for as long as the paging port is active,

• or program any of the relays to use their dry-contact actuations to track line ringing signals sent from the paging port. (This is useful for turning the amplifier on and off to sound these ringing signals.)

CAUTION

Do not exceed a 1 amp at 24 volts (0.5 amp at 48 volts) load on these control terminals. If the load requirements exceed this limit, connect the load through an external slave relay. DO NOT CONNECT

THESE CONTROL TERMINALS DIRECTLY TO THE 120VAC LINE.


Pin No.

3 & 4

1 & 6

2 & 5

Signal

Paging

Music 2

Music 2

External

Loudspeaker

Front View Of Jack

Page

Music 1

Music 2

3

4

5

6

1

2

Audio Input To

Paging Amplifier

Services

Board

SPKR Output

External Paging

Amplifier

Enable Input

(If Required)

PLUS061

Relay 1

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 4

Front View Of Jacks

1

2

3

4

5

6

3

4

1

2

5

6


Relay

Jack

Pin

No.

Signal

J3

J4

1

3

4

5

6

1

2

4

5

2

3

6

No Contact

Relay 1

Relay 2

Relay 2

Relay 1

No Contact

No Contact

Relay 3

Relay 4

Relay 4

Relay 3

No Contact

Making A Typical External Paging Connection



8.0 Installing An External Audio Source

If music or other audio information is to be part of the system, connect a customer-provided audio source to the common equipment music interface jack provided on the services board. These jacks are labeled MUSIC1 and

MUSIC2. You can provide different audio sources, one for outside parties while on hold and another for internal background music, if desired. The input impedance of the music interface is approximately 500 ohms. Use the volume control on the audio source(s) to adjust the audio level of the music source(s) as required.

Music Source For

Music On Hold

Front View Of Jack

Page

Music 1

Music 2

3

4

1

2

5

6

Music Source For

Background Music

Pin No.

Signal Input

1 & 6

2 & 5

Music 1

Music 2

PLUS062

Installing An External Audio Source



9.0 Understanding FCC Rules And Regulations

This DXP Plus digital communications system complies with Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules, Part 68. The FCC registration label on the equipment cabinet contains the FCC registration number, the ringer equivalence number, the model number, and the serial number or production date of the system.

Notification To Telephone Company

Unless a telephone operating company provides and installs the system, the telephone operating company which provides the lines must be notified before a connection is made to them. The lines (telephone numbers) involved, the FCC registration number, and the ringer equivalence number must be provided to the telephone company.

The FCC registration number and the ringer equivalence number of this equipment are provided on the label attached to the common equipment. The user/installer is required to notify the telephone company when final disconnection of this equipment from the telephone company line occurs.

Compatibility With Telephone Network


Installation Requirements

Connection of the DXP Plus system to the telephone lines must be through a universal service order code (USOC) outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating company. If the installation site does not have the proper outlet, ask the telephone company business office to install one. The correct outlet jack for this system is either a type

RJ21X or type RJ14C.

Party Lines And Coin Lines


Troubleshooting

If a service problem occurs, first try to determine if the trouble is in the on-site system or in the telephone company equipment. Disconnect all equipment not owned by the telephone company. If this corrects the problem, the faulty equipment must not be reconnected to the telephone line until the problem has been corrected.

Any trouble that causes improper operation of the telephone network may require the telephone company to discontinue service to the trouble site after they notify the user of the reason.

Repair Authorization




Radio Frequency Interference

The DXP Plus system contains incidental radio frequency generating circuitry and, if not installed and used properly, may cause interference to radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception; in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient the television or radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the DXP, the individual telephone stations, and the radio or TV with respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve

Radio-TV Interference Problems.” This booklet is available from the Government Printing Office, Washington

D.C. 20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.



CAUTION

Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Ringer Equivalence Number

The REN of each line is 0.4B. The FCC requires the installer to determine the total REN for each line, and record it at the equipment.


Installing The DXP Plus

Expansion Common Equipment Cabinet

1.0 Installing The Expansion Common Equipment Cabinet

1.1

Considering The Mounting Parameters

Mount the first expansion cabinet above the main common equipment cabinet and mount the second expansion cabinet below the main common equipment cabinet.

Insure that the expansion cabinet is within four feet of it own dedicated 117VAC, 15 AMP electrical outlet. (The expansion cabinet requires its own dedicated 117VAC 15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire ground, supplied to a standard NEMA 5-15R electrical outlet and supplied from the opposite phase of the AC power line that supplies power to the main cabinet.)

CAUTION

This dedicated AC circuit must different from the dedicated AC circuit that you provide for the main cabinet. For best results wire the expansion cabinet’s dedicated AC circuit from a power phase that is opposite from the one that supplies the main cabinet’s AC circuit.

1.2

Inventorying The Tools And Hardware

•

Round head wood screws (typically

1

/

4 x 1–inch)—for mounting expansion equipment cabinet to backboard)

•

Cross recessed screwdriver (phillips-head type)—to match front panel shipping screws

•

Flat blade screwdriver—to match front panel retaining screws

•


•

Connecting tool—for fastening wires to a type-66 connector block.

•


•

Static discharge wrist strap and conductive floor mat

1.3



•


•


•


•






22906.


IMI66-106.02

6/95

R

IMI66–106 Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet

1.4

Mounting The Expansion Common Equipment Cabinet


2. Expansion cabinet one mounts above the main cabinet and expansion cabinet two mounts below the main cabinet. After you determine where you will mount the expansion cabinet, remove the plates covering the appropriate interface cable access holes on the main and expansion cabinets. As you face the front of the cabinets, these plates are located near the left front of the cabinet’s top and bottom.

3. The illustration shows the locating dimensions required for the expansion cabinet’s mounting screws. Mark the hardware locations on the backboard either above or below the main common equipment cabinet depending upon where you intend to mount the cabinet. (You must mount the cabinet vertically on the backboard.)


5. Insert the two top screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.






10. Insert the middle and lower screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.

11. Shipping screws attach the front panel to the main cabinet. These screws are in addition to the two retaining screws located at the lower corners of the panel. Remove and store the shipping screws. You will not need them to re-attach the panel to the cabinet after you have installed the power supply assembly, circuit boards, and wiring; however, you will need them to secure the panel in place if you should later transport the cabinet to a new location.

12. After you remove the shipping and retaining screws, pivot the front panel upward until you can unhook the panel hangers from the slots in the cabinet top. To re-attach the front panel, pivot it upward so that you can hook the panel hangers into the slots at the top of the cabinet, and then pivot the panel down in place. Install the two retaining screws at the bottom right-hand and left-hand corners of the panel to secure it to the cabinet.

2 – Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet

Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet

12 3/4

Typical Backboard

48 X 96 3/4 Plywood Sheet

22 5/16

IMI66–106

48

10 1/2

Expansion

Cabinet 1

10 1/2

4 3/4

Panel

Retaining

Screws

10 1/2

Main

Cabinet

10 1/2

Panel

Retaining

Screws

4 3/4

10 1/2

Expansion

Cabinet 2

10 1/2

Panel

Retaining

Screws

PLUS024


Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet – 3


1.5

Understanding System Grounding Requirements



•


•


AC power panel,

•


Effective grounding requires that you connect the frame ground to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is one such as the ground bus in the premises’ AC power panel or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters, pumps, or insulating sections that have been added for vibration reduction. Avoid using the premises’ structural steel frame as it may not be at earth ground potential. Use #10–12 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to connect the frame ground of the expansion cabinet (available through the ground stud on the expansion cabinet’s side) to the frame ground of the main common equipment cabinet. Use #6 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to make the ground connection from the main cabinet’s frame ground to earth ground. Keep this ground wire separate from the three-wire AC line cord, do not splice it, and keep it as short as possible.

The impedance of the wiring between the DXP and the earth ground must not exceed 0.25 ohms and the impedance between the earth ground and the power company’s reference standard ground must not exceed 5 ohms. Use an acceptable low impedance measuring device to measure the impedance of these paths. The #6 or larger wire size will minimize the wiring impedance; however, if the impedance between earth ground and the power company’s standard reference ground exceeds 5 ohms, contact the local power company. The ground path must always be of sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages that may result in circuit noise, hazard to personnel, or equipment damage.




PLUS039

IMI66–106

Grounding Terminal

No. 10 or 12 Solid Copper Wire

(Cabinet-to-Cabinet)

Two Grounding Terminals

No. 6 Solid Copper Wire

(Cabinet-to-Earth Ground)

Typical Earth

Ground

No. 10 or 12 Solid Copper Wire

(Cabinet-to-Cabinet)

Grounding Terminal

Grounding The Expansion Cabinets





Install the power supply assembly in the expansion cabinet per the following discussion and illustration.



3. Slide the power supply assembly into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly’s front panel contacts the side of the cabinet.

4. Locate the power cable routed from the backplane and connect it to the power suppy connector.

5. Remove the #6 thread-forming screws from the hardware bag and secure the power supply assembly to the expansion cabinet.

6. The supplied power supply accessories include a ferrite collar. Snap this collar around the AC power cord to provide protection against radio frequency interference.


Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66–106


Power

Supply

Assembly

PLUS075

Machine Screw

(4 Places)

Installing The Power Supply Assembly



2.1

Making The AC Power Connection

•

For the expansion cabinet’s AC power connection, employ a dedicated 117VAC 15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire ground, supplied to a standard electrical outlet (NEMA 5-15R) for the AC power connection.

Remember, this electrical outlet must be located within four feet of the common equipment expansion cabinet.

Remember also, this dedicated electrical outlet is in addition to the one that you provide for the main cabinet’s

AC power needs.

CAUTION

This dedicated AC circuit must different from the dedicated AC circuit that you provide for the main cabinet. For best results wire the expansion cabinet’s dedicated AC circuit from a power phase that is opposite from the one that supplies the main cabinet’s AC circuit. Connecting too much electrical equipment to one power phase may overload that power phase and cause a drop in the supplied AC voltage.

•

Install a plug-in power line surge protector between the equipment’s AC power cord and the AC outlet to provide protection against surges and spikes that may appear on the AC line.

CAUTION




PLUS038

Power

Cable

IMI66–106

Two 15 AMP

Circuit Breakers

Ganged Together

Two Dedicated

117 VAC 15 Amp

NEMA 5-15R

Electrical Outlets

With Third Wire

Ground

(Each Is Protected

By Its Own Circuit

Breaker.)

Plug-In

Power Line

Surge Protectors

Typical Earth

Ground

Making the AC Power Connections



2.2


If you need to measure power supply voltages, you can do so at the voltage connector. Measure the power under the following conditions:

•


•


•



CAUTION

Once you have measured the power supply voltages, turn off the AC power switch and disconnect the AC line cord from the AC outlet. Leave the AC power disconnected until you have installed the circuit boards in the main cabinet.

2.3

Identifying The Fuse

The power supply fuse is a slow-blow type rated at 8 AMPS and 250 VOLTS. A replacement fuse must have the same rating.



Reset Switch


Indicator Turns On)

IMI66–106

On = -36 VDC

On = +5 VDC

On = -5 VDC



On/Off

Switch

Fuse

8A, 250V

Slow Blow

Type


Pins 3 & 4 = -36 VDC

Pin 5 = +5 VDC

Pin 6 = -5 VDC





+ Voltmeter - Voltmeter

Measured Values

Lead Lead

Pin 1

Pin 5

Pin 3

Pin 7

- 36 VDC +/- 1.0V

+ 5 VDC +/- .3 V

Pin 6

Pin 8

Pin 7

Pin 7

- 5 VDC +/- .3 V


+ 5 V nominal = thermal overload condition

(press Reset switch)




3.0 Installing Circuit Boards In The Expansion Cabinet

CAUTION

Circuit boards for the DXP Plus system are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge, and you must keep this fact in mind as you handle the circuit boards. Refer to the Comdial publication

IMI01-005, Handling Of Electrostatically Sensitive Components, for general information. Specific handling precautions are also included in this installation instruction.

Each circuit board is supplied in a static protection bag. Do not open a static protection bag prior to board installation time.

The board slots are keyed so that only those boards that will operate from a particular slot will plug into that slot.

The expansion cabinet provides a unique slot for the interface board and universal slots for the auxiliary boards line boards, or station boards.

This publication provides installation instructions for the interface board. Since you will install line and station boards as well as auxiliary boards and other optional circuit boards on an as needed basis, each of these boards include its own installation instruction for your reference.

3.1


When servicing the main or expansion common equipment cabinets at the installation location, it is a good practice to place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground. (The third wire ground of the AC power line is also an acceptable grounding point.) The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path.

When removing a common equipment cabinet from the installation location for servicing, it is a good practice to prepare a static-safe work area on which to place the cabinet.



Installing The DXP Plus Expansion Cabinet IMI66–106

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat




3.2

Installing The Interface Boards

When you add an expansion cabinet to the main common equipment cabinet, you must install interface boards in both cabinets and route the accompanying cables through the cable access holes in the cabinets. You must install the nnnnn–M1 interface board in the main cabinet, the nnnn–X2 interface board in the upper expansion cabinet, and the nnnn–X3 interface board in the lower expansion cabinet.



AC or earth ground


3. When you are ready to install the circuit board, remove it from its static protection bag.

4. Locate the proper board slot. Remember, the interface boards all plug into unique slots in their respective cabinets.


CAUTION



7. Route the interface cables between the main and expansion cabinets. Be sure to thread the cables through the access holes in the cabinets.



10. Place the system in operation and inspect the status lights for proper operation.

Interface Board

Upper Expansion Cabinet

Lower Expansion Cabinet

Main Cabinet

Status Light Condition

Green Winking On = normal operation

Green Steady On = option board in operation


Green Steady On = option board in operation


Top Yellow Off, Top Red Off = normal operation

Top Yellow On, Top Red Off = upper cabinet on battery power

Top Yellow Off, Top Red On = upper cabinet out of service

Bottom Yellow Off, Bottom Red Off = normal operation

Bottom Yellow On, Bottom Red Off = lower cabinet on battery power

Bottom Yellow Off, Bottom Red On = lower cabinet out of service



PLUS028

IMI66–106

Interface Board

Expansion Cabinet 1

Interface Cable

Access Holes

(Two Places)

Interface

Cable for

Expansion

Cabinet 1

Interface Cable

Access Holes

(Two Places)

Interface

Cable for

Expansion

Cabinet 2

Interface Board

Main Cabinet

Interface Board

Expansion Cabinet 2

Viewing The Interface Board Installation


Installing The Analog Station Board

In The DXP Plus Digital Communications System

1.0 Introducing The Analog Station Boards

The analog station board supports the operation of the ExecuTech model 66nnn and 67nnn analog multiline telephones.

1.1

Inventorying The Analog Station Boards

There are two models of station boards available for use.

•

Eight-station model supports eight ExecuTech multiline and single line proprietary analog telephones

•

16-station model supports 16 ExecuTech multiline and single line proprietary analog telephones

1.2



•


•


•


•


R





22906.


IMI89-173.01

7/95

IMI89–173 Installing The Analog Station Board

2.0 Installing Circuit Boards

CAUTION

Circuit boards are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge, and you must keep this fact in mind as you handle the circuit boards.

Refer to the Comdial publication IMI01-005, Handling Of

Electrostatically Sensitive Components, for general information. Specific handling precautions are also included in this installation instruction.

2.1





2 – Installing The Analog Station Board

Installing The Analog Station Board IMI89–173

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat


Installing The Analog Station Board – 3


2.2

Installing Station Boards In The Equipment Cabinet

1. Normally you should first disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply and then disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet; however, when necessary, you can install a station board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 5, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the station board.


AC or earth ground


3. Each station board is supplied in a static protection bag for safe keeping. When you are ready to install the circuit board, remove it from its static protection bag.

4. Locate the proper board slot.

•

On DXP Plus systems the station boards connect to any universal slot.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a station board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.

5. If you are installing the station board in an operating system, connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the station board.

6. Orient the station board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage. and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane. If you connected a handset cord between the pre-charge port on the power supply and the jack on the circuit board, disconnect the cord after installing the board.

CAUTION

When pressing circuit boards into place, press them only at the extractor lever locations.

If you apply pressure at other locations you may damage the board assembly.




10. Each station board includes a ferrite collar. Snap the ferrite collar around the cable station to provide protection against radio frequency interference.


Installing The Analog Station Board

PLUS029

Power Supply

Pre-charge Port

IMI89–173

Pre-charge

Cable For

Station Board

Installation

During

Power Up

Station Board

Pre-charge

Port

Analog or Digital

Station Board

Static Discharge Wrist Strap

Viewing A Typical Station Board Installation




Connections between the telephone stations and the common equipment station boards are typically via type

66M-xx connector blocks that are cable connected to 50-pin male connectors on the station boards.

The American Wire Gauge (AWG) size of the station wiring determines the maximum distance allowed from the common equipment to the stations. The following chart details this relationship.

Station Types

Analog Multiline Telephone

Analog Single-Line

Proprietary Telephone

20 AWG

2500 Feet

4000 Feet

Wire Gauge

22 AWG

2000 Feet

3500 Feet

24 AWG

1500 Feet

3000 Feet

If spare conductors exist in the cables that you run between the station boards and the 66M-xx connector blocks, it is a good practice to connect the spare conductors to earth ground. Doing this may help prevent the spare connectors from inducing radio frequency and/or AC interference into the system.

Remember, you should snap a ferrite collar around each station cable to provide protection against radio frequency interference.

CAUTION

The polarity between the individual wires in a particular voice or data pair is not critical; however, do not connect the voice circuits to the data circuits.

3.1

Installing DSS/BLF Consoles

Install a DSS/BLF Console at any station port in the system as a companion to a system telephone.

•

The DXP Plus systems support a maximum of four consoles for each telephone and there is no limit to the maximum number of consoles that you can install on a system. Typically, the console capacity is equal to one-half of the total station capacity of the system.

•

The installed distance limit between the station board and the console is the same as that allowed for an analog or digital telephone.

When you install a DSS/BLF console, you must program define the station port as a console port.



Typical Station

Connector Block

30

31

32

33

25

26

27

28

29

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

8

9

6

7

3

4

1

2

5

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

50

25

26

1

CLIP TERMINALS

Female 50-pin

Cable Connector

Ferrite

Collar

PLUS031

Typical Analog

Station Board

J1 (Male 50-pin

Connector)

J2 (Male 50-pin

Connector)

Viewing A Typical Station Connection



3.2

Detailing The Station Connections

3.2.1 Detailing Analog Station Board J1 Connections

25-Pair Connections For J1

Wire Color Pair Pin

No.

Clip

Term.

White-Blue

Blue-White

White-Orange

Orange-White

White-Green

Green-White

White-Brown

Brown-White

White-Slate

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

Black-Green

Green-Black

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

Violet-Slate

Slate-Violet

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

48

23

49

24

46

21

47

22

50

25

17

43

18

44

15

41

16

42

19

45

20

36

11

37

12

34

9

35

10

38

13

39

14

40

6

32

7

33

8

4

30

5

31

26

1

27

2

28

3

29

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

49

50

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33

38

39

40

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

25

26

27

28

29

12

13

14

15

16

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

Station Connections

Pair

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Wire Color

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Station Identification

Station

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Location

The analog station board does not provide station connections on J1 connector pairs 17–25. Remember, you should connect all unused conductors in your house cable to earth ground.



3.2.2 Detailing Analog Station Board J2 Connections

25-Pair Connections For J2


No.

Clip

Term.

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

Violet-Slate

Slate-Violet

White-Blue

Blue-White

White-Orange

Orange-White

White-Green

Green-White

White-Brown

Brown-White

White-Slate

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

Black-Green

Green-Black

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

43

18

44

19

41

16

42

17

45

20

46

21

47

22

48

23

49

24

50

25

12

38

13

39

10

36

11

37

14

40

15

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

30

5

31

6

28

3

29

4

26

1

27

2

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

28

29

30

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

1

2

3

4


Pair

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Voice Path

Data Path

Wire Color

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black


Station

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Location

The analog station board does not provide station connections on J2 connector pairs 17–25. Remember, you should connect all unused conductors in your house cable to earth ground.



3.3

Detailing Station Call Announce Parameters

The DXP Plus systems place no limits (other that the distance constraints stated previously) on telephone placement and arrangement within the system; however, when placing telephones that require call announcing capability, consider the parameters detailed in this call announce matrix table.

Call Announce Matrix

Digital

Speaker

Digital

Monitor

Receive Call Announcements

Digital

Single

Line

Analog

Speaker

Analog

Monitor

Analog

Single

Line

Digital

Speaker

Digital

Monitor

Digital

Single

Line

Analog

Speaker

Analog

Monitor

Analog

Single

Line

PC

Atten.

Scout

900MX

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Industry

Standard

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

PC

Atten.

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Scout

900MX

Industry

Standard

NO NO

NO NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

3.4

Understanding The DXP Plus Logical Numbering

Because there are no dedicated station or line ports in the DXP Plus, the system uses an automatic configuration method to logically number its stations and lines. Automatic configuration occurs after you perform a master clear on the system.


With automatic configuration, the system does a search for all installed station and line boards in the main and expansion cabinets, and assigns a logical number for each provided station and line encountered during the search.

The search begins in the main cabinet at the left-most universal slot and proceeds left to right. The search then moves to the upper expansion cabinet where it searches left-most slot to right-most slot. The search finally moves to the lower expansion cabinet where it again searches left-most slot to right-most slot. When automatic configuration is finished, the system has logically numbered all station and line ports in ascending order from the left-most slot to right-most slot throughout the entire system.



How logical number and physical location relate to one another

The logical number of a station or line corresponds to its relationship to other stations or lines in the system but is not dependent upon the board’s placement in the cabinet. The physical location of a station or line corresponds to the order of the system’s board slots. The main cabinet contains slots 1–9, the upper expansion cabinet contains slots 10–20, and the lower expansion cabinet contains slots 21–30. Therefore, even if the first encountered station board is located in slot five of the main cabinet, the system still assigns logical number one to the first station provided by that board. During installation, you can skip slots. For example, you can install eight-line, loop start, line boards in only slots one and 30 if you wish. In this case, slot one yields logical line numbers 1–8 and slot 30 yields logical line numbers 9–17.

Where you can place circuit boards

Each installed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity. For example, a 16–station board requires 16 timing circuits, an eight–line loop start line board requires eight circuits, and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits. In the DXP plus, each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits. Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot, you can place any station or line board at any slot location with no restrictions.


If you install or relocate a station or line board, this board does not operate until you take appropriate programming action. If you use an available open slot for adding or relocating a board, that board’s stations or lines assume logical numbers in sequence after the system’s last assigned logical station or line number. For example, if the system’s last logical station number is 24, the logical numbers of the newly installed board’s stations begin at logical number 25.

After you remove a board and delete it through programming, that board’s logical numbers are available for reassignment. This means that you can remove a board, add or move another board, take the appropriate programming action, and have the stations or lines of the added or relocated board assume the logical numbers made available by the removed board. For example, if the system’s last logical number is 64 and you remove the board providing stations with logical numbers 1–16 and delete it through programming, the stations on an added board assume logical numbers beginning with 1 instead of 65. However, if you remove and program delete an eight-station board and add a 16-station board, the first eight stations stations on the added board assume logical numbers 1–8 and the last eight stations assume logical numbers 65–72.

Remember, should you master clear the system, the automatic configuration feature logically numbers all station and line ports in ascending order from the left-most slot to right-most slot throughout the entire system. This action renumbers those station and lines provided by boards that you have added or relocated since you last performed the system master clear.

3.4.1 Understanding Station Pairing

Station ports are paired ODD/EVEN, beginning with the lowest directory number 101/102, 103/104, etc., for data and for overload protection. The odd port is the positive voltage (+) port and the even port is the negative voltage

(-) port.



4.0 Installing Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce

Wiring For Analog Stations

An analog multiline telephone has subdued off-hook voice announce (SOHVA) capability built into it. This telephone contains a 6-position, 3-pair station jack for SOHVA connection.

To enable SOHVA as a system feature for analog stations,

✔ you must use 6-wire, twisted-pair house cable to connect two data-paired station ports to a 625A2-6 station jack,

✔ you must connect the SOHVA-capable analog multiline telephone to the 625A2-6 station jack using a 6-wire line cord,

✔ you must take programming action to configure the station ports to support SOHVA operation.

Make the installation per the following procedure:

1. Identify two data-paired ports on an analog station connector block (identify an odd-numbered port and its even-numbered counterpart such as ports 103 and 104).

2. Use 6-wire, twisted-pair house cable and make the following connections:

(a) connect pins 3 and 4 (the inside pair) of a 625A2-6 station jack to the voice pair of the odd-numbered station port.

(b) connect pins 2 and 5 (the outside pair) of the 625A2-6 station jack to the data pair of the odd-numbered station port,

(c) connect pins 1 and 6 of the 625A2-6 station jack to the voice pair of the even-numbered stration port,

(d) leave the data pair of the even-numbered station port vacant.

3. Using the Telephone Types programming selection from the stations programming menu, program the odd-numbered station port to support the type of telephone that you will install there. Program the even-numbered station port as UNDEFINED.



To Secure

Off-Hook

Voice Announce

Telephone

6-Wire

Line

Cord

PLUS012

Voice Pair

(Paired Station)

Data Pair

Voice Pair

6-Wire

Twisted Pair

Cable

FRONT

VIEW

OF JACK

6 5 4 3 2 1

1 VOICE (PAIRED STATION)

2 DATA

3 VOICE

4 VOICE

5 DATA

6 VOICE (PAIRED STATION)

Type 625A2-6 Connector

(Typical)

No

{

Connection

19

20

21

22

23

24

13

14

15

16

17

18

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

9

10

11

12

6

7

8

3

4

5

1

2

38

39

40

41

42

43

32

33

34

35

36

37

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

Typical

Paired

Station

Ports

50

25

26

1

CLIP TERMINALS

Typical Station

Connector Block

Making Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce

Connections For Analog Multiline Telephones



5.0 Testing The Analog Station Installation

5.1

Making A Resistance Check

Make the following resistance measurements at the station connector blocks under the following conditions.

•

AC power cord disconnected from electrical outlet.

•

External battery back-up assembly disconnected.

•

Common equipment connected to station connector blocks.

•

Stations wired and wiring punched down on blocks.

•

Bridging clips removed from blocks to isolate stations from common equipment.

1. Measure the resistance of each installed station and wiring from the station side of the connector blocks.

Resistance values will vary with cable length and station type but should be within the limits shown in the chart below.

2. Measure the resistance of the common equipment and cables from the common equipment side of the station connector blocks. Resistance values should be within the limits shown in the chart below.

Measured Pair

Voice Pair

Data Pair

Making Resistance Measurements

Resistance In Ohms

Multiline Telephone Single Line Telephone DSS/BLF Console Common Equipment

40–150 40–150 0.3–100 40–50

0.3–100 0.3–100 0.3–100 1–2

5.2

Making A Voltage Check

Make the following voltage measurements at the station connector blocks under the following conditions:

•

Bridging clips installed

•

AC power connected to the common equipment

Measure the voltage across one voice line and one data line and then across the other voice line and the other data line for each even and odd station. The measured voltage must be within the limits shown in the chart below.

Station Under Test

Making Voltage Measurements

66M-xx Block Connection Meter Lead Polarity

Voice 1 +

Measured Voltage

Odd Station

Data 3

Voice 2

Data 4

-

+

-

+ 34 +/- 3 VDC

+ 34 +/- 3 VDC

Even Station

Voice 5

Data 7

Voice 6

+

-

+

+ 34 +/- 3 VDC

+ 34 +/- 3 VDC

Data 8 -

Varriant readings can indicate a possible wiring, station, or common equipment problem.



5.3

Causing An Analog Station To Self Test

You can cause analog multiline stations to self test for proper operation per the following instructions:

1. Disconnect line cord at station base.

NOTE: The adjacent odd or even station will be disabled during the time that the station line cord is being disconnected or reconnected.

2. Press and hold MUTE and reconnect line cord to station connector. Station will automatically perform self test routine.

3. Release MUTE as soon as test begins. Sequence of test is as follows:

•

(a.) Indicators will light in sequence

(b.) Indicators will then turn off at the same time

(c.) Ringer will sound—be sure to set station ringer volume to medium or high setting

4. Replace any station that does not pass the self test.

5.4

Causing A DSS/BLF Console To Self Test

You can cause the DSS/BLF Consoles to self test for proper operation as follows:

1. Disconnect console line cord plug from line.

2. Press and hold console button C10 while reconnecting line cord plug to line.

NOTE: The companion station will be disabled during the time that the console is being disconnected and reconnected.

3. Release console button C10, and note that BLF indicators will each turn on in sequence beginning with station 10 indicator. Indicators will then turn off and console will become operational.

5.5

Understanding The Failure Indications

If erratic light indications or ring signals occur at a paired station, an open data pair at either station may be the fault. A station with an open data line may work properly on a short loop but fail on a long loop.

Stations are paired for overload current protection. If a fault occurs that causes more than 300 milliamps of current to be drawn, the overload paired stations are disabled by circuit action. Disconnect the disabled stations and reconnect them one at a time to isolate the faulty one.


Installing The Digital Station Board


1.0 Introducing The Digital Station Boards

The digital station board supports the operation of both the DigiTech and Impact digital multiline telephones.

1.1

Inventorying The Digital Station Boards

There are two models of station boards available for use.

•

Eight-station model supports eight DigiTech or Impact multiline and single line proprietary digital telephones

•

16-station model supports 16 DigiTech or Impact multiline and single line proprietary digital telephones

1.2



•


•


•


•


R





22906.


IMI89-174.01

7/95

IMI89–174 Installing The Digital Station Board


CAUTION


Refer to the Comdial publication IMI01-005, Handling Of


2.1





2 – Installing The Digital Station Board

Installing The Digital Station Board IMI89–174

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground

Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet Mounting Location

Static

Wrist

Strap

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Common Point Ground

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat

Creating A Static Safe Work Area

Installing The Digital Station Board – 3


2.2

Installing Station Boards In The Equipment Cabinet

1. Normally you should disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply; however, when necessary, you can install a station board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 5, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the station board.


AC or earth ground




•

On DXP Plus systems the station boards connect to any universal slot.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a station board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.


6. Orient the station board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage. and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane.

CAUTION









PLUS029

Power Supply

Pre-charge Port

IMI89–174

Pre-charge

Cable For

Station Board

Installation

During

Power Up

Station Board

Pre-charge

Port

Analog or Digital

Station Board








The American Wire Gauge (AWG) size of the station wiring determines the maximum distance allowed from the common equipment to the stations. The following chart details this relationship.

Station Type

Digital Telephone

20 AWG

2500 Feet

Wire Gauge

22 AWG

2000 Feet

24 AWG

1500 Feet



3.1

Installing DSS/BLF Consoles

Install a DSS/BLF Console at any station port in the system as a companion to a system telephone.

•

The DXP Plus systems support a maximum of four consoles for each telephone and there is no limit to the maximum number of consoles that you can install on a system. Typically, the console capacity is equal to one-half of the total station capacity of the system.

•

The installed distance limit between the station board and the console is the same as that allowed for an analog or digital telephone.

When you install a DSS/BLF console, you must program define the station port as a console port.



Typical Station

Connector Block

33

34

35

36

37

28

29

30

31

32

23

24

25

26

27

18

19

20

21

22

13

14

15

16

17

8

9

10

11

12

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

50

25

26

1

CLIP TERMINALS

Female 50-pin

Cable Connector

Ferrite

Collar

PLUS068

Typical Digital

Station Board

J1 (Male 50-pin

Connector)

Viewing A Typical Station Connection



3.2

Detailing The Station Connections

3.2.1 Detailing Digital Station Board Connections

25-Pair Connections

Wire Color

White-Blue

Pair

Pin

No.

26

1

Blue-White

White-Orange

1

27

2

Orange-White

White-Green

2

28

3

Green-White

White-Brown

3

29

4

Brown-White

White-Slate

4

30

5

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

6

5

31

6

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

Black-Green

Green-Black

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

Violet-Slate

Slate-Violet

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

46

21

47

22

44

19

45

20

48

23

49

24

50

25

15

41

16

42

13

39

14

40

17

43

18

34

9

35

10

32

7

33

8

36

11

37

12

38

41

42

43

44

37

38

39

40

45

46

47

48

49

50

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

34

35

36

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

21

22

23

24

25

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

Clip

Term.

1

Station Pair Connections

Pair Identification Wire Color

Signal Path

Green

Red

Yellow

Signal Path

Black

Green

Signal Path

Red

Yellow

Signal Path

Black

Green

Signal Path

10

11

12

Signal Path

Red

Yellow

Black

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Signal Path

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Red

Green

Yellow

Black

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Station

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Location (note the site position in this column)

The digital station board does not provide station connections on connector pairs 17–25. Remember, you should connect all unused conductors in your house cable to earth ground.



3.3




With automatic configuration, the system does a search for all installed station and line boards in the main and expansion cabinets, and assigns a logical number for each provided station and line encountered during the search. The search begins in the main cabinet at the left-most universal slot and proceeds left to right. The search then moves to the upper expansion cabinet where it searches left-most slot to right-most slot. The search finally moves to the lower expansion cabinet where it again searches left-most slot to right-most slot. When automatic configuration is finished, the system has logically numbered all station and line ports in ascending order from the left-most slot to right-most slot throughout the entire system.


The logical number of a station or line corresponds to its relationship to other stations or lines in the system but is not dependent upon the board’s placement in the cabinet. The physical location of a station or line corresponds to the order of the system’s board slots. The main cabinet contains slots 1–9, the upper expansion cabinet contains slots 10–20, and the lower expansion cabinet contains slots 21–30. Therefore, even if the first encountered station board is located in slot five of the main cabinet, the system still assigns logical number one to the first station provided by that board.

During installation, you can skip slots. For example, you can install eight-line, loop start, line boards in only slots one and 30 if you wish. In this case, slot one yields logical line numbers 1–8 and slot 30 yields logical line numbers 9–17.


Each installed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity. For example, a 16–station board requires 16 timing circuits, an eight–line loop start line board requires eight circuits, and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits. In the DXP Plus, each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits. Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot, you can place any station or line board at any slot location with no restrictions.





3.3.1 Understanding Station Pairing

Station ports are paired ODD/EVEN, beginning with the lowest directory number 101/102, 103/104, etc., for data and for overload protection. The odd port is the positive voltage (+) port and the even port is the negative voltage

(-) port.



3.4

Detailing Station Call Announce Parameters

The DXP Plus systems place no limits (other that the distance constraints stated previously) on telephone placement and arrangement within the system; however, when placing telephones that require call announcing capability, consider the parameters detailed in the call announce matrix table.

Call Announce Matrix

Digital

Speaker

Digital

Monitor

Receive Call Announcements

Digital

Single

Line

Analog

Speaker

Analog

Monitor

Analog

Single

Line

Digital

Speaker

Digital

Monitor

Digital

Single

Line

Analog

Speaker

Analog

Monitor

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Analog

Single

Line

PC

Atten.

Scout

900MX

Industry

Standard

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

PC

Atten.

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Scout

900MX

Industry

Standard

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO



4.0 Testing The Digital Station Installation

IMI89–174

4.1

Making A Resistance Check

Measure the resistance at the station connector blocks under the following conditions.

•

AC power cord disconnected from electrical outlet.

•


•


•

Bridging clips removed from blocks to isolate stations from common equipment.

Measure the resistance of each installed station and wiring from the station side of the connector blocks.

Resistance values will vary with cable length and station type but should be within the following limits:

4 Greater than 700 Kohms

Measure the resistance of the common equipment and cables from the common equipment side of the station connector blocks. The resistance value should be within the following limits.

4 40–50 Ohms

4.2

Making A Voltage Check


•


•


Measure the voltage across the signal pair. The measured voltage must be within the following limits:

4 28–36 VDC

4.3

Causing A Digital Station To Self Test

The multiline stations can be self tested for proper operation per the following instructions:

1. Disconnect line cord at station base.

2. Press and hold MUTE and reconnect line cord to station connector. Station will automatically perform self test routine.

3. Release MUTE as soon as test begins. Sequence of test is as follows:

•

(a.) Indicators will light in sequence

•

(b.) Ringer will sound - be sure volume is set to low or high

•

(c.) Indicators and ringer will then turn off at the same time

4. Replace any station that does not pass the self test.


R

Installing An Industry-Standard Telephone Station Board


1.0 Understanding Industry-Standard Telephone Support

The DXP Plus digital communications system supports the use of on-premise industry-standard telephones (IST) through IST station interface boards. IST installations require a ring generator assembly—one required for the main common equipment cabinet and another one in each expansion common equipment cabinet. Plus, IST installations may require a dual tone multiple frequency (DTMF) receiver card if additional DTMF receivers are required beyond the one provided by the services board.

1.1

Detailing The Necessary Equipment

Regardless of the number of industry-standard telephones that you plan to install, you will need to install the following equipment:

• at least one IST station interface board,

• one ring generator assembly for each equipment cabinet that will contain IST station interface boards,

• at least one line interface circuit board

The DXP Plus services board provides on-board DTMF receiver circuitry capable of supporting simultaneous dialing of one industry-standard telephone at a time. This provision is adequate if your site requires only a few industry-standard telephones; however, if you intend to support a population of industry-standard telephones that will generate a large volume of outgoing call traffic, you may need to install one or more DTMF receiver cards to provide additional DTMF receivers for the telephones. Each receiver card allows four ISTs to dial simultaneously.

The number of cards that you need to install in the system depends upon how active the ISTs will be at the site.

See section 1.2 for complete details.

If you do need to add receiver cards, you have three choices as to where to install them.

1. The best and recommended choice is to add one receiver card to top position on the main cabinet’s services board.

NOTE: You can add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board; however, you must take specific programming action to enable their use (the name of this program option is: Services

DTMF Highway). If you add these two cards and take this program option, you can add only one card to the interface board in the lower expansion cabinet (discussed in step 2 below).

2. The second best choice is to add up to three receiver cards to each expansion cabinet interface board if one or both is available. Remember, add only one card to the lower cabinet’s interface board if you have added or will add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board and take programming action to enable their use

3. The third choice is to add an auxiliary board to the system and install up to four DTMF receiver cards on it.

This is the least desirable choice because it requires you to occupy a board slot that you could otherwise use for line or station boards.

This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation (the “Company”) and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. While every effort has been made to eliminate errors, the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising from the interpretation of the information contained herein.

The information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment or to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be desired, or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, contact Comdial, Inside Sales Department,

Charlottesville, Virginia 22906.


IMI89-184.01

7/95

IMI89–184 Installing The IST Station Board

1.2

Determining The Board Configuration That You Will Need

Use the following specifications to determine the maximum number of station boards and DTMF receiver cards that you may need.

•

Each eight-station circuit board supports up to eight telephones. (It will actually support 16 telephones—two telephones at each port sharing a common intercom number.)

•

You can bridge up to two industry-standard telephones at one station port as long as you do not exceed a combined ringer equivalence number, or REN, of 2.0. (Remember, with two telephones at the same port, they share a common intercom number.)

•

Each 16-station circuit board supports up to 16 telephones. (It will actually support 32 telephones—two telephones at each port sharing a common intercom number)

•

You can bridge up to two industry-standard telephones at one station port as long as you do not exceed a combined ringer equivalence number, or REN, of 2.0. (Remember, with two telephones at the same port, they share a common intercom number.)

•

Each receiver card allows four industry-standard telephones to dial simultaneously. (The number of cards that you need to install in the system will depend upon how active the industry-standard telephones will be at the site.)

•

You can install one receiver card in the top position on the services board. The services board always provides on-board DTMF receiver circuitry capable of supporting simultaneous dialing of one industry-standard telephone. With the addition of a receiver card, the services board supports simultaneous dialing of five industry-standard telephones. You can add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board; however, you must take specific programming action to enable their use

(this program feature name is: Services DTMF Highway). With these additional two cards, the services board supports simultaneous dialing of 13 industry-standard telephones.

•

You can install three receiver cards on the expansion cabinet interface boards. With three receiver cards installed, each expansion cabinet’s interface board supports simultaneous dialing of 12 industry-standard telephones.

CAUTION

If you add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board, you can add only one receiver card to the lower expansion cabinet’s interface board..

•

You can install four receiver cards on a auxiliary board. With four receiver cards installed, an auxiliary board supports simultaneous dialing of 16 industry-standard telephones (Remember, while you can install up to five auxiliary boards in the system, each auxiliary board that you use occupies a slot where you could install a station or line board.)

Based upon the above specifications, a fully-equipped DXP Plus system with a minimum of one line board and no auxiliary boards will provide the following industry-standard telephone support:

• main cabinet (reserving one slot for a line board) supports 128 telephones (eight 16-station boards times 16 station ports per board—256 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number),

• upper expansion cabinet supports 176 telephones (eleven 16-station boards times 16 station ports per board—352 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number),

• lower expansion cabinet supports 160 telephones (ten 16-station boards times 16 station ports per board—320 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number).

These individual totals add together to provide a system support total of 464 telephones (The total is 928 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same intercom number.)

2 – Installing The IST Station Board

Installing The IST Station Board IMI89–184

You can configure the system so that a maximum of 29 of these telephones can dial simultaneously.

• services board circuitry that supports one telephone plus one receiver card that supports four telephones provides support for five simultaneously dialing telephones

• upper expansion cabinet interface board with three receiver cards supports 12 simultaneously dialing telephones

• lower expansion cabinet interface board with three receiver cards supports 12 simultaneously dialing telephones

If you add the maximum of five auxiliary boards and install four receiver cards on each board, you can increase the simultaneous dialing capacity to 109 telephones but you reduce the maximum telephone capacity to 384. (The total is 788 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number.)

1.2.1 Calculating Your Receiver Card Needs

You can use the following formula to determine how many receiver cards that you must install in your system.

(Simultaneous Dialing Telephones) - (1 Telephone Supported By Services Board)

( 4 Telephones Per Card)

= Receiver Cards

As an example, the system maximum is as follows: (110 - 1)

÷

4 = 27 cards

If you are not sure how many telephones will dial at the same time in your system, you can use the following typical system averages and formula to arrive at an usable estimate.

A typical telephone system, experiences the following call traffic percentages. Your system may be similar.

•

Light Call Traffic = up to 15 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously

•

Moderate Call Traffic = up to 20 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously

•

Heavy Call Traffic = up to 30 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously

(Percent Of Simultaneous Dialing) x (Installed IST Telephones) = (Simultaneous Dialing Telephones)

An an example the system maximum is as follows: .286 x 384 = 110 telephones

1.3



•


•


•


•


Installing The IST Station Board – 3



CAUTION




2.1







PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat




2.2

Installing IST Station Boards In The Equipment Cabinet

1. Normally you should first disconnect the optional battery back-up equipment from the power supply and then disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet; however, when necessary, you can install a station board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 5, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the station board.


AC or earth ground


3. Loosen the retaining hardware and lift the front panel away from the common equipment cabinet.


5. Locate the proper board slot. On DXP Plus systems, the station boards connect to any universal slot; however, do not install a station board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves the software timing associated with this slot for internal use.


7. Orient the station board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage. and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane. If you connected a handset cord between the pre-charge port on the power supply and the jack on the circuit board, disconnect the cord after installing the board.

CAUTION







12. If your installation requires additional DTMF receivers, add receiver cards by following the instructions included with the card.

13. If the cabinet where you installed the IST station boards does not now include a ring generator assembly, install a ring generator assembly by following the instructions included with the assembly.

14. Plug the AC line cord into the AC outlet, reconnect any battery back up equipment, and turn on the switch on the power supply.

15. Replace the front panel on the common equipment cabinet.


Installing The IST Station Board

PLUS026

Power Supply

Pre-charge Port

IMI89–184

Pre-charge

Cable For

Station Board

Installation

During

Power Up

Station Board

Pre-charge

Port

Typical Industry

Standard Station

Board








The maximum distance allowed from the common equipment to the industry-standard telephone varies with the gauge of wire that you use to make the connection. Refer to the following chart for complete details.

Station Type

Industry-Standard

Telephones

20 AWG

4000 Feet

Wire Gauge

22 AWG

3500 Feet

24 AWG

3000 Feet

The maximum distances stated above are dependent upon the following conditions:

• resistance of industry-standard telephone (per EIA specs) cannot exceed 300 ohms maximum,

•

DC load resistance of the wiring between the common equipment and the industry-standard telephone Plus the

DC resistance of telephone itself can not exceed 460 ohms maximum.



CAUTION

The polarity between the individual wires in a particular voice pair is not critical.



Typical Station

Connector Block

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

50

25

26

1

CLIP TERMINALS

Female 50-pin

Cable Connector

Ferrite

Collar

PLUS027

Typical Industry-Standa

Station Board

J1 (Male 50-pin

Connector)

J2 (Male 50-pin

Connector)

Connecting Telephones To The IST Station Board



3.2

Detailing The Station Connections For J1



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

No.

26

22

48

23

49

20

46

21

47

24

50

25

41

16

42

17

39

14

40

15

43

18

44

19

45

37

12

38

13

35

10

36

11

7

33

8

34

9

5

31

6

32

3

29

4

30

1

27

2

28

White-Blue

Blue-White

White-Orange

Orange-White

White-Green

Green-White

White-Brown

Brown-White

White-Slate

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

Black-Green

Green-Black

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

Violet-Slate

Slate-Violet

Clip

Term.

1

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

48

49

50

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

35

36

37

38

39

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

14

15

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

9

2

3

4

5

Two-Wire Connections

Pair


Wire Color Station Location

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8



3.3

Detailing The Station Connections For J2



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

No.

26

22

48

23

49

20

46

21

47

24

50

25

41

16

42

17

39

14

40

15

43

18

44

19

45

37

12

38

13

35

10

36

11

7

33

8

34

9

5

31

6

32

3

29

4

30

1

27

2

28

White-Blue

Blue-White

White-Orange

Orange-White

White-Green

Green-White

White-Brown

Brown-White

White-Slate

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

Black-Green

Green-Black

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

Violet-Slate

Slate-Violet

Clip

Term.

1

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

48

49

50

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

35

36

37

38

39

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

14

15

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

9

2

3

4

5

Two-Wire Connections

Pair


Wire Color Station Location

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Tip Lead

Ring Lead

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

Green

Red

No connection

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16



3.4


Because there are no dedicated station or line ports in the DXP Plus, the system uses an automatic configuration method to logically number its stations and lines. Automatic configuration occurs after you perform a master clear on the system.







Each installed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity. For example, a 16–station board requires 16 timing circuits, an eight–line loop start line board requires eight circuits, and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits. In the DXP Plus, each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits. Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot, you can place any station or line board at any slot location with no restrictions.


If you install or relocate a station or line board, this board does not operate until you take appropriate programming action. If you use an available open slot for adding or relocating a board, that board’s stations or lines assume logical numbers in sequence after the system’s last assigned logical station or line number. For example, if the system’s last logical station number is 24, the logical numbers of the newly installed board’s stations begin at logical number 25.

After you remove a board and delete it through programming, that board’s logical numbers are available for reassignment. This means that you can remove a board, add or move another board, take the appropriate programming action, and have the stations or lines of the added or relocated board assume the logical numbers made available by the removed board. For example, if the system’s last logical number is

64 and you remove the board providing stations with logical numbers 1–16 and delete it through programming, the stations on an added board assume logical numbers beginning with 1 instead of 65.

However, if you remove and program delete an eight-station board and add a 16-station board, the first eight stations stations on the added board assume logical numbers 1–8 and the last eight stations assume logical numbers 65–72.




4.0 Checking Out The Installation And Isolating Failures

Check the telephone installation for proper operation by performing the following voltage measurements.

4.1

Voltage Check


•


•


•


•


Measure the DC voltage across the Tip and Ring leads for each installed telephone with a DC voltmeter. Then, call the industry-standard telephone to stimulate the ring generator assembly and measure the AC ringing voltage across the Tip and Ring leads for each installed telephone with an AC voltmeter.

The measured voltages must be within the limits shown in the chart below. If your measured readings are different from these charted values, it could indicate a possible wiring error or a station or common equipment problem.

66M-xx Connector Meter Lead Polarity Measured DC Volts Measured AC Ring

Voltage

Tip Lead +

+ 36

±

3 VDC 70

±

5 VAC

Ring Lead -


Installing The Loop Start Line Board


1.0 Introducing The Loop Start Line Board

1.1

Defining Loop Start

The line board signals for the host system to complete a line connection by sending a supervisory signal to the host system. Typically this signal is the hookflash that occurs when a user takes a telephone off hook on the line.

The line board transmits this signal to the host system by placing a resistance across the line’s tip and ring leads to complete a current loop. When the host system senses this resistance, it sends dial tone over the line thus giving line service to the system.

1.2

Inventorying The Loop Start Line Boards

There are two versions of the loop start line board. One version interfaces four central office lines and the other version interfaces eight central office lines.

1.3



•


•


•

Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

•


R





22906.


IMI89-172.01

7/95

IMI89–172 Installing The Loop Start Line Board

2.0 Installing Circuit Boards In The Equipment Cabinet

CAUTION




2.1





2 – Installing The Loop Start Line Board

Installing The Loop Start Line Board IMI89–172

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat


Installing The Loop Start Line Board – 3


2.2

Installing Loop Start Line Boards

1. Normally you should disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply; however, when necessary, you can install a line board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 5, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the line board.


AC or earth ground


3. Each circuit board is supplied in a static protection bag for safe keeping. When you are ready to install the circuit board, remove it from its static protection bag.


•

On DXP Plus systems the loop start line boards connect to any universal slot.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a line board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.

5. If you are installing the line board in an operating system, connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the line board.


CAUTION






10. Each line board includes a ferrite collar. Bundle the line cables together and snap the ferrite collar around the cable bundle to provide protection against radio frequency interference.



PLUS032

Power Supply

Pre-charge Port

IMI89–172

Line Board

Pre-charge

Jack

Pre-charge Cable

For Line Board

Installation During

Power Up

Loop Start

Line Board

Static Discharge

Wrist Strap

Viewing A Typical Line Board Installation



3.0 Connecting The Telephone Lines

The line terminations on the line board are standard modular plug/jack connections. Each modular jack provides termination for two lines. The line outside termination can be a type 66M-xx connector block or individual

6-position modular jacks. The wiring that is routed between the outside termination and the common equipment circuit board termination should be twisted-pair wiring.

Remember, each line board is shipped with a ferrite collar. Bundle the line cables together and snap the collar around the bundle to provide protection against radio frequency interference.

Detailing The Line Board Connections

Line Jack

1

2

3

4

5

Pin Number

1

5

6

1

2

3

2

3

4

4

5

6

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

Connection

No Connection

Line 8 Tip

Line 7 Tip

Line 7 Ring

Line 8 Ring

No Connection

No Connection

Line 6 Tip

Line 5 Tip

Line 5 Ring

Line 6 Ring

No Connection

No Connection

Line 4 Tip

Line 3 Tip

Line 3 Ring

Line 4 Ring

No Connection

No Connection

Auxiliary (Line 2) Tip

Line 1 Tip

Line 1 Ring

Line 2 Ring

Auxiliary (Line 2) Ring

No Connection

No connection

Power Fail (Line 1) Ring

Power Fail (lIne1 ) Tip

No Connection

No Connection

Telephone Number

NOTE: If the system operation includes the direct inward station access (DISA) feature on a particular line, callers that use DISA to access a trunk group and place calls (trunk to trunk calling) may experience low audio levels on their calls due to the normal line resistance of CO lines. Low audio level is usually only noticeable on long line loops. If signal loss is a problem at your site, try adding a line amplifier (repeater) in the DISA line. Comdial does not recommend DISA for use on loop start lines without disconnect supervision. While DISA will function, Comdial will not be liable for its performance under any condition where disconnect supervision is not provided.



PLUS033

IMI89–172

Ferrite

Collar

Viewing A Typical Line Connection

Connect Line

Cable to

Outside Line

Termination



3.1



How automatic configuration works



How logical number and physical location relate to one another


Where you can place circuit boards


Adding boards without renumbering





Installing The Loop Start Line Board IMI89–172

4.0 Making A Power Failure Station Connection

Every loop start line board provides a tip and ring pair connected to line 1 as an emergency power failure circuit.

This power fail circuit is active during a commercial AC power failure if an external battery assembly is not installed to provide battery back-up power to the system. Connect an industry standard, single-line telephone to the power failure jack and use it to provide basic communications capability until the AC power to the system is restored. The bottom jack on the line board provides the power failure connection.

PLUS065

Line Board

4

3

6

5

2

1


Typical Industry Standard

Non-Electronic Telephone

Making A Power Failure Station Connection



5.0 Making An Auxiliary Equipment

Interface Connection (Busy Lead Detection)

When needed, connect an industry standard non-electronic telephone device such as a FAX machine, an industry-standard telephone, or a data device, such as a modem, on a line ahead of the common equipment. The system will detect an off-hook condition in the connected device and turn on the status light for the line at the system telephones to indicate that the line is busy.

Each line board makes one auxiliary equipment connection available for use. This connection is at pins 1 and 6 of the lines 1,2 jack and is associated with line 2 of that line board.

PLUS066

Line Board

Line 1 Conn.

Line 2 Conn.

3

2

1

6

5

4


Industry-Standard

Telephone Device

Such As: Fax

Machine, Model

2500 Telephone,

Modem, Etc.

(No A-Lead Control Required)

Making A Typical Auxiliary Interface Connection




R

Charlottesville, Virginia 22901-2829

World Wide Web: http://www.comdial.com/

Installing The Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Line Board


1.0 Understanding The DID Line Board

1.1

Describing Direct Inward Dialing Parameters

Direct inward dial (DID) lines are incoming only and are employed to reduce the number of channels between the

DXP Plus and the Central Office (CO). The number of DID lines that the system accepts is limited only by the number of installed DID boards that you can install in the system.

Direct inward dialing allows incoming CO calls to reach internal intercom extensions by direct dialing. No attendant assistance is necessary. Since DID lines are incoming only, their direct appearance is limited to attendant stations where busy indication may be useful.

DID operation requires a group of published directory numbers (400 maximum) provided by the CO. These directory numbers are incoming only and the DXP Plus translates them to the appropriate personal or group intercom number for ringing. The lines will accept outgoing DTMF digits while the call is active to support personal identification number dialing and similar user purposes.

The DXP Plus handles DID calls in the same manner that it handles regular intercom calls and will forward them via a hunt list or a call forwarding scheme. An unanswered DID call that receives no answer will either continue to ring or route to a programmed ring no-answer (RNA) destination. If there is no forwarding or the RNA routing destination is available, the system provides no routing.

Users can place DID calls on hold; however, if they press TAP , the system will generate an internal hookflash signal instead of one that the CO will recognize.

The system returns a ring back signal to DID calls made to a station in the do not disturb (DND) mode of operation.

When a DID line is disabled, the system returns an off-hook indication to the CO. This prevents the CO from placing calls on a disabled line.

The synchronized ringing feature does not have any affect on DID calls, and the Caller ID feature is not available on DID lines.

R





IMI89-191.01

7/95

IMI89–191 Installing The DID Line Board

1.2

Understanding DID Operation

The DID line is a reverse battery, loop start, two-wire voice circuit. (The term reverse battery means that it is the

DXP Plus and not the CO that provides tip and ring supervisory battery for the loop.) The PBX supervision battery, tone address, supervisory tones, and voice signals are transmitted across the voice pair.

The line interface at the DXP Plus provides loop current detection, loop pulse digit collection, DTMF receivers, and a polarity reversal circuit.

In the idle state, the loop is open at the CO end, with on-hook battery polarity maintained on the circuit by the

DXP Plus. The CO requests service from the DXP Plus by applying a resistive termination across the line tip and ring leads. The DXP Plus recognizes current flow in the loop as a CO connection and prepares for the incoming call. The CO does not send ringing since the DXP Plus generates it internally and sends it to the stations.

After the DXP Plus receives all of the address digits, it will translate the digits based on the appropriate DID block translation table and attempt to place the call to the desired station. To assure that the caller will always hear ring back prior to the call being answered (for example, when answered by voice mail), the system delays the station ringing until it applies ring back tone.

During station ringing, the called station will sound a distinctive ringing based on the ring code in the translation table. If the translation table has a name for this CO digit string, the LCD of the called stations will display that name. Otherwise, the DID block name will display followed by a portion of the CO digit string. If there is neither CO digit string name nor DID block name programmed, the station LCD will display just the CO digit string.

If an incoming call is addressed to either an unassigned or an uninstalled station, the DXP Plus will route the call to the DID block alternate extension. If the DID Block alternate extension is unavailable, it routes the call to the

Dial 0 attendant. If the Dial 0 attendant is either unprogrammed or uninstalled, the DXP Plus will return reorder tone to the caller.

2 – Installing The DID Line Board

Installing The DID Line Board IMI89–191

The system returns several different call progress signals to the CO in the interval after it receives address signalling and before it answers. It does this within 1.5 seconds after completion of address signalling.

Line Busy Tone: This tone indicates called station is busy or already being alerted by another call.

Reorder Tone: This tone indicates that the call cannot be completed due to: blocking or lack of equipment, an incomplete (partial dial) address is received.

Audible Ringing Tone: This tone indicates that the station is being alerted or that a recorded announcement will follow. The ring back will precede the actual alerting of the station to assure that the caller always hears some portion of the ring back tone.

When a called station answers, the DXP Plus sends answer supervision to the CO by applying reverse polarity to the line. This polarity reversal is maintained until either the station goes on-hook or the CO opens the loop. The

DXP Plus establishes a communication path between the line and station when it detects station answer.

The CO signals a line disconnect condition to the DXP Plus by opening the loop. When the DXP Plus detects the

CO disconnect, it returns the line to idle polarity and changes the line from busy to idle.

The DXP Plus signals a line disconnect condition to the CO by returning the supervision battery polarity to the on-hook state. Wink and delay start lines maintain the busy status until the DXP Plus detects CO release. After disconnect, the DXP Plus returns to the idle state and is ready to process the next call.

With the Wink Start line, the DXP Plus acknowledges that is ready to receive addressing digits from the CO by giving a momentary reversal of polarity after it has successfully allocated the resources.

With the Delay Start line, the DXP Plus reverses polarity upon notification from the CO of the pending incoming call, then acknowledges that is ready to receive addressing digits by returning the polarity back to the idle state after it has successfully allocated the resources.

With the Immediate Start line, there is no acknowledgment from the DXP Plus that it is ready. It is best to only use this method if the system is set for pulse (rotary) dialing on the line.

Installing The DID Line Board – 3



CAUTION




2.1







PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat




2.2

Installing DID Line Boards

1. Normally you should first disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply and then disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet; however, when necessary, you can install a DID line board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 6, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the line board.


AC or earth ground



4. Each DID line board is supplied in a static protection bag for safe keeping. When you are ready to install the board, remove it from its static protection bag.


•

On DXP Plus systems the DID line boards connect to any universal slot.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a DID line board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.


7. Orient the DID line board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage. and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane. If you connected handset cord between pre-charge port on DXP Plus power supply and jack on DID line board (as directed in step 6), disconnect it after installing board.

CAUTION



8. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all DID line boards are installed.

9. Make a final inspection to ensure that all boards are, oriented correctly and mated properly.

10. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the circuit boards to the board cage. Do not neglect this step!

It is important because it helps in providing a protective ground condition for the board.


Installing The DID Line Board

PLUS021

Power Supply

Pre-charge Port

IMI89–191

Pre-charge

Cable For

DID Board

Installation

During

Power Up

Pre-charge

Port

DID Line Board


Installing The DID Line Board



3.0 Connecting The DID Lines

The FCC specified jack configuration for DID line connection to the switched network is a universal service order code (USOC) RJ21X type and the facility interface code for DID is 02RV2-T . This specified connection is typically a type 66M-nn connector block.

CAUTION

When connecting the lines for DID applications, be sure that you do not reverse the tip and ring leads.

A 50-pin connector on the DID line board provides its line terminations. You can cable connect the DID board to the CO line termination with a prepared cable that matches the termination requirements. Snap the supplied ferrite collar around the cable to provide protection against radio frequency interference.

Before you connect the CO-supplied DID lines to the board, program the system for DID operation, and test the

DID line ports per the steps shown below.


2. Plug the AC line cord into the AC outlet, reconnect any battery back up equipment and turn on the switch on the power supply.

3. Using the data base programming procedure, program the system for DID line operation.

4. Connect a buttset or an industry-standard telephone (IST) to a line port on the DID line board.

5. Take the buttset or ISToff-hook, and listen for relay click on both wink start and delay start lines.

6. Dial a CO digit string to determine if you can make a call. Have someone answer your call to determine if you have a complete talk path. If you can complete a call, this verifies that you have programmed the system correctly.

7. Repeat step 6 as desired for other CO digit strings and repeat steps 4 through 7 at all line ports on the DID line board.

8. Connect the CO-supplied DID lines to the DID board.

9. Note the DID board’s status light, and compare status with the following details:

Rapid Flash = Malfunctioning on-board processor,

Off with repeated 5 second blink on = Normal operation with all idle lines,

On with repeated 5 second blink off = Normal operation with at least one busy line, (lf a line is active but the LED is showing off with repeated 5 second blink on, check the wiring for poor connections),

Three Rapid Flashes On Followed By 2.5 seconds Off = One or more lines out of service



PLUS022

Line 1

Line 2

Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7

Line 8

Connector Block

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

47

48

49

50

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

9

3

4

5

1

2

18

19

20

21

22

14

15

16

17

50

25

26

1

CLIP TERMINALS

DID

Line Board

Male 50-pin

Connector

Ferrite

Collar

Grounding

Terminal

No. 6 Solid

Copper Wire

Typical Earth Ground

NOTE: Wiring for the 8 line board is shown. Wiring for the 4 line board uses only pairs 1 through 4.

Viewing Typical DID Line Connections



3.1


Because there are no dedicated station or line ports in the DXP Plus, the system uses an automatic configuration method to logically number its stations and lines. Automatic configuration occurs after you perform a master clear on the system.







Each installed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity. For example, a 16–station board requires 16 timing circuits, an eight–line loop start line board requires eight circuits, and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits. In the DXP Plus, each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits. Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot, you can place any station or line board at any slot location with no restrictions.







3.2

Understanding The DID Line Connections

25-Pair Connections Wire-Pair

Connections

Line Designations


No.

Clip

Term.

Wire Name Line Number CO Line

Number

11

12

13

14

8

9

6

7

10

1

4

5

2

3

19

20

21

22

23

15

16

17

18

24

25

White-Blue

Blue-White

White-Orange

Orange-White

White-Green

Green-White

White-Brown

Brown-White

White-Slate

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

Black-Green

Green-Black

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

Violet-Slate

Slate-Violet

12

38

13

39

14

10

36

11

37

33

8

34

9

35

31

6

32

7

26

3

29

4

30

5

1

27

2

28

46

21

47

22

48

44

19

45

20

23

49

24

50

25

42

17

43

18

40

15

41

16

24

25

26

27

28

20

21

22

23

15

16

17

18

19

11

12

13

14

1

8

9

6

7

10

4

5

2

3

41

42

43

44

45

37

38

39

40

46

47

48

49

50

33

34

35

36

29

30

31

32

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Data Path

Black

Voice Path Green

NOTE: Wiring for the eight-line board is shown. Wiring for the four-line board uses only pairs 1 through 4.

Voice Path

Data Path

Black

Green

Red

Yellow

Black

Voice Path

Data Path

Red

Yellow

Green

Red

Yellow

Black



4.0 Understanding The Federal Communications

Requirements Concerning DID Lines

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires that you inform the central office (CO) that the DXP

Plus is configured as an MF (multipurpose) registered device if you connect it to ground start DID lines. Also,

FCC rules, part 68, require customer premise equipment (CPE) to return answer supervision signalling to the CO for DID calls. Allowing the DXP Plus to be operated in a manner that does not provide answer supervision is a violation of these rules. In compliance to this ruling, the DXP Plus system returns DID answer supervision no later than 500 milliseconds after the incoming call is serviced. The regulations require that the system return this answer supervision whenever the following DID call conditions exist:

• call answered by the called station,

• call answered by the attendant,

• call routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by a system user,

Exceptions to the requirement are when:

• a call is not answered,

• a busy tone is received,

• a reorder tone is received.

4.1

Understanding Installer/User Information

Regarding FCC Rules And Regulations

This DXP Plus digital communications system complies with Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules, Part 68. The FCC registration label on the KSU contains the FCC registration number, the ringer equivalence number, the model number, and the serial number or production date of the system.




Compatibility With Telephone Network



Connection of the electronic key system to the telephone lines must be through a universal service order code

(USOC) outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating company. If the installation site does not have the proper outlet, ask the telephone company business office to install one. The correct outlet jack for this is a type RJ21X.





Troubleshooting






The electronic key system contains incidental radio frequency generating circuitry and, if not installed and used properly, may cause interference to radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception; in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient the television or radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the KSU, the individual telephone stations, and the radio or TV with respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve


D.C. 20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.


Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pes de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques (de la class A) prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications du Canada.




Installing The Multipurpose Line Board


1.0 Understanding The Multipurpose Line Board

The Multipurpose line board for the DXP Plus digital communications system provides system interface for ground start lines, loop start lines, and E&M (tie) lines. These are typically the three different line types that the central office (CO) makes available for connection to the public switched network. The multipurpose line board is fully programmable for each type of line.

1.1

Detailing The Line Types

Loop Start Lines: With this line type, the DXP Plus bridges a resistance across the tip and ring leads to signal the

CO to establish a communications link for an outgoing call. The CO detects the resulting current flow and supplies dial tone to the DXP Plus. The CO signals an incoming call to the DXP Plus by placing an alternating voltage (ring signal) on the tip lead for the DXP Plus to sense. The DXP Plus then generates ringing to the DXP

Plus station being called. When a station answers the ringing, the circuit is completed as it was for outgoing calls.

Loop start lines can not provide any sure means of determining when a distant party hangs up his or her telephone.

For a system that experiences moderate incoming and outgoing call volume and does not cost calls, loop start lines provide an economical choice for connecting the DXP Plus to the central office (CO) equipment. When you use line 1 for the power-fail mode, you must program that line to be a loop-start line unless the industry-standard telephone that you use as a power-fail station is a ground-start device.

Ground Start Lines: With this line type, the DXP Plus momentarily grounds the ring lead to signal the CO to establish a communications link for an outgoing call. When the CO detects this, it acknowledges by momentarily grounding the tip lead. The DXP Plus responds by removing its ground connection and bridging itself across the tip and ring leads. The CO then removes its ground connection and returns dial tone to the DXP Plus.

For an incoming call, the CO grounds the tip lead and places an alternating voltage on the ring lead for the DXP

Plus to sense. The DXP Plus detects ring-lead ground and then causes its ring generator to generate ringing to the station being called. When a station answers the ringing, the circuit is completed as it is for outgoing calls.

Because ground start lines are controlled at both ends, they are capable of release supervision that provides a sure means of determining when a distant party hangs up his or her telephone. This is very important in applications where calls are costed. Also, since the signalling protocol indicates which end requested the line, it helps prevent call collisions and glare and thus is useful in applications where there is a high volume of incoming and outgoing calls occurring on the same lines. Ground start lines are standard protocol for remote networking and are useful for connecting the DXP Plus to private branch exchange (PBX) equipment. For ground start lines to be dependable, you must ensure that you have connected the DXP Plus to a low resistance telephone company ground.

NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires that you inform the central office that the DXP

Plus is configured as an MF (multipurpose) registered device if you connect it to ground start lines.

E&M Tie Lines: The tie line connections (also known as tie trunk access) are special circuits that allow, on a dial-up or continuous connection (hot line) basis, the DXP Plus to communicate with remotely located equipment such as: another DXP Plus, a PBX, or to other common carrier (OCC) equipment for long distance calls. Tie lines can be a part of a private or leased network and can be metallic, carrier current, T1, or microwave.





IMI89-192.01

7/95

R

IMI89–192 Installing The Multipurpose Line Board

1.2

Detailing E&M Signalling Methods

The multipurpose line board provides two wires for a tip and ring voice circuit and two wires (the E and M line) to provide control signalling between the systems. When a local DXP Plus puts a request for service from the remote equipment on the M lead, the remote equipment detects this request on its E lead. As an option it can also respond by putting an alerting signal on its M lead.

NOTE: Intercom feature codes of one DXP Plus are not available to callers from the other DXP Plus nor can those callers access a line through the distant DXP Plus using line group access codes.

The DXP Plus supports two different types of E and M lines. The E and M Direct type is for direct connection between two telephone systems and is also known as a metallic connection. The E and M Carrier type is for tie lines that run through a central office (CO) interface; however, some COs also provide a metallic connection interface.

If you plan to use tone dial configured E and M lines with the multipurpose line board, you may need to install one or more DTMF receiver cards to the DXP Plus. Typically, you will need one DTMF receiver for every six lines. In high traffic situations, you may need additional DTMF receivers. For information on DTMF receiver card installation, see IMI89–186, Installing A DTMF Receiver In The DXP Plus Digital Communications System.

NOTE: The DTMF receiver cards that you add for this purpose are in addition to any you may add to the system to support industry-standard telephone station boards

You can program the system to respond to three different standard-protocol types of E and M signalling. They are known as: immediate signalling, wink signalling, and delayed signalling and are defined in the following paragraphs.

Immediate Signalling: With this signalling method, the called DXP Plus answers as soon as the calling DXP

Plus initiates the call. There is no delay between calling and answering. This signalling method is usually used if the line is programmed for hot line operation or is programmed for pulse dialing.

Wink Signalling: With this signalling method, the called DXP Plus places a momentary signal reversal (wink) on its M lead to alert the calling DXP Plus system that it is ready to receive information. The calling DXP Plus controls the status of the M lead and watches for a return signal from the called DXP Plus on the E lead. A wink occurs when the called DXP Plus is ready to receive dialed digits from the calling DXP Plus. Dialing can begin only after the wink is complete. After the wink occurs, the called DXP Plus (if it is programmed for dialing) returns dial tone to the calling DXP Plus as an indication it is ready to receive digits. This signalling method is the preferred protocol for use between two DXP Plus systems.

Delayed Signalling: With delay dial signalling, the called DXP Plus immediately responds to the calling DXP

Plus by sending an off-hook signal on its M lead. It holds this off-hook condition until it is ready to receive digits and then returns its M lead to on-hook. After the signal exchange occurs, the called DXP Plus (if it is programmed for dialing) returns dial tone to the calling DXP Plus as an indication it is ready to receive digits.

This signalling method is an alternate to wink start signalling that also provides equipment readiness signals. This method is most useful if the DXP Plus is connected to another manufacturer’s PBX with incompatible wink timing parameters.

In addition to the standard-protocol signalling, you can program the system to respond to two types of non-standard tie line signalling protocols. They are known as: hot line and intercom dialing and are defined in the following paragraphs.

Hot Line: You can program the system for hot-line operation so that as soon as a user accesses the tie line, the station or stations at the distant system that have access to the personal or group intercom assigned to the hot line will ring.

Intercom Dialing: Alternately, you can program the system for intercom dialing mode so that as soon as users access the tie line they will hear dial tone. Upon hearing dial tone, they can dial either a personal or group intercom number at the distant system.

2 – Installing The Multipurpose Line Board

Installing The Multipurpose Line Board IMI89–192


CAUTION

Circuit boards are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge, and you must keep this fact in

mind as you handle the circuit boards. Refer to the Comdial publication IMI01-005, Handling Of

Electrostatically Sensitive Components, for general information. Specific handling precautions are also included in this installation instruction.

2.1





Backboard

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Conductive

Mat 1 Meg Ohm

Resister

PLUS034

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Static

Wrist

Strap

Static 2

Common Point Ground

Typical Earth

Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

Earth

Ground


Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet

Mounting Location

Installing The Multipurpose Line Board – 3


2.2

Installing Multipurpose Line Boards

1. Normally you should disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply; however, when necessary, you can install a multipurpose line board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 6, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the line board.


AC or earth ground



4. Each multipurpose line board is supplied in a static protection bag for safe keeping. When you are ready to install the board, remove it from its static protection bag.


•

On DXP Plus systems the multipurpose line boards connect to any universal slot.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a multipurpose line board at the right-most board slot in the second

(or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.


7. Orient the multipurpose line board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage. and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane. If you connected handset cord between pre-charge port on DXP Plus power supply and jack on multipurpose line board (as directed in step 6), disconnect it after installing board.

CAUTION



8. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all multipurpose line boards are installed.


10. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the circuit boards to the board cage. Do not neglect this step!

It is important because it helps in providing a protective ground condition for the board and ensures proper functioning of E and M and ground-start lines.



PLUS054

Power Supply

Pre-charge Port

IMI89–192

Pre-charge

Cable For

Board

Installation

During

Power Up

Pre-charge

Port

Multipurpose

Line Board





3.0 Connecting The Multipurpose Lines

The FCC specified jack configuration for the multipurpose board line connections to the switched network is the

(USOC) RJ2EX type and the facility interface code is TL11M. This specified connection is typically a type

66M-nn connector block.

CAUTION

When connecting the lines for multipurpose applications, be sure that you do not reverse the tip and ring leads.

A 50-pin connector on the multipurpose line board provides its line terminations. You can cable connect the multipurpose board to the CO line termination with a prepared cable that matches the termination requirements.

Snap the supplied ferrite collar around the cable to provide protection against radio frequency interference.

Before you connect the CO-supplied multipurpose lines to the board, program the system for proper operation.



3. Connect the CO-supplied lines to the multipurpose board. The system will test each circuit for loop current after you connect the lines to the board. If the multipurpose line board does not detect loop current for a line

(in either loop or ground start applications), it will ignore this line and show an idle condition on its status light. If this happens, you must check the line connections for proper wiring.

4. Note the multipurpose board’s status light, and compare status with the following details:

Rapid Flash = Malfunctioning on-board processor,

Off with repeated 5 second blink on = Normal operation with all idle lines,

On with repeated 5 second blink off = Normal operation with at least one busy line, (lf a line is active but the LED is showing off with repeated 5 second blink on, check the wiring for poor connections),

Three Rapid Flashes On Followed By 2.5 seconds Off = One or more lines out of service

NOTE: If the system operation includes the direct inward station access (DISA) feature on a particular line, callers that use DISA to access a trunk group and place calls (trunk to trunk calling) may experience low audio levels on their calls due to the normal line resistance of CO lines. Low audio level is usually only noticeable on long line loops. If signal loss is a problem at your site, try adding a line amplifier (repeater) in the DISA line. Comdial does not recommend DISA for use on loop start lines without disconnect supervision. While DISA will function, Comdial will not be liable for its performance under any condition where disconnect supervision is not provided.

3.1

Installing E&M Lines

When you install E&M tie lines to connect the DXP Plus to a remote telephone system, you must follow the particular wiring arrangement detailed in the following chart. From the chart, notice that line 3 of one system connects to line 4 of the other system and that the E lead of one line connects to the M lead of the other line.

Local DXP Plus

Line 3 Tip

Line 3 Ring

Line 3 E

Line 3 M

Line 4 Tip

Line 4 Ring

Line 4 E

Line 4 M

Remote DXP Plus

Line 4 Tip

Line 4 Ring

Line 4 M

Line 4 E

Line 3 Tip

Line 3 Ring

Line 3 M

Line 3 E



PLUS055

IMI89–192

Multipurpose

Line Board

Male 50-pin

Connector

Ferrite

Collar

Grounding

Terminal

No. 6 Solid

Copper Wire


Line 1

Line 2

Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7

Line 8

Loop Start and Ground Start


Loop Start, Gnd Start, and E&M Voice

Loop Start, Gnd Start, and E&M Voice





Line 3

Line 4

E&M Control For Line 3

E&M Control For Line 4

Line 2

Line 1


Power Fail Station

Connector Block

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

15

16

17

18

19

20

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

31

32

33

34

35

36

CLIP TERMINALS

Viewing Typical Multipurpose Line Connections



3.1









Each installed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity. For example, a 16–station board requires 16 timing circuits, an eight–line loop start line board requires eight circuits, and a fully configured T1 trunk board requires 24 timing circuits. In the DXP Plus, each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits. Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot, you can place any station or line board at any slot location with no restrictions.







3.2

Understanding The Multipurpose Line Connections


2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

45

20

46

21

43

18

44

19

47

22

48

23

49

24

14

40

15

41

16

42

17

12

38

13

39

10

36

11

37

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

29

4

30

5

31

6

27

2

28

3

Pin

No.

26

1

50

25

Wire Color

White-Blue

Blue-White

White-Orange

Orange-White

White-Green

Green-White

White-Brown

Brown-White

White-Slate

Slate-White

Red-Blue

Blue-Red

Red-Orange

Orange-Red

Red-Green

Green-Red

Red-Brown

Brown-Red

Red-Slate

Slate-Red

Black-Blue

Blue-Black

Black-Orange

Orange-Black

Black-Green

Green-Black

Black-Brown

Brown-Black

Black-Slate

Slate-Black

Yellow-Blue

Blue-Yellow

Yellow-Orange

Orange-Yellow

Yellow-Green

Green-Yellow

Yellow-Brown

Brown-Yellow

Yellow-Slate

Slate-Yellow

Violet-Blue

Blue-Violet

Violet-Orange

Orange-Violet

Violet-Green

Green-Violet

Violet-Brown

Brown-Violet

Violet-Slate

Slate-Violet

Pair

1

14

15

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

19

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

43

44

45

46

47

48

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

Wire-Pair

Connections

Clip

Term.

Wire

Name

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

Tip

Ring

M

E

M

E

Tip

Ring

49

50

Tip

Ring

Line

Number

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6

2

1

3

4

Line Type

Loop Start and Ground Start


Loop Start, Ground Start, and E&M Voice

Loop Start, Ground Start, and E&M Voice





E&M Control for Line 3

E&M Control for Line 4

Auxiliary Equipment

Interface (Busy Lead Detect)

Power Fail Station



4.0 Understanding Installer/User Information

Regarding FCC Rules And Regulations

This DXP Plus digital communications system complies with Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules, Part 68. The FCC registration label on the KSU contains the FCC registration number, the ringer equivalence number, the model number, and the serial number or production date of the system.








(USOC) outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating company. If the installation site does not have the proper outlet, ask the telephone company business office to install one. The correct outlet jack for this is a type RJ21X.





Troubleshooting






The electronic key system contains incidental radio frequency generating circuitry and, if not installed and used properly, may cause interference to radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception; in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient the television or radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the KSU, the individual telephone stations, and the radio or TV with respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve


D.C. 20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.


Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pes de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques (de la class A) prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications du Canada.




R

Installing The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option


1.0 Introducing The DXPT1 Option

The digital carrier transmission option (DXPT1) gives the DXP Plus digital communications system the capability to handle up to 24 channels of voice and/or data transmissions over a single four-wire cable using multiplexing techniques in superframe (SF) or extended superframe (ESF) format. The DXPT1 board includes a customer service unit (CSU) to eliminate the need for a CSU external to the DXP Plus.

Since the DXP Plus supports a maximum of 240 lines, and each DXPT1 board handles up to 24 channels, you can install up to 10 DXPT1 boards in the DXP Plus system. You can install these 10 boards in any available universal board slot in the main or expansion cabinets. Of course, any other line boards that you install, such as loop start,

DID or multipurpose, reduce the number of lines available for T1 service and thus reduces the number of DXPT1 boards that you can install.

Whenever you install one or more DXPT1 boards, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source, you must install one synchronization card (DXOPT–SYN) on the services board. When you connect the system to central office (CO) lines, you must include a synchronization card, and the DXP Plus must be controlled by CO signalling. In installations where the DXP Plus supplies the clock signal for the distant system, there is no requirement for DXOPT–SYN cards.

If you plan to use tone dial configured DID or E&M lines with the T1 digital carrier transmission option, you will need to install one or more DTMF receiver cards to the DXP Plus. Typically, you will need one DTMF receiver for every six lines. This ratio indicates that you need to add one DTMF receiver card for each DXPT1 board that is configured for 24 DID or E&M lines. In high traffic situations, you may need additional DTMF receiver cards.

For information on DTMF receiver card installation, see IMI89–186, Installing A DTMF Receiver In The DXP

Plus Digital Communications System.

NOTE: The DTMF receiver cards that you add for this purpose are in addition to any you may add to the system to support industry-standard telephone station boards

If you are unfamiliar with the terms and component names associated with the T1 digital carrier transmission option, refer to glossary of terms presented in Section 8 located at the end of this publication.

CAUTION

For operation with the DXP Plus, the T1 board must be Revision B or higher. If the T1 board that you are installing is a lower revision, contact Comdial Technical Services (1–800–366–8224) for advice before you proceed with the installation..





IMI89-193.01

7/95

IMI89–193 Installing The DXPT1 Line Board

1.1

Understanding The DXPT1 Board

Through time division multiplexing, the DXPT1 board greatly increases the efficiency and economy of the DXP

Plus system by providing up to 24 channels on two twisted metallic pairs. This multiplexing technique allows two-way voice or data communications at 1.544 Mbps (million bits per second) with either a central office (CO), public branch exchange (PBX), or another digital communications system (DXP Plus). The DXPT1 board includes a built-in customer service unit (CSU) but there is no restriction on adding an external CSU.

When you connect two DXP Plus systems together using E&M protocol through the T1 lines, designate one DXP

Plus as the master and the other one as the slave. In this application, only the slave DXP Plus system requires a

DXOPT–SYN card.

When the T1 option is installed, the DXP Plus supports the following signaling protocols per channel.

•

Loop Start (subscriber end only)

•

Ground Start (subscriber end only)

•

E&M two- or four-wire tie lines

•

DID (direct inward dial)

Loop Start and Ground Start will support synchronized ring, hook flash, and pause. Dialing can be DTMF (tone) or dial pulse. For E&M and DID tone operation, check the number of DTMF receiver cards needed in the system

E&M and DID will support wink start, delay dial, and immediate dial (dial pulse only). Dialing can be tone or dial pulse.

1.2

Understanding The DXOPT-SYN Synchronization Card

The DXOPT–SYN card uses a reference timing frequency of 8 KHz that it derives from the 1.544 MHz frequency supplied to the DXPT1 board by the central office (CO) or other external source. By referencing this 8 KHz with

8 KHz timing derived internally, the master 16.384 MHz voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) can be synchronized. The T1 transmit clock (1.544 MHz) is derived from the 16.384 MHz frequency on the DXPT1 board. If the 1.544 MHz received frequency is incorrect (not within a 200 Hz tolerance), the system may loose synchronization with the CO or other external source. The DXOPT–SYN card reports this condition by turning on the appropriate alarms on the DXPT1 board and DXOPT–SYN card. A loss of clock synchronization causes frame slips that result in data communications errors.

The DXOPT–SYN card allows two timing references ( primary and secondary) to be selected. You can select either automatic or manual (for maintenance mode). In the automatic mode, a loss of primary timing causes the system to switch to the secondary timing reference. If both the primary and secondary timing references are lost, the VCO oscillator on the DXOPT–SYN card is defaulted to the fixed 16.384 MHz oscillator on the services board. This results in the loss of T1 clock synchronization.

2 – Installing The DXPT1 Line Board

Installing The DXPT1 Line Board IMI89–193


CAUTION

Circuit boards are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge, and you must keep this fact in

mind as you handle the circuit boards. Refer to the Comdial publication IMI01-005, Handling Of


2.1





Backboard

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Conductive

Mat 1 Meg Ohm

Resister

PLUS034

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Static

Wrist

Strap

Static 2

Common Point Ground

Typical Earth

Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

Earth

Ground


Providing Static Protection At The Cabinet

Mounting Location

Installing The DXPT1 Line Board – 3


3.0 Configuring The DXPT1 Board

Before you install the DXPT1 board, determine if you must meet special system requirements such as fractional service (8 or 16 channel operation). If you do have special system requirements, use the dual in-line pin (DIP) switches provided on the board to re-configure the DXPT1 board.

The DXPT1 board contains 28 DIP switches (three 8-position modules and one 4-position module). Rectangular cutouts in the front-edge panel provide access to these switches.

The eight DIP switches nearest the bottom of the panel are accompanied by eight green LED indicators.

NOTE: These eight switches and their associated indicators are for factory diagnostic purposes only.

The remaining 20 DIP switches labeled SW1, SW2. and LIU are for configuring the DXPT1 board to meet specific operating requirements. See Figure 2. The default setting for all of these switches is 0 (on the left as you face the front edge of the board). This is the standard superframe (SF) configuration for most customer applications. However, special customer needs may require that you reset one or more of these switches using the procedure given below.

1. Obtain a static discharge wrist strap (supplied with the main DXP cabinet) and attach it to one of your wrists.

Make sure to adjust the strap for a snug fit against your skin; do not apply the strap over any of your clothing.

2. Connect one end of the wrist strap-cord to the wrist strap and the other end to earth ground.

NOTE: With the DXP cabinet in the installed position, the ground lug on the right side of the cabinet is normally a good grounding point since this lug should have a heavy ground wire connected between it and a good earth ground.

3. Remove the DXPT1 board from its static protection bag and set it on a static-safe work area.

4. Using a ball-point pen or similar object, move the DIP switches from left (0 position) to right (1 position) as needed. All DIP switches are facing left for typical applications. See Tables 1, 2, and 3 for descriptions of the

DIP switches.



Reset Pushbutton

(Behind Hole)

(Default)

1

2

3

4

0

LIU

1

(See Table 3)

Diagnostic

Switches and LEDs

For Factory

Use Only

(Default)

1

4

5

2

3

6

7

8

0

SW1

1

(See Table 1)

(Default)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

SW2

1

(See Table 2)

T1002A

Locating The DIP Switches



3.1

Understanding The T1 Options (SW1–1 Through SW1–8)

The following T1 operating modes are described to help you understand the many options that you can select with

DIP switches SW1–1 through SW1–8 on the DXPT1 board.

3.1.1 T1 General Operation

T1 is the digital two-way transmission of telecommunications over a single high-speed circuit. Up to 24 separate voice or data transmissions form digital pulses that are transferred at the rate of 1.544 million bits per second

(Mb/s) over the T1 trunk. At the receiving end, the digital pulses are decoded into 24 separate circuits.

Pulse characteristics such as repetition rate, pulse width, pulse amplitude, and average ones density ((ratio of one

(1) bits to zero (0) bits)) are as specified by digital signal level 1 (DS-1) described in American National

Standards Institute Specification, ANSI T1.403-1989.

3.1.2 Framing Modes

Digital data is handled most efficiently when it is organized into frames. A frame of digital information consists of 193 bits (24 channels x one eight-bit word + one framing or control bit). The framing bit is used for frame identification when multiple frames are used.

The frame repetition rate is eight thousand frames per second (8 Kf/s).

This option uses either of two framing formats—superframe (SF) and extended superframe (ESF).

The superframe format contains 12 frames. In the 6th and 12th frames, the voice information in the eighth (least significant) bit positions is overwritten with signaling information. This signaling method is called robbed-bit signaling. The robbed bits in the 6th and 12th frames are designated signaling bit A and B respectively.

The extended superframe format extends the framing boundaries to include 24 frames . The ESF format provides improved maintenance capability over the SF format. In this format, 24 framing bits (or 8 Kb/s) are available to provide the following:

• framing synchronization (2 Kb/s)

• facility data link (FDL) (4 Kb/s)

•

CRC-6 error check (2 Kb/s)

The robbed bits from the 6th, 12th, 18th, and 24th frames are used for signaling. Therefore, two additional signaling paths are available—signaling bits C and D (future).

3.1.3 Signaling Type

Channel associated signaling (CAS) is a signaling method employing robbed bits. The signals using the robbed bits are related to the same channel as the one carrying the information. CAS is currently the only signaling-type option available for this equipment.

3.1.4 Yellow Alarm

A yellow alarm is a signal transmitted by a digital communications system when that system has lost synchronization to the incoming signal. Communications can be restored if a a yellow alarm lasts less than four seconds. After four seconds, a red alarm (out-of-service) is issued and all calls are set to on-hook. When the system is using the superframe format, the transmitted yellow alarm signal contains binary zeros (0s) in the second bit positions of all 24 channels. This is the default setting for DIP switch SW1–4.

The 12th frame method (used in Japan) forces the framing bit for the 12th channel to a binary one (1). This is detected by the receiving system as a yellow alarm.

In the extended superframe format, the system that has lost synchronization to the incoming signal will transmit a

16-bit pattern consisting of eight one (1) bits followed by eight zero (0) bits over the facility data link (FDL) to represent a yellow alarm.



3.1.5 Zero Suppression

There are two ways to avoid system timing problems when eight or more successive zero (0) bits are transmitted.

One method is B7 suppression and the other is bipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS). For pulse modulated voice

(PCM), eight consecutive zero (0) bits should never occur.

B7 suppression is a technique that forces a one (1) bit in the 7th bit position when all of the bits in a binary word are zero (0). The resulting distortion in a voice circuit is negligible. However, this technique could induce errors if it was used in digital data transmissions.

Digital information transmitted over T1 trunks is bipolar; that is, the binary ones (1s) pulses (marks) alternate between a positive and a negative voltage level. The bipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS) method substitutes four bits in bit positions four, five, seven, and eight when eight zero (0) bits occur in a binary word. The substituted bits are inserted in a unique pattern that causes a bipolar error. The B8ZS binary words containing the deliberate bipolar errors are detected at the receiving terminal where the errant bipolar pulses are removed and substituted with all zero (0) bits. Because the received binary words are returned to their original bit patterns (all binary zero bits), a clear channel is provided for error-free digital data transmission. Both ends of the communications link must be configured to use B8ZS. (B8ZS is a feature designed for future requirements.)

3.1.6 Fractional T1

Fractional T1 is when you use only a portion of a T1 trunk, as needed. On the DXP Plus you must set DIP switches SW1–7 and SW1–8 for 24 channel operation. This setting allows the system to pass error information end-to-end when operating fractional T1 with the ESF format.

Setting The SW1 DIP Switches

Switch

Number

1 (top)

2

3

4

5,6

7,8

Switch

Position

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0, 0 (default)

0,1

1,0

1,1

Function

FRAME MODE superframe mode (SF) extended superframe mode (ESF)

SIGNALING TYPE channel associated signaling (CAS) reserved

RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE reserved reserved

YELLOW ALARM TYPE bit 2 of all channels method

12 frame method (Japanese)

ZERO SUPPRESSION

B7 suppression

B8ZS suppression (digital data) no suppression no suppression

CHANNEL CAPACITY

24 channel capacity 0,0 default)

NOTE: SW1–1 through SW1–8 switches are read only when you apply power to the board or do a manual reset.

With power on, manually reset the board by inserting a slender object, such as a straightened-out paper clip, into the small hole located between the Yellow and Syn LEDs on the front-edge panel. You can also reset the board remotely from a video display terminal or personal computer. A reset causes a T1 service disruption.



3.2

Understanding The T1 Options

(SW2–1 Through SW2–8 And LIU–1 Through LIU–4)

The following T1 operating modes are described to help you understand the many options that you can select with

DIP switches SW2–1 through SW2–8 and LIU–1 through LIU–4 on the DXPT1 board. DIP switches designated

LIU are associated with the DXPT1 board’s line interface unit.

3.2.1 Loopback

Loopback is the maintenance routine used to verify the receive function (local or remote) and to isolate system problems. When using the superframe format, the customer interface (CI) loopback option from the network, if provided, can be activated from the network via in-band signaling (per ANSI T1.403, 1989, SECTION 8.3.1.1).

Framed code words activate and deactivate loopback routines when the option is enabled with DIP switch

SW2–1. The default setting is off, but many central offices will support SF loopback. See your central office representative to ensure that you are complying with their requirements.

You access remote and payload loopback operation via the facility data link when using the extended superframe format.

You can manually make three different types of loopback requests depending on the option you select using DIP switches SW2–7 and SW2–8. These are: local, remote, and payload loopback. When using payload loopback

(ESF format only), all channel bits maintain bit-sequence integrity but the framing bit is re-established.

3.2.2 Customer Service Unit (CSU) Identification Bit

You can set the message-oriented (C/R) bit transmitted over the ESF data link by DIP switch SW2-2 to be a zero

(0) bit or a one (1) bit. The C/R bit is used to identify the T1 signal origin as being either from customer premise equipment (CPE) or carrier equipment such as a CSU.

Set C/R to be a zero (0) bit for customer premise equipment (CPE) or when using an external CSU (default).

Set C/R to be a one (1) bit if the network requires the T1 internal CSU to be classified as carrier equipment.

3.2.3 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC-6)

This is a method for checking the accuracy of data transmissions when using the ESF format. This method uses a polynomial algorithm based on the content of a superframe of data. When CRC-6 checking is enabled via DIP switch SW2–4, an alarm will be activated whenever a CRC code (checksum) is received over the ESF data link that does not match the locally calculated code (checksum).

3.2.4 Yellow Alarm During ANSI Messages On The Facility Data Link

When using the ESF format, the facility data link is available for reporting transmission performance information once a second. Normally, these transmissions are inhibited by yellow alarms. However, you can set DIP switch

SW2-5 to allow these transmissions during yellow alarms.

3.2.5 Green B8ZS/COFA LED Definition

The green LED on the DXPT1 board’s edge-panel labeled “B8ZS/COFA” indicates either that B8ZS code words are being received or that a change of frame alignment (COFA) occurred during the last synchronization by the external T1 source or carrier equipment. You can determine which condition you want reported by how you set

DIP switch SW2–6. The default setting is for “COFA” reporting.

3.2.6 Receive Sensitivity

The equalizer gain logic (EGL) determines how sensitive the receive circuits are to the incoming signals. You set the level for -26 dB or -36 dB by using DIP switch LIU-1. (Normally, the -26 dB level setting is the better choice.)



3.2.7 Transmit Level Attenuation

You can manually set the transmit level for a particular value (0, -7.5, -15, or -22.5 dB) or select the automatic feature that sets the transmit level automatically depending on the receive signal. A weak receive signal causes a strong transmit signal and vice versa. Use DIP switch LIU–2 to select either the manual or the automatic setting.

If you select the manual setting, set the desired value with DIP switches LIU–3 and LIU–4. Normally, 0 dB is used when connecting to a network interface box.

Setting The SW2 DIP Switches

Switch

Number

Switch

Position

Function

2

3

4

5

6

7,8

1 (top) 0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0,0 (default)

0,1

1,0

1,1 superframe NETWORK IN-BAND loopback disabled enabled

CSU ID (C/R) BIT (ESF MODE)

C/R bit = 0 designates customer premise equipment (CPE)

C/R bit = 1 designates carrier equipment

RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE reserved reserved

CRC (CYCLIC REDUNDANCY CHECK) FOR ESF MODE disabled enabled

FDL YELLOW ALARM DURING ANSI MESSAGES disabled enabled

B8ZS/COFA LED DEFINITION

COFA (change of frame alignment)

B8ZS detect

MANUAL loopback REQUEST no loopback local loopback request remote loopback request payload loopback request (ESF only)

NOTE: When changing DIP switch SW2–2 or SW2–5, you must reset the board before the switch is read. With power on, manually reset the board by inserting a slender object, such as a straightened-out paper clip, into the small hole located between the Yellow and Syn LEDs on the front-edge panel. You can also reset the board remotely from a video display terminal or personal computer. A reset causes a T1 service disruption.

Setting The LIU DIP Switches

Switch

Number

1 (top)

2

3,4

Switch

Position

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0,0 (default)

0,1

1,0

1,1

Function

RECEIVE SIGNAL SENSITIVITY

-26 dB

-36 dB

TRANSMIT LEVEL MODE

Automatic (level set by receive signal)

Manual (level set by switches 3 and 4 below)

TRANSMIT LEVEL ATTENUATION

(LIU-2 must be “1")

0 dB

-7.5 dB

-15 dB

-22.5 dB



4.0 Installing The DXPT1 Board

1. Normally you should disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply; however, when necessary, you can install a DID line board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 6, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the line board.


AC or earth ground



4. Each DXPT1 line board is supplied in a static protection bag for safe keeping. When you are ready to install the board, remove it from its static protection bag.


•

On DXP Plus systems the DXPT1 line boards connect to any universal slot.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a DXPT1 line board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.

6. If you are installing the DXPT1 line board in an operating system, connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the line board.

7. Orient the DXPT1 line board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage, and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane. If you connected a handset cord between the pre-charge port on DXP Plus power supply and the jack on DXPT1 line board (as directed in step 6), disconnect it after installing board.

CAUTION



8. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all DXPT1 line boards are installed.


10. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the circuit boards to the board cage. Do not neglect this step!

It is important because it helps in providing a protective ground condition for the board thus ensuring RFI

(radio frequency interference) and lightning protection.


Installing The DXPT1 Line Board

Pre-charge jack

PLUS011A

IMI89–193

Universal board slots

1 - 11

Pre-charge cable for installation during power up

Pre-charge jack

Pre-charge jack


1 - 9

Connect board to any universal board slot

Pre-charge jack


1 - 10

DO NOT install boards in last slot on right in lower expansion cabinet.

Installing The DXPT1 Board

Static discharge wrist strap



4.1

Connecting The T1 Trunk

Terminate the end of the T1 trunk with a miniature 8-pin modular plug, and plug it into the main jack on the front edge of the DXPT1 board.

The DXPT1 board contains a built-in CSU that protects the DXP Plus from voltage surges, provides transmission drive up to 6,000 feet, and performs diagnostic tests for the network. Therefore, a customer-supplied CSU is not necessary unless your customer requires this addition.

If a direct connection to a repeater is within a few hundred feet, the transmit signal from the DXPT1 board may overdrive the repeater. Repeaters normally operate best with -7.5 to -23 dB input signals. Arrange LIU switches 2,

3, and 4 to set the transmit signal level (0 dB is default).

IMPORTANT CAUTION

To help ensure that external over-voltage surges do not damage the system, Comdial engineers suggest that you install a properly-grounded gas discharge tube or a similar primary protection device on the T1 trunk where it enters the building. If the site includes a network interface box, verify that there is standard lightning protection installed externally to the box on its network side. Primary protection where the cable enters the building is necessary to prevent a fire hazard inside the building.



Front View of Main Connector

On DXPT1 Board

6

7

4

5

8

2

3

1 R1

T1

R

T

C1

Receive

C1

Transmit

NOTE: No connections are allowed to pins 7 or 8. (Issue 2 boards

ONLY.)

T1003A

Connecting The TI Trunk To The DXPT1 Circuit Board



4.2

Detailing The T1 Cable Requirements

Normally, the DXPT1 board connection to a central office is via a network interface box (smart jack). The box is usually small with an 8-pin modular telephone jack for connecting to the customer premise T1 equipment

(DXPT1). For short lengths of approximately 200 feet or less, use a standard telephone cable with an 8-pin modular plug for connection to the DXPT1. Make straight-through connections for pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 when using these plugs on both ends of the cable. (Do not connect Pins 7 and 8.)

When spanning distances greater than 200 feet, use a low-capacitance cable (data-grade cable) having two twisted, solid-conductor wire pairs with shielding. The type of cable with metal shielding covering each twisted pair provides the best immunity from electrical interference. Only connect the shielding to earth ground at one end of the cable—do not ground the shielding at the other end of the cable.

When connecting the local DXP Plus directly to another DXP Plus system, be sure to connect the transmit pair

(pins 4 and 5) of the local system to the receive pair (pins 1 and 2) of the distant system. Likewise, connect the receive pair (pins 1 and 2) of the local system to the transmit pair (pins 4 and 5) of the distant system.



4.3
















5.0 Installing The Syncronization Card

On The Services Board

Whenever you install one or more DXPT1 boards, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source, you must install one synchronization card (DXOPT–SYN) on the services board using the following procedure.

NOTE: Whenever you install one or more DXPT1 boards, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source, you must install one synchronization card (DXOPT–SYN) on the services board. When you connect the system to central office (CO) lines, you must include a synchronization card, and the DXP

Plus must be controlled by CO signalling. In installations where the DXP Plus supplies the clock signal for the distant system, there is no requirement for DXOPT–SYN cards and you do not need to perform this procedure.

1. Switch off the DXP Plus power supply, disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply


AC or earth ground



CAUTION

Do not remove or install the services board while the DXP Plus is powered-on or severe system problems may occur.

4. Locate the services board, loosen the retaining screws, remove it from the main cabinet, place it in a static protection bag, and transport it to the static-safe work area.

5. At the static-safe work area, with your wrist strap in place, remove the services board and the DXOPT–SYN card (if used) from their static protection bags.

6. Refer to the illustration, and install the DXOPT–SYN card at the top position on the services board with the supplied hardware. (Actually, you can use any of the three positions; however, other non-related option cards require installation in the lower positions so it is best to leave these positions open for those other uses.).

7. Use the method detailed in Section 5.1 to set the strapping switches on the services board. If you wish, refer to step 8 for details, and transport the board assembly to the cabinet installation site before you set the strapping switches.

8. Place the services board with the newly installed DXOPT–SYN card into a static protection bag and transport the assembly back to the main cabinet.



Installing The Synchronization Card On The Services Board



5.1

Configuring The Services and Interface Boards

The DXP Plus extracts clocking information from the central office (CO) that supplies the T1 lines, and routes this information to the DXOPT–SYN sync card. The sync card uses this clocking information to derive the synchronizing signal for the DXPT1 board’s transmit clock signal. Therefore, the DXPT1 board’s transmit clock is slaved to the CO supplying the T1 lines. If there is only one CO supplier, that source is the primary clock source; however, if there are two different suppliers of T1 lines, use the more reliable T1 supplier as the primary source and the other T1 supplier as the secondary source.

You must designate one DXPT1 board as the primary board. Choose this board from among those boards that interface the T1 lines supplied by the primary CO supplier. Designate the primary board by placing straps on the

DXSRV–PLS services board and by setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface boards.

If you system has only one CO supplier, you do not need to designate a secondary board; however, if the system has a second CO supplier of T1 lines, you must designate one DXPT1 board as the secondary board. Choose this board from among those boards that interface the T1 lines supplied by the second CO supplier. Designate the secondary board by placing straps on the services board or by setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface boards.

If you designate primary and secondary boards to the system even though there is only one CO clock source, the

DXOPT–SYN card functions as though it is receiving two clock signals and lights both PRI and SEC LEDs on the front edge of the card.



5.1.1 Summerizing the Strapping

DXPT1 Cabinet Location

Services Board Strap

PRIMARY or SECONDARY*

Expansion Cabinet Interface Board

Switch Setting SWA or SWB**

Main –UNV1

Main–UNV2

Main–UNV3

Main–UNV4

Main–UNV5

Main–UNV6

Main–UNV7

Main–UNV8

Main–UNV9

Upper Expansion–UNV1











Lower Expansion–UNV1

Lower Expansion UNV2







A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

L or M

L or M

L or M

L or M

L or M

L or M

L or M

L or M

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

9

10

11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8



L or M

L or M

9

10

* Strap PRIMARY block for primary DXPT1 and/or strap SECONDARY block for secondary DXPT1.

** Switches A and B do not designate primary or secondary—they designate the first and second DXPT1 boards installed in an expansion cabinet.

IMI89–193



5.1.2 Setting The Strapping

Configure the services and interface boards by performing the steps in the following process.


AC or earth ground


2. Remove the services board assembly from the static protection bag.

3. Identify the main cabinet board slots where you will install the DXPT1 boards, and the primary and secondary

(if available) CO line supplier. With this knowledge, designate one DXPT1 board as primary and another

DXPT1 board as secondary by placing straps on the services board.

(a) If you install one DXPT1 board in the main cabinet, you must strap one pin-pair (A–I) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block. This strap designates the main cabinet slot where you installed the

DXPT1 board.

Example: If you install a DXPT1 board in universal slot two in the main cabinet, you must strap pin-pair

B on the PRIMARY strap block .

(b) If you install two or more DXPT1 boards in the main cabinet, you must designate one board as the primary board and another as the secondary board. After you have made these designations, you must strap one pin-pair (A–I) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block and one pin-pair (A–I) on its

SECONDARY strap block to designate the main cabinet slots where you have installed the primary and secondary boards.This action designates the primary clock source for the DXOPT–SYN card.

Example: If you install two DXPT1 boards in universal slots two and three in the main cabinet and you designate these boards primary and secondary respectively, you must strap pin-pair B on the PRIMARY strap block and strap pin-pair C on the SECONDARY strap block.



4. Identify the expansion cabinet slots where you will install the DXPT1 boards and the primary and secondary

(if available) CO line supplier. With this knowledge, designate one DXPT1 board as primary and another

DXPT1 board as secondary by placing straps on the services board and setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface board.

(a) If you install one DXPT1 board in an expansion cabinet, you must strap one pin-pair (J–M) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block. This strap designates the expansion cabinet where you have installed the board. You must also close a DIP switch in switch bank A on the expansion cabinet’s interface board to designate the expansion cabinet slot where you installed the DXPT1 board.

Example: If you install the DXPT1 board in universal slot 2 of the upper expansion cabinet, strap pin-pair

J on the PRIMARY strap block, and close SWA–2 on the upper expansion cabinet’s interface board.

(b) If you install two or more DXPT1 boards in an expansion cabinet, you must designate one board as the primary board and another as the secondary board. After you have made these designations, you must strap one pin-pair (J–M) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block and one pin-pair (J–M) on its

SECONDARY strap block to designate the expansion cabinet where you have installed the primary and secondary boards. You must also close a DIP switch on switch bank A and another on switch bank B on the expansion cabinet’s interface board to designate the expansion cabinet slots where you installed the primary and secondary DXPT1 boards. Do this same procedure if you use both expansion cabinets.

Example: If you install two DXPT1 boards in universal slots two and three in the upper expansion cabinet and you designate these boards primary and secondary respectively, you must strap pin-pair J on the

PRIMARY strap block and strap pin-pair K on the SECONDARY strap block. You also must close

SWA–2 and SWB–3 on the upper expansion cabinet’s interface board.

5. If the system requires DXPT1 boards in both main and expansion cabinets, identify the cabinet slots where you will install the DXPT1 boards and the primary and secondary (if available) CO line supplier. With this knowledge, designate any one DXPT1 board as primary and any other DXPT1 board as secondary by placing straps on the services board and setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface board.

You must either strap one pin-pair (A–M) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block or strap one pin-pair

(A–M) on its SECONDARY strap block. The DXPT1 board designation of primary or secondary and the cabinet you use for its installation determines which services board pin-pair you use. You must also close a

DIP switch (SWA or SWB, 1–11) on the appropriate expansion cabinet’s interface board to designate the expansion cabinet slot where you installed the opposite DXPT1 board.

Example: If you designate the DXPT1 board that you install in universal slot 2 of the main cabinet as the primary board, strap pin-pair B on the services board PRIMARY strap block. If you designate the DXPT1 board that you install in universal slot 2 in the upper expansion slot as the secondary board, strap pin-pair J on the services board SECONDARY strap block, and close SWA–2 on the upper expansion cabinet’s interface board.


IMI89–193

Services Board


PLUS009

Strapping

Pairs

Upper

Cabinet

Lower

Cabinet

F

G

I

H

J

A

B

C

D

E

K

L

M

J6

J7

Primary Clock

Strapping Block

Secondary Clock

Strapping Block

Locating The Services Board Strapping Blocks



SWA

SWB

Closed

Switch A

Expansion

Cabinet

Slot Locations

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Open

Closed

Switch B

Expansion

Cabinet

Slot Locations

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Open

Note: SWA-12 and SWB-12 are not used on Interface 2 (upper cabinet). SWA-11/12 and SWB-11/12 are not used on Interface 3 (lower cabinet).

PLUS010

SWA and SWB switches not in use must be in "off"

(open) position!

Expansion Cabinet

Interface Board

Locating The Interface Board DIP Switches



5.2

Installing The Services Board Assembly

1. With your static discharge wrist strap still properly installed, install the services board in the main cabinet.

2. If the installation includes a DXOPT–SYN card, make sure the lower (larger) slide switch on the front edge of the card is in the up AUTO position. Leave the upper (smaller) switch in either position as it has no effect when the automatic mode is selected.

3. Orient the services board assembly with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage, and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane.

CAUTION


4. Make a final inspection to ensure that the board assembly is oriented correctly and mated properly.

5. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the board assembly to the board cage.

6. If applicable, plug the power cable from the optional external battery assembly into the DXP power supply.

7. Connect the AC power cord to the AC wall outlet and turn the power switch on. If no alarms are on (red

LEDs), and at least one of the green PRI or SEC LEDs is lit, replace the cabinet’s front panel; otherwise, troubleshoot the installation for errors.



PRI

LED

SEC

LED

AUTO

MANUAL

SWITCH

(Set to AUTO

Position)

STATUS

ON = OK

OPBD2

MAIN

CABINET

BATTERY

OUT

OPBD3

OPBD1

PRI

SEC

UNLOCKED

PRI

SEC

DXOPT

SYN

AUTO

MAN

MANUAL

PAGE

BGM

MOH

RELAY 1

RELAY 2

RELAY 3

RELAY 4

COMDIAL

PLUS006

Services Board

Static Discharge

Wrist Strap




6.0 Understanding The T1 Alarms And Indicators

Most of the T1 alarms and indicators (LEDs) are located on the front-edge panel of the DXPT1 board, while several are located on the front edge of the DXOPT-SYN card. The following sections discuss the alarms and indicators.

NOTE: Red /Yellow LEDs, when lit, indicate errors or non-standard configuration for normal operation.

Red Alarm (red LED) When this LED indicator is lit, the system cannot establish communications with the network.

Yellow Alarm (yellow LED) The yellow alarm is lit whenever the far end has lost synchronization to its incoming signal. In the superframe format, a transmitted yellow alarm has a zero

(0) bit in the second bit position of every eighth-bit. In the extended superframe format, a transmitted yellow alarm consists of repeating 16-bit patterns containing eight binary one (1) bits followed by eight binary zero (0) bits on the facility data link.

Sync Alarm (red LED) This LED (labeled SYNC LOSS), when lit, indicates that the frame bit in the received data cannot be found.

Signal Alarm (red LED)

Blue Alarm (red LED)

Bipolar Alarm (red LED)

The signal alarm (labeled SIG LOSS) turns on to indicate that the DXP has lost its incoming signal.

When this alarm indicator is lit, the alarm indication signal (AIS) consisting of all one (1) bits is being received to indicate that the far end has lost its received signal. The purpose of this signal is to maintain the system clocks during a link failure.

The system converts the digital bitstream in T1 communications to a bipolar format through a process called alternate mark inversion (AMI). The voltage polarity of the ones pulses (marks) alternates between Plus and minus with a zero

(space) represented by no pulse. A bipolar violation occurs whenever two successive pulses are of the same polarity. This alarm LED indicates a bipolar violation (BPV) has occurred. It is important to note that BPV errors are not passed through regeneration points.



Cyclic Redundancy

Check (red LED)

Slip (red LED)

Unlock (red LED)

When using the ESF format, the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) indicator lights whenever there is a discrepancy in the check sum received for an incoming frame from the originating system and the locally calculated check sum. This discrepancy indicates a data error in the received frame. The CRC is enabled by

DIP switch SW2-4.

This indicator is turned on whenever a frame slip is detected. This is caused by the transmit clock not being synchronized with the receive clock.

The transmit frequency (1.544 Mhz) is not locked with the receive clock when this indicator is lit.

B8ZS)/COFA (green LED) This is a dual-purpose indicator. Depending on how you set DIP switch SW2-6, this indicator reports either a change of frame alignment (COFA) at re-synchronization time (default setting) or bipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS) code words detected in the received data.

RLB, LLB, and

PAYL (red LEDs)

Whenever a loopback routine is active, either the remote loopback (RLB), local loopback (LLB), or payback loopback (PAYL) mode (selected by DIP switches

SW2-7 and SW2-8) is indicated by the appropriate LED being lit.

PRI and SEC (green LEDs) The PRI and SEC LEDs on the DXOPT-SYN card light to indicate where the receive clock reference is originating from—the primary or secondary DXPT1 board location. When two or more DXPT1 boards are installed, you make the primary and secondary assignments via jumpers on the the DXAUX board. If only one DXPT1 board is installed, you can set the jumpers so that both LEDs will light.

UNLOCKED (red LED) When lit, the Unlocked LED indicates either the DXOPT-SYN card is defective or the receive frequency is out of tolerance (1.544 Mhz

±

200 Hz).

MANUAL (red LED) This LED, when lit, indicates that the manual mode has been selected via the

AUTO/MANUAL mode switch on the DXOPT-SYN card. When you select the manual mode (normally for maintenance/troubleshooting ), you can select either the primary or secondary timing reference by setting the PRI/SEC switch on the

DXOPT-SYN card. For normal operation, select the automatic mode. Do not manually force the clock reference to primary or secondary if the appropriate green LED is not lit. This will cause the VCO oscillator to default to its minimum or maximum tolerance, and the T1 board(s) may not frequency-lock.



6.1

Viewing The DXPT1 Board Alarms And Indicators

l

¤ l l l l l l l

¡

LED*

l

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡ l l l

LABEL ERROR OR STATUS CONDITION WHEN LED IS LIT

(Status)

Red

Yellow

Sync

SIG

Blue

Loss of sync with the incoming signal

Loss of incoming signal

Alarm indication signal (AIS) being received (indicates loss of signal at far end)

Bipolar

CRC

Bipolar violation detected

Cyclic redundancy check error in incoming frame if SW2-4

SLIP

Unlock is enabled (ESF only)

Frame slip detected

Transmit frequency (1.544 MHz) not locked with receive clock

B8ZS/COFA B8ZS/COFA (B8ZS zero suppress mode/change of frame alignment) per SW2-6

RLB

LLB

PAYL

Rapid flash = defective board

Steady on = board in wrong slot or board constraints violated

Off with repeated five second blink on = normal operation

(T1 trunk idle)

On with repeated five second blink off = normal operation

(T1 trunk busy)

Communications with network cannot be established

(out-of-service)

Disruption in remote T1 service

Remote loopback active

Local loopback active

Payload loopback active

Diagnostics codes (for factory test only)








6.2

Viewing DXOPT-SYN Synchronization Card Alarms And Indicators

LED*

¡

¡ l l

LABEL ERROR OR STATUS CONDITION WHEN LED IS LIT

PRI

SEC

Timing reference is present from the DXPT1 primary board

Timing reference is present from the DXPT1 secondary board

UNLOCKED Trouble (defective DXOPT-SYN card or receive frequency out of tolerance (1.544 MHz

±

200 Hz))

MANUAL The manual mode is active for selecting the DXPT1 reference

NOTE: Red /Yellow LEDs, when lit, indicate errors or non-standard configuration for normal operation. Green

LEDs indicate a normal condition.

*LED color legend l = Red ¤ = Yellow ¡ = Green



Primary

Secondary

Unlocked

Status

Manual

DXOPT-SYN

Card

Services Board

Status

Red

Yellow

Sync

Signal

Blue

Bipolar

CRC

Slip

Unlock

B8ZS/COFA

Remote Loopback

Local Loopback

Payload Loopback

IMI89–193

DXPT1 Board

PLUS007

Diagnostic Switches and LEDs for Factory

Use Only

Viewing DXPT1 And DXOPT–SYN Alarms And Indicators



7.0 Understanding Installer/User

Information Regarding FCC Rules and Regulations

This electronic key system complies with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules, Part 68. The FCC registration label on the DXP Plus contains the FCC registration number, the ringer equivalence number, the model number, and the serial number or production date of the system.

7.1




7.2



7.3



(USOC) outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating company. If the installation site does not have the proper outlet, ask the telephone company business office to install one. The correct outlet jack for this system is either a type RJ21X or type RJ14C.

7.4



7.5

Troubleshooting



7.6





7.7


The electronic key system contains incidental radio frequency generating circuitry and, if not installed and used properly, may cause interference to radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception; in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient the television or radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the DXP, the individual telephone stations, and the radio or TV with respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve


D.C. 20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.





CAUTION




7.0

Knowing The Specifications

DXP Capacity

Modes

Framing

Channels Allocated

Industry Standards

Maximum Output

10 T1 boards

Superframe, extended superframe

D4

8, 16, or 24

ANSI T1.403-1989

AT&T PUB 62411

2.4V to 3.6V base to peak, short circuit protection to 120 mA, rms

1.544 Mbps Line Rate

Line Code

Type

Zero Suppression

Receive Sensitivity

Impedance

DXP Loss Insertion

Transmit

Receive

T1 Connector

T1 Cable

Bipolar AMI

B7 or B8ZS selectable

-26 dB or -36 dB selectable

100 Ohms

-6 dB (selectable to 0 and -3 dB per channel)

0 dB

RJ48C, miniature 8-position, shielded

(per ANSI T1-403, 1989)

Up to 6,000 feet between DXPs, 22 AWG, twisted-pair, no external components

Built-in; CPE or CARRIER selectable (ESF) CSU Function

Transmit Attenuation

Manual

Automatic

Input Jitter Tolerance

Surge Protection

Elastic Store

Compliance

0, -7.5, -15, or -22.5 dB selectable

Default

138 UI @ 1 Hz; 0.4 UI @ 10 KHz—100 KHz

(0 dB line); corner frequency = 6 Hz (attenuates

20 dB per decade above corner)

1 AMP fuse and transient protection for metallic

>6 volts P-P; Longitudinal (tip—ring and chassis ground) protection 1500 volts minimum.

Two frames, no frame loss when slipping

FCC Part 68/Doc

FCC Part 15

UL-1489/CSA (safety):

Yellow Alarm Type

Superframe Mode

Extended Superframe Mode

Bit 2 zero in all channels or Japanese 12th frame method, selectable

Alternating bytes = all zeros and all ones;

(prohibiting ANSI FDL messaging during yellow alarms is selectable)

Signaling

Signaling Protocols

Dialing

Protocol Type (DID, E&M)

DID Type Restriction

Loop Start (subscriber end)

Ground Start (subscriber end)

E & M

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

DTMF or Dial Pulse

Wink, Delay-Dial, and Immediate Start

(dial pulse only for immediate start)

Limited to four of five types when mixing tone/dial pulse/wink/delay dial/immediate start)

Clocking

Synchronization

Min. RX Freq. Capture

TX Master Mode Freq.

Slave mode from DXOPT-SYN card on

Auxiliary board

1.544 MHz

±

200 Hz, T1 board;

16.384 MHz

±

2048 Hz, Sync card

1.544 MHz

±

75 Hz

Loopback Modes

Superframe Mode

Extended Superframe Mode

LED Alarms/Errors

Local or remote loopback, manual

Network loopback inband command; set 00001 5sec, reset 001 5 sec.

Local, remote, payload loopback (manual)

FDL ANSI network remote loopback

FDL ANSI network payload loopback

Status

Red Alarm

Yellow Alarm

Blue Alarm

Loss of receive synchronization

Loss of signal

Bipolar error(s)

CRC errors (ESF)

Slip errors

Phase Lock error

Facilities Interface Code (FIC) 04DU9–1SN



8.0 Defining The T1 Terms

Bipolar

A bipolar signal is composed of alternating pulses that both represent a digital logic 1. The positive pulse is a (+) and the negative pulse is a (-). Zero volts represents a space, or digital logic 0.

Bipolar Violation (or error)

A bipolar error is a digital logic 1 (or mark) that has the same polarity as its predecessor.

NOTE: Every time the system regenerates the signal stream, it corrects any bipolar errors; therefore, it prevents end-to-end error checking from using bipolar errors.

B8ZS (Binary Eight Zero Substitution)

This is a technique to send an all-zero channel without violating the ones-density requirement (a single one in each channel and no more than 15 zeros in a row). Voice transmission will not allow an all zero channel. The system accomplishes B8ZS suppression by inserting a special bipolar error that is interpreted, not as an error, but an all zero channel. The B8ZS feature replaces the all-zero channel two different ways. The feature replaces the all-zero channel with the sequence 000 + - 0 - + if the preceding pulse was a +, and the feature replaces the all-zero channel with the sequence 000 - + 0 + - if the preceding pulse was -. The + represents a positive pulse, the - represents a negative pulse, and 0 represents no pulse. Set the B8ZS feature with switches SW1–5 and

SW1–6.

CAS (Channel Associated Signalling)

The Channel Associated Signalling is the only inbound signalling method currently supported by the DXPT1 board.

COFA (Change of Frame Alignment)

When switch SW2-6 is off, the green LED on the DXPT1 indicates whether the network source or the network span caused the last frame synchronization. (This indication disregards the first re-sync at cold start or a system reset —cold start and reset causes the network source to re-sync.) A COFA occurs if the network source does a re-sync. The COFA is a diagnostic tool that identifies the source of the loss of frame synchronization.

CPE/Carrier Equipment

The DXPT1 is normally classified as Customer Premise Equipment (CPE). If you use SW2–2 to configure the

DXPT1 board to use the internal CSU while in the ESF mode, the network may require that the system be classified as Carrier Equipment (CE). The information packet that the DXPT1 board sends to the network contains a facility data link (FDL) maintenance message that has a bit in it that provides this identification.

CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)

A method of checking errors from the transmission source to the destination. For T1 operation, CRC caculates a checksum depending on the data in a frame. The system uses CRC in ESF mode exclusively. (You must enable

CRC with DIP switch SW2-4).

Delay Dial E&M, DID Protocol Type

Once seized by a calling system, the system being called makes A=1 and B=1 until it is ready to receive digits.

When it is ready to receive digits, it makes A=0 and B=0. The system uses a delay dial protocol when wink protocol timing is not compatible to the network.

Dial Pulse – T1

Dial pulse is a method of sending address digits (numbers) using A and B bits logic bits instead of sending DTMF tones. Some carriers may not support dial-pulse signalling. While the method is slower when compared with tones, it requires no DTMF receivers.



Direct Inward Dial (DID) T1 Trunk

DID is a protocol for inbound calls where the network sends the extension number during the beginning of the call. The system supports the 0 through 7 inbound digits. The network does not translate the digits to a valid extension—the system’s DID translation tables perform this action.

DS-0 (Digital Signal-Level Zero)

Digital Signal-Level Zero is a single 64Kbit channel inside a T1 span.

E & M T1 Trunk

E&M is a signalling protocol that supports both inbound and outbound digits. Inbound digits from the network are already translated to a 3–digit or 4–digit valid extension. E & M is symmetrical from both ends and ignores the subscriber/office classification of other trunks. Use this signalling protocol for interconnecting two DXP Plus systems.

Extended Superframe Mode (ESF)

Extended Superframe Mode consists of 24 frames. The frame bit uses only 6 frames leaving 18 bits for other purposes. These spare 18 bits provide 6 bits for CRC information and 12 bits for a facility data link. The facility data link is for maintenance information (as defined by the ANSI T1.403 specification). Like the superframe mode, the 64–Kbit user channels have 24 frames available for use.

Ground Start T1 Trunks

Ground start is a call signalling protocol that monitors only outbound digits and supports disconnect supervision.

Ground start protocol supports only the subscriber end of the communications link

FDL (Facility Data Link)

The Facility Data Link is a 4–Kbit communication link from the network to the DXPT1 board only when the board is operating in the ESF mode. The system sends preemptive messages (for example, yellow alarm and loopback), if needed, and sends error packets to the network once a second. The packets contain alarm history in accordance with the ANSI T1.403 specification.

Fractional T1

Fractional T1 is a T1 span where the user uses less than 24 channels. The DXPT1 board allocates eight or 16 channels to a fractional T1 but does not reallocate unused channels in the eight, 16, or 24 mode to other resources.

A fractional T1 in ESF mode will nullify the CRC and other error checking capability since the network shares channels.

Immediate Start Protocol State

Once a calling system seizes a called system, the calling system sends address digits to the called system without requiring an acknowledgement. Inbound immediate start protocol does not support tone dial. Dial-pulse is adequate however. Immediate start protocol is applicable to DID and E&M tie lines.

Inband Signalling

A signalling method where the system sends overhead signalling along with channel traffic.

ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Primary Rate (also called PRI)

Currently not offered by the DXPT1 board.

Loopback Local

An operation method that loops the DXPT1 board’s transmit output and receive input paths. The loopback terminates all traffic and halts call processing. While in this idle condition, the system continues to transmit the T1 transmit stream to the network but it will not answer incoming calls. If the remote T1 equipment is the clock source (primary or secondary) for the DXOPT-SYN card, the remote equipment terminates the reference signal because the network receive circuit is open in local loopback. You initiate local loopback by setting the appropriate SW1 switches. The main purpose of local loopback is to verify the DXPT1 board’s ability to synchronize properly. Loopback local operation is applicable to superframe adn extended superframe modes.



Loopback Payload

The loopback payload feature is an ESF-only method of loopback which loops the network receive input path to the remote T1 equipment’s transmit output path. This loopback method does not loop the first bit of each frame to allow the DXPT1 board’s facility data link to continue to transmit maintenance information. You can use switches

SW2–7 and SW2–8 to manually initiate the payload loopback or you can allow the network to send an FDL message to initiate or restore the payload loopback. The DXPT1 board goes out-of-service during the loopback time.

Loopback Remote

The loopback remote feature loops the network receive input path to the remote T1 equipment’s transmit output path. The remote loopback feature terminates all traffic and halt any call processing. You can use the SW2 switches to manually initiate remote loopback or you can allow the network to remotely initiate the condition. In superframe mode with SW2–1 set to on, the network can send a special in-band pattern

(00010001000100010001.... min 5 seconds) to cause the DXPT1 board to automatically enter the remote loopback mode. The network can disable the loopback by sending a different in-band pattern

(001001001001001001001.... min 5 seconds). In ESF mode, the DXPT1 board’s facility data link, or maintenance channel, can enable and disable remote loopback automatically or you can set SW2–7 on and SW2–8 off to manually enable remote loopback or set both switches off to manually disable the feature. Loopback remote operation is applicable to superframd and extended superframe modes.

LIU Line Interface Unit

The line interface unit is the interface between the T1 copper wires and the DXPT1 board’s framing circuitry.

The LIU is responsible for separating the 1.544MHZ receive clock from the incoming stream and converting bipolar Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) to 5–volt digital logic. The LIU also supports the automatic line build-out that regulates the transmit level according to the receive strength (LIU-2 switch).

Loop Start T1 Trunk

Loop Start T1 Trunk is a network protocol that monitors outbound digits to the DXPT1 board. This protocol does not support disconnect supervision. Loop start protocol supports the subscriber end of the communications path but does not support the office (network) end.

Primary Clock Reference

The straps on the DXAUX board designate the primary clock reference. Primary clock reference is the first choice reference clock used to synchronize the DXP Plus to the incoming span. If the system looses synchronization, it uses its secondary clock reference. If the secondary clock reference is not available, the DXOPT-SYN card’s variable clock oscillator (VCO) switches to the fixed oscillator on the DXSRV (services) board. When it does this, slips occur.

Repeater

A repeater is a amplifying device that central office technicians place at approximately one mile intervals along a

T1 circuit to boost the T1 signal. The T1 specifications allow a maximum of 50 repeaters along a communications path.

Slip

This term describes the condition that exists when the transmit 1.544 MHz clock is different from the receive

1.544 MHz clock. When the system collects or looses a frame of information due to the span frequencies being different, the system generates a slip error. Slip does not affect voice transmissions and may not affect modem traffic; however slip does effect digital data traffic. The DXPT1 board does not currently support digital data traffic. Also, at times a central office takes a T1 span out of service if too many slips occur—one or two a day is permissible (the carrier supplier will furnish you with an an exact number if you request that information from them).



Smart-Jack (Network Interface Box)

A smart jack is a demarcation box provided by the central office. A smart jack provides isolation and increased signal drive (up to one mile) and can respond to loopback commands for diagnostic purposes. The central office usually provides an 8–pin modular jack for T1 equipment connection. Pin 1 of the modular jack goes to pin 1 of the DXPT1 modular jack, and so on. Only pins 1 and 2 (DXPT1 receive), 4 and 5 (DXPT1 transmit) require connecting.

Superframe Mode (SF)

The standard T1 mode consists of 12 frames per superframe cycle. The first frame bit remains constant and rotates through a 12-bit pattern. By identifying the frame pattern, the system can select the sixth and twelfth frame for the AB bit signalling inband method. T1 parameters allow for 24 64–Kbit user channels.

Suppression

Suppression is a means to prevent more than 15 zeros in a row and not less than 1 pulse (mark) per channel. The

DXPT1 board supports two suppression methods. These are the B7 method and the B8ZS method (selected by

SW1–5 and SW1–6). The B7 method inserts a logic 1 in the seventh bit position of a channel if all bits are zeros.

The B8ZS method inserts a bipolar violation that will be identified and stripped at the receiving end (selected by switches SW1–5, and SW1–6). Voice coding should not allow an all zero channel.

Unlock Alarm

On a normally operating DXPT1 board, the unlock alarm LED is always off. If this LED is on, it indicates that the phase lock loop creating the transmit 1.544 MHz frequency is defective. For this indicator to be meaningful, the DXOPT-SYN card must be synchronized (no red LEDs on). If the DXOPT-SYN card is not synchronized, you must correct that situation.

Wink E&M, DID Protocol State

This effect is a quick response by a called system (A=1, B=1) to a calling system that seized the line. The response indicates that the called system is ready to receive address digits.

Yellow Alarm

The yellow alarm indicates that the network has lost its incoming frame synchronization. The DXPT1 board signalling is inactive for approximately three to four seconds during this alarm time, and the system halts all call processing. If the system clears the received yellow alarm within the time limit, the DXPT1 board’s inactive state terminates and call processing continues.

The system sends a yellow alarm to the network if it loses incoming frame synchronization or if the DXPT1 loses communications to the CPU board. Received and transmitted yellow alarms can not exist at the same time. If such a situation occurs, the system inhibits the transmitted alarm.

ZBTSI (Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange)

Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange is a complex technique to insure that the T1 transmission meets the pulse density requirement. This ZBTSI technique is unpopular in the telephone industy, and the DXPT1 board does not support the feature.




R



Installing The Serial Data Modem


1.1

Understanding The Modem

The serial data modem allows remote servicing and programming of the DXP Plus digital communications system. The DXMDM is a general-purpose, Hayes*-compatible, serial data modem that receives its operating power and configuration programming from the DXP Plus. The modem’s operating parameters appear in the following chart.

* Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products

BPS Out

2400

BPS In

2400

Data Bits

8

Stop Bits

1

Parity

None

Flow Control

None

R

Power

Cord

PWR

Status

SER

IAL

Line

Serial Port

Cord

Detailing The Serial Data Modem

PLUS013





IMI89-185.01

7/95

IMI89–185 Installing The Serial Data Modem

1.2

Installing The DXMDM Modem

The following procedure explains how to install the serial data modem. Figure 1 illustrates the relative position of the modem and the location of its connections. The modem fits on the left side of the equipment shelf.

1. Locate DIP switch SW7 on the services board, and set it to its OFF position.

2. Insert the modem as illustrated in Figure 1.

3. Attach the modem to the equipment shelf with a single screw through the mounting-screw hole on the modem’s front plate.

4. Connect the PWR cable from the modem to the jack labeled Modem Power on the CPU board. The modem’s

STAT light should come on.

NOTE: The serial data modem comes from the factory with the PWR and serial port cables already installed.

They are purposefully difficult to remove; however, you can disconnect the cables for replacement if necessary. To do so, reach into the opening and press the tab down to release the connector while you pull the cable out from the jack.

5. Connect the serial port cable from the modem to the jack labeled Modem Com (serial data port) on the CPU board. This is the default port for the modem. When you use this connection, you will not need to take any programming action. Alternately, you can connect the modem to one of the serial data ports provided by the communications card installed on the auxiliary board (if one is installed on your system). If you use a a serial data port other than the default port, you must assign it for modem operation using the database programming procedure.

6. Connect a telephone line into the modem’s line jack.

7. Set DIP switch SW7 to its ON position to ensure continuous modem operation. This step is necessary because the serial data modem depends upon the DXP Plus for both its power and configuration. With switch SW7 set

ON, the system automatically matches the baud rate and serial data parameters of the modem regardless of which port you choose for modem connection.

CAUTION

If you disconnect the modem PWR cord from the DXP Plus, you must reset the modem after you reconnect the PWR cord. Set switch SW7 to OFF, wait five seconds, and then return it to ON to reset the modem.

(You can also reset the modem from the programming station. To do so, enter the system-manager

programming mode and then dial 18#).

2 – Installing The Serial Data Modem

Installing The Serial Data Modem

Power

Cord

PWR

Status

SER

IAL

Line

Serial Port

Cord

Telephne Line Cord

IMI89–185

PLUS014

Figure 1. Installing The Modem In The Main Cabinet

Telephone Line Jack

Serial Port Cord

Equipment Shelf

Power Cord

Modem

Power Jack

Default

Modem

Communications

Jack

DIP

Switches

CPU Board

PLUS015

Figure 2. Viewing Modem Position And Connection Locations

Installing The Serial Data Modem – 3

Installing A Dual Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF)

Receiver Card In The DXP Plus Digital Communications

System

1.0 Introducing The DTMF Receiver Card

The DXP Plus digital communications system supports the use of on-premise industry-standard telephones.

To support the DTMF dialing of industry standard telephones, the DXP Plus services board provides on-board

DTMF receiver circuitry. This circuitry supports dialing of one industry-standard telephone at a time. This provision is adequate, if your site requires only a few industry-standard telephones; however. if you intend to support a population of industry-standard telephones that will generate a large volume of outgoing call traffic, you must install one or more DTMF receiver cards to provide additional DTMF receivers for the telephones. Each

DXOPT–TON card allows four industry-standard telephones to dial simultaneously. The number of cards that you need to install in the system depends upon how active the industry-standard telephones will be at the site. See

Section 1.1 for details.

If you do need to add receiver cards, you have three choices as to where to install them.

1. The best and recommended choice is to add one receiver card to top position on the main cabinet’s services board.

NOTE: You can add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board; however, you must take specific programming action to enable their use (the name of this program option is: Services

DTMF Highway). If you add these two cards and take this program option, you can only add one card to the lower expansion cabinet’s interface board (discussed in step 2 below).

2. The second best choice is to add up to three receiver cards to each expansion cabinet’s interface board if one or both is available. Remember, add only one card to the lower expansion cabinet’s interface board if you have added or will add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board and take programming action to enable their use

3. The third choice is to add an auxiliary board to the system and install up to four DTMF receiver cards on it.

This is the least desirable choice because it requires you to occupy a board slot that you could otherwise use for line or station boards.

R





IMI89-186.01

7/95

IMI89–186 Installing The DTMF Receiver Card

1.2

Determining The Board Configuration That You Will Need

Use the following specifications to determine the maximum number of station boards and DTMF receiver cards that you may need.

•

Each eight-station board supports up to eight telephones. (It will actually support 16 telephones—two telephones at each port sharing a common intercom number.)

•

Up to two industry-standard telephones can be bridged at one station port as long as you do not exceed a combined ringer equivalence number, or REN, of 2.0. (Remember, with two telephones at the same port, they share a common intercom number.)

•

Each 16-station board supports up to 16 telephones. (It will actually support 32 telephones—two telephones at each port sharing a common intercom number)

•

Up to two industry-standard telephones can be bridged at one station port as long as you do not exceed a combined ringer equivalence number, or REN, of 2.0. (Remember, with two telephones at the same port, they share a common intercom number.)

•

Each receiver card allows four industry-standard telephones to dial simultaneously. (The number of cards that you need to install in the system will depend upon how active the industry-standard telephones will be at the site.)

•

You can install one receiver card in the top position on the services board. The services board always provides on-board DTMF receiver circuitry capable of supporting simultaneous dialing of one industry-standard telephone. With the addition of a receiver card, the services board supports simultaneous dialing of five industry-standard telephones. You can add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board; however, you must take specific programming action to enable their use

(this program feature name is: Services DTMF Highway). With these additional two cards, the services board supports simultaneous dialing of 13 industry-standard telephones.

•

You can install three receiver cards on the upper and lower expansion cabinet interface boards. With three receiver cards installed, each interface board supports simultaneous dialing of 12 industry-standard telephones.

CAUTION

If you add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board, you can add only one receiver card to the lower expansion cabinet’s interface board..

•

You can install four receiver cards on an auxiliary board. With four receiver cards installed, an auxiliary board supports simultaneous dialing of 16 industry-standard telephones (Remember, while you can install up to five auxiliary boards in the system, each auxiliary board that you use occupies a slot where you could install a station or line board.)

Based upon the above specifications, a fully-equipped DXP Plus system with a minimum of one line board and

no auxiliary boards will provide the following industry-standard telephone support:

• main cabinet (reserving one slot for a line board) supports 128 telephones (eight 16-station boards times 16 station ports per board—256 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number),

• upper expansion cabinet supports 176 telephones (eleven 16-station boards times 16 station ports per board—352 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number),

• lower expansion cabinet supports 160 telephones (ten 16-station boards times 16 station ports per board—320 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number).

These individual totals add together to provide a system support total of 464 telephones (The total is 928 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same intercom number.)

2 – Installing The DTMF Receiver Card

Installing The DTMF Receiver Card IMI89–186

You can configure the system so that a maximum of 29 of these telephones can dial simultaneously.

• services board circuitry that supports one telephone plus one receiver card that supports four telephones provides support for six simultaneously dialing telephones

• upper expansion cabinet interface board with three receiver cards supports 12 simultaneously dialing telephones

• lower expansion cabinet interface board with three receiver cards supports 12 simultaneously dialing telephones

If you add the maximum of five auxiliary boards and install four receiver cards on each board, you can increase

the simultaneous dialing capacity to 109 telephones but you reduce the maximum telephone capacity to 384.

(The total is 788 telephones with two telephones per station port sharing the same extension number.)

1.2.1 Calculating Your Receiver Card Needs

You can use the following formula to determine how many receiver cards that you must install in your system.

(Simultaneous Dialing Telephones) - (1 Telephone Supported By Services Board)

( 4 Telephones Per Card)

= Receiver Cards

As an example, the system maximum is as follows: (110 - 1)

÷

4 = 27 cards

If you are not sure how many telephones will dial at the same time in your system, you can use the following typical system averages and formula to arrive at a usable estimate.

A typical telephone system, experiences the following call traffic percentages. Your system may be similar.

•

Light Call Traffic = up to 15 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously

•

Moderate Call Traffic = up to 20 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously

•

Heavy Call Traffic = up to 30 percent of the telephones dial simultaneously

(Percent Of Simultaneous Dialing) x (Installed Telephones) = (Simultaneous Dialing Telephones)

For example, the formula for the system’s maximum values is as follows: .286 x 384 = 110 telephones

1.3



•


•


•


•


Installing The DTMF Receiver Card – 3



CAUTION



Electrostatically Sensitive Components, for general information. Specific handling precautions are also included in this installation instruction.

2.1






Installing The DTMF Receiver Card IMI89–186

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat




3.0 Installing The Receiver Card

You can install one receiver card in the top position on the services board. You can add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board; however, you must take specific programming action to enable their use (this program feature name is: Services DTMF Highway). You can install three receiver cards on the upper and lower expansion cabinet interface boards.

CAUTION

If you add two additional receiver cards to the lower two positions on the services board, you can add only one receiver cards to the lower expansion cabinet interface board.

1. Be sure you are standing on the conductive mat that you have placed in front of the cabinet area and grounded to a good earth ground. (The third wire ground of the AC power line is an acceptable grounding point if the

AC wall jack is properly grounded.) The grounded conductive mat provides a safe static electric discharge path.

2. Install your static discharge wrist strap on your bare wrist; adjust it for a snug fit. Be sure that the strap is not isolated by clothing. Connect the wrist strap cord between the wrist strap and an AC or earth ground.


3. Turn off the power to the system and disconnect the optional battery back up equipment.

4. Loosen the retaining hardware, and lift the front panel away from the common equipment cabinet.

5. Loosen the retaining hardware and remove the services board from the cabinet, place it in a static protection bag, and transport the board to the static-safe work area. Do the same for the interface board if you plan to add a receiver card to it. Further, if the common equipment cabinet contains an auxiliary board and you plan to add the receiver card to it, follow the same procedure.

6. At the static safe work area, with your wrist strap in place, remove the circuit boards and receiver cards from their static protection bags.

7. Referring to the illustrations on the next page, orient the host circuit board and the receiver card, and attach them with the supplied hardware.

8. Place the host circuit board and the newly installed receiver card into a static protection bag and transport them back to the common equipment cabinet.

9. With your static strap on your wrist, remove the board assembly from the static protection bag and install the board in its designated board slot.

CAUTION




10. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the circuit board assembly to the board cage.




Installing The DTMF Receiver Card

Upper Expansion Cabinet

Interface Board

Receiver Card

(3 Places)

Services Board

IMI89–186

Receiver Card

(1 Place)

Lower Expansion Cabinet

Interface Board

Receiver Card

(1 Place)

DXOPT-TON

(2 Places If

Programmed

-See Text)

Auxiliary Board

Receiver Card

(4 Places)

Receiver Card

(2 Places -

See Text Details)

PLUS060

Connecting The Receiver Card To Its Host Circuit Board


Installing The Ring Generator Assembly


1.0 Introducing The Ring Generator Assembly Installation

The DXP Plus digital communications system supports the use of on-premise industry-standard telephones. To do this, it requires a ring generator assembly to supply ringing voltage to the industry-standard telephones to signal incoming calls.

Regardless of the number of installed industry-standard telephones, you will need to install one ring generator for the main cabinet and one ring generator for each expansion cabinet if the site includes expansion cabinets.

1.1



•


•


•


•


R





IMI89-187.01

7/95

IMI89–187 Installing The Ring Generator Assembly

2.0 Creating A Static Safe Work Area




2 – Installing The Ring Generator Assembly

Installing The Ring Generator Assembly IMI89–187

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat


Installing The Ring Generator Assembly – 3

IMI89–187 Installing The Ring Generator Assembly

3.0 Installing The Ring Generator Assembly

You can install the ring generator assembly in the main and expansion cabinets per the following steps.

1. Turn off the power to the system, unplug the AC line cord from the AC outlet, and disconnect the optional battery back up equipment.


AC or earth ground


3 Loosen the retaining hardware and lift the front panel away from the common equipment cabinet.

4. Loosen the retaining screws and remove the power supply assembly from the common equipment cabinet.

5. Connect the ring generator assembly to the side panel of the power supply chassis, and secure it with the supplied hardware.

6. Slide the attached assemblies into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly’s front panel contacts the side of the cabinet.

7. Locate the power cable routed from the backplane, and connect it to the power supply.

8. Locate the ring generator cable routed from the backplane, and connect it to the ring generator.

9. Fasten the assembly to the common equipment cabinet with the hardware you removed in step 2.



4 – Installing The Ring Generator Assembly

Installing The Ring Generator Assembly

Ring Generator Assembly

IMI89–187

Power Supply Assembly

PLUS064

PLUS030

Attaching The Ring Generator To The Power Supply

Ring Generator

Assembly

Power Supply

Assembly

Ring

Generator

Cable

Power

Cable

Installing The Ring Generator And Power Supply

Installing The Ring Generator Assembly – 5

Installing The Conference Board


1.0 Introducing The Conferencing Board

The software timing for the DXP Plus systems, dedicates 32 time slots for conferencing operations. Different types of conferencing actions require different quantities of time slots as detailed in the following list:

•

SOHVA = 3 time slots,

•

Executive Override = 6 time slots,

•

Four-Way Conference = 8 time slots,

•

Six-Way Conference = 12 time slots,

•

Service Observing = 3 time slots,

•

Three-Way Conference = 6 time slots,

•

Five-Way Conference = 10 time slots,

•

Seven-Way Conference = 14 time slots.

The maximum conference combinations that the system allows at any one time are as follows:

• three five-way or one five-way

Plus 2 SOHVA,

• five three-way or four three-way

Plus one SOHVA,

• two six-way,

• one four-way Plus two three-way,

•

• four four-way, two seven-way

The optional conference board adds the capability for five additional three-way conferences. These are three-way conferences consisting of three stations or two stations and one line. These additional three-way conferences do not provide additional SOHVA or service observe capability.

When you install the conference board, the system uses its capacity of three-way conferences before using the main system resources for additional conferencing.

1.2



•


•


•


•


R





22906.


IMI89-188.01

7/95

IMI89–188 Installing The Conference Board


CAUTION




2.1





2 – Installing The Conference Board

Installing The Conference Board IMI89–188

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat


Installing The Conference Board – 3

IMI89–188 Installing The Conference Board

2.2

Installing Conference Boards In The Equipment Cabinet

Install one or more conference boards (as needed) in any unused universal board slots.

1. Normally you should disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply; however, when necessary, you can install a DXCNF board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the precharge port on the power supply. During step 6, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the precharge jack on the station board.


AC or earth ground


3. Loosen the retaining hardware, and lift the front panel away from the common equipment.

4. Each conference board is supplied in a static protection bag for safe keeping. When you are ready to install the circuit board, remove it from its static protection bag.

5. Locate an unused board slot for conference board installation.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a conference board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.

6. If you are installing the conference board in an operating system, connect the free end of the precharge cord that you installed in step 1 to the precharge jack on the station board.

7. Orient the conference board with its top and bottom guides in the cabinet’s board cage. and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane.

CAUTION



8. Repeat steps 4–7 until all circuit boards are installed.

9. Make a final inspection to ensure that the conference board is oriented correctly and mated properly.

10. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the conference board to the board cage.



4 – Installing The Conference Board

Installing The Conference Board

PLUS023

Power Supply

Pre-charge Port

IMI89–188

Pre-charge

Cable For

Conference

Board

Installation

During

Power Up

Conference

Board

Pre-charge

Port

Conference

Board


Viewing A Typical Conference Board Installation

Installing The Conference Board – 5

Installing The DXOPT–COM Communications Card


1.0 Understanding The Communications Card

The communications card provides serial data ports for interfacing such items as open architecture interface applications, PC attendant positions, and the SMDA data printer.

NOTE: The serial data ports located on the CPU board are dedicated to PC-based programming and the remote maintenance modem.

You can install communications cards on the services board, the expansion cabinet interface boards, and the main cabinet’s auxiliary board. Each of these boards will accept two communications cards in its lower two slots.

The DXP Plus supports a maximum of 18 serial data ports. Two of these ports are the dedicated ports provided by the CPU board while communications cards provide the remaining 16 undedicated ports. The system designates serial data ports 3–18 to specific locations as detailed in the following chart.

Serial Data Port Designation*

Serial data ports 3–10


Lower two slots on the services board


Lower two slots on one of the three following locations:

— the upper expansion cabinet interface board

— the lower expansion cabinet interface board

— the auxiliary board installed in the main cabinet.

You must take programming action to match the data port number with the installation location that you choose for the communications card.

* The full compliment of 16 undedicated serial data ports requires four installed communications cards.

R

1.1

Communications Card Connections

The interface connector between the external device and the communications card is a standard modular jack, and each serial data communications port supports various baud rates, data bits, stop bits, parity, and flow control.

You can program these various options using data base programming.





IMI89-190.01

7/95

IMI89–190


Installing The Communications Card

CAUTION




2.1





2 – Installing The Communications Card

Installing The Communications Card IMI89–190

PLUS035

Expansion

Cabinet

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Expansion

Cabinet

Conductive

Mat

1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Static

Wrist

Strap

Common Point Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Typical Earth

Ground

Static 2

ESD Protective

Mat


Installing The Communications Card – 3

IMI89–190 Installing The Communications Card

3.0 Installing The DXOPT-COM Card

You can install up to four communications cards to attain a maximum of 16 serial data ports. You can install these cards in the lower two slots of the services board, the expansion cabinet interface boards, and the main cabinet’s auxiliary board.

•

The best, and recommended, choice is to add communications cards to the services board.

•

The second best choice is to add communications cards to either or both expansion cabinet’s interface boards if one or both are available.

•

The third choice is to add an auxiliary board to the system and install communications cards on it. This is the least desirable choice because it requires you to occupy a board slot that you could otherwise use for line or station boards.




AC or earth ground


3. Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the cabinet power supplies.

4. Loosen the retaining hardware and remove the host circuit board, or boards, from the equipment cabinet, place it in a static protection bag, and transport the board to the static-safe work area.

5. At the static safe work area, with your wrist strap in place, remove the host circuit boards and the communications cards from their respective static protection bags.

6. Referring to the illustrations on the next page, orient the host circuit board and the communications card, and attach them with the supplied hardware.

7. Place the host circuit board and its newly installed communications card into a static protection bag and transport this assembly back to the common equipment cabinet.

8. With your static strap on your wrist, remove the board assembly from the static protection bag and install the board in its designated board slot.

CAUTION




10. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the circuit board assembly to the board cage.

11. Plug the AC line cord into the AC outlet, reconnect any battery back up equipment and switch on the power supply.




PLUS017

Supplied Mounting

Hardware (8 Places)

PLUS016

Supplied

Hardware (8 Places)

IMI89–190

Services Board

Communications

Card

Interface Board

For Upper

Expansion

Cabinet

Communications

Card

PLUS019

Supplied

Hardware (8 Places)

Interface Board

For Lower

Expansion

Cabinet Communications

Card




4.0 Identifying The Communications Card’s Serial

Data Port Connections

Each communications card provides four serial data ports. Each serial data port is a standard 6-conductor modular jack that serves as the interface connection between an external data device and the DXP Plus system.

The system designates serial data ports 3–18 to specific locations and, you must take programming action to match the data port number with the installation location that you choose for the communications card.

Serial Data Port Designation





Lower two slots on : upper expansion cabinet interface board

–or– lower expansion cabinet interface board

–or– the auxiliary board installed in the main cabinet.



PLUS020

Serial

Ports

3 - 6

Serial

Ports

7 - 10

Services Board

Serial

Ports

11 - 14

Serial

Ports

15 - 18

Interface Board

For Lower

Expansion Cabinet

Auxiliary

Board (Main

Cabinet Location

ONLY)

Interface Board

For Upper

Expansion Cabinet

Identifying The Serial Data Port Locations



5.0 Connecting Data Devices

5.1

Selecting The Baud Rate

Each serial data communications port supports various baud rates, data bits, stop bits, parity, and flow control.

You can program these various options using the data base programming; however, the maximum baud rate that you can assign to a serial data port varies depending upon whether you locate the communications card. Also, if a device is transmitting/receiving data from the DXP Plus at a high rate, engineering sources recommend that you use a communications protocol (such as RTS/CTS or XON/XOFF) to prevent buffer overrun and data loss.

Maximum

Baud Rate

19,200 Baud






Lower two slots on: the upper expansion cabinet interface board,

–or– the lower expansion cabinet interface board,

–or– the auxiliary board installed in the main cabinet.

9600 Baud

The maximum distance from a serial data port that you can confidently locate a data device is dependent upon the baud rate at which you operate the serial data port.

•

When operating the port at 9600 baud, your data cable run must be no longer than 500 feet.

•

When operating the port at 19,200 baud, your data cable run must be no longer than 50 feet.



4.1

Making the Data Connections

Each serial data port is a standard 6–conductor modular jack that serves as the interface between an external data device and the DXP Plus system.

When preparing a data cable for connection to a data device, refer to the manufacturer’s manual for the equipment being interfaced, and make the wiring connections detailed in the following list:

•

Wire the common equipment RD (data from device to common equipment) connection to the device TD

(transmit data) connection.

•

Wire the common equipment TD (data to device from common equipment) connection to the device RD

(receive data) connection.

•

Wire the common equipment SG (signal ground) connection to the device SG (signal ground) connection.

•

If required for proper operation, wire the common equipment CTS (clear-to-send status from device to common equipment) connection to the device RTS (request-to-send) connection.

NOTE: The common equipment requires a positive voltage, with respect to signal ground, in order to send data.

If the cable has spare wires, be sure to ground them so that they will not act as antennas and induce interference into the system. Further, if there is a source of RF power nearby (such as a radio transmitter), use shielded cable and ground the shield at both ends.

CAUTION

As an added precaution against induced interference, route the data cable as far away from any fluorescent lighting as you can reach, and make every effort to route the data cable perpendicular to other wiring.

PLUS50

3

4

5

6

1

2

Pin 1 = (RTS) Request To Send

Pin 2 = (CTS) Clear To Send

Pin 3 = (RD) Receive Data

Pin 4 = (TD) Transmit Data

Pin 5 = (SG) Signal Ground

Pin 6 = (GND) Chasis Ground

Identifying The Serial Data Connections



R






Installing The External Battery Assembly

On The DXP Plus Digital Communications System

1.0 Introducing The External Battery Assembly

The external battery assembly is for use with the DXP Plus digital communications system. Unpack and carefully inspect all equipment for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found. Verify that the packages contain all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation. The assembly includes the following items:

•

Batteries: Five 6-volt, 50 ampere-hour, (Comdial product code BT000-141), charger unit and interface cables.

•

Metal enclosure with wire harness, includes combination circuit breaker, on/off switch

Should the AC power to the system be interrupted, one external battery assembly provides the following minimum power capability:

•

1.0 hour of operation for a fully loaded system.

Ke

T =

1 + [(0.084) (N)]

Calculate the minimum battery backup time provided by an external battery assembly to a fully configured DXP

Plus system using the following formula:

T =

(.85)(50)

1 + [(0.084) (472)]

=

41.0

40.65

= 1.0 Hour


K = 0.82 (Constant) e = 50 (ampere-hour capacity of battery assembly)


Example:

Assume that you have installed a DXP Plus with three cabinets supporting 472 telephones and containing one line board along with a battery assembly to provide back-up power.

R

During AC operation, the battery assembly accepts re-charging current to maintain the voltage potential of its batteries at an operational level.

NOTE: The external battery assembly requires approximately 10 hours to completely re-charge to full potential after it has been completely discharged and, in some cases, when initially installed.




Should further information be desired, or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, contact Comdial, Customer Service Department, Charlottesville, Virginia

22906.


IMI89–189.02

9/96

IMI89–189 Installing The External Battery Assembly

2.0 Understanding System Grounding Requirements

Transient voltage spikes, if induced onto CO or CENTREX lines, can travel through the cable and into the common equipment. The telephone company offers basic protection against this condition but it is usually designed to protect the central office circuits. While it will also provide some protection to the common equipment, you should not rely upon it for total protection. To help ensure that external over-voltage surges do not damage the system, you should install and properly ground primary protection devices, such as gas discharge tubes or similar primary protection devices, on all lines. While the line boards have internal secondary surge protection on all line ports, in order for this protection to be effective, you MUST connect the common equipment cabinet to a reliable, effective earth ground.

Proper grounding is necessary for trouble-free operation and personnel safety. The DXP Plus has the following three types of grounds:

•

Service Ground —a neutral power line wire that is connected to the ground bus in the premises’ AC power panel,

•


AC power panel,

•

Frame Ground—a low impedence conductor that places the common equipment cabinet at reference ground potential. The frame ground provides the greatest safety by limiting electrical potential between non-current carrying parts of the system. The common equipment cabinet provides a ground stud on its cabinet for access to its frame ground.

The entire system is effectively earth-grounded when you permanently connect the common equipment cabinet, all expansion cabinets, and the battery back-up assembly to earth or to some conducting body which serves in place of earth. The ground path must be of sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages which may result in circuit noise, hazard to personnel, or equipment damage.

An acceptable earth ground is one such as the service ground for the AC power or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters, pumps, or insulating sections that have been added for vibration reduction. Avoid using the premises’ structural steel frame as it may not be at earth ground potential. Use #10–12 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to connect the frame ground of the battery assembly cabinet (available through the ground stud on the cabinet’s side) to the frame ground of the main common equipment cabinet. Use #6 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to make the ground connection from the main cabinet’s frame ground to earth ground. Keep this ground wire separate from the three-wire AC line cord, do not splice it, and keep it as short as possible.

The impedence of the wiring between the common equipment cabinet frame ground and the earth ground must not exceed 0.25 ohms and the impedence between the earth ground and the power company’s reference standard ground must not exceed 5 ohms. Use an acceptable low impedence measuring device to measure the impedence of these paths. The #6 or larger wire size will minimize the wiring impedence; however, if the impedence between earth ground and the power company’s standard reference ground exceeds 5 ohms, contact the local power company. The ground path must always be of sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages that may result in circuit noise, hazard to personnel, or equipment damage.

Be sure that all of the ground connections are visible for inspection and maintenance. Tag all of the ground connections with a sign that reads: Do Not Remove or Disconnect.

2 – Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly


PLUS073

IMI89–189

No. 10 or 12 Solid Copper

Wire Between Cabinets

Grounding Terminal


Grounding Terminal

Grounding Terminal

No. 6 Solid Copper

Wire To Earth Ground

From Main Cabinet



Installing The Battery Back Up Assembly – 3


3.0 Mounting The Charger Chassis

You must mount the charger chassis to the battery cabinet; however, the particular position that you chose for this mounting depends upon the method that you plan to mount the cabinet at the DXP Plus site.

•

If you plan to mount the battery cabinet on a backboard at the side of the common equipment cabinets, you must attach the charger, with its cables pointing toward you, to the left end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet’s battery opening.

•

If you plan to mount the battery cabinet below the main common equipment cabinet on the same backboard

(single common equipment cabinet installations), you must attach the charger, with its cables pointing toward you, to the right end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet’s battery opening.

•

If you plan to mount the battery cabinet on the back side of a standard 23–inch double equipment rack with the common equipment cabinets mounted to the front side of the rack, you must attach the charger, with its cables pointing away from you, to the to the left end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet’s battery opening.

To mount the charger chassis,

1. Choose the method of battery cabinet mounting, and orient the charger so that it is facing properly for the mounting scheme.

2. Remove the front panel from the empty battery cabinet, and save the retaining hardware.

3. Remove the wiring access plate from the end of the battery cabinet.

4. Route the black battery connection wires through the wiring access hole.

5. Attach the charger chassis to the battery cabinet with the three supplied screws.

bb480k

Wiring Access Plate

Charger Chasis

Battery Cabinet

Mounting The Charger For Separate Backboard Installations


Screws (3 Places)


Battery Cabinet

Wiring Access Plate

Charger Chasis bb480L

Screws (3 Places)

Mounting The Charger For Below Main Cabinet Installations bb480j

Wiring Access Plate

Charger Chasis

IMI89–189

Screws (3 Places)

Battery Cabinet

Mounting the Charger For Double Rack Installations



CAUTION

The complete external battery assembly is heavy. The charger chassis, empty battery cabinet, and wiring weigh approximately 25 pounds and all the batteries together weigh approximately 130 pounds for a combined assembly hanging weight of approximately 155 pounds.

You can mount the battery cabinet at several different locations.

•

You can mount the battery cabinet on a separate backboard located to the right of the common equipment cabinet location. Locate the battery cabinet as detailed in the illustration on the facing page.

•

At sites that employ only a main equipment cabinet, you can mount the battery cabinet directly below the main common equipment cabinet on the same backboard.

•

You can mount the battery cabinet in the middle of a standard 23–inch equipment rack if you wish. This can be a companion rack set next to the one where you have mounted the DXP Plus cabinets. Alternately, you can use a self-supporting, two-sided rack with the DXP Plus cabinets mounted on one side and the battery cabinet mounted on the other side directly behind and slightly above the main common equipment.

Remember from the Section 2.0 discussion, you must attach the charger chassis to the battery cabinet in a orientation that supports the cabinet mounting.

NOTE: The following instructions describe how to mount the battery cabinet using a backboard.

1. Add a second backboard to the right of the backboard that supports the DXP Plus common equipment cabinet.

Be sure that this backboard bridges the studs that support the underlying wall material. Securely attach the backboard to the mounting surface. (Suitable backboards are available commercially or you can construct one out of 3/4-inch plywood.) You must drive the hardware that secures the backboard to the mounting surface into the underlying wall studs instead of just into the wall material alone.

2. Refer to the illustration for the locating dimensions required for the mounting screws, and mark their locations on the backboard. You must attach the battery cabinet vertically to the backboard.


4. Insert the two top screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8–inch of the surface.






9. Insert the lower screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.


Installing The External Battery Assembly IMI89–189

BB480a

Mounting The External Battery Assembly



5.0 Assembling and Wiring The Batteries In The Cabinet

5.1

Installing The Batteries

Install the batteries in the cabinet with their terminals facing the cabinet opening. The batteries set in place, and you do not need to anchor them to the cabinet.



PLUS003


5.2

Strapping The Batteries

You must strap the batteries together using the supplied strapping bars and hardware. Use three strapping bars at each strapping location, and install the hardware as shown in the illustration.

BB480c


# 10-32 Machine Screw

#10 Flat Washer

Battery Straps

Battery Terminal

#10 Flat Washer

#10 Lockwasher

#10 Hex Nut bb480h

Attaching The Strapping Hardware



5.3

Wiring The Batteries

The charger has a pair of negative wires and a pair of positive wires (designated by red sleeving near one end of the wires). This two-wire arrangement divides the current carrying load between the two wires of each pair. The cabinet’s assembly package includes two individual black wires that you use to wire the circuit breaker to the batteries. Again, two wires divide the current carrying load between both wires.

The negative wires from the charger are terminated with smaller size terminals than the those that terminate the charger’s positive wires. Connect the smaller (negative) terminals to the circuit breaker and the larger (positive) terminals to the positive battery post. The individual wires that you use to connect the circuit breaker to the battery post are also terminated with a large terminal on one end and a small terminal on the other. Connect the smaller terminals to the circuit breaker and the larger terminals to the negative battery post.

Wire the batteries as shown in the schematic. Use the supplied hardware to connect the wires to the batteries per method shown in the detailed drawing.

Once you have wired the batteries, attach the front cover to the cabinet with the supplied hardware.

+

-

Two Black Wires With Red Sleeving

(Positive Lead)

Circuit Breaker

Two Black Wires

(Negative Lead)

-

Two Black Wires

(Negative Lead)

Strap (Four Places)

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

Charger Batteries

Connecting The Wire Harness


PLUS005


#10-32 Machine Screw

Wire Terminal

Battery Terminal

Wire Terminal

#10 Flat Washer

#10 Lockwasher

#10 Hex Nut bb480i

Attaching The Wiring Hardware

BB480e

Installing The Front Cover



6.0 Connecting The Battery Assembly To The System

1. Connect the AC power and turn on the power supply switch in both DXP Plus main and expansion cabinets.

2. Connect a battery back-up cable between the battery assembly and the power supplies in the DXP Plus main and expansion cabinets.

3. The battery assembly includes a charger that maintains the batteries at full charge. Once you have installed the battery assembly, connect its AC power cord to the same AC outlet surge protector that powers the

DXP Plus main common equipment cabinet.

PLUS004

Circuit Breaker

Power Line

Surge Protector

Dedicated

AC Outlet

Connecting The Battery Back Up Assembly To The System



7.0 Verifying The Battery Voltage

Every three months, use an accurate voltmeter to measure the no-load voltage of the external battery assembly.

The measured voltage range should be within 27–34.5 volts when the batteries are at full charge.

If the no-load voltage is lower than 27 volts, measure the charging voltage supplied by the common equipment cabinet. The measured charging voltage must be 35 volts maximum.

If the charging voltage is low or if the voltage of a freshly-charged battery assembly is no greater than 30 volts, contact your technical service representative.

{

Green Status Lights

On = Batteries fully charges (>32 V)

On = Batteries under charged (>30 V)

On = Batteries low (>27 V)

On = AC power on

PLUS002

Fuse 5 AMP slow blow type


(charger on and batteries fully charged)

{

= +34.5 GND

= +34.5 GND

= -34.5 Volts

= -34.5 Volts

Verifying The Battery Voltages



8.0 Special Cautionary Battery Information

•

Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as the cells may explode. Check with the local codes for possible disposal instructions.

•

Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to the eyes or skin. It may be toxic if swallowed.

•

Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to short the battery with conducting materials such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The battery may over-heat and cause burns.

•

Charge the batteries provided with or identified for use with the DXP Plus digital communications system only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this publication.

•

Observe proper polarity orientation when installing the batteries.

•

Do not mix old and new batteries in the external battery assembly.

•

Do not mix batteries of different sizes or from different manufacturers in this product.

NOTICE

This symbol, when encountered on the equipment cabinet or on other installed hardware, means: CAUTION—refer to the instruction manual.




R



Installing The Switchable Power Supply In The

DXP Plus Common Equipment Cabinet

1.0 Introducing The Switchable Power Supply

This publication discusses the installation of the switchable IEC 950 approved 120/230 volt power supply assembly for the DXP Plus main and expansion common equipment cabinets. The voltage ranges of this power supply assembly is as follows:

•

90–129 VAC at 50/60 Hz

•

200–254 VAC at 50 Hz

The power supply assembly is packed separately from the common equipment cabinet; therefore, you should unpack and carefully inspect it for shipping damage and notify the shipper of any damages you find. Also, verify that the package contains all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation.

Refer to IMI66–105, Installation Instructions DXP Plus Main Cabinet Assembly for complete installation instructions of the main DXP plus cabinet and to IMI66–106, Installation Instructions DXP Plus Expansion

Cabinet Assembly for complete installation instructions of the DXP plus expansion cabinet.

The power supply assembly is protected with a 6.3A, 250V slow-blow fuse. A replacement fuse must have the same rating.

NOTE: Both the switchable power supply assembly employ electronic switching circuitry in their design. During operation, power supplies of this type generate an audible sound from their switching regulators. This sound is normal and is not an indication that the power supply is operating improperly.

R





22906.


IMI89-196.01

7/95

IMI89–196 Installing The Switchable Power Supply




•


•


AC power panel,

•


Effective grounding requires that you connect the frame ground to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is one such as the ground bus in the premises’ AC power panel or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters, pumps, or insulating sections that have been added for vibration reduction. Avoid using the premises’ structural steel frame as it may not be at earth ground potential. Use #10–12 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to connect the frame ground of the expansion cabinet (available through the ground stud on the expansion cabinet’s side) to the frame ground of the main common equipment cabinet. Use #6 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to make the ground connection from the main cabinet’s frame ground to earth ground. Keep this ground wire separate from the three-wire AC line cord, do not splice it, and keep it as short as possible.

The impedance of the wiring between the DXP Plus and the earth ground must not exceed 0.25 ohms and the impedance between the earth ground and the power company’s reference standard ground must not exceed 5 ohms. Use an acceptable low impedance measuring device to measure the impedance of these paths. The #6 or larger wire size will minimize the wiring impedance; however, if the impedance between earth ground and the power company’s standard reference ground exceeds 5 ohms, contact the local power company. The ground path must always be of sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages that may result in circuit noise, hazard to personnel, or equipment damage.


2 – Installing The Switchable Power Supply

Installing The Switchable Power Supply

PLUS073

Grounding Terminal



IMI89–196


Grounding Terminal

Grounding Terminal


No. 6 Solid Copper


From Main Cabinet


Installing The Switchable Power Supply – 3


3.0 Matching The Source Voltage

The factory ships the switchable power supply set for 230 VAC operation. If you plan to operate the power supply from a 120 VAC source, you must set the voltage selection switch for that input. The switch is located at the upper right edge of the power supply assembly. Slide the switch actuator to the setting that matches the AC source voltage available at the installation site.

CAUTION

Be sure that you set the power supply for the proper source voltage. An improper setting can result in equipment damage.

Voltage Selector Switch

(Slide Actuator To Setting That

Matches The AC Source Volage)

PLUS076

Matching The Source Voltage


Installing The Switchable Power Supply IMI89–196

4.0 Installing The AC Power Plug

The line cord is terminated with a typical continental European plug matching the CEE 7/7 standard. If this plug does not meet the site needs, you can install a plug of the proper type for your installation.

To install a line cord plug,

• familiarize yourself with the requirements for the plug that you plan to install on the unterminated line cord (the illustration shows a typical continental European plug matching the CEE 7 standard),

• strip off the insulation from the line cord wires according to the requirements for your plug,

• open the plug and slide its outer shell onto the line cord,

• connect the ground, neutral, and line wires according to the requirements for your plug,

• if your plug includes a clamp, tighten it on the line cord,

• reassemble the plug,

Test the installation for open and short circuits using an ohm meter.

L1

L2

Neutral (Blue)

Ground (Green/Yellow)

Line (Brown)

L3

L1, L2, and L3= strip length requirements

PLUS069

Neutral (Blue) Line (Brown)


Clamp

Inside Of Plug

Standard Wire Color

Power

Source

Wire Color

Europe USA

Line Brown Black

Installing A Typical Continental European AC Power Plug





Install the power supply assembly in the common equipment cabinet per the following discussion and illustration.



3. Slide the power supply into the opening at the top right side of the common equipment main cabinet until the assembly’s front panel contacts the side of the cabinet.

4. Locate the power cable routed from the backplane and connect it to the power supply’s mating connector.

5. Remove the four #6 thread-forming screws from the hardware bag and secure the power supply assembly to the equipment cabinet.

CAUTION

The power supply is fan cooled. If air flow to the fan is blocked or the fan is out of service for any reason, the power supply can overheat. If the power supply overheats, the Thermal Overload indicator lights, and the 36 VDC output voltage shuts off.


Power

Supply

Assembly

PLUS075

Installing The Power Supply


Machine Screw

(4 Places)


6.0 Making The AC Power Connection

•

For the main cabinet’s AC power connection, employ a dedicated 15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire ground and supplied to a standard electrical outlet. Remember, this electrical outlet must be located within four feet of the common equipment cabinet. Remember also, you may need to supply two 15 AMP dedicated electrical outlets, each protected by its own circuit breaker, if you plan to later install expansion cabinets.

NOTE: If you install the optional battery back-up assembly, you can use this same outlet to supply AC power to that assembly’s battery charger.

•

To provide protection against surges and spikes that may appear on the AC line, install a plug-in power line surge protector between the AC power cord of the installed equipment and the AC outlet..

CAUTION


PLUS038

Two 15 AMP

Circuit Breakers

Ganged Together

Power

Cable

Two Dedicated

117 VAC 15 Amp

NEMA 5-15R

Electrical Outlets

With Third Wire

Ground

(Each Is Protected

By Its Own Circuit

Breaker.)

Plug-In

Power Line

Surge Protectors

Typical Earth

Ground

Making The AC Connection



7.0 Measuring The Power Supply Voltages

If you need to measure power supply voltages, you can do so at the DC voltage connector. Measure the power under the following conditions:

•


•


•



CAUTION

For new installations, once you have measured the power supply voltages, turn off the AC power switch and disconnect the AC line cord from the outlet. Leave the AC power disconnected until you have installed the circuit boards in the equipment cabinet.

8.0 Identifying The Fuse

The power supply fuse is a slow-blow type rated at 6.3 AMPS and 250 VOLTS. A replacement fuse must have the same rating.



PLUS070

On = -36 VDC

On = +5 VDC

On = -5 VDC



On/Off Switch

Source Voltage Switch

Fuse

6.3A, 250V

Slow Blow

Type

Reset Switch


Indicator Turns On)


Pins 3 & 4 = -36 VDC

Pin 5 = +5 VDC

Pin 6 = -5 VDC





+ Voltmeter

Lead

- Voltmeter

Lead

Measured Values

Pin 1

Pin 5

Pin 3

Pin 7

- 36 VDC +1.0V / -0V

+ 5 VDC +/-3 V

Pin 6 Pin 7

Pin 8 Pin 7

- 5 VDC +/-3 V


+ 5 V nominal = thermal overload

(press reset switch)



Installing The Switchable External Battery Assembly On

The DXP Plus Digital Communications System

1.0 Introducing The External Battery Assembly

The external battery assembly is for use with the DXP Plus digital communications system. Unpack and carefully inspect all equipment for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found. Verify that the packages contain all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation. The assembly includes the following items:

•

Batteries: Five 6-volt, 50 ampere-hour, (Comdial product code BT000-141), charger unit and interface cables.

•

Metal enclosure with wire harness, includes combination circuit breaker, on/off switch

Should the AC power to the system be interrupted, one BB480 external battery assembly provides the following minimum power capability:

•

1.0 hour of operation for a fully loaded system.

Ke

T =

1 + [(0.084) (N)]

Calculate the minimum battery backup time provided by a battery assembly to a fully configured DXP Plus system using the following formula:

T =

(.82)(50)

1 + [(0.084) (472)]

=

41.0

40.65

= 1.0 Hour


K = 0.82 (Constant) e = 50 (ampere-hour capacity of battery assembly)


Example:

Assume that you have installed a DXP Plus with three cabinets supporting 472 telephones and containing one line board along with a battery assembly to provide back-up power.

R

During AC operation, the battery assembly accepts re-charging current to maintain the voltage potential of its batteries at an operational level.

NOTE: The BB480 external battery assembly requires approximately 10 hours to completely re-charge to full potential after it has been completely discharged and, in some cases, when initially installed.




Should further information be desired, or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, contact Comdial, Customer Service Department, Charlottesville, Virginia

22906.


IMI89–197.02

11/95

IMI89–197 Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly


Transient voltage spikes, if induced onto CO or CENTREX lines, can travel through the cable and into the common equipment. The telephone company offers basic protection against this condition but it is usually designed to protect the central office circuits. While it will also provide some protection to the common equipment, you should not rely upon it for total protection. To help ensure that external over-voltage surges do not damage the system, you should install and properly ground primary protection devices, such as gas discharge tubes or similar primary protection devices, on all lines. While the line boards have internal secondary surge protection on all line ports, in order for this protection to be effective, you MUST connect the common equipment cabinet to a reliable, effective earth ground.

Proper grounding is necessary for trouble-free operation and personnel safety. The DXP Plus has the following three types of grounds:

•

Service Ground —a neutral power line wire that is connected to the ground bus in the premises’ AC power panel,

•


AC power panel,

•

Frame Ground—a low impedence conductor that places the common equipment cabinet at reference ground potential. The frame ground provides the greatest safety by limiting electrical potential between non-current carrying parts of the system. The common equipment cabinet provides a ground stud on its cabinet for access to its frame ground.

The entire system is effectively earth-grounded when you permanently connect the common equipment cabinet, all expansion cabinets, and the battery back-up assembly to earth or to some conducting body which serves in place of earth. The ground path must be of sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages which may result in circuit noise, hazard to personnel, or equipment damage.

An acceptable earth ground is one such as the service ground for the AC power or a public metallic cold water pipe at a point immediately at its entrance to the premises and ahead of any meters, pumps, or insulating sections that have been added for vibration reduction. Avoid using the premises’ structural steel frame as it may not be at earth ground potential. Use #10–12 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to connect the frame ground of the battery assembly cabinet (available through the ground stud on the cabinet’s side) to the frame ground of the main common equipment cabinet. Use #6 or larger insulated solid copper grounding wire to make the ground connection from the main cabinet’s frame ground to earth ground. Keep this ground wire separate from the three-wire AC line cord, do not splice it, and keep it as short as possible.

The impedence of the wiring between the common equipment cabinet frame ground and the earth ground must not exceed 0.25 ohms and the impedence between the earth ground and the power company’s reference standard ground must not exceed 5 ohms. Use an acceptable low impedence measuring device to measure the impedence of these paths. The #6 or larger wire size will minimize the wiring impedence; however, if the impedence between earth ground and the power company’s standard reference ground exceeds 5 ohms, contact the local power company. The ground path must always be of sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent a build up of voltages that may result in circuit noise, hazard to personnel, or equipment damage.

Be sure that all of the ground connections are visible for inspection and maintenance. Tag all of the ground connections with a sign that reads: Do Not Remove or Disconnect.


Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly

PLUS073

Grounding Terminal



IMI89–197


Grounding Terminal

Grounding Terminal

No. 6 Solid Copper


From Main Cabinet





3.0 Matching The Source Voltage

The factory ships the switchable battery back up charger assembly set for 230 VAC operation. If you plan to operate the charger from a 120 VAC source, you must set the voltage selection switch for that input. The switch is located at the lower left edge of the charger chassis. Slide the switch actuator to the setting that matches the AC source voltage available at the installation site.

PLUS074

Matching The Source Voltage

Voltage Select Switch


Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly IMI89–197

4.0 Installing The AC Power Plug

The charger assembly’s line cord is terminated with a typical continental European plug matching the CEE 7/7 standard. If this plug does not meet the site needs, you can install a plug of the proper type for your installation.

To install a line cord plug,

• familiarize yourself with the requirements for the plug that you plan to install on the unterminated line cord (the illustration shows a typical continental European plug matching the CEE 7 standard),

• strip off the insulation from the line cord wires according to the requirements for your plug,

• open the plug and slide its outer shell onto the line cord,

• connect the ground, neutral, and line wires according to the requirements for your plug,

• if your plug includes a clamp, tighten it on the line cord,

• reassemble the plug,

Test the installation for open and short circuits using an ohm meter.

L1

L2

Neutral (Blue)


Line (Brown)

L3

L1, L2, and L3= strip length requirements

PLUS069

Neutral (Blue) Line (Brown)


Clamp

Inside Of Plug

Line

Power

Source

Ground

Standard Wire Color

Wire Color

Europe USA

Brown Black

Green/Yellow Yellow

Installing A Typical Continental European AC Power Plug



2.0 Mounting The Charger Chassis

You must mount the charger chassis to the battery cabinet; however, the particular position that you chose for this mounting depends upon the method that you plan to mount the cabinet at the DXP Plus site.

•

If you plan to mount the battery cabinet on a backboard at the side of the common equipment cabinets, you must attach the charger, with its cables pointing toward you, to the left end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet’s battery opening.

•

If you plan to mount the battery cabinet below the main common equipment cabinet on the same backboard

(single common equipment cabinet installations), you must attach the charger, with its cables pointing toward you, to the right end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet’s battery opening.

•

If you plan to mount the battery cabinet on the back side of a standard 23–inch double equipment rack with the common equipment cabinets mounted to the front side of the rack, you must attach the charger, with its cables pointing away from you, to the to the left end of the battery cabinet as you face the cabinet’s battery opening.

To mount the charger chassis,

1. Choose the method of battery cabinet mounting, and orient the charger so that it is facing properly for the mounting scheme.

2. Remove the front panel from the empty battery cabinet, and save the retaining hardware.

3. Remove the wiring access plate from the end of the battery cabinet.

4. Route the black battery connection wires through the wiring access hole.

5. Attach the charger chassis to the battery cabinet with the three supplied screws.

bb480k

Wiring Access Plate

Charger Chasis

Battery Cabinet

Mounting The Charger For Separate Backboard Installations


Screws (3 Places)

Installing The Switchable Battery Back Up Assembly

Battery Cabinet

Wiring Access Plate

Charger Chasis bb480L

Screws (3 Places)

Mounting The Charger For Below Main Cabinet Installations bb480j

Wiring Access Plate

Charger Chasis

IMI89–197

Screws (3 Places)

Battery Cabinet

Mounting the Charger For Double Rack Installations



CAUTION

The complete battery back up assembly is heavy. The charger chassis, empty battery cabinet, and wiring weigh approximately 25 pounds and all the batteries together weigh approximately 130 pounds for a combined assembly hanging weight of approximately 155 pounds.

You can mount the battery cabinet at several different locations.

•

You can mount the battery cabinet on a separate backboard located to the right of the common equipment cabinet location. Locate the battery cabinet as detailed in the illustration on the facing page.

•

At sites that employ only a main equipment cabinet, you can mount the battery cabinet directly below the main common equipment cabinet on the same backboard.

•

You can mount the battery cabinet in the middle of a standard 23–inch equipment rack if you wish. This can be a companion rack set next to the one where you have mounted the DXP Plus cabinets. Alternately, you can use a self-supporting, two-sided rack with the DXP Plus cabinets mounted on one side and the battery cabinet mounted on the other side directly behind and slightly above the main common equipment.

Remember from the Section 2.0 discussion, you must attach the charger chassis to the battery cabinet in a orientation that supports the cabinet mounting.

NOTE: The following instructions describe how to mount the battery cabinet using a backboard.

1. Add a second backboard to the right of the backboard that supports the DXP Plus common equipment cabinet.

Be sure that this backboard bridges the studs that support the underlying wall material. Securely attach the backboard to the mounting surface. (Suitable backboards are available commercially or you can construct one out of 3/4-inch plywood.) You must drive the hardware that secures the backboard to the mounting surface into the underlying wall studs instead of just into the wall material alone.

2. Refer to the illustration for the locating dimensions required for the mounting screws, and mark their locations on the backboard. You must attach the cabinet vertically to the backboard.


4. Insert the two top screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8–inch of the surface.






9. Insert the lower screws into the backboard and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.



BB480a

Mounting The Battery Cabinet



3.0 Assembling and Wiring The Batteries In The Cabinet

3.1


Install the batteries in the cabinet with their terminals facing the cabinet opening. The batteries set in place, and you do not need to anchor them to the cabinet.



PLUS003


3.2


You must strap the batteries together using the supplied strapping bars and hardware. Use three strapping bars at each strapping location, and install the hardware as shown in the illustration.

BB480c


# 10-32 Machine Screw

#10 Flat Washer

Battery Straps

Battery Terminal

#10 Flat Washer

#10 Lockwasher

#10 Hex Nut bb480h

Attaching The Strapping Hardware



3.3

Wiring The Batteries

The charger has a pair of negative wires and a pair of positive wires(designated by red sleeving near one end of the wires). This two-wire arrangement divides the current carrying load between the two wires of each pair. The cabinet’s assembly package includes two individual black wires that you use to wire the circuit breaker to the batteries. Again, two wires divide the current carrying load between both wires.

The negative wires from the charger are terminated with smaller size terminals than the those that terminate the charger’s positive wires. Connect the smaller (negative) terminals to the circuit breaker and the larger (positive) terminals to the positive battery post. The individual wires that you use to connect the circuit breaker to the battery post are also terminated with a large terminal on one end and a small terminal on the other. Connect the smaller terminals to the circuit breaker and the larger terminals to the negative battery post.

Wire the batteries as shown in the schematic. Use the supplied hardware to connect the wires to the batteries per method shown in the detailed drawing.

Once you have wired the batteries, attach the front cover to the cabinet with the supplied hardware.

+

-

Two Black Wires With Red Sleeving

(Positive Lead)

Circuit Breaker

Two Black Wires

(Negative Lead)

-

Two Black Wires

(Negative Lead)

Strap (Four Places)

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

Charger Batteries

Connecting The Wire Harness


PLUS005


#10-32 Machine Screw

Wire Terminal

Battery Terminal

Wire Terminal

#10 Flat Washer

#10 Lockwasher

#10 Hex Nut bb480i

Attaching The Wiring Hardware

BB480e

Installing The Front Cover



4.0 Connecting The Battery Back-Up Assembly To The System

1. Connect the AC power and turn on the power supply switch in both DXP Plus main and expansion cabinets.

CAUTION

Always connect the AC power, and turn on the power supplies before you connect the battery back-up cables. Using a different connection sequence could cause equipment damage.

2. Connect a battery back-up cable between the charger cabinet and the power supplies in the DXP Plus main and expansion cabinets.

3. The battery back-up assembly includes a charger that maintains the batteries at full charge. Once you have installed the cabinet assembly, connect its AC power cord to the same AC outlet surge protector that

powers the DXP Plus main common equipment cabinet.

PLUS004

Circuit Breaker

Power Line

Surge Protector

Dedicated

AC Outlet

Connecting The Battery Assembly To The System



5.0 Verifying The Battery Voltage

Every three months, use an accurate voltmeter to measure the no-load voltage of the battery back-up assembly.

The measured voltage range should be within 27–34.5 volts when the batteries are at full charge.

If the no-load voltage is lower than 27 volts, measure the charging voltage supplied by the common equipment cabinet. The measured charging voltage must be 35 volts maximum.

If the charging voltage is low or if the voltage of freshly-charged batteries is no greater than 30 volts, contact your technical service representative.

{

Green Status Lights

On = Batteries fully charges (>32 V)

On = Batteries under charged (>30 V)

On = Batteries low (>27 V)

On = AC power on

PLUS002

Fuse 5 AMP slow blow type


(charger on and batteries fully charged)

{

= +34.5 GND

= +34.5 GND

= -34.5 Volts

= -34.5 Volts

Verifying The Battery Voltages



6.0 Special Cautionary Battery Information

•

Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as the cells may explode. Check with the local codes for possible disposal instructions.

•

Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to the eyes or skin. It may be toxic if swallowed.

•

Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to short the battery with conducting materials such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The battery may over-heat and cause burns.

•

Charge the batteries provided with or identified for use with the DXP Plus digital communications system only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this publication.

•

Observe proper polarity orientation when installing the batteries.

•

Do not mix old and new batteries in the assembly.

•

Do not mix batteries of different sizes or from different manufacturers in this product.

NOTICE

This symbol, when encountered on the equipment cabinet or on other installed hardware, means: CAUTION—refer to the instruction manual.




R



Troubleshooting The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option

On The DXP Plus Digital Communications System

What This Document Contains

3.2

3.3

3.4

4.

4.1

2.3

2.4

3.

3.1

1.

1.1

1.2

1.3

2.

2.1

2.2

4.6

4.7

4.8

5.

5.1

5.2

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

6.

A.

Defining The T1 Terms 2

Introducing The DXPT1 6

Describing The Channel Service Unit (CSU) 6

Considering Pre-Installation Details 7

Troubleshooting The Physical Layer 8

Selecting Functions With DIP Switches SW1-1 Through SW1-8 8

Selecting Functions With DIP Switches SW2-1 Through SW2-8 8

Selecting Functions With DIP Switches LIU-1 Through LIU-4 9

Setting Up The DXOPT-SYN (Sync) Card 9

Troubleshooting The Protocol Layer 10

Defining The Signalling Bits For The E & M Protocol 10

Defining The Signalling Bits For The Direct Inward Dial (DID) Protocol 11

Defining The Signalling Bits For The Ground Start Protocol 11

Defining The Signalling Bits For The Loop Start Protocol 12

Using The Diagnostic Function 13

Understanding The Diagnostic Switches And Indicators 13

Requesting Cold Start Information 14

Requesting Information On Received Signal Strength 15

Requesting Information On Switch Settings 16

Requesting AB Signalling 17

Requesting Information On Trunk Assignments 18

Requesting Information About Channel State 19

Using The Hexadecimal Codes For Remote Diagnostics 20

Selecting The T1 PAD Settings 21

Setting T1 Transmit Level 21

Setting T1 Receive Level 21

Solving T1 Problems 21

APPENDIX A (Superframe and Extended Superframe Formats) 22

Referring To Other Documents

Installing The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option, IMI89–193

Carrier-To-Customer Installation DS1 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.403–1989

Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for Voiceband Applications, 4.10 “Digital

Signaling and Supervision”, EIA/TIA–464A





IMI89–207.01

7/95

R

IMI89–207 Troubleshooting The DXPT1 Installation

1 Defining The T1 Terms

Bipolar


Bipolar Violation (or error)



B8ZS (Binary Eight Zero Substitution)

This is a technique to send an all-zero channel without violating the ones-density requirement (a single one in each channel and no more than 15 zeros in a row). Voice transmission will not allow an all zero channel. The system accomplishes B8ZS suppression by inserting a special bipolar error that is interpreted, not as an error, but an all zero channel. The B8ZS feature replaces the all-zero channel two different ways. The feature replaces the all-zero channel with the sequence 000 + - 0 - + if the preceding pulse was a +, and the feature replaces the all-zero channel with the sequence 000 - + 0 + - if the preceding pulse was -. The + represents a positive pulse, the - represents a negative pulse, and 0 represents no pulse. Set the B8ZS feature with switches SW1–5 and SW1–6.

CAS (Channel Associated Signalling)

The Channel Associated Signalling is the only inbound signalling method currently supported by the

DXPT1 board.

COFA (Change of Frame Alignment)


CPE/Carrier Equipment

The DXPT1 is normally classified as Customer Premise Equipment (CPE). If you use SW2–2 to configure the DXPT1 board to use the internal CSU while in the ESF mode, the network may require that the system be classified as Carrier Equipment (CE). The information packet that the DXPT1 board sends to the network contains a facility data link (FDL) maintenance message that has a bit in it that provides this identification.

CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)

A method of checking errors from the transmission source to the destination. For T1 operation, CRC caculates a checksum depending on the data in a frame. The system uses CRC in ESF mode exclusively.

(You must enable CRC with DIP switch SW2-4).

Delay Dial E&M, DID Protocol Type

Once seized by a calling system, the system being called makes A=1 and B=1 until it is ready to receive digits. When it is ready to receive digits, it makes A=0 and B=0. The system uses a delay dial protocol when wink protocol timing is not compatible to the network.

Dial Pulse – T1

Dial pulse is a method of sending address digits (numbers) using A and B bits logic bits instead of sending DTMF tones. Some carriers may not support dial-pulse signalling. While the method is slower when compared with tones, it requires no DTMF receivers.

2 – Troubleshooting The DXPT1 Installation

Troubleshooting The DXPT1 Installation IMI89–207

Direct Inward Dial (DID) T1 Trunk

DID is a protocol for inbound calls where the network sends the extension number during the beginning of the call. The system supports the 0 through 7 inbound digits. The network does not translate the digits to a valid extension—the system’s DID translation tables perform this action.

DS-0 (Digital Signal-Level Zero)

Digital Signal-Level Zero is a single 64Kbit channel inside a T1 span.

E & M T1 Trunk

E&M is a signalling protocol that supports both inbound and outbound digits. Inbound digits from the network are already translated to a 3–digit or 4–digit valid extension. E & M is symmetrical from both ends and ignores the subscriber/office classification of other trunks. Use this signalling protocol for interconnecting two DXP Plus systems.

Extended Superframe Mode (ESF)

Extended Superframe Mode consists of 24 frames. The frame bit uses only 6 frames leaving 18 bits for other purposes. These spare 18 bits provide 6 bits for CRC information and 12 bits for a facility data link.

The facility data link is for maintenance information (as defined by the ANSI T1.403 specification). Like the superframe mode, the 64–Kbit user channels have 24 frames available for use.

Ground Start T1 Trunks

Ground start is a call signalling protocol that monitors only outbound digits and supports disconnect supervision. Ground start protocol supports only the subscriber end of the communications link

FDL (Facility Data Link)

The Facility Data Link is a 4–Kbit communication link from the network to the DXPT1 board only when the board is operating in the ESF mode. The system sends preemptive messages (for example, yellow alarm and loopback), if needed, and sends error packets to the network once a second. The packets contain alarm history in accordance with the ANSI T1.403 specification.

Fractional T1

Fractional T1 is a T1 span where the user uses less than 24 channels. The DXPT1 board allocates eight or

16 channels to a fractional T1 but does not reallocate unused channels in the eight, 16, or 24 mode to other resources. A fractional T1 in ESF mode will nullify the CRC and other error checking capability since the network shares channels.

Immediate Start Protocol State

Once a calling system seizes a called system, the calling system sends address digits to the called system without requiring an acknowledgement. Inbound immediate start protocol does not support tone dial.

Dial-pulse is adequate however. Immediate start protocol is applicable to DID and E&M tie lines.

Inband Signalling


ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Primary Rate (also called PRI)

Currently not offered by the DXPT1 board.

Loopback Local

An operation method that loops the DXPT1 board’s transmit output and receive input paths. The loopback terminates all traffic and halts call processing. While in this idle condition, the system continues to transmit the T1 transmit stream to the network but it will not answer incoming calls. If the remote T1 equipment is the clock source (primary or secondary) for the DXOPT-SYN card, the remote equipment terminates the reference signal because the network receive circuit is open in local loopback. You initiate local loopback by setting the appropriate SW1 switches. The main purpose of local loopback is to verify the DXPT1 board’s ability to synchronize properly. Loopback local operation is applicable to superframe adn extended superframe modes.

Throubleshooting The DXPT1 Installation – 3


Loopback Payload

The loopback payload feature is an ESF-only method of loopback which loops the network receive input path to the remote T1 equipment’s transmit output path. This loopback method does not loop the first bit of each frame to allow the DXPT1 board’s facility data link to continue to transmit maintenance information. You can use switches SW2–7 and SW2–8 to manually initiate the payload loopback or you can allow the network to send an FDL message to initiate or restore the payload loopback. The DXPT1 board goes out-of-service during the loopback time.

Loopback Remote

The loopback remote feature loops the network receive input path to the remote T1 equipment’s transmit output path. The remote loopback feature terminates all traffic and halt any call processing. You can use the SW2 switches to manually initiate remote loopback or you can allow the network to remotely initiate the condition. In superframe mode with SW2–1 set to on, the network can send a special in-band pattern

(00010001000100010001.... min 5 seconds) to cause the DXPT1 board to automatically enter the remote loopback mode. The network can disable the loopback by sending a different in-band pattern

(001001001001001001001.... min 5 seconds). In ESF mode, the DXPT1 board’s facility data link, or maintenance channel, can enable and disable remote loopback automatically or you can set SW2–7 on and SW2–8 off to manually enable remote loopback or set both switches off to manually disable the feature. Loopback remote operation is applicable to superframd and extended superframe modes.

LIU Line Interface Unit

The line interface unit is the interface between the T1 copper wires and the DXPT1 board’s framing circuitry. The LIU is responsible for separating the 1.544MHZ receive clock from the incoming stream and converting bipolar Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) to 5–volt digital logic. The LIU also supports the automatic line build-out that regulates the transmit level according to the receive strength (LIU-2 switch).

Loop Start T1 Trunk

Loop Start T1 Trunk is a network protocol that monitors outbound digits to the DXPT1 board. This protocol does not support disconnect supervision. Loop start protocol supports the subscriber end of the communications path but does not support the office (network) end.

Primary Clock Reference

The straps on the DXAUX board designate the primary clock reference. Primary clock reference is the first choice reference clock used to synchronize the DXP Plus to the incoming span. If the system looses synchronization, it uses its secondary clock reference. If the secondary clock reference is not available, the DXOPT-SYN card’s variable clock oscillator (VCO) switches to the fixed oscillator on the DXSRV

(services) board. When it does this, slips occur.

Repeater

A repeater is a amplifying device that central office technicians place at approximately one mile intervals along a T1 circuit to boost the T1 signal. The T1 specifications allow a maximum of 50 repeaters along a communications path.

Slip

This term describes the condition that exists when the transmit 1.544 MHz clock is different from the receive 1.544 MHz clock. When the system collects or looses a frame of information due to the span frequencies being different, the system generates a slip error. Slip does not affect voice transmissions and may not affect modem traffic; however slip does effect digital data traffic. The DXPT1 board does not currently support digital data traffic. Also, at times a central office takes a T1 span out of service if too many slips occur—one or two a day is permissible (the carrier supplier will furnish you with an an exact number if you request that information from them).



Smart-Jack (Network Interface Box)

A smart jack is a demarcation box provided by the central office. A smart jack provides isolation and increased signal drive (up to one mile) and can respond to loopback commands for diagnostic purposes.

The central office usually provides an 8–pin modular jack for T1 equipment connection. Pin 1 of the modular jack goes to pin 1 of the DXPT1 modular jack, and so on. Only pins 1 and 2 (DXPT1 receive), 4 and 5 (DXPT1 transmit) require connecting.

Superframe Mode (SF)

The standard T1 mode consists of 12 frames per superframe cycle. The first frame bit remains constant and rotates through a 12-bit pattern. By identifying the frame pattern, the system can select the sixth and twelfth frame for the AB bit signalling inband method. T1 parameters allow for 24 64–Kbit user channels.

Suppression

Suppression is a means to prevent more than 15 zeros in a row and not less than 1 pulse (mark) per channel. The DXPT1 board supports two suppression methods. These are the B7 method and the B8ZS method (selected by SW1–5 and SW1–6). The B7 method inserts a logic 1 in the seventh bit position of a channel if all bits are zeros. The B8ZS method inserts a bipolar violation that will be identified and stripped at the receiving end (selected by switches SW1–5, and SW1–6). Voice coding should not allow an all zero channel.

Unlock Alarm

On a normally operating DXPT1 board, the unlock alarm LED is always off. If this LED is on, it indicates that the phase lock loop creating the transmit 1.544 MHz frequency is defective. For this indicator to be meaningful, the DXOPT-SYN card must be synchronized (no red LEDs on). If the

DXOPT-SYN card is not synchronized, you must correct that situation.

Wink E&M, DID Protocol State

This effect is a quick response by a called system (A=1, B=1) to a calling system that seized the line. The response indicates that the called system is ready to receive address digits.

Yellow Alarm

The yellow alarm indicates that the network has lost its incoming frame synchronization. The DXPT1 board signalling is inactive for approximately three to four seconds during this alarm time, and the system halts all call processing. If the system clears the received yellow alarm within the time limit, the DXPT1 board’s inactive state terminates and call processing continues.

The system sends a yellow alarm to the network if it loses incoming frame synchronization or if the

DXPT1 loses communications to the CPU board. Received and transmitted yellow alarms can not exist at the same time. If such a situation occurs, the system inhibits the transmitted alarm.

ZBTSI (Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange)

Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange is a complex technique to insure that the T1 transmission meets the pulse density requirement. This ZBTSI technique is unpopular in the telephone industy, and the DXPT1 board does not support the feature.



1.1

Introducing The DXPT1

The DXPT1 is a digital interface board supporting up to 24 simultaneous calls on two pairs of wire. The advantages of T1 over single-channel systems are largely:

•

Cost savings (much lower price per channel)

Greater reliability

•

•

Uses less copper wires

Improved voice reproduction

More features available

T1 is over 20 years old but the services have been upgraded during this time (for example, extended superframe).

T1 uses time division multiplexing techniques which multiplexes 24 channels in a stream. Each channel is 8 bits wide. The total is 24 channels x 8 bits = 192 bits for user information. An additional bit is added at the beginning of the stream to identify the particular frame. A frame every 125 msec or 8000/second.

12 frames make up a superframe for standard T1. ESF mode requires 24 frames per superframe. The frame bit in superframe mode is used 100% of the time. The sequence for the frame bits is:

100011011100. The first bit of each frame (frame bit) repeats over and over

| |

A B Of the 12 frames, the 6th and 12th contain the “A” and “B” signalling bits respectively.

The signalling is inband (mixed with the channel). For the two binary bits (A and B), only four combinations are possible (00, 01, 10, 11). These bits are assigned according to the signalling protocol (for example, E&M, DID, Loop Start, and Ground Start). See section 3, “Troubleshooting The Protocol

Layer.”

The span speed is 1.544 MHz (193 x 8000/sec).

For extended superframe (ESF), the frame-related bits in the 24 frames are:

ESF Framing Format mcm0mcm0mcm1mcm0mcm1mcm1...6 frame bits (0 or 1) on frames 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24 (2 Kbps)

12 maintenance bits (m) (4 Kbps)

6 CRC error checking bits (c), if enabled (2 Kbps)

Therefore, all of the 24 non-user bits (frame, maintenance, and error checking) use a bandwidth of 8 Kbps out of the total bandwidth of 1.544 Mbps.

The A and B signalling bits are inserted over the least significant bits (LSB) of each channel in the 6th and 12th frame respectively. This does not change the speech encoding enough to be detected by the user.

The A and B signalling bits are repeated in the 18th and 24th frames.

1.2

Describing The Channel Service Unit (CSU)

The DXPT1 board has a CSU built into the board. This allows direct connection to the network (DS1 level). If a CSU was not built-in, the connection would be DSX-1 and would only transmit 655 feet to the nearest 66-type connector block. The CSU increases signal drive to 1 mile, provides electrical isolation

(1500 volts), and provides automatic line build out (ALBO). The output is set depending on the received signal level strength. When a strong signal is received, the transmit level is -15 dB. When a weak signal is received, the transmit level is 0 dB. This ability to adjust output levels prevents over driving a line repeater in the network, if directly connected. If a customer still wants to add an external CSU, he/she may do so. Normally, the DXPT1 is connected to a central office “smart” jack. The customer’s savings from using the built-in CSU can easily amount to approximately one thousand dollars, at today’s prices.

NOTE: If an external CSU is added by the installer for the purposes described above, and the mode is

Extended Superframe, check the SW2-2 switch for the correct ID, if in conflict.


Troubleshooting The DXPT1 Installation

1.3

Considering Pre-Installation Details

IMI89–207

CAUTION

For operation with the DXP Plus, the T1 board must be Revision B or higher. If the T1 board that you are installing is a lower revision, contact Comdial Technical Services (1–800–366–8224) for advice before you proceed with the installation..

If you are the installer, you must consider the following things to ensure a proper installation.

A. Determine the T1 trunk configuration and communicate this to the central office and/or the network for coordination and assignment of service.

B. Determine whether the dial type is tone or pulse.

C. If DID or E&M protocols are going to be used, determine the number of DTMF receivers needed.

D. If the above protocols are used, coordinate the blocks of numbers assigned with the data base.

E. For DID and E & M protocols, determine the type. Wink start, delay dial, or immediate start are available. Wink start is very popular. If you choose immediate start inbound, select dial pulse over tone dial to ensure that the DXP has enough time to react.

F. AT&T will not supply dial tone unless the customer ordered this feature. However, if you enable the automatic route selection (ARS) feature, it will supply dial tone.

G. Configure an interface cable (8-conductor cable terminated with modular jacks) to connect to the

DXPT1. See section 4 in Installing The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option, IMI89–193 for more instructions. Pins 7 and 8 must be open at the DXP Plus end for DXPT1 Issue 2 while Issue 3 boards and above will not require pins 7 and 8 to be open. A smart-jack often connects pins 7 and 8 to chassis ground. If the chassis ground is connected at the smart-jack, the DXP Plus receive will most likely show loss of signal. (Pins 1 and 2 are shorted to 7 and 8 to allow for an inverted cable to be used.)

H. Order spare boards, if needed.

I.

Make sure you have a synchronization card to install on the auxiliary board.

J.

Determine the optimum DXPT1 board configuration. If a T1 board occupies a universal slot, more stations are possible than by using analog trunk boards.

K. If fractional T1 is being considered, decide whether 8-, 16-, or 24-channel mode is most beneficial.

L. Verify that primary lightning protection (such as gas discharge tubes) is provided where the T1 copper wires enter the building. This should be the case when a smart jack is installed by the central office. Primary protection is a must since the DXPT1 contains only secondary protection.

M. For a DXP-to-DXP application, where no outside network exists, only one synchronization card is required. The designated “master” DXP Plus does not require a synchronization card.



2 Troubleshooting The Physical Layer

SW1, SW2, and the LIU switches must be set up according to the customer’s requirements. See Installing

The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option, IMI89–193 for directions.

2.1

Selecting Functions With DIP Switches SW1-1 Through SW1-8

NOTE: SW1 switch contents will be updated only during a reset operation.

The mode, superframe or extended superframe, is critical. If set wrong, the board will not find frame sync causing the red Sync LED to light.

Yellow alarm mode (SW1-4) is always off, unless the customer is in Japan.

Suppression is defaulted to B7. If digital data is ever presented to the DXPT1 board from a drop and insert multiplexer (mux), or any other means, B8ZS will be required even though the channel is disabled in the DXP Plus. The digital data could be all zeros violating the ones density requirement of 1 in 8 bits in a channel. The network or mux must also have B8ZS enabled. If B8ZS is being sent in any channel the green LED above SW1 will flicker if SW2-6 is enabled. Do not set SW1-5 and SW1-6 to the “no suppression” setting unless approved by Comdial Engineering. The “no suppression” setting is for possible future needs.

SW1-7 and 8 are critical to the channel capacity required.

2.2

Selecting Functions With DIP Switches SW2-1 Through SW2-8

SW2-1 is valid only in the superframe mode. This switch must be “on” if the network is capable of initiating an inband loopback. The switch will not cause a remote loopback but it will look for the command from the network. Leaving the switch “on” does not hurt anything whether the network can perform the loopback operation or not. A reset is not required when changing the switch.

SW2-2 is programmed at reset in the ESF mode only, and it will always be “off” (default) unless the network requires the facility data link messages to be a different ID. The default is customer premise equipment. If the network requests that the messages have a carrier-type header ID, turn the switch “on” and reset the board. This will probably never need to be “on”.

SW2-4 is for reporting CRC errors in the ESF mode, if the network has the ability to support the CRC feature. The default position is “off” to prevent false errors when the error checking is not supported by the network.

SW2-5 is to allow or prevent the sending of facility data link message packets in ESF mode during a preemptive yellow alarm and loopback messages. The ANSI specification allows FDL packets to be stopped during a yellow alarm and loopback, but some customers/networks want the packets to continue.

Switch changes require a reset to be programmed.

SW2-6 defines the meaning of the green LED labeled “B8ZS/COFA.” A reset is not required when changing this switch. When the switch is “off” (default), the LED indicates COFA detected. When the switch is “on,” the LED indicates B8ZS detected. B8ZS detection is handy to verify if the network is sending B8ZS. If so, and the B8ZS suppression is not set (SW1-5, 6), the B8ZS will be seen as bipolar alarms, and recorded as such, even though they are not,

SW2-7, 8 are manual loopback requests for diagnostic reasons. Local loopback verifies the ability of the

DXPT1 to sync on itself to insure frame syncing problems are not caused by the DXPT1 board. These switches are rarely used to enable remote loopback and payload loopback.

NOTE: A local loopback will disable the synchronization card reference causing an automatic switch to the next reference. If only one reference is configured, the system defaults to the DXP Plus fixed oscillator on the services board.



2.3

Selecting Functions With DIP Switches LIU-1 Through LIU-4

There are four LIU switches. The first switch will change the receive sensitivity from -26 dB to -36 dB.

Changing to -36 dB for extra long loops (1 mile) is not recommended unless the DXPT1 will not maintain frame sync. In the -36 dB setting, noise could be a problem because of increased sensitivity.

The LIU-2 switch sets the transmit signal level. The transmit signal level has nothing to do with the audio voice levels. The default is manual “on” and the transmit level is determined by LIU-3 and 4 settings.

LIU-3 and LIU-4 are defaulted “off” which corresponds to 0 dB (strong signal).

For applications where the DXPT1 is directly connected to a nearby repeater, the automatic mode is preferred (LIU-2="off") to keep from over driving the repeater. Repeaters are very sensitive on their inputs. In auto mode, the transmit is determined by the receive level according to the following chart:

LIU-3 and 4 are ignored in auto mode.

IF LEVEL RECEIVED IS

0 to -7.5 dB

-7.5 to -15 dB

-15 to -22.5 dB

-22.5 to -26 dB

LEVEL TRANSMITTED IS

-15 dB

-7.5 dB

-7.5 dB

0 dB

If in auto mode and LIU switch 3 or 4 is changed, a re-sync is required to reset the new setting.

Unplugging the T1 span in and out is an easy way to cause a re-sync.

2.4

Setting Up The DXOPT-SYN Synchronization Card

Program the synchronization card by strapping the two strap blocks on the auxiliary board. A reference clock from each T1 board is presented. You can strap the board so that one T1 clock source is the primary clock reference, and another T1 source is the secondary clock reference. The secondary clock reference is then used in case the primary span fails. If only one T1 board is installed, we recommend that you strap the auxiliary board so that the one T1 source is serving as both the primary and secondary reference.

Otherwise, don’t strap the secondary strapping block. See section 4, Installing The DXPT1 Digital Carrier

Transmission Option, IMI89–193. The green LEDs on the sync card verifies the presence of a reference source. If the green LEDs are off, check the straps, and make sure that the DXPT1 board is not in the local loopback mode.

If one or more of the green LEDs are lit, the sync card’s red LED (Unlocked) should be off. Do not place the sync card’s switch in the manual mode during normal operation. The manual mode switch is for maintenance when you want to force the use of the primary or secondary reference. The automatic mode allows automatic selection of the secondary reference in the event that the primary reference is lost. If the sync card does not synchronize, and the green LEDs are lit, the synchronization card is probably bad. The only other possibility is that the sync card detection circuit on the services board is not working, which is unlikely. If the DXPT1 board is in an expansion cabinet, be sure the interface boards are multilayer (that is, not transparent). Earlier interface boards, of the non-multilayer type, are subject to electrical noise.



3 Troubleshooting The Protocol Layer

Four protocols are supported:

•

E & M

•

DID

•

Ground Start

•

Loop Start

Ground and loop start are subscriber-end only (DXP Plus end) not office-end (network end).

Before starting protocol layer troubleshooting, make sure you have completed all physical layer troubleshooting to ensure that no alarms are occurring and that the DXPT1 board has no red LEDs lit except for the large status LED.

Troubleshooting the protocol layer consists of checking the A and B transmit and receive signalling bits.

Depending on the protocol that is active and on which function is occurring, A and B signalling bits can be a digital one (“1") or a zero (”0"). In some cases, the level (“0" or ”1") doesn’t matter and could be either one (X). These levels are designated by a “0,” “1,” or “X” in the following tables.

When the function involves a user dialing a number with a rotary dial, the signalling bit designated by

“DP” in the following tables, represents the dial pulse (make= 1 ; break = 0). For a ground start protocol, the signalling bit representing a dial pulse will be a digital one (“1") when a tone dial is used in place of a rotary dial.

NOTE: In the table below, an X is a don’t care. Signalling can be a 1 or 0. DP is a dial pulse (make = 1, break = 0).

3.1

Defining The Signalling Bits For The E & M Protocol

FUNCTION

^

OUTGOING CALL

Idle

DXP off-hook

Wink

Wink

Dial pulsing

Wait for ANS

Far end ANSW

INCOMING CALL

Idle

CO goes off-hook

DXP sends wink

DXP after wink

Far end DP

Far end wait FR ANS

DXP answers call

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

A

1

1

0

1

DP

1

1

TRANSMIT

B

1

1

0

1

DP

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

A

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

DP

1

1

RECEIVE

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

B

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

EIA/TIA 464-A

STANDARD

^

Wink on

Wink off

Make=1, Brk=0



3.2

Defining The Signalling Bits For The Direct Inward Dial (DID) Protocol

FUNCTION

INCOMING CALL

Idle

CO goes off-hook

DXP sends wink

DXP after wink

Far end DP

Far end wait FR ANS

DXP answers call

TRANSMIT

A B

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

RECEIVE

A B

0

0

1

1

DP

1

1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

EIA/TIA 464-A

STANDARD

Make=1, Break=0

IMI89–207

3.3

Defining The Signalling Bits For The Ground Start Protocol

FUNCTION

OUTGOING CALL

Idle

PBX grounds ring

PBX grounds tip

PBX removes ring ground

PBX loop closed

Dial pulsing

Dialing CMPL

INCOMING CALL

Idle

CO grounds tip

Ringing interval

PBX presents call

PBX answers call

Normal talking STAT

DISCONNECT PBX

Talking state

PBX opens loop

CO removes tip ground

CO ABANDONS INCOM...

Talking State

CO removes tip ground

PBX opens loop

PBX ABANDONS BEFORE

CO HAS RETURNED TIP

GROUND

PBX waiting tip ground

PBX removes ring ground

TRANSMIT

A B

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

DP

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

RECEIVE

A B

0

1

X

1

X

X

X

X

1

X

1

1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

X

X

EIA/TIA 464-A

STANDARD

“1" vs DP for DTMF

Idle state

CO hangs up

Idle state



3.4

Defining The Signalling Bits For The Loop Start Protocol

FUNCTION

OUTGOING CALL

Idle

PBX loop closed

PBX pulsing

Dialing CMPL

INCOMING CALL

Idle

CO sends ring

Interval between ring

PBX presents call

PBX answers call

Normal talking STAT

DISCONNECT PBX

PBX opens loop

Idle

CO ABANDONS INCOM...

CO applies ring

Interval between ring

CO abandons

PBX stop presenting

TRANSMIT

A B

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

DP

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

RECEIVE

A B

1

1

1

0

X

X

X

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

EIA/TIA 464-A

STANDARD

Waiting for dial tone

“1" vs DP for DTMF



4 Using The Diagnostic Function

The diagnostic function on the DXPT1 board provides a method for obtaining information about the T1 operation. You can do this either on-site or from a remote location by sending and receiving coded messages. Remote operation is described in section 4.8.

4.1

Understanding The Diagnostic Switches And Indicators

The diagnostic portion of the DXPT1 board contains eight DIP switches, eight green LEDs, and a “clear” pushbutton for clearing functions. Set the DIP switches to request certain T1 system information. When testing from a remote location, using a computer and modem, you can similate the switch settings by sending a coded message.

The system responds to your request for information by lighting certain LEDs to provide you with the requested information. If you are testing from a remote location, the system responds by sending a coded message that similates the lighted LEDs.

Use the clear pushbutton to stop any counting function

(denoted by the LEDs sequencing) and reset the counter.

The diagnostic port is a monitor mode only access. You cannot cause harm to the equipment by moving the switches or pushing the clear pushbutton. Leaving any of the switches on will not cause any operational problems.

Since the operation is cryptic, the customer normally doesn’t use the diagnostic monitor. Functions of the port are to simplify problem solving in the field

Clear

Switch 1

Off

Switch 8

On

LED 1

LED 8

T1005

4.1.1 Determining Channel Number

The letters ABCDE in switch positions 4 through 8 are

DXPT1 Diagnostic Switches And Indicators used to designate a channel number in many of the tables used on the following pages. See the table below for the relationship between the letters ABCDE and channel numbers 1 through 24. (Example, a

DIP switch setting of 10100101 requests trunk assignments on channel 6).

CHANNEL A

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

B

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

C

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

D

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

E CHANNEL A

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

B

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

C

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

D

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

E CHANNEL A

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

B

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

C

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

D

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

E

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON



4.2

Requesting Cold Start Information

When the DXP-T1 system is turned on, internal self-tests are run to determine the condition of the system. When you use this request, you are asking the system to provide you with the results of these tests. Upon making the cold start information request, the system verifies the following.

• operating mode is superframe (SF) or extended superframe (ESF),

•

FDL daughterboard (used for ESF) is installed on the T1 board and okay or not installed (or defective),

• channel capacity currently selected is 8, 16, or 24 channels,

• static RAM is okay or has read/write errors,

• internal CPU RAM is okay or has read/write errors.

4.2.1

Setting The DIP Switches For Cold Start Information

Set the DIP switches as shown in the following table. Switch 1 is the top switch. When the switch is moved to the right, it is turned on. The hex code shown is used for remote operation only.

SWITCH SETTINGS TYPE OF REQUEST

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Provide results of all self-tests run during system start-up (cold start).

ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

HEX

CODE

E1

^

4.2.2

Reading The Cold Start Information From The LEDs

The Table below shows the cold start information that is revealed by the LEDs. LED 1 is at the top.

LEDs

1

OFF

2

OFF

ON

3

OFF

4

OFF

ON

5

OFF

OFF

ON

6

OFF

ON

OFF

7

OFF

ON

8

LED DEFINITIONS

^

Not used

SF mode

ESF mode

Always off

Either in SF mode or FDL board missing or bad

FDL board recognized (ESF only)

Selected channel capacity is 24



Static RAM has read/write errors

Static RAM is okay

Internal CPU RAM has read/write errors

Internal CPU RAM is okay

OFF

ON

Example: If you see the following LED light pattern, you can determine the cold start results from the above

LED definitions. (For remote testing, the lFDL board recognized system would send hex code 53.) m = LED off and | = LED on m

| = ESF mode m

| = FDL board recognized m = 24-channel m capacity

| = static RAM fully operational

| = internal CPU RAM fully operational



4.3

Requesting Information On Received Signal Strength

When you use this request, you are asking the system to provide the signal strength of its received signals.

Upon making the received signal strength request, the system supplies you with the following information:

• the range in dB of the received signals.

4.3.1

Setting The DIP Switches For Received Signal Strength Information

Set the DIP switches as shown in the following table. Switch 1 is the top switch. When the switch is moved to the right, it is turned on. The hex code shown is used for remote operation only.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Provide the dB range of the received signal strength.

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

HEX

CODE

FF

^

4.3.2

Reading The Received Signal Strength Information From The LEDs

The Table below shows the received signal strength information that is revealed by the LEDs. LED 1 is at the top.

1 2 3

LEDs 1 through 4 not used (off)

4

LEDs

5

OFF

OFF

OFF

6

OFF

OFF

ON

7

OFF

ON

ON

ON ON ON

LED DEFINITIONS

8

ON

ON

ON

ON

-7.5 to -15 dB (medium signal)

-15 to -22.5 dB (weak signal)

-22 dB and below (spec is to -26 dB)

(very weak)

0 to - 7.5 dB (strong signal)

HEX

CODE

^

01

03

07

0F

NOTE: If signal is very weak from a long span of a mile or more, and frame synchronization is not being maintained, turn DIP switch LIU-1 on.



4.4

Requesting Information On Switch Settings

You can determine how particular DIP switches on the DXPT1 board are set by using one of the following requests. Depending on which request you make, the system supplies you with the following information:

•

DIP switch settings for SW1,

•

DIP switch settings for SW2,

•

DIP switch settings for LIU.

4.4.1

Requesting Information On DIP Switch Settings

Set the diagnostic DIP switches as shown in the following table. Switch 1 is the top switch. When the switch is moved to the right, it is turned on. The hex code shown is used for remote operation only.


1 2 3 4 5

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF OFFO

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

6

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

7

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

8

ON

ON

ON

ON

Provide the DIP switch settings for SW1

Provide the DIP switch settings for SW1

Provide the DIP switch settings for LIU

Provide the DIP switch settings for the diagnostic switches (the diagnostic LEDs simply “mirror” the switch settings; that is,

LEDs 5 and 8 should be lit).

HEX

CODE

01

03

07

09

4.4.2

Reading The DIP Switch Settings Information From The LEDs

The diagnostic LEDs “mirror” the switch settings for the DIP switches requested. For example, if LED 1 is on, then switch 1 is on for the requested DIP switches. If LED 1 is off, then switch 1 is off, and so forth.

When requesting information on the LIU DIP switch settings, the system replies via LEDs 1 through 4.

LEDs 5 through 8 are not used in this application.



4.5

Requesting AB Signalling

When you use this request, you are asking the system to reveal the A and B bits. Upon making the AB signalling request, the system supplies you with the following information:

•

A bit transmitted to the CO,

•

B bit transmitted to the CO,

•

A bit received from the CO,

•

B bit received from the CO.

4.5.1

Setting The DIP Switches To Request AB Signalling

Set the DIP switches as shown in the following table. Switch 1 is the top switch. When the switch is moved to the right, it is turned on. Use switches 4 through 8 (designated in the table by A through E) to select the channel you want to test (1 through 24). See the table in section 4.1.1 for the relationship between the 24 different letter groups and channel numbers. For remote operation, determine the corresponding hex code from Table 1.

SWITCH SETTINGS

1 2 3 4

OFF OFF ON A

5

B

6

C

TYPE OF REQUEST

7 8

D E

Provide AB signalling on the channel designated by ABCDE. See section 4.1.1.

HEX

CODE see

Table

1

4.5.2

Reading The AB Signalling Information From The LEDs

The Table below shows samples of the AB signalling information that is revealed by the LEDs. LEDs 5 through 8 are off. LED 1 is at the top.

1

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

2 3 4

LEDs

5

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

6 7 8 LED DEFINITIONS

LEDs 5-8 are off Transmitting A bit to central office

Transmitting B bit to central office

Receiving A bit from central office

Receiving B bit from central office

HEX

CODE

80

40

20

10



4.6

Requesting Information On Trunk Assignments

Make this request to receive information on the trunk assignments that have been made. Upon making this request, the system provides you with the following information:

• trunk type (ground start, DID, E&M, or loop start),

• dial type (rotary or tone),

• signalling protocol (immediate, wink, delay).

4.6.1

Setting The DIP Switches For Requesting Trunk Assignment Information

Set the DIP switches as shown in the following table to request trunk assignment information. Use switches 4 through 8 (designated in the table by A through E) to select the channel you want to test

(1 through 24). See the table in section 4.1.1 for the relationship between the 24 different letter groups and channel numbers. For remote operation, determine the corresponding hex code from Table 1. Switch

1 is the top switch.

1 2

SWITCH SETTINGS

3

ON OFF ON

4

A

5

B

6

C

TYPE OF REQUEST

7

D

8 Provide information about trunk

E assignments on the channel specified by the letters ABCDE (see the table in section

4.1.1).

HEX

CODE see

Table

1

4.6.2

Reading The Trunk Assignment Information From The LEDs

The Table below shows the trunk assignment information that is revealed by the LEDs. LED 1 is at the top.

1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

2

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

3

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

4

LEDs

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

5

ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF

6

OFF

OFF

7 8

LED DEFINITIONS

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Ground start

DID

E&M

Loop start

Tone dial

Not used

Wink start

Delay start

Immediate start

Not used

No trunk assignments made



4.7

Requesting Information About Channel State

Use this request to determine the state of the channel specified in the request command. Upon making this request, the system provides you with the following information:

• channel state (idle or busy).

4.7.1

Setting The DIP Switches For Requesting Channel State Information

Set the DIP switches as shown in the following table to request the state of the channel specified in the request command. Use switches 4 through 8 (designated in the table by A through E) to select the desired channel.(1 through 24). See the table in section 4.1.1 for the relationship between the 24 different letter groups and channel numbers. For remote operation, determine the corresponding hex code from Table 1.

Switch 1 is the top switch.

1 2

SWITCH SETTINGS

3

ON ON OFF

4

A

5

B

6

C

TYPE OF REQUEST

7

D

8 Provide information about the state of the

E channel specified by the letters ABCDE (see the table in section 4.1.1).

HEX

CODE see

Table

1

4.7.2

Reading The Channel State Information From The LEDs

The Table below shows the channel state information that is revealed by the LEDs. LED 1 is at the top.

1 2 3

LEDs

4 5 6 7 8

LED DEFINITIONS

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON The selected channel is in the idle state.

HEX

CODE

03



4.8

Using The Hexadecimal Codes For Remote Diagnostics

You can similate the diagnostic DIP switch settings, that are usually made on-site, by sending the following code sequence via modem to the remote DXPT1 board: tkmsg<space>(valid port number)<space>7B,(hex code)

The hexadecimal value that you use for the field code corresponds to a bit pattern that you are using to similate DIP switch settings. For example, to similate a switch setting of 11100001 (switches 1, 2, 3, and

8 on) use hex code E1 in the field position. (Switch 1 is the top switch as you look at the front edge of the

DXPT1 board. The switches are “on” when you move them to the right.).

After you have interrogated the DXPT1 board by transmitting a valid diagnostic code to it, the DXPT1 responds with a hex code that similarily represents a bit pattern that you can find in Table 1. This bit pattern represents the diagnostic LEDs located adjacent to the DIP switches on the DXPT1 board. For example, let’s assume you received the hex code 53 in response to a request for cold start information.

Since 53 (hex) represents a bit pattern of 01010011, it follows that LEDs 2, 4, 7, and 8 are lit. (LED 1 is the top LED in the group of eight on the DXPT1 board.) See the example in section 4.2.2.

Table 1. Hexadecimal Codes Related To Bit Patterns

Hex

Code

Bit Pattern

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

01 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1

0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0

0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

Bit Pattern

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0

0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

Hex

Code

B8

B9

BA

BB

BC

BD

BE

BF

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

Hex

Code

Bit Pattern

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0

1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1

1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0

1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

78

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

68

69

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

Bit Pattern

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1

1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

Hex

Code

F8

F9

FA

FB

FC

FD

FE

FF

F0

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

E8

E9

EA

EB

EC

ED

EE

EF

E0

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6

E7

D8

D9

DA

DB

DC

DD

DE

DF

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7



5 Selecting The T1 PAD Settings

The system pad settings that you select through the DXP Plus system programming are very important for the correct audio level to be transmitted and received and for echo suppression.

5.1

Setting T1 Transmit Level

For the older software, set to normal (uses low, very-low, normal, high, very-high settings). For software using Gain1, Gain2, Nominal, Loss1, Loss2, Loss3, Loss4, and Loss5, use Nominal setting.

5.2

Setting T1 Receive Level

For the older software, set to Very-Low. For the Loss/Gain software, set to Loss4. If echo problems occur, try Loss5.

6 Solving T1 Problems

See the following table for T1 problems you could encounter and their possible causes.

PROBLEM

Signalling bits are not being received properly

(no seize) or the network is not “seeing” the seize.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Associated multiplexer (mux) equipment may be defective if installed between the DXP and the central office (CO).

When the T1 option is installed in a DXP system, the DXP shows massive seizes on the inbound channels.

Incorrect trunk assignments. For example, ground start idle bits will cause seizes on DID and E&M trunk assignments.

The DXPT1 is seizing outward A=1 and B=1 and channel is in the idle state.

Channel not assigned and not disabled. All

LEDs will be off upon making a request for trunk assignment information (see section

4.6.2).

The SIG red LED on the DXPT1 board is lit indicating no receive signal.

- If new install, cabling may be reversed.

- Wiring to DXPT1 board may be defective

- DXPT1 board may be defective. Verify by installing local loopback.

Bipolar alarms are indicated when T1 option is first installed.

- Only one receive wire connected. Check cable.

- Noise sources or lightning.

The SLIP red LED on the DXPT1 board is lit indicating frame slips are occurring.

DXOPT-SYN card may not be locked. There should not be any red LEDs on this card lit.

Verify presence of primary or secondary sources by the green LEDs lit on this card.

Echos are heard.

- Two- to four-wire hybrid conversions have been made. Cut in echo suppressors to eliminate echos on calls over 600 miles and inform the network.

- Pad setting may be incorrect causing acoustical feedback (see section 5, PAD

Settings). 0 dB (or -3 dB) is recommended for transmitted data and -9 dB at an industry standard telephone (IST).


IMI89–207

A.

Appendix A


Appendix A consists of two tables showing superframe and extended superframe format. The information for these tables is from the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) specification

T1.403-1989.

Table 2. Superframe Format

Frame

Number

10

11

12

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

Bit

Number

0

193

386

579

772

965

1158

1351

1544

1737

1930

2123

F Bits

Term

Frame

(F

1

)

1

—

0

—

1

—

0

—

1

—

0

—

Signal

Frame

(F

2

)

—

1

—

1

—

—

0

—

0

1

—

0

NOTES:

(1) Frame 1 transmitted first.

(2) Frames 6 and 12 are denoted signalling frames.

(3) Option T- Traffic (bit 8 not used for robbed-bit signalling).

Bit Use In Each

Time Slot

Traffic SignalT T

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-7

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-7

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

—

8 signalling Bit

Use Options signalling

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Channel

—

A

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

B



Table 3. Extended Superframe Format

F Bits

Frame

Number

19

20

21

22

23

24

14

15

16

17

18

7

8

9

5

6

3

4

1

2

10

11

12

13

Bit

Number

0

193

386

579

772

965

1158

1351

1544

1737

1930

2123

2316

2509

2702

2895

3088

3281

3474

3667

3860

4053

4246

4439

FPS

—

1

—

—

—

1

—

—

0

—

—

—

—

—

0

—

—

—

—

0

—

—

1

—

DL

NOTES:

(1) Frame 1 transmitted first.

(2) Frames 6, 12, 18, and 24 are denoted signalling frames.

(3) FPS = Framing Pattern Sequence (...001011...)

(4) DL = 4KBits/s Data Link (Message Bits m)

(5) CRC - CRC6 Cyclic Redundancy Check (Bits C1-C6)

(6) Option T = Traffic (Bit 8 not used for Robbed-Bit signalling)

(7) Option 2 = 2-State signalling (Channel A)

(8) Option 4 = 4-State signalling (Channels A and B)

(9) Option 16 = 16-State signalling (Channels A, B, C, and D) m

— m

— m

—

— m

— m

— m

— m

— m m

— m

—

— m

— m

—

C

1

—

—

—

C

2

—

—

—

C

3

—

—

—

C

4

—

—

—

C

5

—

—

—

C

—

—

6

Bit Use In Each

Time Slot

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-7

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-7

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-7

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-8

1-7

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

—

8

—

—

—

—

—

8 signalling Bit

Use Options

CRC Traffic Signal T 2 4 16

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— A A A

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— A B B

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— A A C

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— — — —

— A B D

IMI89–207


Understanding The System Diagnostics for the

DXP Plus Digital Communications System

1.0 Introducing System Diagnostics

The digital communications system provides you with the option of doing several different types of diagnostic checks on the system. This publication details the types of diagnostics and their functions.

NOTE: You should perform all diagnostic tests on an idle system and under the direction of a Comdial technician.

A busy system could produce invalid test results. Because there are numerous items that could contribute to a failure of any of these tests, Comdial assistance is required in interpreting the results of the diagnostic tests.

R

Diagnostics

1. Initialize Diagnostic Data

2. ROM Checksum Verification

3. Scratch RAM Test

4. Non-Volatile RAM Test

5. Time Switch Memory Test

6. Main Cabinet DTMF Receiver Test

7. Expansion II Cabinet DTMF Receiver Test

8. Expansion III Cabinet DTMF Receiver Test

9. AUX. Board DTMF Receiver Test

10. Speaker Coefficients

11. CPU Board Dip Switches

▲

PUSH

CONT BRIGHT

Viewing The Diagnostics Screen

POWER ON

OFF





IMI89–239.01

5/96

IMI89–239 Understanding The System Diagnostics

2.0 Defining System Diagnostics

2.1

Initialize Diagnostic Data

This option clears all previous diagnostic test results from memory.

2.2

ROM Checksum Verification

The ROM checksum test calculates and displays a checksum to test the integrity of the system software builds

(located in the flash ROM).

If the system passes the test, it displays Passed on the screen. If the system fails the test, it displays Failed along with the expected and actual checksum value.

2.3

Scratch RAM Test

This test checks the integrity of the scratch RAM area by writing and reading words in memory. The test works by writing a known pattern, “55AA” into memory and then reading the area of memory back. The system then writes and reads a second known pattern, “AA55.” This algorithm checks every byte in the the scratch RAM area.

If an error occurs, the system displays a message stating that the test failed. Scratch RAM is considered the working area of memory for the DXP’s microprocessor. This area of memory is “volatile,” which means that any data in this area is lost when the system loses power.

2.4

NonVolatile RAM test

This test checks the integrity of the NOV-RAM area of memory. The NOV-RAM area of memory is write protected and backed up by super capacitors on the DXP’s memory board. The programmed database and SMDRs are stored in this area of memory. This test uses the same write/read algorithm that the scratch RAM test employs.

2.5

Time Switch Memory Test

This test checks all 560 timeslots with a write/read algorithm pattern similar to that of the scratch/NOV-RAM test. All voice, data, and tones that pass into and out of the DXP pass through the timeswitch.

2– Understanding The System Diagnostics

Understanding The System Diagnostics IMI89–239

2.6

DTMF Receiver Tests

(Main Cabinet, Expansion II Cabinet, and Expansion III Cabinet)

This diagnostic test checks the functionality of the DTMF receivers located in the cabinet under test. The test performs its check by connecting DTMF tones 0-9, ✳, and # through the timeswitch and confirming that the correct tone was recognized by the receiver.

The system displays the number of each tested DTMF receiver in the cabinet along with a message that tells whether the receiver passed or failed the test. While the actual displayed numbers for the DTMF receivers vary depending upon how many receiver cards that you have installed in the system, the displayed numbers for each cabinet reflect DTMF receiver locations in that cabinet. These locations begin with the receiver card located in the upper slot on the leftmost host board, proceed to the lower card slot on that host board, and then progress to the upper card slot on the next host board to the right of the first.

You can install receiver cards in any of the locations shown in the following chart.

Receiver Card Location

Main Cabinet Auxiliary Board

Services Board (see note)

Upper Expansion Cabinet Interface Board

Upper Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 1

Upper Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 2

Lower Expansion Cabinet Interface Board (see note)

Lower Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 1

Lower Expansion Cabinet Auxiliary Board 2

CPU Board (no receiver card required)

NOTE: If you place two receiver cards in the lower two positions of the Services board, you must take specific programming action (Services DTMF Highway) to enable their use. If you do this, you can add only one reveiver card to the Lower Expansion Cabinet Interface board.

2.7

Speaker Coefficients

Certain models of Comdial digital telephones have performance characteristics that can be modified by using this section of diagnostics. Do not attempt to modify any of the values found in this section unless you have been directed to do so by a Comdial technician; doing so could severely impact the performance of the associated telephone. Once modified, these values remain in the telephone’s permanent memory and are not affected by a master clear.

Understanding The System Diagnostics –3

IMI89–239 Understanding The System Diagnostics

2.8

CPU Board and DIP Switches

This test displays the current settings of the eight DIP switches on the CPU board. This screen updates simultaneously as the switches are changed. This diagnostic is useful for determining the status of the switches from a remote location.

The following paragraphs discuss the currently used switches:

Switch 1—Fixes serial port baud rates to known values

Port 1

Port 2

Baud In

9600

300

Baud Out

9600

300

8

7

Data Bits

1

2

Stop Bits Parity

None

None

Switches 2 through 6 —Comdial Engineers reserve these switches for future design needs.

Flow Ctrl..

None

None

Switch 7—Initializes DXP Modem—sets auto answer, for example. Switch 7 should always be on to ensure that the system will re-initialize the modem after a loss of power or reset. The standard Hayes*-compatible initialize string that the system sends is: AT SO=1 M0 Q1 E0 . Programmers can alter this string if needed through system programming.

*Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products.

Switch 8—Used for software upgrades. At initial power-up after a software up-grade, this switch causes the system to automatically detect the up-graded software and perform a master clear function. If someone up-grades the software to a different revision and this switch is not ON at the power-up, the system will not run.




R



QuickQ

DXP

Automatic Call Distributor

Technical Manual

R


The QuickQ digital voice announcer (DVA) contains incidental radio frequency generating circuitry and, if not installed and used properly, may cause interference to radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and television reception; in which case the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient the television or radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the DXP, the individual telephone stations, and the radio or TV with respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful: “How to Identify and

Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems.” This booklet is available from the Government Printing Office,

Washington D.C. 20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.





CAUTION


ii

IMI66-109 Table Of Contents

Table Of Contents

Section 1 Introducing The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Understanding The Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Listing The Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Defining The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Describing The QuickQ Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

Detailing The QuickQ Basic Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Understanding The System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

The Telephone Switching System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

The Digital Voice Announcer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

The Central Call Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

The ACD Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Section 2 Installing The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Reviewing The Installation Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

QuickQ Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

DVA Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Voice Card Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Additional Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Tools And Hardware Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Mounting The Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

System 3 Wiring The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

Connecting The Personal Computer To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Connecting The DXP To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Connecting AC Power To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Reviewing The System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Section 4 Programming The DXP Digital Communications System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Programming The DXP System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Programming the DXP Line Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Programming The Serial Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Programming The Master Channel 1 Voice Port Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Programming The Master Channel 2 Voice Port Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Programming The DVA Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Programming The Supervisor And Agent Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Button Mapping The Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Button Mapping The Master Channel Voice Port Stations And The DVA Stations . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Button Mapping The Agent And Supervisor Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Contents – iii

Table Of Contents IMI66-109

Section 5 Setting Up The Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Using QuickQ With A Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Performing Initial Programming For QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Signing Into The Technician Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Programming The OAI Number And Master Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Adding Lines To QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Deleting Lines From QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Moving The QuickQ Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Programming The QuickQ Voice Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Programming The QuickQ Printer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Programming The External Overflow Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Detailing The QuickQ Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Section 6 Reviewing The QuickQ DVA Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Reviewing The DVA Chassis Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

DVA Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

IDE Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Floppy Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Reviewing The Voice Channel Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Reviewing The I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Section 7 Testing And Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Testing The DVA Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Testing Voice Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Testing The QuickQ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

During Initial QuickQ Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

During QuickQ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Examining The Enable QuickQ Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Examining The Agent Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Examining The Line Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Examining The Voice Port Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Section 8 Installing The New Voice Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Appendix 1 Using QuickQ With A Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1-1

Window Graphic In QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1-2

Appendix 2 Reviewing The Programming Road Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-1

Publication Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DX-1

Contents – iv

IMI66-109 Table Of Contents

List Of Illustrations

Figure 1-1. Overviewing The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Figure 3-1. Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To 9-Pin EIA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Figure 3-2. Connecting The Personal Computer To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

Figure 3-3. Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To 25-Pin EIA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

Figure 3-4. Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-5. Connecting The DXP To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Figure 3-6. Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 5-1. Viewing The Error Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Figure 5-2. Viewing The System Access Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Figure 5-3. Viewing The Supervisor/manager Sign-in Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Figure 5-4. Viewing The Technician Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Figure 5-5. Viewing The System-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Figure 5-6. Viewing The ACD Line-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Figure 5-7. Viewing The LCD Line-Setup Add Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Figure 5-8. Viewing The Edit QuickQ Line-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Figure 5-9. Viewing The Voice Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Figure 5-10. Viewing The Printer-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Figure 5-11. Viewing The Overflow Extension Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Figure 6-1. Reviewing The QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Figure 6-2. Reviewing The QuickQ Voice Channel Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Figure 6-3. Reviewing The QuickQ I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

Figure A1-1. Using The Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-1

Figure A1-2. Viewing A Typical QuickQ Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1-2

Contents – v

Introducing The QuickQ System IMI66–109, Section One

Section 1

Introducing The QuickQ System

Understanding The Manual Organization

Section 1: Introducing The QuickQ

System—Provides general information on QuickQ and system requirements.

Section 2: Installing The QuickQ

System—Provides site planning considerations and instructions on the mounting of the Digital Voice

Announcer (DVA).

Section 3: Wiring The QuickQ System—Provides wiring information for the voice channels on the DVA, PC to DVA and

DXP to PC.

Section 4: Programming The DXP Digital

Communications System—Provides the

Comdial programming requirements.

Section 5: Setting Up The Personal

Computer—Provides the information on the installation of the QuickQ software into the PC and the initial programming of the QuickQ.

Section 6: Reviewing The QuickQ

Components—Provides the description of the QuickQ DVA components.

Section 7: Testing and Troubleshooting—Provides the test procedure to setup QuickQ and provides information on troubleshooting problems on QuickQ.

Section 8: Installing The New Voice Channel

Cards—Provides information on how to install additional cards.

Appendix 1: Using QuickQ With A

Mouse—Describes mouse usage with the QuickQ system.

Appendix 2: Reviewing The QuickQ Programming

Road Map.

Listing The Related Publications

Additional publications that are applicable to the QuickQ automatic call distributor and DXP digital communication system include the following publications.

•

GCA70-271 QuickQ DXP System

Manager’s Guide

•

GCA70-278 QuickQ DXP Agent’s User Guide

•

GCA70-302 QuickQ DXP Supervisor’s User Guide

•

DXLIT-016 DXP Digital Communications System

System Reference Manual

•

DXLIT–028 DXP Plus Digital Communications

System Reference Manuals

Introducing The QuickQ System 1 – 1

IMI66–109, Section One Introducing The QuickQ System

Defining The QuickQ System

QuickQ is a fully integrated Automatic Call

Distribution System for Comdial DXP digital communications system.

An Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) is the single most important cost-saving communications tool available to the manager of an incoming call center.

QuickQ is designed to handle a large volume of incoming calls as efficiently and economically as possible. QuickQ processes incoming calls by distributing the call to available agents on an equitable basis or by playing announcements to the calling party until an agent is available. Having installed QuickQ in a call center, the speed, efficiency, and management control usually results in a 20 to 40 percent increase in the productivity of the agent force, and a 10 to 20 second decrease in the average speed of call answering.

The four primary functions of QuickQ are as follows:

1.

It provides a waiting queue to ensure that callers are answered in the order that they are received and

2.

with the appropriate priority. Because of this, the system handles calls in a more timely and efficient manner.

The system can provide a number of pre-recorded announcements to play to the calling customers, if no agent is available, to entice the caller to wait in

3.

4.

queue.

The system distributes the workload evenly among the agents to allow an equitable assignment of duties, which in turn facilitates greater productivity.

QuickQ provides comprehensive statistical management reports to allow efficient control of agent assignments and lines.

The advent of microprocessor technology has allowed the cost of ACD systems to be more affordable for small to medium call centers. Hence, ACD systems are becoming increasingly popular with call centers with under 40 agents.

1 – 2 Introducing The QuickQ System

Introducing The QuickQ System IMI66–109, Section One

Describing The QuickQ Functions

QuickQ is a PC-based system for redirecting of incoming calls to a human operator or to a digital voice announcement until a human operator is available. QuickQ interfaces to the Comdial DXP digital communications system through the Open

Architecture Interface (OAI) to acquire information and control the ACD functions. The message channels of the QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer

(DVA) interface to the DXP through the station port(s). This allows pre-recorded messages to be played out to calling parties. The QuickQ PC communicates with the DVA through an RS-232 serial communication link. This communication link allows the PC to control the messages being played on the voice channels.

Detailing The QuickQ Basic Options

QuickQ is available in two packages. The station capacity of the two packages differ but the feature availability of each package is the same. Both packages include real-time status display screen of information that the system continuously updates every three seconds. This display allows supervisors to quickly identify conditions such as the call-waiting time. The packages also include a comprehensive management reporting scheme that presents information in both numerical and graphic format.

Lines

Messages

Real Time

Maximum Agents

Package A Package B

64

16

Yes

Groups 16

Number of Active Agents 12

48

64

16

Yes

16

48

250


IMI66–109, Section One Introducing The QuickQ System

Understanding The System Components

The Telephone Switching System

QuickQ is an add-on application, designed specifically for Comdial DXP and DXP Plus digital communications systems. The DXP or DXP Plus equipment performs the telephone call switching functions .

The Digital Voice Announcer

The QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer (DVA) is a stand alone voice processing system designed to directly interface with the DXP’s station ports. It provides voice announcements, recording and playback under the control of the Central Call

Processing unit. In a busy call center, when all agents are busy, the DVA intercepts incoming calls and plays out pre-recorded voice announcements.

The Central Call Processor

The Central Call Processor is the brain of the QuickQ.

It is a DOS-based, 486-type computer system that controls and monitors call traffic throughout the

QuickQ system with special-purpose software programs. Refer to Section 2 for a detailed description of the Central Call Processor hardware requirements.

The ACD Telephone

QuickQ is a fully integrated ACD system for Comdial digital telephones. For best results, use LCD speakerphones for the ACD functions and operations.

Their two line display shows the call-processing information and operator function prompts and their three interactive buttons allow selections of QuickQ options and features.

1 – 4 Introducing The QuickQ System


Central

Office

Lines

DXP

Digital

Communications

System

Station ports

Serial

Data port

IMI66–109, Section One

Digital LCD speakerphones with interactive buttons

Serial Data port

Serial Data port

QuickQ

Digital

Voice

Announcer

Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print

Screen

SysRq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

~

‘

Tab

Cap Lock

Ctrl

Shift

1

Q

@

2

A

W

Z

Alt

#

3

E

S

X

$

4

D

R

C

% ^

5 6

T

F G

&

7

Y U

H

V B

J

*

( )

8 9

I O

K L

P

_ +

0 - =

{ }

[ ]

’

N M

< > ?

/ Shift

Alt Ctrl

Back Space

|

\

Enter

Insert Home

Delete End

PgUp

PgDn

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Num

Lock

4 5

2

8

/

0

Ins

6

*

.

Del

Scroll

Lock

+

Enter

Central Call Processor

CAJS031A

Figure 1-1. Overviewing The QuickQ System


Installing The QuickQ System IMI66–109, Section Two

Section 2

Installing The QuickQ System

This section provides the basic hardware installation requirements for the QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer

(DVA).

Reviewing The Installation Check List

Review this list of QuickQ System components, suggested additional supplies, and required tools and hardware.

QuickQ Package Contents

The QuickQ packages (product codes ACDXPKA and

ACDXPKB) include the following items:

•

Installation cable kit

(product PK030-000) that includes the following packaged assemblies:

•

Central Call Processor equipped as follows:

—DOS-based personal computer with DOS operating system and 2 megabytes of memory,

—VGA color monitor,

—hard and floppy disk drives with appropriate controller boards,

—bus mouse,

—101-key extended keyboard,

—memory manager software.

•

OAI security key

•

QuickQ software disks

•

QuickQ PROTECKEY,

—Navy Blue (ACDXPKA—software A),

—Gray (ACDXPKB—software B),

Package Item

PK030-001

ACD, Mod. Jack

PK030-002

ACD, DB25S

Contents

(1) Standard six-position modular jack

(1) Standard three-pair line cord—six wires with the standard roll in the pin out from one end to the other


(1) Modular to 25-pin EIA adapter with female DB25 connector

(1) Standard three-pair line cord—six wires with the standard roll in the pin out from one end to the other •

QuickQ literature package

—GCA70-278 Agent’s User Guide

—GCA70-302 Supervisor’s User Guide

—GCA70-271 System Mamager’s Guide

—IMI66-109 Technical Manual

—GCA40-110 Warranty/Registration Card

PK030-003

ACD, DB9S




When you order the QuickQ package, you will also need to make a separate order for the current DXP or

DXP Plus software and memory. Those product codes are as follows:

•

ACDXP–KIT for DXP

—DXP Software card

•

ACPLS–KIT for DXP Plus

—DXP Plus software

—DXP Plus memory board

DVA Package Contents

The DVA package (product code

ACDXP-DVA16-100) is separately available and includes the QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer (DVA).

The DVA package also includes a 66-type connector block that is factory-connected to a 25-pair cable. The cable is terminated with a 50-pin D connector that mates with a connector on the DVA.

Installing The QuickQ System 2 – 1

IMI66–109, Section Two Installing The QuickQ System

Voice Card Package Contents

The DVA voice cards (product code ACDXP-VCC-4) that you install in the DVA are also separately available.

Additional Materials Required

You will need to supply the following items:

25-pair cable and 6-wire cable for house wiring,

66-type station connector block, four or eight foot section of 3/4–inch thick plywood backboard, four #8 x 3/4–inch wood screws,

AC power surge protector (recommended).

Tools And Hardware Required

•

Fasteners—wood screws, toggle bolts, or -wall anchors

•

Screwdriver—to match fasteners

•


•

Connecting tool—for fastening wires to a 66-type connector block

•


Mounting Considerations

Attach the DVA cabinet vertically to any sturdy, flat surface or vertically rack-mounted if desired. Vertical mounting promotes proper convection air current flow for cooling purposes.

Because of the current listing requirements of UL

1459, the length of the AC line cord on the equipment cabinet is a maximum length of five feet; therefore, the cabinet must be located within four feet of a proper electrical outlet. The equipment requires a dedicated

117VAC 15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire ground, supplied to a standard electrical outlet (NEMA

5-15R).

Be sure that the mounting location is secure, dry, provides adequate ventilation, and is not exposed to direct sunlight or a strong magnetic field. Be sure that the temperature range of the location is within 32-122 degrees F (0-35 degrees C), and the relative humidity is less than 90 percent non-condensing.

If the mounting surface is damp or if it is of a concrete or masonry material, you must attach a backboard to the mounting surface to be used for equipment mounting. Suitable mounting backboards are available commercially or you can construct one using

3/4-inch plywood cut to size.

2 – 2 Installing The QuickQ System

Installing The QuickQ System IMI66–109, Section Two

Mounting The Equipment

Typically, you should mount the QuickQ DVA cabinet near the DXP installation; however, you can locate the

DVA cabinet at a maximum distance of 1000 feet from the DXP if you use #24 twisted-pair wiring. You must locate the Central Call Processor (personal computer) within 500 feet of the DXP and DVA cabinets. If you exceed this distance, you must install limited distance modems at either end of your cable run.


2. If a backboard is required at the mounting location, attach it securely to provide a stable mounting surface for the equipment.

3. Hold the DVA cabinet against the mounting surface, level it, and mark the location of the two upper mounting holes.

4. Drill holes in the mounting surface of a proper size to accommodate the hardware being used.

If necessary, prepare these holes with inserts, anchors or other attachment devices as dictated by the type of mounting surface.

5. Insert the two top screws into the mounting surface and tighten them to within approximately 3/16-inch of the surface.

6. Hang the cabinet on the top screws using the mounting holes located on the rear of the cabinet.

Note that these holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end. This feature allows the cabinet to snap down on the screws to secure the mounting when the cabinet is hung on them.

7. Install the remaining two mounting screws through the lower mounting holes in the DVA cabinet and into the mounting surface.

8. Tighten all four screws into place.

9. Mount the QuickQ-supplied and wired 66-type connector block near the DVA cabinet (typically within 5 feet or less).

Installing The QuickQ System 2 – 3

Wiring The QuickQ System IMI66–109, Section Three

Section 3

Wiring The QuickQ System

The QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer (DVA) includes one to four voice channel cards with each card providing four voice ports. Before wiring, insure that there are sufficient DXP digital station ports available at a station connector block to interface with the available DVA voice ports (maximum of 16 required).

CAUTION

You must connect all four voice ports from each voice channel card to station ports from the same DXP station board or the QuickQ system will not function properly.

Wire the installed equipment using the PK030-000 installation cable kit. The cable kit includes the separately-packaged, factory-wired items described in the following list:

Package Item

PK030-001

ACD, Mod. Jack

PK030-002

ACD, DB25S

PK030-003

ACD, DB9S

Contents









In addition to the cable kit components, you need the

OAI protect key and the QuickQ PROTECKEY that are supplied in the QuickQ package. These keys unlock the software and allow the QuickQ system to operate through the DXP’s open architecture interface.

The QuickQ package also supplies a 66-type connector block that is pre-wired to a 25-pair cable and a 50-pin connector. The cable connector mates with the connector located on the DVA cabinet.

You must supply the following components:

•

25-pair cable and a 66-type station connector block to interconnect the DXP and the DVA,

•

6-wire cable to interconnect the DXP and the personal computer.

Wiring The QuickQ System 3 – 1

IMI66–109, Section Three Wiring The QuickQ System

Connecting The Personal Computer To The DVA

1.

2.

3.

4.

Locate the kit-supplied modular jack that is labeled LINK ASSEMBLY FROM PC TO

66-BLOCK, and mount it within seven feet of the computer location. .

Select the kit-supplied modular to 9-pin EIA adapter, connect it to the computer’s COM1 serial data port, and secure the adapter with the screws provided.

Use 6-wire cable to connect the modular jack that you installed in step 1 with the QuickQ-supplied

66-type connector block.

Use a kit-supplied line cord to connect the kit-supplied modular to 9-pin EIA adapter to the jack you installed in step 1 per the following house wiring table.

House Wiring Table

QuickQ 66-Type Connector

Block

Clip Terminal Terminal

Name

45

46

47

48

RXD

TXD no connection

GND

2

5

4

3

Kit-Supplied

Type 625A-6

Moduar Jack

Pins

49

50

DTR

DSR

1

6

QuickQ Modular To 9-Pin EIA Adapter

Front View of 6-Conductor

Modular Jack

3

4

1

2

5

6

8

9

6

7

3

4

1

2

5

Rear View of 9-Pin Female

EIA Connector

DB9 Connector

Pin 1 = No Connection



Pin 4 = Data Terminal Ready


Pin 6 = Data Set Ready

QUICK004

Figure 3-1. Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To 9-Pin EIA Adapter

3 – 2 Wiring The QuickQ System

Wiring The QuickQ System

Rear View of

Typical Personal

Computer (PC)

IMI66–109, Section Three

COM1 Serial Data Port

9-Pin D Connector

Kit-Supplied

Modular to 9-pin

EIA adapter

QuickQ-Supplied

Connector Block

45

46

47

48

49

50

39

40

41

42

43

44

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

19

20

21

22

23

24

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

1

2

3

4

W/B

B/W

W/O

O/W

W/G

G/W

Station 1

Station 1

Station 2

Station 2

Station 3

Station 3

Station 4

Station 4

Station 5

Station 5

Station 6

Station 6

Station 7

Station 7

Station 8

Station 8

Station 9

Station 9

Station 10

Station 10

Station 11

Station 11

Station 12

Station 12

Station 13

Station 13

Station 14

Station 14

Station 15

Station 15

Station 16

Station 16

RXD

TXD

GND

DTR

DSR

B/W

W/B

O/W

W/O

G/W

W/G

19

20

21

22

23

24

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

1

2

3

4

45

46

48

49

50

QuickQ-

Supplied And

Punched-Down

25-Pair Cable

6-Wire Cable

House Wiring

QuickQ

Digital

Voice

Announcer

Modular

Jack Pins

1

6

4

3

2

5

Connector Block

Clip Terminal Terminal Name

45

46

47

48

49

50

RXD

TXD

No Connection

GND

DTR

DSR

4

5

6

3

2

1

Front View of Jack

Kit-Supplied Type 625A-6

Modular Jack (LINK ASSEMBLY

FROM PC TO 66-BLOCK)

QUICK001

Figure 3-2. Connecting The Personal Computer To The DVA

Kit-Supplied

3-Pair Line Cord



Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP or DXP Plus

1. Locate a kit-supplied modular jack labeled LINK

ASSEMBLY FROM DXP TO 66-BLOCK FOR

PC, and mount it within seven feet of the DXP cabinet.

2. Locate a kit-supplied modular jack labeled LINK

ASSEMBLY FROM PC TO 66-BLOCK FOR

OAI, and mount it within seven feet of the personal computer.

3. Use 6-wire cable to connect the modular jacks that you installed in steps 1 and 2 to the

QuickQ-supplied 66-type connector block per the following house wiring table.

4. Connect the OAI Protect Key to the computer’s

COM2 serial data port 25-pin connector, and secure the adapter with the screws provided.

5.

Select the kit-supplied modular to 25-pin EIA adapter , connect it to the OAI Protect Key, and secure the adapter with the screws provided.

6. Using a kit-supplied line cord, connect the DXP’s serial data port 1 to the modular jack you installed in step one. If you are using the DXP–Plus, you must connect the PC to a serial data port on a communications card (for more information on communications card installation, see IMI89–190).

7. Using a kit-supplied line cord, connect the modular to 25-pin EIA adapter that you installed in step 5 to the modular jack you installed in step two.

8. Connect the QuickQ PROTECKEY to the computer’s 25-pin parallel connector.

2

5

4

3

House Wiring Table

Link Assembly From

DXP To 66-Block For

PC Modular Jack

Pins

QuickQ-Supplied 66-Type Connector Block

Terminal

Name

W/B

B/W

W/O

O/W

Clip Terminal Clip Terminal Terminal

Name

37 37 B/W

38

39

40

38

39

40

W/B

O/W

W/O

Link Assembly From

PC To 66-Block For

OAI Modular Jack

Pins

3

4

5

2

QuickQ Modular To 25-Pin EIA Adapter


Modular Jack

5

6

3

4

1

2

22

23

24

25

17

18

19

14

15

16

20

21

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

10

11

12

13

DB25 Connector







Rear View of 25-Pin EIA

Female Connector

QUICK003

Figure 3-3. Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To 25-Pin EIA Adapter



*Customer-supplied

9-pin to 25-pin adapter (optional)

Rear View of

Typical Personal

Computer (PC)

VIEW C

DXP

RS232 Port 1 or 2

DXP Plus

RS232 on Comm. Card

Standard 6-conductor

Line Cord

VIEW C

VIEW B

Software

Key

Kit-Supplied

Modular to 25-pin

EIA adapter

* Serial Data

Port 9-pin

D Connector

VIEW D

Serial Data Port

25-pin D Connector

VIEW C

VIEW A

RS-232 1

RS-232 2

5

6

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

5

6

1 = RTS

2 = CTS

3 = RD

4 = TD

5 = GND

6 = NC

(Request To Send)

(Clear To Send)

(Receive Data)

(Transmit Data)

(Ground)

(No Connection)

14

1

* NOTE: When using the 9-pin connector, install a 9- to 25-pin adapter between connector and software key.

Customer-Supplied

9- to 25-Pin Adapter

(Typical)

RS-232 Ports (Server End)

25

13

VIEW B VIEW C VIEW D

1 6

1 = NC

2 = GND

3 = RD

4 = TD

5 = RTS

6 = CTS

14

1

1 = NC

2 = TD

3 = RD

4 = RTS

5 = CTS

*

6 = DSR

7 = GND

*

20 = DTR

6

9

1

5

1 = NC

2 = RD

3 = TD

4 = DTR

5 = GND

6 = DSR

7 = RTS

8 = CTS

9 = NC

3

4

1

2

5

6

Kit-supplied Modular to

25-pin Adapter

(Typical) 25

13

* DSR (Data Set Ready) and DTR (Data Terminal Ready) are connected kit-supplied inside modular to 25-pin adapter.

6

9

14

1

25

13

1

5

DXP021C

Figure 3-4. Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP



Connecting The DXP To The DVA

Complete the QuickQ system installation by connecting the DXP to the DVA. You will not need any kit-supplied components; however, you will need a 66-type station connector block and a 25-pair cable.

1. Mount a 66-type station connector block, and connect it to a DXP digital station board.

2. Mount the QuickQ-supplied connector block, and connect its pre-wired cable to the DVA.

3. Use a 25-pair cable to connect the QuickQ connect block to the block that you mounted in step 1.

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

6

7

4

5

8

9

1

2

3

22

23

24

18

19

20

21

DXP Station

Connector

Block Clip

Terminals

Wiring The Connector Block

Typical

25-Pair

Cable

QuickQ-Supplied

Connector Block

Clip Terminals

DVA

Voice Port

1

DVA

Voice

Channel

Card

1 white-blue blue-white white-orange 3

1

2 orange-white 4 white-green 5 green-white 6 white-brown 7 brown-white 8 white-slate 9 slate-white red-blue blue-red red-orange orange-red red-green green-red red-brown

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13 brown-red red-slate slate-red black-blue blue-black 22 black-orange 23 orange-black 24

18

19

20

21

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

2

3



Typical DXP Station

Connector Block

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

17

18

19

20

21

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

47

48

49

50

42

43

44

45

46

38

39

40

41

34

35

36

37

CLIP TERMIINALS

Station 9

Station 9

Station 10

Station 10

Station 11

Station 11

Station 12

Station 12

Station 13

Station 13

Station 14

Station 14

Station 15

Station 15

Station 16

Station 16

Station 1

Station 1

Station 2

Station 2

Station 3

Station 3

Station 4

Station 4

Station 5

Station 5

Station 6

Station 6

Station 7

Station 7

Station 8

Station 8

50

25

26

1

DXP Digital

Communications

System

Typical Digital

Station Board (DXDST)

J1 (Male

50-Pin

Connector)

Ferrite

Collar

QuickQ-Supplied

Connector Block

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

31

32

33

34

35

25

26

27

28

29

30

20

21

22

23

24

14

15

16

17

18

19

9

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

W/B

B/W

W/O

O/W

W/G

G/W

Station 1

Station 1

Station 2

Station 2

Station 3

Station 3

Station 4

Station 4

Station 5

Station 5

Station 6

Station 6

Station 7

Station 7

Station 8

Station 8

Station 9

Station 9

Station 10

Station 10

Station 11

Station 11

Station 12

Station 12

Station 13

Station 13

Station 14

Station 14

Station 15

Station 15

Station 16

Station 16

RXD

TXD

GND

DTR

DSR

B/W

W/B

O/W

W/O

G/W

W/G

20

21

22

23

24

14

15

16

17

18

19

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

9

10

11

6

7

8

12

13

1

2

3

4

5

45

46

48

49

50

Male 50-Pin

Connector

QuickQ-

Supplied And

Punched-Down

25-Pair Cable

QUICK002

Figure 3-5. Connecting The DXP To The DVA

QuickQ

Digital

Voice

Announcer



Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY

You must connect the supplied QuickQ PROTECKEY to the computer’s parallel port. Refer to Figure 3-6 for details.

CAUTION

The system will not function if you fail to connect the QuickQ PROTECKEY.

Parallel Port

25-Pin D Connector

Rear View of

Typical Personal

Computer (PC)

CAJS031D

QuickQ

ProtecKey

Figure 3-6. Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY

Connecting AC Power To The DVA

Before applying power to the DVA check all wiring connections and ensure that you have properly configured the Voice Channel Card as described in

Section 6, Reviewing The QuickQ DVA Components.

Always employ a dedicated 117VAC 15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire ground, supplied to a non-switched standard electrical outlet (NEMA 5-15R) for the AC power connection. For added equipment protection, connect a plug-in power line surge protector between the power cord and the AC outlet.

Be sure that the DVA is switched off, and connect the

AC power per this procedure:

1.

plug the female end of the AC power cord into the power supply receptacle located on the left side of

2.

the QuickQ DVA, plug the male end of the AC power cord into the power line surge protector.



Reviewing The System Interconnection

Compare your system interconnection with the Figure 3-7 illustration.

House Wiring

Typical DXP Station

Connector Block

Kit-Supplied

Modular

Jack

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

48

49

50

34

35

36

37

38

39

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

CLIP TERMIINALS

Station 1

Station 1

Station 2

Station 2

Station 3

Station 3

Station 4

Station 4

Station 5

Station 5

Station 6

Station 6

Station 7

Station 7

Station 8

Station 8

Station 9

Station 9

Station 10

Station 10

Station 11

Station 11

Station 12

Station 12

Station 13

Station 13

Station 14

Station 14

Station 15

Station 15

Station 16

Station 16

50

25

26

1

Link

Assembly

From DXP

To 66-Block

For PC

DXP

RS232 Port 1 or 2

DXP Plus

QuickQ

Digital

Voice

Announcer

Rear View of Typical Personal

Computer (PC)

QuickQ-Supplied

Connector Block

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

48

49

50

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

W/B

B/W

W/O

O/W

W/G

G/W

Station 1

Station 1

Station 2

Station 2

Station 3

Station 3

Station 4

Station 4

Station 5

Station 5

Station 6

Station 6

Station 7

Station 7

Station 8

Station 8

Station 9

Station 9

Station 10

Station 10

Station 11

Station 11

Station 12

Station 12

Station 13

Station 13

Station 14

Station 14

Station 15

Station 15

Station 16

Station 16

RXD

TXD

GND

DTR

DSR

B/W

W/B

O/W

W/O

G/W

W/G

37

38

39

40

41

42

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

10

11

8

9

28

29

30

31

32

24

25

26

27

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

45

46

48

49

50

QuickQ-

Supplied And

Punched-Down

25-Pair Cable

Kit-Supplied Modular

To 25-Pin EIA Adapter

House

Wiring

Kit-

Supplied

Modular

Jack

Link

Assembly

From PC

To 66-Block

For OAI

Kit-

Supplied

Line

Cord

Link

Assembly

From PC

To 66-Block

Kit-

Supplied

Modular

Jack

Front

View of

Jack

Front

View of

Jack

Kit-Supplied

Line Cord


To 9-Pin EIA Adapter

OAI

Key

House Wiring

Figure 3-7. Reviewing The System Interconnection

To

COM2

Port

To

Parallel

Port

QuickQ

ProtecKey

To

COM1

Port

Typical Parallel

Data Printer (Optional)

QUICK05A


Programming The DXP IMI66–109, Section Four

Section 4

Programming The DXP Digital Communications System

You must make certain programming arrangements to ensure that the DXP will work properly with the QuickQ

DVA. This section details those DXP parameters that you must arrange. Refer to the DXP Video Terminal

Programming Instructions for complete programming details. You can find that instruction included in the literature binder that accompanies your DXP digital communications system.

Programming The DXP System Parameters

Feature Name


Auto Attendant Immediate Transfer

Automatic Route Selection

System Status Reporting


IST Ringing Per Phase

Operator Station

Line Disconnect Automatic Camp-On

Automatic Station Relocation

Default Relocation Response

Day 1—Begin Time

Day 1—End Time

Day 2—Begin Time

Day 2—End Time

Night—Begin Time

Night—End Time

Highlighted Features = Critical Settings

QuickQ Parameter

No

No

Disabled

Disabled

None

8

Master

Disabled

Disabled

Yes

None

None

None

None

None

None

Programming The DXP 4 – 1

IMI66–109, Section Four Programming The DXP

Programming The DXP Line Parameters

Configure each line with the parameters shown in the table. Program the line names as L001 for line one, L002 for line two, L003 for line three, and so forth until you have named every line that you need for the QuickQ installation. You cannont change these line names.

Feature Name

Name

Type

Disabled

Music On Hold

Privacy Release

SMDR Record

Cost Incoming

—Incoming Cost Delay

—Incoming Cost Route

Dialing Mode

Abandon Hold Release

Positive Disconnect Time

Toll Groups

DTMF Level

Disconnect Supervision

Caller ID Active

ExecuMail ID

Line Group


QuickQ Parameter

Lnnn

Loop Start

No

Source 1

No

Yes

No

No Delay

32

Tone

350 Ms

2 Sec

1

Normal

Yes

Yes

1, 16

Programming The Serial Data Ports

Feature

Name

QuickQ

Parameters

Port

1 ✳✳

2

Baud Out

9600

300


Baud In

9600

300

Data Bits

8

7

✳✳ You cannot use ports one or two if you are using the DXP Plus.

Stop Bits

1

2

Parity

None

None

Flow Control

RTS/CTS

None

4 – 2 Programming The DXP


Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 1

You can assign any class of service from COS1 through COS32 to the master channels and voice ports; however, reserve the COS that you do assign exclusively for the master channel. Be sure to enter the COS number that you use here as the COS entry on the station programming features for the master channel voice ports.

Feature Name

Account Code

Automatic Hold On Intercom

Automatic Hold On Lines

Background Music

Call Cost Display

Call Forward All

Call Forward Busy/RNA

Call Forward Personal

Call Park Access

Call Pick-Up

Call Waiting

Camp-On Originate

Camp-On Receive

DND Inhibit

DND Override

Exclusive Hold

Executive Override



IST Distinctive Ringing

LCD Messaging

Meet Me Page

Message Deposit

QuickQ Parameters

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

1–9

No

No

No

No

No

No

Message Wait Originate

Music On Intercom Hold

Paging Receive

Paging Transmit

Ringing Preference

Day Route Access

Night Route Access


Night Restriction Level

System Speed Dial Groups

Station Monitoring



Line Answer

Line Originate

Periodic Line Tone


Line Group Access

Line Group Queue

Line To Line Transfer

Voice Announce Block

Internal IST Flash

Forced Account Codes

Allow Busy Display

No

No

There are no critical COS feature settings required for the master voice channel.

No

No Music

No

No

No

4

4

1

1

1–20

No

No

No

1–128 (1-240 for DXP Plus)

None

None

None

None

No

Yes

Yes

No



Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 2

You can assign any class of service from COS1 through COS32 to the master channels and voice ports; however, reserve the COS that you do assign exclusively for the master channel. Be sure to enter the COS number that you use here as the COS entry on the station programming features for the master channel voice ports.

Feature Name

Account Code

Automatic Hold On Intercom


Background Music

Call Cost Display

Call Forward All



Call Park Access

Call Pick-Up

Call Waiting

Camp-On Originate

Camp-On Receive

DND Inhibit

DND Override

Exclusive Hold

Executive Override




No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

1–9


LCD Messaging

Meet Me Page

Message Deposit



Paging Receive

Paging Transmit

Ringing Preference

Day Route Access

Night Route Access




Station Monitoring



Line Answer

Line Originate

Periodic Line Tone


Line Group Access

Line Group Queue

Line To Line Transfer


Internal IST Flash

No

Yes

Yes

No


Allow Busy Display

No

No

There are no critical COS feature settings required for the master voice channel.

4

1

No

4

1

1–20

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No Music

No

No

No

1–128 (1-240 for DXP Plus)

None

None

None

None



Programming The Master Channel 1 Voice Port Station Features

Port

Number

1 (you can use any digital port without a connected telephone)

Port

Type

Port

Model

Digital

DigiTech

24-Line

LCD

Speakerphone

*Use the same unique class of service for the master channel

and the voice port.

Feature Name

Personal Intercom

Name

Class Of Service (enter COS for master channel)

Speed Dial Sets



Group Intercom Access

Prime Type

—Line

—Line Group

—Intercom

Tone First

Call Announce Beeps

Default Forward Type

—Intercom Forward To:

—Forward Type

Forward Ring No-Answer Ring Busy

Direct Ring

Delayed Ring

Day 1 Ring

Day 2 Ring

Night Ring

Caller ID Ring No-Answer

Ring No-Answer Rings

Personal Ring tone

LCD Contrast

Initiate Service Observe

Service Observable

Day Exception Number

Night Exception Number

SOHVA Beeps

SOHVA Groups

Busy On SOHVA

Pick-Up Groups

Through-Dialing

Single Line TAP

Ring On Busy

Allow Ringer Off

Disabled

Consoles Installed

Console Ports

Programming Port

Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy

Headset

Recall Call Forward

Attendant

—Alternate Attendant

—Overflow Attendant

Extended DTMF Dialing

Softkeys Setup

IST Hold Configuration




101

MASTER 1

*

3

None

None

4201–4264

No Prime

1

1

101

Yes

1

No Forward

101

Personal Calls

No

None

5

No

No

1–3

1–3

None

None

None

4

1

None

None

6

None

No

1

No

Call Wait Answer

Yes

No

No

No

None

No

No

No

No

No

None

None

No

No

No

Cadence 1



Programming The Master Channel 2 Voice Port Station Features

Port

Number

2 (you can use any digital port without a connected telephone)

Port

Type

Digital

Port

Model

DigiTech

24-Line

LCD

Speakerphone

*Use the same unique class of service for the master channel

and the voice port.

NOTE: You cannot button-map the group intercom numbers

4201–4264 on any station.

Feature Name

Personal Intercom

Name


Speed Dial Sets



Group Intercom Access

Prime Type

—Line

—Line Group

—Intercom

Tone First

Call Announce Beeps



—Forward Type


Direct Ring

Delayed Ring

Day 1 Ring

Day 2 Ring

Night Ring



Personal Ring tone

LCD Contrast


Service Observable



SOHVA Beeps

SOHVA Groups

Busy On SOHVA

Pick-Up Groups

Through-Dialing

Single Line TAP

Ring On Busy

Allow Ringer Off

Disabled

Consoles Installed

Console Ports

Programming Port


Headset

Recall Call Forward

Attendant




Softkeys Setup





102

MASTER 2

*

3

None

None

4201–4264

No Prime

1

1

102

Yes

1

No Forward

102

Personal Calls

No

None

5

No

No

1–3

1–3

None

None

None

4

1

None

None

6

None

No

1

No

Call Wait Answer

Yes

No

No

No

None

No

No

No

No

No

None

None

No

No

No

Cadence 1



Programming The DVA Station Features

Port *

Number *

Port

Type

Port

Model

Digital

Impact

24-Line

LCD

Speakerphone

*QuickQ uses 16

DVA stations for system operation.

Assign any personal intercom numbers to them that you wish.

These personal intercom numbers need not be consecutive numbers; however, they must

be in sets of four and each set must be from a particular

digital station board.

Name the DVA stations DVA1 through DVA16 and assign a group intercom access number (from 4265 through 4280) to each DVA station.

(For example, assign

DVA1 to ext. 4265,

DVA2 to ext. 4266, and so forth until you assign DVA16 to ext.

4280)

Feature Name

Personal Intercom*

Name*


Speed Dial Sets



Group Intercom Access*

Prime Type

—Line

—Line Group

—Intercom*

Tone First

Call Announce Beeps



—Forward Type


Direct Ring

Delayed Ring

Day 1 Ring

Day 2 Ring

Night Ring



Personal Ring tone

LCD Contrast


Service Observable



SOHVA Beeps

SOHVA Groups

Busy On SOHVA

Pick-Up Groups

Through-Dialing

Single Line TAP

Ring On Busy

Allow Ringer Off

Disabled

Consoles Installed

Console Ports

Programming Port


Headset

Recall Call Forward

Attendant




Softkeys Setup




*


*

*

3

None

None

*

No Prime

1

1

*

Yes

1

No Forward

*

Personal Calls

No

None

5

No

No

1–3

1–3

None

None

None

4

1

None

None

6

None

No

1

No

Call Wait Answer

Yes

No

No

No

None

No

No

No

No

No

None

None

No

No

No

Cadence 1



Programming The Supervisor And Agent Station Features

Port *

Number *

Port

Type

Port

Model

Digital

Impact

12- or

24-Line

LCD

Speakerphone

* Assign any personal intercom numbers to agent and supervisor stations that you wish.

Name the agent and supervisor stations as desired (such as,

AGENT1, SUPERVS, and so forth).

assign any two unique group intercom numbers to the intercom hunt list and group intercom access for each station.

Feature Name

Personal Intercom*

Name*

Class Of Service

Speed Dial Sets


Intercom Hunt List*

Group Intercom Access*

Prime Type

—Line

—Line Group

—Intercom*

Tone First

Call Announce Beeps



—Forward Type


Direct Ring

Delayed Ring

Day 1 Ring

Day 2 Ring

Night Ring



Personal Ring tone

LCD Contrast

Initiate Service Observe

Service Observable

Day Exception Number

Night Exception Number

SOHVA Beeps

SOHVA Groups

Busy On SOHVA

Pick-Up Groups

Through-Dialing

Single Line TAP

Ring On Busy

Allow Ringer Off

Disabled

Consoles Installed

Console Ports

Programming Port


Headset

Recall Call Forward

Attendant

—Alternate Attendant

—Overflow Attendant

Extended DTMF Dialing

Softkeys Setup

IST Hold Configuration

Transfer Ring Cadence

Highlighted Features = Critical Settings

*


*

32

3

None

*

*

No Prime

1

1

*

Yes

1

No Forward

MASTER

Personal Calls

No

None

5

Yes

Yes

1–3

1–3

None

None

None

4

1

None

None

6

None

No

1

No

Call Wait Answer

Yes

No

No

No

None

No

No

No

No

No

None

None

No

No

No

Cadence 1

+



Button Mapping The Stations

Button Mapping The Master Channel Voice Port Stations And The DVA Stations

Button

Designation

L01

L02

L03

L04

L05

L06

L07

Feature

Mnemonic

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

Button

Designation

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17

L18

L19

Feature

Mnemonic

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

L08

L09

L10

L11

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

L20

L21

L22

L23

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

L12 # # # L24 # # #

Ensure that the DVA stations have no lines or features assigned to them (# # # = blank, or unassigned, buttons).

L08

L09

L10

L11

L12

Button

Designation

L01

L02

L03

L04

L05

L06

L07

Feature Mnemonic

Group Intercom

Group Intercom

Line Group 1

Park Orbit 1

Park Orbit 2

Page 1

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

L20

L21

L22

L23

L24

Button

Designation

L13

L14

L15

L16

L17

L18

L19

Feature Mnemonic

Headset

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

# # #

OAI01 (QuickQ button)


Setting Up The Personal Computer IMI66–109, Section Five

Section 5

Setting Up The Personal Computer

Follow the information that Sections 2 and 3 provide for installing and wiring the QuickQ system. Then refer to this section to set up the computer hardware and perform the initial programming required for the QuickQ system.

Using QuickQ With A Keyboard

You can use either a keyboard or a mouse to access the QuickQ. It is a good practice to use the keyboard for programming until you become comfortable using a mouse. For instruction on using a mouse and the

QuickQ, refer to Appendix 1 page A1-1.

There are five keys that can be used in place of a mouse.

TAB Press to highlight a word (or item) and move the cursor. Press Shift-TAB to move the highlight backward.

ENTER Press when you require a specific word

(or item) once you have highlighted it.

ESC

Press to close a message or error window.

Press to close a message or error window or to close the current window.

ARROW Press to move the cursor.

ALT Press and hold while typing an underlined letter to open a window. For example, to

F1 access the sign-in menu you can press and hold ALT and then type S. The ALT key will move the control from a window back to the menu title bar without closing the window.

Press to cause a help window to appear.

CAUTION

Do not press PRINT SCREEN or PAUSE while using QuickQ . Pressing either of these keys could cause QuickQ to stop operating.

Performing Initial Programming For QuickQ

If you switch the QuickQ on without having first programmed the voice port extension numbers into the

QuickQ software, an error window will open with an appropriate error message.

See Figure 5-1 for an illustration of this window.

Press the ENTER key to continue with the initial programming of QuickQ. Press ESC to close QuickQ

Status.

Figure 5-1. Viewing The Error Window

Setting Up The Personal Computer 5 – 1

IMI66–109, Section Five Setting Up The Personal Computer

Signing Into The Technician Access Level

Use the following procedure to access QuickQ‘s technician programming level.

1.

Select the Sign-in menu bar option. Hold down the ALT key and press the S key or press the ENTER key with

Sign-in highlighted. The system access window will open with the highlight in the ID# box, a default value of

100 will also be in the ID# box. See Figure 5-2 for an illustration of this.

2.

Figure 5-2. Viewing The System Access Window

Type the technician’s ID number (default 832) and press the ENTER key. The highlight will move to the password box.

3.

Type the technician’s password (default 832) and press the ENTER key. The supervisor/manager

sign-in window will appear (see Figure 5-3).

NOTE: The system hides the password digits when you type them.

5 – 2 Setting Up The Personal Computer


4.

Figure 5-3. Viewing The Supervisor/Manager Sign-In Window

Place the highlight on the line with agent title

technician and press the ENTER key. The screen display changes to show the technician window and the menu bar shows a series of four options

(see Figure 5-4). Selecting agent title manager will allow access to the manager window. Further description shown in System Manager’s Guide.

Figure 5-4. Viewing The Technician Window



Programming The OAI Number And Master Channel

The master channel refers to a DXP digital station port that you have reserved for call processing control.

1.

After signing into the technician access level, select the system-setup option. Hold down the ALT key and press the Y key or highlight system-setup and press ENTER. The system-setup options will open. See Figure

5-5 for details.

2.

Figure 5-5. Viewing The System-Setup Window

Select the QuickQ master setup. Hold down the

ALT key and press the M key or press the

ENTER key with QuickQ master setup highlighted. Enter the intercom number of an

unassigned DXP digital station port, then press the ENTER key. For the Master 2 extension, enter the intercom number of a second unassigned DXP digital station port. The cursor will advance to the

OAI code option. Select the OAI code to use for

QuickQ (01—64). The number that you use here

3.

4.

must match the number that you assigned to the agent and supervisor’s telephone in station class of service button mapping.

To save the changes, press and hold the ALT key and press the S key. The save changes? window will open with a Yes No option.

To select the yes option, use the TAB key or the left arrow key to highlight yes and press the

ENTER key.



Adding Lines To QuickQ

The system divides its add option menu into four catagories. These catagories include the following items:

(1) Line Name—ACD line names can be up to seven characters in length. The names are displayed on the LCD of the agent’s telephone while that station is logged into the QuickQ system.; otherwise, the DXP line name shows in the display. QuickQ call reports use the ACD line name while SMDA/SMDR reports use the DXP line name.

(2) Group—This is the ACD group that the system associates with the lines. There are 16 groups available plus an

External Transfer Lines selection (Ex Trans.). The Ex Trans. selection allows the proprietary voice mail system or an operator to transfer lines to the QuickQ system. Transfers must be to a group intercom associated with a desired ACD group. To ensure proper operation, you must give the master voice channels access to the group intercoms being used. The QuickQ system associates particular group intercom numbers with each of the 16 ACD groups. That association is as shown on the following chart. The system only supports the use of unscreened transfers.

Gp 1 Gp 2 Gp 3 Gp 4 Gp5 Gp 6 Gp 7 Gp 8 Gp 9 Gp10 Gp 11 Gp 12 Gp 13 Gp 14 Gp 15 Gp 16

4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216

4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232

4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248

4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264

(3) Subgroup—This catagory usually remains at its default value of LNGP1 unless the site has several line types

(such as WATS FX, Local) and you must differentiate between them.

(4) Line Number—This is the DXP line port. enter it in a four-character format (for example, line 1 = L001).

Use this procedure to add lines to the QuickQ system.

1.

Open the technician access level and select the system-setup option. Either press and hold the

ALT key and press the Y key or highlight system

setup and press the ENTER key. The

system-setup options will open.

2.

To select the QuickQ line setup, press the down arrow key to highlight QuickQ line setup option and press the ENTER key. The QuickQ line setup window will open (see Figure 5-6).

Figure 5-6. Viewing The QuickQ Line Setup Window



3.

To select the add option, press and hold the ALT key and press the A key. The QuickQ line setup

ADD window will open with the highlight in the

line name box. See Figure 5-7. Type the name for the line (limited to 7 characters) and press the

ENTER key.

NOTE : The line names must be unique. The system uses this name in the reports and displays it on the ACD agents telephones when QuickQ presents the line to the telephone. These line names do not affect the DXP names for the lines.

4.

5.

Figure 5-7. Viewing The ACD Line Setup Add Window

To select the line’s assigned ACD group, press the up or down arrow key to change between the groups, and press the TAB key to select the group required. Alternately, you can press the ENTER key to make the list of the groups appear, use the arrow keys to highlight the selection, press the

ENTER key, and press TAB to select. the group.

To select the line’s ACD line subgroup, press the up or down arrow key to change between the subgroups, and press the TAB key to select the subgroup required. Alternately, you can press the

ENTER key to make the list of the subgroups appear, use the arrow keys to highlight the selection, press the ENTER key, and press the

TAB key to select the subgroup.

6.

Highlight the Line No. box, enter the three-digit number for the DXP line port where you have physically connected the line, and press the

ENTER key. Make sure that the line number

7.

matches the name you assinged in the DXP.

To save the line programming select the create-line option, press and hold the ALT key and then press the C key. The create new line? window will open. Highlight Yes in this window and press the

8.

ENTER key to save the line programming.

If a line is assigned to a line subgroup that does not exist, QuickQ will open the create new line-subgroup? window. Highlight Yes and press

9.

the ENTER key to save a new line subgroup.

To close the QuickQ line setup ADD window press the ESC key.

10.

Press and hold the ALT key and press the S key to save programming to the hard drive. Select YES when the Save Line Setup? window opens.

NOTE : The Save_to_Disk will enable the line if the system is active.



Deleting Lines From QuickQ

Use the following procedure to delete line from the QuickQ system.

1.

2.

3.

Sign into the technician access level and select the

system-setup option. Either press and hold the

ALT key and press the Y key or highlight

system-setup and press the ENTER key. The


To select the QuickQ line setup, press the arrow key to highlight QuickQ line setup and press the

ENTER key. The QuickQ line setup window will open.

To select the ACD line that you wish to delete, press the ALT key to highlight the line, press the arrow keys to highlight the line to be deleated, and press the ENTER key. The edit QuickQ line setup window will open (see Figure 5-8).

4.

5.

To delete the selected line, press and hold the ALT key and press the D key. The delete line? window will open. Highlight Yes and press the ENTER key to delete the line.

Press and hold the ALT key and then press the S key to save programming to the hard drive. Select

YES when the Save Line Setup? window opens.

NOTE: If line is currently active, system will not delete line. When you delete a line, exit and re-enter the QuickQ program. This action makes the change affective.

Figure 5-8. Viewing The Edit QuickQ Line Setup Window



Moving The QuickQ Lines

Use the following steps to move ACD lines from one group to another group or from one line subgroup to another line subgroup.

1.

Sign into the technician access level and select the highlight to the subgroup column. Press the arrow system-setup option. Either press and hold the keys to change between the subgroups. Press the

ALT key and press the Y key or highlight TAB key to select the subgroup required.

system-setup and press the ENTER key. The Alternately, you can press the ENTER key to display the list of the subgroups, use the arrow

2.


To select the QuickQ line setup, press the arrow key to highlight QuickQ line setup and press the keys to highlight the required selection,. press the

ENTER key, and press the TAB key to select the

3.

ENTER key. The ACD line setup window will open.

To select the ACD line that you wish to move, press the ALT key to highlight the line, press the

6.

line subgroup required.

To save the line programming select the up-date option, press and hold the ALT key and then press the U key. The save changes to line? window will

4.

arrow keys to highlight the line to be moved, and press the ENTER key. The edit QuickQ line setup window will open (see Figure 5-8).

To move the selected line to a different group,

7.

open. Highlight Yes in this window and press the

ENTER key to save the line changes.

Press and hold the ALT key and then press the S key save programming to the hard drive. Select press the TAB key once to advance the highlight YES when the save line setup? window opens.

to the group column. Press the arrow keys to change between the groups. Press the TAB key to select the group required. Alternately, you can

5.

press the ENTER key to display the list of the groups, use the arrow keys to highlight the required selection,. press the ENTER key, and press the TAB key to select the group required.

To move the selected line to a different line subgroup, press the TAB key once to advance the

NOTE: You cannot use this procedure to change the line number. To change a line number, delete the line with the current number and then add the line with a new line number. When you make a change to the program, exit and re-enter the QuickQ program. This action makes the change affective.



Programming The QuickQ Voice Ports

The following steps allow you to program the voice port information that QuickQ requires to control the voice ports.

1.

After you have opened the technician access level, press the ENTER key and the not used and voice select the system-setup option. Press and hold the options will appear. Use the up and down arrow

ALT key and press the Y key or highlight system keys to highlight the selection required and press

set-up and press the ENTER key. The


the ENTER key. Press the TAB key to select the option required.

2.

3.

4.

Figure 5-9. Viewing The Voice Port Configuration Window

To select the voice port configuration option, press the up or down arrow key to highlight voice port

config., then press the ENTER key. The voice

port configuration window will open (see Figure

5-9).

Press the TAB key to highlight the box for voice

port 01 under the station column. Enter the intercom number for the first voice port and press the ENTER key. The highlight will now be under the type column.

To change between the not used and voice option, press the up or down arrow key. Press the TAB, key to select the option required. Alternately,

NOTE: Not used disables the voice port and voice enables the voice port.

5.

6.

7.

Use the TAB key to advance to the next voice port to be set up. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as required.

After you have set up all the voice ports used in

QuickQ, save the programming. Press the ALT key and the S key to save programming to the hard drive. The save voice port configuration? window will open with a Yes No option.

Press the TAB key to select the yes option or press the left arrow key to highlight yes and press the

ENTER key.



Programming The QuickQ Printer Information

Use the following steps to program the information required by QuickQ to allow it to print to the data printer.

1.

After you have opened the technician access level, select the system-setup option. Hold down the

CAUTION

ALT key and press the Y key or highlight the system set-up and press the ENTER key. The


To ensure reliable printout results, only use those data printers that the menu lists.

Data printers other than the ones listed on the menu may not interface properly with the QuickQ software.

2.

3.

Figure 5-10. Viewing The Printer Setup Window.

To select the printer setup option, press the up or down arrow key to highlight the printer setup option and press the ENTER key. The printer

setup window will open with the highlight under the printer type selections. See Figure 5-10 for details.

To select the printer type, press the up or down arrow keys to highlight required printer and press the TAB key to select it. The highlight will move to the printer port selections.

4.

5.

6.

To select the printer port, press the up or down arrow keys to highlight the required port and press the TAB key to select it. The highlight will move back to the printer type selections.

To save the printer parameters, press and hold the

ALT key and press the S key. The save printer

configuration? window will open with a Yes No option.

To select the Yes option, either press the TAB key or press the left arrow key to highlight Yes and press the ENTER key.



Programming The External Overflow Extensions

You can select up to four DXP personal or group intercom numbers to accept redirected unanswered calls. These numbers must be intercom numbers that are not part of the QuickQ ACD group assignments. These overflow extensions accept overflow calls from all 16 ACD groups. External overflow is associated with the inter group overflow feature discussed in GCA70-271, System Manager’s Guide. That feature causes a call to overflow within a group a maximum of four times. The forth overflow is to the extension numbers that you set with this external overflow feature. With that, further call processing occurs outside the QuickQ environment.

1.

2.

3.

After you have opened the technician access level, use the arrow keys to highlight the

integration-setup option, and press the ENTER key to select the feature.

The display highlights the external overflow selection. Press the ENTER key to select the feature.

To assign the overflow extensions, press the TAB

4.

key to select the desired overflow extension, and type the intercom number. Repeat this procedure until you have entered all desired overflow extensions.

To save the overflow extension parameters, press and hold the ALT key and press the S key. The

save overflow extension? window will open with the Yes No option.

Figure 5-11. Viewing The Overflow Extension Window



Detailing The QuickQ Batch Files

This section details several batch files that are crucial to QuickQ operation.

The contents of the CONFIG.SYS file are shown in the following list.

DEVICE=C:\QEMM\DOSDATA.SYS

DEVICE=C:\QEMM386.SYS FRAME=NONE RAM NOEMS

DEVICE=C:\QEMM\DOS-UP.SYS @C:\QEMM\DOS-UP.DAT

DOS=HIGH

FILES=40

SHELL=C:\QEMM\LOADHI.COM /R:2 C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM C:\DOS\ /P

BUFFERS=40,0

BREAK=ON

The contents of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file with Close-Up software are shown in the following list.

@echo off prompt $p$g

PATH C: \DOS;C:\;C:\quickq;C:\qemm; loadhi c: \mouse\mouse loadhi c:\closeup6\chostl comx combase=3e8 comirq=5 Noterm cd\quickq delay 120

IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO EXIT quickq

:EXIT

The contents of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file without Close-Up software are shown in the following list.

@echo off prompt $p$g

PATH C: \DOS;C:\;C:\quickq;C:\qemm; loadhi c: \mouse\mouse

REM loadhi c:\closeup6\chostl comx combase=3e8 comirq=5 Noterm cd\quickq delay 120

IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO EXIT quickq

:EXIT


Setting Up The Personal Computer

The contents of the QUICKQ.BAT file are shown in the following list:

@ECHO OFF

REM QuickQ program

:begin acd /c2 /v if errorlevel 2 goto data if errorlevel 1 goto exit scandisk c: /autofix /nosummary datechk if errorlevel 1 goto month1 goto month0

:month1 defrag c: /f

:month0 booting goto begin

:data echo Restoring data files.

copy a:*.dat

if exist *.bak del *.bak

goto begin

:exit scandisk c: /autofix /nosummary

IMI66–109, Section Five


Reviewing The QuickQ Components IMI66–109, Section 6

Section 6

Reviewing The QuickQ DVA Components

This section provides information on the components within the Digital Voice Announcer (DVA).

Reviewing The DVA Chassis Components

The components shown in Figure 6-1 are the standard components within the chassis and, in most cases, you would not be change them in the field.

DVA Motherboard

This is the system processing device. The QuickQ

DVA’s task of playing and recording announcements are controlled by the DVA motherboard. The announcements are stored digitally on the DVA motherboard in the Random Access Memory (RAM).

The program that controls the DVA resides in the program chips on the motherboard.

RS-232 serial communication link and also provides the control on the Floppy Back-up.

Floppy Back Up

The floppy back up is used to store the digital announcements on a 3 1/2" 1.44 Megabyte (MB) floppy disk in the case of a power failure to the DVA.

The DVA automatically restores messages from the floppy disk upon power-up.

IDE Controller

The IDE Controller Card is plugged into the DVA motherboard. This card provides the interface between the DVA motherboard and the computer’s

Power Supply

The power supply converts AC line voltage to DC. It provides the proper voltage to the DVA motherboard and floppy back up.

Voice Channel Ribbon Cables Voice Channel Connectors

I/O Channel

Connectors

I/O Board

RAM

DVA 25 Pair

Connector

Voice Channel Cards

Program

Chips

O

Motherboard

Floppy Back-up

IDE Controller Power Switch

Power Supply

Figure 6-1. Reviewing The QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer

Reviewing The QuickQ DVA 6 – 1

IMI66–109, Section 6 Reviewing The QuickQ Components

Reviewing The Voice Channel Card

The voice channel card (Figure 6-2) is designed with four digital recording and playback channels. Each channel includes circuitry that directly interfaces with a DXP digital station port. The DVA can hold a maximum of four voice channel cards. Since each voice channel card provides four voice channels, the system capacity is a maximum of 16 voice channels.

The voice channel card connects to the I/O Board through a voice channel ribbon cable. You must connect all four voice channels to station ports from the same DXP station board, and you must connect them in sequence. This means that you can not skip a channel. If you need to add or replace a voice channel card, you must turn the power off while you make the installation.

By changing the card select jumper J2 and J3 (Figure

6-3), you can select the different voice channels (see

Table 6-1 for details).

Example: If you set the jumpers for CARD 0, the first of four voice channels becomes Voice Channel 1.

This corresponds to voice channel 1 on the I/O Board.

If you set the jumpers for CARD 2, the first of four voice channels becomes Voice Channel 9 on the I/O

Board.

Card Card Select

Jumper

0

J2

0

0

J3

0

0

1

2

3 1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

Voice

Channel

8

9

10

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

16

Table 6-1. Selecting The Voice Channel

6 – 2 Reviewing The QuickQ DVA

Reviewing The QuickQ Components IMI66–109, Section 6

Voice Channel

Connector

LED Power

Indicator

Card Select

Jumpers

Jumper

Strap

0 1

Exploded Side View

Figure 6-2. Reviewing The QuickQ Voice Channel Card

Reviewing The QuickQ DVA 6 – 3

IMI66–109, Section 6 Reviewing The QuickQ Components

Reviewing The I/O Board

The I/O Board (Figure 6-3) provides both the I/O interface from the voice channel cards to the DXP and the RS-232 serial communication link to the computer through a male 50-pin connector. There is lightning surge protection built in the I/O board to protect the

DVA components.

SERIAL

CONNECTOR

QIOC

SERIAL

VOICE CHANNEL

CONNECTOR

AMPHENOL

Figure 6-3. Reviewing The QuickQ I/O Board

6 – 4 Reviewing The QuickQ DVA

IMI66-109, Section 7 Testing And Troubleshooting

Section 7

Testing And Troubleshooting

This section provides the basic test procedure and troubleshooting information for the QuickQ ACD hardware and software installation

Testing The DVA Installation

The following paragraphs provide the testing and troubleshooting information for the DVA during installation.

Testing Voice Channel Cards

Make sure the voice port stations that are connected to the voice channels are programmed properly.

When you first switch on the computer, the message

QuickQ Initialized. All components acquired. OAI

Code must appear to indicate that QuickQ is enabled.

From any DXP telephone, press the ACD key (the programmed OAI button arranged for this purpose) then dial ✳✳832 (✳✳TEC). This action enables the technician’s program.

The telephone will show the following displays:

Test

Voice Logout

Logout = leave ACD program

Voice = test voice channel

Voice Port:

Quit

Voice Port = voice port channel to be tested

Quit = stop the test

Message 1

REC PLAY Quit

REC = record test message 1. (Listen for tone that indicates start of recording.)

Quit = stop the test

Recording

STOP

STOP = stop recording (Listen for tone that indicates stop recording.)

You can play a recorded message to verify that a voice card is functioning properly.

Message 1

REC PLAY

PLAY = play message 1

Quit

Playing

STOP

Record and play back a message at each voice channel of every voice channel card.

Examining Typical Problems

Problem 1: When selecting VOICE to test voice port a message, you see the following display:

Voice Port N/A

Voice Logout

This message appears either if a voice port card is not initialized properly or if the voice port selected does not exist. Check the QuickQ program (message channel under system programming) to see if the voice port is an active.

Problem 2: When selecting VOICE to test voice port a message, you see the following display:

PC link N/A

Logout

This message appears when the RS-232 serial communication link is lost. Check the DVA to see if it is powered on and check all connections between the PC and the DVA.

NOTE: The message recording and playback test verifies all components of the announcement channel. If the voice port passes these tests, no other voice port tests are required.

Testing And Troubleshooting 7 – 1

Testing And Troubleshooting IMI66-109, Section 7

Testing The QuickQ Software

This discussion provides information on typical software related problems and error messages.

Solution: You may have entered an extra digit into the

During Initial QuickQ Programming

This paragraph discusses the problems that you may encounter during the initial QuickQ programming.

ID# or password. Press the ESC key to close the Sign

In window and clear the ID# and password. Re-open the Sign In window, re-enter the ID#, and press the

ENTER key. Then re-type the password and press the

Examining Typical Problems ENTER key.

Problem 1: After you have entered the ID# in the Sign

In window, the error message Invalid ID# appears.

Solution: Be sure the ID# is between 100 and 999.

Press the ENTER key to close the error message window. Use the backspace key to delete previously entered ID# digits, re-type the ID#, and press the

ENTER key.

Problem 2: After you have entered the proper ID# and password, the system access window will not open.

During QuickQ Operation

When QuickQ is in operation, you have troubleshooting utilities located at the Technician

Access level. There are four utilities located under the diagnostics selection. They are the enable QuickQ

status, the agent status, the line status, and the voice

port status.

7 – 2 Testing And Troubleshooting


Examining The Enable QuickQ Status Utility

The enable QuickQ status allows you to enable the

QuickQ after you have programmed the voice port extensions and without resetting the computer. After you have enabled QuickQ, the enable QuickQ option will be the QuickQ status feature. This feature indicates QuickQ‘s current operating status.

The enable QuickQ status option can provide information on the hardware status as seen by QuickQ upon initialization and after you display the QuickQ

status window. The messages that will appear are shown on the following list.

All Components acquired This indicate that the lines and the Voice Ports are functioning.

Line not initialized This indicates a problem with a line that was programmed as an ACD line. Check the line going into the QuickQ DVA.

Check programming of lines in ACD.

Link established between PC and DVA This indicates that there is proper RS-232 serial data communication between the

PC and the DVA but there is a problem with one of the other initialization parameters.

Lost link between

PC and DVA This indicates a problem with the RS-232 serial data communication link. Check all serial communication wiring plus, be sure the

DVA is powered on.

Voice Ports not initializedThis indicates a problem with a voice port card that you have programmed as a message channel. Check the wiring between the

DVA and the DXP station port. Also check the QuickQ message channel and extension length programming for the voice port extension.

All voice ports initialized This indicates all voice port cards programmed in

QuickQ are functioning

QuickQ initialized

OAI Key Code = xxx properly but there is a problem with one of the other initialization parameters.

This indicates the ACD software is initialized.

This indicates the OAI key code.

The QuickQ status window provides information on the communication status of QuickQ andthe feature codes. The messages that show are listed below.

Lost communication with announcer This indicates a problem with the RS-232 serial communication link.

Check all serial communication wiring and be sure the DVA is powered on.

Normal communication with announcer This indicates correct

RS-232 serial communication between the

PC and the DVA.

OAI Key Code = xxx This indicates the OAI key code.


Testing And Troubleshooting IMI66-109, Section 7

Examining The Agent Status Utility

The agent status is a real-time agent status window.

This window shows the current state of the ACD agents. The first column shows the agent’s name.

The second column shows the agent’s state. The third column shows the call state for the agent’s line.

S_MODE

S_PLAY

S_RECORD

S_STOP

WRAP_UP

Supervisor changing mode of operation

Supervisor playing message

Supervisor recording message

Supervisor stop playing or recording message

Agent has ended call and is in wrap_up state

The agent status states that will appear are shown in the following list.

ACCEPT

ACC_CODE

ANSWER

BUSY_STATE

HELP_REQ

IDLE_STATE

OUT_ANSWER

PASSWORD

REJECT

SIGN_IN

Supervisor accepts request for help

Agent or supervisor entering account code

Agent answered incoming call

Agent in busy state

Agent requesting help from the supervisor

Agent in idle state

Agent on outgoing call

Agent or supervisor entering password

Supervisor reject request for help

Agent or supervisor signing in

The call state that will appear are shown below.

C_ANSWER_STATE Call answered by an ACD agent

C_DISPLAY_STATE Call displayed on an ACD agents telephone

C_HOLD_STATE Call on hold by agent

C_IDLE_STATE

NO CALL

No call activity

No call activity

C_MESSAGE_STATE Call listening to announcement

C_MUSIC_STATE

C_OUT_STATE

Call listening to music, on-hold tone, or silence

Outgoing call by agent

C_RING_STATE Call processor detects ringing on line

7 – 4 Testing And Troubleshooting


Examining The Line Status Utility

The line status scan is a real-time line status window.

This window shows the current state of the ACD lines.

The first column shows the line name. The second column shows the line state. The third column shows the call state for the line. The fourth column shows the agent with whom the line is associated. The last column shows the voice port on which the line must be programmed. A zero indicates voice port 01.

The line status states that will appear are shown in the following list:

ANSWER_STATE Line answered by an agent

ANSWER_WAIT

IDLE_STATE

MESSAGE_STATE

MONITOR_STATE

Line answered by an agent

No line activity

Message to be played on line

Line monitored by QuickQ waiting for a transfer to the voice port (auto attendent mode)

MUSIC_STATE

RING_STATE

RINGON

Music, on-hold tone, or silence to be connected to line

OFFER_STATE

OUTGOING_WAIT

Call offered to ACD agent.

OUTGOING_STATE Line used for outgoing call by an ACD agent

Line used for outgoing call by a non-ACD agent

Line ringing—incoming call

Line ringing, but no message to play on line

START_MESS Message going to play to a line

The call states that appear are shown below.

C_ANSWER_STATE Call answered by an ACD

C_ANS_WAITING agent

C_DISPLAY_STATE Call displayed on an ACD agents telephone

C_HOLD_STATE

C_IDLE_STATE

NO CALL

Call waiting for agent or voice port

Call on hold by agent

No call activity

No call activity

C_MESSAGE_STATE Call listening to announcement.

C_MUSIC_STATE Call listening to music,

On-hold tone, or silence

C_OUT_STATE

C_RING_STATE

Outgoing call by agent

Call processor detects ringing on line

Examining The Voice Port Status Utility

The voice port status scan is a real-time voice port status window. This window shows the initialized voice ports and their current state. The voice port states are shown on the following list.

CH_NOT_INIT 0 Voice port not initialize

CH_IDLE 1

CH_RECORD 2

Voice port idle

Voice port used for recording

CH_PLAY 3 Voice Port used for playing a message to a line

CH_SUPER_PLAY 4 Voice port used for playing a message by the supervisor

CH_WAITING 5 or technician

Voice port is waiting for a message to be played or recorded

The clock window provides useful information. The line under the clock shows the status of the DVA. It also show the hard disk usage. The clock states are as shown below.

Normal indicates there is no problem with the DVA.

Inactive indicates that there is a problem with the DVA.

Backup indicates that the floppy back-up is currently backing up the messages in the DVA.

Problem: Clock shows DVA inactive.

Solution: Check to see if DVA is powered off. If so, turn on the power to it. Also, check all wiring for the

RS-232 serial communication link. Finially, reset the

DVA by powering the unit off and on.


Installing The New Cards IMI66–109, Section 8

Section 8

Installing The New Voice Channel Cards

This section describes how to install additional Voice Channel Cards.

Insert the new voice channel card into a slot on the

DVA motherboard (Figure 6-1). Connect the voice channel card to the I/O Board with a ribbon cable

(Figure 4-1), and secure it to the DVA chassis with two #6-32 1/4-inch machine screws.

NOTE: Wear a ground strap when working inside the

DVA chassis to avoid damaging the DVA circuit boards with a static electricity discharge.

1. Remove the three screws that secure the front cover of DVA chassis, and lift the front cover up slightly.

6. Use the two #6-32 1/4-inch machine screws to secure the voice channel card to the DVA chassis.

7. Connect the ribbon cable to the voice channel connector (Figure 6-4). The red stripe on the ribbon cable indicates Pin 1 on the ribbon connector. The voice channel connector on the voice channel card has pin 1 labeled.

NOTE: The red stripe on the voice channel ribbon cable must face toward the outside of the DVA chassis.

2. Locate the next open slot in the DVA motherboard to insert the voice channel card.

3. Set the jumpers J2 and J3 to the next voice channel card. Refer to Table 6-1 for jumper settings.

4. Switch the power OFF on the DVA.

NOTE: Be sure to back up all of the pre-recorded announcements to the floppy disk before powering off the DVA.

5. Insert the voice channel card into the open slot in the DVA motherboard. Push the voice channel card straight down until it is snugly in place and the metal bracket is flush with the securing bracket.

8. Connect the other end of the ribbon cable to the voice channel connector on the I/O board (Figure

6-2). The voice channel connectors on the I/O board are labeled 1 through 4, to correspond to the four possible voice channel cards. Select the proper connector for the voice channel card being added. The voice channel connector on the I/O board has Pin 1 labeled.

NOTE: The red stripe on the voice channel ribbon cable must be facing out of the DVA chassis.

9. Switch the power ON on the DVA.

10. Test the voice channel card. Refer to the Section

7 paragraph titled, Testing voice channel card.

11. Close cover.

Installing The New Cards 8–1

Using QuickQ With A Mouse IMI66–109, Appendix 1

Appendix 1

Using QuickQ With A Mouse

A mouse is a device that allows you to move a cursor on the screen to specific points for data entry, and other menu selections (Figure A1-1). An arrow image, called the mouse pointer, moves on the screen when you move the mouse. Practice moving the pointer.

Stay away from the menu bar at the top of the screen.

(If you accidentally make a menu appear, you can make it disappear by moving the pointer out of the menu and pressing and releasing the left mouse button.)

Occasionally the pointer might seem to disappear.

Usually it is just off the screen. To make the pointer reappear, move the mouse in a circle a few times.

To move the mouse without moving the pointer, lift up the mouse. The pointer doesn’t move while the mouse is in the air.

Most of the time, you use one of the following two mouse button techniques:

• clicking,

• dragging.

Clicking (Selecting an item): To click, press the left button and immediately release it. By clicking, you can select an item, such as a menu or an icon.

Note that the top left corner of the screen has a sign-in label. Use it to perform the following exercise. Place the pointer at the sign-in title and click the mouse button. The QuickQ opens a window.

Dragging (Moving a window): Dragging consists of three steps:

1. pressing and holding the left mouse button,

2. moving the mouse,

3. releasing the mouse button.

Dragging allows you to move the position of a window on the screen. You can position different windows on the screen to give yourself a better view of system set-up parameters, (for example, the announcement window and the line group window).

Having both windows appear at the same time, you can identify the announcement messages assignment that is relative to the line groups. To move the sign in window, place the pointer on the title bar (system access), and drag. As you drag, an outline of the window moves with the pointer’s. Practice moving the sign in window on the screen.

Figure A1-1. Using The Mouse

A–1

IMI66–109, Appendix 1 Using QuickQ With A Mouse

Window Graphic in QuickQ

If you are familiar with a window environment, you can skip this discussion.

QuickQ is easy to use. Most of what you see and do in the ACD console happens in a window. A window is a screen area that the QuickQ system uses to exchange information with you. There are many windows. For example, you enter your password through a window,.

QuickQ displays the Line-group data through a window, and so forth. You can move, resize, zoom, overlap, close and open one or more windows in one screen. While you can have any number of windows opened, only one window can be active at any time. The active window is the one that you are currently working in. Any command that you choose or text you type generally applies only to the active window.

The active window always has a close box, and may have a zoom box, scroll bars, and a resize corner.

(Figure A1-2 shows a typical window). If your windows are overlapping, the active window is always the one on top of all the others (the foremost one).

As stated above, all QuickQ windows have the following features in common:

• a title bar,

• a close box,

The Title Bar: The topmost horizontal bar of a window contains the name of the window. You can drag the title bar to move the window around.

The Close Box: This is the box in the upper left corner. You click your computer’s mouse on this box to quickly close the window.

The Zoom Box: This box may appear in the upper right corner. If the icon in that corner is an up arrow, you can click on the arrow to enlarge the window. If the icon is a doubleheaded arrow , you can click on this to return the window to its previous size.

Some of the more complex windows have the following additional features:

• scroll bars,

• resize edges,

Scroll Bar: The scroll bar, if available, appears in the right side of the window. You use your mouse with this bar to scroll the contents of the window. Click on the arrow at either end to scroll one line at a time.

(Keep the mouse button pressed to scroll continuously.) You can drag the the scroll box at any spot on its bar to move it to a more convient position.

Resize Edges: The four extreme edges of a window are the resize edges. You can drag any edge to make the window larger or smaller.

Help Box: A help window, if available, will give you further instructions specific to the active window.

Press F1 to open the help window.

A–2

Figure A1-2. Viewing A Typical QuickQ Window

IMI66-109

Start-up Screens

Sign-In

ID # XXX

Password XXX

Technician’s Screens

System Setup

QuickQ Master Setup

Master Extension

Master 2 Extension

QuickQ OAI Key Code

QuickQ Line Setup

Name

Group

Subgroup

Line No.

Voice Port Config.

Voice Port No.

Station

Type

Printer Setup

Printer Type

Other

Epson LQ

HP Laser

HP DJ 500

HP DJ 550C

Printer Port

LPT 1

Integration Setup

External Overflow

Password

Old Password XXX

New Password XXX

Diagnostic

QuickQ Status

Agent Status Scan

Line Status Scan

Voice Port Status Scan

Programming Road Map

Appendix 2:

Reviewing The Programming Road Map

Management Info.

Real Time

System Agent Status

System Line Status

Historical

Current

Hourly

Report Type

Answer Bins

Abondon Bins

Incoming Calls

Total Time

Average Time

SystemCcapacity

Traffic Analysis

Account Code

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Daily

Report Type

Answer Bins

Abondon Bins

Incoming Calls

Total Time

Average Time

SystemCcapacity

Traffic Analysis

Account Code

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Configuration

Group

System

Technician

Print

System Manager’s Screens

System Setup

Company Name

ID Password

Group Name XXXXXXXX

Supervisor Name XXXXXXXX

ID #

Password

XXX

XXX

Time/Date

Date dd-mm-yyyy

Time HH:MM

Group Programming

Group 01-16

(link to group supervisor screens)

Intergroup Overflow

Group 01-16

Level 01

Level 02

Level 03

Level 04

Announcement

Message

Message 1-16

Description

Current Time MM:SS

Limit Time

Backup

MM:SS

Account Code

Starting Number Range X

Account Code XXX

Description

System Backup

Stat Bin

Answer Bin

Time Bin 1 MM:SS

Time Bin 2 MM:SS

Time Bin 3 MM:SS

Time Bin 4 MM:SS

Time Bin 5 MM:SS

Time Bin 6 MM:SS

Abandon Bin

Time Bin 1 MM:SS

Group Supervisor’s Screens

Group Setup

Overflow Threshold MM:SS

Redirect Threshold

Alarm Threshold

MM:SS

MM:SS

Alarm Threshold

Priority Override

Calls in Queue

MM:SS

Call Screening Yes No

Automatic Force Call Yes No

Manual Answer Yes No

Day To Night Mode Yes No

Time For Day To Night Mode HH:MM

Agent Group–Setup

AgGp_01

AgGp_02

AgGp_03

AgGp_04

Agent Group Name XXXXXXXX

Agent Name XXXXXXXX

ID #

Password

Priority

Wrap-Up

XXX

XXX

01-04

MM:SS

Line Group Setup

LnGp_01

LnGp_02

LnGp_03

LnGp_04

Line Group Name XXXXXXXX

First Message

Second Message

X

X

Night Message

Special Message

X

X

First Message Delay MM:SS

Music Interval MM:SS

Line Group Priority 01-04

Management Info

Real Time Setup

Incoming Call Parameter MM:SS

Outgoing Call Parameter MM:SS

Busy Call Parameter MM:SS

Real Time

Traffic Activity

Agent Activity

Traffic Status

Service Status

Agent Status

Historical

Current

Hourly

Report Type

Waiting Time

Abandon Call

Incoming Call

Agent Activity

Average Time

System Capacity

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Daily

Report Type

Waiting Time

Abandon Call

Incoming Call

Agent Activity

Average Time

System Capacity

Call Profile

Account Code

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Configuration

Group

Print

A2–1

IMI66-109 Publication Index

Publication Index

A

Adding Lines To QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5

Additional Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

Agent Status Utility, Examining The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-4

AUTOEXEC.BAT File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

B

Batch File, Detailing The QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Button Mapping The Agent And Supervisor Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-9

Button Mapping The Master Channel Voice Port Stations And The DVA Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-9

Button Mapping The Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-9

C

Chassis Components, Reviewing The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

CONFIG.SYS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Connecting AC Power To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

Connecting The DXP To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6

Connecting The DXP To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-7

Connecting The Personal Computer To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Connecting The Personal Computer To The DVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

Connecting The Personal Computer To The DXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5

Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

Connecting The QuickQ PROTECKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

D

Defining The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Deleting Lines From QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6

Describing The QuickQ Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To 25-Pin EIA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To 9-Pin EIA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Detailing The QuickQ Basic Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

Detailing The QuickQ Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

DVA Components, Reviewing The QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

DVA Installation, Testing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

DVA Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

DVA Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

E

Edit QuickQ Line-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7

Error Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Examining The Agent Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-4

Examining The Enable QuickQ Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3

Examining The Line Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5

Examining The Voice Port Status Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5

F

Floppy Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Index–1

Publication Index IMI66-109

I

I/O Board, Reviewing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4

IDE Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Installation Check List, Reviewing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Installing The New Voice Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

Installing The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Interconnection, Reviewing The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9

Introducing The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

L

Line-Setup Add Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6

Line-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5

Line Status Utility, Examining The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5

Lines, Adding to QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5

Lines, Deleting From QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6

Lines, Moving The QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7

Listing The Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

M

Manual Organization, Understanding The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

Modular To 25-Pin EIA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

Modular To 9-Pin EIA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

Mounting The Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3

Mouse, Using QuickQ With A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1-1

Mouse, Using The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1-1

Moving The QuickQ Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7

O

Overflow Extension Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Overviewing The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

P

Performing Initial Programming For QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Personal Computer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-4

Personal Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Printer-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3

Programming Class Of Service For Master Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4

Programming, Initial Performing For QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Programming Road Map, Reviewing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A3-1

Programming the DXP Line Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2

Programming The DVA Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-7

Programming The DXP Digital Communications System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Programming The DXP System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Programming The External Overflow Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Programming The Master Channel 1 Voice Port Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5

Programming The Master Channel 2 Voice Port Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6

Programming The OAI Number And Master Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4

Programming The QuickQ Printer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Programming The QuickQ Voice Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

Programming The Serial Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2

Programming The Supervisor And Agent Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-8

2–Index

IMI66-109 Publication Index

Q

QUICKQ.BAT File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer, Reviewing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

QuickQ I/O Board, Reviewing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

QuickQ Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

QuickQ Status Utility, Examining The Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

QuickQ System, Defining The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

QuickQ System, Installing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

QuickQ System, Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

QuickQ System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

QuickQ Voice Channel Card, Reviewing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

R

Related Publications, Listing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

Reviewing The DVA Chassis Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Reviewing The I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4

Reviewing The Installation Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Reviewing The Programming Road Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A3-1

Reviewing The QuickQ Digital Voice Announcer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Reviewing The QuickQ DVA Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

Reviewing The QuickQ I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

Reviewing The QuickQ Voice Channel Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

Reviewing The System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9

Reviewing The Voice Channel Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

Road Map, Reviewing The Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A3-1

S

Setting Up The Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Signing Into The Technician Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

Supervisor/Manager Sign-in Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3

System Access Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

System Components, Understanding The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4

System-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4

T

Technician Access Level, Signing Into The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

Technician Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3

Testing And Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

Testing The DVA Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

Testing The QuickQ Software, During Initial Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2

Testing The QuickQ Software, During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2

Testing Voice Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2

The ACD Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

The Central Call Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

The Digital Voice Announcer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

The Telephone Switching System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Tools And Hardware Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

U

Understanding The Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

Understanding The System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4

Using QuickQ With A Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Using QuickQ With A Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1-1

Using The Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-1

Index–3

Publication Index IMI66-109

V

Viewing The ACD Line-Setup Add Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6

Viewing The ACD Line-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5

Viewing The Edit QuickQ Line-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-7

Viewing The Error Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

Viewing The Overflow Extension Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Viewing The Printer-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Viewing The Supervisor/Manager Sign-in Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3

Viewing The System Access Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

Viewing The System-Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4

Viewing The Technician Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3

Viewing The Voice Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

Voice Card Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

Voice Channel Board, Reviewing The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

Voice Channel Cards, Installing The New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

Voice Channel Cards, Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2

Voice Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

Voice Port Status Utility, Examining The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5

W

Window Graphic In QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1-2

Wiring The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

4–Index

QuickQ

DXP

Automatic Call Distributor

System Manager’s

Guide

R

GCA70-271 Table Of Contents

Table Of Contents

Introducing The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Understanding This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Becoming Familiar With Conventions Used in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Understanding QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

Organizing The Call Center Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Describing The System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Call Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Digital Voice Announcer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Telephone Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Describing QuickQ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

Answer Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

Abandoned Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

Even Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4

Delay Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

Management Information System (MIS) Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

Describing QuickQ Agent Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Calls Waiting Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Log-in / Log-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Make Set Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Supervisor Help and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Wrap-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Describing QuickQ Group Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Alarm Threshold (Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Alarm Threshold (Calls in Queue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Automatic Day-to-Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Automatic Night-to-Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Automatic Answer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Manual Answer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Overflow Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

Overflow Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

Priority Call Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

Redirect Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

Call Screen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

Using the Mouse and Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Version: 1.1.0

Date: May, 1995 iii

Table Of Contents GCA70-271

Programming QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

Understanding System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

Preparing System Layout / Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

Programming The System Level Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

Performing Initial Sign In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

Setting Up The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

Setting the Company Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

Changing Passwords and ID’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Setting the Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7

Setting the Intergroup Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8

Setting Announcement Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

Assigning Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10

Arranging The Stat-Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Programming Group Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13

By System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

By Group Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14

Preparing The Group Layout / Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14

Configuring The Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14

Configuring the Agent Group-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16

Configuring the Line Group-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18

Management Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20

System-Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Announcement Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Configuration Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Stats Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Operating The QuickQ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

Logging In and Out of QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

Operating As An Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Answering Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Answering Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Wrapping Up A Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Making Your Telephone Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4

Requesting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4

Transferring Calls In Or Out Of QuickQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

Making an Outgoing Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Entering Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Operating As A Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Changing The Mode Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Recording And Playing Back The Announcement Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7

Monitoring the Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8

Viewing The Current Call Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9 iv

GCA70-271 Table Of Contents

Management Info.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

Selecting The Real Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

Viewing The System Manager Real Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

Selecting The Real Time Set Up Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Viewing The Supervisor’s Real Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Selecting Historical Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4

Selecting Current Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5

Selecting The Main Report Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5

Selecting Configuration Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Selecting QuickQ MIS Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Viewing Typical MIS Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Appendix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A–1

Using QuickQ With a Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

Clicking (Selecting an Item) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

Dragging (Moving a Window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

Understanding QuickQ Window Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2

Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2

Close Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2

Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Scroll Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2

Re-size Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2

Appendix B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A–3

System Layout / Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3

Appendix C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A–5

Group Layout / Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–5

Appendix D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11

Reviewing The Programming Roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11

Appendix E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

Backup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 v

Table Of Contents GCA70-271

List Of Illustrations

Figure 3-1 QuickQ Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Figure 3-2 Sign In Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Figure 3-3 ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Figure 3-4 Supervisor Sign In Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Figure 3-5 Group 00 System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-6 Edit ID and Password Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Figure 3-7 Synchronizing the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Figure 3-8 Intergroup Overflow Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-9 Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Figure 3-10 Account Code Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Figure 3-11 Answer Time Bin Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-12 List of System Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Figure 3-13 Group Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Figure 3-14 Agent Group Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Figure 3-15 Add Agent Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Figure 3-16 Line Group Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Figure 3-17 Message Backup and Restore Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Figure 3-18 System Program Back-up Restore Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Figure 3-19 Report Back-Up/Clean-Up Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Figure 3-20 Report Backup/Cleakup Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Figure 5-1 System Manager’s Real Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Figure 5-2 Real Time Parameter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Figure 5-3 Supervisor’s Real Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Figure 5-4 Answer Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Figure 5-5 Abandon Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Figure 5-6 Incoming Call Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Figure 5-7 Total Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Figure 5-8 Average Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Figure 5-9 System Capacity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Figure 5-10 Account Code Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Figure 5-11 Traffic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 vi

GCA70-271 Introducing The QuickQ System


Using This Guide

This manual will assist you in using your QuickQ automatic call distributor. It provides a complete description of the QuickQ features, a detailed outline of the system configuration, and general operating instructions.

•

•

Certain typographical conventions appear throughout this guide to simplify the instructions. These are explained below:

Text that appears on the screen is shown as, for example,

Text that you have to type is shown in two different ways:

E n t e r y o u r p a s s w o r d .

‘type Albert Smith at the appropriate box’ means that you should type the characters exactly as shown, but

‘type your password’ means that you should type the actual digits of your password.

•

Keys that you are required to press are shown as, for example, Enter .

Note: On some keypads, the Enter key may be called Return.

The word select is used to describe the use of either the mouse or the direction arrow keys to highlight an option on the screen.

Notes bring your attention to a particular item. Notes are given between paragraphs of text, and are shown in the following form:

Note: If you are using the keyboard use the Tab key to move from field to field. If you are using the mouse, click on the field you wish to work with.

Introducing The QuickQ System 1-1

Introducing The QuickQ System GCA70-271

Understanding QuickQ

QuickQ is an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) system designed to handle incoming calls as efficiently and economically as possible. It answers calls by distributing the workload equally among the Agent staff. Typically, QuickQ speed, efficiency and management control usually results in a 20–40 percent increase in the productivity of the Agent force and a 10 to 20 second decrease in the average call answer time. The four primary functions of the QuickQ are as follows:

• provide a waiting queue to increase the effective arrival rate of the incoming calls, and to allow more productive time for the Agent,

• play prerecorded announcements when no Agents are available thus encouraging the caller to wait in a queue,

• automatically distribute the workload among the Agents to allow an equal distribution of duties, effecting greater productivity,

• provide comprehensive statistical management reports that allow rational and efficient allocation of the call center’s resources.

Any corporation or company that answers incoming telephone calls with a staff of Agents or trained people is a potential candidate for the considerable cost savings and service benefits of the QuickQ.

In an automatic call distribution (ACD) application, a calling customer needs to reach a service person in a particular area but does not need to reach a specific individual. For example, the customer may be calling a company to place an order, check a reservation, or talk to a support or help desk. In all cases, it is important that the call be answered as quickly as possible by any service person in that area.

It is statistically proven that a single large group of agents is more productive than an equal number of agents in several smaller groups provided that the calls are homogeneous.

Calling traffic is considered homogeneous when anyone within a group of trained representatives can effectively handle the call; however, this uniformity does not imply that ACD systems can handle only one type of call. Many successful operations exist where different types of calls reach specially trained operators in a busy call center. However, it is more efficient to separate different types of calls into groups. QuickQ has the ability to configure the ACD operation into 16 groups, each of which can have four sub-groups.

1-2 Introducing The QuickQ System


Organizing The Call Center Staff

•

•

An ACD center requires specialized personnel. If the department is large enough, an effective ACD staff will consist of the following personnel:

System Manager,

Group Supervisors,

• Telephone Agents.

•

•

The System Manager is directly responsible for the day-to-day operation and maintenance of the ACD center. In smaller systems, the System Manager’s task may be combined with the Group Supervisor’s responsibilities. The System Manager can monitor the overall performance of the ACD center and has several responsibilities including the following items: control of systems configuration, such as the number of groups and overflow between groups, effectively balance the staffing of the ACD center according to the traffic demands of the various groups.

•

•

The Group Supervisor is directly responsible for the following responsibilities:

•

•

•

Move, add and delete Agents required for the ACD center.

the telephone service provided by Agents in their respective groups, monitoring the activity of the Agents, evaluating the performance of the Agents, providing assistance on calls beyond the capability or training of the Agents.

The Telephone Agent is often referred to as a Customer Service Representative (CSR) and is mainly responsible for a particular group of telephone lines or a certain type of call; however, the system allows assignment of multiple group agents that are a part of more than one group.

Describing The System Components

NOTE:You can ensure continuous QuickQ operation by adding an uninterruptable power source to both the digital voice announcer and central call processor, and an optional battery backup assembly to the DXP digital communications system.

Call Processor

The call processor is the brain of the QuickQ. It consists of the QuickQ software and a personal computer.

The call processor monitors and controls all activities within the boundaries of the ACD.

Digital Voice Announcer

The Digital Voice Announcer (DVA) is a stand-alone voice processing system designed to directly interface with the DXP digital communications system. It provides storage for up to 16 digitized voice announcements for playback under control of the central call processing unit. In a busy call center when all Agents are busy, the DVA intercepts incoming calls and plays prerecorded voice announcements.

Telephone Extensions

The Agent’s and Supervisor’s stations are typical DXP proprietary telephones (12 or 24 Button

Display Sets).



Describing QuickQ System Features

Answer Bin

An Answer bin is the length of time between when a call arrives in the queue and when it is answered by an Agent. There are six answer bins in the system. The system answer bin default time is zero. By setting the time frames in the answer bins, the Manager can look at one factor in the total customer service picture. An example of a typical answer bin record is shown below.

Answer Bin

Bin 01

Bin 02

Bin 03

0

5

Number of

Calls

2

Time

00:20

00:40

01:00

Definition

The number of calls answered between 0 and 20 seconds, (0)

The number of calls answered between 20 and 40 seconds, (5)

The number of calls answered between 40 seconds and 1 minute, (2)

Abandoned Bin

Abandoned bin is the time between when a call arrives in the queue and when the caller hangs up without being connected to an Agent. There are six abandoned bins in the system. The system abandoned bin time defaults are zero. By setting time frames in the abandoned bins, the Manager can determine how tolerant customers are of the waiting time to which they are being subjected. An example of a typical abandoned bin is shown below.

Abandoned

Bin

Bin 01

Bin 02

Bin 03

Number of

Calls

0

11

15

Time

00:10

00:30

00:50

Definition

The number of calls abandoned between 0 and 10 seconds, (0)



Call Queuing

The QuickQ manages incoming calls in a logical sequence. The number of incoming calls arriving at a call center at any one time is random. The calls are queued on a first in first out principle. Call queuing ensures that calls are handled in a timely and efficient manner. Priority can be assigned to preferred lines such as Inwats (800 lines).

Even Distribution

The QuickQ effectively shares the incoming call workload evenly among agents. This ensure the optimum productivity of all agents by distributing calls to the longest idle agent.



Delay Announcements

Delay announcements are important money-saving features that help keep the queue working in an efficient manner. Since telephone traffic is random, there will be occasional bursts of calls to any ACD.

Such sporadic increases in volume may force callers to wait for connection longer than they would like.

By recording delay announcements (such as, Hello you have reached XYZ Company. All of our operators

are busy at the moment, but please hold and our next available operator will be with you momentarily.) you assure the callers they are important and that their call will be answered in sequence, and that they should wait and not hang up. Without this announcement most people will hang up after five or six rings.

Note: Be creative with your messages, provide important information, advertise special promotions, and in general, keep your customers entertained and informed while they are waiting.

Management Information System (MIS) Reporting

The QuickQ system provides both real time and historical statistical information on the performance of the call center (Agent or line activity).

•

Real-time screens are shown for System Managers and for Groups in Section 5 under the heading

Selecting The Real Time Report.

•

Historical information is described in details in Section 5 under the heading Selecting Historical

Reports.



Describing QuickQ Agent Features

Account Codes

The system can provide a table of account codes arranged so that a unique number corresponds to a specific call type (for example, call content, product type, and so forth). For example, a software help desk may wish to use account codes to categorize its calls as follows:

Code

100

200

Call Category

Help with Set Up

Help with MS DOS

201

300

301

302

Help with Networked DOS

Help with Word Processing

Help with Databases

Help with Spreadsheets

Agents can enter the account code that corresponds to the type of call they have just dealt with. This information is stored in the systems statistics. System Managers can use the Management Information

Report System to analyze the types of traffic and the topics of that traffic use the Management

Information Report System.

Calls Waiting Indication

The calls waiting indication details the number of calls waiting in the queue. The system displays this information on both the Agents and Supervisors telephones. The calls waiting indication prompts Agents to quickly complete their present activity and answer the calls waiting in the queue. It alerts Supervisors to release available Agents who had been assigned to other tasks.

Log-in / Log-out

Agents move in or out of the system on an individual basis. Each Agent has his or her own three-digit user ID and password. Agents log into the system at the start of their day and log out of the system at the end of their day. When they take lunch or coffee breaks, they use the make set busy feature.

Make Set Busy

An Agent can manually make their telephone busy by pressing the B U S Y interactive button. This allows the Agent to temporarily leave the system (during lunch or breaks).

Supervisor Help and Monitoring

The Supervisor uses the help and monitoring capabilities to provide expert advice to Agents on difficult calls. Supervisors can listen to Agent/customer conversations to ensure courteous and efficient service.

The Help function allows the Agents to request the Supervisor’s help without interrupting the call in progress.

Wrap-up Time

Immediately after he or she terminates a call, the system places that Agent’s telephone into the wrap-up mode. During this wrap-up time, the agent will not be presented any calls. Usually the Agent will take this time to finish any paperwork associated with the call just completed. The Group Supervisor programs the wrap-up time for each individual Agent. Experienced Agents may require less time to wrap up a call than less experienced Agents.

An Agent can shorten a call’s wrap-up time by pressing the R E A D Y interactive button, and similarly can extend a call’s wrap-up time by pressing the B U S Y interactive button.



Describing QuickQ Group Features

Each Group Supervisor can program these features independently for each group to meet its specific requirements.

Alarm Threshold (Time)

Alarm Threshold (Time) is a preprogrammed time parameter to monitor the number of calls waiting in queue (default period is 45 seconds).

Alarm Threshold (Calls in Queue)

Provides an indication to Agents & Supervisors that the number of calls waiting in queue has gone beyond the Alarm Threshold (Time). If the Alarm Threshold (Calls in Queue) is set to a number higher than zero (0), an audible tone will go off at all Agent’s telephones when that preset number of calls has reached the Alarm Threshold (Time). If the Alarm Threshold (Calls in Queue) is set equal to zero (0), the alarm will not go off even if calls have reached the Alarm Threshold (Time). Statistics will still be collected for MIS Reports.

Automatic Day-to-Night Mode

Each Group Supervisor can set their group to automatically switch from day mode to night mode.

•

In night mode, the system answers the incoming calls, plays the prerecorded night announcement, and releases the call.

•

The system will automatically log all agents out when all calls holding, prior to night mode are answered.

Automatic Night-to-Day Mode

QuickQ switches from night mode to day mode when the first Agent of the group logs into the system to take calls. This ensures there is always someone logged in to take calls before the system accepts them.

Automatic Answer Mode

An Agent that operates in the automatic answer mode wears a head set. For incoming calls, the system rings the agent’s telephone and connects the call directly to it.

Manual Answer Mode

An Agent in manual answer mode chooses to answer the incoming call or to reject it using the interactive buttons on his or her telephone.



Overflow Group

The overflow group is a secondary group of Agents to whom the system will direct calls after the overflow threshold time-out occurs (default is 210 seconds). The overflow group allows agents in more than one group to handle calls. By handling calls from other groups, Agents increase the overall call handling efficiency of the system. The system allows 4 overflow groups for each group. The overflow groups are set by the System Manager.

Note: Overflow level 4 can be set to a specific Non-ACD extension.

Example:

Agents in Group Two will receive calls from Group One when the preprogrammed period of time (default is 210 seconds) has gone beyond the overflow threshold (preset depending on the Group’s requirements).

Overflow Threshold

The overflow threshold is the period of time that the system holds a call before it transfers it to an overflow group.

Priority Call Handling

There are four call handling priority levels (01 is the highest priority and 04 is the lowest priority).

System Managers can assign a priority status to sub-groups of telephone lines. The system will queue the calls that arrive on those lines ahead of the calls that arrive on non-priority lines.

Example: Assign 800 numbers a priority of 01 so Agents will answer these calls before they answer any other call. This is important, as billing starts as soon as the QuickQ answers the call.

Individual Agents can have a priority status (01 to 04). The system assigns calls to Agents with the highest priority before it assigns calls to lower priority Agents.

Example: Assign Agent 200 a priority of 01 and Agent 209 a priority of 04. Agent 200 will receive incoming calls before Agent 209 receives any regardless of idle time. This allows Agent 209 to be available for calls yet be less likely to be interrupted from any other assigned work. This means Agent

209 can do assigned paperwork during a known slack period and still be available to answer calls if all other Agents are busy.

Redirect Threshold

If a call is not answered by an Agent (for example, the Agent forgot either to log-out or to make their telephone busy before leaving their desk) for a period of time defined as the redirect threshold time, the system will redirect the call to another Agent or group and automatically make the Agent’s telephone busy. This occurs only in Manual Answer Mode.

Call Screen Mode

This mode of call routing sends all calls to the digital voice announcer. Callers hear the complete initial delay announcement before their call is directed to an Agent. Usually the message is used to provide the caller with certain information (promotional information or instructions such as “Please have your credit card number ready”) prior to talking to an Agent.


GCA70-271 Using the Mouse and Keyboard

Using the Mouse and Keyboard

You can use the QuickQ system with either the mouse pointing device or the standard keyboard. Employ the method with which you feel most comfortable

If you are unsure how to navigate the QuickQ menus and enter data or select items, refer to Appendix A for a description of the QuickQ graphical windowing environment, and details for using the mouse and keyboard.

If you are confident that you can use these techniques adequately, go on to QuickQ programming.

Using The Mouse and Keyboard 2-1

GCA70-271 Programming QuickQ

Programming QuickQ

You can program the QuickQ features by any of the following parameters:

•

•

•

System,

Group,

Sub-group,

•

Agent.

You must program QuickQ from the system console windows graphic environment using either the mouse or the keyboard. If you are not familiar with using a mouse or the keyboard in a windows graphic environment, refer to Appendix A.

Understanding System Startup

At initial installation, the installer performs system startup and programs the DXP digital communications system and the QuickQ to work together.

The system begins operation with the following default settings:

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Technician ID #

System Manager ID #

Group Supervisor ID #

Agent’s ID #

Overflow Threshold

Alarm Threshold

Priority Override

Automatic Force Call

Day to Night Mode

Agent Priority Level

First Message

Night Message

First Message Delay

Line Priority Level

832

900

901 to 916

No default

210 seconds

45 seconds

2 minutes

No

Yes

01

1

3

10 seconds

01

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Technician Password

System Manager Password

Group Supervisor Password

Agent Password

Overflow Group

Redirect Threshold

Alarm Threshold Calls in Queue

Call Screening

Manual Answer

Time for Day to Night Mode

Agent Wrap-up

Second Message

Special Message

Music Interval

832

900

901 to 916

No default

No overflow

20 seconds

0

No

Yes

5:30 p.m.

10 seconds

2

4

30 seconds

To determine which settings are applicable to you, refer to the relevant headings on the following pages.

Programming The QuickQ System 3-1

Programming QuickQ GCA70-271

Preparing System Layout / Worksheets

Prepare the system manager’s programming worksheet before you actually configuring the system at the console, and use this worksheet as a reference to assist you in entering the information required over the following pages. There is an example worksheet in Appendix B.

Programming The System Level Configuration

Performing Initial Sign In

Use the following steps to gain access to the system.

1. Press

Esc to close the QuickQ Status window (Figure 3-1).

Figure 3-1 QuickQ Status Window

2. On the main system window, select the S i g n - I n menu bar option. Either move the pointer to it and click the left mouse button, or hold down the Alt key and press the S key (Figure 3-2).

Figure 3-2 Sign In Window

3-2 Programming The QuickQ System


3. The System Access window appears, and the ID# box will display 100. You can type without having to first clear this value (Figure 3-3).

Figure 3-3 ID and Password

4. The System Manager ID# and the password both default to 900. Type 900 at the ID# box and press

Enter

. The highlight moves to the Password box. Type

900 again and press

Enter

.

5. The Supervisor/Manager Sign In window appears. Highlight the M a n a g e r line and press Enter

(Figure 3-4).

Figure 3-4. Supervisor Sign In Window



6. The screen display changes to show the Manager window, and the menu bar will now display a series of five options:

•

S i g n - o u t

•

•

•

•

S y s t e m - S e t u p

G r o u p - P r o g r a m m i n g

S y s t e m - B a c k u p

M a n a g e m e n t - I n f o

You are now signed in to the QuickQ system. For security reasons you may wish to change your ID# and password at this time.



Setting Up The System

Setting the Company Name

1. Select System Setup from the menu bar. This will display a menu containing seven options:

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

C o m p a n y

I D / P a s s w o r d

T i m e / D a t e

I n t e r g r o u p

A n n o u n c e m e n t

A c c o u n t

S t a t - B i n

N a m e

O v e r f l o w

C o d e

2. Select the Company Name option. The Company Name window appears. Type in the desired company name.

3. To save the changes, click on Save-To-Disk , or hold down the Alt key and the S key at the same time.

4. The Save Company Name window appears. Selecting Yes or press Alt Y prompts the system to save the changes and to close all windows automatically. Selecting No or press Alt N returns to the

Company Name window. You can now close this window by pressing Esc or double clicking on the close box.

Changing Passwords and ID’s

Using the following procedure, select the group of your choice from the ID/Password window, change the group names, change the Supervisor names, and change the ID# and passwords of the Supervisors of all groups.

1. Pull down the System Setup from the menu bar and select ID/Password from the second line of the menu.

2. The menu closes and the ID/Password window appears with the highlight bar over the Gp. 00

SYSTEM line. Press

Enter or click on the highlight with the mouse (Figure 3-5).

Figure 3-5. IDs/Passwords


Programming QuickQ

3. The Edit ID and Password window appears as shown in Figure 3-6.

GCA70-271

Figure 3.6. Edit ID and Password Window

Note: Group 00 refers to the Manager’s Password/ID. This does not refer to one of the call processing groups. For Groups 01 - 16, enter the name of each department that will be processing ACD calls.

4. If you wish to change the name, type in the new name at the highlight. To move to the Supervisor box, press the

Tab key or click on the box with the mouse.

5. If you wish to change the name of the Supervisor, type in the new name. To move to the ID# box, press the

Tab key or click on the box with the mouse.

6. Type in the ID# you wish to use (you can use only numeric digits for the ID# and password, Range

100 to 999).

7. Move to the Password box and type in the password you wish to use (you can use only numeric digits for the ID# and password 100 to 999).

8. When you have entered the details in the boxes to your satisfaction, select the U p - d a t e option from the menu bar or press Alt U to save your new details.

9. The Save Changes window appears. If select Yes or press Alt Y , the system saves the changes and closes the Save changes window and the Edit ID and Password windows automatically. Select No or press Alt N returns to the Edit ID and Password window. Press Esc or double click on the closebox to exit the Edit ID and Password window. You can now set or change other system parameters.

10. After making all necessary changes, select the S a v e - T o - D i s k option on the menu bar or press

Alt S to save the changes to the hard drive.



11. The Save ID / Password window appears. If select Y e s or press Alt Y , the system saves all changes made and all windows closes automatically. If your option is N o or if you press Alt N , the Save ID /

Password window closes. You will return to the ID / Password window. You can now exit this window by pressing Esc or double click on the close box.

Setting the Time and Date

The time and date are set within your telephone system (refer to your Telephone User Manual). This option is used to synchronize the QuickQ time and date to the Phone system. This function is performed automatically every hour, but can be performed manually as follows:

1. Pull down the S y s t e m S e t u p menu.

2. Select Time/Date . A small Time/Date window appears.

3. If the displayed time and date are incorrect, click on the S y n .

C l o c k box, or press

Enter.

This synchronizes the clock with the clock in the DXP (Figure 3-7) and closes the window automatically.

4. If no changes are necessary, close the window by double clicking on the close box or pressing the Esc key.

Figure 3-7. Synchronizing The Clock



Setting the Intergroup Overflow

Intergroup overflow improves the effectiveness of a Call Center by utilizing additional groups

(departments) as back-up to answer calls, if the primary group is busy beyond the set time parameters.

Once the overflow timer has been exceeded, the system presents the call to the first available of the five groups (primary and four overflow). For calls to overflow to the appropriate groups, you must set the overflow patterns using the following procedure:

1. Pull down the System-Setup menu and select the Intergroup Overflow option. The

InterGroup Overflow window appears with a list of each group and their respective overflow levels

(Figure 3-8). Overflow level 4 should display four extension numbers.

Figure 3-8. InterGroup Overflow Window

2. Use the Up and Down arrows and the

Page Up and

Page Down keys to highlight the group for which you wish to set the overflow parameters, and either press Enter or click on it with the mouse to select it.

3. The Edit ACD InterGroup Overflow window appears.

4. Press the Up/Down arrow keys to change between groups. Alternately, you can press the

Enter key on a highlighted field to cause a pull-down menu to appear, then highlight the overflow option for that field. Press Enter again to insert the highlighted setting in the field and close the menus. To set the four overflow levels, use

Tab to move from field to field. With the mouse, click on the down arrow at the end of the field to display the same menu. Click on a menu option to select it. This action automatically closes the menu.

5. When you have set the four overflow levels to your satisfaction, use the mouse to click on the

U p - D a t e menu bar option and close the box or Press Alt U .



6. The Save Intergroup Overflow window with Yes and No option appears. Use the mouse to click on

Yes or press Alt Y to save changes and automatically closes the menu. Click on No or press the Alt N key to return to the Edit ACD Intergroup Overflow window. If, at this point, you wish to exit the window, double click on the close box with your mouse or press the Esc key.

7. When you have set the overflow patterns for all of the groups that you will use, use the mouse to click on the Save-To-Disk option on the menu bar or press Alt S . The Save Intergroup Overflow window appears. Select Yes or press Alt Y saves the changes and closes the windows automatically.

Press the Esc key or double click on the close box to exit.

Setting Announcement Titles

The integrated D.V.A. provides voice storage for 16 messages (total 5 min. 20 sec. recording time). These messages are recorded from any telephone set logged in as a supervisor.

Note: Describing the content of these messages can be added to the P.C. by the manager.

Use the following procedures to set the Announcement Titles:

1. Pull down the S y s t e m S e t u p menu and select the A n n o u n c e m e n t option.

2. The Message window appears (Figure 3-9) to provide information.3.Use the Tab key or click on the mouse to move the highlight to the D e s c r i p t i o n field ofthe message that you wish to title. Type a reminder note to help you identify and locate the various messages.

Figure 3-9 Message Window



3. Use the Tab key or click on the mouse to move the highlight to the D e s c r i p t i o n field of the message that you wish to title. Type a reminder note to help you identify and locate the various messages.

Note: The times shown beside the descriptions detail both the total time allocated to the message (that is, the length of time occupied by the,first version of the message) and the amount of recording time that the current message occupies.

4. If a number is selected by clicking on the mouse or pressing Enter, it will open the Message

Information window indicating which group and subgroup is assigned the message. It also indicates whether the message is a first, second, night or special message. This window is mainly for information purpose and does not include editing function. Press Esc or double click on the close box to exit.

5. After updating the reminder notes for different messages, select Save-To-Disk. The Save Changes window will appear. Select Yes, or press Alt Y to save the changes and close both windows. Select No or press Alt N to return to the Message window. Press Esc or double click on the close box to exit.

Assigning Account Codes

QuickQ enables you to classify calls into various categories by assigning account codes to the calls.

Agents classify each call from their telephone using the account codes that the System Manager assigns with this procedure.

1. Pull down the S y s t e m - S e t u p menu and select the A c c o u n t C o d e option. The Account

Code Range window appears.

2. Type the appropriate account code range and click on the O k button. The Account Code Setup window appears (Figure 3-10).

Note: The Account Code Range window allows you to select a range of account codes from a long list. If you only have a few account codes, you can bypass this screen by clicking on the Ok button.

3. To add new account codes, select A d d from the menu bar or press Alt A . The Add Account Code

Setup window appears.

4. Enter the new three digit code and press Enter. Type a description of the account code in the

D e s c r i p t i o n area. Click on the Create Account menu bar or press Alt C . The Add Account confirmation window appears.

Note: The code and description appears in the Account Code Report.

5. Click on YES or press Alt Y to add the information that you have just entered onto the Account Code

Setup list. The system returns to the Add Account Code Setup window for another entry. If no further account is to be entered, press Esc or double click on the close box to close this window. You will return to the Account Code Setup window.



6. To edit an existing code, highlight the code and press Enter or click on the code with the mouse. The

Edit Account Code Set up window appears.

7. After making the necessary changes, select Update from the menu bar or Press Alt U . The Save

Changes to Account window appears. Click on Yes or press Alt Y saves all changes made to the code.

The Edit Account Code Setup window & Save Changes to Account window disappears automatically.

You will return to the Account Code Setup window.

8. To delete an Account Code, highlight the code and press Enter or click on the code with mouse.

Select Delete from the menu bar or Press Alt D on the Edit Account Code Setup window. The Delete

Account confirmation window appears. Click on Yes or press Alt Y will delete the account code highlighted. The Edit Account Code Setup window and Delete Account confirmation window closes automatically. Click on No or press Alt N closes the Delete Account confirmation window. You are now returned to the Edit Account Code Setup window. If no further changes is desired, Press Esc or click on the close box to exit.

9. After you finish setting up your account codes, select Save-To-Disk on the menu bar or Press Alt

S . The Save Account Code(s) confirmation window will appear. Click on Yes or press Alt Y to save the changes to the hard disk and to close the window automatically. Click on No or press Alt N will return to the Account Code Setup window. If you do not want to save the changes previously entered, press Esc or double click on the close box to exit. Repeat the same steps to exit the Account Code

Range window.

Note: The Account Code and description appears in the Account Code Report.

Figure 3.10. Account Code Setup Window



Arranging The Stat-Bins

QuickQ has six levels of stat-bins for answered and abandoned call statistics. Use the following procedure to setup the time bins that are used to collect the system statistics.

1. Pull down the System-Setup menu and select the Stat-Bin option.

2. A pull down menu appears with Answer Bin & Abandon Bin .

Figure 3-11. Answer Time Bin Window

3. Select A nswer Bin and the Answer Time Bin window appears. Highlight the Time Bin 01 box

(Figure 3-11).

4. Type the time bin parameters in minutes and seconds. Repeat for all remaining time bins. You can move from one time bin to another by pressing Enter. Save the newly entered data by clicking on the

Save-To-Disk menu bar item.

5. The Save Answer Time Bin window with Yes and No option appears. Click on Yes or press Alt Y saves the data entered and closes all windows. Click on No or press Alt N closes the Save Answer

Time Bin window and returns to the Answer Time Bin window. Press Esc or double click on the close box to exit this window.

6. Pull down the Stat-Bin menu and select Abandon Bin option. Repeat step 4. The Save Abandon

Time Bin window appears after selecting Save-To-Disk on menu. Click on Yes or press Alt Y saves the data entered and closes all windows. Click on No or press Alt N closes the Save Answer

Time Bin window and returns to the Answer Time Bin window. Press Esc or double click on the close box to exit this window.



Programming Group Levels

By System Manager

Group Supervisors can only alter the parameters for their particular group but System Managers can use this procedure to change any of the settings for any of the groups.

1. Select the Group Programming from the Manager window menu bar. A pull-down menu appears with the names of all the groups on the system (Figure 3-12).

Figure 3-12. List of System Groups

2. Select the group you require (either highlight it and press Enter or click on it with the mouse). A small window appears offering you the chance to either sign through to that group or to abandon the action.

Select the action you wish to perform by clicking on the appropriate button.

3. No further action takes place if you select N o ; however, you can choose another option from the

Manager window menu bar.

4. If you select Y e s , the system puts you at the Manager/Supervisor level. The screen will change to the

Supervisor screen where you will have access to all of the group Supervisor facilities. (These are described in the Group Level Programming By Supervisor).

5. When you sign out from the Manager/Supervisor level, the system returns to the normal Manager level. To log out from the system, make sure you are at the Manager window (and not at the

Manager/Supervisor window), and select the S i g n O u t option from the menu bar. The system then displays the Sign In window showing the S i g n I n option menu bar. The system is now ready for the next person to sign into the QuickQ system.



By Group Supervisor

As a Group Supervisor, you must sign into the system using the following procedure.

1. On the main system window, select the Sign-In menu bar option. The system Access window appears.

The Group Supervisor’s default ID# and password are follows: 901 for group 1, 902 for group 2, and so on through 916 for group 16. If you experience difficulty, verify ID and password numbers with the

System Manager.

2. Press Enter of click on Select at the Supervisor/Manager Sign-In Window.

•

•

•

•

3. Once you have signed into the system, the Supervisor window appears and the main menu bar displays five options:

Group Setup

Agent Group Setup

Line Group Setup

Management Info.

From here, you can set certain parameters for your group and examine the Management Information

System reports.

Preparing The Group Layout / Worksheet

Always prepare your Group Supervisor’s programming worksheet before you begin configuring the group at the console. Refer to Appendix C of this publication for the Group Supervisor’s Programming

Worksheet.



Configuring The Group

Use this procedure to configure your group parameters:

1. Select G r o u p S e t u p from the menu bar. The Group Setup window (Figure 3-13) appears and shows the group name in the title bar. The screen also displays the default settings for a variety of parameters. Continue with step 2.

2. To change the overflow threshold, move the highlight to the top box, and enter the new time in place of the old time. This programming action sets the time that a call waits before the system transfers it to the overflow groups.

3. Repeat step 2 to set the Redirect Threshold (Time). Always set this time to less than one minute (the default time is 20 seconds). If a call is ringing beyond the Redirect Threshold time, the system will transfer the call to another agent. At the same time, it will also make the previous agent Busy, so calls will not be directed to this agent.

4. The Alarm Threshold (Time) is a preprogrammed time parameter to monitor the number of calls waiting in queue (default period is 45 seconds). When the Alarm Threshold (Time) works together with the Alarm Threshold (Calls in Queue), the audible alarm will trigger on the Agents’ sets.

Figure 3-13. Group Setup Window

5. The A l a r m T h r e s h o l d ( C a l l s I n Q u e u e ) specifies the number of calls exceeding the Alarm Threshold Time before the audible alarm is triggered. To disable the audible alarm, set this parameter to 0. If you wish to primarily use the A l a r m T h r e s h o l d ( T i m e ) to trigger the alarm, set this parameter to 1.

6. The Priority Override time determines how long a low priority call remains in queue before the system promotes it to the highest priority. This is useful when a number of high priority calls are coming in and a low priority call has been waiting for some time.



7. If you set the Call Screening field to Yes , the system forces all callers to listen to the entire first message. This action reduces the number of calls that require personal assistance by providing the information on the first message.

8. Use the Automatic Force Call field when the Agents are using a headset. The system sounds a tone in the Agent’s headset and connects the call. The default setting is No . The action provided by this feature is the opposite of Manual answer . Therefore, if you set this option to No , the system automatically changes Manual answer to Yes .

9.

M a n u a l A n s w e r mode is used when agents have to answer calls with the handset. When the

A u t o m a t i c F o r c e - C a l l is changed to N o , this option will be set to Y e s automatically.

10.

D a y t o N i g h t Mode specifies whether the system will automatically switch to night mode at the specified D a y - t o - N i g h t Mode time.

11. Enter the time for Day-to-Night Mode in the last box. This time is based on a 24-hour clock.

12. After finishing with the Group Setup window, use the Save-To-Disk option on the menu bar before you close the window.

13. The Save Group S e t u p window appears. Select Yes or press Alt Y to save and close the windows automatically. Select No or press Alt N to close the Save Group Setup window and return to the Group Setup window. Press Esc or double click on the close box to exit.



Configuring the Agent Group-Setup

Use this Agent group setup procedure to assign agents to the Agent sub-groups, to remove Agents from a group, and to set or change Agents’ ID#, password, priority and wrap-up times. Agents may be assigned to one of four Sub-groups. These Sub-groups are used for statistic purposes only. (For example: Subgroup

1 contains all full-time staff, subgroup 2 are all part-time staff, etc.) Calls will be distributed to all agents in all subgroup evenly.

1. Select Agent Group Setup from the menu bar, a pull down menu appears with 4 Agent Groups. Select the sub-group you wish to work with and the Agent Group Window appears. The scrollable area (the area with scroll bar on the right edge) contains the Agent details. If there are no agents in the group, this area is blank (Figure 3-14).

Figure 3-14. Agent Group Window

2. If the selected subgroup does not exist, the Add Agent Group Window will appear. Select Yes or press

Alt Y creates the subgroup and opens the Agent Group Window.

3. To add an agent, select Add from the menu bar. The Add Agent Window appears at the top of the screen (Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15. Add Agent Window



4. Type the name of the Agent at the AGENT default entry.

Note: If you are using the keyboard, use the Tab key to move from field to field. If you are using the mouse, click on the field you wish to work with.

5. Enter the ID# and password for the Agent. When you are in the Priority field, press Enter or click on the arrow icon, and a drop-down menu appears. From this menu, select the priority for the

Agent (Priority 01 is the highest and 04 is the lowest. When a call comes in, it will first be sent to agents with the highest priority). Enter the wrap-up time (in minutes and seconds) in the Wrap Up field (Wrap-up time provides the agents a short break to finish off their paper work before they are assigned another call).

6. After you have entered all Agent details, select the Create-Agent from the menu bar. The Add

Agent Window appears prompting you with Yes or No . Select Yes or press Alt Y will add to the agent list and return to the Add Agent Window. If there is no more entry, press Esc or click on the close box to exit the Add Agent Window.

7. If you wish to change or delete an Agent entry from the sub-group, highlight it and press Enter or click on it with the mouse. The Edit Agent Setup window appears, and provides two options on the menu bar, Up-Date and Delete . After changing the agent information, select Update or press Alt U .

The Update Agent Information window appears with Yes and No option. Select Yes or press Alt Y saves the changes made. The Edit Agent Setup window and the Update Agent Information window closes automatically. Select No or press Alt Y closes the Update Agent Information window and returns to the Edit Agent Setup window.

Note: Press Enter to move the cursor from the Agent Group Name to the Agent in the scrollable area.

8. If you wish to delete the agent from the sub-group, click on the D e l e t e option or press the Alt D key. The Delete agent from sub-group window appears. Select Y e s or press the Alt Y to delete the agent from the Agent Group list. The Delete agent from sub-group window and the Edit Agent Setup window closes automatically.

9. After entering all agent information, select Save-To-Disk on the menu bar or press Alt S . The Save

Agent Group window appears with Yes and No prompt. Select Yes or press Alt Y saves all information to the hard disk and closes the windows automatically. Select No or press Alt N closes the

Save Agent Group window and returns to the Agent Group Window. Press Esc or click on the close box to exit.



Configuring the Line Group-Setup

During installation, the technician assigns the lines to different Subgroups e.g. local lines will be grouped in one Subgroup and In wats lines will be grouped into another Subgroup. L i n e G r o u p - S e t u p is used to set up various parameters for the line groups. It provides end users flexibility of assigning different messages and priority levels to the different Subgroups. Use this L i n e G r o u p - S e t u p procedures to configure parameters for the installer-assigned line groups

1. Select Line Group-Setup from the menu bar, and select one sub-group from the drop-down menu. The Line Group window opens with the title of the line group in the title bar (Figure 3-16). If the selected Line Group does not exist, the Add Line Group Window appears. Select Yes or Press Alt

Y to create a Line Group and the Line Group Window appears.

Figure 3-16. Line Group Window

Note:If you open a non-existing Line Group b by mistake,always select No or press Alt N . Once you create a new Line Group,it cannot be removed-lf the line Group created will appear on aIl Line Group reports. However, this will not affect normal operation.

2. To change the name of the line group, highlight the Line Group Name box and begin typing.

Note: If you are using the keyboard, use the Tab key to move from field to field and you are using the mouse, click on the field you wish to work with.

3. You can specify which messages (16 available messages)the system will use. If all agents are busy, the first message offers an introductory message and put customers on hold. The second message reassures customers that an agent will be with them shortly. The default is messages I and 2 respectively.

4. The system plays the night message while QuickQ is in night mode, and disconnects the caller at the end of the message. The default for &s message is 3.

5. The system plays the special message in unusual circumstances and disconnects the caller at the end of the message. Special message can be used in emergency situations such as power failure, bomb threat if the office has to close early. When the system switches to night mode, the special message or system switch automatically changes to night message.



6. The First Message Intercept Delay is the time between when QuickQ answers the call and plays the first message to the caller since all agents are busy. Enter this time in minutes and seconds (default equals 10 seconds).

7. The Music interval is the time between messages(between the first and second. and between repeats of the second message). Enter this time in minutes and seconds (default equals 30 seconds).

8. Establish the line group priority. Click on the arrow icon or press Enter to open a drop-down menu.

Use this menu to choose a priority level (01 is the highest priority and 04 is the lowest priority).

Priority lines are usually assigned to in wats lines to cut down long distance cost.

9. When you have finished setting the parameters, save your changes by selecting the save-To-Disk option from the menu bar. The Save Line-Group Changes window appears. Select Yes or press Aft Y to save and close the windows.

Understanding the Messages

The QuickQ system can store up to 16 messages. The Message window (refer to Setting Announcement

Titles on Page 3-9) allows you to view the length and number of these messages. You can enter a description to label each one if you wish.

The Current setting shows the length of the message in minutes and seconds. The Limit setting shows the time available for the message. QuickQ allows a total of 320 seconds of message recording time.

If you plan to frequently change the messages, record a blank message with enough recording time for future changes. Refer to the discussion titled Recording Announcement Message and Playback in the

QuickQ operation section of this guide for message recording and playback information.

Management Information

QuickQ provides both real time and historical statistical information on the performance of the call center.

Supervisors can select M a n a g e m e n t I n f o . from the menu bar and a drop down menu with the following 5 options appears:

•

•

•

•

•

Real Time-Setup

Real Time

Historical

Current

Configuration

Refer to Section 5, Management Information for further details.



System-Backup

The QuickQ automatically stores all Programming changes and Statistical Data to the P.C.’s hard disk.

The System - Backup option provides a method to back-up data, onto floppy disk. This ensures safe storage of the Digital Announcement Messages, the Configuration Parameters and the Statistical Reports.

It is a good practice to always back-up an), changes to messages and configuration programming-, thus., protecting against interruptions in power, hardware failures and inadvertent deletion of information,

QuickQ is equipped with sufficient memory to store several years of Statistical Reports. However,

Statistical Reports should be backed-up every 3-4 months. Delete all unwanted reports and save to floppy disk important data for storage. This will ensure optimum efficiency of the hard disk, protect important data and ensure the hard disk has sufficient space to store future data.

Announcement Backup

To back up the messages, perform the following procedure-

1. Select System-Backup from the Manager Window main menu and a drop down menu with the following three options appears:

Announcement Backup

Configuration Backup

Stats Backup

2. Select A n n o u n c e m e n t B a c k u p and the Message Backup and Restore window appears (refer to Figure 3-17).

Figure 3-17. Message Backup and Restore Window



3. Use the Backup button to send the current DVA messages to the floppy disk. The Restore button retrieves the DVA messages from the floppy disk to the hard drive.

Note: Use the Tab key to move from the Backup button to the R e s t o r e Button. The messages are backed up to the 3.5–inch.floppy disk drive in the DVA, not the floppy disk drive in the call processor-Install the correct floppy disk in the DVA drive before you start a backup or restore action.

Configuration Backup

1. Select Configuration Backup on the System-Backup pull down menu. The System Program

Back-up/Restore window appears. Refer to Figure 3-18.

2. Select the B a c k up button to send the current System Programs to the floppy, disk. The Back up to

Floppy window appears with Yes and No option. To initiate the backup process, press Alt Y or use your mouse to click on Yes .

Figure 3-18. System Program Back-up/Restore Window

3. To restore System Programs, select the Restore button. The Restore Window, appears with two options: Continue and Cancel. Selecting continue resets the system before the data is restored.



Stats Backup

1. Select S t a t s B a c k u p from the S y s t e m - B a c k u p pull down menu, the Report

Back-Up/Clean-Up window appears. Refer to Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19. Report Back-Up/Clean-Up Window

2. Use the Tab key to move from the C a n c e l button to the B a c k u p button. Select C a n c e l exits this function and closes the Report Back-Up/Clean-Up window. When selecting B a c k u p , the

Report Backup/Cleanup window appears. Refer to Figure 3-20. Select the C o n t i n u e button to initiate the Report Back-Up function. Refer to Appendix E, Backup Utility section for details.

Figure 3-20. Report Backup/Cleanup Confirmation Window


GCA70-271 Operating the QuickQ System

Operating the QuickQ System

Logging In and Out of QuickQ

•

•

The following Log-In and Log-Out procedures apply to both Agent and Supervisor. They differ in the following areas:

•

ID# and password are different,

Agents can log into several groups at once,

Supervisors can choose whether to receive calls or not.

Follow this procedure to log into the system.

1. Press the Q u i c k Q button on the telephone and the following screen will appear. This display notifies you that you are about to log into QuickQ.

Welcome - > QuickQ

2. Type your three digit Agent ID number. If you enter an incorrect Agent ID number, press the

R E T R Y interactive button and enter the correct ID number, or use the Q U I T interactive button to exit the Log-In procedure.

Agent ID:_

RETRY QUIT

3. Type your Agent p a s s w o r d .

Remember, use RETRY or QUIT if necessary.

Password:

RETRY QUIT

4. For Agents:

The system asks the agents to log into the appropriate group. If the supervisors has assigned you to multiple groups, use the displayed screen to locate the group into which you wish to log. Press the I N interactive button to log into the displayed group. The system displays your next group. You can press the IN interactive button to log into that group or press the S K I P interactive button to display the next group after that and so on. Alternately, press the A L L interactive button and log into all of the groups at once.

Group 1?

IN SKIP ALL

Operating The QuickQ System 4-1

Operating the QuickQ System GCA70-271

For Supervisors:

The system presents supervisor with a screen that asks if they wish to accept calls or not. Respond by pressing either the Y E S or N O interactive button.

Answer Call?

YES NO

5. The following screens indicates you are now ready to accept ACD calls:

For Agents:

QuickQ: Group Name

BUSY HELP LOG


Group Name :Day

MENU MODE LOG

6. For Agents logged into one group:

You can log out from QuickQ while in the Ready, Busy or Wrap-up modes. To do this, press the LO G interactive button. You are now in the Log Procedure, press the OUT interactive button to log out.

Log Procedure

IN CANCEL OUT

For Agents logged into multiple groups:

After you press the OUT interactive button from the Log Procedure, the system asks which group you wish to log out from. You can press the OUT interactive button to log out of the group shown on the display. You can press the SKIP interactive button to display the next group. Press the ALL interactive button to log out of all the groups that have more than one agent.

Group Name

OUT SKIP ALL

The last agent cannot log out of QuickQ if the group is in day mode. The following screens will appear: after 2 seconds:

Can’t Sign Out

CANCEL

Busy

CANCEL


Press the LOG interactive button will bring you to the Log Procedure. Then press the OUT interactive button. The screen will ask whether you want to exit QuickQ. Press the Yes interactive button to exit.

Log Procedure

IN CANCEL OUT

Exit from QuickQ

YES NO

4-2 Operating The QuickQ System


Operating As An Agent

Answering Automatically

In the automatic answer mode, with a headset enabled, when a call arrives at your telephone, you receive a warning tone and the system automatically connects the call. Speak into the mouth-piece of the headset.

The display shows the call sub-group and the length of time the caller waited to be connected.

Sub-Group Name: 01:20

BUSY

Answering Manually

In the manual answer mode when a call arrives at your telephone, the telephone will ring.

•

Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to answer the call. The LCD display shows the call sub-group and the length of time the caller waited to be connected.

Note: Use the speakerphone option with discretion as it creates noise in the office and subjects your caller to background noise as well.

•

You may choose not to answer the call by pressing the B U S Y interactive button. QuickQ will either redirect the call to another Agent, or it will show A l l A g e n t s B u s y !

on the display if no one is available to take the call. If the display shows A l l A g e n t s B u s y ! , you cannot make your telephone busy.

All Agents Busy!

BUSY

•

When a call has reached the preset redirect threshold time, the system will forward the call to another agent and will make your set BUSY at the same time.

Busy

CANCEL HELP LOG

Wrapping Up A Call

At the end of each call the system sets aside an installer-programmed time (individually programmable for each Agent in minutes and seconds) before presenting the next call. This time allows you to finish any processing or paperwork associated with the call you just completed.

•

When you disconnect the call, the wrap-up timer starts and the display shows the wrap-up time, the number of calls in queue, and the number of those calls that have waited beyond the alarm threshold.

• Either remain in wrap-up mode until the wrap-up timer expires or press the to return to Ready mode.

R E A D Y interactive button

Wrap-up—> 20 sec.

READY ACC BUSY after 2 seconds

Waiting : 00 <T : 00

READY ALL BUSY



Making Your Telephone Busy

You can arrange your telephone to be unavailable to answer calls (for such times as lunch and breaks).

•

•

To make your telephone busy, press the

To return to the ready mode, press the

B U S Y interactive button.

C A N C E L interactive button.

Busy

CANCEL HELP LOG

Requesting Help

When necessary, you can use this procedure to request help from your Supervisor.

1. While engaged on a call, press the H E L P interactive button. If the Supervisor is busy or unavailable

(after 5 seconds of prompting) your telephone display shows S u p e r v i s o r B u s y !

. You can either retry or cancel the request.

Line Name Sub Grp Name

ACC WRAP HELP

2. When the Supervisor calls you, you can either bring him or her into the call (conferencing) or put the caller on hold and speak to the Supervisor in private.

Supervisor Ready!

CONF HOLD

3. If you choose to speak to the Supervisor with the call on H O LD , you have the option of bringing in the customer into the conversation later by pressing the CONF soft key. Alternately, you can press

TRANS to transfer the call to the Supervisor, or press RETURN to get back to the caller after receiving assistance from the Supervisor.

Line Name:

CONF RETURN

Held!

TRANS

4. While conferencing with the Supervisor, you can press the R E L E A S E interactive button to drop the

Supervisor from the call or transfer the call to the Supervisor.

Ln Name:

CONF

Supvr. Name

RETURN TRANS



Transferring Calls In or Out of QuickQ

Use this procedure to transfer calls.

1. While on a call, press the telephone’s TRANS button.

2. Dial the intercom number of the station to receive the transfer. The system will transfer the call. After the station receiving the transfer answers the call, the system will place your station in the wrap-up mode.

Making an Outgoing Call

To make an outside call, press the LINE GROUP button to connect your telephone to an outgoing line, and make your call in the normal way. While on an outgoing call, you can either request help from your

Supervisor, enter an account code for the call, or wrap-up the call in the same way as on an incoming call.

Outgoing

ACC WRAP-UP HELP

Entering Account Codes

You can use any screen that has the A C C option to enter an account code to categorize the call according to the call type.

1. Press the A C C interactive button at any time during the call or during wrap-up mode. Enter the three digit account code (the System Manager manages the account codes). If you enter an incorrect account code, press the RETRY interactive button and enter the correct account code or exit to abandon and return to the original screen.

Acc Code:___

RETRY EXIT

2. Press O K to verify the code or R E T R Y if you enter an incorrect account code. If the code is invalid, the system prompts you to re-enter the code.

Account Description

RETRY OK



Operating As A Supervisor

As a Supervisor, you can log in at either the QuickQ console or the DXP telephone.

Changing the Mode of Operation

There are three distinct answering modes—Day, Night and Special.

•

Day Answering Mode—The system answers with the day message, places calls on hold and distributes incoming calls to the next available Agent. The call distribution is based on the longest idle time, or the priority of the Agent or incoming line.

•

Night Answering Mode—The system answers with the night message then disconnects the caller. This mode is enabled automatically at a preset time. The system automatically logs out all agents when calls in queue have been cleared. Supervisor can change the state manually.

•

Special Mode—The Group Supervisor initiates the special mode for unique situations (for example, network problems). During this mode of operation, the system answers callers with the special message and disconnects them. When the preset night mode time is reached, the system will automatically switch from special mode to night mode.

Use the following procedure to select the required mode of operation:

1. From the Supervisor’s telephone, press the M O D E interactive button.

Group 1 : Day

MENU MODE LOG

2. Select the mode of operation from the following displayed options: D A Y , N I G H T , S P E C I A L .

After you make your selection, the display returns to the Supervisor main menu and shows the new mode at the top right corner.

Group Mode?

DAY NIGHT SPEC’L



Recording And Playing Back The Announcement Message

You can use your telephone to review and change any announcement message. For messages that are to be changed frequently, record your message with a buffer. For instance, record message #1 which takes up 10 seconds, follow by 10 seconds of silence. Go ahead and record message #2. After finished recording message #2, go back to record message #1 again. In this way, customers will only hear the message, and not the blank silence following it. The blank time will be saved as a buffer for future usage.

If there is a change in message #1, it can be 10 seconds longer than the original message. Refer to the discussion titled Recording Announcement Message and Playback in the QuickQ operation section of this guide for message recording and playback information.

Use the following procedure to record a message.

1. Press the M E N U interactive button .

2. Press the M S G interactive button.

Waiting:02 > T:00

MSG REPORT AGENT

The system displays the total time remaining for the new messages.

3. Dial the number of the message that you wish to record or change. For numbers lower than 10, dial a leading 0 (for example, 01–09). Press RETRY if you enter an invalid number, Press CLEAR to clear all message or QUIT to return to the main menu.

Message #:

RETRY CLEAR QUIT

4. The display shows the message length in seconds (it shows 0 seconds for new messages). Press the

R E C interactive button, a tone will alert you to start recording, speak the message into the telephone handset.

Message01: 00sec

REC PLAY QUIT

5. When you have finished, press the S T OP interactive button, a tone indicates the end of the recording.

Recording Msg 01

STOP

Note: If possible, record all of the messages as a group. If you do re-record a message, the new message must be the exact length as it was before or you will record over the next message. For example, if you replace a 15 second message with a 20 second message, you will record over the next message.



6. To review the message, press the P LA Y interactive button.

Accept Message?

YES NO PLAY

7. The system plays the message through the handset.

Playing Msg 01

STOP

7. Press Y E S to accept the message or N O to re-record the message.

Accept Message?

YES NO PLAY

Monitoring The Agents

•

•

•

•

•

You can monitor an Agent’s activity status or telephone conversation. The activity status names the Agent and details the following status items: engaged on an incoming call, engaged on an outgoing call, engaged in Make Busy Mode, idle ready to receive a call.

Use this procedure to monitor a particular Agent:

1. Press the M E N U interactive button.

Group 1 : Day

MENU MODE LOG

2. Press the A GE N T interactive button.

Waiting:02 >T:00

MSG REPORT AGENT

3. Dial the I D # of the Agent you wish to monitor or press S C A N and let the system select an Agent number for you.

Agent Id: ___

SCAN RETRY QUIT



4. Press the S E LE C T interactive button to monitor the Agent’s call.

Agent Name :Incall

SCAN SELECT QUIT

5. Press the S C A N interactive button to monitor another system selected Agent or press QU IT to return to step 3.

Agent2 Name :Idle

SCAN SELECT QUIT

6. Press Q U I T again to return to the Supervisor’s menu.

Viewing The Current Call Statistics

QuickQ causes your LCD speakerphone to display the current number of answered and abandoned (lost) calls within a group.

Use this procedure to view the call statistics.

1. Press the MENU interactive button.

2. Press the REPORT interactive button.

Waiting: 02 >T:00

MSG REPORT AGENT

Your LCD speakerphone displays the number of answered and abandoned calls.

3. Press QUIT to return to Supervisor menu.

Ans: 123 Lost: 4

QUIT


GCA70-271 QuickQ Management Information

Management Information

The System Manager can obtain a detailed printout of the system configuration for the manager level, the technician level, the supervisor level, or for each individual group.

•

•

•

•

•

When someone selects the Management Info.

menu bar option, the system presents a menu that has several options. The menu offers the following options:

R e a l

R e a l

T i m e - S e t u p

T i m e

H i s t o r i c a l

C u r r e n t

C o n f i g u r a t i o n

(For Supervisor)

Selecting The Real Time Report

Viewing The System Manager Real Time Report

The System Manager’s real time report shows information in the System Agent Status window and the

System Line Status window. Refer to Figure 5-1. System Manager Real Time Report. The system continually updates these windows in approximately 3 second intervals so that they reflect current line activities and statistics of both the Agents and the lines.

Figure 5-1. System Manager’s Real Time Report

QuickQ Management Information 5-1

QuickQ Management Information GCA70-271

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The System Agent Status window shows the following items: group number,

Numbers of Agents in that group currently available, number of Agents on incoming calls, number of busy Agents, number of Agents on outgoing calls, number of Agents who are logged out from that group, number of abandoned calls, grade of service being offered to callers.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The System Line Status window shows the following items: group number, number of available lines, number of calls waiting on the lines for the group, number of calls which are over the alarm threshold, number of outgoing calls, number of incoming calls, oldest call in the system, mode of operation.

Selecting The Real Time Set Up Parameters

The system also makes a real time setup option available. With it, Group Supervisors can set a threshold time for incoming calls, outgoing calls, and busy status. When an Agent exceeds the threshold time, the system highlights his or her name with the color red on the real time report screen.

1. Pull down the Management Info . menu and select the Real Time Set-up option. The Real

Time Parameter Set up window appears (Refer to Figure 5-2). To move from field to field, use the Tab key or press Enter . After editing the parameters, select Save-To-Disk or press Alt S . The system saves the changes and closes the window automatically. If no changes are necessary, press Esc or double click on the close box to exit.

Figure 5-2. Real Time Parameter Setup

5-2 QuickQ Management Information


Viewing The Supervisor’s Real Time Report

•

•

•

The system updates the Supervisor’s real time report (refer to Figure 5-3) in approximtely 3-second intervals so that the report continually monitors the group’s current call activities and statistics. In addition to continually updating the service status window, the system restarts that service window’s status totals every 15 minutes. The report windows show the following items traffic status, service status,

•

• traffic activity (explanation on page 5-4), agent activity (explanation on page 5-4).

agent status,

Figure 5-3. Supervisor’s Real Time Report

Traffic Status Definitions

1. Number Of Lines

2. Incoming

3. Outgoing

4. Call Waiting

5. No. Beyond Alarm

6. Oldest Call

Service Status Definitions

1. Time Elapsed

2. Grade Of Service

3. Total Calls

4. Abandoned Calls

5. Operating Mode

Agent Status Definitions

1. Sign In

2. Incoming

3. Outgoing

4. Available

5. Busy

6. Logout

= line available for calls

= active incoming calls (includes calls answered and waiting)

= active outgoing calls

= calls waiting to be answered

= calls waiting beyond alarm threshold time

= time oldest call has waited to be answered

= elapsed time since the window restarted (window details status in

15 minute blocks)

= see the chart on page 5-13

= total calls serviced in current window time

= calls dropped by caller or connected for less than nine seconds

= day mode , night mode or special mode of operation

= agents signed in

= agents on incoming call

= agents on outgoing call

= agents idle

= make busy agents

= agents out of service



Traffic Activity — The Real Time Traffic Activity window shows the activity percentage for the Lines,

Waiting call and the Agent. The Line indicates the percentage of activity on the lines assigned to group.

The activity for the lines can be green for incoming call or yellow for outgoing call. The Waiting indicates what percentage of the incoming calls are actually waiting for an agent. The activity for the waiting call can be red for the calls past the alarm threshold (>T) or black for the calls below alarm threshold. The Agents indicates the percentage of active agents in the possible activity states. The activity for the agents can be gray for agents in Busy state, green for agents on incoming call and yellow for outgoing call.

Agent Activity — The Real Time Agent Activity window shows the current state of each agent signed in to the group. The agent’s name programmed in the QuickQ is displayed in one of the four possible states.

The agent can be in blue for idle state, gray for Busy state, yellow for Outgoing state or green for

Incoming state. The list of names under each possible state is shown based on the longest time in the activity state. The agent’s name box may changed to red under the possible states, if the time in that state has exceeded the acceptable time set for that state.

Selecting Historical Reports

Use this procedure to obtain historical reports.

1. Select Management Info . on the menu bar and click on the H i s t o r i c a l option. The calendar appears, showing the current month, with each day represented by a button. At the bottom of the calendar window are boxes in which you can specify a new month (0 to 12) and a new year. This allows you to call up any stored data by specifying that period.

2. Select the appropriate year and month and press Enter . As you specify new months and new years, the calendar changes to show the month you have selected.

Note: Use the Tab key to move from Month to Year and to the calendar.

3. Select a single day within that month either by using your Up and Down arrow key to move between days, and pressing

Enter

, or clicking on it. Alternatively, you can choose a complete week by using one of the W E E K 0 1 , W E E K 0 2 to W E E K 0 6 buttons on the left side of the calendar, or you can choose the report on the whole month by clicking on the Monthly button at the bottom of the calendar or press Alt M . If you select a single day, a File Selections window appears. Line 00, indicated by a date, allows you to choose reports for the entire day. H00 means hour 0 and H01 means hour1 and so forth. To select numbers 01 and onwards will provide you with a report for a single hour out of that day.

4. After you choose your report period, the system shows the Main Report screen. To continue, refer to

The Main Report Screens.



Selecting Current Reports

Selecting the C u r r e n t option from the M a n a g e m e n t I n f o .

menu causes the Current Report window to appear. This window features two buttons allowing you to select a series of reports for the current hour ( H o u r l y ) or the current day ( D a i l y ). After you choose your report period, the system shows the main report screen.

Selecting The Main Report Screens

The Main Report screens are the same for the daily, weekly and monthly analysis periods. While the hourly report menu lacks some of the report types offered by the other reports. The menu bar offers the report type, report format, note, and print options.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Report Type—Selecting this option from the menu bar causes a R e p o r t - t y p e menu to drop down.

The reports type consists of the following options:

A n s w e r

A b a n d o n

I n c o m i n g

T o t a l

S y s t e m

B i n s

C a l l

T i m e

A v e r a g e

A c c o u n t

T r a f f i c

B i n s

T i m e

C a p a c i t y

C o d e

A n a l y s i s (Current Daily Report)

Highlight the desired report type and press

Enter

, or click on it with the mouse.

Report Format—Selecting this option causes a small two-option menu to drop down that allows you to specify whether you wish to view the currently selected report in either N u m e r i c a l or G r a p h i c format. Highlight the format you wish to use and press

Enter

, or click on it with the mouse.

Note—Selecting this option from the menu bar opens up a small window that allows you to enter free-form text. Use this opportunity to enter as a reminder of the circumstances during which the data was compiled. This is useful when you are looking at historical data and you find something unusual about the reports. Always review at the note for the old report as it may present an important message (for example, Phone company came in to upgrade system - phones off for two hours).

Use the Tab key to cycle through the buttons until the highlight is in the main text window of the Note

Window, or click on the T e x t area with the mouse then type your notes.

To exit from the Note window, highlight and select the A b a n d o n button (does not save your changes), or the S a v e - T o - D i s k option (saves all changes). Both of these options close the window.



Print—To print your report, select the P r i n t menu bar option. The system drops a menu down that offers you the choice of printing the N u m e r i c a l report, G r a p h i c report or B o t h .

Choose one of the three options and the Print Report window appears offering a list of seven report types.

Use the Tab key to cycle from the S t a r t button to the Report Types. To select the type of report, press

Enter and your option will be highlighted with an “X” on the left hand side. Use the up and down arrow keys to move between fields. To start printing, use the mouse to click on the S t a r t button or press Alt S .

Selecting Configuration Reports

The configuration report provides a method to produce a hard-copy (printout) of all system parameters.

Using this option, System Managers and Supervisors can review programmed parameters including

Technician’s Programming, Manager’s Programming and All Group Supervisors’ Programming. This feature is useful in providing Supervisors and Agents a listing of all Account Codes programmed by printing the Managers configuration.

1. Select C o n f i g u r a t i o n from the M a n a g e m e n t I n f o .

pull down menu. The

Configuration Report window appears with three report types:

•

•

•

Group

System

Technician

2. Use the Up and Down arrow keys to cycle through the Report Types, your option will be highlighted on the left hand side.

Note: Only one type of report can be selected each time.

3.

Tab to move from the R e p o r t T y p e s to the G r o u p field. Press Enter or use the mouse to click on the arrow icon on the side. A drop-down menu appears from which you can select a specific group. Again, use the U p and D o w n arrow keys to move between groups. Press E n t e r or click on the mouse to highlight your choice.

4. To start printing Configuration Reports, use the Tab key to move to the P r i n t button and press

Enter or click on the P r i n t button with your mouse.



Selecting QuickQ MIS Reports

The QuickQ provides comprehensive Management Information System (MIS) reports that you can either view on the call processor computer screen or print as a hard copy. The system updates and automatically stores all reports and can present the data in both graphic and numerical formats. This reported information assists the System Manager in making efficient use of lines and agents.

•

•

•

•

The system collects over 63,000 different statistics and presents them in 80 different MIS reports. The system reports are related to the following time periods: hourly, daily, weekly, monthly.

•

•

•

The system reports are categorized for the following four operational levels:

•

The System level reports show data for all lines and agents on the system

The Group level reports provide data for each group programmed on the system.

The Line level reports provide data for each telephone line within a specific group.

The Agent level reports show data for each agent in a specific group.

Viewing Typical MIS Reports

•

•

•

•

•

•

The system provides the following report formats:

•

• answer bins (Figure 5-4) abandon bins (Figure 5-5) incoming call (Figure 5-6) total time (Figure 5-7) average time (Figure 5-8) system capacity (Figure 5-9) account code (Figure 5-10) traffic analysis (Figure 5-11)



Figure 5-4. Answer Bins

Answer Bins

Show percent of answered calls within the 7 programmable time bins.

Shows supervisors the response rates of their departments.

Figure 5-5. Abandon Bins

Abandon Bins

Show percent of abandoned calls within the 7 programmable time bins.

Shows supervisors the tolerance of callers.



Figure 5-6. Incoming Call Report

Incoming Calls—Line Report Definitions

1. Total I/C

2. Incoming Calls–ANS

3. Incoming Calls–ABD

= total incoming calls

= answered incoming calls

= abandoned calls dropped by caller or connected

4. Incoming Calls–NIGHT

5. Answered Calls–DIR

6. Answered Calls–ANNC

7. Ans>T for less than nine seconds

= any calls at night mode (ans, abn, msg)

= calls answered before announcement

= calls answered after announcement

= calls answered after programmed alarm threshold

Incoming Calls—Agent Report Definitions

1. Total Calls–ANS = total incoming calls answered by agent

2. Total Calls–O/G

3. Answered Calls–DIR

4. Answered Calls–ANNC

= total outgoing calls placed by agents

= calls answered before announcement

= calls answered after announcement



Figure 5-7. Total Time Report

Total Time Agent Report Definitions

1. Sign In Time

2. Incoming Time = total time agents are engaged in incoming calls

3. Outgoing Time

= total agent sign in time–updated only if agent has signed out

= total time agents are engaged in outgoing calls

4. Wrap Up Time

5. Busy Time

= total time agents are in wrap-up state

= total time agent set busy (agent press busy & auto busy due to redirect)

6. Idle Time = total time agents are in idle state –up dated only if agents has signed out [(1 - 2 - 3 - 4) = 6]



Figure 5-8. Average Time Report

Average Time Line Report Definitions

1. Waiting Time–Calls = number of incoming calls answered

2. Waiting Time–Average

3. Incoming Call Time–Calls

= average waiting time for each answered incoming call

= number of incoming calls answered

4. Incoming Call Time–Average = average connection time for each answered incoming call

5. Abandoned Call Time–Calls = number of calls abandoned–includes calls connected for less than nine seconds

6. Abandoned Call Time–Average = average waiting time for each abandoned call

Average Time Agent Report Definitions

1. Incoming Call Time–Calls = number of agent answered incoming calls

2. Incoming Call Time–Average = average connection time for each agent answered

3. Outgoing Call Time–Calls incoming call

= number of agent placed outgoing calls

4. Outgoing Call Time–Average = average time for each agent placed outgoing call

5. Wrap Up Time–Call

6. Wrap Up Time–Average

= number of times that agents are in wrap-up state [(1+3) = 5]

= average time agents are in wrap-up state [(5)

÷

(1+3) = 6]



Figure 5-9. System Capacity Report

System Capacity Report shows the total number of times all lines were busy and the total time in hours, minutes, and seconds. It also shows the total number of times that no agent was available and the total time in hours, minutes and seconds.

Figure 5-10. Account Code Report

Account Code Report lists the account codes with their descriptions. It also shows the number of calls logged by the agents for each Account code and the average duration of that code.



Figure 5-11. Traffic Analysis

Traffic Analysis Line Report Definitions

1. Total Calls–I/C

2. Total Calls–O/G

3. Incoming Calls–ANS

= total incoming calls

= total outgoing calls

= answered incoming calls

4. Incoming Calls–ABD = abandoned calls–calls dropped by the caller or connected for less than nine seconds

5. Average Time–Waiting = average waiting time for each answered incoming call

6. Average Time–Abandoned = average waiting time for each abandoned call

7. GOS = grade of service [(3) - (number of calls answered after alarm threshold has expired, obtained from incoming call line report,)

]÷

(3+4) = 7 x 100%


GCA70-271 Appendix

Appendix A

Using QuickQ With a Mouse

A mouse is a device that allows you to move a cursor on the computer screen to specific points for data entry, and other menu selections. An arrow image, called the mouse pointer, moves on the screen when you move the mouse. Practice moving the pointer. Stay away from the menu bar at the top of the screen.

(If you accidentally make a menu appear, you can make it disappear by moving the pointer out of the menu and pressing and releasing the left mouse button.)

Occasionally the pointer might seem to disappear. Usually it is just off the screen. To make the pointer reappear, move the mouse in a circle a few times.

To move the mouse without moving the pointer, lift up the mouse. The pointer does not move while the mouse is in the air.

Most of the time, you use one of the following two mouse button techniques:

• clicking,

• dragging.

Clicking (Selecting an Item)

To click, press the left button and immediately release it. By clicking, you can select an item, such as a menu or an icon.

Note that the top left corner of the screen has a Sign-In label. Use it to perform the following exercise.

Place the pointer at the Sign-In title and click the mouse button. The QuickQ opens the Sign-In window.

Dragging (Moving a Window)

Dragging consists of the following three steps:

•

•

• pressing and holding the left mouse button, moving the mouse, releasing the mouse button.

Dragging allows you to move the position of a Group Setup window on the screen to give yourself a better view of system set-up parameters (for example, the window and the line group window). By having both windows appear at the same time, you can identify the timing parameters that is relative to the line groups.

To move the sign-in window, place the pointer on the title bar, and drag. As you drag, an outline of the window moves with the pointer (note that the pointer changes to a hand icon). Practice moving the sign-in window on the screen.

A–1

Appendix GCA70-271

Understanding QuickQ Window Graphics

If you are familiar with a window environment, you can skip this discussion.

QuickQ is easy to use. Most of what you see and do in the QuickQ console happens in a window. A window is a screen area that the QuickQ system uses to exchange information with you. There are many

QuickQ windows, such as the one with which you enter your password or the one that shows line group data. You can move, re-size, overlap, close and open one or more windows in one screen. While you can have any number of windows opened, only one window can be active at a time. The active window is the one that you are currently working in. Any command you choose or text you type generally applies only to the active window. The active window may have a close box, scroll bars, and a re-size corner. If your windows are overlapping, the active window is always the one on top of all the others (the foremost one).

•

•

All windows in QuickQ have the following things in common:

• title bar, close box.

selection key

Title Bar—The topmost horizontal bar of a window contains the name of the window. You can drag the title bar to move the window around.

Close Box—This is the box in the upper left corner. You double click on this box to quickly close the window.

Selection key —Press the Alt key with the underlined alphabet on the menu activates the function.

Some of the more complex windows have these additional features:

• scroll bar,

• re-size edges.

Scroll Bar—The scroll bar appears in the right side of the window. Use this bar with a mouse to scroll the contents of the window. Click the arrow at either end to scroll one line at a time (keep the mouse button pressed to scroll continuously). You can drag the scroll box at any spot on the bar to quickly move to a spot in the window relative to the position of the scroll box.

Re-size Edges—All four extreme edges of a window are the re-size edges. You can drag any edge to make the window larger or smaller.

A–2

GCA70-271

Appendix B

System Layout / Worksheet

System Setup

Company Name

ID# and Password

Grp. Name

Grp 00

Grp 01

Grp 02

Grp 03

Grp 04

Grp 05

Grp 06

Grp 07

Grp 08

Grp 09

Grp 10

Grp 11

Grp 12

Grp 13

Grp 14

Grp 15

Grp 16

Supv. Name ID# Password


Level 1

Grp 01

Grp 02

Grp 03

Grp 04

Grp 05

Grp 06

Grp 07

Grp 08

Grp 09

Grp 10

Grp 11

Grp 12

Grp 13

Grp 14

Grp 15

Grp 16

Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Note: Group 00 refers to the System Manager’s ID and Passwords, this is not one of the call processing Groups.

Appendix

A–3

Appendix

Announcements

Note - Space is provided on the Group Layout / Worksheet for the scripting of messages.

Group Description

11

12

13

08

09

10

14

15

16

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

Account Codes

Code Description

GCA70-271

Line Sub-group

Stat-Bins

Answer Bins

Time Bin 01

Time Bin 02

Time Bin 03

Time Bin 04

Time Bin 05

Time Bin 06

Time

A–4

Abandon Bins

Time Bin 01

Time Bin 02

Time Bin 03

Time Bin 04

Time Bin 05

Time Bin 06

Time

GCA70-271

Appendix C

Group Layout / Worksheet

Note - Make additional copies of the Group Layout / Worksheet for each of your system groups.

Group Setup

Thresholds

Overflow Time

Redirect Time

Alarm Time

Alarm (# of Calls)

Priority Override Time

Mode

Call Screening (Yes / No)

Automatic Force Call (Yes / No)

Manual (Yes / No)

Day to Night (Yes / No)

Time for Day to Night Mode (24 hr)

Appendix

A–5

Appendix

Agent Group Setup

Grp 01

Group Name

Agent Name ID# Password Priority Wrap-up

GCA70-271

Grp 02

Group Name


Grp 03

Group Name


Grp 04

Group Name


A–6

GCA70-271

Line Group Setup

Note - Space is provided on the next page for the Scripting of messages

Grp 02 Grp 03

Group Name

First Message #

Second Message #

Night Message #

Special Message #

Message Delay

Music Interval

Priority

Grp 01

Management Information

Real Time Parameter Setup

Incoming Call Parameter Time

Outgoing Call Parameter Time

Busy Call Parameter Time

Grp 04

Appendix

A–7

Appendix

Message Scripts

Line Group 01

First Message

Second Message

Night Message

Special Message

Line Group 02

First Message

Second Message

Night Message

Special Message

A–8

GCA70-271

GCA70-271

Line Group 03

First Message

Second Message

Night Message

Special Message

Line Group 04

First Message

Second Message

Night Message

Special Message

Appendix

A–9

GCA70-271

Appendix D

Start-up Screens

Sign-In

ID # XXX

Password XXX

Technician’s Screens

System Setup

QuickQ Master Setup

Master Extension

Master 2 Extension

QuickQ OAI Key Code

QuickQ Line Setup

Name

Group

Subgroup

Line No.

Voice Port Config.

Voice Port No.

Station

Type

Printer Setup

Printer Type

Other

Epson LQ

HP Laser

HP DJ 500

HP DJ 550C

Printer Port

LPT 1

Integration Setup

External Overflow

Password

Old Password XXX

New Password XXX

Diagnostic

QuickQ Status

Agent Status Scan

Line Status Scan

Voice Port Status Scan

System Manager’s Screens

System Setup

Company Name

ID Password

Group Name XXXXXXXX

Supervisor Name XXXXXXXX

ID # XXX

Password XXX

Time/Date

Date dd-mm-yyyy

Time HH:MM

Group Programming

Group 01-16

(link to group supervisor screens)


Group 01-16

Level 01

Level 02

Level 03

Level 04

Announcement

Message

Message 1-16

Description

Current Time MM:SS

Reviewing The Programming Road Map

Limit Time

Backup

Account Code

MM:SS

Starting Number Range X

Account Code XXX

Description

System Backup

Stat Bin

Answer Bin

Time Bin 1 MM:SS

Time Bin 2 MM:SS

Time Bin 3 MM:SS

Time Bin 4 MM:SS

Time Bin 5 MM:SS

Time Bin 6 MM:SS

Abandon Bin

Time Bin 1 MM:SS

Management Info.

Real Time

System Agent Status

System Line Status

Historical

Current

Hourly

Report Type

Answer Bins

Abondon Bins

Incoming Calls

Total Time

Average Time

SystemCcapacity

Traffic Analysis

Account Code

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Daily

Report Type

Answer Bins

Abondon Bins

Incoming Calls

Total Time

Average Time

SystemCcapacity

Traffic Analysis

Account Code

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Configuration

Group

System

Technician

Print

Group Supervisor’s Screens

Group Setup

Overflow Threshold MM:SS

Redirect Threshold MM:SS

Alarm Threshold MM:SS

Alarm Threshold

Priority Override

Calls in Queue

MM:SS

Call Screening Yes No

Automatic Force Call Yes No

Manual Answer Yes No

Day To Night Mode Yes No

Time For Day To Night Mode HH:MM

Agent Group–Setup

AgGp_01

AgGp_02

AgGp_03

AgGp_04

Agent Group Name XXXXXXXX

Agent Name XXXXXXXX

ID #

Password

Priority

Wrap-Up

XXX

XXX

01-04

MM:SS

Line Group Setup

LnGp_01

LnGp_02

LnGp_03

LnGp_04

Line Group Name XXXXXXXX

First Message X

Second Message X

Night Message

Special Message

X

X

First Message Delay MM:SS

Music Interval MM:SS

Line Group Priority 01-04

Management Info

Real Time Setup

Incoming Call Parameter MM:SS

Outgoing Call Parameter MM:SS

Busy Call Parameter MM:SS

Real Time

Traffic Activity

Agent Activity

Traffic Status

Service Status

Agent Status

Historical

Current

Hourly

Report Type

Waiting Time

Abandon Call

Incoming Call

Agent Activity

Average Time

System Capacity

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Daily

Report Type

Waiting Time

Abandon Call

Incoming Call

Agent Activity

Average Time

System Capacity

Call Profile

Account Code

Report Format

Numerical

Graphical

Note

Print

Configuration

Group

Print

Appendix

A–11


Appendix E

Backup Utility

What is it?

The Backup Utility allows you to make security Backup copies of the statistical data (i.e. the report files) gathered by the ACD. These copies are made to standard 3.5" high-density floppy disks.

Once these Backup copies have been made the Backup Utility can then be used to Delete the old copies of these files from the Hard Disk of the ACD.

Why should you use it?

As well as providing a measure of security for your data, using the Backup Utility will free up space for the ACD to re-use, and will prevent the ACD from slowing down due to congestion of the Hard Disk with old files.

How often should you use it?

Typically, you should use the Backup Utility at least once every three months.

How Do You Use it?

There are three simple steps.

You must tell the system which period you wish to Backup or Delete from. For example you might wish to work with last months files, or the previous quarters files, or files from any arbitrary period, such as the

15th of January to the 15th of March.

You then tell the Backup Utility which file types you wish to work with: these may be the Hourly, the

Daily, the Weekly or the Monthly files, or all of them.

You then tell the Backup Utility to either perform a Backup or a Delete on those files for that period.

Using the Backup Utility

Running the Backup Utility

The Backup Utility is accessed as follows. Sign in at the ACD Call Processor as the System Manager, and then select the System Backup option from the menu bar. A menu with two options on it will appear.

Select the Report Backup option.

(diagram 1 - acd system manager screen with report menu)

A dialogue box will appear with two buttons on it. If you select the one marked Cancel the dialogue box will close and nothing will happen. If you select the button marked Backup a further, smaller dialogue box will appear, with buttons marked Continue and Cancel.

(diagram 2 - acd system manager screen, with dialogues)

A–13


Selecting the Cancel button will take you back to the previous dialogue box. Contineu will close down the

ACD and will start the Backup Utility Program.

Note: The ACD will cease to function whilst you are using the Backup Utility - make sure you are certain that you want to close down the ACD operation before you go to the Backup

Utility, and remember to invoke the Norstar BACKUP service mode.

When the Backup Utility starts you will see the screen change to display the following.

(diagram 3 - Backup Utility welcome screen)

Press any key or click the left mouse button to remove the welcome window, and to make the menu at the top of the screen appear, as shown below.

(diagram 4 - Backup Utility main menu)

The Backup Utility Help System

The Backup Utility contains help screens that can be accessed at any time by pressing the F1 key. This will cause a help screen to appear that will either describe the operation you are currently performing, or the currently highlighted menu option.

Help screens can be closed by pressing the Escape key.

(diagram 5 - help screens)

You can also select the Help menu option from the main menu to access the Help system menu, where you will find help on the help system istelf, on how to use the menus and how to use the mouse.

Selecting and using menu options in described in the next section.

Interacting with the Backup Utility

You interact with the Backup Utility in the same manner as you do with the rest of the ACD system - you can use the keyboard or the mouse, or a mixture of both.

When you move the mouse around the mouse mat a block will move over the screen. This is the mouse cursor. To select a menu option for example, you would position the mouse cursor over the option you wish to use and then click the Left mouse button.

To use the keyoard you can move the highlight bar along the menu by pressing the Left or Right Arrow keys to highlight the option you wish to use, and then press the Enter key to activate it, or you can just press the letter which is highlighted in yellow for each option. So, to access the File Type menu option,you could just press the F key on the keyboard.

Some menu options lead to other, smaller menus, like the Help option or the Quit option.

To leave a sub-menu like these and to return to the previous menu, you can either press the Escape key, or, with the mouse cursor positioned on the menu line, press the right mouse button.

A–14


The Backup Utility Main Menu Options

Backup

Before you can use the Backup option you must first tell the Backup Utility which type of Data Files you wish to Backup and also the Start Date and End Date of the period in which you wish to carry out the

Backup.

When you have done that and then selected the Backup option the system will check which files are going to need to be copied, and will tell you how many disks you are going need.

Note: The disks that you use must be 1.44 Megabyte Hi-density disks, and they must be formatted. You can either buy the disks and format them yourself if you have access to a

PC, or you can buy ready formatted disks. The disks must be blank—that is, containing no previous data or files.

You will be prompted to enter each disk as they are required.

The data files are put onto the disks in sub-directories, called BACK001 on the first disk, BACK002 on the next, and so on, for as many disks as it takes. You should label and date each disk as you remove it from the disk drive.

(diagram 5 - Backup Utility showing the user how many disks they are going to need)

Delete

Before you can use the Delete option you must first tell the Backup Utility which type of Data Files you wish to delete and also the Start Date and End Date of the period you wish to delete files in.

When you have done that and then selected the Delete option the system will check which files are going to be deleted, and will tell you how much disk space you will recover by deleting them.

Note: Make sure you are CERTAIN that you wish to delete the files before you do so - once they have been removed, if you haven’t already made Backups of them, they will be gone forever!

Help

This option leads to a further menu offering access to Help screens on the Help system itself, the use of the Backup Utility menus and the use of the mouse.

Set File

Before you can use the Backup or Delete options, you must first tell the Backup Utility which type of

Data Files you wish to work with, and also the Start Date and End Date of the period in which you wish to carry out the Backup or Delete operation.

If you select this option, you will be presented with a “popup menu”. On the menu will be the file types you can choose from. There is also an option labeled A l l D a t a F i l e s which will cause the

Backup or Delete operation to work with all files of all types, and there is an option labeled A l l ( N o t

H o u r l y ) .

Note: Many users wish to set a Start date and an End Date and to then Backup all of the files from that period apart from the hourly ones, but wish to Delete all of the files in that period once the Backup is completed. The All data Files and the All (Not Hourly) options allow you to do this easily.

A–15


To select an option from the popup menu, you can either highlight the option using the Home , End and Up and Down Arrow keys and then press Enter , or you can use the hotkey method. The hotkey method allows you to choose an option by pressing the keyboard character which corresponds to the highlighted (yellow) letter in the option of your choice. The Esc key will close the popup menu without making a new selection.

Once you have selected a file type, it will be displayed on the bottom border of the main window.

The File Type that you pick dictates which files are operated on by the next Backup or Delete operation.

Once a File Type has been selected, it will stay set until you change it again. This means you can set the

Start and End Dates, set the File Type and then do a Backup and then do a Delete with the same settings.

If you pick All Files, data files of all type (Hourly, Daily, Weekly and Monthly) are operated on at once, if you pick All (Not Hourly) the files types operated on will be the Daily, the Weekly and the Monthly files only.

Note: If Weekly or Monthly files are going to be included in the Backup or Delete operation, the

Start Date must be the 1st of a month and the End Date must be the last day in a month

(but the Start Date and End Date do not need to be in the same month, so 1/09/1994 and

31/10/1994 is a valid period).

This applies to the All Files setting too, as the All Files setting includes the Weekly and Monthly data files automatically.

Set Start



You enter the Start Date for the work period in the format DD/MM/YYYY, so that February 1st 1994 would be entered as 01/02/1994.

Dates are checked as they are entered to make sure that you haven’t asked for the 32nd of a month, or a date next year and so forth.

Once you have set the Start Date and the End Date you can use them repeatedly. They stay set until you change them.

This means you can set the two dates and say, Backup the Hourly Files, then do a Delete on the Hourly

Files in the same period, then do a Backup on the Daily Files and then Delete those too, all with one setting for the Start and End Dates.

Note: You can’t enter a date in the current month, only full elapsed months can be worked on.

Also, if you want to work with Weekly, Monthly or All Files the Start Date MUST be the first day in a month.

A–16


Set End



You enter the End date for the work period in the format DD/MM/YYYY, so that February 1st 1994 would be entered as 01/02/1994.

Dates are checked as they are entered to make sure that you haven’t asked for the 32nd of a month, or a date next year and so forth.

Once you have set the Start Date and the End Date you can use them repeatedly. They stay set until you change them.

This means you can set the two dates and say, Backup the Hourly Files, then do a Delete on the Hourly

Files in the same period, then do a Backup on the Daily Files and then Delete those too, all with one setting for the Start and End Dates.

Note: You can’t enter a date in the current month, only full elapsed months can be worked on. Also, if you want to work with Weekly, Monthly or All Files the Start Date MUST be the first day in a month.

Set Path

You will not need to use this option, it is intended for future expansion and is not required in this release of the Backup Utility.

Info

This option provides a window which shows the Start and End Dates (if they have been set) spelled out with the names of the day and the month so that you can see exactly which two dates you have entered.

It also shows how many days there were between the two dates, so you can see how many days worth of data would be affected by a Backup or Delete action.

Quit

The Quit option from the main menu causes a sub-menu with two options on it to appear. These two options are R e m a i n and Q u i t .

R e m a i n will keep you in the Backup Utility (in case you have selected Quit from the main menu in error), and the Q u i t option will leave the Backup Utility, and the ACD system will re-start.

Note: Remember to put the Norstar back into the Normal service mode once the ACD system has reset itself, and if it is during your normal working hours, instruct your Agents to log back in.

A–17

GCA70-271

Index

A

Abandoned Bin........................................................1–4

Account Code Setup Window .............................. 3–11

Account Codes, Assigning ................................... 3–10

Account Codes ........................................................1–6

Add Agent Window ............................................. 3–17

Agent Features, Describing The..............................1–6

Agent Group Window .......................................... 3–16

Agent Group-Setup, Configuring the................... 3–16

Agent Monitoring ....................................................4–8

Agent Operation ......................................................4–3

Alarm Threshold......................................................1–7

Announcement Messages,

Recording And Playing Back..................................4–7

Announcement Titles, Setting .................................3–9

Answer Bin..............................................................1–4

Answer Time bin Window ................................... 3–12

Answering Automatically .......................................4–3

Answering Manually ...............................................4–3

Appendix A ............................................................A–1

Appendix B.............................................................A–3

Appendix C.............................................................A–5

Appendix D ..........................................................A–11

Appendix E........................................................... A-13

Arranging The Stat-Bins ...................................... 3–12

Assigning Account Codes .................................... 3–10

Automatic Answer Mode ........................................1–7

Automatic Day-to-Night Mode ...............................1–7

Automatic Night-to-Day Mode ...............................1–7

B

Becoming Familiar With Conventions

Used in This Guide.............................................1–1

Busy, Make Your Telephone ..................................4–4

C

Call Center Staff, Organizing The ..........................1–3

Call Handling, Priority ............................................1–8

Call Processor ..........................................................1–3

Call Queuing............................................................1–4

Call Screen Mode ....................................................1–8

Calls Waiting Indication..........................................1–6

Changing The Mode Of Operation .........................4–6

Clicking (Selecting an Item) ..................................A–1

Clock, Synchronizing the ........................................3–7

Close Box ...............................................................A–2

Company Name, Setting The ..................................3–5

Components, Describing The System .....................1–3

Configuring the Agent Group-Setup.................... 3–16

Configuring the Line Group-Setup .......................3–18

Configuring The Group.........................................3–14

D

Day-to-Night Mode, Automatic ..............................1–7

Defaults ...................................................................3–1

Delay Announcements ............................................1–5

Describing QuickQ Agent Features ..................1–6

Describing

Describing

QuickQ Group Features .................1–7

QuickQ System Features................1–4

Describing The System Components......................1–3

Digital Voice Announcer ........................................1–3

Dragging (Moving a Window)...............................A–1

E

Edit ID and Password Window ...............................3–6

Even Distribution ....................................................1–4

F

Features, Describing The Agent..............................1–6

Features, Describing The Group .............................1–7

Features, Describing The System............................1–4

G

Group 00 System Selection.....................................3–5

Group, Configuration ............................................3–14

Group Features ........................................................1–7

Group Layout / Worksheet.....................................A–5

Group Levels, Programming.................................3–13

Group Setup Window............................................3–15

Group Supervisor, Programming By ....................3–14

H

I

ID and Password......................................................3–3

Intergroup Overflow, Setting the ............................3–8

Intergroup Overflow Window.................................3–8

Introducing The QuickQ System.............................1–1

L

Line Group Window .............................................3–18

Line Group-Setup, Configuring the ......................3–18

List Of System Groups..........................................3–13

Log-in / Log-out ......................................................1–6

Logging In and Out of QuickQ ...............................4–1

Index

I–1

Index GCA70-271

M

Make Set Busy.........................................................1–6

Make Your Telephone Busy ...................................4–4

Management Info. ................................................... 5-1

Management Information System Reporting..........1–5

Manual Answer Mode .............................................1–7

Message Window ....................................................3–9

Messages, Understanding the............................... 3–19

MIS Reporting .........................................................1–5

Monitoring the Agents ............................................4–8

Mouse and Keyboard, Using...................................2–1

Mouse, Using QuickQ With a ................................A–1

N

Night-to-Day Mode, Automatic ..............................1–7

O

Operating As A Supervisor .....................................4–6

Operating As An Agent...........................................4–3

Operating The QuickQ System ...............................4–1

Organizing The Call Center Staff ...........................1–3

Overflow Group ......................................................1–8

Overflow Threshold ................................................1–8

P

Performing Initial Sign In .......................................3–2

Performing the Group Programming ................... 3–13

Preparing System Layout / Worksheets ..................3–2

Preparing The Group Layout / Worksheet ........... 3–14

Priority Call Handling .............................................1–8

Programming Group Levels ................................. 3–13

Programming QuickQ ............................................ 3–1

Programming The System Level Configuration .....3–2

R

Re-size Edges .........................................................A–2

Real Time Parameters, Selecting The .....................5–2

Recording And Playing Back

The Announcement Message .............................4–7

Redirect Threshold ..................................................1–8

Report, Selecting The Main Report Screens ...........5–5

Reports, Viewing the Real Time .............................5–1

Reporting, MIS ........................................................1–5

Reports, Selecting Current ......................................5–5

Reports, Selecting The Historical............................5–4

Reports, Selecting The Real Time...........................5–1

Reports, Viewing Typical MIS ...............................5–7

Requesting Help ......................................................4–4

Reviewing The Programming Roadmap..............A–11

S

Scroll Bar................................................................A–2

Selecting Current Reports .......................................5–5

Selecting Historical Reports....................................5–4

Selecting QuickQ MIS Reports...............................5–7

Selecting The Main Report Screens........................5–5

Selecting The Real Time Parameters ......................5–2

Selecting The Real Time Report .............................5–1

Setting Announcement Titles..................................3–9

Setting the Company Name ....................................3–5

Setting the Intergroup Overflow .............................3–8

Setting the Time and Date.......................................3–7

Setting Up The System............................................3–5

Sign In, Performing Initial ......................................3–2

Sign In Window ......................................................3–2

Signing In As A Group Supervisor .......................3–14

Stat-Bin, Arranging The........................................3–12

Supervisor Operation ..............................................4–6

Supervisor Sign In Window ....................................3–3

Synchronizing the Clock ......................................... 3-7

System Features.......................................................1–4

System Layout / Worksheet ...................................A–3

System Level Features, Understanding...................1–4

System, Operating The QuickQ ..............................4–1

System, Setting Up The...........................................3–5

System Startup, Understanding...............................3–1

T

Telephone Extensions .............................................1–3

Time and Date, Setting the......................................3–7

Title Bar..................................................................A–2

Transferring Calls In Or Out Of QuickQ ................4–5

U

Understanding QuickQ ..................................... 1–2

Understanding System Startup................................3–1

Understanding the Messages.................................3–20

Understanding This Guide ......................................1–1

Using QuickQ With a Mouse .................................A–1

Using the Mouse and Keyboard..............................2–1

V

Viewing The Current Call Statistics .......................4–9

Viewing The System Manager

Real Time Report ...............................................5–1

Viewing The Supervisor’s

Real Time Report ...............................................5–3

Viewing Typical MIS Reports ................................5–7

W

Window Graphic in QuickQ ................................. A–2

Worksheet, Group Layout......................................A–5

Worksheet, Preparing System Layout.....................3–2

Worksheet, Preparing The Group Layout .............3–14

Worksheet, System Layout ....................................A–3

I–2

GCA70-271

Wrap-up Time .........................................................1–6

Wrapping Up A Call ...............................................4–3

Z

Zoom Box...............................................................A–2

Index

I–3

Installing The Total Control PC Attendant Position


1.0 Introducing The Total Control PC Attendant Position

The Total Control PC attendant position is a computerized attendant operating station for the DXP Plus digital communications system. It consists of an IBM-compatible personal computer, a proprietary interface circuit board (factory-installed in the computer expansion slot), a customized keyboard, a program diskette, and all necessary cables for connecting the equipment to the DXP Plus.

The DXP Plus system will support a maximum of four Total Control PC attendant positions. Each PC attendant position requires the following DXP Plus interface ports:

• one station port (no wiring connections required),

• two loop-start line ports that it uses for a 4-wire audio connection with the DXP Plus,

• one serial data port that it uses for data communications with the DXP Plus.

NOTE: You must install a DXOPT–COM communications card in the DXP Plus system to provide a serial data port for PC attendant position use. The installation instructions contained in this publication assume that you have already installed a DXOPT–COM card in the DXP Plus. If you have not yet done so, install the card now using the procedures that you can find in your System Hardware Instructions’ installation section.

Each Total Control PC attendant position uses the system logic associated with one station port for communications to the DXP Plus system; therefore, the PC attendant position replaces one telephone from the system since you cannot connect a telephone to the station location that the Total Control PC attendant position is using.

1.1

Default Locations

The system default locations for the PC attendant positions are as detailed below; however, you can reassign the locations through programming.

•

For PC attendant position 1, station location = station location 1 (Intercom 1001) line ports = lines 1 and 2 serial data port = port 1 line group = 16

•

For PC Attendant position 2, station location = station location 2 (Intercom 1002) line ports = lines 3 and 4 serial port = port 2 line group = 16





22906.


IMI89–195.02

10/96

R

IMI89–195 Installing And Programming The PC Attendant Position

1.2

Checking The Contents Of Your Equipment

Before you begin any installation, you should check to make sure that all of you equipment is in order. Check for all of the following items:

•

80386 or faster, IBM-compatible Personal Computer (with proprietary interface installed) equipped with an

MS-DOS version 3.3 or later or compatible operating system,

•

Floppy Disks and Operating Manual for MS-DOS version 3.3 or later

•

Total Control System Operating Disk,

• video display monitor

• customized keyboard (with handset cradle),

• telephone handset,

• handset coil cord,

•

4–conductor modular line cord,

• modular-to-EIA adapter,

•

6–conductor modular line cord with installed ferrite collar.

1.3

Finding Related Publications

The following is a list of publications that you may find helpful in your installation of the PC Attendant.

•

IMI66-105, Installing The DXP Plus Main Common Equipment Cabinet

•

Instruction manual for supplied personal computer

•

GCA70-230, Total Control PC Attendant’s Console User’s Guide

1.4

Upgrading Existing PC Attendant Position From DXP To DXP Plus

Upgrading your existing PC attendant position requires new PC attendant software. Upgrading also requires that you add to the computer an additional one megabyte of memory storage and configure it as extended memory.

Depending upon the particular model computer that serves as a platform for your existing PC attendant position, memory upgrade procedures differ. Because of the differences that you could encounter in the field, please call a

Comdial technical services representative at 1–800–366–8224 for information about upgrade kit availability and assistance in installing it.

2 – Installing The PC Attendant Position

Installing And Programming The PC Attendant Position

KYBOARD1

IMI89–195

▲

PUSH

CONT BRIGHT

POWER

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Esc

Tab

Next

Screen

Caps Lock

Shift

Ctrl

Help Mute Headset Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Alt Alt

Backspace

Line

TAP

*

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

PR S

7

T U V

8

O P E R ATO R

0

ABC

2

J KL

5

*

D EF

3

M N O

6

Hold

A n r e s w

W XY

9

Transfer a s e

R e l e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Viewing The Total Control PC Attendant Position

Installing The PC Attendant Position – 3


2.0 Installing The System Wiring

Install and connect the personal computer, the video monitor, and the keyboard per the instructions provided in the manual supplied with that equipment. Install the DXP Plus system using information provided in IMI66-105.

Interconnect the equipment for PC attendant operation using the information supplied in the following paragraphs.

These installation instructions assume that you have already installed a DXOPT–COM card in the DXP Plus system. If you have not yet done so, install the card now using the procedures that you can find in your System

Hardware Instructions’ installation section.

2.1

Making The Data Connections

The maximum distance from a serial data port that you can confidently locate a PC attendant position is dependent upon the baud rate at which you operate the serial data port.

•

When operating the port at 9600 baud, your data cable run must be no longer than 500 feet.

•

When operating the port at 19,200 baud, your data cable run must be no longer than 50 feet.

Typically, make the direct-wired data connections using customer-supplied modular jacks (type 625A2-6), the equipment-supplied 6–conductor modular line cord, and a customer-provided standard 6–conductor line cord.

1. Install the industry-standard modular jacks at the DXP Plus location (Data Jack A) and at the PC attendant position location (Data Jack B). Route the wiring between these jacks using twisted-pair wire.

Remember, in a noisy electrical environment use shielded cable for the data communications. Also, keep in mind that It is a good practice to keep the data communications wiring separate and as far away as possible from the voice-pair wiring. As an added precaution against induced interference, route the data cable as far away from any fluorescent lighting as you can reach, and make every effort to route the data cable perpendicular to other wiring.

NOTE: The wiring from the DXP Plus serial data port to the modular-to-EIA adapter that is connected to the PC attendant position must be mirrored just as they are in a standard 6–conductor line cord. This means that if you use modular jacks and house wiring to make the data connection, you MUST maintain the signal polarity reversal, or roll-over, found in a standard 6–conductor line cord.

4

3

6

5

2

1

3

4

1

2

5

6

PCATND2

4

5

6

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

Detailing A Standard 6–Conductor Line Cord


Installing And Programming The PC Attendant Position IMI89–195

2. Connect a customer-supplied, 6–conductor line cord between the serial data port on the DXP Plus communications card and the modular jack that you located near the DXP 480 Plus (Data Jack A).

Remember, you must install a communications card in the DXP Plus system to provide a serial data port for

PC attendant position use.

Detailing The Serial Data Port Connection

Making The Data Connections



2.3

Making The Line Connections

When you are connecting to a loop start line board, make the line connections using customer-supplied modular jacks (type 625A2-6), a customer-provided standard 4–conductor line cord and an equipment-provided

4–conductor line cord.

1. Install the industry-standard modular jacks at the DXP Plus location ( Line Jack A ) and at the PC attendant position location (Line Jack B).

2. Wire the jacks straight-through (that is; wire T1 to T1, T2 to T2, R1 to R1, and R2 to R2) using twisted-pair house wiring.

When you are connecting to a DID or Multipurpose line board, note that these boards provide line connections through a 50-pin connector instead of an industry-standard modular jack. Make line connections to these boards using a customer-supplied 50-pin connector block (66-type), a standard 25-pair cable, a customer-supplied modular jack (type 625A2-6), and an equipment-provided 4–conductor line cord.

1. Install the 66-type 50-pin connector block at the DXP Plus location.

2. Install the industry-standard modular jack at the PC attendant position location ( Line Jack B ).

3. Use twisted-pair house wiring to connect the desired line pairs from the 50-pin connector block to the customer-supplied modular jack at the PC attendant position location ( Line Jack B ).


Installing And Programming The PC Attendant Position

PCATND8

Loop Start

Line Board

Ferrite

Collar

IMI89–195

PCATND9

4

5

6

3

2

1

625A2-4

Modular

Jack

To Loop Start

Board

To DID or

Multipurpose

Board

Customer-Supplied

4-Conductor

Line Cord

4

5

6

6 5 4 3 2 1

3

2

1

625A2-4

Modular

Jack

Equipment-Supplied

6-Conductor

Line Cord

To PC

Attendant

Position

Interface

Board

Maintain straight-through wiring when you connect the jacks.

1 1 No Connction

2 2 Ring 2

3 3 Tip 1

4 4 Ring 1

5 5 Tip 2

6 6 No Connection

Making The Line Connections



2.4

Making The PC Attendant Position Connections

1. Connect the supplied modular-to-EIA adapter to the COM1 serial data connector on the PC attendant position personal computer.

2. Connect the supplied 6–conductor (with ferrite collar) line cord between the modular-to-EIA adapter and the modular jack that is wired to the DXP Plus serial data port. Keep the ferrite collar near the PC attendant position.

3. Connect the supplied 4–conductor line cord between the LINE jack on the proprietary interface board and the modular jack that is wired to the DXP Plus line board.

4. Connect the handset coil-cord to the HANDSET jack on the proprietary interface board. Note that the interface also provides a HEADSET jack if the user requires headset operation.

5. Disconnect the telephone that the PC attendant position replaces. Record its physical board slot location and

its logical station number for use when programming the system to accept the PC attendant position.

Modular Jack





Pin 5 = (CTS) Clear to Send

Pin 6 = (RTS) Request to Send

DB9 Connector







Pin 7 = (RTS) Request to Send

Pin 8 = (CTS) Clear to Send


4

5

6

PCATND5

9 8 7 6

5 4 3 2 1

1

2

3

Detailing The Modular–To–EIA adapter



9-Pin Serial

Data Port

Modular To

EIA Adapter

Ferrite

Collar

Equipment-Supplied

6-Conductor Line Cord

Rear View of Typical

Personal Computer (PC)

Proprietary

PC Interface

Board For

Attendant

Position

(Factory

Installed)

Data Jack B

Line Jack B

PCATND6

Equipment-Supplied


Connect Keyboard To PC

As Shown In PC Manual

Esc

Tab

Next

Screen

Caps Lock

Ctrl

Shift

Help Mute Headset

Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page Pick

Tracker

Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Alt Alt

Line

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Ctrl

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

ABC

2

J KL

5

PR S

7

T U V

8

O P E R ATO R

0

*

D EF

3

M N O

6

W XY

9

Transfer

Hold a s e l e

R e s w

A n e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Handset Jack

Headset Jack

Line Jack

Locating The PC Attendant Position Connections



3.0 Testing The PC Attendant Position Installation

1. Use the DXP Plus programming procedures, and program the system to accept PC attendant operation.

Remember, each PC attendant position requires a station port, two line ports, a serial data port, and a line group for operation. You must identify these items through this programming action for each PC attendant position before the equipment will function properly.

2. Technicians loaded the PC attendant position software on the personal computer’s hard drive as an executable file before shipping the equipment. The technicians also configured the computer’s autoexec.bat file to automatically load the PC attendant software when you turn on the computer. When you turn on the computer, it should execute its boot-up procedure and then show the PC attendant position menu screen.

3. Use the information detailed in GCA70-230, Total Control PC Attendant’s Console User’s Guide to test the

PC attendant position’s operation.

4. If your system does operate properly, check your wiring for proper connections and verify that you set the proper programming parameters.

4.0 Radio Frequency Interference

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to

Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient the television or radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the equipment, and the radio or TV with respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult the manufacturer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the

Federal Communications Commission helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems.”

This booklet is available from the Government Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402. Stock No.

004-000-00345-4.




5.0 Programming For The PC Attendant Position

Use the following procedures to program the DXP Plus system to operate with the PC attendant position. Follow these procedures in the order that this manual presents them as they provide a logical progression of the programming.

5.1

Enabling The PC Attendant Position

Description: Each PC attendant position requires a station port, two line ports, a serial data port, and a line group for operation. You must identify these items through this programming action for each

PC attendant position before the equipment will function properly.

Programming: 1. Press CONTROL T for main menu.

2. From main menu, select peripherals and press ENTER.

3. From peripherals menu, select PC attendant and press ENTER.

4. Type PC attendant number (1–4) and press ENTER.

5. Type item number for station port and press ENTER, then type 1–480 for station port .

Important—disconnect any telephone that is currently installed there.

6. For line pair, type odd/even number pair that corresponds to location where cable was connected on common equipment (for example, enter 1,2 or 15,16 or 119,120 and so forth).

Special instruction—Always type the odd line number first. Remember, the line numbers on each line board ascend from bottom line jack (lines 1,2) to top line jack (lines 7,8), and the line ports on the main and expansion cabinets ascend from right to left based on the board slot (line ports 1–8, 9–17, 18–26 and so forth).

NOTE: The lines that you assign here are exclusively for PC attendant position use and cannot be used for out-going call operations. Do not assign them for any other system use.

7. For line group, type line group number (1–16).

8. For serial port, type 1 or 2 for RS-232 port 1 or 2 on the system central processor board where you connected the PC attendant position.

9. Press ESCAPE twice.

10. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

11. Press ESCAPE twice to end.



5.2

Programming A Hunt List For PC Attendant Use

Description: Assign eight intercom numbers to an intercom hunt list for the PC attendant position’s use.

The assigned numbers must include the personal intercom number of the PC attendant position

(the number for the station location that the PC attendant position occupies) and seven group intercom numbers that are set aside for its exclusive use (group intercom numbers range from

3101–3292, 4110–4292, 5000–5023) . When you assign group intercom numbers to the hunt list, the system automatically adds them to the group intercom access list for the PC attendant position.

NOTE: Do not assign the same group intercom to more than one station’s intercom hunt list.


2. From main menu, select stations and press ENTER.

3. From stations menu, select station programming and press ENTER.

4. Type personal intercom number of PC attendant position or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

5. From station programming menu, type item number for intercom hunt list and press ENTER.

6. Type personal intercom number for PC attendant position first then type seven group intercom numbers and press ENTER.

Separate each entry with a comma (nnn,nnn,nnn,nnn)

NOTE: Reserve these group intercom numbers for exclusive use by the PC attendant position. Do not assign them to any other station.

7. When finished, press ESCAPE twice.


9. Press ESCAPE to end.



5.3

Assigning Lines For PC Attendant Use

Description: Choose several lines that the PC attendant position can use for call origination; assign them to line group 16; assign line group 16 to a particular class of service; and assign that particular class of service to the PC attendant position. The line key on the keyboard is fixed to select line group 16. You must assign lines to line group 16 before the attendant can select a line for use.


2. From main menu, select lines and press ENTER.

3. From lines menu, select line group programming and press ENTER.

4. Type 16 and press ENTER.

5. Type a to add lines and press ENTER.

6. Type lines to be added and press ENTER.

7. Press ESCAPE once.


9. Press ESCAPE to return to main menu.


11. From stations menu, select station COS programming menu and press ENTER.

12. Type class of service number (1–32) and press ENTER.

13. From the COS programming menu, type item number for line group access and press

ENTER. Remember—use CONTROL N to find the correct screen.


15. When finished, Press ESCAPE twice.




19. From stations menu, select station programming menu and press ENTER.


21. Type number for class of service and press ENTER.

22. Type class of service number that has line group 16 assigned and press ENTER.






5.4

Assigning The PC Attendant Position Text Messaging Buttons

Description: Use this programming procedure to assign special text messaging functions to system telephone buttons. User’s can press these buttons to access the text messaging feature provided by the PC attendant position. Program the telephone to provide the following button functions:

Text Message button for the user to press to step forward through the fields of a message that shows in the telephone’s display window,

Print button for the user to press to send the displayed message to an attendant selected data printer for hard copy printout,

Next button for the user to press to sequence through a group of stored messages,

Previous button for the user to press to back-up through the fields of a message that he or she has already read,

Delete button for the user to press to erase a message after he or she has read it or sent it to the data printer,

Quit button for the user to press to end a text messaging session.


2. From the main menu, select stations and press ENTER.

3. From the stations menu, select button mapping and press ENTER.

4. Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER. The VDT presents a button map of the current button functions for the requested station shown for your review.

5. Type code (L1–L25) for button that you wish to program.

6. Type one of the following mnemonics and press ENTER.

OAI59 = Delete button

OAI60 = Print button

OAI61 = Previous field button

OAI62 = Next message button

OAI63 = Quit button

OAI64 = Text message/next field button

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have assigned all test messaging buttons and press ENTER.

8. Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4 through 7 for each station.




5.5

Mapping PC Attendant Position Function Keys

Description: The DXP Plus adds programmable function keys to the PC Attendant Position. The programmable features are in addition to the fixed features currently provided by function keys

F1 through F12. You can assign a different feature to each function key.

Programming: 1. Press CONTROL T for main menu,

2. From main menu, select stations and press ENTER,

3. From stations, select PC attendant and press ENTER,

4. Type attendant number (1–4) and press ENTER,

5. From PC attendant menu, select button mapping and press ENTER,

6. Press CONTROL E for button map of function keys and press ENTER,

7. Type button number (L1–L12) and press ENTER,

8. Type mnemonic (type ? for a description of mnemonic if you need it) for desired feature and press ENTER,

9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until all feature button are programmed,

10. When finished, press ESCAPE twice,

11. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER,


Operation: To access the programmed functions on the PC Attendant Position, the user must press and hold the CTRL button while pressing the desired function button on the keyboard.



5.5.1 Listing The Function Key Mnemonics

FEATR

FWD-A

FWD-P

FWDRA

FWDRP

GPLSN

GPKUP

HDST

HOLD

ITCM

I####

LCDMS

LNG##

LN###

LOCK

MMEPG

MSGWT

MUSC#

NIGHT

OAI##

OVERFL

PAGE#

PARK#

PRVCY

ACCT

ALTRN

ANSWER

APAGE

ARD

ARECD

ARING

AUTH

BOTH

CAMP

CID

DND

DPKUP

DSTAT

EXOVR

QUEUE

RLSE

RSP##

S-OBS

SAVE

SDIAL

SILNT

SOHVA

SPLIT

SRIAL

SYSST

TAFS#

TBUSY

TRACK

VABLK

VOLSV

XVM##

(account code button): allows users to enter an account code

(alternate attendant button): places station in alternate attendant mode

(answer button): answers a ringing call

(auxiliary page button): allows auxiliary page operation (model 8024S and 7700S–rev I and later)

(automatic redial button): redials last dialed number 10 times with one minute off time

(auxiliary record button): allows auxiliary record operation (model 8024S and 7700S–rev I and later)

(auxiliary ring button): allows auxiliary ring operation (model 8024S and 7700S–rev I and later)

(authorization code button): prompts for authorization code entry

(both button): conferences current party with last party placed on hold

(camp on button): engages camp on feature at busy station or line

(caller ID button): sends caller ID RNA records to LCD

(do not disturb button): enables/disables do not disturb mode

(directed call pick up button): picks up call ringing at another station

(DSS status button): selects station DSS status view (line and intercom or just intercom)

(executive override button): allows executive override of another station

(feature button): use with feature code to access certain features

(forward all button): enable/disable all call forwarding

(forward personal button): enable/disable prime line and personal intercom call forwarding

(forward all RNA button): enable/disable all call after RNA forwarding

(forward personal RNA button): enable/disable prime line and personal intercom calls after RNA forwarding

(group listen button): allows group listen operation (digital multiline telephones)

(group pick up button): picks up a call that rings anywhere within a group of stations

(headset button): enables/disables headset mode

(hold button): places current call on hold and scrolls list of held calls

(intercom button): accesses personal intercom number

(intercom number button): group intercom number or station DSS

(LCD messaging button): enables/disables LCD message feature

(line group button 1–16): accesses one of 16 line groups

(line button 1–240): accesses one of 240 lines

(lock button): prevents/allows station use (prevents station use until someone dials an authorization code)

(meet me page button): answers a page by meeting intercom paging party on line

(message waitng button): turns on/turns off message waiting light at another station

(music source button 1, 2): turns on/turns off background music

(night mode button): allows attendant to place system in night transfer (of ringing) mode

(open architecture button): special Enterprise functions (used with Total Control PC Attendant and Enterprise Toolkit options)

(overflow button): turns on/turns off overflow mode

(paging zone button 1–8): allows group paging

(park orbit button 1–9): parks and retrieves calls

(privacy button): releases privacy on line so another station can join a call

(queue button): queues station at busy line group to await idle line

(release button): disconnects current call

(response button 1–30, S = universal): sends response message to another station for SOHVA and message deposit

(service observe button): enables station to service observe another station

(dynamic save button): saves last dialed number and line on which it was dialed

(speed dial): saves often dialed number at a button

(silent ringer button): mutes ringing for current call

(SOHVA button): sends SOHVA to another station

(split button): allows station user to talk to two different parties

(serial call button): transfers a serial call to specified stations

(system status report button): indicates system status report

(night answer button 1–4, S= all calls): answers call indicated by system’s ringing relay

(line test busy button): views status of busy line

(tracker pager activate button): sends message to pager display

(voice announce block button): blocks/allows voice announcements

(save volume button): saves volume settings (digital multiline telephones)

(transfer to voice mail button 1–32): transfers call to voice mail box when used with DSS button



5.6

Programming The PC Attendant Position’s Serial Data Port

The PC attendant position’s baud rate defaults to 9600 baud. To match this parameter, program the data parameters for the serial data port that you use for the PC attendant position to have the following values: 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and CTS/RTS flow control.

As you can see from the following chart, the maximum baud rate that you can assign to a serial data port varies depending upon where you locate the DXOPT–COM card. If you choose a 19,200 baud rate location and program the port for a baud rate other that 9600, you must change the baud rate of the PC attendant position to match the baud rate that you choose for the serial data port. Do this by changing the baud rate in the autoexec.bat file that controls the PC attendant position computer at start-up. This action, as well as other changes that you can make in the autoexec.bat file is discussed in Section 1.2 of the Total Control PC Attendant’s Console User’s Guide,

GCA70–230.

If you arrange for the PC attendant position to transmit and receive data from the DXP Plus at a high baud rate, engineering sources recommend that you use a communications protocol (such as CTS/RTS or XON/XOFF) to prevent buffer overrun and data loss.

Serial Data Port Locations

Serial Data Port DXOPT–COM Location

Maximum

Baud Rate

Serial data ports 3–10 Lower two slots on the DXSRV–480 Board 19,200 Baud

Serial data ports 11–18 Lower two slots on: the interface board installed in expansion cabinet 1,

–or– the interface board installed in expansion cabinet 2,

–or– the auxiliary board installed in the main cabinet.

9600 Baud



5.6.1 Matching Serial Data Port Numbers To Installation Locations

Description: You must take this programming action to match the data port number of serial data ports

11–18 with the installation location that you choose for the DXOPT–COM cards.


2. From main menu, select systems and press ENTER.

3. From system menu, select system parameters and press ENTER.

4. From system parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar for communications card board location and press ENTER to accept setting.



5.6.2 Setting Serial Data Port Parameters

Description: You can change the baud rates, data bits, stop bits, parity, and flow control for each serial data port in the system to match the data device that you connect there.


2. From main menu, select system and press ENTER.

3. From system menu, select serial ports and press ENTER.

4. From serial ports menu, type item number for main port or for auxiliary port and press ENTER.

5. From serial port type menu, select the serial port number and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE bar for feature setting

7. Press TAB for next parameter.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all parameters.

9. Press ENTER to accept settings.







R



s

PUSH

CONT BRIGHT

POWER

ON

OFF

COMDIAL

ON

OFF

Esc Help Mute Headset Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

Caps Lock

A

@

2

W

#

3

S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

-

_

:

:

Shift

Z X C V B N M

,

<

Line

/

?

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

Insert Home

Delete End

Page

Up

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

A B C

2

J K L

5

P R S

7

O P E R AT O R

0

T U V

8

Transfer

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

A n s w e r e a e l s e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up cover1.cdr

Total Control

PC Attendant’s Console

User’s Guide

For The DXP and DXP Plus





Attention

Comdial makes every effort to design the features in our communications systems to be fully interactive. Under certain conditions, some features may be incompatible with each other and will not work simultaneously. Comdial assumes no responsibility for problems caused by incompatible features.

The possible combinations of accessories and features are far too numerous for us to document in this manual. Furthermore, Comdial Corporation cannot guarantee that features will operate as described in this publication when they are combined with other features.

PC Attendant's Console User's Guide GCA 70-230

Contents

1.

Introducing PC Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1

Using This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.3

On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1.4

Knowing Your PC Attendant Keyboard . . . . . . . . . 6

2.

Handling Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1

The Intercom Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.2

The Current Call Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.3

The Pending Calls Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.4

Line Access Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.5

Answering And Directing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.6

Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.7

Using The Pull-Down Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.8

Setting The System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3.

Using The Specialized Features . . . . . . . .

45

3.1

Both Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.2

Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.3

ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3.4

Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3.5

Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.6

Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

3.7

Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3.8

Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3.9

Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

3.10

Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

3.11

Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

3.12

Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

3.13

Alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

3.14

Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

3.15

Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Contents - iii

GCA 70-230 PC Attendant's Console User's Guide

3.16

PC Settings (Screen Saver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

3.17

SOHVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

3.18

Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.

Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . .

67

4.1

Operation Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

5.

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

6.

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73 iv - Contents

PC Attendant's Console User's Guide

1

Introducing PC Attendant

GCA 70-230

1.1

Using This Guide

To help you use your Total Control PC Attendant console to its fullest capabilities, we have written a comprehensive user’s guide to tell you how the PC Attendant handles calls and how to use the system’s many features effectively.

Chapter One, Introducing PC Attendant, helps you become familiar with the system’s basic features and start-up requirements.

Chapters Two and Three are designed to introduce you to the PC Attendant’s call-handling features and programming options. Chapter Two, Handling Calls, deals with the general use of the PC

Attendant—making calls, setting the parameters. Chapter Three, Using The Specialized Features, focuses on the specific features of the PC Attendant—Message, or Split, for example.

We have explained and, when needed, cross–referenced every feature—from answering an incoming call to programming system speed-dials. We suggest, however, that you become familiar with the basics of answering, directing, and making calls before you begin setting system parameters or using the system’s more powerful call-handling features.

For your convenience, we have included the following:

—

—

— a troubleshooting guide, a glossary of general telephone and operating system terms, an index.

Introducing PC Attendant 1

2


1.2

Getting Started

The Total Control PC Attendant comprises a state-of-the-art software program installed on a personal computer (PC). This combination provides total control of the operations used to visually supervise and manage your DXP Communications System. The software allows you to administer all functions of the

DXP system from one-stroke key features and from a series of pull-down menus containing easy-to-understand features.

1.2.1 Software

Your PC Attendant console has the software pre-installed on the hard drive. When you start your computer, PC Attendant is automatically loaded by the autoexec.bat file. If you exit to DOS and want to restart PC Attendant, there are three things you may do:

1. type PCATTN at the DOS prompt,

2. simultaneously press the CTRL, ALT, and DELETE buttons to reboot the system,

3. press the reset button to reboot the system.

The default number of lines displayed on the PC Attendant screen is 25. You may change the display from 25 lines to either 43 or 50 lines. To change the number of lines displayed, type pcattn -43 or pcattn

-50 at the DOS prompt.

NOTE: When the PC Attendant functions are transferred to an alternate attendant for an extended period of time or for the night transfer mode, it is a good idea to turn off the screen with the on/off monitor switch to prolong the life of your monitor.

If you are going to be away from the console intermittently, you can activate the PC

Attendant’s screen saver to prevent screen image “burn.” (See “PC Settings” in chapter 3,

Using The Specialized Features.) DO NOT turn off the computer; doing so will disable all PC

Attendant functions and require you to reboot the PC Attendant console.



1.2.2 Moving The Cursor With The Arrow Keys

Your PC Attendant console is equipped with four arrow keys (up, down, right, and left), located between the main letter keys and the number keypad. Use these arrow keys to move the cursor around within a window or across the pull-down menu bar (activated by pressing the Escape key) and within the pull-down menus in order to highlight selections or features to be activated.

1.2.3 Moving The Cursor With The Mouse

Your equipment may accommodate a mouse (not supplied), which you can use to position the cursor to highlight or select a feature. When using the mouse to make screen selections, simply position the mouse cursor (a colored or contrasting block that highlights a number, word, or feature on the screen) to the desired selection and “click” the left mouse button to activate the selection.

Use the mouse to activate any of the pull-down menus from the menu bar appearing at the top of the main screen Intercom window: simply position the cursor on the title of the menu you’d like to access and click the left mouse button. Additionally, you can click outside any of the pull-down menus or pop-up windows to return to the main screen.

You may also use the mouse to initiate intercom calls quickly. In the Intercom window, a double click on an intercom number will cause you to dial that station (also known as a direct station select [DSS] call).

Functionally, the right mouse button is identical to the Release key, so you may use the button to disconnect a current call from the PC Attendant station or to complete a function such as a transfer or unattended conference (described in Chapter Two).

Introducing PC Attendant s

PUSH

CONT BRIGHT

POWER ON

OFF

COMDIAL

ON

OFF


Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

Caps Lock

A S

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

A n s w e r

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e

R e e l

Volume

Down

Volume

Up cover1.cdr

Total Control PC Attendant

3

4


1.3

On-line Help

The PC Attendant provides you with help whenever you need it. When you invoke the Help command, the information the system provides is pertinent to the function with which you are currently working or the window in which the cursor is positioned.

•

•

To Access A Help Screen,

1. press the Help button on your keyboard. After a short pause, a screen containing information about a particular function will appear. Highlighted words or phrases represent cross-referenced features related to the feature for which you originally requested help. To display the Help screen associated with a highlighted feature on a current Help screen,

2. use the arrow buttons or the mouse to move the cursor to select that highlighted word or phrase, press Enter.

To Return To A Previous Help Screen, press Backspace.

•

To Exit The Help Screens, press Esc. This will return you to the main screen.

Included on every Help screen is a highlighted Help Index option that, when selected, will display a menu of all available Help screens.

•

To View The Help Index Menu,

1. press Help (if you have not already activated a Help screen),

2. use the arrow buttons or the mouse to select the Help Index option,

3. press Enter. (The Help Index screen will display after a short pause.)



HELPINDX

Total Control Help Index

The help system of the Total Control PC Attendant is a series of crossindexed screens which provide information for the currently active window.

Each help screen provides access to this index, which in turn gives access to the entire help screen.

Pull Down Menus

Intercom Window

Current Call

Pending Calls

Call Options

Status Indicators

Keyboard Handset/Headset

: move cursor ENTER: select BACKSPACE: previous help page ESC: exit


Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

$

4

Caps Lock

A S D

R

%

5

F

T

G

^

6

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N

I

M

(

9

K

O

)

0

P

-

_

L

>

.

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e l e

R e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Help key Arrow keys

Escape key Backspace key

Next Screen key

Enter key



6

1.4

Knowing Your

PC Attendant Keyboard

The Total Control keyboard is equipped with one-touch function keys for executing most system features.

The keyboard diagram on the opposite page identifies the keys; the following list defines their different functions. See the chapters titled Using The PC Attendant’s Other Features and Using The PC Attendant

To Answer, Direct, And Make Calls for instructions on how to use these keys to carry out PC Attendant functions.

Answer: answers currently ringing (priority) call.

Arrow Keys: move cursor.

Backspace: causes previous help screen to be displayed. Also used as a true backspace key during text entry.

Both: establishes a conference between the PC Attendant, the current call, and the last call put on hold.

Activated by pressing the Shift/2nd Function key and the Split key simultaneously.

Conference: allows attendant to establish a conference call for up to 5 parties on the DXP or up to 7 parties on the DXP Plus.

Delete: allows attendant to delete numbers from the Intercom window. Also used to delete Directory entries and to delete characters during text input.

End: moves cursor to the end of current window.

Enter: executes or initiates selected functions.

Escape: returns the PC Attendant to a main screen from a Help screen; allows attendant to move the cursor from the main screen to the pull-down menu bar (and vice versa).

Headset: allows attendant to alternate between handset and headset modes. When headset is activated, handset remains active for listening only.

Help: activates context-sensitive Help screens.

Hold: places current call on hold.

Home: moves cursor to beginning of current window.

I. D. : allows you to enter a short tag or identification (up to 14 characters) to a current call in order to identify the call if it returns to the PC Attendant as a hold recall, transfer recall, park recall, etc.

Intercom: allows attendant to make calls to any extension within the system.

Insert: allows attendant to add extension numbers to Intercom window. Also used to add Directory entries and to insert characters during text entry. In some modes, pressing the Insert key will alternate between insert and typeover functions during typing. The cursor will change height—short for typeover and tall for insert.

Line: allows attendant to make an outgoing (outside) call using a DXP Line Group.

Message: activates a message-waiting light at a station; activates the Take A Message window for text messaging.

Overflow: directs incoming calls to an overflow attendant during peak activity. Calls will ring at both stations simultaneously.

Page: allows attendant to choose a zone in which a paging announcement will occur. After zone is activated, announcement can be made.

Park: activates the Park Orbit window, allowing you to place a call in one of nine park orbits.

Pick: performs a directed call pick up of a call ringing at another extension.

Release: disconnects current call.

Retrieve: retrieves a call from park orbit. Activated by pressing Shift/2nd Function key and Park key simultaneously.



Serial: places a call in a series of transfers (to a maximum of three intercoms within the system).

Shift/2nd Function: accesses a key’s secondary function (e.g. Retrieve is the secondary function on the

Park key) when held down during key selection.

Split: allows attendant to alternate between the current call and the last call that was placed on hold.

When one of the calls is activated, the other is automatically placed on hold.

Silent: silences currently ringing call.

Tab/Next Screen: moves cursor to next screen or window.

Tap: retrieves the last call placed on hold, transferred, or parked in orbit.

Tracker: used to page someone using Comdial’s Tracker on-site paging sysem (optional).

Transfer: transfers current call to another station.

Volume (Up/Down): controls volume of ringer, handset, and headset (used in conjunction with the “Set

Volume” feature in the Options pull-down menu to set default volume levels).

NOTE: Use keypad numbers on the far right of the keyboard for dialing numbers; use number keys above the letter keys to enter numbers during programming modes (such as setting the time and date, entering speed dial numbers, etc.)

Number keys (for programming, NOT for dialing)

Split / Both key

I.D. key

Overflow key

Headset key

Mute key

Help key

Serial key

Conference key

Page key / Tracker key

Pick key

Park / Retrieve key

Message key

Backspace key

Silent key

Next Screen key

Escape key

KEYBRD


Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

Caps Lock

A S

$

4

D

R

%

5

T

F G

^

6

Y

&

7

U

*

8

I

H J

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

(

9

O

)

0

K L

_

-

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Home key

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R AT O R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Transfer

Hold a s e

R e l e w e r

A n s

Volume

Down

Volume

Up keybrd.cdr

End

Delete

Line key

Insert key

TAP key

Intercom key

Enter key

2nd function key

Keypad includes:

- Dialpad

- Hold key

- Answer key

- Release key

- Transfer key

Volume control

(lowers volume)

Arrow keys

Volume control

(raises volume)



2

Handling Calls

2.1

The Intercom Window

The Intercom window displays the current status of 50 to 480 intercom numbers at one time. The optional name display mode will show the status of up to 100 intercom numbers that have been assigned names

(see page 2 - 12). The names displayed correspond to the station names assigned during DXP programming and are downloaded to your system automatically during start-up; they do not reflect the names assigned by the PC Attendant in the Attendant’s Directory. It is a good idea to program the names in the Attendant’s Directory so that they match the DXP-programmed names. If you increase the number of lines displayed to 50 (see page 1 - 2), you can see all 480 intercom numbers on the screen.

2.1.1 Intercom Screen Attributes

You can determine the status of any intercom simply by noticing how the intercom designation (either name or number) appears in the Intercom window. The following chart lists the screen attributes that pertain to both color and monochrome monitors.

State

Idle

Ringing

Busy

Do Not Disturb

Message Waiting

More Info

No Telephone

Color Monitor Monochrome Monitor

White on Blue Regular Intensity

Flashing White on Red Flashing Bar with

Black Type

Black on Red

Yellow on Blue

To: White on Green

From: Red on Green

Light Blue on Blue

Black on Blue

Bar with Black Type

High Intensity

Flashing Regular

Intensity

Underline

Regular Intensity

NOTE: Screen attributes may vary. See the Intercom window Help screen for your system’s current attribute settings. Also, if you are using a monochrome monitor, you may need to adjust the screen (using the contrast and brightness knobs on your monitor) to display the screen attributes correctly.

Handling Calls 9


2.1.2 Intercom Status

If the screen attribute for an intercom indicates “More Info” (see table in section 2.1.1), you can go to the

Intercom Status window for that intercom to determine if the station is forwarded, locked, or disabled.

•

To determine the intercom status,

1. use the arrow keys or the mouse to move the cursor to the intercom designation (name or number) on the screen list,

2. press Enter or click the left mouse button. You will see a list of possible intercom status designations with Yes or No tags that tell you whether a feature is turned on or off for that particular extension.

•

To return to the Intercom window, press Esc.

If your system has more than 160 extensions, you may need to view the higher-numbered extensions. To view these numbers at any time, use the arrow keys to move the cursor beyond the right edge of the window.

•

To move the cursor to the highest-numbered intercom (which appears at the end of the intercom list),

press End.

•

To move the cursor to the lowest-numbered intercom (which appears at the beginning of the intercom

list), press Home.

•

To delete unassigned intercom numbers from your screen,

1. with the cursor in the Intercom window, press Delete,

2. type the number that begins the range of numbers to be deleted,

3. press Enter,

4. type the number that ends the range of numbers to be deleted,

5. press Esc to reconfigure your Intercom window.

NOTE: If you need to add intercom numbers to your screen, follow the above procedure, but press Insert

instead of Delete to initiate the feature.

10 Handling Calls


2.1.3 Intercom Name/Number Selection

The “ITCM Name/Number” selection on the Options pull-down menu allows you to change how the system intercoms are displayed in the Intercom window—by name or by number.

•

To activate the Options pull-down menu from the Intercom window,

1. press Esc,

2. use the arrow buttons or the mouse to position the cursor on Options,

—OR— press the letter “O,”

3. press ENTER.

•

When the Options menu appears,

1. move the cursor to select ITCM Name/Number,

2. press Enter.

2.1.4 Changing A Station’s Class Of Service (COS)

You can change a station’s COS value from the intercom status window. You might want to change a station’s COS in order to change a person’s toll restriction. This feature is protected by the station 10 system manager’s password. You must enter this password before the COS value change takes effect. The default password is ✳#746✳.

•

To assign a new COS to a station from the Intercom Status window,

1. use the arrow keys or the mouse to move the cursor to the intercom designation (name or number) that you want to change,

2. press ENTER or click the left mouse button. You will see a list of possible intercom status designations with Yes or No tags that tell you whether a feature is turned on or off for that particular extension,

3. press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the name field and then press the down arrow to move the cursor to the COS field,

4. enter the desired COS value,

5. press ENTER or click the left mouse button,

6. press ESCAPE to exit the intercom status window,

7. enter the station 10 system manager password when prompted. An incorrect password will cause an error message to be displayed. If you receive an error message, press any key to return to the password input prompt.



2.1.5 Changing A Station’s Name

You can change a station’s name from the intercom status window. This feature is protected by the station

10 system manager’s password. You must enter this password before the name change takes effect. The default password is ✳#746✳.

•

To assign a new name to a station from the Intercom Status window,

1. use the arrow keys or the mouse to move the cursor to the intercom designation (name or number) that you want to change,

2. press ENTER or click the left mouse button. You will see a list of possible intercom status designations with Yes or No tags that tell you whether a feature is turned on or off for that particular extension,

3. press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the name field,

4. enter the new name,

5. press ENTER or click the left mouse button,

6. press ESCAPE to exit the intercom status window,

7. enter the station 10 system manager password when prompted. An incorrect password will cause an error message to be displayed. If you receive an error message, press any key to return to the password input prompt.



Pull Down

Menu Bar

Intercom

Window

Intercom

Numbers

Intercom Status

Pop-up Window

Current Call

Window

Pending Calls

Window

ITCMSTAT

Speed-Dials Directory Options

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

160

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

Current Call

RINGING

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

171

Intercom Status

174

175

176

177

178

179

Text Messages

181

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

0

NO

Forwarded

Do Not Disturb

Message Waiting

2:33 PM

Station Disabled

Description

1. WATS 1

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

YES

ABC Inc., How may I help you?

<Options>

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

3. Line 8 for Mr. Bolden

4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.

6. Ext. 155 Tutwiler, E.

7. Line 2 for Mr. Shifflett

8.

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

Parked Calls: 1

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

241

242

243

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

MUTE HEADSET OVERFLOW SILENT ALTERNATE NIGHT

Esc Help Mute Headset

Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

F

T

G

Y

H

&

7

U

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

-

_

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

T U V

8

O P E R ATO R

0

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Transfer

Hold

R l e e a s e w e r

A n s

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Escape key

Home key

End key

Arrow keys

Insert key

Delete key



2.2

The Current Call Window

The Current Call window shows the status of the call currently in progress at the PC Attendant console.

When you are on a call or are receiving a call, the Current Call window displays the following information:

• current call description and status (e.g. Line 1 Ringing),

• line greeting or intercom name,

• dialed digits or call in transfer,

• menu selectable options for the current call (such as Transfer, Park and Release). You may use these options instead of the keys for these features by positioning the cursor on the feature you desire

(Transfer, for example) and pressing Enter to execute,

• number of text messages set for a station (when that station is on an intercom call).

If there is no call in progress, the Current Call window displays the status of the call highlighted in the

Pending Calls window (a call on hold, for example). If you move the cursor up or down in the Pending

Calls window, the Current Call window changes to reflect the highlighted selection in the Pending Calls window.

2.3

The Pending Calls Window

The Pending Calls window shows the status of up to eight calls that are either ringing, holding, recalling, or currently connected to the PC Attendant station. Additional calls will not display in the Pending Calls window until one of the first eight calls is serviced. The pending call count at the top of the window shows the total number of pending calls waiting to be serviced.

When one or more calls are ringing at the PC Attendant station, a flashing arrow will appear to the right of the call that is audibly ringing (the highest- priority call). This is the call that will connect to the PC

Attendant station when the Answer key is pressed. If you prefer to answer one of the other

(lower-priority) calls ringing at your station, simply move the cursor in the Pending Calls window to highlight the call you want to answer and press Enter.

When one or more calls are holding at the PC Attendant station, an asterisk (

*

) will be displayed next to the last call placed on hold. This is the call that will connect to the PC Attendant station when the Tap key is pressed. If you prefer to answer another held call (one with no asterisk next to it), simply move the cursor in the Pending Calls window to highlight the held call you want to answer and press Enter.



Menu Bar

ILLUS9


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

156

157

158

159

160

151

152

153

154

155

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1

2. Line 6 for Ms. Swartz


4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1


HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

Intercom

Window


Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

G

^

6

Y

H

&

7

U

*

8

J

I

K

(

9

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

_

-

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Ctrl Alt Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer a s e l e

R e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Escape key

Enter key



2.4

Line Access Window

The Line window is located under the options menu and displays the current status of up to 48 lines. As an alternative to the Line window, the optional name display mode will show the status of up to 48 lines with their associated names. The default number of lines displayed on the PC Attendant screen is 25; the display can be changed to show either 43 or 50 lines (see page 1 - 2). You can switch between number and name display mode by using the Line Name / Number selection of the Options pull down menu.

The line window appears in the right hand corner of the Intercom window and automatically sizes itself depending upon the number of lines used. You can determine the status of a given line by noticing how the line designation appears in the Line window. The following chart lists the screen attributes that pertain to both color and monochrome monitors.

State

Idle

Ringing

Busy

On-Hold

Recalling

Color Monitor Monochrome

Monitor

Black on Cyan Regular Intensity

Flashing White on Red Flashing Reverse

Video

Black on Red Reverse Video

Cyan on Black High Intensity

Flashing Red on Cyan Flashing

2.4.1 Line Status Menu

The Line Status menu gives detailed information on the status of a particular line; it also gives the attendant the choice of testing that line or picking it up.

NOTE: You only need steps 1 – 4 if the line window is not currently being displayed.

•

To access the line status menu,

1. activate the Options menu,

2. press ALT–O and press Enter,

—OR— press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen; position the cursor on

“Options,” and press Enter,

3. move the cursor to highlight Line Access,

4. press Enter (move the cursor into the line window if necessary),

5. select line,

6. press Enter.



2.4.2 Test Busy

You can check the status or accessibility of any DXP line from the PC Attendant console.

NOTE: You only need steps 1 – 4 if the line window is not currently being displayed.

• To check line status,

1. activate the Options menu,

2. press ALT–O and press Enter,

—OR— press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen, position the cursor on

“Options”, and press Enter,

3. move the cursor to highlight Line Access,

4. press Enter,

5. select line,

6. press Enter,

7. after Line Status menu appears, highlight Test Busy,

8. press Enter.

ILLUS33

Menu Bar

Speed-Dials Directory Options Programming Quit

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

RINGING

151

152

153

154

156

161

162

163

164

1

171

172

173

174

175

176

Current greeting:

158

159

160

165

166

167

168

169

170

Tone dialing

Privacy release

Caller ID

Disabled

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM


<Options>

PICK-UP

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

209

210

NO

NO

NO

#

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

219

220

9

1. WATS 1

NO


221

222

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

230

Lines

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24


4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Pending Calls: 7

32

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

34

35

36

37

38

248

40

250

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

255

45

46

47

259

260

41

42

43

44

251

252

253

254


Escape key

Esc

Help Mute

Headset Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf

Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

_

-

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

#

A B C

2

J K L

5

T U V

8

0

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer a s e l e

R e e r

A n s w

Volume Volume

Alternate keys

"O" key

Enter key



2.5

Answering And Directing Calls

2.5.1 Answering Incoming Calls

When a call rings at the PC Attendant console, it will appear (with a description of its origin) in both the

Current Call window and the Pending Calls window and will have a flashing arrow next to it. (It will also be an audibly ringing call.)

•

To connect this call to the PC Attendant station, press Answer.

• To connect another incoming call before connecting to the audibly ringing call, press Tab/Next

Screen to activate the cursor in the Pending Calls window, move the cursor to select the call you

wish to connect and press Enter.

2.5.2 Holding Calls

Current calls can be put on hold at the PC Attendant station. The last call placed on hold will appear in the

Pending Calls screen with an asterisk ( ✳ ) next to it and can be reconnected by pressing the Tap key.

•

To place a current call on hold, press Hold. The call will appear in the Pending Calls window with an asterisk ( ✳ ) next to it.

•

To reconnect to this call, press Tap.

•

To reconnect to any other call placed on hold at the PC Attendant station,

1. press Tab/Next Screen to activate the cursor in the Pending Calls window (if the cursor is not already in that window),

2. move the cursor to select the holding call you wish to reconnect,

3. press Enter.



2.5.3 Handling / Recalling Hold Calls

The DXP system programmer sets the hold recall timer as well as other system parameters that affect how calls are handled by the system.

After a call has been on hold for a pre-programmed length of time, the call will recall to the PC Attendant station, causing an audible signal to sound. The hold recall will also appear in the Pending Calls window with the indication “HOLD RCL” and a flashing green arrow next to it (if it is the highest priority call).

When more than one call is recalling from hold, the flashing arrow will appear next to the first call placed on hold.

•

To answer this hold recall call, press Answer.

• To answer any other hold recall,

1. press Tab/Next Screen to activate the cursor in the Pending Calls window (if not already activated there),

2. move the cursor to select the holding call you wish to reconnect,

3. press Enter.

After you reconnect the PC Attendant station to any held call, you may press Hold to return the call to hold status and thus restart the hold recall timer.

ILLUS9

Menu Bar


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

156

157

158

159

160

151

152

153

154

155

Programming

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM

Quit

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


Intercom

Window


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

F

%

5

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

Z X C V B N

I

M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Ctrl

Shift

Alt

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

A B C

2

J K L

5

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

W X Y

9

Transfer

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

R e l e a s e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Escape key

Enter key



2.5.4 Parking Calls

A current call can be placed in one of nine “park orbits” within the system. This allows the call to be answered from any station if the person at that station knows the orbit code to dial in order to retrieve the call.

•

To place a call in a park orbit (while connected to the call),

1. press Park to activate the Park Orbits window,

2. if necessary, move the cursor to select an available park orbit for the call,

3. press Enter (Make a paging announcement, if necessary, to tell the called party which park orbit the parked call is in.),

4. You may press Esc to exit the Park Orbits window without parking the call.

A parked call will remain in park orbit for a set period of time. After that time is up, the call will recall to the PC Attendant station.

2.5.5 Retrieving Parked Calls

When a parked call recalls to the PC Attendant station, the Pending Calls window will display the call with the tag “PARK RCL” and a flashing arrow (if it is the highest priority call).

• To answer a park recall, press Answer.

Calls placed in Park Orbit can be retrieved before they are “timed out” of Park Orbit and recalled to your station.

• To retrieve any parked call,

1. press Shift/2nd Function and Park at the same time (this activates the Retrieve function),

2. position the cursor in the Park Orbits window on the call you wish to retrieve,

3. press Enter.



2.5.6 Transferring Calls

You may transfer a current call to any intercom within the system.

•

To transfer a current call,

1. while on the call, press Trans and dial intercom number using the dial pad, or type in the name of the station user receiving the call and press Enter. (Once you type in the first initial of the name, the system will display all of the names beginning with that letter—in case you are unsure of a name’s spelling),

2. for an unscreened transfer, press Release to complete the transfer after you hear ringing at the called station,

3. for a screened transfer, wait for the called party to answer, announce the call, then press Release to complete the transfer.

If you attempt to make a screened transfer and there is no answer at the called station, you can return to the call by pressing Tap.

If you make an unscreened transfer to a station that does not answer the transfer call, the transfer will recall to the Attendant’s station after a set period and will appear in the Pending Calls window as a transfer recall.

•

To answer a Transfer Recall, press Answer.

NOTE: If you need to retrieve an unanswered transfer call before it recalls to your station, you may use the

PICK feature, which is described in the chapter titled “Using The PC Attendant’s Other Features.”

Transferring calls using the the Dial-By-Name feature is also discussed in that chapter. You can also use the TAP key to retrieve a transferred call before it is answered.



2.5.7 Using The Pager—Tracker

The Tracker paging system allows you to send either an alphanumeric or numeric (depending upon the pager) message to a pocket-pager assigned to a DXP extension. The Track option on the Intercom-status window only appears if that intercom number has Tracker enabled.

•

To send a message through Tracker using the Intercom-status window,


2. press Enter to access the Intercom-status window,

3. move the cursor to highlight Track,

4. after Tracker menu appears, select appropriate pre-set message using the up and down arrow keys

(the system will display only messages that match the pager type; also, you can edit a defaulted message once you select it),

—OR— type new message,

5. press Enter to send the message.

NOTE: Some pagers accept longer messages than the PC Attendant’s screen allows; for these pager types the message scrolls to the left as you enter message information.

•

To send a message through Tracker using the Tracker key,


2. press and hold the Shift key,

3. press Page (Tracker) key,

4. after Tracker menu appears, highlight appropriate pre-set message using the up and down arrow keys (the system will display only messages that match the pager type; also, you can edit a defaulted message once you select it),

—OR— type new message,

5. press Enter to send the message.

NOTE: Some pagers accept longer messages than the PC Attendant’s screen allows; for these pager types, the message scrolls to the left as you enter message information.



Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

ILLUS10E

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

Speed-Dials

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Directory

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

Options Programming Quit

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

1.

2.

151

152

153

154

155

156

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

4.

5.

6.

7.

2:33 PM Description

Pending Calls: 7

1. WATS 1


Maximum length is 240. Use to select a stored default message.

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260



Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

Caps Lock

A S

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

K

(

9

O

L

)

0

-

_

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift 2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer s e e a

R e l

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Escape key

Tracker key

"P" key

Enter key

Arrow keys



2.6

Making Calls

2.6.1 Making Intercom Calls

•

To call another station,

1. press Intercom,

2. dial intercom number,

—OR— position cursor on desired intercom number in Intercom window,

3. press Enter twice,

—OR— use the mouse to select the intercom number from the Intercom window,

5. click the left mouse button twice.

2.6.2 Making Outside Calls

•

To make an outside call,

1. press Line,

2. dial number from dial pad.



2.6.3 Creating Conference Calls

From the PC Attendant console, you may initiate a conference call for up to five parties if you are using the DXP, or up to seven parties if you are using the DXP Plus (the call can consist of any combination of outside and inside numbers, or can consist of inside numbers only).

•

To create a conference call,

1. while on current call, press Conf,

2. dial intercom call (intercom tone is automatic) or press Line for outside call,

3. dial telephone number or intercom number from dial pad,

4. after called party answers, press Conf,

5. repeat procedure to create a conference for up to five conferees (including yourself).

Occasionally, you may be asked to set up a conference for other people and then (once the conference is established) leave the conference with the person who originally requested it.

•

To create an unsupervised conference,

1. confirm that conference is connected,

2. press # (on the keypad).

• To transfer a conference to another station,

1. confirm that conference is connected,

2. add the desired station into the conference using the steps described above,

•

3. when called station answers, announce that the conference is arranged and press # (on the keypad). The conference will then connect to the called station.

To park a conference call in a park orbit for pick up at any station,

1. while connected to the conference, press Park to activate Park Orbits window,

2. move the cursor to the desired park orbit,

3. press Enter. (Make a paging announcement if necessary to tell the called party which park orbit the parked conference is in.)

2.6.4 Disconnecting From A Call

When you complete a call or a transfer, you will need to disconnect from the call.

•

To disconnect a current call from the PC Attendant console, press Release or click the right-hand mouse button once.



2.7

Using The Pull-Down Menus

The Total Control PC Attendant console is equipped with on-screen pull-down menus that allow you to perform a variety of system operations and programming functions. The menus are as follows (in order from left to right in the top bar of the main screen):

—

—

—

—

—

Speed Dials

Directory

Options

Programming

Quit

•

To access the pull-down menus,

1. press Alt and the first letter of the menu name simultaneously (e.g. press Alt-P for the

Programming menu),

—OR—

2. press Esc to move the cursor into the pull-down menu bar at the top of the main screen, position the cursor on the menu you wish to view, press Enter (a pull-down menu will appear), move the cursor to the feature you wish to access, press Enter. A feature window will appear.

•

To exit a pull-down menu, press Esc. (Press Esc again to return the cursor to the Intercom window on the main screen.)

NOTE: You may also use the mouse to access the pull-down windows by pointing and clicking on the desired menu heading and menu selections. To exit the menus with the mouse, click outside the menu on to another main window.



Menu Bar

ILLUS9


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


Intercom

Window


Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

L

)

0

P

-

_

:

:

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

W X Y

9

Transfer

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold l e a

R e s e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Escape key

Enter key



2.7.1 Using The Pull-Down Menu Features

Speed Dials

You can use the Speed Dials pull-down menu to view and/or dial one of 200 pre-programmed DXP system speed dial numbers.

Directory

Selecting the Directory pull-down menu activates a window that contains lines and columns for you to enter the appropriate intercom names and numbers for your system (see 3.1.4 “Directory—Creating And

Editing” ) . The Directory pull-down menu can be used to dial an intercom number—simply position the cursor on the desired number and press Enter.

The Directory is the source from which you dial when you activate the Dial-By-Name feature (discussed in the chapter titled Using The PC Attendant’s Specialized Features); however, the names assigned to intercom numbers displayed in the Intercom window are a product of DXP programming. It is a good idea, therefore, to enter the Directory names so that they coincide with the intercom names assigned during DXP programming. Obtain a list of intercom names from your system programmer or installer.

Options

The Options menu provides access to lesser-used options than those one-touch features found on the keyboard. Specific instructions on how to use the options are found in the Using The PC Attendant’s

Other Features chapter of this guide, unless otherwise noted.

Line Access: Provides a visual indication of the status of the lines.

Paging: selecting this option allows you to choose a zone in which your announcement will be heard. (Zone 1 is typically used for all-call paging.)

Park Retrieve: activates the Park Orbits window, which tells you the location of currently parked calls awaiting service. For information on how to use this window to retrieve a parked call, refer to the Using The PC Attendant To Answer, Direct, And Make Calls chapter of this guide.

Alternate Mode: selecting Alternate Mode from the Options menu routes the functions of the PC

Attendant to an alternate attendant. Choosing this option a second time returns all call activity to the PC Attendant console.

Night Mode: selecting Night Mode transfers the PC Attendant’s call activity to a designated night attendant station or to the DXP system, which sounds a tone when incoming calls are received so that the calls may be picked up from any telephone within the system or group.

ITCM Names/Numbers: selecting this option changes the current Intercom window display from names to numbers or from numbers to names. The names and numbers are supplied through

DXP programming. If an intercom has no name assigned to it, only the number will appear when

“Names” is selected.

Line Names/Numbers: selecting this option changes the current Line window display from names to numbers or from numbers to names. The names and numbers are supplied through DXP programming. If a line has no name assigned to it, only the number will appear when “Names” is selected.

PC Settings: allows you to activate a “screen saver” that should be turned on when the PC

Attendant console is to be idle for a period of time.



Programming

The Programming menu allows you to access programming functions that set the System’s parameters. The options include the following:

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Set Date/Time

Set Volume

Speed Dials

Line Greetings

Other Greetings

Text Messaging

Keyboard Macros

Tracker

NOTE: Please refer to the Setting System Parameters chapter of this guide for information on how to use the features in the Programming menu.

Quit

Selecting Exit PC Attendant allows you to exit the PC Attendant system so that DXP system programming can occur (this is an installer activity).

To exit the PC Attendant console, choose EXIT PC Attendant from the Quit pull-down menu.

Re-enter the system by following the procedure outlined under “Installing The Software” in the chapter entitled Getting Started. The PC Attendant console will be unable to perform any attendant functions until the software is installed.



2.8

Setting The System Parameters

2.8.1 The Programming Menu

The system parameters on the following pages are set through the options on the Programming pull-down menu. Be sure to use only the number keys above the letter keys on the keyboard for programming; the dial pad numbers on the right side of the keyboard are for dialing only.

•

To access the Programming pull-down menu,

1. press ALT-P and press Enter,

—OR— press Esc,

2. using the arrow keys, position the cursor on “Programming” in the menu bar,

3. press Enter (the programming menu will appear),

4. move the cursor to the feature you wish to activate,

5. press Enter. A feature window will appear.

Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

ILLUS10


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

156

157

158

159

160

151

152

153

154

155

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

180

2:33 PM

Tracker

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Pending Calls: 7

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


Esc Help Mute

Headset Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

D

$

4

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Shift

Z X C V B N M

K

(

9

O

)

0

-

_

P

L

>

.

:

:

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

Transfer

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold s e e a

R e l

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Escape key

"P" key

Enter key

Arrow keys



2.8.2 Setting The Date And Time

The current date and time appear in the Current Call window when the main screen is displayed.

•

To change the date and time,

1. activate the Programming pull-down menu,



“Programming,” and press Enter,

3. move the cursor to highlight “Set Date and Time,”

4. press Enter (a small Date and Time window will appear),

5. type in the new date,

6. press Enter to position the cursor on the “Time” line,

7. type in new time,

8. press Enter to save the changes (Date and Time window will disappear),

9. press Esc twice to return the cursor to the Intercom window. The corrected date and time will now appear in the Current Call window.

NOTE: This change also resets the DXP system date and time designation.

Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

ILLUS11A

Speed-Dials

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

Directory Options

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

RINGING

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160


<Options>

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

Tracker

180

2:33 PM

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

Date: 02/04/92

Description

Pending Calls: 7

Time: 11:41:04

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

Enter new date

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260


Keyboard

Number keys (for programming)

"P" key

Escape key

Esc

Help Mute

Headset Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf

Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

D

R

%

5

F

T

G

^

6

Y

&

7

U

*

8

H J

I

K

(

9

O

)

0

L

Shift

Z X C V B N M

_

-

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Ctrl

Alt

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

A n s w e r

W X Y

9

Transfer e a s

R e l e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys



2.8.3 Setting The Volume

The PC Attendant’s handset and headset have a single volume control with seven separate levels that can be adjusted through the Programming menu option “Set Volume.” As well, the ringer volume at the PC

Attendant console can be adjusted separately through this menu option.

•

To change the handset/headset or ringer volume,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Set Volume,”

4. press Enter (a small window containing volume designations for the handset/headset and ringer will appear),

5. use the left and right arrow buttons to increase or decrease the volume for the handset/headset,

6. press Enter (the cursor will move to the ringer volume line),

7. adjust the ringer volume,

8. press Enter to save the volume changes and return to the programming menu,

9. press Esc twice to return the cursor to the Intercom window. The change in volume will remain until you elect to change it again.

NOTE: If you activate the Volume window and decide not to change the volume settings, simply press Esc twice to return to the Intercom window.

Also, headset and handset volume can be adjusted at any time (e.g. while you are on a call) by pressing

Shift and the left or right arrow key. This setting remains for the duration of the current call. After the current call is complete, the headset and handset volume revert to the settings found in the programming pull-down menu.



Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

ILLUS12A

Speed-Dials

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

Directory Options

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

RINGING

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160


<Options>

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

Tracker

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

2:33 PM

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Pending Calls: 7

Min

209

Max

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

Ringer

Min


4. Line 3

Pending Calls: 7

Max

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260


Escape key

"P" key

Shift keys


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

G

^

6

Y

&

7

U

*

8

H J

I

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

T U V

O P E R ATO R

0

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e e l

R e s w

A n e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Enter key

Left & Right

Arrow keys

(Volume Up and Volume

Down)

12a



2.8.4 System Speed-Dial Directory—Editing and Creating

System speed dials (the DXP system provides 200 such numbers, the DXP Plus allows for 500) allow you and the other users in your system to make outside calls without dialing an entire telephone number. The

Speed Dials option on the Programming pull-down menu allows you to program or edit speed dial numbers. If your system has software release 7A or later, you must enter your station 10 password to edit speed dial numbers. This is not required on systems using earlier software.

•

To create or edit a system speed dial,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Speed Dials,”

4. press Enter,

5. type the correct information in the cells provided. Move among the cells using the Enter key, and the Shift/2nd Function key (held down) and the Tab key together.

NOTE: Refer to the chapter titled Using The PC Attendant’s Specialized Features for information on speed-dialing from the PC Attendant console.

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

ILLUS13

Menu Bar

Speed-Dials

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

Directory

111

113

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Options

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

Programming

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

Quit

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Current Call

Tue Feb 4 2:33 PM Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

245

246

247

248

249

250

Pending Calls: 7

Status

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


Escape key


Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

Caps Lock

A

W

#

3

S

E

D

R

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

J

*

8

I

Shift

Z X C V B N M

(

9

O

)

0

P

-

_

Line

+

=

K L

:

:

'

"

/

?

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt

Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e l e

R e w e r

A n s

Alternate keys

"P" key

Enter key



2.8.5 Line Greetings

As an attendant, you may be called on to answer lines for many different departments or divisions within the same company, or you may need to answer telephones for more than one company. When call traffic is heavy, it’s not always easy to remember what you are supposed to say when answering a particular line

(for example, “ABC Marketing” may be the required greeting on one line, and “ABC Company—How may I direct your call?” may be required on another).

Line greetings are designed to give you an immediate indication of the greeting required for a particular line.

•

To program line greetings for the different lines within your system,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Line Greeting,”

4. press Enter,

5. type the line greetings necessary for each line,

6. press Enter (cursor will move down the line list),

7. type other greetings or press Esc to exit.

NOTE: Lines are numbered 1, 2, 3, etc. and correspond directly to your outside incoming lines; entering the phrase “Hello, how may I help you?” on line 1 of the window will cause that phrase to appear in the

Current Call window when an outside call rings on Line 1.

ILLUS14

Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

Line Greetings

Pop-Up Window

Speed-Dials Directory

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

Options

151

152

153

154

4.

2.

3.

156

1.

158

159

Line 3

5.

RINGING

6.

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

2:33 PM

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

<Options>

8.

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260


Escape key

Esc

Help

Mute Headset Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

Shift

Z X C V B N M

_

-

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Volume Volume

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

0

P R S

7

#

A B C

2

J K L

5

T U V

8

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e l e

R e e r

A n s w

Alternate keys

"P" key

Enter key



2.8.6 Other Greetings

When a system has DID (Direct Inward Dialing) lines, those lines can be set by your installer to ring directly at the PC Attendant. If the DID lines come to the PC, you can set different greetings for each

DID line.

•

To program greetings for DID lines,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Other Greetings,”

4. press Enter,

5. type the greetings necessary for each DID number,

6. press Enter (cursor will move down the line list),

7. type other greetings or press Esc to exit.



Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

Line Greetings

Pop-Up Window

ILLUS32


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

Current Call

1.

1.

1.

1.

1.

1.

151

152

153

154

156

100

101

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

Name102

103

Name103

104

Name104

105

Name105

106

Name106

107

Name107

171

172

Set Volume

Speed-Dials

175

176

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM

181

182

185

186

187

188

189

190

Description

<Options>

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260


Escape key


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

0

#

A B C

2

J K L

5

T U V

8

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer

R e l e a s e

A n s w e r

Volume Volume

Alternate keys

"P" key

Enter key



2.8.7 Keyboard Macros

The Macro Programming menu allows you to program up to 10 custom key–sequences (each containing up to 20 entries) that you can then play back with single–key access. You can set a keyboard macro to perform any one of several functions, (ALT 1 = Hold, ALT 2 = Tap, ALT 3 = Transfer, for example). If you insert more than 20 entries, the system will automatically drop the last event (number 20) when you insert the new one.

•

To program a keyboard macro,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Keyboard Macros,”

4. press Enter,

5. highlight the macro key you wish to program,

6. press Enter—the macro editing window for that macro appears.

NOTE: You can give the macro a name by highlighting it and entering a name from the keyboard. You can use all string editing keys (backspace, insert, delete, for example).

7. from the macro editing window, highlight the macro you want to edit,

8. press Enter,

9. use the up and down arrow keys to highlight an entry,

10. press insert to add a new event,

—OR— press delete to remove an entry,

11. from the Insert window, highlight the event you wish to insert (If the selected event requires extra information, a field will appear at the bottom of the window to enter that information.).



ILLUS10K


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

[

111

112

113

114

115

Alt 0:

Alt 1:

Alt 2:

Alt 3:

Alt 4:

Tue Feb 4

Alt 6:

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

[

Current Call

Options

156

157

158

159

160

151

152

153

154

155

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

173

Other Greetings

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

2:33 PM Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

Pending Calls: 7

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

RINGING

<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260



101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

[

111

112

113

114

115

Alt 0:

Alt 1:

Alt 2:

Alt 3:

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

[

Current Call

Alt 5:

Alt 6:

RINGING

<Options>

156

157

158

159

160

151

152

153

154

155


169

170

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

171

177

178

[ 181

182

183

184

186

189

190

[ 191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

9.

10.

2:33 PM

179

180

11.

12.

13.

14.

Description

210

Pending Calls: 7

15.

16.

17.

18.

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.


19.

20.


Ins/Del to edit

Parked Calls: 1

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

Status

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260



101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

[

111

112

113

114

115

Alt 0:

Alt 1:

Alt 2:

Alt 3:

Alt 5:

Alt 6:

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

[

Current Call

RINGING

Options

<Options>

156

157

158

159

160

151

152

153

154

155

Programming Quit

169

170

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

171

177

178

9.

10.

2:33 PM

179

180

11.

12.

13.

14.

[ 181

182

183

184

186

189

190

[ 191

192

193

194

195

198

199

200

Description

1. WATS 1

[

Pending Calls: 7



4. Line 3

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.


221

222

223

224

225

226

227

Dial Digit

Line

229

230

Line Group

Answer

Release

Transfer

Hold


Ins/Del to edit

Parked Calls: 1

231

232

233

234

235

Insert

238

239

240

[

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

Status

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260


Handling Calls

GCA 70-230

39


2.8.8 Enabling The Tracker Paging System

Before you can use the Tracker paging system, you must first enable the paging feature. You can enable the paging feature in either the local mode or the system mode. In either mode, you can create and send up to eight default messages (see 2.8.9).

In the local mode, you will be able to make your own intercom-pager assignments. These assignments will not change any assignments previously programmed into the DXP system by the installer or system programmer. To use the local mode, you must also have the Tracker base station plugged into the PC

Attendant Console at the port designated on your Tracker Status pull-down menu.

When using the system mode, Tracker selections are identical to those programmed in the DXP system by the installer or system programmer and any changes made in the system will be sent automatically to the

DXP. In this mode, you must also make sure that the installer or system programmer programs the DXP system for remote installation (if Tracker has been installed on the PC).

•

To enable Tracker,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Tracker Options,”

4. press Enter,

5. move the cursor to highlight “Disable/Enable Local/ Enable System,”

6. press Enter,

7. move the cursor to highlight the appropriate choice and press Enter.

ILLUS10B

Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

Speed-Dials

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Directory

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Tue Feb 4

Options

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

160

Current Call

Programming Quit

161

162

163

164

Set Date and Time

Set Volume

Speed-Dials

Line Greetings

Default Messages

Local Numbers

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

Keyboard Macros

Tracker

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

2:33 PM Description

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Pending Calls: 7

Status

241

242

243

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1


HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

Tracker key

"P" key

Esc

Help

Mute Headset Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

Caps Lock

A S

E

D

R

F

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V

T

G

B

Y

&

7

H

U

N

J

I

M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

_

-

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer e r

A n s w

R e a e l s e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Enter key

Arrow keys

Escape key



2.8.9 Programming The Tracker Default Messages

You can set a maximum of eight defaulted messages. Each defaulted message can contain a maximum of

32 characters (any printable characters); however, some pagers only accept 20-character messages and others only accept numeric pages.

NOTE: To use the Tracker pager, you must enable the Tracker base unit first (2.8.8).

• To program default messages,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Tracker,”

4. press Enter,

5. move the cursor to highlight “Default Messages,”

6. press Enter,

7. type or edit the default message(s),

8. move the cursor to highlight “Save changes as new defaults” and press Enter.

ILLUS10D

Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

160

169

170

Keyboard Macros

179 189

190

199

200

180

Tracker Pager Number Editing

Tue Feb 4

Current Call

102

103

Line 3 104

105


107

108

109

161

162

163

164

171

172

173

174

Default Messages

Local Numbers

System Numbers

Tracker

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

0

0

1. WATS 1

P4000

None

None

None



4. Line 3

None


8.

0

0

0

0

None

None

None

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.


0 None

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

Enter the pager number

Parked Calls: 1

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260


Tracker key


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

Shift

Z X C V B N M

P

L

>

.

:

:

-

_

Line

/

?

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt

Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Delete End

Page

Up

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer w e r

A n s a s e

R e l e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Escape key

"P" key

Enter key

Arrow keys



2.8.10 Programming The Tracker Pager Numbers

Assign a pager number to the specific DXP station number. You can assign a pager number to an unused extension number so that the user can be paged even if he or she doesn’t have a station. All extensions default to pager number 0 and no pager type.

NOTE: To use the Tracker pager, you must enable the Tracker base unit first (2.8.8).

•

To program a pager number,





3. move the cursor to highlight “Tracker,”

4. press Enter,

5. move the cursor to highlight “Pager Numbers,”

6. press Enter,

7. highlight the line of the desired DXP extension (all currently defined DXP extensions appear),

8. enter the pager number,

9. press Enter,

10. enter the pager type (scroll between pager types using the space bar),

11. press Shift key and the Tab key together to move to the next line or press

Esc to exit.



Menu Bar

Programming

Pull-Down Menu

ILLUS10D


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

111

112

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

107

108

109

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

Current Call

102

103

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

169

170

171

172

173

174

181

182

183

184

185

Keyboard Macros

179

Default Messages

Local Numbers

System Numbers

Tracker 189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

180

Tracker Pager Number Editing

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

0

0

1. WATS 1

P4000

None

None

None



4. Line 3

None


8.

0

0

0

0

None

None

None

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.


0 None

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

Enter the pager number

Parked Calls: 1

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260



Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

Caps Lock

A

W

S

#

3

E

D

$

4

R

F

%

5

T

^

6

G

Y

H

U

*

8

J

I

Shift

Z X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

L

)

0 -

_

P

Line

:

:

/

?

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e e l

R e e r

A n s w

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Escape key

Tracker key

"P" key

Enter key

Arrow keys



3

Using Specialized Features

3.1

Both Feature

Often, a caller will need to hold while you locate an individual. Once the person is connected to the PC

Attendant console, you can use the Both key to establish a conference among the PC Attendant console, the last call placed on hold, and the current call.

•

To use the both feature, while on current call, press Shift/2nd Function and Split simultaneously.

The last call placed on hold is then part of the established three-way conference.

•

To place both parties on hold at the Attendant PC, press Hold (the calls are now in Conference Hold).

•

To return both parties to the three-way conference, press Tap.

•

To allow the two parties to continue talking in an unsupervised conference, press # to drop out of the three-way call.

3.2

Headset

If your console is equipped with an optional headset for handset–free operation, you will need to “tell” the system when you switch between the handset and headset modes.

NOTE: Your headset must be plugged in for this feature to activate.

•

To switch from handset to headset, press Headset. The Headset indicator at the bottom of your main screen will be highlighted.

•

To return to the handset mode, press Headset. The Headset indicator will dim.

ILLUS15


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

J

*

8

I

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer a s e

R e l e e r

A n s w

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Headset key

TAP key

Hold key

Both key

Using PC Attendant's Specialized Features 45


3.3

I.D.

A busy PC Attendant console can receive and direct many calls in a very short period of time. Some of the calls that are transferred or placed on hold will recall to the PC Attendant console after a period of time if they are not answered. To help you remember an aspect of a call that recalls to your station (such as who the call was originally for or why a person was holding), we’ve included an I.D. feature at the PC

Attendant station that lets you “tag” a call with a name or a phrase up to 14 characters long.

•

To add a tag to a call,

1. while on the call, press ID,

2. type the call’s tag in the I.D. window,

3. press Enter. The tag will remain with the call until the call is disconnected from the system.

3.4

Intercom

You can choose to dial a person’s intercom by typing his or her name instead of looking up the correct intercom number and then dialing the call.

•

To use the dial-by-name feature,

1. press Intercom,

2. type the first letter of the person’s last name,

—OR— press the comma (,) key and then type the first letter of the person’s first name; type additional letters of the person’s name as needed until the cursor is positioned on the desired name, or use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the name,

3. when the directory window appears, position the cursor on the desired name,

4. press Enter. Your call will ring at the desired station,

5. If you know the intercom number, press Intercom and dial the number from the dial pad. The called station will ring.

ILLUS16B

Directory

Pop-Up

Window

Speed-Dials

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Directory

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

Options

131

132

133

134

Rodgers

Thomas

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

160

Programming

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

Sara

Kyndra

Scott

Brent

Karen

Andy

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

Quit

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

, A.

, J.

, R.

, S.

189

190

, A.

, M.

199

200

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

Current Call

Tue Feb 4 2:33 PM Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

Pending Calls: 7

Status

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

Enter Call Tag

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

CONNECTED

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


I.D. key

Esc

Help Mute

Headset Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf

Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

Caps Lock

Ctrl

Shift

A

Z

W

#

3

E

$

4

R

%

5

T

^

6

Y

Alt

S

X

D

C

F

V

G

B

H

N

U

*

8

J

I

M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

0

#

A B C

2

J K L

5

T U V

8

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer s w e r

A n

R e a e l s e

Volume Volume

Comma key

Intercom key

Enter key

46 Using PC Attendant's Specialized Features


3.5

Message

3.5.1 Message Waiting Indicator

•

To activate a message-waiting indicator at any station,

1. position cursor on intercom number to receive indicator setting,

2. press Message key,

3. move the cursor to “Set/Clear Callback Msg,”

4. press Enter. The light above or next to the HOLD button will flutter at the selected station.

• To turn off a message-waiting indicator at the called station, repeat above procedure.

•

If you call a station and hear a busy signal or receive no answer,

1. while on call, move cursor to MESSAGE under Options in the Current Call window,

2. press Enter. Message-waiting light will flutter at called station.

•

To turn off the message-waiting light at the called station, repeat above procedure.

NOTE: A message-waiting light can also be turned on at another station through the Intercom Status window. Simply activate the window by moving the cursor to the desired intercom on the screen and press Enter. When the Intercom Status window appears, move the cursor to

“MESSAGE” and press Enter. When the message pop-up window appears, move the cursor down to “Set/Clear Callback Msg” and press Enter. The message-waiting indicator is set at that station. Turn off the message indicator by repeating these steps.



3.5.2 Text Messages

The PC Attendant’s Message key, in addition to turning on a message-waiting light at a station, will allow you to access a “message” pop-up window to store a text message for any station.

The message can take the form of a “canned” message set by the system (e.g. “Please call,” “Will call again,” “Wants to see you”) or a customized message (up to 8, 32-character lines for a total of 256 characters). Storing a text message for an extension automatically turns on the fluttering message-waiting indicator above the hold button at that station (if auto-message set is enabled by the attendant and text messaging keys are not programmed at individual stations).

System users can retrieve text messages in one of three ways:

• LCD telephone users can cause the messages to appear in their telephone’s display, line by line;

• all station users can retrieve messages at a system printer that, if enabled through class of service programming, can be made to print out all text messages as they are stored or to print selected text messages on command;

• non-LCD and single-line telephone users can call the attendant, who can retrieve and read the messages stored for any extension.

•

To store a text message for any station,

1. position the cursor on the desired extension number in the intercom window,

2. press the Message key (the message pop-up menu appears on the screen),

3. move cursor (if necessary) to select “Take Text Message” option,

4. press Enter (the “Take Text Message” pop-up window appears on the screen),

5. use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to desired fields within the window,

6. within each field, type appropriate message information,

7. within the preset message field, use the space bar to set the proper indicators next to as many preset messages as desired,

8. press Enter to move cursor into Message field/box,

9. type desired message (up to 256 characters),

10. press Enter to move the cursor into the Options field,

11. using the right and left arrow keys, move the cursor to the appropriate option,

12. press Enter.



— If you choose SAVE, the system saves the current message for the selected station. If you repeat the procedure with another message for the same extension, the system would save that message as message 2 (up to 100 messages per station or until disk is full).

— If you choose PRINT, the message will automatically be sent to the printer and be printed.

When a message is printed, a “Message taken by” field prints at the end of the message, indicating the extension of the attendant station taking the message. You may type in the message, choose PRINT, and then exit without saving the message in order to conserve disk space.

— If you choose EDIT, the cursor would move to the beginning of the Take a Message window and allow you to change any part of the message you’ve entered. Selecting SAVE after you’ve edited the message will save the edited version of the message. (Once you have saved a message, however, you cannot edit it.)

— If you choose ERASE, the message you are viewing is erased from the system and disappears from the window.

— If you choose EXIT, the message you’ve entered will not be saved and the text message pop-up menu will reappear.

ILLUS29

Take a

Message

Pop-Up

Window


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

123

124

125

126

127

129

131

132

133

134

Ext:

136

137

From:

139

Phone:

105

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

1. Telephoned

2. Please call

3. Called to see you

4. Wants to see you

8.

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

7. Urgent

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

Current Call

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Tue Feb 4 2:33 PM Description Status

( )

( )

( )

( )

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

Enter Call Tag

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

SAVE PRINT EDIT ERASE EXIT PARK RCL

Parked Calls: 1


Options

Field


Split

Both

Serial Conf Page Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Shift

Z X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

<

,

)

0

L

-

_

P

Line

:

:

/

?

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

W X Y

9

Transfer

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold a s e l e

R e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Message key

Enter key



3.5.3 Viewing A Text Message (at the PC Attendant)

The attendant may view all of the current messages for any station at any time.

•

To view text messages for an extension,

1. position the cursor on the desired extension number in the intercom window (if you are not currently connected to that extension),

2. press Message key (the message pop-up menu will appear),

•

3. move the cursor to select “View Text Message” (this menu option will not be accessible if no message is saved for that extension),

4. press Enter. The first saved message appears on the screen (the field “Message X of Y” indicates the number of the message you are viewing and the total number of messages saved for that station).

To view subsequent messages,

1. move the cursor to the Options field,

2. select NEXT,

•

3. press Enter. The second saved message will appear on the screen. Repeat the procedure to scroll forward through all messages saved for that extension.

To review previous messages, press PREV. The previously viewed message will reappear. Repeat the procedure to scroll backward through all messages saved for that extension.

•

To print the message you are currently viewing,


2. select PRINT,

3. press Enter. The message is printed and remains saved until it is deleted.

•

To delete a message you are currently viewing,


2. select DELETE,

3. press Enter. The message is deleted from the system.



Take a

Message

Pop-Up

Window

ILLUS29A


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Time:

123

Company:

125

126

127

128

129

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

From:

139

Phone:

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

[ View Message 1 or 1 ]

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

192

193

194

1. Telephoned

2. Please call

3. Called to see you

4. Wants to see you

8.

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

7. Urgent

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Current Call

Tue Feb 4 2:33 PM Description Status

( )

( )

( )

( )

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

Enter Call Tag

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1


HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

Options

Field


Split

Both

Serial Conf Page Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

Caps Lock

A S

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

Shift

Z X C V B N M

O

)

0

P

-

_

Line

+

=

L

:

:

'

"

/

?

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e l e

R e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Message key

Enter key



3.6

Mute

By using the Mute feature, you can block transmission of your voice to the distant party.

• For example, if someone comes into your office to talk to you and you do not want to interrupt the

distant party, press Mute (Mute feature is highlighted in the features bar at the bottom of your main screen).

•

To cancel the Mute feature and return to your conversation with the distant party, press Mute to disengage the feature.



Mute

Indicator

ILLUS17A


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

156

157

158

159

160

151

152

153

154

155

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Ext. 106 BUSY


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Ext. 106

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

BUSY

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING



Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

L

)

0

P

:

:

-

_

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

T U V

O P E R ATO R

0

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer a s e e l

R e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Mute key



3.7

Overflow

Peak calling periods can make it harder for a single attendant to handle every call that needs service. You can cause all incoming calls to ring at an overflow attendant’s station and at your station. The calls will still be queued in the system according to their priority, and calls will recall to the attendant’s station where they were originally answered.

•

To share incoming calls with an overflow attendant, press Overflow. The “Overflow” indicator at the bottom of the main screen will be highlighted.

•

To return the ringing of all incoming calls to the PC Attendant console, press Overflow. The

“Overflow” indicator at the bottom of the main screen will dim.

3.8

Page

It may be necessary for you to make a paging announcement in a particular zone (e.g. throughout one department or in a warehouse) or in all zones of your location (known as all-call paging).

•

To make a paging announcement from the PC Attendant console to a particular zone,

1. press Page to activate Paging pop-up window,

2. move the cursor to choose the zone in which your page will be heard (Zone 1 typically is designated by the system as the all-call paging zone),

3. press Enter,

4. make announcement,

5. press Esc to exit the paging feature,

6. press Release to disconnect from the paging zone.

NOTE: To make a paging announcement in more than a single zone but not in the all-call mode, you will need to make a separate paging announcement in each of those zones, one at a time. After you complete a page in one zone, move cursor to highlight another zone and repeat the announcement.



Overflow key

Escape key

Paging

Zones

Window

ILLUS30


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

Current Call

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

160

161

162

165

171

Page Zones

All Call

Zone 3

Zone 4

Zone 5

Zone 7

Zone 8

2:33 PM

181

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

Idle

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Idle

Idle

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Pending Calls: 7

241

242

243

245

246

247

248

249

250

Status

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1


HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

D

R

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Shift

Z X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

T U V

O P E R ATO R

0

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer e a s e

R e l

A n s w e r

Page key

Enter key

Release key



3.9

Pick

You may pick up any call that is ringing at another telephone in your system.

• To pick up a call,

1. press Pick,

2. dial number of ringing station (you will then be connected to that call).

(Performing a Direct Station Selection [DSS] on a ringing station will also allow you to pick up a call.)

3.10 Serial

Sometimes a current call will need to be transferred to more than one intercom in a particular sequence

(this is called a serial transfer).

•

To complete a serial transfer,

1. while on the call, press Serial (call is placed on hold automatically),

2. dial intercom to receive transfer,

3. dial intercom to receive second transfer,

4. repeat once more to place a third intercom in the serial,

5. press Release. Transferred call will connect to first transfer in the serial.

When the call is disconnected from the first intercom in the serial, the system will automatically send it to the second intercom number, etc., until final transfer is complete. The call disconnects from the system when the final transfer is disconnected.

At any time during a serial transfer, an intercom party may discontinue the serial by redirecting the call.

ILLUS19

Esc

Help Mute

Headset Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

-

_

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

A n s w e r

W X Y

9

Transfer

R e l e a s e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Serial key

Pick key

Release key



3.11 Silent

A busy Attendant’s console will ring often with incoming calls, sometimes during an active call. This constant ringing can be irritating to both you and the person with whom you are speaking.

•

To silence the ringer at the PC Attendant console for the duration of the currently ringing call, press

Silent. The ringer will remain silent until the next call rings at the PC Attendant console.

3.12 Split

You can alternately connect the PC Attendant console to the last call placed on hold and a current call.

•

To use the split feature, while on a call, press Split (the current call is placed on hold, and the last call placed on hold is retrieved).

•

To alternate the calls again, press Split.

You may go between the two calls in this manner for as long as you’d like, and you may handle them separately at any time (transferring the current call, for example, releases that call from the PC Attendant console and leaves the held call on Hold).

Or you may want to establish a conference between these two calls using the Both key (see discussion on page 25 of this guide).

ILLUS20


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick

Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Z X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0 -

_

P

L

>

.

:

:

/

?

Alt

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Ctrl

Shift

Alt

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer

A n s w e r

R e l e a s e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Split key

Silent key



3.13 Alternate

Calls that normally ring at the PC Attendant console can be directed to an alternate attendant’s station (the alternate station need not be a PC Attendant station).

•

To transfer all call activity to an alternate attendant,


2. press ALT-O and press Enter,



3. move the cursor to highlight “Alternate,”

4. press Enter. Calls will ring at the alternate station.

•

To return call activity to the PC Attendant console from the alternate attendant, repeat the above procedure.

The Alternate status indicator at the bottom of the main screen will be highlighted when the alternate mode is activated.



Menu Bar

Options Pull-

Down Menu

Alternate

Status

Indicator

Escape key

ILLUS21


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

163

164

Alternate Mode

156

157

158

159

161

162

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

189

190

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

2:33 PM

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1


HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

Esc Help Mute

Headset Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

Caps Lock

A S

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

G

^

6

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

0

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

#

A B C

2

J K L

5

T U V

8

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

A n s w e r

W X Y

9

Transfer e a s e

R e l

Volume Volume

Alternate keys

"O" key

Enter key



3.14 Directory

You have the ability to create a directory of the station names within your system so that you may, for example, use the dial-by-name feature (see section titled “Intercom—Using The Intercom Key To Dial

By Name Or Dial By Number” in this chapter).

For your own purposes, it is convenient to have a complete and up-to-date list of all intercom numbers and their user’s names appear on your PC Attendant’s screen with the touch of a button.

Before you create such a directory, it is a good idea to obtain a list of names and numbers as they were programmed by the installer of your DXP system (these names appear in your Intercom window when you switch the display from numbers to names) to avoid confusion between what names appear in the

Intercom window and what names appear in the Directory you create.

To create a directory of names and numbers for your system,

1. activate the Directory pull-down menu,

2. press ALT-D and press Enter,

—OR— press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar, use the arrow keys to select “Directory,” and press Enter,

3. with the directory menu activated, press Insert to activate the Directory Editing window,

4. type the station user’s last name,

5. press Enter,

6. type the station user’s first name,

7. press Enter,

8. type the station user’s middle name or initial (if desired),

9. press Enter,

10. type the station number using the keyboard numbers,

11. press Enter (an empty Directory Editing window will appear so that you may continue editing the directory),

12. when you are finished creating or editing the Directory, press Esc (the Directory Editing window will disappear),

13. press Esc again to save the changes and exit the Directory.

60

NOTE: If you wish to name a station by its location (e.g. Board Room, Cafeteria, Hallway B,

Warehouse) you may do so: simply enter the name on the line for “Last” name in the

Directory Editing Window and press Enter. Press Enter twice more to move the cursor past the

First and Middle name entries and then enter the extension number. Proceed according to the previous instructions in order to continue editing or save the changes.

Using PC Attendant's Specialized Features


You may view the directory at any time by pressing ALT-D, or by pressing Esc, moving the cursor to highlight “Directory,” and pressing Enter. The Directory is arranged alphabetically and will automatically re-sort when changes are made to it.

Escape key

"D" key

Directory

Pop-Up

Window

ILLUS22


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

110

111

112

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

Options

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Last

Bolden

Coles

Lucas

Miller

Smith

150

151

152

153

154

155

157

158

159

160

Programming

First

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

Quit

181

Karl

Bill

Ext. #

184

185

186

Eric

Richard

Michael

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Current Call

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

Pending Calls: 7

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Tue Feb 4

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

Enter Call Tag

2:33 PM Description

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1


Status

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

Caps Lock

A

W

#

3

S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

J

*

8

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

-

_

:

:

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Delete End

Page

Up

Page

Down

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer

A n s w e r l e

R e a s e

Alternate keys

Enter key



3.15 Night

Calls that normally ring at the PC Attendant console can be directed to ring an external ringer. Night transferred calls can be answered from any telephone within the system or group.

NOTE: In order to extend the life of your monitor, turn it off whenever the PC Attendant will be relatively inactive and unattended for long periods. Do not, however, turn off the computer itself, as this will disable the operation of the console and will require you to reboot the PC

Attendant.

• To transfer incoming calls to the Night Mode,





4. move the cursor to highlight “Night Mode,”

5. press Enter. (Repeat the procedure to return service to the PC Attendant console.)

Menu Bar

Options Pull-

Down Menu

Night Mode

Indicator

ILLUS31


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

156

157

158

160

161

162

163

Park Retrieve

165

166

167

168

PC Settings

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

2:33 PM

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


Escape key

62

Esc

Help Mute

Headset Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf

Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

$

4

Caps Lock

A S D

R

F

%

5

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

Shift

Z X C V B N M

I

(

9

K

O

)

0 -

_

P

L

>

.

:

:

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

0

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

#

A B C

2

J K L

5

T U V

8

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer a s e l

R e e

A n s w e r

Volume Volume

Alternate keys

"O" key

Enter key



3.16 PC Settings (Screen Saver)

During periods of minimal call activity, you can activate the PC Attendant screen saver in order to keep the main screen image from becoming “burned” into the monitor over time.

When the screen saver is activated, the monitor screen (after 20 minutes of no activity at the PC Attendant console) will go dark and the “Total Control” sign will flash randomly across the screen. When activity resumes at the PC Attendant console (when a call comes in to the console or when you press any key), the main screen reappears and remains on until another 20 minutes of inactivity passes.

•

To turn the screen saver on,

1. activate the Options pull-down menu,


—OR—

3. press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen, position the cursor on

“Options” and press Enter,

4. move the cursor to “PC Settings,”

5. press Enter (the PC Settings pop-up window will appear),

6. press the Space Bar to activate the screen saver (a red check mark will appear in the left side of the window).

Repeat this procedure to turn off the screen saver.

ILLUS23

Options

Pull-Down

Menu


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

Programming

151

152

153

154

Night Mode

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

Quit

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

( ) Screen Saver

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

PC Settings

Text Messaging

219

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


PC Settings

Pop-Up

Windows

Escape key

Space

Bar


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

F

%

5

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

J

*

8

I

Shift

Z X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

Line

:

:

/

?

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

A n s w r e

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e e l

R e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

"O" key

Enter key



3.17 SOHVA

You can make a voice announcement to another telephone that is off-hook and busy on a call.

• To initiate a SOHVA call,

1. make an intercom call to the telephone where the SOHVA is to occur,

2. note “Busy” message for intercom number in Current Call window and hear busy tone,

3. move the cursor to select SOHVA from the Current Call options,

4. press Enter and hear one to six beeps,

5. make announcement.

Your announcement will sound over the handset at the telephone to which you directed the SOHVA call

(your voice will be heard only by the person whose station you called).

If the station you attempt to call in this manner is on-hook and busy (in the speakerphone mode) or if the station has activated a Voice-Announce Block feature, your SOHVA will not connect and you will hear a busy signal or error tone.

ILLUS24

Current

Call

Options


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150


151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

2:33 PM

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Ext. 106 BUSY


<Options>

RELEASE MESSAGE CAMP-ON SOHVA

Subdued off-hook voice announce

1. WATS 1



4. Ext. 106

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

BUSY

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING


64


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

Caps Lock

A S

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Shift

Z X C V B N M

(

9

O

)

0

P

-

_

Line

+

=

K L

:

:

'

"

/

?

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

W X Y

9

Transfer a s e e l

R e s w

A n r e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Enter key

Arrow keys



3.18 Speed Dialing

System speed dials (the DXP system provides 200 such numbers, the DXP Plus allows for 500) allow you and other users in your system to make outside calls without dialing an entire telephone number. The

Speed Dials option on the Programming pull-down menu allows you to program or edit speed dial numbers (see the discussion “System Speed-Dial Directory—Editing And Creating” in the chapter titled

Setting The System Parameters in this guide.)

•

To make a call using a speed dial number,

1. activate the Speed Dials pop-up window,

2. press ALT-S and press Enter,

—OR— press Esc to move the cursor from the main screen to the menu bar (the cursor will automatically highlight Speed Dials), and press Enter,

3. position the cursor in the Speed Dials window on the number you wish to dial,

4. press Enter. The system will then dial the number you’ve chosen.

ILLUS25

Speed-Dials

Window

Speed Dial

Numbers

Speed-Dials Directory Options Programming

100

102

102

103

106

105

108

106

107

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

2:33 PM

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

Quit

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

Description

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

1. WATS 1



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL


"S" key


Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

$

4

Caps Lock

A S D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

-

_

:

:

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

W X Y

9

Hold

Transfer a s e e l

R e

A n s w e r

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Alternate keys

Enter key



4

Troubleshooting Guide

KSA70255

4.1

Operation Interruptions

From time to time, your PC Attendant operations may be disrupted for one reason or another: the

KSX-200 system could lose communication, the system’s power could temporarily fail, or the connection between the PC Attendant console and the KSX-200 system could be jarred loose. If these or other problems occur, your PC Attendant console will alert you to the status of the system in the form of screen messages (Data Link Error and KSX-200 Not Responding).

4.1.1 Data Link Error

When your KSX-200 system resets for any reason, operation of the PC Attendant console will be temporarily interrupted and the System Reset window will appear in the center of your screen. When this happens, the message “Data Link Error” will appear and the window will contain two options, “Continue” and “Reload Data.” Usually, selecting the “Continue” option is sufficient to allow the PC Attendant console to continue processing calls. If there is a chance of data corruption or data change on the PC or the KSX-200 system, choose the “Reload Data” option to cause the system to resend all pertinent PC data.

ILLUS27B

Speed-Dials

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

Directory Options Programming Quit

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

Current Call

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

189

190

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

Description

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Pending Calls: 7

Status

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

Line 3 RINGING


<Options>

Reload data



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL



Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

$

4

D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

K

(

9

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

-

_

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt

Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

Q Z

1

G H I

4

#

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

W X Y

9

Transfer

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold a s e l e

R e e r

A n s w

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

Troubleshooting Guide 67

KSA70255 PC Attendant's Console User's Guide

4.1.2 KSX-200 Not Responding

When the KSX-200 system is shut down for more than 30 seconds or when the data connection between the PC and the system is broken, a window with “KSX-200 Not Responding” will appear on the screen and two options will be available: “Retry Connection” will cause the PC Attendant to attempt to re-establish communication with the system. (If this is successful, the System Reset window will appear, at which time you may choose “Continue” or “Reload Data.”) Selecting the “Quit PC Attendant” option will cause the PC to exit the PC Attendant software package.

ILLUS27A


101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Tue Feb 4

Line 3

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

Current Call

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

RINGING

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160


<Options>

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

Pending Calls: 7

Retry Connection

2:33 PM Description

Quit PC Attendant



4. Line 3

5. Ext. 243 Gay, J.



8.

Parked Calls: 1

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

Status

HOLDING

HOLDING*

HOLDING

RINGING

RINGING

RINGING

PARK RCL

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260


Esc Help Mute Headset Overflow

I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf Page

Tracker

Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

E

$

4

Caps Lock

A S D

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

P

:

:

-

_

Shift

Z X C V B N M

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

*

Backspace

Intercom

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

#

Q Z

1

G H I

4

P R S

7

O P E R ATO R

0

T U V

8

A B C

2

J K L

5

*

D E F

3

M N O

6

Hold

A n s w e r

W X Y

9

Transfer

R l e e a s e

Volume

Down

Volume

Up

68 Troubleshooting Guide

PC Attendant's Console User's Guide GCA70-230

5

Glossary

A

B

All-call paging: Paging through the intercoms of all stations in the system.

Alternate mode: Allows all call activity to be routed to an alternate attendant’s telephone.

Answer key: Answers currently ringing (priority) call.

Arrow keys: Move cursor within a selected window.

Automatic callback: After a station has set an automatic callback for a busy station, the system will ring the station when the called telephone is no longer busy.

Backspace key: Causes previous help screen to be displayed.

Both key: Establishes a conference between the PC Attendant console, a current call, and the last call put on hold.

C

Call I.D. (call tag): A name, word or phrase the attendant creates for a current call in order to identify the call if it recalls to the attendant’s station.

Call forward: Designating another telephone to receive all calls normally directed to the user’s telephone.

Call park: Placing an active call in system hold (park orbit) and retrieving it by any telephone.

Call pickup: Answering a call at one telephone when it is ringing at another telephone.

Call transfer: Transferring a call from one station to another. The transfer can be screened (i.e., you find out who is calling and announce the call to the party being called) or unscreened ( i.e., you transfer the call without identifying the calling party to the called party).

Central message desk: A station that has been assigned to control message waiting lights and deliver messages to other stations in the system.

Class of Service programming: Customized programming of your system by the installer that establishes the basic operating parameters of the system and individual stations.

Conference key: Allows attendant to establish a conference call for up to 5 parties (including Attendant).

Current Call window: Displays information about and options for handling the current incoming call.

Cursor: A flashing, highlighted position indicator that shows where (on the screen) text will be entered (during typing) or which feature or option is currently being recognized by the computer as a selection made by the attendant.

Glossary 69

GCA70-230

D


Data Link Error: This phrase appears on the PC Attendant’s monitor if there has been a temporary loss of communication between the PC Attendant station and the DXP operating system. The system will reset itself in order to continue call-handling activities.

Delete key: allows attendant to delete extension numbers from the Intercom window.

Dialpad: Buttons 0 through 9, ✳ and # used for dialing.

Direct Inward Station Dialing (DISD): Allows an outside party to call an intercom station directly without an attendant’s assistance.

Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF): Using one button to place intercom calls. Busy lamp field or BLF is a term for a light that identifies current call status of a DSS station.

Directory: Contains a list of all available intercom numbers and any names associated with those numbers.

Do not disturb: A mode that disables incoming call ringing (audible) and intercom calling.

DXP operating system: The DXP hardware/ software equipment combination that controls all call activity and all system features.

E

End key: Moves cursor to the end of current window.

Enter key: Launches or initiates selected functions.

Escape key: Returns the PC Attendant to a main screen from a Help screen; allows attendant to move the cursor from the main screen to the pull-down menus.

H

Headset key: Allows attendant to alternate between handset and headset modes. When headset is activated, handset remains active for listening only.

Help key: Activates context-sensitive Help screens.

Hold key: Places current call on hold.

Home key: Moves cursor to beginning of current window.

I

I. D.: Allows the attendant to enter a short tag (up to 14 characters) to an incoming call in order to identify the call if it returns to the attendant.

Insert key: Allows attendant to add extension numbers to Intercom window.

Intercom key: Allows attendant to make calls to any extension within the system.

Intercom window: Displays the names/numbers and status of all intercoms within your system.

L

Line greeting: A message (up to two lines in length) that appears when a call comes in on a line for which a particular greeting is needed. The attendant assigns these greetings to the lines through system programming.

Line key: Allows attendant to make an outgoing call.

M

Menu bar: Appears at the top of the main screen; provides system programming and call-handling options.

Message key: Activates a message-waiting light at a station; accesses the text messaging features.

Mute key: A fixed feature button that keeps a distant party from hearing your conversation.

70 Glossary

PC Attendant's Console User's Guide GCA70-230

N

Night transfer: Transferring incoming calls to a particular station or stations for off-hour answering.

O

On-line help: Help screens that provide information about various features of the PC Attendant console.

Overflow key: Directs incoming calls to an overflow attendant during peak activity. Calls will ring at both stations.

P

Page key: Allows attendant to choose a zone in which a paging announcement will occur. After zone is activated, announcement can be made.

Park key: Places a call in one of nine park orbits.

Park orbits: Nine system-provided “spaces” where a call can be placed and held until a park-retrieve feature is engaged (usually from any telephone within the system). Calls placed in park orbit are held there for a specified period, after which they will recall to the PC Attendant station for service if they are not retrieved.

Pending Calls window: Displays the origin and status of up to eight calls within the system.

Pick key: Performs a directed call pick up.

Prime line: A line designated to a particular telephone and automatically selected when the handset is lifted or when the Line key is pressed.

Priority call: Determined by the system, a priority call is either an incoming call or a recalling hold, transfer or parked call that is first in line to be answered at the attendant’s station. It can be identified by the flashing arrow next to it.

Programming menu: Contains various programming features that can be carried out at the PC Attendant console.

Pull-down menu: Located in the menu bar, these menus can be “pulled down” (using the mouse or the arrow and

Enter keys) to access options and features.

R

Recall: A call that returns to the PC Attendant after it has been on hold or in transit (through transfer, conference transfer, or park orbit) without being answered.

Release key: Disconnects the PC Attendant from the current call.

Retrieve key: Retrieves a call from park orbit.

Ringing line preference: An automatic connection to any outside line ringing at the station when the station handset is taken off-hook.

S

Screen attributes: The color or brightness characteristics of an item displayed on the screen.

Subdued off-hook voice announce (SOHVA): A private announcement made to a busy party through the handset.

Serial key: Places a call in a series of transfers (to a maximum of three extensions within the system).

Shift/2nd Function key: Accesses a key’s secondary function (e.g. Retrieve is the secondary function on the Park key) when held down during key selection.

Silent key: Silences currently ringing call.

Speed dial: Autodialing using the speed dial feature. Speed dialing can be station calls (personal and accessed by only one specific user) or system calls (numbers used and accessed by anyone in the system).

Split key: Allows attendant to alternate between a current call and the last call placed on hold. When one of the calls is activated, the other is automatically placed on hold.

Start-up disk: A computer floppy disk that contains the information necessary for the PC Attendant to operate.

Status indicators: Found at the bottom of the screen, they tell whether a feature is active.

Glossary 71

GCA70-230

T


Tab/Next Screen key: Moves cursor to next screen or window.

Tap key: Retrieves the last call placed on hold, transferred, or parked in orbit.

Test busy: A feature (on the Options menu) that allows the attendant to determine the status of a line.

Tracker: The optional paging system that allows an attendant to send a message to a compatible pager.

Transfer: Transfers current call to another station.

V

Voice announce blocking: A telephone can be set to block voice calls sent to it over the speaker.

Volume keys: Control volume of ringer, handset and headset.

Z

Zone paging: Paging through the intercoms of some stations or departments in the system.

72 Glossary


6

Index

A

Alternate Attendant, Transferring Calls To An (3.13)

Answering And Directing Calls (2.5)

Answering Incoming Calls (2.5.1)

Arrow Keys (1.2.2)

B

Both Feature (Creating A Conference Between The PC

C

Conference Calls, Creating (2.6.3)

Conferencing Calls, Parking (2.6.3)

Conference Calls, Transferring (2.6.3)

Current Call Window (2.2)

Cursor, Moving With Arrow Keys (1.2.2)

Cursor, Moving With Mouse (1.2.3)

D

Data Link Error (4.1.1)

Date and Time, Setting (2.8.2)

Dial By Name (3.4)

Direct Station Selection (DSS), Making A (3.4)

Directory, Creating and Editing (3.14)

Directory Menu (2.7)

Disconnecting From A Call (2.6.4)

DXP Not Responding (4.1.2)

E

Exit PC Attendant (2.7.1)

G

58

18

18

3

Getting Started (1.2)

Glossary (5)

H

Handling Recalling Hold Calls (2.5.3)

Handset Volume, Setting The (2.8.3)

Headset And Handset Operation, (3.2)

Help Index Window, Viewing The (1.3)

Holding Calls (2.5.2)

Hold Recalls (2.5.3)

25

25

25

14

3

3

46

60

26

25

68

67

31

46

I

I.D. (Tagging A Call For Future Identification) (3.3)

Intercom (Dial By Name Or Number) (3.4)

Intercom Calls, Making (2.6.1)

Intercom Name/Number Selection (2.1.3)

Intercom Status (2.1.2)

Intercom Status Window (2.1)

Intercom Window (2.1)

K

Key Identification (1.4)

Keyboard Knowing Your (1.4)

Keyboard Macros (2.8.7)

2

69

45

32

4

4

19

32

45

18

19

6

6

38

11

10

9

9

46

46

24

29

Index 73

GCA 70-230

L

Line Access Window (2.4)

Line Greetings, Creating (2.8.5)

Line Status Menu (2.4.1)

M

Making Calls (2.6)

Making Intercom Calls (2.6.1)

Making Outside Calls (2.6.2)

Menus, Pull-Down (2.7.1)

Message-Waiting Indicator, Sending A (3.5)

Mouse Operation (1.2.3)

Muting The PC Attendant (3.6)

N

Naming The Stations For The Directory (3.14)

Night Transfer Mode, Setting The (3.15)

O

On-Line Help (1.3)

Options Menu (2.7.1)

Outside Calls, Making (2.6.2)

Overflow (Transferring Calls To An

Overflow Attendant) (3.7)

P

Paging (3.8)

Paging Zones (3.8)

Park Orbits, Using (2.5.4)

Park Recalls, Handling (2.5.4)

Parked Calls, Retrieving (2.5.5)

Parking Calls (2.5.4)

PC Settings (3.16)

Pending Calls Window (2.3)

Picking A Call (3.9)

Programming Menu (2.8.1)

Pull-Down Menus, Exiting (2.7)

Pull-Down Menus, Using The (2.7)

Q

Quit Menu (2.7.1)

74


R

16

35

16

Reconnecting To A Hold Call (2.5.3)

Retrieving Parked Calls (2.5.5)

Ringer Volume, Setting The (2.8.3)

S

28

47

3

52

24

24

24

60

62

4

28

24

54

Screen Attributes (2.1.1)

Screen Saver, Setting The (3.16)

Screened Transfer (2.5.6)

Serial (Setting Up A Serial Transfer) (3.10)

Set Date And Time (2.8.2)

Set Volume (Programming Menu Option) (2.8.3)

Setting The System Parameters (2.8)

Silent (Silencing A Currently Ringing Call) (3.11)

SOHVA, Making A (3.17)

Speed-Dial Directory, Editing And Creating (2.8.4)

Speed Dialing (3.18)

Speed-Dials Menu (2.7.1)

Split (Alternating Between The Current Call And

The Last Call Placed On Hold (3.12)

Station Names,

Assigning Through The Directory (3.14)

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announcement (3.17)

System Speed-Dial Directory,

Editing And Creating (2.8.4)

T

30

26

26

63

14

56

54

54

20

20

20

20

Tagging A Call (3.3)

Test Busy Feature (2.4.2)

Text Messaging (3.5.2)

Text Messaging, Viewing (3.5.3)

Time and Date, Setting (2.8.2)

Tracker, Using The Pager (2.5.7)

Tracker, Enabling (2.8.8)

Tracker, Programming Default Messages (2.8.9)

Tracker, Programming The Pager Numbers (2.8.10)

Transfer Recalls, Handling (2.5.6)

Transfer, Serial (3.10)

Transferring Calls (2.5.6)

Troubleshooting Guide (4)

29

19

20

32

41

42

21

56

21

67

46

17

48

50

31

22

40

57

60

64

30

57

64

34

65

28

56

31

32

9

63

21

34

Index


U

Unscreened Transfer (2.5.6)

Unsupervised Conference Calls, Creating (2.6.3)

Using The Arrow Keys Or The Mouse

To Move The Cursor (1.2.2, 1.2.3)

Using The PC Attendant’s Specialized Features (3)

Using This Guide (1.1)

V

Volume, Setting The Headset, Handset,

Or Ringer (2.8.3)

21

25

3

45

1

32

GCA 70-230

Index 75

Installing And Programming The Tracker Paging System


1.0 Introducing The Tracker Paging System

The Tracker Paging System consists of a Tracker base station interfaced through the DXP Plus digital communications system to communicate with one or more Tracker pagers (personal pocket pagers) associated with the system’s station ports. This option gives the system the capability to signal system station users when they are away from their telephones that they have a waiting call. The system supports a maximum of 600 Tracker pagers and four base stations. You can install a Tracker base station to a serial data port supplied by a communications card installed in the DXP Plus. At sites that include a PC attendant position, you can connect the

Tracker base station directly to the PC attendant position computer. With this arrangement if a Tracker user has an alphanumeric pager model, he or she can receive a short text message from the PC attendant position.

2.0 Installing The Tracker Paging System

Use the Tracker cable kit to interconnect the Tracker Paging System with the DXP Plus or the PC attendant position. The cable kit includes the factory-wired items described in the following list:

• modular to EIA 25-pin adapter plug with male DB25 Connector,

• modular to EIA 25-pin adapter plug with female DB25 Connector,

• custom-wired six-position modular line jack (not required with PC attendant position installations),

•

3-pair standard line cord.

When using the kit-supplied parts to make the system interconnections, be aware of the location parameter detailed in the statement that follows:

•

The maximum distance between the Tracker base station and the common equipment cabinet is limited to 50 feet regardless of which DXP Plus circuit board provides the communications card or where the PC attendant position is located . Longer distances require the use of limited distance modems.

R





IMI89–203.01

6/95

Installing And Programming The Tracker Pager System IMI89–203

2.2

Installing A Tracker Base Station With The DXP Plus

1. Install the kit-supplied modular jack and wire it to any DXP Plus serial data port supplied by a communications card. Use customer-supplied cabling for this wiring path.

CAUTION

You must use the kit-supplied modular jack as it provides customized wiring necessary for proper equipment operation.

2.

Select the kit-supplied, modular to EIA adapter with the male DB25 connector, and connect it to the 25-pin serial data connector on the rear of the Tracker base station, and secure it with the thumbscrews provided.

3. Plug one end of the kit-supplied modular line cord into the modular to EIA adapter.

4. Plug the other end of the cord into the kit-supplied modular jack that you installed in step 1.

5. Connect the power supply output cable to the rear of the Tracker base station.

a. Plug the AC power cable from the power supply into a 120 VAC wall outlet.

b. Turn on the base station’s power switch.

6. Refer to Section 3 for details, and make the necessary programming arrangements:

—program the system serial data port parameters,

Baud Rate

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

9600,

8,

1, none,

Flow Control none,

—enable the Tracker Paging System,

—assign a pager number to a system intercom number,

—program the pager types,

—enable the pagers for operation.

Modular Jack








Modular Jack

4

5

6

1

2

3

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

13


Male Connector

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

DB25 Connector




Pin 8 = Carrier Detect


TRKR005

Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To EIA Adapter For Tracker Base Station

2–Tracker Paging System

IMI89–203 Installing And Programming The Tracker Pager System

Installing Tracker Paging SystemTo A Common Equipment Cabinet

Tracker Paging System–3


2.2

Installing A Tracker Base Station With The PC Attendant Position

1. Select the kit-supplied modular EIA adapter with the male DB25 connector, and connect it to the 25-pin serial data connector on the rear of the Tracker base station, and secure the adapter with the thumbscrews provided.

2. Plug one end of the kit-supplied modular line cord into the adapter installed in step 1.

3. Select the kit-supplied modular to EIA adapter with the female DB25 connector, and connect it to the COM2,

25-pin, serial data connector on rear of the PC attendant position.

3. Plug the other end of the line cord into the adapter installed in step 3.

5. Connect the power supply output cable to the rear of the Tracker base station.

a. Plug the AC power cable from the power supply into a 120 VAC wall outlet.

b. Turn on the base station’s power switch.

6. Refer to Section 3 for details, and make the necessary programming arrangements:

—program the system serial data port parameters,

Baud Rate

Data Bits

9600,

8,

Stop Bits

Parity

1, none,

Flow Control none,

—enable the Tracker Paging System,

—assign a pager number to a system intercom number,

—program the pager types,

—enable the pagers for operation.

Modular Jack








Modular Jack

4

5

6

1

2

3

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

13


Male Connector

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

DB25 Connector




Pin 8 = Carrier Detect


TRKR005

Detailing The Kit-Supplied Modular To EIA Adapter For Tracker Base Station


IMI89–203

Modular Jack








Modular Jack

1

2

3

4

5

6

TRKR011

Installing And Programming The Tracker Pager System

23

24

25

19

20

21

22

14

15

16

17

18

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

10

11

12

13


Female Connector

DB25 Connector




Rear View of

Typical Personal

Computer (PC)

COM2 Serial Data Port

25-Pin D Connector

Kit-supplied

3-Pair Line Cord


To EIA Adapter

With Female DB25

Connector

Power-In

Jack

Power

On/Off

Switch

ON

OFF

POWER

ALARM

EXTERNAL TRANSMITTER

TELEPHONE

ANTENNA

EIA RS-232C

Kit-supplied Modular

To EIA Adapter

With Male DB25 Connector

Tracker

Power

Supply

120 VAC

Electrical Outlet

Installing A Tracker Base Station To A PC Attendant

Position Using Kit-Supplied Modulat To EIA Adapter



3.0 Programming For The Tracker Paging System

There are three levels of programming associated with Tracker operation.

The system level, is done by the installer or system programmer when he or she performs the data base programming. This programming level installs Tracker operating parameters and the pager-to-intercom assignments that can only be changed by the system installer.

The PC attendant position level is done by an attendant from an installed PC attendant position. The PC attendant position operates in one of two modes—local or system. In the local mode, the attendant assigns pagers to intercoms and selects pager types. This programming is transparent to the DXP Plus system and does not alter any installer programming done at the system level. In the system mode, the PC attendant position monitor displays all installer-programmed Tracker operating parameters and pager-to-intercom assignments.

The system manager level is done from the system programming station. The system manager dials codes to enable or disable the Tracker Paging system.

3.1

Performing Tracker Paging System Programming

3.1.1 Programming Tracker Paging System Options

Description: Tracker Paging System options consist of selecting the serial port that you will use for connecting the base station, enabling or disabling Tracker Paging System operation, and selecting PC

Attendant 1 through 4.

Programming: 1. Press CONTROL T for main menu.

2. From main menu, select Peripherals and press ENTER.

3. From peripherals menu, select Tracker and press ENTER.

4. From Tracker menu, select Options and press ENTER.

5. Enter Tracker Paging System base station number (1 through 4) and press ENTER.

6. From tracker unit options menu, select the serial port where the Tracker base station will be connected (1 through 18) and press ENTER.

7. Toggle the second field with the SPACE bar to enable/disable the Tracker Paging System option and press ENTER.

8. Toggle the third field with the SPACE bar to select PC Attendant 1 through 4 (or none) and press ENTER.




NOTE: After you have enabled the Tracker paging system and saved your programming selections, the DXP Plus system connects with the Tracker base station and displays the following message:

Initializing TRACKER unit, please wait.

. .

If the Tracker base station is correctly installed and operational, the DXP Plus system then displays the following message:

Installation complete, TRACKER is on line

If, however, the Tracker base station is not installed or fails to connect, the DXP Plus system displays the following message:

Installation error, verify programming or installation



3.1.2 Making Tracker Paging System Assignments

Description: Use the following programming instructions to assign individual Tracker Pagers to a station extension number, select the pager types, and assign a block of pagers to a Tracker Paging

System base station. Use this programming method for making minor modifications after the system has been installed and programmed per instructions in Section 17.3.

Programming: 1.

Press CONTROL T for main menu.

2 From main menu, select Peripherals and press ENTER.

3.

From the peripherals menu, select Tracker and press ENTER.

4.

From tracker menu, select Pager Assignment Table and press ENTER.

5.

In the first field, enter intercom number and press TAB.

6.

In the third field, enter Tracker Pager number and press TAB. (The second field is the name field that is programmed in the intercom numbers screen.)

7.

In the fourth field, press the SPACE bar to enable/disable the Tracker Pager and press TAB.

8.

In the fifth field, press the SPACE bar to select Tracker Pager type P1000 through P4000.

NOTE: Tracker pager designations are:

P1000 (numeric display only)

P2000 (1-line alphanumeric display)



9.

After making pager type selection, press TAB.

10. In the fifth field, type Tracker base station’s number (1 through 4).

11. When finished, press ESCAPE twice.

12. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

13. Press ESCAPE to end.

3.1.3 Making Initial Tracker Pager Assignments

Description: Use the following programming instructions to select intercom numbers, to assign pager types, and to assign individual pagers to a Tracker base station. Use this programming method to make many assignments quickly when first installing the system. This programming method overwrites any assignments previously made.

Programming: 1.

Press CONTROL T for main menu.

2.

From main menu, select Peripherals and press ENTER.

3.

From the peripherals menu, select Tracker and press ENTER.

4.

From tracker menu, select Initialize Pager Assignments and press ENTER.

5.

From the initialize pager assignments menu, select Intercom Number(s) and press ENTER.

6.

Press CTRL-E to display Intercom Numbers Table.

7.

Select a to add or r to remove intercom numbers and press ENTER.

8.

Enter one intercom number or a group of intercom numbers (example: enter 101-150 to initialize those fifty intercom numbers at one time) and press ESCAPE.

9.

Select Pager Number and press ENTER.

10. Enter pager number located on pager and press ENTER.

11. Press SPACE bar to enable or disable the intercoms and press ENTER.

12. Press SPACE bar until the pager model number you are using is displayed and press ENTER.

13. Enter the Tracker base station number (1-4) and press ESCAPE twice .

14. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

15. Press ESCAPE to end.



3.1.4 COS Programming For Tracker Access

Description: Assign tracker access to a particular station intercom or group of intercoms using the following class of service (COS) programming. (The default is yes for COS1 and COS32.)

The procedure actually assigns Tracker access as a class of service feature. You must also assign that class of service to those stations that you want to have Tracker access.

Programming: To assign Tracker access as a class of service feature,

1. Press CONTROL T for main menu.

2. From main menu, select Stations and press ENTER.

3. From stations menu, select COS Programming and press ENTER.

4. From COS programming, type class (1–32) and press ENTER.

5. From COS (class number) programming, select Tracker Access.

6. Toggle the SPACE bar to select yes/no and press ESCAPE twice.

7. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.


To assign the Tracker class of service to a station,

1. Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

5. From station programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Type desired value for feature and press ENTER.



9. Repeat steps

4−8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end.



3.2

Enabling The Tracker Paging System With The PC Attendant Position

Description: To use the paging system, the attendants must first enable the feature in either the local mode or in the system mode. In either mode, they can create and send up to eight default messages.

In the local mode, attendants make their own intercom-pager assignments. These assignments will not change any assignments previously programmed into the DXP Plus system by the installer or system programmer. To use the local mode, attendants must have the Tracker base station plugged into the PC attendant position computer at the port designated on the Tracker

Status pull-down menu.

In the system mode, Tracker selections are identical to those programmed in the DXP Plus system by the installer and any changes made in the system mode will be automatically sent to the DXP Plus. The installer must program the Tracker for remote installation using the procedure detailed Section 3.1.1.

Programming: To enable Tracker,

1.

Activate the Programming pull-down menu.

2.

Press ALT-P and press Enter,

—OR— press Esc to move the cursor into the menu bar from the main screen.

3.

Position the cursor on Programming, and press Enter.

4.

Move the cursor to highlight Tracker Options.

5.

Press Enter.

6.

Move the cursor to highlight Disable/Enable Local/Enable System.

7.

Press Enter.

8.

Move the cursor to highlight the appropriate choice and press Enter.

3.3

Enabling The Tracker Pager System From The Programming Station

Description: The system manager can enable and disable Tracker pager operation by taking action at the system programming station.

Programming: 1.

Press INTERCOM, dial ✳#746✳.

2.

Dial 19.

3.

Dial tracker number 1—4.

4.

Dial 1 to enable, 2 to disable, or press # to toggle between enable and disable.


Installing and Programming the Caller ID Feature


1.0 Introducing the Caller ID Feature

The caller ID feature supports an externally connected, customer-supplied caller ID device. This hardware device supports eight caller ID conditioned lines, and you can serially connect up to eight devices to give the system the ability to support a maximum of 64 caller ID conditioned lines. The caller ID unit interfaces with the common equipment cabinet through any undedicated serial data port supplied by an installed communications card. Any proprietary digital LCD speakerphone can receive and display caller ID information. The display conveys all available caller ID information from the time the call rings at the station, through all line transitions, until the line disconnects. The digital communications system stores caller ID information in its SMDA storage and makes it available in the SMDA printout.

R

PWR DATA

S1 S2

Caller ID



IMI89–205.02

5/96

Installing and Programming The Caller ID Device IMI89–205

2.0 Installing The Caller ID Device

Install the caller ID device with the DXP Plus. If necessary, refer to IMI66–105, Installing the DXP Plus Common

Equipment Cabinet that you can find in your system hardware instructions binder.

1. Connect the line port modular jacks on the rear of the caller ID device to the CO line connections. Also connect these CO lines to the DXP Plus.

2. Connect the caller ID device’s serial data connector (labeled RS232 Out) to a serial data port on a communications card installed in the DXP Plus. For the data interface between the caller ID device and the digital communication system, use any undedicated serial data port provided by a communications card installed in the DXP Plus.

3. Connect the power supply to an 120 VAC electrical outlet, and connect the power supply’s output cable to the power connector on the rear of the caller ID device.

PCATND8

Loop Start

Line Board

Ferrite

Collar

Locating The DXP Plus Line Connections

Serial Data Connectors

Modular Line Jacks

8 7 6

PORTS

5 4 3 2 1

POWER

RS-232

OUT

RS-232

IN

CAJS092A

Power Supply Connector

Locating The Caller ID Device Connections

2 –Installing And Programming The Caller ID Device

IMI89–205 Installing and Programming The Caller ID Device

Interconnecting The Caller ID Device And The DXP Plus

Stacking Caller ID Devices

Wiring The Data Cable

Installing And Programming The Caller ID Device– 3


2.1

Setting the Parameter Switches

The caller ID device has two banks of parameter-controlling Dual In-Line Pin (DIP) switches located on its front panel.

Setting Switch S1

Switches S1–1 through S1–8 select the signalling protocol of the RS232 Out connector and asssist in matching the caller ID device’s signals with that of the communications system.

Switches S1–1 through S1–8 are all factory set to OFF. Ensure that these switches remain OFF unless you are stacking multiple caller ID devices together. If you are stacking multiple units together, leave S1–1 through S1–6 and S1–8 OFF but set S1–7 ON.

Setting Switch S2

Switches S2–1 through S2–5 set the baud rate, data bits, and parity. Switches S2–6, S2–7, and S2–8 set the unit address for each caller ID device when you stack multiple devices together.

Switch S2–1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Switch S2–2

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Baud Rate

1200

2400

4800

9600*

*Set ON, ON (9600 baud) for DXP Plus operation

Switch S2–3

OFF

ON

Data Bits

7

8*

*Set ON (8 data bits) for DXP Plus operation

Switch S2–4

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Switch S2–5

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Parity

NO PARITY*

ODD

EVEN

EVEN

*Set OFF, OFF (no parity) for DXP Plus operation.

NOTE: When you are installing multiple caller ID devices, set switches S2–1 through S2–5 on all of the devices to the same settings. Set switches S2–6 through S2–8 to the settings detailed in the chart shown below.

Switch S2-6

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Switch S2-7

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Switch S2-8

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

5

6

8

7

Device

1

2

3

4



Power LED

Data LED

PWR DATA

S1 S2

Caller ID

Dip Switch 2 (Switches 1-8)

Dip Switch 1 (Switches 1-8)

CAJS092

Locating The DIP Switches



3.0 Programming for the Caller ID Feature

In programming for caller ID support, you must match the data baud rate with that of the caller ID device, you must enable the caller ID lines, and you must assign them to ring on the telephones. You can set the caller ID options, and enter the local area codes and local exchange codes that you want the system to skip when it automatically dials a return call. You can also assign caller ID ring no-answer (RNA) capability to the telephones that are on caller ID lines. Users of these telephones have the ability to review this caller ID RNA information and return the call. They can also note if anyone else has already viewed a record thus preventing redundant returns.

3.1

Making Caller ID Active

Description: When caller identification (ID) information is available from the central office, take this programming action to match the line port to the feature. You must also assign the caller ID lines to the stations and assign special-purpose station buttons to control the feature.


2. From the main menu, select lines and press ENTER.

3. From the lines menu, select line programming and press ENTER.

4. Type line port number (1–128) or name and press ENTER.

5. From the line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE bar for feature setting.



9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.

10. Assign caller ID lines to stations (enable line answer and line originate class of service)).

11. Assign caller ID button (mnemonic CID) to stations (button mapping).

12. Assign SAVE button (mnemonic SAVE) to stations (button mapping).

3.2

Setting Baud Rate For Caller ID

Description: You must program the parameters of the serial data port where you have connected the caller

ID device. The serial data port parameters must match the data parameters of the caller ID device device. Usually, this is 9600 baud, eight data bits, no parity bit, and one stop bit.


2 From main menu, select system and press ENTER.

3. From system menu select serial ports and press ENTER.

4. From serial ports menu, type item number for main port or auxiliary port and press ENTER.

5. From serial port type menu, select serial port number and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE bar to select feature setting and press TAB for next feature.

7. Repeat step 6 until all features settings are selected.


9. Type Y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.



3.3

Setting the Absorb Ring Time

Description: Use this procedure to specify the amount of time the system waits while it generates caller ID information before it generates system ringing.


2. From main menu, select caller ID and press ENTER.

3. From caller ID menu, select options and press ENTER .

4. From the options menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar for time (0–8 seconds) and press ENTER.



3.4

Deleting the Viewed RNA Record

Description: When the system makes caller ID RNA information available to a group of stations, any station user in the group can review the information by pressing the telephone’s CID button. When he or she does this, the system removes the record from that telephone but continues to flash the

CID button status light for other stations in the group. If you enable this feature, the system will remove the caller ID record from all telephones if any user in the group views a record.



3. From caller ID menu, select options and press ENTER .


5. Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER.





3.5

Reviewing Caller ID Ring No-Answer (RNA) Calls

Description: This feature offers telephone users the ability to use their telephone’s display to review calls that ring at their stations while they are away. The system stores caller ID RNA records and allows users to review them and use one-button dialing to return those calls that need returning.

The feature also displays the identification of the last station that reviewed the records thus helping prevent multiple call backs to the same number. After users review the caller ID RNA records, the system deletes the records from their telephones yet retains the records in the

SMDA storage so that the users can look at the records later if they must.


2. From main menu, select station and press ENTER.


4. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for station you wish to program and press ENTER.


6. Press CONTROL E for edit table.

7. Type a to add or r to remove and press ENTER.

8. Enter caller ID line port numbers 1–128 (enter n, nn, nnn or n–nnn) to serve feature at this station and press ENTER.

9. Press ESCAPE three times.


11. Repeat steps 4–9 for each station or press ESCAPE to end.

3.6

Constructing the Local Call Table

Description: When telephone users review caller ID RNA calls, they press their SAVE button to return the call, and the system automatically dials the number. If the area code or office code part of the stored number matches the entries that you program with this procedure, the system will skip that part of the number as it dials.



3. From caller ID menu, select local call table and press ENTER .

4. From the local call table menu, enter area codes or office code and press ENTER.

5. Repeat step 4 for all desired codes (16 maximum)



R



Installing And Programming The Digital Voice Announce

Equipment On The

DXP Plus Digital Communications System

1.0

Understanding The Digital Voice Announce Equipment

The digital voice announce device (DVA) is an optional line-powered unit that connects to a digital station port and plays pre-recorded voice prompts and dialing instructions to incoming callers on the direct inward system access (DISA) lines.

Currently, DISA is the only DXP Plus feature to take advantage of the DVA’s voice prompting capability; therefore, for the DVA to function, you must have DISA lines assigned and programmed. The maximum number of DVA units you can install is limited only by the number of DXP Plus station ports (480). Once you connect the DVA to a digital station port, the DVA identifies itself to the DXP Plus so you do not have any phone-type programming to do. Nor is it necessary for you to program the system to send DTMF or ringing signals to activate the DVA because DISA programming determines the DVA’s actions. When you use a DVA in conjunction with

DISA, the DXP Plus automatically answers the DISA lines and guides the callers with DVA originated voice prompts.

A DVA accepts and stores up to four recorded messages, with a total maximum recorded time for all messages of two minutes. Using system attendant programming, you can divide this two-minute period as necessary among the four messages or use the entire two minutes for one message. These pre-recorded messages play during an in-process call and prompt callers to dial a single digit to reach a particular intercom number or feature code. For each message type, you can assign up to ten intercom numbers or feature codes and assign a single access digit to each of these intercom numbers.

Each message type has a two-digit system index number (for example: 10 = Welcome Greeting 1, 11 = Welcome

Greeting 2, and so forth). You use this index number to identify the messages when you record them. Many of the messages have a single-digit group option number appended to their names (for example: Welcome Greeting 1,

Day Main Menu 1, and so forth). You, use this message group number to place messages for a particular category of caller together (all group 1 messages for sales calls, all group 2 messages for service calls, and so forth). You assign a message group to a DISA line based on the line’s DISA voice option. Group 1 messages correspond with

DISA voice option 1, group 2 messages with DISA voice option 2, group 3 messages with DISA voice option 3 and group 4 messages with voice option 4. You assign a voice option, and thus a message group, to a DISA line.

R





IMI89–204.01

6/95

Installing and Programming The DVA IMI89–204

1.1

Understanding The Line/Voice Option/DVA Relationships

1.1.1 DVA Application

A company with several departments reserves all group 1 messages for the sales department and reserves all group 2 messages for the customer service department. The company attendant records the group 1 and 2 message to have meaning for the sales and customer service departments. The system programmer assigns DISA lines 1, 2, and 3 to the sales department and DISA line 4, 5, and 6 to the customer service department. He or she also programs DISA line 1–3 to have voice option 1 and DISA line 4–6 to have voice option 2. All of this allows callers to DISA line 1–3 to receive and respond to messages associated with the sales department and callers to

DISA line 4–6 to receive and respond to messages associated with the customer service department.

‘Sales Department

DISA Line 1 / DISA Voice Option 1



Customer Service Department




DVA 1

Group 1

Message

DVA 2

Group 1

Message

DVA 3

Group 1

Message

DVA 4

Group 2

Message

1.1.2 DVA/DISA Application

You can enhance the security of DISA by using the DVA. The DXP Plus connects to the incoming call based on the programmed DISA parameters and the DVA plays the appropriate prompts to cause the caller to dial the following codes: DISA access code, authorization code, feature access code.

Main Number nnn–nnnn

DVA Index Number 10

“Welcome Greeting”

“You have reached the ABC company.

You may dial an extension at any time, or dial 9 for advanced feature access.”

—pause—

1 = DISA access code


“Password Prompt”

“Dial your authorization number now.”

—pause—


“Dial Feature”

“Dial the feature access code now.”

—pause—

2–Installing and Programming the DVA

IMI89–204 Installing and Programming The DVA

1.1.3 DVA Auto Attendant With Single Digit Menu Application

The DVA functions as an automatic attendant by giving callers single-digit dialing options. The DXP Plus connects to the incoming call based on the programmed DISA parameters and the DVA plays the appropriate voice prompts to the caller such as: welcome greeting, day main greeting—menu choices, recall busy, recall no answer.


DVA Index Number10

“Welcome Greeting 1"

“You have reached ABC company. ”


“Day / Night Menu 1"

“Dial 1 for Service,

”Dial 2 for Advanced Features,

“Dial 3 for Assistance.”

1 = (Group ITCM #) 2 = (DISA Access) 3 = (Station Number)

Service Department

DVA Index

Number 31

“Password Prompt”

“Dial your Authorization Code.” Station Number

All phones ring and flash group ITCM.

DVA Index

Number 33

“Dial Feature”

“Dial your Feature Access Code.”

Installing and Programming the DVA–3


1.1.4 DVA/Tracker Paging System Application

The DVA gives callers single digit dialing access to the Tracker Paging System. The DXP Plus connects to the incoming call based on the programmed DISA parameters and the DVA plays the appropriate voice prompts to the caller such as: welcome greeting, day main greeting—menu choices, recall busy, recall no answer.



“Welcome Greeting 1"


Index Prompt 14

“Day / Night Menu 1"

“If you are calling from a tone-dial telephone, you may dial the extension number at any time.”

Index Prompt 22

“Recall No Answer 1"

“I’m sorry, that extension doesn’t answer,

Dial 1 to track,

Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant,

Dial 3 to leave a message in the voice mail box.”

1 = ✳8 2 = Extension Number 3 = Voice Mail Port number

Index Prompt 26

“Recall Busy 1"

“I’m sorry, that extension is busy.

Dial 1 to Track,

Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant,


1 = ✳8 2 = Extension Number 3 = Voice Mail Port number



1.2

Defining DVA Messages

The available DVA messages include the following categories

30

31

32

DVA Index Number

10–13

Message Type

Welcome Greetings 1–4

14–17 Day Main Menus 1–4

18–21

22–25

26–29

Night Main Menus 1–4

Recall No Answer 1–4

Recall Busy 1–4

Please Hold

Password Prompt

Account Code

33

34–37

38–41

42

43

Dial Feature

Day Routing 1–4

Night Routing 1–4

Reminder Prompt

Digit Collection

Message Definition

Messages that identify company or department to caller.

System plays these messages during normal business hours.

System plays these these messages during close of business hours.

System plays these messages when the called station does not answer.

System plays these messages when called station does not answer.

System plays this message to callers when they page their called party.

This message prompts callers to enter password for access to advanced DISA features

System plays this message to callers who request line groups on systems that require forced account code entry

This message plays after the caller enters password for advanced DISA features

If system can not provide DISA callers with the requested service, it plays this message.

^

DISA Callers who are allowed to access advance system features receive this message if they are making a line to line connection through the DXP

Plus. The message periodically prompts them to dial a code to continue the connection.

This message prompts callers to dial a code before the system routes their call. When used with telephony services, this dialed code causes a screen showing caller’s identification and data to appear on computer at called station’s location.

System plays the message requesting the dialed entry after a welcome message and before a day menu message. Digit collection message plays first if there is no welcome message and plays after the default routing extension if there is no day menu message. The caller dialed digits also show on the called station’s display



1.3

Defining Battery Operation

The DVA derives its operating power from the station port; however, the DVA also has an internal battery for supplying power to the memory that holds the stored messages. In the event that the DXP Plus should lose power or should someone disconnect the DVA for some reason, the battery provides back up power to save the stored messages.

CAUTION

3

3

3

If battery power is lost, the currently stored messages will be lost. In this case, you will need to format and reprogram the DVA. Formatting clears the DVA channels and conditions them to accept newly recorded messages for storage.

The battery has a charge time of 48 hours and a discharge time of one hour. When replacing the battery, use one with the following specifications:

Output—8.4 volts, 100 mAh

Type—sealed, rechargeable Ni-Cd battery

Model—Varta V7/8R (Varta Batteries Inc.,

300 Executive Blvd., Elmsford, NY 10523)

WARNING

Dispose of the used battery in accordance with local and state regulations covering safe disposal of Ni-Cd rechargeable batteries.

2.0 Installing The DVA

Install the DVA on the DXP Plus by performing the steps listed below and the illustration shown on the next page.

1. Position the DVA in a convenient location. (Up to 480 units can be installed).

2. Connect the DVA to a digital station port using a standard two-wire line cord.

3. Connect a customer-supplied tape recorder (optional) to the DXP Plus music interface MOH/BGM jack on the services board. You can use the connections for either audio source—music on hold (MOH) or background music (BGM).


IMI89–204

Services Board

MOH

BGM

PAGE

1

2

3

6

5

4

Installing and Programming The DVA

Typical Digital

Station Board

Audio Tape Recorder

DVA01

PWR IN USE

RESET

6

5

4 3

2

1

Station Jack Pin-Out

Pin 1 No Connection

Pin 2

Pin 3

Pin 4

Pin 5

Pin 6

No Connection

Tip 1

Ring 1

No Connection

No Connection

STATION

TAPE IN

DXP023A

Connecting The DVA

Typical Station

Connector Block

{

31

32

33

34

26

27

28

29

30

22

23

24

25

17

18

19

20

21

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

39

40

41

42

43

35

36

37

38

50

25

26

1

CLIP TERMINALS

25-Pair

Male To

Female

Cable

(Typical)

To Common

Equipment

Cabinet



3.0 Programming For DVA Operation

3.1

Programming The Interaction Between DVA And DISA

3.1.1 Performing DISA Specific Programming

Description: The purpose of the DISA specific programming is to perform the following tasks:

- Enable extensions where day/night DISA calls will be routed when call-routing is necessary,

- Enable proprietary voice mail to receive DISA calls and route the calls to a dedicated mailbox that holds the appropriate intercept greetings,

- Select access lockout time (the amount of time that the line remains locked-out from use after invalid conditions occur—such as, when a caller repeatedly dials an invalid authorization code),

- Select the time-out period for DISA extensions that ring without answer (RNA),

- Select the maximum time-out period for the reminder tone that sounds during an in-process call when the DISA caller is using an outside line and the system has no disconnect supervision. This tone sounds at set intervals to remind the caller that he or she must dial a code (any single digit) or be disconnected within 10 seconds,

- Select the option to either route a DISA call or drop it after caller dials an invalid authorization code

Programming: 1.


2.

From main menu, select Lines and press ENTER.

3.

From the lines menu, select DISA configuration and press ENTER.

4.

From the DISA configuration menu, select Day Routing Extension and press ENTER.

5.

Type day routing extension number and press ENTER.

6.

Type night routing extension number and press ENTER.

7.

Type voice mail Routing ID (up to eight digits) and press ENTER.

8.

Toggle the SPACE bar to select access lockout times (2, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes) and press ENTER.

9.

Type the ring no answer (RNA) rings of 0 through 9, and press ENTER.

10. Toggle the SPACE bar to select Maximum Reminder Time-out periods of (2, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes) and press ENTER.

11. Toggle the SPACE bar to select Route or Drop from Route/Drop Invalid Access field and press ESCAPE twice.





3.1.2 Enabling Or Disabling DISA Lines

Description: Use the following programming instructions to enable or disable DISA capability on lines 1 through 240. Also, use the DISA Voice Options 1 through 4 to select digital voice announce

(DVA) messages. For example, selecting DISA voice option 2 will cause welcome greeting 2, day main menu 2, night main menu 2, recall no answer 2, and recall busy 2 prompts to play whenever a DISA line is covered by DVA.

Programming 1.


2.

From main menu, select Lines and press ENTER.

3.

From the lines menu, select Line Programming and press ENTER.

4.

Enter line number you want to program and press ENTER.

5.

From the line (number) programming menu (page 2), select DISA and press ENTER.

6.

Toggle the SPACE bar to select/deselect DISA and press ENTER.

7.

Enter 1 through 4 for the DISA Voice Options and press ESCAPE twice.

8.

Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

9.

Enter the number for the next line you want to program or press ESCAPE to end.

3.1.3 Setting Day 1, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times

Description: With this programming procedure, set the begin and end times of the day 1, day 2, and night ringing time periods.

Programming: 1.


2.

From main menu, select system and press ENTER.

3.

From system menu, select system parameters and press ENTER.

4.

From the system parameters menu, select day 1, day 2 or night ringing begin times and press ENTER.

5.

Type times in 24–hour format (hh:mm) and press ENTER.

6.

Press ENTER (repeatedly if needed) to place cursor at next time desired setting.

7.

Repeat step 5 and press ENTER.

8.

Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all times are set and press ENTER.

9.

When finished, press ESCAPE twice.




3.2

Programming The DVA Parameters

3.2.1 Programming Intercoms For DVA Messages

Description For each message type, you can assign up to ten intercom numbers and assign a single access digit to each of these intercom numbers. You can assign feature codes as well as intercom numbers. For example, if you have installed the Tracker Paging System option, you can program the Tracker Pager access code (✳8) to an appropriate message and assign a single-digit dialing code to the access code. This allows DISA callers to track their called party by dialing the appropriate single-digit when prompted by voice message. The caller then enters his or her call-back number and the # symbol to complete the page.

Programming: 1.


2.

From main menu, select peripherals and press ENTER.

3.

From peripherals menu, select voice/DVA and press ENTER.

4. Enter voice message number and press ENTER.

NOTE: You may need to refer to step 5 of the Section 16.2.2 programming instructions to obtain the voice message number for the message type.

5.

Make a single digit selection from the list (1 through 0) and press ENTER.

6.

Enter intercom number or feature code that you wish to assign to this message and press ENTER.

7.

Press ESCAPE twice.

8.


9.

Press ESCAPE to end.

3.2.2 Obtaining DVA Status Reports

Description: Use this programming procedure to obtain DVA status information (voice digit translation, voice allocation by DVA, voice allocation by message, and voice resource analysis).

Programming: 1.

Press CONTROL T for main menu

2.

From main menu, select printouts and press ENTER.

3.

From printouts menu, select peripherals and press ENTER.

4.

From peripherals menu, select voice/DVA and press ENTER.

5.

Make a selection from the voice/DVA menu for the desired status printout and press ENTER.

NOTE: If you select the voice resource analysis you get a list of all message types. You may need

this information to complete step 4 in the Section 16.2.1 programming instructions.

6.

For printout type, press s for screen or p for printer and press ENTER.

7.

Press any key to return to voice programming printouts menu.



3.2.3 Recording The DVA Messages

Description: You or the system attendant must record the messages that the DVA plays to the callers. You do this in one of two ways: either by delivering them from the telephone handset at the attendant station or by playing the contents of a professionally-supplied tape recording into the DVA memory. Each DVA stores up to four unique messages. The total message storage time is two minutes and you can divide this time as necessary among the four messages or use the entire two minutes for one message if needed. Because of the time constraints, it is a good practice to script your messages ahead of time so that you can read them aloud in a clear and concise manner as you store them in the DVA memory.

CAUTION

It is important to keep in mind that the system shares the messages among all installed DVAs. You do not control which DVA stores which message. For example, if you make eight different recordings with two

DVAs, the system distributes the messages in both units. If someone later removes one unit from service, the only messages that will play are those stored in the remaining DVA.

Programming: To record a DVA message,

1.

Press INTERCOM and dial ✳ #0 ✳ 061.

2.

Choose voice source,

– dial 1 to speak message into handset,

– dial 2 to play tape recorded message into music-on-hold jack,

– dial 3 to play tape recorded message into background music jack,

– dial 10–43 to choose message type.

NOTE: As soon as you perform the next step, the two-minute timer starts running. Be ready to speak you message or press the PLAY button on the tape recorder as soon as you dial the replicate choice.

3.

Dial 1–9 to choose number of times to replicate message.

4.

Speak your message,

–or– press the PLAY button on the tape recorder to start pre-recorded message).

5.

Press # to end message.

6.

Listen as system automatically plays the message for verification at the attendant station.

7.

Press # to stop verification playback.

8.

Repeat steps 2–8 until you’ve recorded all messages.



3.2.4 Editing The DVA Messages

Description: After DVA messages exist, you can play them, copy them, and delete them as necessary using the following attendant programming.

Programming: To play a previously recorded DVA message,

1.

Press INTERCOM and dial ✳ #0 ✳ 062.

2 Dial 10–43 to choose message type.

3.

Listen as system automatically plays the message for verification at your attendant station.

4.

Press # to stop verification playback.

5 Dial 10–43 to choose next message type to hear.

To copy a previously recorded DVA message,

1.

Press INTERCOM and dial ✳ #0 ✳063.

2.

Dial 10–43 to choose message type.

3.

Dial 1–9 to choose number of times to copy message.

4.

Dial 10–42 to choose next message type to copy.

NOTE: If your installer has connected more than two DVAs to the system, the system automatically selects the DVA that will receive the copied message. Likewise, the system automatically selects the DVA that it uses for playing back the message to a caller.

Additional DVAs become a shared resource for the system’s memory and are not dedicated to particular lines.

To delete a previously recorded DVA message,

1.


2.

Dial 10–43 to choose message type.

3.

Dial 937 to confirm delete or dial ✳ to deny delete.

To completely erase all DVA messages (format the DVA).

1.


2.

Dial 1–480 to choose DVA port.

3.

Dial 937 to confirm formatting dial ✳ to deny formatting.

4.

Dial 1–480 to choose next DVA port to format.

R



Installing And Programming ExecuMail Equipment


This installation instruction gives you information for connecting the ExecuMail voice processing system to the

DXP Plus digital communications system.

The introductory section familiarizes you with the ExecuMail option and the literature supplied with it. The remaining sections explain ExecuMail installation details through the various station boards and

Comdial-produced interface devices. The following list shows the section titles of this publication:

•

•

•

•

•

1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

Understanding the ExecuMail Option

Installing The ExecuMail At Analog Station Ports

Installing The ExecuMail At Digital Station Ports

Installing the ExecuMail At Industry-Standard Station Ports

Programming For ExecuMail Operation

1.0 Understanding The ExecuMail Option

The ExecuMail voice processing system provides special voice messaging services to DXP Plus system telephone users. They can immediately use this system without any training because it prompts them with easy-to-understand instructions. ExecuMail also provides an automatic attendant feature that automatically answers any line that is ringing at a voice mail port. Further, it provides an immediate transfer to a voice mail box if you make the proper programming arrangements. You can also program the system to alert a busy telephone that the ExecuMail system is attempting to transfer a call to it instead of having the ExecuMail system automatically route that call to a voice mail box.

The ExecuMail system interfaces with the station ports through Comdial-produced interface devices. The particular device used depends upon whether the DXP Plus provides analog or digital station ports for use. For analog station ports, use the Voice Mail Interface device (VMI–X). For digital station ports, use the Analog

Terminal Interface (ATI–D–1PT). The DXP Plus can also provide industry-standard telephone (IST) station ports if you have equipped it with IST station boards to do so. When an IST port is available for ExecuMail use, you do not need to install an external interface device between the ExecuMail system and the DXP IST station ports.

Regardless of whether you use a VMI–X, an ATI–D–1PT or an industry-standard station board, never bridge an industry-standard telephone across the ExecuMail system. Such a connection will prevent the ExecuMail system from working properly.

To insure that the DXP Plus system works properly with the ExecuMail system, you must perform several programming functions after you have connected the hardware together. Refer to Section 5 for complete programming details.

While the remainder of this instruction details the installation steps necessary to interface the ExecuMail equipment to the DXP equipment, you must also refer to the following literature to understand how to install and program the ExecuMail equipment.

•

•

•

•

IMI66–090, ExecuMail Installation Manual

IMI89–028, ExecuMail Reference Guide

IMI89–029, ExecuMail Quick Start Application Manual

IMI89–057, ExecuMail Software Version 6.2 Update Guide





IMI89–206.01

6/95

R

IMI89–206 Installing And Programming For ExecuMail

2.0 Installing The ExecuMail System

At Analog Station Ports

When you interface the ExecuMail system to the DXP Plus system through the analog station ports on its analog station board, you must place the Comdial Voice Mail Interface device (VMI–X) between the ExecuMail ports and the system’s station ports. The VMI–X includes two circuits; therefore, you will need one device for every two ExecuMail ports that you plan to connect. This means that for a four-port ExecuMail system, you will need two VMI–X devices.

The VMI–X device has its own power supply that connects to the AC power line.

2.1

Installing The VMI–X

Be sure the mounting location is secure and dry, has adequate ventilation, and is a large enough area to allow easy placement of the VMI-X. The temperature range of the location must be within 32 - 90° F (0 - 40° C).

Be sure that you have the following tools and hardware available for mounting the VMI–X:

•

Fasteners, such as 1/4-inch wood screws, of a sufficient length to securely bite into mounting backboard

•

•

•

•

•

Cross Recessed screwdriver (phillips-head type)

Flat-blade Screwdriver

Electric Drill if prepared holes are needed

Connecting tool - for fastening wires to a type-66 connector block.

Crimping tool - for 623-type modular plugs.

1. Unpack, and carefully inspect the VMI–X for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found. Verify that the package contains all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation.

2. Locate the VMI–X device within 25 feet of both the common equipment cabinet and the ExecuMail system.

3. If a backboard is required at the mounting location, attach it securely to provide a stable mounting surface.

4. Use the base of the VMI–X cabinet as a template or measure for mounting hole locations per the dimensions shown in the outline dimensions drawing located on the next page.

5. Drill holes of a proper size to accommodate the hardware being used into the mounting surface. If necessary, prepare these holes with inserts, anchors or other attachment devices as dictated by the type of mounting surface.

6. Insert the screws into the mounting surface and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.

7. Hang the VMI–X cabinet on the screws using the mounting holes located on the rear of the cabinet. Note that these holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end. This feature allows the cabinet to snap down on the screws to secure the mounting when the cabinet is hung on them.

2.2

Setting The Configuration Switches

Set the configuration switches that are located on the left side of the VMI–X housing to match the DXP Plus and

ExecuMail systems. Refer to the illustration shown on the next page and set the switches as detailed on this table.

A

B

C

D

Switch

Closed

Closed

Open

Open

Setting

2 – Installing And Programming For ExecuMail

Installing And Programming For ExecuMail

AW1002

IMI89–206

7.0

11.50

3.0

8.75

10.25

Detailing The VMI–X Dimensions

LEFT SIDE

OF HOUSING

BOTTOM

OF

HOUSING

CLOSED

A

B

D

OPEN

AW1001

Setting The VMI–X Configuration Switches

Installing And Programming For ExecuMail – 3


2.3

Connecting the VMI–X

•

Route the necessary cabling, and connect the VMI–X device between the ExecuMail system and the station ports per the connections detailed in the diagram shown on the next page.

•

•

•

Use two-pair (four-wire) cable between the station port connection block and the VMI–X device.

Use one-pair (two-wire) cable for each VMI–X termination jack.

Use two-pair (four-wire) cable between the ExecuMail system and the VMI–X termination jack.

•

The VMI–X requires a grounding wire that is separate from the third-wire AC line cord ground. It provides a ground stud on the left side of its housing for this purpose. Connect a #6, insulated, solid copper, wire between this ground stud and a reliable earth ground.

•

Plug the AC line cord for the VMI–X interface into a 120 VAC outlet. Observe the status light on the unit, and insure that it turns on steady.

•

Inspect the wiring to verify that you have connected it properly.

CAUTION

Do not connect an industry-standard telephone in parallel with (bridged across) the ExecuMail equipment on the industry-standard side of the VMI–X. Such a connection will cause the ExecuMail equipment to operate improperly.


Installing And Programming For ExecuMail IMI89–206

Interconnecting The VMI–X




At Digital Station Ports

When you interface the ExecuMail system to the DXP Plus system through the digital station ports on its digital station board, you must place the Analog Terminal Interface Device (ATI–D–1PT) between the two systems. The

ATI-D-1PT includes one circuit; therefore, you will need a separate device for every ExecuMail port that you plan to connect. This means that for a four-port ExecuMail system, you will need four ATI–D–1PT

devices. The ATI–D–1PT is powered through its station port connections.

3.1

Installing The ATI-D-1PT

Be sure the mounting location is secure and dry, has adequate ventilation, and is a large enough area to allow easy placement of the ATI–D–1PT. The temperature range of the location must be within 32 - 90° F (0 - 40° C).

Be sure that you have the following tools and hardware available for mounting the ATI–D–1PT:

•

•

•

•

•

•

Fasteners, such as 1/4-inch wood screws, of a sufficient length to securely bite into mounting backboard

Cross Recessed screwdriver (phillips-head type)

Flat-blade Screwdriver

Electric Drill if prepared holes are needed



1. Unpack, and carefully inspect the ATI–D–1PT for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found. Verify that the package contains all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation.

2. Locate the device within 25 feet of both the common equipment cabinet and the ExecuMail system.


2. Use the base of the ATI–D–1PT cabinet as a template or measure for mounting hole locations per the dimension details shown in the outline dimensions drawing located on the next page.


4. Insert the two top screws into the mounting surface and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.

5. Hang the ATI–D–1PT cabinet on the top screws using the mounting holes located on the rear of the cabinet.

Note that these holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end. This feature allows the cabinet to snap down on the screws to secure the mounting when the cabinet is hung on them.

6. Insert a third screw through the mounting tab located on the lower edge of the cabinet and into the mounting surface; tighten it into place.



Outline Dimensions

(In Inches)

Spacing For

Mounting Hardware

(In Inches)

AW139

Detailing The ATI–D–1PT Dimensions



3.1

Connecting the ATI-D-1PT

•

Route the necessary cabling, and connect the ATI–D–1PT device between the ExecuMail system and the digital station ports per the connections detailed in the diagram shown on the next page.

•

Use one-pair (two-wire) cable for all connections.

CAUTION

Be careful when connecting the wiring between the DXP Plus and the ATI–D–1PT. Be sure to connect the digital station port to the COMMON EQUIPMENT jack on the ATI–D–1PT. Damage to the

ATI–D–1PT could occur if you mistakenly connect to the IST jack.

•

A grounding wire is not required for operation; however, one is desirable for decreasing radio frequency interference and electrostatic discharge susceptibility. The ATI–D–1PT provides a ground stud on its housing for this purpose. Connect a #6, insulated, solid copper wire between this ground stud and a reliable earth ground.

•


CAUTION

Do not connect an industry-standard telephone in parallel with (bridged across) the ExecuMail equipment on the industry-standard side of the ATI–D–1PT. Such a connection will cause the ExecuMail equipment to operate improperly.

3.1.1 Verifying Proper ATI–D–1PT Connection

Use a voltmeter to check for the presence of voltage on the ATI–D–1PT IST jack.

1. Be sure wiring between ATI-D-1PT and common equipment station ports is installed.

2. Measure for DC voltage on IST jack:

•

•

•

Measure between TIP leads and grounding stud on DXP Plus common equipment cabinet.

Measure between RING leads and grounding stud on DXP Plus common equipment cabinet.

Measure between TIP leads and RING leads.

The measured voltages must be within the limits detailed on the following table.

Measurement

Tip to Ground

Voltage

– 1 to + 1 VDC

Ring to Ground

Tip to Ring

– 27 to – 38 VDC

+ 28 to + 37 VDC

The TIP lead is positive with respect to the RING lead.



Interconnecting The ATI–D–1PT




At Industry-Standard Telephone Station Ports

When you interface the ExecuMail system to the DXP Plus system through the industry-standard telephone station ports on its industry-standard station board, you do not need an interface device; however, you will need a station port for every ExecuMail port that you plan to connect. This means that for a four-port ExecuMail system, you will need four IST station ports.

4.1

Connecting the ExecuMail System

•

Route the necessary cabling, and connect the ExecuMail ports to the IST station ports per the connections detailed in the diagram shown on the next page.

•

Use one-pair (two-wire) cable for all connections.

•




Interconnecting ExecuMail Directly To DXP Plus



5.0 Programming For Voice Mail Operation

After connecting an voice mail system to the DXP Plus system, program the DXP Plus to operate properly with it using the procedures detailed below. They are presented here in a typical order of progression but you can perform them in any order that is convenient.

5.1

Arranging Station Ports For Voice Mail Use

Description: After you or your installer has connected voice mail ports to the system station ports through the appropriate interface devices (for example, the VMI-X interface device used with analog station ports, the ATI-D-1PT interface device used with the digital station ports, or the DXIST station board used with industry-standard telephone ports), you must identify the station ports where these devices are connected.



3. From station menu, select phone types and press ENTER.

4. Type row number for station port type

(ExecuTech = analog, DigiTech = digital, IST = industry standard) and press ENTER.

5. Type row number for device connected to station port (VMI-X or ATI-D-1PT) and press ENTER. (This step not required for IST.)

6. Type number of station port (1–480) and press ENTER.

7. Repeat steps 1–6 for each station port used to interface with the voice mail system.

5.2

Assigning Intercom Numbers To Voice Mail Connections

Description: You must identify the station intercom number of each voice mail connection and link these numbers together to form a circular hunt group for call handling purposes. For example, assign intercom numbers 121, 122, 123, and 124 to voice mail ports 1, 2, 3, and 4 then link 121 to 122,

122 to 123, 123 to 124, and 124 to 121.

Programming Hint: To make the LCD readouts at the system telephones more descriptive during call transfers, use the Section 7.2.2 programming procedure to assign a descriptive name to the personal intercom numbers. If you do this, be sure to name each voice mail port differently.

For instance, you can name them VM1, VM2, VM3, and VM4; however, do not name each port

VM without personalizing it further with a unique suffix (such as 1, 2, 3, 4 or A, B, C, D for example).



3. From stations menu, select voice mail and press ENTER.

4. From voice mail menu, type the row number for the voice mail port (1–32) and press ENTER.

5. Type the personal intercom number for the station port that this voice mail port is connected to.

6. Press TAB for linked station column and type personal intercom number for station port to be linked to the station port named in step 5.

7. Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4–6 for next row number.


9. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end.



5.3

Arranging Voice Mail Call Transfer Parameters

5.3.1 Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy

Description: You can enable automatic attendant transfer on busy for individual station ports if you wish.

With this feature enabled, the system will ring a busy telephone when the voice mail system is attempting to transfer a call to it thus giving the user the option of leaving his or her present call and taking the new one. With the feature disabled, the busy telephone is not signalled by the presence of a new call and voice mail will automatically route it to the busy telephone’s voice mail box.




4. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of station being programmed and press ENTER.


6. Press SPACE bar for desired setting and press ENTER.

7. When finished press ESCAPE twice.


9. Repeat steps 4-8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end.

5.3.2 Immediate Transfer

Description: You should choose the automatic attendant immediate transfer mode for voice mail transfers. It allows the system to transfer a call as soon as it answers. However, if you turn on the voice mail screen and confirm options (see the voice mail programming manual for details), do not turn on the DXP Plus immediate transfer mode. Immediate transfer is a system-wide parameter and affects all telephones in the system.










5.4

Assigning Transfer-To-Voice Mail Button

Description: A system user can use a pre-programmed button to transfer an incoming call directly to a voice mail box so the caller can leave a message. You must use the button mapping programming procedure to assign this Transfer-To-Voice Mail button at a system telephone.



3. From stations menu, select button mapping and press ENTER.

4. Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

The VDT presents a button map with current button functions for requested station shown for review.

5. Type code (L1–L25) for button that you wish to program and press ENTER.

6. Type mnemonic for transfer-to-voice mail button and press ENTER.

NOTE: Type XVM and a two-digit code (0–32) that equals one of the voice mail ports. Usually, you will enter the code for the first voice mail port and let the extension number linking

(that you have previously arranged) decide which voice mail port actually handles the call. However if you have arranged voice mail ports into groups for department answering, enter the voice mail port code for the group that also includes the telephone that you are button mapping.


5.5

Arranging Voice Mail Ringing Options

Description: The DXP Plus system automatically enables ringing line preference at the voice mail station ports. With this feature enabled, the voice mail system’s automatic attendant will answer calls.

You can use direct, delayed, or night ringing features to determine how quickly or when it does this. With direct ringing, calls ring at the voice mail port immediately. With delayed ringing, the calls wait before ringing the voice mail port. This gives you the flexibility of having calls direct ring at a telephone where they can be answered by a human operator before they delay ring and the automated attendant answers them.




4. Type personal intercom number of voice mail station port and press ENTER.

5. From station programming menu, type item number for desired ringing and press ENTER.

6. Press CONTROL E.

7. Type a for add or type r for remove and press ENTER.

8. Type line port number for lines assigned to voice mail port

1−240

(n,nn,nnn, or n–nnn) and press ENTER.

9.

When finished press ESCAPE twice.


11. Repeat steps 4–10 for each voice mail port or press ESCAPE to end.



5.6

Assigning Voice Mail Identification (ID) Number

Description: As an option, you can assign an identification number to each DXP Plus line so that the voice mail system can provide customized call handling on a per line basis. Use voice mail system programming to match this ID number to a particular personal directory or transaction box within the voice mail system. When the DXP Plus routes a call that is ringing at a particular line to the voice mail system to be answered, it routes it with the ID number. The voice mail system then sends the call to the box that corresponds to the line’s ID number. You can use voice mail system programming to construct customized answering prompts for the individual boxes. This allows the IDed DXP Plus lines to be answered in a customized manner by the voice mail system’s automatic attendant.


2. From main menu, select line and press ENTER.

3. Type port number of line to be programmed (1–240) and press ENTER.

4. From the line menu, select item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Type the identification (ID) number and press ENTER.



8. Repeat steps 3–7 for each line or press ESCAPE to end.

5.7

Enabling Extended DTMF Tones For Voice Mail Use

Description: The system provides a means by which you can set the length of the DTMF tones that it generates when a user dials a number from his or her telephone. Since the voice mail system may require a different DTMF tone length than that which you have provided for the telephones, the system provides a means for you to set a separate DTMF tone length for voice mail station ports. It defaults the length to 80 msec, but you can program other lengths as needed.



3. From system menu, select timing and press ENTER.

4. From system timing menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar for time and press ENTER to accept setting.





5.8

Setting The Voice Mail Integration Digits

Description: You can choose the DTMF digits that the DXP Plus sends to a voice mail system. A voice mail system uses these DTMF digits to determine system and station status so that it can properly process a call. You must be versed in your voice mail’s requirements before you can assign

DTMF integration digits in the DXP Plus. The system defaults the voice mail parameters to match the Comdial voice mail system. Certain applications in countries with dialing plans different than the United States may require different integration digits. The default digits are shown in the following list and discussed below:

Follow Extension ID = 2 Intercom/Answer Confirmation = 1

Busy = 2


Do Not Disturb = 3

Disconnect = A

Follow Extension ID – When the voice mail system receives a forwarded call from a ring no-answer (RNA) or busy station, the DXP Plus sends to the voice mail system the extension number of the forwarded call followed by this DTMF digit (n). The DXP Plus sends this digit within 500 ms of the time the voice mail system answers the call. For example, if extension 101 is forwarded to voice mail and voice mail answers a forward RNA or busy forwarded call, the

DXP Plus sends 101n to the voice mail system within 500 ms of the answer time.

Intercom/Answer Confirmation – The DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system to confirm that an intercom path (without dial tone) is available for the voice mail system’s call transfer or dialing use. The DXP Plus sends this digit within 500 ms of the time it detects the voice mail system’s off-hook or hookflash condition. The DXP Plus also immediately sends this digit to the voice mail system when a station answers a voice mail transferred call. This action can alert the voice mail system to disconnect and leave the parties connected.

Busy – If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is busy on a call, the DXP

Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice system. When the voice mail system receives this digit, it can abandon the transfer, reconnect to the call, and offer the caller whatever options the the voice mail system has available in its programming. If the DXP Plus auto attendant transfer on busy feature is active, the DXP Plus will not send the DTMF digit to the voice mail system thus allowing the system to transfer a second call to the station.

DND – If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is in the do not disturb

(DND) mode, the DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice system. Receiving this digit allows the voice mail system to distinguish between a busy and a DND condition and offer the caller the appropriate choices.

Incoming Intercom Answer – The DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system when a station user makes an intercom call to the voice mail system. This action allows the voice mail system to distinguish between internal and external calls and offer the caller appropriate prompts and dialing options.

Disconnect – When an outside line or intercom party hangs up, the DXP Plus sends this

DTMF digit to the voice mail system to command an immediate disconnect. For outside calls, the central office (CO) must provide disconnect supervision to the DXP Plus and you must program the DXP Plus line for abandon hold release and disconnect supervision. At default, the DXP Plus

sends the DTMF tone for the A character as the disconnect digit. Since a caller cannot dial an A from a telephone, this feature eliminates callers from causing an accidental disconnect by dialing this digit on their telephone’s dial pad.


Installing And Programming For ExecuMail

5.8.1 Programming The Voice Mail Integration Digits

Programming: 1.


2.

From main menu, select peripherals and press ENTER.

3.

From peripherals menu, select voice mail and press ENTER.

4.

From the voice mail menu select integration digits and press ENTER.

5.

From the integration digits menu, type row number for item and press ENTER.

6.

Type entry and press ENTER.

7.

Repeat step 6 until finished.

8.


9.


10. Press ESCAPE twice to return to main menu.

IMI89–206


R

Installing And Using The

Comdial Enterprise Interface For Telephony Services

1.0 Introducing This Option

This option is a driver for the DXP and DXP Plus digital communications systems. When installed on a

Novell* local area network (LAN) telephony server, the driver software integrates the digital communications system with the computer network. The other software required for the system to operate is Novell NetWare* and Novell Telephony Services* installed on the server. Also, one of the commercially-available telephony applications must be installed on each client. A client is an individual personal computer (PC) connected to the network.

This option makes many of the digital communications system features available to telephony application programs running on client PCs. The illustration below shows a simple network configured for three clients using this technology usually referred to as Computer Telephone Integration (CTI).

Client

2

Novell local area network

SOFTWARE:

Each client must have a telephony application compatible with

Telephony Services

Client

1

Client

3

DXP Software: 8.A or later

DXP Plus Software: 2.A or later

DXP027

Digital Comunications

System Common

DXP

Cabinet

RS-232 Serial Data

Connection

Telephony

Server

SOFTWARE:

. NetWare 3.11 (or later)

. Telephony Services

. DXP driver

Detailing A Simple Computer Telephone Integration System

*Novell, Novell NetWare, and Novell Telephony Services are trade names of Novell Inc., Orem, UT.





GCA40-121.03

8/95

Installing The Telephone Services Interface GCA40–121

1.1

Understanding The Option’s Part Number

The two or three digit suffix of the part number equals the total number of simultaneous Telephony

Services users. The table below lists the various kits that are available.

NOTE: The license size for the Comdial driver option should equal or exceed the current license size for

Novell Telephony Services to assure that no users are denied access to the many features of

Telephony Services. However, it is not required that the license sizes for Novell NetWare and

Telephony Services be exactly the same. For example, Telephony Services may be installed using a Novell Runtime license (two user).

Kit Part Numbers

PART NUMBERS DESCRIPTION OF KIT

Enterprise Telephony Services NLM for Digital Communications System

ENTTS-COM005

ENTTS-COM010

ENTTS-COM025

ENTTS-COM050

ENTTS-COM100

Comdial Driver (NLM) - 5 user

Comdial Driver (NLM) -10 user




ENTTS-COM250 Comdial Driver (NLM) -250 user

Enterprise and Novell Telephony Services NLM for Digital Communications System with Runtime License

ENTTS-010-3X

ENTTS-025-3X

ENTTS-050-3X

ENTTS-100-3X

ENTTS-250-3X

ENTTS-010-4X

ENTTS-025-4X

ENTTS-050-4X

ENTTS-100-4X

ENTTS-250-4X

Novell Telephony Services, 3X Runtime and the Comdial Driver - 10 user










Enterprise and Novell Telephony Services NLM for DXP

ENTTS-010

ENTTS-025

ENTTS-050

ENTTS-100

ENTTS-250

Novell Telephony Services and the Comdial Driver - 10 user





2 – Installing the Telephone Services Interface

GCA40–121 Installing The Telephone Services Interface

1.2

About The Server

The LAN telephony server is a DOS-based personal computer (PC) using Novell NetWare and Novell

Telephony Services software. The installer connects the telephony server to the communications network and the DXP system making Telephony Services available to individual PCs (clients) on the network. We strongly recommend that you install a separate, dedicated server to run Telephony Services.

1.3

Configuring Client PCs

To use the many Telephony Services features, you must configure each client PC on the network with one of the available telephony application programs compatible with Novell Telephony Services.

The Telephony Services application software package includes instructions for configuring client PCs.

1.4

Accessing System Features From Clients

When installed on your client PC, the telephony application gives you access to many powerful telephony features. Applications currently fall into these categories:

• call center applications such as using screen pop-ups to integrate caller ID with database records,

• message management that gives you access to voice-mail/fax/E-Mail through a single application, and

•

PC control of desktop telephone features

1.5

Doing Telephony Services Administration Functions

From the server, you can do the following Telephony Services administrative functions:

• identify the software versions used by the digital communications system and Telephony Services,

• open a new server to system link,

• close an established server to system link,

• obtain link statistics such as busy hour, busy minute, or packets received,

• display active sessions,

• display monitored devices,

• change serial port configuration.

1.6

Introducing This Document

This document is for installers and administrators of Novell Telephony Services. Covered topics include installation, operation, and trouble shooting of the system driver for use in Novell Telephony Services environments.

For specific information concerning by the DXP and DXP Plus digital communications systems, refer to the appropriate system reference manuals.

Installing the Telephone Services Interface – 3


1.6.1 Understanding Some Terms Used In This Document

Some terms used in this document that may be unfamiliar to you are defined below.

application - a software program containing a set of programming instructions. When installed on a personal computer, the application allows the PC to perform a particular task that applies to a specific activity such as word processing, desktop publishing, or telephony control.

Board - this term, as used in this document, refers to a logical, serial COM Board number. Both logical

Board 0 and logical Board 1 may be on the same physical COM board.

caller ID - the name or telephone number, identified by the receiver, of the person originating a call.

CPU - Central Processing Unit. The main processing component of a personal computer.

DOS - Disk Operating System. The most popular version is MS-DOS

1

Bellevue, WA. MS-DOS is the operating system used on IBM

2 from Microsoft Corporation,

-type PCs.

driver - software, that when loaded on a PC, provides instructions to the PC for controlling other devices connected to the PC.

E-Mail - Electronic Mail. Correspondence originated on a PC and transferred over a computer network.

fax - an abbreviation for facsimile. Facsimile is the name of equipment used for transmitting pictures and/or text over a switched telephone system to be printed out at a distant location.

filter - an operating parameter that can be set to limit the transfer of packets or portions of packets over a

LAN.

LAN - Local Area Network. This refers to short-distance computer networks usually located within a building or a cluster of buildings close together. The LAN is used for tying several or many personal computers together for the purpose of communicating to one-another and for sharing resources such as printers and modems.

pop-up - refers to a window appearing on a computer screen containing a menu of user options.

1

MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

2

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.



NCF - Novell Control File. This is a small batch file on the DXP driver diskette that loads selected parameters whenever you load the DXP driver on the network server.

NetWare - Novell’s tradename for their operating system used for controlling networks.

Novell - the name of the company that develops and produces a popular line of software for use on computer networks.NLM - NetWare Loadable Module. This applies to a Novell NetWare-compatible software module that runs under NetWare when installed on a network server running NetWare. The DXP

NLM software is included on the DXP driver diskette in this option kit. When installed on the network server, the DXP NLM controls the flow of information between the DXP system and the network.

packet - a block of digital data including control data for identifying origin, destination, and amount of data included in the packet.

Port - as sometimes used in this document, this term refers to an addressable location on a logical COM

Board (example, Port:0 Board:1).

RAM - Random Access Memory. The personal computer’s main memory. RAM can be overwritten and is volatile (data is lost on loss of power without battery backup).

RS-232 Serial Port - an electrical connector on a computer or other communications equipment where binary data in serial form passes into or out of the device according to the Recommended Standard 232-C.

session - an active communications connection, measured from beginning to end, between computers or applications on a LAN.

software key - an electronic device connected to the server’s active RS-232 port that activates the

Telephony Service’s software and prevents unauthorized duplication of the software product.

system - DXP or DXP Plus digital communications systems.

telephony server - the controlling PC on a local area network providing integrated computer and telephone services to individual PC users on the network.

Telephony Services - Novell’s tradename for their network software used for providing telephony features to clients on the network.



2.0 Installing The Interface Option

This section describes the process for installing the interface option.

Make sure you have the following items before starting installation of this option.

•

LAN server. This must be a DOS-based personal computer (PC) with the following:

—386 or 486 CPU (486 CPU required for Novell NetWare 4X)

—8 megabytes of available RAM (16 megabytes of RAM required for Novell NetWare 4X)

—5 megabytes of free disk space on the sys volume

—1 RS-232 port available

—Novell NetWare software version 3.11 or higher (supplied in some kits)

•

DXP digital communications system containing software version 8.A or higher or DXP Plus system containing software revision 2.A or higher

•

Novell Telephony Services software (supplied in some kits)

•

System driver (supplied in kit)

•

Standard 6-conductor line cord (supplied in kit)

•

Software key (supplied in kit)

Modular to 25-pin adapter (supplied in kit)

Even though the server may be located at some distance from the system, installation specialists recommend that you first connect it directly to the system. This is so you can do a system check to verify correct operation. Test the system with hand-shaking off and then on (preferred).

Once you have checked out the system, you can connect the server to the system through house wiring using modular jacks.

If a connection problem occurs with either type of installation, refer to section 2.4, Checking The Signal

Paths, for a signal interconnect diagram. Using this diagram and an ohmmeter, to trace through all of the circuit paths between the server and system.

NOTE: The standard 6-conductor line cord, as supplied in the this kit,"rolls-over" the signals. That is, the signal on pin 6 on one end of the line cord appears on pin 1 on the opposite end, and so forth..

2.1

Connecting The Server Directly To The DXP System

Install the following kit-supplied items: software key, modular to 25-pin EIA adapter, and 6-conductor line cord for connecting the server’s RS-232 port to the system’s serial data port.

1. Install the software key supplied in the kit on the 25-pin serial port on the rear of the server. If you are using the 9-pin serial port, you must first install a 9-to 25-pin adapter (see the following note).

NOTE: When using the 9-pin serial port, locate a 9-to 25-pin adapter. These are available at most computer stores. Make sure pins 4 and 6 on the DB-9 end of the adapter are connected to pins 20 and 6 respectively on the DB-25 end. See Figure 2 for a connection diagram.

2. Plug the modular to 25-pin adapter supplied in the kit onto the connector on the software key.

3. Plug one end of the kit-supplied line cord into the modular connector on the adapter you installed in step 2. Plug the other end of the line cord into one of the serial ports labeled RS-232 1 or RS-232 2 on the front edge of the DXCPU board in the DXP common equipment cabinet.

NOTE: Even though the DXAUX board in some DXP systems may contain additional RS-232 ports, use one of the two RS-232 serial ports on the DXCPU board for optimal performance of this option.



*Customer-supplied


Rear View of

Typical Personal

Computer (PC)

VIEW C

DXP Digital

Communications

System

RS-232 1

Port

RS-232 2

Port

VIEW A

VIEW C

VIEW B

Software

Key

Kit-Supplied

Modular to 25-pin

EIA adapter

*

Serial Data

Port 9-pin

D Connector

VIEW D

Serial Data Port

25-pin D Connector

VIEW C


Line Cord

VIEW A

RS-232 1

4

3

6

5

2

1

4

3

6

5

2

1

RS-232 2

1 = RTS

2 = CTS

3 = RD

4 = TD

(Request To Send)

(Clear To Send)

(Receive Data)

(Transmit Data)

5 = GND

6 = NC

(Ground)

(No Connection)

14

1

*

NOTE: When using the 9-pin connector, install a 9- to 25-pin adapter between connector and software key.

Customer-Supplied


(Typical) 25

13



1 6

1 = NC

2 = GND

3 = RD

4 = TD

5 = RTS

6 = CTS

14

1

1 = NC

2 = TD

3 = RD

4 = RTS

5 = CTS

* 6 = DSR

7 = GND

* 20 = DTR

6

9

1

5

1 = NC

2 = RD

3 = TD

4 = DTR

5 = GND

6 = DSR

7 = RTS

8 = CTS

9 = NC

1

2

3

4

5

6


25-pin Adapter

(Typical) 25

13


25

6

14

1

9

13

1

5

DXP021A

Connecting The Server Directly To The DXP System



2.2

Connecting The Server Directly To The DXP Plus System

You must install a communications card in the DXP Plus to provide a serial port that you can use as the server interface. Since this is a detailed installation, it is important that you refer to IMI89–190, Installing

The DXOPT–COM Communications Card In The DXP Plus Digital Communications System, for complete installation details. This communications card that supplies the serial data port may be located on the services board or the auxiliary board installed in the main DXP Plus equipment cabinet or the card may be located on the interface board in either the upper or lower expansion cabinets. Regardless of the location, the connector pin-out is the same and the data baud rate is 9600 baud.

Once you have provided a serial data port for the server to use, install the following kit-supplied items: software key, modular to 25-pin EIA adapter, and 6-conductor line cord for connecting the server’s

RS-232 port to the DXP Plus system.

1. Install the software key supplied in the kit on the 25-pin serial port on the rear of the server. If you are using the 9-pin serial port, you must first install a 9-to 25-pin adapter (see the following note).

NOTE: When using the 9-pin serial port, locate a 9-to 25-pin adapter. These are available at most computer stores. Make sure pins 4 and 6 on the DB-9 end of the adapter are connected to pins 20 and 6 respectively on the DB-25 end.

2. Plug the modular to 25-pin adapter supplied in the kit onto the connector on the software key.

3. Plug one end of the kit-supplied line cord into the modular connector on the adapter you installed in step 2. Plug the other end of the line cord into the DXP Plus’ serial port that you made available with the communications card.



Services Board

Auxiliary Board

Rear View of

Typical Personal

Computer (PC)

VIEW C

*Customer-supplied


VIEW C

VIEW B

Software

Key

Kit-Supplied

Modular to 25-pin

EIA adapter

* Serial Data

Port 9-pin

D Connector

VIEW D

Serial Data Port

25-pin D Connector

VIEW C


Line Cord

Possible

Communications

Card Locations

14

1

* NOTE: When using the 9-pin connector, install a 9- to 25-pin adapter between connector and software key.

6

1

RS-232 2

3

4

1

2

5

6

1 = RTS

2 = CTS

3 = RD

4 = TD

5 = GND

6 = NC

(Request To Send)

(Clear To Send)

(Receive Data)

(Transmit Data)

(Ground)

(No Connection)

Customer-Supplied


(Typical) 25

13



1 6

1 = NC

2 = GND

3 = RD

4 = TD

5 = RTS

6 = CTS

14

1

1 = NC

2 = TD

3 = RD

4 = RTS

5 = CTS

* 6 = DSR

7 = GND

* 20 = DTR

6

9

1

5

1 = NC

2 = RD

3 = TD

4 = DTR

5 = GND

6 = DSR

7 = RTS

8 = CTS

9 = NC

3

4

5

1

2

6


25-pin Adapter

(Typical) 25

13


9

14

1

25

13

5

DXP021B

Connecting The Server Directly To The DXP Plus System



2.3

Connecting The Server Through House Wiring

Before using house wiring to connect the server to the system, make a direct connection and test the equipment for proper operation without the added complications sometimes caused by house wiring.

The recommended maximum hard-wired distance for server to system interconnection using 24-gauge wire is 500 feet for a 9600-baud transmission rate.

1. Install a customer-supplied 9-pin to 25-pin adapter (if applicable), the kit-supplied software key, and the kit-supplied 25-pin to modular adapter on the rear of the server as described in sections 2.1 and

2.2.

2. Plug one end of the kit-supplied line cord into the modular connector on the 25-pin to modular adapter you installed in step 1. Plug the other end of the line cord into the modular jack on the server-end of the house wiring.

3. Using a customer-supplied, standard 6-conductor line cord, plug one end of the line cord into the jack on the system-end of the house wiring. Plug the other end of the line cord into the appropriate system serial data port

4. If a connection problem occurs, refer to section 2.4 for a signal interconnect diagram. Using this diagram and an ohmmeter, you can trace through all of the circuit paths between the server and system to verify that you made the correct connections.

CAUTION

A standard 6-conductor line cord introduces a signal roll-over from one end to the other. You must maintain this signal roll-over when you install the house wiring. The illustration below shows this roll-over in place in the wiring from one modular jack to the other. The additional roll-overs introduced by the connecting line cords negate one another and are not a factor for consideration.

To Serial Data

Port on System

4

5

6

6 5 4 3 2 1

3

2

1

625A2-6

Modular

Jacks


Line Cords

4

5

6

6 5 4 3 2 1

3

2

1

To Serial Data

Port On Server

3

4

1

2

5

6

Standard


DXP029

Connecting The Server Through House Wiring

4

3

6

5

2

1



2.4

Checking Signal Paths

To verify correct signal paths between the server and the system, use the following illustration to locate the signal paths and check them using an ohmmeter.

Be sure that the RD, TD, RTS, and CTS signals from the server connect to the appropriate signals at the system serial data port as detailed in this table.

Server Signal Connections

9-Pin Serial Connector 25-Pin Serial Connector

RDPin 2 RD Pin 3

TDPin 3 TD Pin 2

RTSPin 7 RTS Pin 4

CTSPin 8 CTS Pin 5

System Signal Connections

Modular Serial Data Connector

TD Pin 4

RD Pin 3

CTS Pin 2

RTS Pin 1

NOTE: A signal roll-over occurs in the standard 6-conductor line cord. You must maintain the same signal roll-over in the optional house wiring.

To

DXP

NC

GND

TD

RD

CTS

RTS

3

2

1

6

5

4

>

>

>

>

>

>

DXP

Optional

House

Wiring

4

3

6

5

2

1

Standard

6-Conductor

Line Cord

4

5

6

1

2

3

Optional House Wiring

>

>

>

>

>

>

1

4

5

2

3

6

NC

GND

RD

TD

RTS

CTS

3

4

1

2

5

6

Jack

4

3

6

5

2

1

Standard

6-Conductor

Line Cord

3

4

1

2

5

6

>

>

>

>

>

>

3

4

1

2

5

6

25-Pin

To Modular

Adapter

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

20

>

>

>

>

>

>

>

>

4

3

6

5

2

1

NC

GND

RD

TD

RTS

CTS

3

2

1

6

5

4

>

>

>

>

>

>

Jack

6

7

20

3

4

1

2

5

NC

TD

RD

RTS

CTS

DSR

GND

DTR

Software

Key

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

20

>

>

>

>

>

>

>

>

DXP028

NC

TD

RD

RTS

CTS

DSR

GND

DTR

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

20

>

>

>

>

>

>

>

>

>

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

9-Pin to

25-Pin Adapter

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

8

9

NC

RD

TD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC

9-Pin

Connector

1

2

3

NC

TD

RD

4

5

6

RTS

CTS

7

20

DSR

GND

DTR

25-Pin

Connector

Server

Figure 4. Examining The Signal Interconnections



2.5

Programming The DXP and DXP Plus System

You can change the baud rates, data bits, stop bits, parity, and flow control for each serial data port in the system to match the data device that you connect there. Select a serial port and set the parameters shown in the following table.

Baud

Out

9600

Baud

In

9600 8

Data

Bits

1

Stop

Bits

Parity Flow

Control

NONE RTS/CTS

Once you enter the DXP or DXP Plus programming mode, perform the following steps;

1.


2.


3.

From system menu, select serial ports and press ENTER.

4.

From serial ports menu, type item number for main port or for auxiliary port and press ENTER.

5.

From serial port type menu, select the serial port number and press ENTER.

6.

Press SPACE bar for feature setting

7.

Press TAB for next parameter.

8.

Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all parameters.

9.

Press ENTER to accept settings.



2.6

Installing The Software

This section covers installation of the software on the LAN server.

1. Verify that the server includes Novell NetWare version 3.11 or higher. If not, follow the installation instructions provided with your version of NetWare and install it at this time.

2. Install the Novell Telephony Services software on the server by following the instructions provided with that software package.

3. Insert the kit-supplied diskette containing the system driver labeled Enterprise Telephony Services in an available floppy disk drive on the server. At the server console prompt (SERVER_NAME:), type:

load install. Select Product Options and press Ins to install a new product. Select the drive letter corresponding to the drive containing the system driver software (diskette) and press Enter.

4. Type COMDIAL at the server prompt and press Enter to load the system driver.



3.0 Administering The Data Link From Server To System

This section covers system administration issues, including the opening and closing of the Telephony

Services data link, and using the system driver/interface.

3.1

Using Administration Options

From the DXP Administration portion of the main menu, the following options exist:

1.

About...

2.

Active Session Information

3.

DXP Link Administration

4.

Select Active Serial Port

3.1.1 Using The About... Menu To Access Software Version Information

Selecting the About... menu option provides current software version information for both Telephony

Services and the DXP system.

NOTES: 1. A Telephony Services Link must be active for the DXP Firmware Version to be shown; otherwise, the version will be shown as UNKNOWN.

2. At least one active session must exist before the Telephony Services driver version can be shown; otherwise, the version will be shown as UNKNOWN.

3.1.2 Using The Active Session Information Menu

Selecting the Active Session Information menu option provides the following options:

1.

Display Active Sessions

2.

Display Monitored Calls

3.

Display Monitored Devices

3.1.2.1 Displaying Active Sessions

Selecting the Display Active Sessions option shows a list of all active sessions for the active serial port.

Sessions are displayed by Log-in Name and Telephony Services Session ID.

3.1.2.2 Displaying Monitored Calls

NOTE: the Display Monitored Calls option is not currently available.

3.1.2.3 Displaying Monitored Devices

Selecting the Display Monitored Devices option shows a list of all active device monitors for the active serial port. For each device monitor, the following is shown:

1.

Device being monitored.

2.

Log-in Name of the session monitoring the device.

3.

Session ID of the session monitoring the device.

4.

Application name associated with the session.

5.

Monitor Cross Reference ID.

6.

Filter value.


Installing The Telephone Services Interface

3.1.3 Using The Link Administration Menu Options

Selecting the Link Administration menu option provides additional options as follows:

1.

Clear Port Statistics

2.

Close DXP Link

3.

Edit Port Configuration

4.

Open DXP Link

The first line of the option screen shows the active serial port (example, “Board:0 Port:0").

GCA40–121

3.1.3.1 Clearing Port Statistics

Selecting this option resets all of the monitored items on the “Link Statistics Screen” such as busy hour, busy minute, and packets received.

3.1.3.2 Closing A Link

Selecting the close link option terminates the Telephony Services link established for the active serial port. Any other active links are unaffected.

3.1.3.3 Editing Port Configuration

Selecting this option allows you to modify the following parameters:

•

Baud Rate

•

Link Name

•

Hardware Handshaking

•

Auto Link Initialization

Modify these parameters as follows:

1.

Using the cursor keys, select the parameter you wish to modify.

2.

Select a new value.

3.

Press Esc to save your new values.

NOTE: The new values become effective the next time you load the DXP driver (see section 2.2,

“Installing The Software”).

3.1.3.4 Opening A Link

Selecting the open link option establishes a link to the system using the active serial port. Any other active links to other systems are unaffected. If the server is unable to establish a link, the screen shows a

Link Failed message. If this occurs, verify cable connections and try again. If you are still unable to establish a link, please refer to the “Trouble shooting” section in this document for other possible causes.

See also section 3.2.

3.1.4 Selecting An Active Serial Port

Use this menu option to select an active serial port from the list of available ports. The system driver locates all available ports when it is loaded.



4.0 Trouble shooting The Interface Option

Problem

Unable to load Comdial NLM

Possible Cause

1. Telephony Service’s software not installed correctly.

2. Telephony Service’s network loadable module (NLM) not loaded.

The COMDIAL.NCF file on the supplied diskette shows the loading order of all required NLM’s

Cannot establish DXP link 1. Line cord between server and DXP not connected or loose connection in house wiring, if used.

2. Software key incorrect or not installed.

3. DB-9 to DB-25 adapter does not have pins 4 and 6 from the DB-9 side. These pins are needed for establishing communications

(handshaking) between the server and the DXP system.

4. CTS/RTS flow control not selected on the DXP system port.

5. Line cord connected to the wrong port on the server.

6. Incorrect baud rate selected on the DXP system.

7. Incorrect active port selected in driver administration.

Access denied to Telephony Services Software key not compatible with size of Telephony Services installation. For example, Telephony Services installation and license is for 100 users while the software key is for a system driver compatible with a 50-user installation.


Installing And Programming The Analog Terminal

Interface On The Digital Communications System

1.0 Introducing The Analog Terminal Interface

This publication describes the features, applications, installation, and specifications of the Comdial Analog

Telephone Interface (ATI-D-1PT). The ATI-D-1PT is a multipurpose, on-premise accessory for the digital communications system. It provides the following features:

•

INDUSTRY-STANDARD TELEPHONE (IST) INTERFACE -This feature adapts most industry-standard telephone (IST) devices to the digital station board of the DXP system. The ATI-D-1PT will accept both tone

(DTMF) and pulse (rotary) dialing from these devices.

CAUTION

The ATI-D-1PT by itself does not support any off-premise service. Never connect the ATI-D-1PT to a telephone company-supplied line unless an acceptable OPX long loop adapter is installed. Refer the installation section for adapter installation instructions.

The ATI-D-1PT is housed in a self-contained wall mountable metal enclosure. The ATI-D-1PT receives its power from the digital communications system through the station port connection. the ATI-D-1PT contains an internal ringing generator to generate a ringing signal for an IST and high quality, low-loss, balanced, telephone transmission circuitry that supports one IST input.

Connection between the ATI-D-1PT and a common equipment digital station port requires one single-pair cable

(two-wire). Connection between the external analog IST equipment and the ATI-D-1PT requires Another single pair of wires. The ATI-D-1PT provides modular connectors to allow quick connections.

The ATI-D-1PT circuit will drive a load with a maximum ringer equivalence number (REN) of 2.0 thus allowing more than one IST connection at each interface input. Check the REN number of the connected IST equipment so as not to exceed the capacity of the ATI-D-1PT. Improper operation may result if the REN maximum of the

ATI-D-1PT is exceeded.

The ATI-D-1PT supports a wide variety of IST equipment such as 500 and 2500-type telephones, cordless telephones, answering machines, FAX machines, and data modems.

R





IMI89–208.02

10/95

IMI89–208

1.1

Detailing The Specifications

Electrical Specifications

Power requirements:

Ringing voltage:

Battery feed voltage:

Loop current limits between ATI-D and IST interface:

DC loop limits from ATI-D to industry standard interface per port:

Cable insulation resistance:

Cable requirement ATI-D to common equipment:

Cable terminations:

Dialing:

Installing And Programming For ATI–D–1PT

Supplied by the common equipment

55 VAC Nominal @ 20 Hz

(45 VAC minimum)

Power rated to maximum

REN = 2.0

24 VDC nominal

20 ma min. at 620 ohms

70 ma max. at 0 ohms

620 ohms maximum including interfaced telephony device (Approximately 4000 feet with

#26 AWG twisted-pair cable and 300 ohm device load.)

(Approximately 500 feet if two IST devices are connected in parallel on same tip and ring pair.)

30,000 ohms minimum

2-pair twisted cable; 25 feet maximum length.

(Both common equipment station ports must always be connected to the ATI-D for every installation.)

623-type, 4-conductor minijacks

Industry-standard DTMF or

Dial pulse (rotary) with nominal make/break ratio of 40/60 @ 10 PPS

2 – Installing The ATI–D–1PT

Installing And Programming For ATI–D–1PT

Environmental Specifications

Operating temperature:

Humidity:

32-122 F (0-50 C)

90 % relative, non-condensing

Mechanical Specifications

Height:

Width:

Length:

Weight:

2.375 inches

8.062 inches

11.125 inches

4 lbs. (plus 2 lbs.

for packing material)

Industry/Regulatory Standards

FCC registered and listed for safety compliance as part of digital communications system

FCC certified, Part 15 (class A)

IMI89–208

Installing The ATI–D–1PT – 3

IMI89–208 Installing And Programming For ATI–D–1PT

2.0 Installing The Analog Terminal Interface

2.1

Detailing The Mounting Considerations

1. The ATI-D-1PT can be attached to any sturdy, flat surface.

2. The distance between the ATI-D-1PT and the common equipment must be 25 feet or less.

3. The mounting location must be secure and dry and have adequate ventilation. The temperature range of the location must be within 32-122° F (0-50° C).

4. If the mounting surface is damp or if it is concrete or masonry material, a backboard must be attached to it before mounting the ATI-D. Suitable mounting backboards are available commercially or can be constructed out of 1/2-inch plywood cut to size.

5 Tools and hardware required for mounting the ATI-D include:

•

•

•

•

•

Fasteners - wood screws (1/4 x 1-inch round head), toggle bolts, or wall anchors.

Screwdriver - to match fasteners.

Electric drill - if prepared holes are required.



2.2

Mounting The Cabinet

1. Unpack and carefully inspect the ATI-D-1PT for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any damage found. Verify that the package contains all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation.


3. Use the base of the ATI-D-1PT as a template or measure for mounting hole locations per the dimension details shown in illustration.


5. Insert the two top screws into the mounting surface and tighten them to within approximately 1/8-inch of the surface.

6. Hang the ATI-D-1PT on the top screws using the mounting holes located on the rear of the cabinet.

Note that these holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end. This feature allows the cabinet to snap down on the screws to secure the mounting when the cabinet is hung on them.

7. Insert a third screw through the mounting tab located on the lower edge of the cabinet and into the mounting surface; tighten it into place.


Installing And Programming For ATI–D–1PT IMI89–208

Outline Dimensions

(In Inches)

Spacing For

Mounting Hardware

(In Inches)

AW139

Detailing The ATI–D–1PT Dimensions



2.3

Connecting The Equipment

Connect the cabling to the ATI-D-1PT per the diagram shown on the next page

CAUTION

Be careful when connecting the wiring between the DXP Plus and the ATI-D-1PT. Be sure to connect the digital station port to the COMMON EQUIPMENT (KSU) jack on the ATI-D-1PT. Damage to the

ATI-D-1PT could occur if this wiring is mistakenly connected to the IST jack.

•

While a grounding wire is not required for operation, one is desirable for decreasing radio frequency interference and electrostatic discharge susceptibility. A ground stud is provided on the ATI-D-1PT housing for this purpose. Connect a #10 or #12, insulated, solid copper wire between this ground stud and a reliable earth ground.

2.4

Verifying Proper Installation

Use a voltmeter to check for the presence of voltage on the ATI-D-1PT IST jack.

1. Be sure the wiring between the ATI-D-1PT and the common equipment station ports is properly installed.

2. Measure for DC voltage on the IST jack:

•

•

•

Measure between TIP leads and common equipment grounding stud.

Measure between RING leads and common equipment grounding stud.

Measure between TIP leads and RING leads.

The measured voltage must be within following limits (with the IST device on-hook):

MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE

Tip to Ground

Ring to Ground

Tip to Ring

-1 to +1 VDC

-27 to -38 VDC

+28 to +37 VDC

(The TIP lead is positive with respect to the RING lead.)

2.5

Installing OPX Long Loop Adapter For Off-Premise Service

As stated previously, the ATI-D-1PT is an on-premise device. You must use an OPX long loop adapter if you wish to adapt the ATI-D-1PT to support an off-premise application.

An OPX long loop adapter connects to a single telephone line and can greatly extend the line’s loop length (the

Proctor Model 46222 adapter*, for example, can extend line length to 30,000 feet). In addition, such units can be used to interconnect key systems (to share central office lines and system features).

*Proctor & Associates Company, Redmond, WA.

CAUTION

When you connect an adapter to an off-premise extension (OPX), you must insure that the telephone line routed to the OPX has primary protectors installed in series with the tip/ring pair to protect both the user and the equipment from transient voltage spikes that can travel through the cable. The telephone company offers basic protection against this condition, but it is usually designed to protect the central office circuits and you cannot rely upon it to protect common equipment. To help insure that external over-voltage surges do not damage the system, technical experts recommend that you install and properly ground gas discharge tubes or similar primary protection devices on the telephone line routed from the adapter to the off-premise extension.

To install the OPX long loop adapter:

•

Follow manufacturer’s instructions for unpacking, inspecting, mounting and wiring the adapter unit.

•

Plug a modular cable into the system jack on the adapter and connect the opposite end of the cable to the IST jack on the ATI-D-1PT.



•

Plug a modular cord into the telephone jack on the adapter and connect the opposite end of the cord to the OPX line.

•

Plug the adapter power cord into a standard 117 VAC, 3-wire electrical outlet.

Interconnecting The ATI–D–1PT



3.0 Programming For Analog Terminal Interface Operation

The ATI-D-1PT provides the interfacing capability required to connect most industry standard telephone (IST) equipment to a digital station port of the digital communications system.

The IST provides basic intercom service coupled with the ability to access outside lines. You can program the station port (through which the IST is being interfaced via the ATI-D-1PT) for either prime intercom operation or prime line automatic and idle line preference operation. Default is for prime intercom. Under either operating condition, you can program the station port to receive outside line ringing and to match either the rotary or DTMF dialing employed by the IST.

3.1

Detailing The Prime Intercom Operating Condition

With key-system configured digital communications systems, a system multiline telephone user can extend line access for call origination to an IST station by employing the call transfer feature. To provide outside line ringing to a prime intercom IST, program the ATI-D-1PT station port to have the ringing line preference feature and then enable ringing for all lines that you want to ring at the IST.

With hybrid configured digital communications systems, you can make outside lines available to the IST for call origination by programming the IST for line group access. With line group access, the IST user can access an outside line by dialing the group access code over the intercom line. The digital communications system then selects one of the grouped lines for IST use.

3.2

Detailing The Prime Line Automatic Or Idle Line

Preference Operating Condition

You can program an outside line as a prime line at the station port through which the IST is being interfaced, or you can program that station port for idle line preference and then assign several lines to the station port.

With either prime line automatic or idle line preference, the IST has outside line dial tone for call origination when its user lifts its handset. You can enable outside line ringing at the IST station port that you have programmed for either prime line automatic or idle line preference. Alternately, you can enable the ringing line preference feature for the IST station port.

The intercom line is still available to an IST even though you have provided outside line access. After going off-hook, the IST user obtains intercom dial tone by performing a hookflash (press and release the hookswitch) or by pressing the TAP button if one is available. Hookflash either drops the outside line (if the used dialed no digits after lifting the handset) or (if the user dialed some digits) places the line on hold and provides intercom dial tone.

3.3

Detailing The Distinctive Ringing Condition

Intercom calls that ring at equipment connected through an ATI-D-1PT have a different cadence than outside calls have. If desired, you can disable this distinctive ringing feature to make the intercom ring cadence the same as that for outside calls.

3.4

Detailing The Through Dialing Condition

You can program the station port through which the IST is being interfaced for through-dialing or you can disable the feature. The system automatically enables the feature when you connect an ATI-D-1PT to the station port.

Through dialing enabled is necessary if the connected IST is a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tone dial device that requires that its generated dialing tones pass through the ATI-D-1PT, the common equipment, and onto a tone dial compatible telephone line.

If the IST is a rotary telephone, you must disable the through dialing feature.



3.5

Programming Procedures

The ATI-D-1PT automatically identifies itself as an analog terminal interface for the digital station board as soon as you connect it to the digital communications system.

Prime Line Programming

Prime Line Type

When you enable this feature, the station automatically selects a line, line group, or intercom number for use when the station user takes the station off hook. Use the programming procedures shown below to select the line port, line group, or intercom number to serve as the prime station calling interface.



3. From stations menu, select station programming.



6. Press SPACE BAR for desired value and press ENTER.




Prime Line

Use this procedure to choose the prime line.




4. Type personal intercom number or station name and press ENTER.


6. From prime line menu, type line port number and press ENTER.




Prime Intercom Number

Use this procedure to choose the prime intercom number.





5. From station programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. From prime intercom menu, type personal intercom number and press ENTER.






Idle Line Programming

Idle Line Preference

With you enable this feature, a station automatically connects to an idle line when the user lifts the telephone’s handset.



3. From stations menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.

4. Type class of service number (1-32) and press ENTER.

5. Fro COS programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.




9. Repeat steps 4-8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end.

Idle Line Priority

If you give a station the ability to automatically connect to an idle assigned line when the user takes the handset off-hook, take this programming action to set the priority in which the system chooses the idle lines for use. You can place up to eight lines in this priority list.






6. Type any eight line port numbers (type as n,nn,nnn or n–nnn) and press ENTER.





When you enable this feature, a station can automatically connect to a ringing line when a user takes his or her telephone off-hook.



3. From the stations menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.

4. Type class of service number (1–32) and press ENTER.

5. From the COS programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.




9. Repeat steps 4–8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end.



Dialing Mode

Program the line port to match either a DTMF tone or a rotary (pulse) dialing line as supplied by the central office

(CO).



3. From lines menu, select line programming and press ENTER.

4. Type line port number or name and press ENTER.

5. From line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER to accept setting.



9. Repeat steps 4-8 for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.

Pulse Dial Make/Pulse Dial Break (Pulse Dial Ratio)

Use this procedure to set the make/break ratio for rotary dial signalling to match rotary dial line requirements.

You can set the line make/break ratio for rotary dial (pulse dial) signalling in a more flexible manner to match many different rotary dial line requirements. You can set the make time and the break time independently in one msec. increments to any time from one to 99 msec.

1.

Press CONTROL T for main menu,

2.


3.

From system menu, select timing and press ENTER,

4.

From timing menu, type item number for line pulse make and press ENTER.

5.

Type desired time (1–99) and press ENTER,

6.

From timing menu, type item number for line pulse break and press ENTER.

7.

Type desired time (1–99) and press ENTER.

8.

Press ESCAPE twice,


Pulse Dial Interdigit Time

You can set the interdigit time between dial pulses when the system pulse-dials a number over a line. The digital communications system defaults this time to 200 msec. and provides a range of timing values between 100 msec.

and one sec. that you can set in 100 msec. increments.

1. Press CONTROL T for main menu,


3. From the system menu, select timing and press ENTER.

4. From timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar to select desired time and press ENTER to select setting.

6. Press ESCAPE twice,





Program ringing assignments on a per station/per line/per intercom number basis. Ringing can be immediate, delayed, or special purpose. Use the procedures in this section to customize the ringing features for the system.

Direct Ringing

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at a station as soon as a call appears. Direct ringing sounds during the day 1 and day 2 time periods but does not ring during the night ringing mode or during the manual night transfer (of ringing) operation.





5. From station programming menu, type the item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Press CONTROL E for edit.

7. Type a for add or r for remove and press ENTER.

8. Type line port number (type as n,nn,nnn or n–nnn) and press ENTER.



11 Repeat steps 4-10 for each station or press ESCAPE to end.

Delayed Ringing

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at a station after waiting a short time period from when a call appears. Delayed ringing sounds during day 1, day 2 time periods, during the night ringing mode, and during the manual night transfer (of ringing) operation.






6. Press CONTROL E.


8. Type line port number (type as n,nn,nnn or n—nnn) and press ENTER.




Day 1 Ring

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the day 1 ringing mode time period. Refer to the paragraph below titled, Day 1, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times, to set the beginning and ending times of this ringing.







6. Press CONTROL E to edit.

8. Type line port number (n,nn,nnn or n–nnn) and press ENTER.




Day 2 Ring













Day 1, Day 2, And Night Ringing Begin And End Times

With this programming procedure, set the begin and end times of the day 1, day 2, and night ringing time periods.




4. From the system parameters menu, select day 1, day 2 or night ringing begin times and press ENTER.

5. Type times in 24–hour format (hh:mm) and press ENTER.

6. Press ENTER (repeatedly if needed) to place cursor at next time desired setting.

7. Repeat step 5 and press ENTER.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all times are set and press ENTER.






Night Ring (Night Transfer - Of Ringing)

Choose the line ports that you want to ring, along with the delayed ringing line ports, at stations during the night ringing mode of operation. The ringing arrangement that you configure here is the arrangement that is active both during the automatic night ringing time period and whenever the attendant manually activates the night transfer

(of ringing) operation. Do note that the attendant commanded night ringing period supersedes the automatic night ringing period. Refer to the above paragraph titled, Day 1, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times, to set the time for the automatic night ringing period.






6. Press CONTROL E.





Ring No-Answer Rings

This procedure sets the amount of rings that sound at one station port before the call rolls over to ring at another station port. Any system feature that requires a ring no-answer value (for example, call forwarding) uses the setting that you program here.

The system defaults the ring no-answer value at regular station ports to four rings, and it defaults ports programmed to function as voice mail ports to three rings. This insure that, at default, the voice mail equipment will have sufficient time to answer a call before it rolls over to the next port.






6. Type number of rings 0–6 and press ENTER.






Personalized Ringing Tone

Program a station to ring in one of several distinctive tones for proprietary digital telephones and in one of four distinctive tones for analog telephones.





5. From the station programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Type ring tone choice and press ENTER.




While industry-standard telephones do not provide personalized ringing, you can set distinctive ringing for them.

An industry-standard telephone can sound one ring cadence for intercom calls and a different ring cadence for outside calls or it can sound the same ring cadence for both types of calls. You must select one of these ringing styles on a station class of service basis. All industry-standard telephones with the same class of service have the same ringing style.

NOTE: Do not enable distinctive ringing for voice mail ports.




4. Type class of service number (1–32) that corresponds with class of service assigned to the IST and press ENTER.

5. From COS programming menu, type row number for IST distinctive ringing and press ENTER.





Through Dialing (Thru-Dialing)

This procedure allows DTMF tones that are generated by an external device connected to the system through necessary interface equipment to pass through the system and out to any line connection.



3. From station menu, select station programming and press ENTER.






9 . Repeat steps 4–8 level for each station or press ESCAPE to end.


Installing And Programming The Off-Premise Extension

Interface On The Digital Communications System

1.0 Introducing The Off-Premise Extension Interface

This publication describes the features, applications, installation, specifications, and operation of the off-premise extension interface (OPX-X). The OPX-X is a multipurpose accessory with dual circuits that provide the following features:

•

OFF-PREMISE EXTENSION—This feature adapts most industry-standard telephone devices to the digital communications system and allows them to be remotely located. The OPX-X will accept both tone (DTMF) and pulse (rotary) dialing from these devices.

•

TIE-LINE—This feature allows you to connect two systems to each other using single-pair wiring of dedicated telephone lines.

•

MODEM ADAPTER—This feature allows the flow of switched data between a data source and a data receiver through the DXP Plus analog station ports.

The OPX-X is a dual off-premise extension (OPX) unit. It is housed in a self-contained metal enclosure that you can either wall or rack mount. The OPX-X has an internal power supply and ringing generator. Dual, high quality, low-loss, balanced, telephone transmission circuitry supports two off-premise extensions.

Each off-premise circuit can drive a load with a maximum ringer equivalence number (REN) of two (2) thus allowing more than one industry-standard telephone connection at each off-premise location if desired.

The OPX-X will support virtually any industry-standard telephone device such as 500 and 2500-type telephones, cordless telephones, answering machines, and data modems. The OPX-X provides the interfacing capability required to connect these devices to analog station ports in digital communications system.

R





IMI89–209.02

9/95

IMI89–209 Installing And Programming The OPX-X

1.1

Detailing The Specifications

Electrical Specifications

Power requirements:

Ringing voltage:

Battery feed voltage:

Loop current limits:

117VAC +/- 10% single-phase @ .13A

maximum

95 VAC Nominal @ 20 Hz

Power rated to maximum REN = 2.0

50 VDC nominal

20 ma min. at 1500 ohms

50 ma max. at 0 ohms

DC loop limits: 1500 ohms maximum including telephony device (Approximately 20,000 feet with #24

AWG twisted-pair cable and 400 ohm device load)

30,000 ohms minimum Cable insulation resistance:

Cable requirement OPX-X to digital communications system 2-pair, twisted

Cable terminations: 623-type, 4-conductor minijacks

Dialing:

Ringing cadence:

Industry-standard DTMF

Dial pulse (rotary) with nominal make/break ratio of 40/60 @ 10 PPS

1 second on/4 seconds off

(typical for intercom calls)

2 – Installing The OPX-X

Installing And Programming The OPX-X

Environmental Specifications

Operating temperature:

Humidity:

Mechanical Specifications

Height:

Width:

Length:

Weight:

Industry/Regulatory Standards

FCC registered

FCC certified, Part 15 (class A)

UL listed

Leased Line Specifications

Facility interface code:

Line conditioning:

32-122 F (0-50 C)

90 % relative, non-condensing

3.0 in.

10.25 in.

11.50 in.

8 lbs. (plus 2 lbs. for packing material)

IMI89–209

Key System: CVW7WC-12829-KF-E

Hybrid/Key System: CVW7WC-16553-MF-E

0L13C

Dry metallic

Installing The OPX-X – 3


2.0 Installing the Off-Premise Extension Interface

2.1

Detailing The Mounting Considerations

•

You can attach the OPX-X to any sturdy, flat, surface. It may be vertically rack mounted if desired.

• you must locate the OPX-X within six (6) feet of the proper electrical outlet. It requires a 117VAC circuit, with a third-wire ground, supplied to a standard (NEMA 5-15R) electrical outlet.

• you must keep the distance between the OPX-X and the KSU to 25 feet or less.

•

Be sure that the mounting location is secure and dry and have adequate ventilation. Be sure that the temperature range of the location is within 32-122° F (0-50° C).

•

If the mounting surface is damp or if it is concrete or masonry material, you must attach a backboard to the mounting surface. Suitable mounting backboards are available commercially or can be constructed out of

1/2-inch plywood cut to size.

•

Tools and hardware required for mounting the KSU cabinet include:

• Fasteners - wood screws (1/4 x 1-inch round head), toggle bolts, or wall anchors.

•

Screwdriver - to match fasteners.

•

•

•

Electric drill - if prepared holes are required.



2.2

Mounting The Cabinet

1. Unpack, and carefully inspect the OPX-X for shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately of any damages found. Verify that the packages contain all parts and accessories needed for proper installation and operation.

2. If a backboard is required at the mounting location, attach it securely to provide a stable KSU mounting surface.

3. Use the base of the OPX-X as a template or measure for mounting hole locations per the dimension details shown in Figure 1.

4. Drill holes in the mounting surface of a proper size to accommodate the hardware being used. If necessary, prepare these holes with inserts, anchors or other attachment devices as dictated by the type of mounting surface.

5. Attach the OPX-X to the mounting surface with four (4) screws installed through the mounting flange and into the mounting surface holes. Note that the flange holes are elongated with an enlargement at one end of the hole. This feature allows the mounting screws to be partially installed in the mounting surface before the

KSU is hung on them.


Installing And Programming The OPX-X

AW1002A

IMI89–209

11.50

3.0

10.25

7.0

Detailing The OPX-X Dimensions

8.75



2.3


•

Route the necessary cabling, and connect the OPX-X to the digital communications system per the connections detailed on the next page.

•

The installation requires a grounding wire separate from the third-wire AC line cord ground. The OPX-X cabinet provides a ground stud. Connect a #10 or #12, insulated, solid copper, wire between this ground stud and either the ground stud on the digital communications system cabinet or a reliable earth ground.

•

Plug the AC line cord for the OPX-X into a 117 VAC outlet. Observe the status light on the unit, and insure that it turns on steady.

CAUTION

To help insure that foreign voltages, which could appear on the TELCO lines, do not damage the system, be sure gas discharge tubes or similar protection devices are installed, and properly grounded, in all connected TELCO lines.

2.4

Verifying Proper Installation

Use a voltmeter to check for the presence of either AC or DC voltage on the OPX1 and OPX 2 ports.

Make these voltage measurements with all system wiring installed and the AC power turned off.

1. Measure for both AC and DC voltage between the TIP lead of the OPX 1 port and the KSU grounding stud.

The measured voltage must be 0 volts.

2. Measure for both AC and DC voltage between the RING lead of the OPX 1 port and the KSU grounding stud.

The measured voltage must be 0 volts.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the OPX 2 port.

4. Apply AC power to the OPX-X.

5. Repeat steps 1–3. The measured voltage must now be approximately -50VDC.


Installing And Programming The OPX-X IMI89–209




2.5


You must set the OPX-X’s configuration switches to match the digital communications system. The switches are located in an opening on the left side of the cabinet.

Switch

A

B

C

Key- System

Configured with . .


System Condition

System programmed to assign analog station port to OPX-X for circuit 1

System programmed to assign analog station port to OPX-X for circuit 2

Voice first intercom signalling enabled (note 1)

Tone first intercom signalling enabled

Prime line automatic enabled

Yes

No

Yes

No

Setting

Closed

Open*

Closed

Open*

Closed*

Open

Open

D

(note 2)

Hybrid system configured

Off-premise device is intercom only

Off-premise device has access to outside line through the digital communications system

Open

Closed*

Open

NOTE 1: This switch setting matches the system requirements. It is not possible to perform voice signalling from a device connected through an OPX-X to the common equipment.

NOTE 2: When you have programmed the system to allow the off-premise device to have access to outside line, you must also enable a signal delay to prevent transmission of extraneous DTMF tones from the device over the outside line. When you enable this delay, the user must wait approximately 2 seconds before speaking when performing call announce and paging over intercom line. When the off-premise device is an intercom only device with no access to an outside line, you can disable the delay to facilitate faster cut-through to call announce and paging.

*Factory settings

BOTTOM

OF

HOUSING

LEFT SIDE

OF HOUSING

AW1001

Locating The Switches

CLOSED

A

B

D


OPEN


3.0 Programming For Off Premise Extension Interface Operation

When operated through the OPX-X, the IST provides basic intercom service coupled with the ability to access outside lines. You can program the analog station port (through which the IST is being interfaced via the OPX-X) for either prime intercom operation or prime line automatic and idle line preference operation. Default is for prime intercom. Under either operating condition, you can program the station port to receive outside line ringing and to match either the rotary or DTMF dialing employed by the IST.

3.1

Detailing The Prime Intercom Operating Condition

With key-system configured digital communications systems, a system multiline telephone user can extend line access for call origination to an IST station by employing the call transfer feature. To provide outside line ringing to a prime intercom IST, program the OPX-X station port to have the ringing line preference feature and then enable ringing for all lines that you want to ring at the IST.

With hybrid configured digital communications systems, you can make outside lines available to the IST for call origination by programming the IST for line group access. With line group access, the IST user can access an outside line by dialing the group access code over the intercom line. The digital communications system then selects one of the grouped lines for IST use.

3.2

Detailing The Prime Line Automatic Or Idle Line

Preference Operating Condition

You can program an outside line as a prime line at the station port through which the IST is being interfaced, or you can program that station port for idle line preference and then assign several lines to the station port.

With either prime line automatic or idle line preference, the IST has outside line dial tone for call origination when its user lifts its handset. You can enable outside line ringing at the IST station port that you have programmed for either prime line automatic or idle line preference. Alternately, you can enable the ringing line preference feature for the IST station port.

The intercom line is still available to an IST even though you have provided outside line access. After going off-hook, the IST user obtains intercom dial tone by performing a hookflash (press and release the hookswitch) or by pressing the TAP button if one is available. Hookflash either drops the outside line (if the used dialed no digits after lifting the handset) or (if the user dialed some digits) places the line on hold and provides intercom dial tone.

3.3

Detailing The Distinctive Ringing Condition

Intercom calls that ring at equipment connected through an OPX-X have a different cadence than outside calls have. If desired, you can disable this distinctive ringing feature to make the intercom ring cadence the same as that for outside calls.

3.4

Detailing The Through Dialing Condition

You can program the station port through which the IST is being interfaced for through-dialing or you can disable the feature. The system automatically enables the feature when you connect an OPX-X to the station port.

Through dialing enabled is necessary if the connected IST is a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tone dial device that requires that its generated dialing tones pass through the OPX-X, the common equipment, and onto a tone dial compatible telephone line.

If the IST is a rotary telephone, you must disable the through dialing feature.



3.5

Programming Procedures

The OPX-X automatically identifies itself as an analog terminal interface for the digital station board as soon as you connect it to the digital communications system.

Prime Line Programming












Prime Line







6. From prime line menu, type line port number (type as n,nn,nnn or n–nnn) and press ENTER.





Use this procedure to choose the prime intercom number.












Idle Line Programming













If you give a station the ability to automatically connect to an idle assigned line when the user takes the handset off-hook, take this programming action to set the priority in which the system chooses the idle lines for use. You can place up to eight lines in this priority list.






6. Type any eight line numbers (type as n,nn,nnn or n–nnn) and press ENTER.





When you enable this feature, a station can automatically connect to a ringing line when a user takes his or her telephone off-hook.












Dialing Mode

Program the line port to match either a DTMF tone or a rotary (pulse) dialing line as supplied by the central office

(CO).




4. Type line port number or name and press ENTER.






Pulse Dial Make/Pulse Dial Break (Pulse Dial Ratio)

Use this procedure to set the make/break ratio for rotary dial signalling to match rotary dial line requirements.

You can set the line make/break ratio for rotary dial (pulse dial) signalling in a more flexible manner to match many different rotary dial line requirements. You can set the make time and the break time independently in one msec. increments to any time from one to 99 msec.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Type desired time (1–99) and press ENTER,

6.


7.

Type desired time (1–99) and press ENTER.

8.

Press ESCAPE twice,



You can set the interdigit time between dial pulses when the system pulse-dials a number over a line. The digital communications system defaults this time to 200 msec. and provides a range of timing values between 100 msec.

and one sec. that you can set in 100 msec. increments.











Program ringing assignments on a per station/per line/per intercom number basis. Ringing can be immediate, delayed, or special purpose. Use the procedures in this section to customize the ringing features for the system.







5. From station programming menu, type the item number for feature and press ENTER.














6. Press CONTROL E.


8. Type line port number (type as n,nn,nnn or n—nnn) and press ENTER.




Day 1 Ring













Day 2 Ring



















5. Type times in 24–hour format (hh:mm) and press ENTER.









Night Ring (Night Transfer - Of Ringing)

Choose the line ports that you want to ring, along with the delayed ringing line ports, at stations during the night ringing mode of operation. The ringing arrangement that you configure here is the arrangement that is active both during the automatic night ringing time period and whenever the attendant manually activates the night transfer

(of ringing) operation. Do note that the attendant commanded night ringing period supersedes the automatic night ringing period. Refer to the above paragraph titled, Day 1, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times, to set the time for the automatic night ringing period.






6. Press CONTROL E.






This procedure sets the amount of rings that sound at one station port before the call rolls over to ring at another station port. Any system feature that requires a ring no-answer value (for example, call forwarding) uses the setting that you program here.







6. Type number of rings 0–6 and press ENTER.







Program a station to ring in one of several distinctive tones for proprietary digital telephones and in one of four distinctive tones for analog telephones.










While industry-standard telephones do not provide personalized ringing, you can set distinctive ringing for them.

An industry-standard telephone can sound one ring cadence for intercom calls and a different ring cadence for outside calls or it can sound the same ring cadence for both types of calls. You must select one of these ringing styles on a station class of service basis. All industry-standard telephones with the same class of service have the same ringing style.

NOTE: Do not enable distinctive ringing for voice mail ports.




4. Type class of service number (1–32) that corresponds with class of service assigned to the IST and press ENTER.






Through Dialing (Thru-Dialing)










9 . Repeat steps 4–8 level for each station or press ESCAPE to end.




R



Installing and Programming The ISDN–PRI Interface


Introducing The ISDN–PRI Interface

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) provides integrated voice and data over a common telephone company facility. There are two methods of ISDN access that are currently available: ISDN–BRI (basic) and

ISDN–PRI (primary). ISDN–BRI provides a way for subscribers to get digital service from the telephone company supplier for two telephones or a telephone and a data device over one special pair of wires. ISDN–PRI provides a way for subscribers to get digital service from the telephone company supplier for 24 lines over two special pairs of wires. This latter method is the concern of this publication.

ISDN–PRI access directly connects a multiple-station, digital communications system to the telephone company’s

ISDN network through a single high-speed line. This high-speed line is commonly known as T1 in North America and consists of 24 digitized channels. ISDN–PRI access consists of a grouping of 23 voice channels (B–channels) and one signalling or control channel (D–channel). B–channels are clear channels suitable for voice or data transmission while the D–channel is a packet-switched link for call set-up and signalling. When you use

ISDN–PRI access with T1, one of the T1 channels serves as the signalling channel. This arrangement is sometimes referred to as 23B+D ISDN service.

The DXPRI is a circuit card that you install on a revision B or later DXPT1 line board with special-purpose firmware to provide ISDN–PRI access to the digital communications system. The DXPRI card handles the

D–channel signalling protocol and passes messages to the DXPT1 board. A single DXPRI card can control multiple DXPT1 boards when you tie the boards together through board programming action. This arrangement

(known as NFAS or Network Facility Associated Signalling) allows the system to derive 24 B–channels from all boards except the one where installers have added the the DXPRI card. When installers do this, the

DXPT1/DXPRI combination that provides the control is designated as DXPT1–PRI; and the boards being controlled are designated as DXPT1–NFAS. The NFAS boards do not require a DXPRI card as they are slaves to the master –PRI board. Throughout the remainder of this publication, the term T1/PRI means a T1 board specifically configured for ISDN–PRI operation be it either a DXPT1–PRI or a DXPT1–NFAS board.

Since central office protocols differ, the DXPRI card supports several protocol arrangements and provides interface support for several signalling types. The programmer and the end user can select the interface support that the system needs for a particular application. The support that they choose determines the way that the telephone company treats the signal.

The DXPRI card provides a calling number identification feature that provides the following services: delivery of network provided calling numbers, calling line identification presentation (CLIP), or automatic number identification (ANI). On originated calls, the system automatically provides the calling number if available; otherwise, it provides the default directory number. For incoming calls, the called station displays the calling number if available; otherwise, the display shows information determined by station class of service programming. The system programmer can customize the caller ID parameters for outgoing calls as site requirements dictate.

R





IMI89–255.01

12/96

IMI89–255 Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card

Introducing The T1/PRI Line Board

The revision B or later DXPT1 board with special-purpose firmware serves as host for the DXPRI card and gives gives the digital communications system the capability to handle up to 24 channels of voice and/or data transmissions over a single four-wire cable using multiplexing techniques. The DXPT1 board includes a customer service unit (CSU) to eliminate the need for a external CSU.

Defining T1/PRI Operation

T1/PRI is the digital two-way transmission of telecommunications over a single high-speed circuit. Up to 24 separate voice or data transmissions form digital pulses that are transferred at the rate of 1.544 million bits per second (Mbps) over the T1/PRI trunk. At the receiving end, the digital pulses are decoded into 24 separate circuits.

Pulse characteristics such as repetition rate, pulse width, pulse amplitude, and average ones density ((ratio of one

(1) bits to zero (0) bits)) are as specified by digital signal level 1 (DS-1) described in American National

Standards Institute Specification, ANSI T1.403-1989.

Detailing Where You Can Install T1/PRI Boards and Its Supporting Needs

Since the DXP Plus supports a maximum of 240 lines, and each T1/PRI board handles up to 24 channels, you can install up to 10 boards in the DXP Plus system. You can install these 10 boards in any available universal board slot in the main or expansion cabinets. Of course, any other line boards that you install, such as loop start, DID or multipurpose, reduce the number of lines available for T1/PRI service and thus reduces the number of T1/PRI boards that you can install.

Whenever you install one or more boards, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source (the usual case), you must install one synchronization card (DXOPT–SYN) on the services board. This means that when you connect the system to central office (CO) lines, you must include a synchronization card, and the DXP Plus clock must be controlled by CO signalling.

If you are unfamiliar with the terms and component names associated with the T1/PRI digital carrier transmission option, refer to paragraph titled, Defining The T1/PRI Terms, at the end of this publication.

CAUTION

For operation with the DXP Plus, the T1/PRI board must be Revision B or higher and have special-purpose firmware installed.

2 – Introducing The T1/PRI Line Board

Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card IMI89–255

Understanding The DXOPT-SYN Synchronization Card

The DXOPT–SYN card uses a reference timing frequency of 8 KHz that it derives from the 1.544 MHz frequency supplied to the T1/PRI board by the central office (CO) or other external source. By referencing this 8 KHz with

8 KHz timing derived internally, the master 16.384 MHz voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) can be synchronized. The transmit clock (1.544 MHz) is derived from the 16.384 MHz frequency on the T1/PRI board. If the 1.544 MHz received frequency is incorrect (not within a 200 Hz tolerance), the system may loose synchronization with the CO or other external source. The DXOPT–SYN card reports this condition by turning on the appropriate alarms on the T1/PRI board and DXOPT–SYN card. A loss of clock synchronization causes frame slips that result in data communications errors.

The DXOPT–SYN card allows two timing references ( primary and secondary) to be selected. You can select either automatic or manual (for maintenance mode). In the automatic mode, a loss of primary timing causes the system to switch to the secondary timing reference. If both the primary and secondary timing references are lost, the VCO oscillator on the DXOPT–SYN card is defaulted to the fixed 16.384 MHz oscillator on the services board. This results in the loss of clock synchronization.

Understanding The DXOPT-SYN Synchronization Card – 3


Configuring The T1/PRI Board

When the factory arranges the T1/PRI board for ISDN–PRI support, it installs the DXPRI card and the appropriate chip firmware on both boards. For field-up grade of existing T1 boards, you must install the DXPRI card on your existing DXPT1 board and change the firmware on the DXPT1. For instructions to do this, refer to the paragraph titled Up-Grading Your DXPT1 Board For ISDN–PRI Support, located at the end of this publication.

Before you install a T1/PRI board in the digital communications system, determine if you must meet special system requirements. If you do have special system requirements, use the dual in-line pin (DIP) switches provided on the board to re-configure the T1/PRI board.

The board contains 28 DIP switches (three 8-position modules and one 4-position module). Rectangular cutouts in the front-edge panel provide access to these switches.

The eight DIP switches nearest the bottom of the panel are accompanied by eight green LED indicators.

NOTE: These eight switches and their associated indicators are for diagnostic purposes only. The setting of these switches does not effect the function of the T1/PRI board. The recommended setting for switches 1, 2, and

4–8 is 0 and the recommended setting of switch 3 is 1. These settings cause the green diagnostic lights to give information about PRi layer 3 and 3 operation.

The remaining 20 DIP switches labeled SW1, SW2. and LIU are for configuring the T1/PRI board to meet specific operating requirements. The default setting for all of these switches is 0 except for LIU–2, which you should set to 1. This is the standard configuration for most customer applications. However, special customer needs may require that you reset one or more of these switches using the procedure given below.

1. Obtain a static discharge wrist strap and attach it to one of your wrists. Make sure to adjust the strap for a snug fit against your skin; do not apply the strap over any of your clothing.

2. Connect one end of the wrist strap-cord to the wrist strap and the other end to earth ground.

NOTE: With the DXP cabinet in the installed position, the ground lug on the right side of the cabinet is normally a good grounding point since this lug should have a heavy ground wire connected between it and a good earth ground.

3. Remove the T1/PRI board from its static protection bag and set it on a static-safe work area.

4. Using a ball-point pen or similar object, move the DIP switches from left (0 position) to right (1 position) as needed. All DIP switches are facing left for typical applications. The paragraph titled, Setting The T1/PRI

Switches, details the DIP switch descriptions

4 – Configuring The T1/PRI Board


Reset Pushbutton

(Behind Hole)

(Default)

1

2

3

4

0

LIU

1

See Text

For Settings

Diagnostic

Switches and LEDs

1

(Default)

1

2

3

0

6

7

4

5

8

See Text

For Settings

T1002f.cdr

(Default)

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

0

SW1

1

See Text

For Settings

(Default)

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

SW2

See Text

For Settings

Setting The DIP Switches

Configuring The T1/PRI Board – 5


Setting The T1/PRI Switches

NOTE: The system only reads the SW2 and LIU DIP switches when you apply power to the board or do a manual reset. With power on, manually reset the board by inserting a slender object, such as a straightened-out paper clip, into the small hole located between the Yellow and Syn LEDs on the front-edge panel. You can also reset the board remotely from a video display terminal or personal computer. A reset causes a service disruption.

Setting Switch Options SW1–1 Through SW1–8

Down Load PRI Code To Flash

The DXPRI card has internal software that resides in FLASH memory that you can up-grade from the DXP Plus‘ serial data port. You must set SW1–8 for down-load or for normal operation.

SW1 DIP

Switch

Number

7

8

1 (top)

2

3, 4, 5

6

Switch Position

0 (default)

0 (default)

0 (default)

0 (default)

0 (default)

0 (default)

1

Function

Reserved for future use.



Reserved for future use (network).


Down-load PRI Code To Flash

Normal (run)

Down -load

6 – Setting The T1/PRI Switches


Setting Switch Options LIU–1 Through LIU–4


The equalizer gain logic (EGL) determines how sensitive the receive circuits are to the incoming signals. You set the level for -26 dB or -36 dB by using DIP switch LIU–1. (Normally, the -26 dB level setting is the better choice.)

Transmit Level Attenuation

You can manually set the transmit level for a particular value (0, -7.5, -15, or -22.5 dB) or select the automatic feature that sets the transmit level automatically depending on the receive signal. A weak receive signal causes a strong transmit signal and vice versa. Use DIP switch LIU–2 to select either the manual or the automatic setting.

If you select the manual setting, set the desired value with DIP switches LIU–3 and LIU–4. Normally, 0 dB is used when connecting to a network interface box.

LIU DIP Switch

Number

1 (top)

2

3,4

Switch Position

0 (default)

1

0

1 (default)

0,0 (default)

0,1

1,0

1,1

Function

RECEIVE SIGNAL SENSITIVITY

-26 dB

-36 dB

TRANSMIT LEVEL MODE

Automatic (level set by receive signal)

Manual (level set by switches 3 and 4 below)

TRANSMIT LEVEL ATTENUATION

(LIU-2 must be “1")

0 dB

-7.5 dB

-15 dB

-22.5 dB

Setting The T1/PRI Switches – 7


Setting Switch Options SW2–1 Through SW2–8

Loop-back

Loop-back is the maintenance routine used to verify the receive function (local or remote) and to isolate system problems. The network can remotely activate the loop-back feature using ESF (ANSI T1.403) facility data link.

You can manually make three different types of loop-back requests depending on the option you select using DIP switches SW2–7 and SW2–8. These are: local, remote, and payload loop-back.

•

Local loop-back returns transmitted signals back to the DXP.

•

Remote loop-back returns received signals back to the network. The ANSI T1.403 specification refers to this feature as line loop-back.

•

Pay-load loop-back is similar to remote loop-back except the system reestablishes framing bit.

Customer Service Unit (CSU) Identification Bit

You can set the message-oriented (C/R) bit transmitted over the ESF data link by DIP switch SW2–2 to be a zero

(0) bit or a one (1) bit. The C/R bit is used to identify the T1 signal origin as being either from customer premise equipment (CPE) or carrier equipment such as a CSU.

Set C/R to be a zero (0) bit for customer premise equipment (CPE) or when using an external CSU (default).

Set C/R to be a one (1) bit if the network requires the T1 internal CSU to be classified as carrier equipment.

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC-6)

This is a method for checking the accuracy of data transmissions when using the ESF format. This method uses a polynomial algorithm based on the content of a super-frame of data. When CRC-6 checking is enabled via DIP switch SW2–4, an alarm will be activated whenever a CRC code (checksum) is received over the ESF data link that does not match the locally calculated code (checksum).

Yellow Alarm During ANSI Messages On The Facility Data Link

The facility data link is available for reporting transmission performance information once a second. Normally, these transmissions are inhibited by yellow alarms. However, you can set DIP switch SW2-5 to allow these transmissions during yellow alarms.

Green B8ZS/COFA LED Definition

The green LED on the DXPT1 board’s edge-panel labeled “B8ZS/COFA” indicates either that B8ZS code words are being received or that a change of frame alignment (COFA) occurred during the last synchronization by the external T1 source or carrier equipment. You can determine which condition you want reported by how you set

DIP switch SW2–6. The default setting is for “COFA” reporting.

8 – Setting The T1/PRI Switches

Installing And Programming The DXPRI Card

SW2 DIP

Switch

Number

1 (top)

2

3

4

5

6

7,8

Switch Position

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0 (default)

1

0,0 (default)

0,1

1,0

1,1

Function


reserved reserved

CSU ID (C/R) BIT (ESF MODE)

C/R bit = 0 designates customer premise equipment (CPE)

C/R bit = 1 designates carrier equipment


reserved reserved

CRC (CYCLIC REDUNDANCY CHECK) disabled enabled

FDL YELLOW ALARM DURING ANSI MESSAGES disabled enabled

B8ZS/COFA LED DEFINITION

COFA (change of frame alignment)

B8ZS detect

MANUAL loop back REQUEST no loop back local loop back request remote loop back request payload loop back request

IMI89–255

Setting The T1/PRI Switches – 9



Whenever you install one or more T1/PRI boards, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source, you must install one synchronization card (DXOPT–SYN) on the services board using the following procedure.

NOTE: Whenever you install one or more T1/PRI boards, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source, you must install one synchronization card (DXOPT–SYN) on the services board. When you connect the system to central office (CO) lines, you must include a synchronization card, and the CO signalling must control the DXP Plus.

1. Switch off the DXP Plus power supply, disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply


AC or earth ground



CAUTION

Do not remove or install the services board while the DXP Plus is powered-on or severe system problems may occur.

4. Locate the services board, loosen the retaining screws, remove it from the main cabinet, place it in a static protection bag, and transport it to the static-safe work area.

5. At the static-safe work area, with your wrist strap in place, remove the services board and the DXOPT–SYN card (if used) from their static protection bags.

6. Refer to the illustration, and install the DXOPT–SYN card at the top position on the services board with the supplied hardware. (Actually, you can use any of the three positions; however, other non-related option cards require installation in the lower positions so it is best to leave these positions open for those other uses.).

7. Use the method detailed in the paragraph titled, Configuring The Services And Interface Boards, to set the strapping switches on the services board. If you wish, refer to step 8 for details, and transport the board assembly to the cabinet installation site before you set the strapping switches.

8. Place the services board with the newly installed DXOPT–SYN card into a static protection bag and transport the assembly back to the main cabinet.

10 – Installing The Synchronization Card On The Services Board


PLUS008

IMI89–255

Synchronization Board

Services Board


Installing The Synchronization Card On The Services Board – 11


Configuring The Services and Interface Boards

The DXP Plus extracts clocking information from the central office (CO) that supplies the ISDN–PRI lines, and routes this information to the DXOPT–SYN card. The sync card uses this clocking information to derive the synchronizing signal for the T1/PRI board’s transmit clock signal. Therefore, the T1/PRI board’s transmit clock is slaved to the CO supplying the ISDN–PRI lines. If there is only one CO supplier, that source is the primary clock source; however, if you are using two different suppliers, use the more reliable supplier as the primary source and the other supplier as the secondary source.

You must designate one T1/PRI board as the primary board. Choose this board from among those boards that interface the ISDN–PRI lines supplied by the primary CO supplier. Designate the primary board by placing straps on the services board and by setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface boards.

If your system has only one CO supplier, you do not need to designate a secondary board; however, if the system has a second CO service supplier, you must designate one T1/PRI board as the secondary board. Choose this board from among those boards that interface with the secondary CO supplier. Designate the secondary board by placing straps on the services board or by setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface boards.

If you designate primary and secondary boards to the system even though there is only one CO clock source, the

DXOPT–SYN card functions as though it is receiving two clock signals and lights both PRI and SEC LEDs on the front edge of the card.

12 – Configuring The Services and Interface Boards


Summarizing The Services Board And Expansion Interface Board Strapping

DXPT1 Cabinet Location

Services Board Strap

PRIMARY or SECONDARY*

Expansion Cabinet Interface Board

Switch Setting SWA or SWB**

Main –UNV1

Main–UNV2

Main–UNV3

Main–UNV4

Main–UNV5

Main–UNV6

Main–UNV7

Main–UNV8

Main–UNV9

Upper Expansion–UNV1











Lower Expansion–UNV1

Lower Expansion UNV2


I

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

J or K

L or M

L or M

L or M

Not Applicable

4

5

6

1

2

3

7

8

9

10

11

1

2

3




L or M

L or M

L or M

4

5

6





L or M

L or M

L or M

L or M

7

8

9

10

* Strap PRIMARY block for primary DXPT1 and/or strap SECONDARY block for secondary DXPT1.

** Switches A and B do not designate primary or secondary—they designate the first and second DXPT1 boards installed in an expansion cabinet.

Configuring The Services and Interface Boards – 13


Setting The Services Board And Expansion Interface Board Strapping

Configure the services and interface boards by performing the steps in the following process.


AC or earth ground


2. Remove the services board assembly from the static protection bag.

3. Identify the main cabinet board slots where you will install the T1/PRI boards, and the primary and secondary

(if available) CO line supplier. With this knowledge, designate one T1/PRI board as primary and another as secondary by placing straps on the services board.

(a) If you install one T1/PRI board in the main cabinet, you must strap one pin-pair (A–I) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block. This strap designates the main cabinet slot where you installed the

T1/PRI board.

Example: If you install a T1/PRI board in universal slot two in the main cabinet, you must strap pin-pair

B on the PRIMARY strap block .

(b) If you install two or more T1/PRI boards in the main cabinet, you must designate one board as the primary board and another as the secondary board. After you have made these designations, you must strap one pin-pair (A–I) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block and one pin-pair (A–I) on its

SECONDARY strap block to designate the main cabinet slots where you have installed the primary and secondary boards. This action designates the primary clock source for the DXOPT–SYN card.

Example: If you install two T1/PRI boards in universal slots two and three in the main cabinet and you designate these boards primary and secondary respectively, you must strap pin-pair B on the PRIMARY strap block and strap pin-pair C on the SECONDARY strap block.



4. Identify the expansion cabinet slots where you will install the T1/PRI boards and the primary and secondary

(if available) CO line supplier. With this knowledge, designate one T1/PRI board as primary and another as secondary by placing straps on the services board and setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface board.

(a) If you install one T1/PRI board in an expansion cabinet, you must strap one pin-pair (J–M) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block. This strap designates the expansion cabinet where you have installed the board. You must also close a DIP switch in switch bank A on the expansion cabinet’s interface board to designate the expansion cabinet slot where you installed the T1/PRI board.

Example: If you install the T1/PRI board in universal slot 2 of the upper expansion cabinet, strap pin-pair

J on the PRIMARY strap block, and close SWA–2 on the upper expansion cabinet’s interface board.

(b) If you install two or more T1/PRI boards in an expansion cabinet, you must designate one board as the primary board and another as the secondary board. After you have made these designations, you must strap one pin-pair (J–M) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block and one pin-pair (J–M) on its

SECONDARY strap block to designate the expansion cabinet where you have installed the primary and secondary boards. You must also close a DIP switch on switch bank A and another on switch bank B on the expansion cabinet’s interface board to designate the expansion cabinet slots where you installed the primary and secondary T1/PRI boards. Do this same procedure if you use both expansion cabinets.

Example: If you install two T1/PRI boards in universal slots two and three in the upper expansion cabinet and you designate these boards primary and secondary respectively, you must strap pin-pair J on the

PRIMARY strap block and strap pin-pair K on the SECONDARY strap block. You also must close

SWA–2 and SWB–3 on the upper expansion cabinet’s interface board.

5. If the system requires T1/PRI boards in both main and expansion cabinets, identify the cabinet slots where you will install the T1/PRI boards and the primary and secondary (if available) CO line supplier. With this knowledge, designate any one T1/PRI board as primary and any other as secondary by placing straps on the services board and setting DIP switches on the expansion cabinet interface board.

You must either strap one pin-pair (A–M) on the services board’s PRIMARY strap block or strap one pin-pair

(A–M) on its SECONDARY strap block. The T1/PRI board designation of primary or secondary and the cabinet you use for its installation determines which services board pin-pair you use. You must also close a

DIP switch (SWA or SWB, 1–11) on the appropriate expansion cabinet’s interface board to designate the expansion cabinet slot where you installed the opposite T1/PRI board.

Example: If you designate the T1/PRI board that you install in universal slot 2 of the main cabinet as the primary board, strap pin-pair B on the services board PRIMARY strap block. If you designate the T1/PRI board that you install in universal slot 2 in the upper expansion slot as the secondary board, strap pin-pair J on the services board SECONDARY strap block, and close SWA–2 on the upper expansion cabinet’s interface board.


IMI89–255

Services Board


PLUS009

Strapping

Pairs

Upper

Cabinet

Lower

Cabinet

I

H

J

K

L

M

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

J6

J7

Primary Clock

Strapping Block

Secondary Clock

Strapping Block

Locating The Services Board Strapping Blocks



SWA

SWB

Closed

Switch A

Expansion

Cabinet

Slot Locations

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

Open

Closed

Switch B

Expansion

Cabinet

Slot Locations

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

Open

Note: SWA-12 and SWB-12 are not used on Interface 2 (upper cabinet). SWA-11/12 and SWB-11/12 are not used on Interface 3 (lower cabinet).

PLUS010

SWA and SWB switches not in use must be in "off"

(open) position

Expansion Cabinet

Interface Board

Locating The Interface Board DIP Switches



Installing Circuit Boards

CAUTION

Circuit boards are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge, and you must keep this fact

in mind as you handle the circuit boards. Refer to the Comdial publication IMI01-005, Handling Of






ESD Protective

Mat

ESD Protective

Worksurface

Static

Wrist

Strap

Static 2

Common Point Ground

Typical Earth

Ground

ESD Protective

Mat

18 – Installing Circuit Boards



PLUS034

Backboard

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Static Discharge

Wrist Stap

Conductive

Mat 1 Meg Ohm

Resister

Earth

Ground


Installing Circuit Boards – 19


Installing The T1/PRI Line Board

1. Normally you should disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the main cabinet power supply; however, when necessary, you can install a T1/PRI board in an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the pre-charge port on the power supply. During step 6, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the pre-charge jack on the line board.


AC or earth ground



4. Each board is supplied in a static protection bag for safe keeping. When you are ready to install the board, remove it from its static protection bag.

5. Locate the proper board slot. On DXP Plus systems the T1/PRI board connects to any universal slot.

NOTE: On DXP Plus systems, do not install a T1/PRI board at the right-most board slot in the second (or lower) expansion cabinet. The system reserves this slot for internal use.

6. If you are installing the board in an operating system, connect the free end of the pre-charge cord that you installed in step 1 to the pre-charge jack on the line board.

7. Orient the board with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage, and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane. If you connected a handset cord between the pre-charge port on DXP Plus power supply and the jack on board (as directed in step 6), disconnect it after installing board.

CAUTION



8. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all boards are installed.


10. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the circuit boards to the board cage. Do not neglect this step!

It is important because it helps in providing a protective ground condition for the board thus ensuring RFI

(radio frequency interference) and lightning protection.

NOTE: If you ever find it necessary to field-install a DXPRI card on a T1 board, refer to the paragraph titled,

Up-grading Your DPT1 Board For ISDN–PRI Support, that is located at the end of this publication.

20 – Installing The T1/PRI Line Board


Pre-charge jack

PLUS011A

IMI89–255


1 - 11

Pre-charge cable for installation during power up

Pre-charge jack

Pre-charge jack


1 - 9

Connect board to any universal board slot

Pre-charge jack


1 - 10

DO NOT install boards in last slot on right in lower expansion cabinet.

Installing The DXPT1 Board In The DXP Plus Cabinet

Static discharge wrist strap

Installing The T1/PRI Line Board – 21



1. With your static discharge wrist strap still properly installed, install the services board in the main cabinet.

2. If the installation includes a DXOPT–SYN card, make sure the lower (larger) slide switch on the front edge of the card is in the up AUTO position. Leave the upper (smaller) switch in either position as it has no effect when the automatic mode is selected.

3. Orient the services board assembly with its top and bottom guides in main cabinet board cage, and press the board firmly until its board edge connection properly mates with the connector on cabinet’s backplane.

CAUTION



5. Install and tighten the supplied screws to secure the board assembly to the board cage.

6. If applicable, plug the power cable from the optional external battery assembly into the DXP power supply.

7. Connect the AC power cord to the AC wall outlet and turn the power switch on. If no alarms are on (red

LEDs), and at least one of the green PRI or SEC LEDs is lit, replace the cabinet’s front panel; otherwise, troubleshoot the installation for errors.

22 – Installing The Services Board Assembly


PRI

LED

SEC

LED

AUTO

MANUAL

SWITCH

(Set to AUTO

Position)

OPBD1

STATUS

ON = OK

PRI

SEC

UNLOCKED

PRI

SEC

DXOPT

SYN

AUTO

MAN

MANUAL

OPBD2

MAIN

CABINET

BATTERY

OUT

OPBD3

PAGE

BGM

MOH

RELAY 1

RELAY 2

RELAY 3

RELAY 4

COMDIAL

PLUS006

Services Board

Static Discharge

Wrist Strap


Installing The Services Board Assembly – 23


Connecting The ISDN–PRI Line To The System

Terminate the end of the ISDN–PRI line with a miniature 8-pin modular plug, and plug it into the main jack on the front edge of the T1/PRI board.

The T1/PRI board contains a built-in CSU that protects the DXP Plus from voltage surges, provides transmission drive up to 6,000 feet, and performs diagnostic tests for the network. Therefore, a customer-supplied CSU is not necessary unless your customer requires this addition.

If a direct connection to a repeater is within a few hundred feet, the transmit signal from the T1/PRI board may overdrive the repeater. Repeaters normally operate best with -7.5 to -23 dB input signals. Arrange LIU switches 2,

3, and 4 to set the transmit signal level (0 dB is default).

IMPORTANT CAUTION

To help ensure that external over-voltage surges do not damage the system, Comdial advisors suggest that you install a properly-grounded gas discharge tube or a similar primary protection device on the T1 trunk where it enters the building. If the site includes a network interface box, verify that there is standard lightning protection installed externally to the box on its network side. Primary protection where the cable enters the building is necessary to prevent a fire hazard inside the building.

Detailing the Cable Requirements

Normally, the ISDN–PRI connection to a central office is via a network interface box (smart jack). The box is usually small with an 8-pin modular telephone jack for connecting to the customer premise T1 equipment. For short lengths of approximately 200 feet or less, use a standard telephone cable with an 8-pin modular plug for connection to the T1/PRI board. Make straight-through connections for pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 when using these plugs on both ends of the cable.

When spanning distances greater than 200 feet, use a low-capacitance cable (data-grade cable) having two twisted, solid-conductor wire pairs with shielding. The type of cable with metal shielding covering each twisted pair provides the best immunity from electrical interference. Only connect the shielding to earth ground at one end of the cable—do not ground the shielding at the other end of the cable.

24 – Connecting The ISDN–PRI Line To The System


Front View of Main Connector

On DXPT1 Board

6

7

4

5

8

2

3

1 R1

T1

R

T

C1

Receive

C1

Transmit

T1003A

Connecting The ISDN–PRI Line To the T1/PRI Board

Connecting The ISDN–PRI Line To The System – 25


Programming The System For ISDN–PRI Application

To arrange the DXP Plus system for ISDN–PRI operation, you must take the following programming actions:

•

Use Board Configuration programming to program the ISDN service features.

•

Use Line programming to make every ISDN line a PRI B Channel line type and make the DID/DNIS programming choices.

•

Use Line Group programming to group together the lines that correspond to the T1/PRI channels.

•

Use Station programming menu to program the specific ISDN requirements in addition to the other station programming needs.

•

Use Button Mapping programming to map a restrict button on the ISDN station.

•

Use Features Numbering to add dialing codes for two ISDN-specific features.

Board Configuration

When you add a T1/PRI board in a common equipment cabinet board slot, that slot becomes programmable, and you can make several programming choices that affect ISDN–PRI service.

Protocol—With the Protocol feature, match the software to the central office (CO) switch type. The switch types that the software supports include the following items:

4ESS (AT&T* 4ESS switch protocol)

5ESS (AT&T* 5ESS switch protocol)

DMS100 (Northern Telecom** DMS100 switch protocol)

* Lucent Technologies, Murray Hill, NJ 07974

**Northern Telecom Limited, Richardson TX 75082

Default Number—This feature allows you to select a default value for the Calling Number ID. The system uses this number to identify the calling party in the following cases: when you use the Calling Number ID Mode feature to specify board level identification, when you do not program a calling number identification for a station

(see Station Programming for details), and when the call is a line-to-line call through the system.

Calling Number ID Mode—This feature allows you to set calling number identification at either a board level or a station level. The selections include the following choices:

Default Number (selects board level identification such as the company’s main number)

Station Number (selects station level identification—requires that you program the Outbound

Calling Number ID and Station ID features in Station Programming)

Default With Station ID (future feature—selects board level identification for the calling number ID plus the station ID if available.)

NFAS Membership Mode—Use this feature to specify a board’s role in a NFAS group.

Non-Member (specifies independent, stand-alone DXPT1–PRI board)

Member (specifies DXPT1–NFAS board with D-channel signalling provided by another board)

Primary (specifies DXPT1–PRI board that provides D-channel signalling for the NFAS group)

NOTE: When you are using Visual Man-Machine Interface (VMMI) to program, the system automatically applies the Member setting where appropriate.

26 – Programming The System For ISDN–PRI Application


Primary D-Channel Board—Designate the board that provides the D-channel signalling for a NFAS group with this programming feature. Make the same designation for every board in a NFAS group including the primary board.

NOTE: When you are using Visual Man-Machine Interface (VMMI) to program, the system automatically applies the Primary D-Channel Board setting where appropriate.

Interface Number—If you select any item except non-member for the NFAS membership mode, you must enter the CO-supplied group interface number for each board in a NFAS membership group

NFAS Group Members—If the board that you are programming, is the controlling board in a NFAS group, use this feature to designate the controlled NFAS members in the group. The list can include up to four controlled members but must not include the primary or controlling board.

NOTE: When you are using Visual Man-Machine Interface (VMMI) to program, select NFAS Group Members from a list of NFAS boards that are not assigned to any other group.

To understand how to program a NFAS group list, consider the example that follows below.

Assume the following parameters:

· a CO has a DMS 100 switch that provides your system with five T1 circuits configured for NFAS service,

· the CO representatives identify each circuit and specify interface numbers as 0 through 4 with interface number 0 providing the D-channel for signalling,

· you’ve connected the T1/PRI circuits to boards five through nine in ascending slot order,

· the system requires station level calling party identification and that the main number is 804–555–1234.

For these parameters, you must program the boards to match the chart detailed below.

Logical Board

Number

Board Type

5

DXPT1–PRI

Protocol DMS 100

Default Number

Calling Number ID

Mode

NFAS

Membership Mode

Primary

D-Channel Board

Interface Number

NFAS Group

Members

8045551234

Station Number

Primary

5

0

6, 7, 8, and 9

5

1

6 7 8 9

DXPT1–NFAS DXPT1–NFAS DXPT1–NFAS DXPT1–NFAS

5

2

5

3

5

4

Programming The System For ISDN–PRI Application – 27


Line Programming

Conditioning a line port as PRI B Channel.

When you plan for a line to provide ISDN–PRI service, you must program it to be a PRI B Channel line. The system automatically defaults to this programming setting for any lines that you assign to a T1/PRI board. With the line conditioned to be a PRI B Channel line, you must set the DID/DNIS parameters for the line.

Making The DID/DNIS Programming Choices

The common carrier supplies DNIS information as DTMF digits. When the DNIS feature is combined with the

Automatic Number identification (ANI) feature, the common carrier delimits the ANI information from the DNIS routing information with the asterisk (✳) tone so that the system can process each portion properly.

The system uses information that you program in the DID/DNIS translation table to route the call to the proper intercom number. The system also sends the called number information to the SMDR/SMDA line report and makes the information available to devices that are connected to the Open Architecture Interface (OAI).

As a single service, if the call routes to an LCD speakerphone, the speakerphone’s display shows the name that you programmed in the DID/DNIS translation table. If you have programmed no name there, the display shows the DNIS/DID block name that you assigned to the DID/DNIS block. If you have programmed no name there, the display shows the processed DNIS digits. (As a DNIS/ANI combined service, the display shows the processed

ANI digits.)

DID/DNIS Block Name—Choose a 7-character name to associate with each DID/DNIS block. End the

DID/DNIS block name with a space if you desire a blank space between the name and the CO digits when they show on an LCD speakerphone’s display. Also, the number of CO digits that will show in the display is dependent on the length of the DID/DNIS block name.

.

End the DID/DNIS block name with a space if you desire a blank space between the name and the CO digits when they show on an LCD speakerphone’s display. Also, the number of CO digits that will show in the display is dependent on the length of the DID/DNIS block name.

Expected CO Digits—Type quantity (0–7) of digits and press ENTER.

Obtain a block of numbers for use from the CO. The system supports a maximum of 400 numbers (for example, 555–1000 through 555–1399). You can have a maximum of four DID blocks with each DID block using its own name, signalling protocol, digit addressing method and number of digits needed to avoid numbering conflicts. As a default, the system assigns all DID lines to block one. A DID block represents a group of lines that the system will use to receive calls for one or more CO directory number blocks.

You will derive maximum user convenience if you choose the CO block to match the intercom numbers that you have assigned to the system. (For example, if your intercom numbers are 1000 - 1399, they would match the sample CO block.)

Determine the quantity of unique digits in the string that you expect to receive from the CO. The number of digits expected should be large enough to avoid numbering conflicts within a DID block and provide future growth. In the case of the CO block mentioned above, the quantity of unique digits is three, which covers 1000 through 1399. If the CO block was 555–1100 through 555–1192, the string quantity would be two, which covers 00 through 480.

ANI Delivery—Press SPACE bar for Yes or No and press ENTER.

Enable or disable the system to process ANI information that is delivered by the long distance common carrier as a T1 feature on dial 800 and dial 900 lines.

Information Digits—This option does not apply to T1/PRI. Be sure it remains disabled.



DISA Voice Options—Type DVA message identification number (1–4) and press ENTER.

Use the DISA Voice Options 1 through 4 to select digital voice announce (DVA) message levels. For example, selecting DISA voice option 2 will cause welcome greeting 2, day main menu 2, night main menu 2, recall no answer 2, and recall busy 2 prompts to play whenever a DISA-configured DID line is covered by DVA.

Alternate Routing—Type intercom number (up to four digits) for station to handle misdialed calls.

Use this procedure to select an attendant station to serve as an alternate routing station. The system will route DID calls to this station if it cannot find the digits it receives from the CO in the translation table.

The system will ring this station with a distinctive ring tone or pattern that you program. If you do not select an attendant station with this procedure, the system routes the call to the dial 0 station. If the dial 0 station is not available, the system returns a reorder tone to the caller.

Ring Code—Type code (1–8) to specify the ringing pattern for calls to the alternate station.

CFOS Enable—Press SPACE bar for choice and press ENTER.

Use this selection to enable Call Forward Outside System for this DID line block. CFOS allows the system to forward incoming or transferred line calls to telephone numbers that are outside the system.

NOTE: If you save the changes and you have changed the expected digits value, additional prompts may appear.

Configuring The DID/DNIS Translation Tables

When you initialize a translation table, you must first enter the string of CO digits that you obtain from the telephone company. Then you must enter the intercom number that you want to match with the first CO digit sequence in the string. With this, the system automatically matches the remainder of the CO digit string to consecutive intercom numbers beginning with the one that you entered. You can edit the translation table by selecting the item number for each entry and making the changes that you deem necessary. The translation table includes the following listed items:

CO Digit String : This is the actual string of digits expected from the CO. Within a table, each CO digit sequence in the string must be unique. While each CO digit sequence must have an assigned extension number, you can assign the same extension number to several CO digit sequences if you wish.

Name : As an option, you can enter a seven character name for each CO digit sequence in the string. If you assign a name, the system will use it for LCD display during signalling.

Day Number: This personal or group intercom number is the one that the system will ring when a DID/DNIS call arrives through the matching CO digit sequence during normal or daytime operations. DID/DNIS will not support Delay Ring, Day 1 ring, or Day 2 ring modes.

Night Number: As an option, you can assign a personal or group intercom number that the system can ring when a DID/DNIS call arrives through the matching CO digit sequence during night transfer (of ringing) operations.

Ring Code: As an option you can choose one of eight distinctive ringing codes for each CO digit sequence in the string. Remember, the proprietary analog telephones provide only four distinctive ring possibilities.



Line Group Programming (For ISDN–PRI Service)

When you provide ISDN–PRI service to system stations through a T1/PRI connection to the central office (CO), you should do so through line group access rather than individual line connections. Remember, one T1/PRI connection to the system yields 23 channels for communications to and from the stations (24 channels for

DXPT1–NFAS boards). While these channels correspond to line ports within the system, line designations such as Line 1, Line 2 and so forth are meaningless for the T1 board’s CO connection designation. When the T1/PRI board is called upon to pass an incoming or outgoing call between a station and the CO, it can do so through any of the available channels. Having the system choose the channel is the most efficient method for call completion.

To best effect this, program the line ports that correspond to the 23 voice channels (plus 24 voice channels for each DXPT1–NFAS board controlled by the D channel) into one line group, and assign that line group to the stations that are to have ISDN–PRI service.

During operation, the system searches for an idle line in the line group in the same order that you program them using this procedure.

Station Programming

In addition to the many other features that you can assign to a station, there are several features that are specific to

ISDN–PRI service.

Signal Type

The Signal Type feature selects the information transfer capability that the system requests during call setup for a specific station port. The signal types that you can select include the following items:

Speech—digitized speech only–allows analog transmission, echo cancellation, and time-assigned speech interpolation, (suitable for speech only)

3.1 Khz Audio—3.1 Khz digitized audio–allows analog transmission but does not allow speech processing (suitable for modems),

56 Kbps Digital—56 Kbps digital data rate adapted to 64 Kbps (future feature),

Restricted Digital—64 Kbps digital data that is restricted so that there is no 8-bit zero pattern allowed in any time slot (future feature),

Unrestricted Digital—64 Kbps digital data with no restriction on bit pattern (future feature).

Outbound Calling Number ID

The Outbound Calling Number ID feature allows you to choose the caller ID number that will identify the calling station to a distant party. Usually you should set this feature if you specify station level identification as the

Calling Number ID Mode in Board Configuration Programming unless you want the default number to go out instead (for example, for a shared telephone in a common area).



Station ID (future feature)

The system can transmit a Station ID using ISDN display and/or sub-address messages. The system transmits the station ID when you choose either station number or default with station ID in Board Configuration

Programming. This feature, when supported by the central office equipment, includes a station’s full name or extension number as additional caller ID information. You can choose three different ID types:

None—no station ID information supplied for this station,

Extension—station’s extension number supplied,

Full Name—station’s full name field supplied.

Button Mapping

When you assign station level outbound calling number ID to a station through Station Programming, it is a good practice to also map a RESTR (restrict) button on the station. By pressing the RESTR button, the station user can block the outbound calling number ID whenever needed. Once enabled, the restriction remains in effect until deactivated.

Remember, you can assign feature functions at a first level or at a second level at each button. If a function requires status light feedback, assign that function to the first level because the system does not provide status light feedback to buttons at the second level (press CONTROL N to display the second level).

Feature Numbering

Dialing codes for user features are flexible so that you can renumber them. This may be necessary if site requirements dictate that personal or group intercom numbers fall within a certain block or sequence. Since new number assignments can not conflict with existing numbers, the system provides a block of unassigned numbers that you can use for renumbering. At default, the system assigns blocks of numbers in the following ranges:

1001–1480 = personal intercoms,

4001–4480, 5000–5039 = group intercoms,

5040–5999 = unassigned,

600—899, ✴ , # = feature codes

9 = line group 1

There are two features used with ISDN–PRI service that have no defaulted dialing code. Use this procedure to assign dialing codes to these following features:

Signal Type—By providing a dialing code, you provide users with the ability to select the station’s signal type.

For example, a modem might dial the feature code for 3.1 Khz audio prior to making a data call and then return the station to speech after the data call is complete.

Restrict Calling Number ID—By providing this code, you give users the ability to block outgoing Calling

Number ID information. Even though they block the information with this code, the system still transmits the information but it tags it as restricted. This restriction tag prevents the called party from receiving the ID data unless they are an emergency services provider (such as 911) or are paying for the call (such as a 1–800 number provider). Once enabled, the restriction remains in effect until deactivated.

CAUTION

If a number conflict exists, the system will prompt you to remove the conflict. Before responding to this prompt with a y (yes), be sure that doing so will not disturb other programmed features that depend upon the removed extension number. It is possible to create a situation where you must make several renumbering changes to completely resolve a number conflict.



Understanding The T1/PRI Alarms And Indicators

Most of the T1 alarms and indicators (LEDs) are located on the front-edge panel of the T1/PRI board, while several are located on the front edge of the DXOPT-SYN card. The following sections discuss the alarms and indicators.

NOTE: Red /Yellow LEDs, when lit, indicate errors or non-standard configuration for normal operation.

T1/PRI Board Indicators

Red Alarm (red LED) When this LED indicator is lit, the system cannot establish communications with the network.

Yellow Alarm (yellow LED) The yellow alarm is lit whenever the far end has lost synchronization to its incoming signal. This alarm indicates a transmit problem..

Sync Alarm (red LED) This LED (labeled SYNC LOSS), when lit, indicates that the frame bit in the received data cannot be found. this alarm indicates a receive problem.

Signal Alarm (red LED)

Blue Alarm (red LED)

The signal alarm (labeled SIG LOSS) turns on to indicate that the DXP Plus has lost its incoming signal. This alarm indicates a receive problem.

When this alarm indicator is lit, the alarm indication signal (AIS) consisting of all one (1) bits is being received to indicate that the far end has lost its received signal. The purpose of this signal is to maintain the system clocks during a link failure. This alarm indicates a transmit problem.

Bipolar Alarm (red LED) The system converts the digital bit stream in T1/PRI communications to a bipolar format through a process called alternate mark inversion (AMI). The voltage polarity of the ones pulses (marks) alternates between plus and minus with a zero

(space) represented by no pulse. A bipolar violation occurs whenever two successive pulses are of the same polarity. This alarm LED indicates a bipolar violation (BPV) has occurred. It is important to note that BPV errors are not passed through regeneration points. This alarm indicates a receive problem.

Cyclic Redundancy

Check (red LED) The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) indicator turns on whenever there is a discrepancy in the check sum received for an incoming frame from the originating system and the locally calculated check sum. This discrepancy indicates a data error in the received frame. The CRC is enabled by DIP switch

SW2-4. This light indicates a receive problem.

Slip (red LED) This indicator is turned on whenever a frame slip is detected. This is caused by the transmit clock not being synchronized with the receive clock. This light indicates a synchronization problem.

Unlock (red LED) The transmit frequency (1.544 Mhz) is not locked with the receive clock when this indicator is lit.

B8ZS)/COFA (green LED) This is a dual-purpose indicator. Depending on how you set DIP switch SW2–6, this indicator reports either a change of frame alignment (COFA) at re-synchronization time (default setting) or bipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS) code words detected in the received data.

RLB, LLB, and

PAYL (red LEDs) Whenever a loop back routine is active, either the remote loop back (RLB), local loop back (LLB), or payback loop back (PAYL) mode (selected by DIP switches

SW2-7 and SW2-8) is indicated by the appropriate LED being lit.

32 – Understanding The T1/PRI Alarms And Indicators


DXOPT–SYN Board Indicators

PRI and SEC (green LEDs) The PRI and SEC LEDs on the DXOPT-SYN card light to indicate where the receive clock reference is originating from—the primary or secondary DXPT1 board location. When two or more DXPT1 boards are installed, you make the primary and secondary assignments via jumpers on the the DXAUX board. If only one DXPT1 board is installed, you can set the jumpers so that both LEDs will light.

UNLOCKED (red LED) When lit, the Unlocked LED indicates either that the straps on the Auxiliary board are set incorrectly, that the DXOPT-SYN card is defective, that the receive frequency is out of tolerance (1.544 Mhz

±

200 Hz), or that no valid ISDN–PRI line is connected..

MANUAL (red LED) This LED, when lit, indicates that the manual mode has been selected via the

AUTO/MANUAL mode switch on the DXOPT-SYN card. When you select the manual mode (normally for maintenance/troubleshooting ), you can select either the primary or secondary timing reference by setting the PRI/SEC switch on the

DXOPT-SYN card. For normal operation, select the automatic mode. Do not manually force the clock reference to primary or secondary if the appropriate green LED is not lit. This will cause the VCO oscillator to default to its minimum or maximum tolerance, and the T1/PRI board(s) will not frequency-lock.

Understanding The T1/PRI Alarms And Indicators – 33


Viewing The Alarms And Indicators

T1PRI Board (In order From top to bottom)

LED*

l

● l l l l

¤ l l l

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡

¡ l l l

Label

(Status)

Red

Yellow

Sync

SIG

Blue

Bipolar

CRC

SLIP

Unlock

B8ZS/COFA

RLB

LLB

PAYL

Error Or Status Condition When Led Is Lit

Rapid flash = defective board

Steady on = board in wrong slot or board constraints violated

Off with repeated five second blink on = normal operation

(T1 trunk idle)

On with repeated five second blink off = normal operation

(T1 trunk busy)

Communications with network cannot be established

(out-of-service)

Network unable to frame sync to DXP Plus

T1/PRI Board unable to frame sync to Network

Loss of incoming signal

Alarm indication signal (AIS) being received (indicates loss of signal at far end)

Bipolar violation detected

Cyclic redundancy check error in incoming frame if SW2-4 is enabled

Frame slip detected (check DXOPT–SYN settings)

Transmit frequency (1.544 MHz) not locked with receive clock (check DXOPT–SYN settings)

B8ZS/COFA (B8ZS zero suppress mode/change of frame alignment) per SW2-6

Remote loop back active

Local loop back active

Payload loop back active

Signalling message from DXP

Signalling message to DXP

Future feature–T1/PRI in network mode

Not currently defined

Not currently defined

On = D channel (layer 2) is down

D channel message to network

D channel message from network

NOTE: Diagnostic LEDs display PRI layer 2 (D channel) activity when you set the diagnostic switch to 00100000. Other switch settings cause factory test diagnostic codes to be displayed. Refer to the

discussion titled, Configuring

The T1/PRI board.

Synchronization Card

LED*

¡

¡ l l

Label

PRI

MANUAL

Error Or Status Condition When Led Is Lit

Timing reference is present from the T1/PRI primary board

SEC Timing reference is present from the T1/PRI secondary board

UNLOCKED Trouble (defective DXOPT–SYN card or receive frequency out of tolerance (1.544 MHz ± 200 Hz))

The manual mode is active for selecting the T1/PRI reference

NOTE: Red /Yellow LEDs, when lit, indicate errors or non-standard configuration for normal operation. Green

LEDs indicate a normal condition.

*LED color legend l = Red ¤ = Yellow ¡ = Green

34 – Viewing The Alarms And Indicators


Services Board

Primary

Secondary

Unlocked

Status

Manual

DXOPT-SYN

Card

Status

Red

Yellow

Sync

Signal

Blue

Bipolar

CRC

Slip

Unlock

B8ZS/COFA

Remote Loopback

Local Loopback

Payload Loopback

IMI89–255

DXPT1 Board

Diagnostic Switches and LEDs

PLUS007d.cdr

Viewing The Alarms And Indicators

Viewing The Alarms And Indicators – 35


Defining The T1/PRI Terms

Bipolar


Bipolar Violation (or error)



B8ZS (Binary Eight Zero Substitution)

This is a technique to send an all-zero channel without violating the ones-density requirement (a single one in each channel and no more than 15 zeros in a row). Voice transmission will not allow an all zero channel. The system accomplishes B8ZS suppression by inserting a special bipolar error that is interpreted, not as an error, but an all zero channel. The B8ZS feature replaces the all-zero channel two different ways. The feature replaces the all-zero channel with the sequence 000 + - 0 - + if the preceding pulse was a +, and the feature replaces the all-zero channel with the sequence 000 - + 0 + - if the preceding pulse was -. The + represents a positive pulse, the - represents a negative pulse, and 0 represents no pulse. The B8ZS feature is standard with ISDN–PRI service.

CAS (Channel Associated Signalling)

Channel Associated Signalling is a method of signalling where all signalling occurs on the channel being controlled. Examples of CAS are loop start and T1 lines.

CCS (Common Channel Signalling)

Common Channel Signalling is a method of signalling were all signalling for a group of channels occurs on one channel. ISDN is a CCS protocol.

COFA (Change of Frame Alignment)


CPE/Carrier Equipment

The DXPT1 is normally classified as Customer Premise Equipment (CPE). If you use SW2–2 to configure the

DXPT1 board to use the internal CSU, the network may require that the system be classified as Carrier Equipment

(CE). The information packet that the T1/PRI board sends to the network contains a facility data link (FDL) maintenance message that has a bit in it that provides this identification.

CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)

A method of checking errors from the transmission source to the destination. For T1/PRI operation, CRC calculates a checksum depending on the data in a frame. (You must enable CRC with DIP switch SW2-4).

36 – Defining The T1/PRI Terms


DS-0 (Digital Signal-Level Zero)

Digital Signal-Level Zero is a single 64Kbit channel inside a T1/PRI span.

Extended Super-frame Mode (ESF)

Extended Super-frame Mode consists of 24 frames. The frame bit uses only 6 frames leaving 18 bits for other purposes. These spare 18 bits provide 6 bits for CRC information and 12 bits for a facility data link. The facility data link is for maintenance information (as defined by the ANSI T1.403 specification). Like the super-frame mode, the 64–Kbit user channels have 24 frames available for use. ESF is standard with ISDN–PRI service.

FDL (Facility Data Link)

The Facility Data Link is a 4–Kbit communication link from the network to the T1/PRI board. The system sends preemptive messages (for example, yellow alarm and loop back), if needed, and sends error packets to the network once a second. The packets contain alarm history in accordance with the ANSI T1.403 specification.

FDL is standard with ISDN–PRI service.

In band Signalling


Loop-back Local

An operation method that loops the T1/PRI board’s transmit output and receive input paths. The loop back terminates all traffic and halts call processing. While in this idle condition, the system continues to transmit the

T1/PRI transmit stream to the network but it will not answer incoming calls. If the remote T1/PRI equipment is the clock source (primary or secondary) for the DXOPT-SYN card, the remote equipment terminates the reference signal because the network receive circuit is open in local loop back. You initiate local loop back by setting the appropriate SW1 switches. The main purpose of local loop back is to verify the T1/PRI board’s ability to synchronize properly.

Loop-back Payload

The loop back payload feature is an ESF method of loop back which loops the network receive input path to the remote T1/PRI equipment’s transmit output path. This loop back method does not loop the first bit of each frame to allow the T1/PRI board’s facility data link to continue to transmit maintenance information. You can use switches SW2–7 and SW2–8 to manually initiate the payload loop back or you can allow the network to send an

FDL message to initiate or restore the payload loop back. The T1/PRI board goes out-of-service during the loop back time.

Loop-back Remote

The loop back remote feature loops the network receive input path to the remote T1/PRI equipment’s transmit output path. The remote loop back feature terminates all traffic and halt any call processing. You can use the

SW2 switches to manually initiate remote loop back or you can allow the network to remotely initiate the condition. The T1/PRI board’s facility data link, or maintenance channel, can enable and disable remote loop back automatically or you can set SW2–7 on and SW2–8 off to manually enable remote loop back or set both switches off to manually disable the feature.

Defining The T1/PRI Terms – 37


LIU Line Interface Unit

The line interface unit is the interface between the copper wires and the T1/PRI board’s framing circuitry. The

LIU is responsible for separating the 1.544MHZ receive clock from the incoming stream and converting bipolar

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) to 5–volt digital logic. The LIU also supports the automatic line build-out that regulates the transmit level according to the receive strength (LIU-2 switch).

Primary Clock Reference

The straps on the DXSRV–PLS board designate the primary clock reference. Primary clock reference is the first choice reference clock used to synchronize the DXP Plus to the incoming span. If the system looses synchronization, it uses its secondary clock reference. If the secondary clock reference is not available, the

DXOPT-SYN card’s variable clock oscillator (VCO) switches to the fixed oscillator on the DXCPU (cpu) board.

When it does this, slips occur.

Repeater

A repeater is a amplifying device that central office technicians place at approximately one mile intervals along a

T1/PRI circuit to boost the T1/PRI signal. The T1/PRI specifications allow a maximum of 50 repeaters along a communications path.

Slip

This term describes the condition that exists when the transmit 1.544 MHz clock is different from the receive

1.544 MHz clock. When the system collects or looses a frame of information due to the span frequencies being different, the system generates a slip error. Slip does not affect voice transmissions and may not affect modem traffic; however slip does effect digital data traffic. The T1/PRI board does not currently support digital data traffic. Also, at times a central office takes a T1/PRI span out of service if too many slips occur—one or two a day is permissible (the carrier supplier will furnish you with an an exact number if you request that information from them).

38 – Defining The T1/PRI Terms


Knowing The T1/PRI Specifications

IMI89–255

Capacity

Modes

Framing

Channels Allocated

Industry Standards

10 T1/PRI boards

Super-frame, extended super-frame

D4

24

Maximum Output

ANSI T1.403-1989

AT&T PUB 62411

CCITT 0.921

CCITT 0.931

2.4V to 3.6V base to peak, short circuit protection to 120 mA, rms

1.544 Mbps Line Rate

Line Code

Type

Zero Suppression


Impedance

Bipolar AMI

B8ZS

-26 dB or -36 dB selectable

100 Ohms

DXP Loss Insertion

Transmit

Receive

Connector

-6 dB (selectable to 0 and -3 dB per channel)

0 dB

Cable

RJ48C, miniature 8-position, shielded

(per ANSI T1-403, 1989)

Up to 6,000 feet between DXPs, 22 AWG, twisted-pair, no external components

Built-in; CPE or CARRIER selectable CSU Function

Transmit Attenuation

Manual

Automatic

0, -7.5, -15, or -22.5 dB selectable

Default

Input Jitter Tolerance 138 UI @ 1 Hz; 0.4 UI @ 10 KHz—100 KHz

(0 dB line); corner frequency = 6 Hz (attenuates

20 dB per decade above corner)

Surge Protection 1 AMP fuse and transient protection for metallic

>6 volts P-P; Longitudinal (tip—ring and chassis ground) protection 1500 volts minimum.

Elastic Store

Compliance

Two frames, no frame loss when slipping

FCC Part 68/Doc

FCC Part 15

UL-1489/CSA (safety)

USOC = 6.0Y

FIC = 04DU9–1SN

Yellow Alarm Type

Alternating bytes = all zeros and all ones;

(prohibiting ANSI FDL messaging during yellow alarms is selectable)

Clocking

Synchronization

Min. RX Freq. Capture

TX Master Mode Freq.

Slave mode from DXOPT-SYN card on

Auxiliary board

1.544 MHz

±

200 Hz, T1 board;

16.384 MHz

±

2048 Hz, Sync card

1.544 MHz

±

75 Hz

Loop back Modes

Extended Super-frame Mode Local, remote, payload loop back (manual)

FDL ANSI network remote loop back

FDL ANSI network payload loop back

LED Alarms/Errors Status

Red Alarm

Yellow Alarm

Blue Alarm

Loss of receive synchronization

Loss of signal

Bipolar error(s)

CRC errors (ESF)

Slip errors

Phase Lock error

Knowing The T1/PRI Specifications – 39


Up-Grading Your DXPT1 Board For ISDN–PRI Support

Up-grading existing revision B or later DXPT1 boards for ISDN–PRI service consists of adding a DXPRI card to the T1 board, and changing the board’s chip firmware. When you do this, the T1 board/DXPRI card combination with the new firmware becomes a DXPT1–PRI board.

If you add the ISDN–PRI firmware to an existing T1 board but do not install the DXPRI card, you create a NFAS

(Network Facility Associated Signalling) DXPT1–NFAS board. The NFAS boards are slaves to the master

DXPT1–PRI board in multiboard installations.

Installing The DXPRI Card



2. Install your static discharge wrist strap on your bare wrist; adjust it for a snug fit. Be sure that the strap is not isolated by clothing. Connect the wrist strap cord between the wrist strap and an AC or earth ground.


3. Normally you should disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet and disconnect the optional battery back-up assembly from the digital communications system’s main cabinet power supply; however, when necessary, you can remove a DXPT1 board from an operating system. If you must do this, connect one end of a standard telephone handset coil cord to the pre-charge port on the power supply. During step 5, you will connect the other end of this coil cord to the pre-charge jack on the T1 board.


5. Locate the DXPT1 board, and if you are removing the board from an operating system, connect the free end of the pre-charge cord that you installed in step 3 to the pre-charge jack on the line board.

6. Loosen any retaining hardware, use the extractor levers to disconnect the board from the connector on cabinet’s backplane, and slide the board free of the board cage. If you connected a handset cord between the pre-charge port on DXP Plus power supply and the jack on board (as directed in step 4), disconnect it after removing the board.

7. Place the board in a static protection bag for safe keeping, and transport it to a static safe work area.

8. At the static safe work area, with your wrist strap in place, remove the DXPT1 board and the DXPRI card from their static protection bags.

7. Referring to the illustrations on the next page, orient the DXPT1 board and the DXPRI card, and attach them with the supplied hardware.

40 – Up-Grading Your DXPT1 Board For ISDN–PRI Support


Replacing The Firmware

1. With the DXPT1 board still at your static-safe work area and with your static discharge wrist strap on your bare wrist and properly grounded, replace the chip-set firmware with the ISDN–PRI firmware.

2. Locate the current chip firmware (U5 at the upper rear of the board—see the illustration), and note its orientation in its socket.

3. Use a chip extraction tool to lift the chip free from its socket.

4. Remove the replacement chip from its static protection bag and orient it to match the orientation of the chip that you just removed.

5. Press the chip into place in the socket.

CAUTION

Do not bend any of the chip’s pins so that they do not make contact with the socket.

6. Inspect the modified DXPT1 board for proper installation, and return it to its static protection bag.

7. Refer to the paragraph titled, Installing The T1/PRI Line Board, and re-install the modified DXPT1 board in the system.

8. Store your old firmware in a static-safe environment in the event that you may need it in the future.

Firmware

Location

(Chip U5)

DXPT1

Board

DXPRI Card

ISDN2.cdr

Installing The DXPRI Card And ISDN–PRI Firmware

Up-Grading Your DXPT1 Board For ISDN–PRI Support – 41

and

FX Series

Digital Communications Systems

Understanding The

Visual Man-Machine Interface

COMDlA”

Table of Contents

Introducing VMMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

Using the Programming Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

Using

On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

Obtaining a Printout Record.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

Using the Computer Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Determining Your Equipment Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

Connecting a PC to the

Digital Communications System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Connecting a PC to the DXP Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

Connecting a PC to the DXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

Connecting Cabling For FX Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Installing the VMMI Program and Help Software . . . . . . .

, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Loading VMMI With Windows 3.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Loading VMMI With Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Making the Programming Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Using VMMI Software to

Archive and Restore the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

Using VMMI Software to Build a New Database . . . . . . . . . .

10

Up-Grading the System Software on the DXP Plus . . . . . . . . .

Activating System Software on the FX Series . . . . . . . . . . .

Turning On the FX Series System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Completing the FX Series System Start-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . .

Up-Grading The System Software on the DXP . . . . . . . . . . .

11

12

13

14

Converting the DXP Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the RAM Card and Software Card in the DXP . . . . . . . . . .

Master Ciearing The DXP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Restoring the Comverted Database to the DXP . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Translating The DXP Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

1 5

16

20

21

22

Table of Contents

- iii

GCA40-182 Understanding the VMMl

Introducing

VMMI

Using The Programming Screens

VMMI is a Microsoft* Windows based programming method that is menu-driven and allows you to enter choices in dialog boxes. The VMMI programming index is expandable much like the file manager on a computer’s operating system software. As you use your computer mouse to move the screen cursor to the desired location, and double-click the mouse button on a main menu element, it expands to show sub-menus that, in turn, open at a click to show a particular programming area. A double-click on a main element collapses its expanded menu.

VMMI allows you to directly connect to the communications system and program it on-line. Alternately, you can program a database off-line, save it, and down-load it in the communications system at a later date,

When you make programming changes on some of the VMMI menus, note that the program places a +K to the right of a changed item to denote that you have altered the setting from its previous value. Once you click on either the

Apply button or the

Undo Page or

Undo All buttons, the program removes the 4~ and either applies the new value or returns to the original value.

*Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond Washington.

Introducing VMMI - I

Using On-Line Help

A detailed on-line help file accompanies the VMMI programming menus. The menus are context sensitive so that you when you click on the

Help button the system immediately takes you to the appropriate section in the help file. The help files parallel the programming menus. As you open a particular programming menu, the system provides context sensitivity that paths to appropriate technical discussions. As you click on the programming screen’s

Help button, discussion windows open to provide appropriate technical information. These discussion windows may include green-colored text words and phrases that you can click on to expand the technical discussion or to open other related help files.

From the discussion windows, you can click on the Browse, < >, buttons at the top of the window to move forward and backward through other discussion windows. At any time, you can click on the

Contents button to return to the main contents menu. From the contents menu, you can click on a topic to open any

4 discussion window that you wish to read.

The discussion windows provide a

Search button for your use. When you click on the

Search button, the help file opens a subject menu that you can scroll through as you search for a particular topic that you need help with. Once you locate the topic, you can click on it to jump directly to its discussion.

Often, the discussion windows provide additional jump paths that allow you to quickly review related topics. These jump paths may take several forms. They may appear as separate large windows that you can scroll through as you read the information, or they may appear as small windows that appear in the middle of the window that you are currently viewing. When you finish reading the information in the large windows, return to the starting point by clicking on the

Back button as many times as necessary. Exit the small windows by clicking once outside the borders. If you wish to completely leave the help file when you finish using it, do so by clicking on the

Exit button that is located on the button bar.

Obtaining a Printout Record

If you have a printer connected to your computer, you can make a hard copy printout of a programming menu after you make your programming choices. For this, use the tool bar located above the VMMI programming screen. Select the

File drop down menu and then select the

Print option. This action opens a window where you can pick the programming menu that you need and

OK your choice. Alternately, you can click on the printer Icon on the tool bar to open the pick window.

Sometimes you may also want a hard copy of the help file. If so, you can press the

Print button on the help dialog to obtain the printout. You can only print one topic at a time.

2 - Introducing VMMI

Using the Computer Mouse

A mouse is a device that allows you to move a cursor on the screen to specific points for data entry, and to select other menu selections. An arrow image, called the mouse pointer, moves on the screen when you move the mouse. Practice moving the pointer. If you make a menu appear, you can make it disappear by moving the pointer out of the menu and pressing and releasing the left mouse button.

Occasionally the pointer may seem to disappear. Usually, it is just off the visible screen. To make the pointer reappear, move the mouse in a circle a few times. To move the mouse without moving the pointer, lift the mouse. The pointer will not move while the mouse is in the air.

Clicking the Mouse Button

To click the mouse button to select an item, press the left button and immediately release it. By clicking, you can select a menu item, for programming entry or a help file for reading. Sometimes instructions require you to double-click your mouse. Double-clicking is pressing your left mouse button twice in rapid succession.

Dragging the Mouse

Dragging (or moving) a window consists of three steps:

1.

pressing and holding the left mouse button,

2. moving the mouse,

3 . releasing the mouse button.

Dragging allows you to move the position of a window on the screen. You can position help windows on the screen to give yourself a better view.

Determining Your Equipment Needs

Use VMMI to program the digital communications system from a personal computer (PC) that meets the following requirements: l

80386SX-33 processor (minimum requirement-80486SX-33 recommended) l four megabytes of random access memory (minimum requirement), l

3.5inch floppy disk drive, l hard drive with at least 80 megabytes of storage capacity, l available 9-pin or 25pin serial data port (required for communications with DXP system), l mouse that is supported by Microsoft* Windows software (optional but highly recommended for Microsoft

Windows operation), l

VGA color monitor (highly recommended-VGA monochrome acceptable), l

Microsoft Windows, version 3.1 or later, l

VMMI program disk.

** Microsoft Corporation. Redmond, Washington

Introducing VMMI - 3

Understanding the VMMI GCA40-182

Connecting a PC to the Digital Communications System

Connecting a PC to the DXP Plus

Connect the serial data port of the PC to the maintenance port of the DXP Plus central processor (CPU) board. The maintenance port is a dedicated serial data port reserved exclusively for system programming.

The default data format of these serial data ports are shown in the following chart.

Port Type

Maintenance Port

Modem Port

Baud

Rate

9600

2400

Data

Bits

a a

stop

Bits

1

1

Parity

N o n e

N o n e

You can connect the PC remotely through a telephone line to the DXP Plus using customer-supplied modems at both the PC and the DXP Plus common equipment. The DXP Plus includes its own modem that you can connect between the CPU board’s modem port and an outside telephone line.

PLUSW

NOTES:

1. Maximum distance between each ofthe two dedicated serial data ports and its external data equipment is 25 feet.



\

L

Serial Modem Port

6

5

1

3

2

1

\

I

El

6

5

1

:


Modular Jacks






Pin 6 = Fram> Ground

4 - Connecting a PC to the Digital Communications System

,

GCA40-182 Understanding the VMMl

Connecting a PC to the DXP

Connect the serial data port of the PC to either of the serial data ports that the DXP provides on the CPU board. The system designates these modular jacks as RS-232 1 and RS-232 2.

The default data format of the RS-232 1 and RS-232 2 data ports is shown in the following chart.

r

Port Type

B a u d

Rate

Data

Bits stop

Bits

Parity

RS-232 1 9600 8 1 N o n e

RS-232 2 300 7 2 N o n e

If you have used the two CPU-provided serial data ports for connecting other DXP features (such as the PC

Attendant Position and a serial data printer), you can add a communications card to the DXP and connect the programming PC to a serial data port that the card provides. See your DXP System Hardware

Instructions (the Volume I binder) for complete installation details.

You can connect the PC remotely through a telephone line to the DXP using customer-supplied modems at both the PC and the DXP common equipment. The Comdial DXMDM modem is a DXP proprietary modem. With it, you can use either of the CPU board’s serial data ports for connection.

I

RS-232 2

1 I

RS-232 1

I

ID---l

1 I


RS-232 Modular Jacks







Connecting a PC to the Digital Communications System - 5


4

Connecting Cabling for the FX Series

Making the Start-Up Connecfions

Once the telephony portion is operating properly, make the following cable connections: l

Connect a serial data cable between the computer portion’s COMl serial data port and the telephony portion’s

COM 1 or COM 2 serial data port. Be sure that the telephony portion’s serial data port is configured for 9600 baud, eight data bits, one stop bit, and no parity bit when you turn on the system software; however, you can change the baud rate to 19,200 when you use Visual Man-Machine Interface (VMMI) for system database programming.

NOTE: If you use pcANYWHERIP

f

or remote operation of the computer portion, you must use VMMI to select either

COM I or COM 2 as the internal modem’s data pipe port, and you must configure this data

pipe port for

19,200 baud. RTYCTS control, eight data bits, one stop bit, and no parity bit. Of cow-se, the cable connection must match the data pipe port selection.

pc.QVYWHERE is a registered trademark of Symantec Corporation. Cupertino CA

Maintenance Port

- System Software

- VMMI Programming

Connect Computer COMl

To Telephony COMl or COM 2

- pcANYWHERE for

Remote Operation

(Use VMMI to set modem data pipe pipe to COM 1 or COM 2 to match connection or match connection to setting.)

pc-connl .cdr

6 - Connecting a PC to the Digital Communications System

,

GCA40-182 Understanding the VMMI

installing the VMMI Program and Help Software

The VMMI software is your entry to the communications system. Before you can log in to the system, you must first load the VMMI program and help software on your computer’s hard drive. When installing the

VMMI software, your PC need not be connected to the system equipment.

Loading VMMI With Windows 3. I

1 .

2 .

3 .

4.

5 .

6 .

7.

8.

9 .

Turn on your PC and run your Windows software.

Insert the VMMI program disk in your computer’s floppy disk drive.

From the Windows Program Manager screen, select the File pull-down menu.

From the File pull-down menu, select Run.

At the Run window, type Ahetup, and

OK your entry.

The install window gives a default file location to receive the program; however, you can enter a different file location if you wish.

OK the default file location or your new entry.

The install window gives a default location of the VMMI program disk; however, if you have installed the disk in a different drive enter that location.

OK the default location or your new entry. The status window appears on the screen and the program loads automatically.

When the status window shows the install to be complete, OK the install.

The install program creates a program group and a VMMI icon in the Program Manager screen.

Loading VMMI With Windows 95

1 . Turn on your PC and run your Windows software.

2 . Insert the VMMI program disk in your computer’s floppy disk drive.

3 . From the Windows 95 screen, click Start, and then click Run.

4. At the prompt window, type Ahetup, and click

OK.

5 . Add information as required to any additional prompt lines that may appear on your screen.

6 . The install program creates a program group and a VMMI icon in the Start menu under the Programming title.

Installing the VMMI Program and Help Software - 7

Understanding the VMMI

Making the Programming Connection

GCA40-182

4

Once you have loaded the VMMI software and made the necessary connections between the PC and the communications system equipment, you can make the program connection to the system by performing the following procedure.

1 .

Turn in your PC and load Windows.

2 .

Select the VMMI icon and double-click your left mouse button. The computer runs the installed VMMI software

3 .

program

From the VMMI window, select the Switch pull-down menu.

4 .

From the Switch pull-down menu, select Connect to. . .

5 .

From the opened menu, choose either Administrator or Installer and enter the appropriate password. The system defaults all passwords to 1%746*; however, you can customize the passwords as part of VMMI programming if

6 .

7 .

8 .

you wish.

Select the communications port that your PC uses to communicate with the communications system.

If you are operating remotely through a modem, check the modem prompt.

Select the serial data parameters that match the requirements for the system (or for the modem if you are connected remotely through a modem). To speed up the data transfer process, you should use a data speed of 19.2

Kbs (kilobits per second) for the DXP Plus and FX Series, and 9600 bit per second for the DXP. If you plan to operate at this higher data speed, first connect at the default rate, then use the VMMI programming menu to change the data parameters of the system, and finally use the Switch drop-down menu to reconnect at the higher speed.

Note: A data speed of 19.2 Kbs might not operate reliably through modem connections. Plus both modems must support the higher data speed. The DXP and DXP Pl~ls internal modem does not support data speeds above

2400 Kbs at this time.

9 . When you finish making the connection settings, click the CONNECT button to return to the

Switch pull-down menu. the system responds by presenting its serial number at the bottom of the VMMI screen for your reference, and shows an on-line message.

NOTE:

If

the system does not complete the connect procedure, check your cable connections, verify your serial data settings, and repeat the log in procedure.

10. Use the Switch drop-down menu to disconnect from the system, archive or restore a system database, or down-load system software.

8 - Making the Programming Connection


Using VMMI Software to Archive and Restore the Database

You can use the VMMI software to archive and restore the system’s database. To archive and restore data, your PC must be connected to the system.

To archive a database,

1. Turn on your PC and load the Windows software.

2. Select the VMMI program from the Windows menu screen.

3 . From the VMMI window, select the Switch pull-down menu.

4. From the Switch pull-down menu, connect to the system, and return to return to the pull-down menu.

5 . From the Switch pull-down menu, select Archive database.

6. Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and

OK your choice. Since the database can be quite large, you should chose a location on your computer’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the database.

7 . The system automatically archives its database.

To retrieve a database,


2 . Select the VMMI program from the Windows menu screen.

3 . From the VMMI window, select the

Switch pull-down menu,

4 . From the Switch pull-down menu, connect to the system, and return to the pull-down menu.

5 . From the Switch pull-down menu, select Restore database.

6 . Choose the memory storage location that contains an archived database and OK your choice.

7 . The system automatically restores its database.

8 . Reset the system after you restore the database

Using VMMISoftware to Archive and Restore the Database - 9

Understanding the VMMl

Using VMMI Software to Build a New Database

GCA40-182

You can use the VMMI software to build a new database that you can later restore into a communications system. You do not need to connect your PC to the communications system to build a new database.

To

1.

2.

build a new database,

Turn on your PC and load the Windows software.

Select the VMMI program from the Windows menu screen.

3 .

4.

5 .

4 6.

7 .

From the VMMI window, select the File pull-down menu.

From the File pull-down menu, select New.

Choose a destination platform for the new operation to use, and OK your choice. Since the database can be quite large, you should choose your computer’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the database.

Use the VMMI menus and program the database parameters.

Save your results for loading into the system. The system prompts you for the file name at this point.

To load the new database in the system,

1. Connect your PC to the communications system.

2 . Turn on your PC and load the Windows software.


4. From the VMMI window, select the Switch pull-down menu,

5 . From the Switch pull-down menu, connect to the system, and return to the pull-down menu.

6 . From the Switch pull-down menu, select Restore database.

7. Choose the newly created database file and OK your choice.

8 . The system automatically restores the new database.

9 . Reset the system after you restore the database

10 - Using VMMI Software to Build a New Database

,


Up-Grading the System Software on the DXP Plus

The DXP Plus digital communications system includes system software when it ships from the factory. At initial system installation, you do not need to load system software to make the system operational. Should you need to later reload the system software (for software up-grade purposes for example), you can do so using the supplied system software disk. Use Windows or MS-DOS commands to save the disk’s information from your computer’s floppy drive to its hard drive. Having the software on your computer’s hard drive allows the data to load into system memory much quicker than it would from the computer’s floppy disk drive.

To load the system software information, your PC must be connected to the communications system.

1. Turn on your PC and load Windows.

2 . Select the VMMI program from the Windows screen.

3 . From the VMMI window, select the Switch pull-down menu.

4. If you have not previously archived the system database, do so now.

a.

From the

Switch pull-down menu, select

Archive Database.

b . Choose a storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice. Since the database can be quite large, you should chose a location on your computer’s hard drive.

c.

The system will archive its database.

d . Return to the

Switch pull-down menu.

5 . From the

Switch pull-down menu, select the

System software upgrade.

6. The system automatically takes itself out of service and makes a backup of its database.

7. Choose the location where the new software data resides (select disk drive, directory, and file), and OK your choice.

8 . The system loads the software data, reloads its database that it previously backed up, resets itself, places itself back in service.

Up-Grading the System Software on the DXP Plus - 11

Activating System Software on the FX System

Comdial manufacturing technicians load the FX Series system’s operating software. They also load the upgrade software that you use to obtain your magic number. You need the magic number to activate the system operating software. Once you obtain your magic number and enter it in the up-grade software, the system automatically accesses the key through internal software mechanisms.

piizziq

YOLK must obtain your magic number to operate the telephony portion of the FX Series system,

Otherwise, the system will reset itself every hour.

4

Obtain your magic number by following the procedure detailed below:

1.

With the software key installed on the computer’s parallel printer port, locate the software key icon on the main desktop menu and double click on it. If the icon is not available, use the

StarVPrograms/FX Software

Key menu to locate the software key program and double click there. This action opens the update utility.

2. From the update utility, click the Examine Key button. The system responds by showing the key's s&al number and the current magic number of the installed key.

3. Contact Comdial Distributor Services at l-800-669-2663 to order the system software. At the same time you can order any of the following application features that you desire.

- FXSSW-WOl (includes VVP, 5-user wideopen.office and 5-user wideopen.call)

- FXSSW-W02 (includes VVP, 50-user wideopen.office and 25-user wideopen.call)

- FXSSW-W03 (includes VVP, 5-user wideopen.offce and 5-user wideopen.group)

- FXSSW-W04 (includes VVP, 50-user wideopenoffce and 25-user wideopen.group)

4 .

Provide to the Comdial representative the software key’s serial number and the current magic number that you read from the update utility. He or she will respond by providing you with a new magic number and a completion code.

NOTE: This magic number and completion code are unique and applies only to your particular software key.

5 .

Enter this new magic number into the update utility, and then click the Update Key button.

6 . Since you are initially performing this procedure to turn on the operating software for the system’s telephony portion, the system opens the FX Series System Initialization window for further action on your part. See the next paragraph for a discussion of that action.

upArade.cdr


Turning On the FX Series System Software

If the system opens the Initialization window, you must take several additional steps:

1 .

Be sure that you have a serial data cable connected between the computer portion’s COMl serial data port and the telephony portion’s COMl serial data port, and be sure that the telephony port is configured for 9600 baud, eight data bits, and one stop bit.

2.

Click the

I’m ready, Enable the FX Now button. This action enables the FX Series system software. The system returns the update utility window that now shows a completion code value to indicate that the procedure is finished. Verify that the completion code matches the completion code that the Comdial representative provided, and click the

Done button to end the session.

up-2.cdr

up-grad I .cdr

Activating System Software on the FX System - 13

Completing the FX Series System Start-Up Procedure

To complete the getting started process, you must run the Start-Up utility program. Running the Start-Up utility program places the Versatile Voice Processing (VVP) and the pcANYWHERETM applications in the computer’s start-up routine. With these applications in the start-up routine, the system automatically makes them active whenever someone restarts the FX Series system.

To run the Start-Up utility, locate the Start-Up icon on the Windows 95 desktop, and double-click it with your computer mouse.

StartUpi

.Wl.up.C

Once the utility finishes running, you must exit the Windows 95 program, and restart the computer. This action is often referred to as rebooting the computer. When the computer restarts, and after you take care of any password needs, the FX Series system ends its start-up routine by making both VVP and pcANYWHERETM active on the desktop.

14 -Activating System Software on the FX System


Up-Grading the System Software on the DXP

To use VMMI on the DXP system, you must up-grade the DXP software to at least release 10A. Further, to preserve your existing database you must convert it through the PCMMI programming software that is at software release 9A. The software up-grade to release 10A requires that you install a new RAM card

(DXRAM-EXPC) as well as the software memory card (DXPSW-DLRC) on the DXP’s central processor unit. (Once you up-grade your system software to lOA, future up-grades beyond 1OA will only require a new software memory card. The RAM card that you add to up-grade to 10A will support future software revisions.) To ensure that you execute the data base conversion and software up-grade correctly. perform the following detailed operations in the sequence that they appear on the following pages of this publication.

If you need detailed procedures for doing these operations, refer to your DXP System Hurdwxzre Instructions and Programming Instructions and Records (Volume I and Volume II service binders).

Converting the DXP Database

Store the Current DXP Database

Employ a PC with an XMODEM communications program and use the DXP’s embedded MM1 programming method to store the current DXP database to the PC’s hard drive. The saved database can include any or all of the following data: system information, station parameters, line parameters, toll restriction and automatic route selection parameters, and system speed dial numbers but it does not include the SMDAKMDR records. If you need these SMDNSMDR records, you must make a printout of them before you perform the database storage. This is necessary because this save/restore feature does not record the stored records and they will be lost.

Once you store the current database disconnect the PC from the DXP.

Convert fhe Current DXP Database

With your PC disconnected from the DXP, convert the current database to a 10A database.

1. Obtain a copy of revision 9A or later PCMMI programming software and load it on your computer. (Remember, you can always down load the latest PCMMI software from the Comdial Technical Services Bulletin Board by calling l-804-978-2583 or from the Comdial home page on the World Wide Web by connecting at: http:Nwww.comdial.com/ ).

2 . If the stored database is not at software release 9A, use the revision 9A or later PCMMI to convert the current

DXP database to a software release 9A database.

3 . Use the revision 9A PCMMI to down-load and store the software release 9A database to your computer’s hard drive.

4 . Load the new VMMI programming software on your computer, and use it to translate the stored data base to a

10A database. Refer to the paragraph titled Translating The DXP Database for the translation procedure.


GCA40-182

Installing the RAM Card and Software Card in the DXP

Turn off the power to the DXP, and install both the RAM card (DXRAM-EXPC.) and the software memory card (DXPSW-DLRC) on the central processor unit (DXCPU-68K) circuit board of the DXP digital communications system.

Preparing a Static-Safe Work Area.

Electronic circuit boards are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge and must be handled accordingly. Refer to the Comdial publication IMIOl-005, Handling Of Electrostatically Sensitive

Components, for general information. Specific handling precautions are also included in this installation instruction. The expanded memory card (DXRAM-EXPC) and the system software memory card

’ (DXPSW-DLRC) are supplied in static protection bags. Do not open a static protection bag prior to installation time.

When servicing electronic circuit boards, it is a good practice to do so at a static-safe work area prepared ahead of time for this purpose. The illustration details a typical static-safe work area.

16 - Up-Grading the System Software on the DXP


ESD Protective,

3D Protective

Worksurface

Mat

Providing Static Prote%on At The Cabinet Location

/ Common Point Ground

Typical

Ground v

Creating A Static Safe Work Area

+-- ESD Protective

Mat

Up-Grading the System Soft ware on the DXP - 17

,


Installing the Cards in the DXP

1. Loosen the retaining hardware and remove the front panel from the DXP main cabinet.

2 . Turn off the AC power switch, and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Disconnect the cable of the optional battery back-up from the main cabinet power supply.

3 . Place a conductive mat in front of the cabinet area and ground the mat to a good earth ground (the third wire ground of the AC power line is an acceptable grounding point). The grounded conductive mat will provide a safe static electric discharge path.

4 . Install the static discharge wrist strap (supplied with the main cabinet) on your bare wrist; adjust it for a snug fit.

Be sure that the strap is touching bare skin and is not isolated by clothing. Connect the wrist strap cord between the wrist strap and an AC or earth ground.

NOTE: With the common equipment in the installed position, the ground lug on the side of the cabinet is an appropriate grounding point since it should have a heavy ground wire connected between it and a good earth

5 .

6 .

7 .

8 .

9 .

ground.

Locate the DXCPU-68K circuit board, loosen the retaining screws, remove it from the DXP main cabinet, place it in a static protection bag, and transport it to the static-safe work area.

At the static-safe work area, with your wrist strap in place, remove the DXCPU-68K circuit board, the new

DXRAM-EXPC. expansion memory card and the new DXPSW-DLRC software memory card from their static protection bags.

Refer to illustration and remove the currently installed memory cards from the DXCPU-68K board.

Orient the DXCPU-68K board and the new memory cards as shown in the illustration, and attach them with the supplied hardware. (The screws and standoffs between the cards are essential to ensure proper grounding.)

Place the old memory cards in static protection bags and save them for later return for credit. Place the

DXCPU-68K board and newly installed memory cards into a static protection bag and transport back to the DXP main cabinet.

10. With your wrist strap properly grounded, remove the DXCPU-68K circuit board from the static protection bag.

Orient it with the top and bottom guides in the main cabinet board cage, and press it in firmly until the board edge connector properly mates with the backplane connector.

When pressing the DXCPU-68K board into place, press it only at the extractor lever locations.

If yoLl apply pressure at other locations, you may damage the board assembly.

11. Make a final inspection to ensure that the DXCPU-68K circuit board is in the correct slot, oriented correctly and mated properly; then install and tighten the supplied screws to secure it to the board cage.


GCA40-182

Front Panel-+

DXPO22

Understanding the VMMl

- ##4-40 Machine Screw

(Two Places

DXPSW-XXXXX

Circuit Card

DXRAM-XXXXX

Circuit Card

DXCPU

Circuit Board

4--- WI-40 Machine Screw

#4 Lockwasher

’ DXPSW-XXXXX l/4 Hex, #4-40x

M-F Spacer,

.625 Long

Connectors

#4 Lockwasher WA

1 I

I

:.1.: 1(-

!

114 Hex, #4-40

M-F Spacer,

.625 Long

A

I

:..:

I

1

Front --*

Panel L!

I

C

,

I

I

##4-40 Hex Nut (3X) -A

Installing The Memory and Softwag Cards

I DXFLAM-XXXXX

,

Master Clearing the DXP System

1. If you do not master clear the system, it is possible the DXP will not perform properly with the new memory card.

after you have changed or upgraded the software card. When you perform an upgrade, you must execute the following sequence of events exactly as they are stated here:

2 . On the DXPCPU-68K circuit board, set DIP switch 8 to its ON position. This step enables the DXP to perform the master clear and is a required step; otherwise, the software upgrade will not occur and the system will not operate.

3 . Connect the AC power cord to the AC outlet and turn on the AC power switch. At power up, the DXP automatically executes a master clear operation. Observe that the LED indicators on the DXCPU-68K board, the

DXSRV services board, and all installed station and line boards flash in a random pattern during the master clear sequence. After the master clear sequence is complete, the indicators on the DXCPU-68K and DXSRV boards turn on steady and the indicators on the station and line boards wink ON for four seconds and OFF for four seconds.

3 . After power up, set DIP switch 8 to its OFF position.

4 . Press the RESET button on the CPU board to reset the system.

NOTE:The system performs the automatic master clear one time following the initial power up after yoln have up-graded the software. It will not perform an automatic master clear operation again after subsequent power ups. Because of this, you can leave DIP switch 8 ON if you wish. Leaving it ON will ensure that the DXP will always power

LL~ in a master cleared and operational mode after you have pe$ormed a so*are upgrade.

However, by turning DIP switch 8 OFF, YOLL prevent the DXP from becoming operational at power

LLP after yowl have peflormed a software upgrade. This is good because, should you forget to save your database, it gives you an opportunity to reconsider your actions before the DXP erases the current database.

5 . Replace the front panel on the DXP main cabinet.


GCA40-182


Reset Button -----to

0

Set DIP Switch 1 ON

For Fixed Data Port

Parameters.

Set DIP Switch 8 ON 1.

For Master Clear Upon is% initial Power Up After

Software Upgrade.

DXP025

/- DXCPU-68K

DXRAM-xxx

/ DXS W-xxx

Locating DIP Switch 8 and the Reset Button

Restoring the Converted Database to the DXP

Connect your PC to the DXP and use VMMI to restore the translated 1OA database to the DXP. (Note that with VMMI, you do not need the XMODEM communications program that you needed to store the current database.)

Up-Grading the System Software on the DXP - 21

4


Translating the DXP Database

You can use the VMMI to translate the database residing in a DXP to a format that is compatible with the

10A software release. Before you can translate the database, you must convert it to a 9A software release level as described in the paragraph titled Converting the DXP Database.

1. Select the VMMI program from the Windows menu screen.

2 . From the VMMZ window, select the File pull-down menu.

3 . From the File pull-down menu, select Open. System default conditions cause the VMMI program to search for all

+R.DXP files in the VMMI directory; however, you may need to type the path location and

DOS file name of the

DXP database that you wish to translate.

4 . From the Open Data Base File window, select the database for translation, and

OK your choice.

5 . Select a file location for the translated database and

OK your selection.

6 . Select the destination program for the system to use. The Select Board Type window opens.

7.

Use the Select Board Type window to describe the board configuration of the DXP database that you are translating.

(a) Make a record of the DXP’s physical board configuration by entering product codes in the following table.

UNV I/AUX

UNVUAUX

UNV3

UNV4

UNV5

LINE1

LINE2

LINE3

LINE4

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

( 1-16 1

133-48 /

I 25-32

9-16

1-8

Cabined

Universal Slot

Designation

I UNV6

I UNV8 j UNV9 j UNVl2

-

Product

Code Of installed

Board

Station Line I

Number Number

Of Slot Of Slot

81-96 121-128 ’

I

97-l 12

113-128

113-120

105-l 12

129-144

145-160

161-176

177-192

97-104

89-96

81-88

73-80

(b) Using your charted information, answer the prompts on the Select Board Type window. The prompts first asks for all installed station boards beginning with the DXP’s left-most universal slot in the main cabinet. The prompts then ask for all installed line boards beginning with the DXP’s left-most slot in the main cabinet.

When a slot in the original DXP contains an auxiliary board, select the No Board response.

When the prompt asks for a station board but a line board occupies that slot in the original DXP, select the No

Board response.

When the prompt asks for a line board but a station board occupies that slot in the original DXP, select the No

Board response.

When you finish listing the board configuration, OK your selections.

(c) The VMMI program presents a screen graphic that depicts the boards installed in a default arrangement in the main and expansion cabinets of a DXP Plus system. The default arrangement places station boards in ascending slot order beginning with slot 1 in the main cabinet; it places line boards in descending slot order beginning with slot 30 in the lower expansion cabinet. The VMMI program leaves a blank slot for any place that you answered a station or line board prompt with a no board response


,


(d) Since your system may not include one or both expansion cabinets or you do not care for the software arranged board layout, use your mouse to move the board images to the slots that you would rather that they occupy.

Make a record of these board locations so that you or your installer can physically instan the boards to match your plan.

DXP Pius Upper Expansion Cabinet Universal Slot Designation

10( I-32)/AUXl

Enter Product Code Of installed Board

I I

12( I-32)

13(1-32)

I 14(1-32)

15(1-32)

16(1-32)

17( l-32)

1 18(1-32)

I9( l-32)

2OC I-32)

I

I

I

I

DXP Plus Main Cabinet Universal Slot Designation

1 ( l -32)IAUX

2( l-32)

I

I

Enter Product Code Of Installed Board

I

4( l-32)

5( l-32)

6( l-32)

I

I

I

I

9( I-32)

DXP Plus Lower Expansion Cabinet

Universal Slot Designation

2 1 ( l -32)/AUX 1

Enter Product Code

Of Installed Board

I

23(1-32)

24(1-721

I

25(1-32)

I

I

I

/

I

I

27( l-32)

28( I-32)

I

29(1-32)

30( l-32)

I I

8. From the

File drop-down menu, select SAVE. The computer saves the translated DXP database to the file that you named in step 5.


Programming Instructions

This publication reflects software releases through 2.A.

Printed in U.S.A.

COMDWm

IMI66-123.01

8195

CERTIFBEC

IS0 sooa

Corndial’s Quality Management System 1s

Certified To The IS0 9001 Standard.

3

AtoZ K E L L A T R O N I C S , INC,

i i

Table Of Contents

1 Understanding General Programming Information

1.0

Determining Your Equipment Needs

1.1

Connecting The PC To The DXP PZus

1.2

Installing The VMMI Software Program

1.3

Performing The Login Procedure

1.4

Loading The System Software

1.5

Using VMMI Software To Translate A DXP Database

1.6

Using VMMI Software To Archive And Restore The Database

1.7

Using VMMI Software To Perform The Board Configuration

1.8

Configuring The Windows Terminal Emulation

2 Reviewing General Programming Considerations

3 Understanding Keyboard And Terminal Definitions

3.1

Reviewing The Keyboard Definitions

3 . 2 Reviewing the Control Key Definitions

3.3

Reviewing The Terminal Mode Definitions

4 Reviewing The Command Prompts And Error Reporting

4.1

Reviewing The Command Prompts

4 . 2 Reporting Errors

5

Performing The Terminal Emulation Programming

5.1

Reviewing The Programming Progression

Table Of Contents iii

/M/66-123

DXP Plus Programming Instructions

6 Programming Sysfem Features

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

6.11

6.12

6.13


VDT Display Configurations (Terminal Setup)

Messaging

Serial Port (Serial Data Port Parameters)

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce (SOHVA) Programming

Speed Dial Programming

System Clock (Time and Date)

System Timing

System Parameters

Paging Zones (Paging Programming)

Password Programming (Change Password)

Feature Renumbering

Programming The Tl Parameters

7

Programming Sfafion Features

7.1

Programming Station Class Of Service Features

7.2

Programming Station Features

7.3

Square/Non-Square System (Button Mapping By Station)

7.4

Telephone Types (Phone Types)

7.5

Copy Model COS, Station, Button Map (Block Programming)

8 Programming Line Features

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

Line Programming

Line Group Programming

Copy Model Line (Block Programming, Line)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Support


Loop Start Line Support

Tie Line Support

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Programming

9 Programming Intercom Numbers

9.1

Modifying Intercom Numbers

9.2

Adding Intercom Numbers

9.3

Removing Intercom Numbers

9.4

Renumbering Intercom Numbers


1 0

Programming Call Costing and Station Message-

Retail Accounting and Reports (SMDABMDR Programmingj

10.1 SMDAKMDR Parameters

10.2 SMDA Reports

10.3

Account Codes (Forced, With Positive Verification)

10.4 Emergency Numbers

10.5 Authorization Code

11 Programming Toll Restriction

11.1

Toll Restriction Example 1

11.2


11.3

Toll Restriction Flow Diagram

11.4

Restriction Level Programming

11.5

Toll Groups Programming

11.6

Restricted Numbers Programming

11.7

Exception Number Programming

72 Enabling Automatic Route Selection

12.1

Automatic Route Selection Diagram

12.2 ARS Enable

12.3

Line Groups for ARS

12.4

Route Tables (ARS

12.5

Costing Information (ARS)

12.6

Automatic Route Selection For Speed Dial Numbers

13 Selecting Sys tern Printouts (Printer Interface)

/M/66-123

Table Of Contents v

/M/66-123

14 Programming For Peripheral Devices

14.1

Caller ID Programming

14.2

Tracker Paging System Programming

14.3

Digital Voice Announce Programming

14.4

PC Attendant Position Programming

14.5

Voice Mail Programming

14.6 Modem Setup


15 Configuring The System’s Board Layout

15.1

Understanding The Board Configuration Feature

15.2

Examining The Board Status

15.3

Adding Boards To The System

15.4

Deleting Boards From The System

15.5

Moving Boards Within The System

vi Table Of Contents

Understanding General

Programming Information

I.0

Determining Your Equipment Needs

Program the DXP Plus digital communications system from a personal computer (PC) that meets the following requirements: l l l l l l l l l

Intel* 80386SX-33 processor (minimum requirement), four megabytes of random access memory (minimum requirement),

3.5-inch floppy disk drive, hard drive with at least 80 megabytes of storage capacity, available g-pin or 25-pin serial data port (required for communications with DXP Plus), mouse that is supported by Microsoft ** Windows software (optional but highly recommended for

Microsoft* * Windows operation), dual-scan, active-matrix color monitor (highly recommended-VGA monochrome acceptable),

Microsoft** Windows, version 3.11 or later,

Microsoft** MS-DOS operating system, version 3.1 or later.

You will also need Comdial’s Visual Man Machine Interface (VMMI) programming software disk and the operating system software disk for the DXP Plus.

* Intel Corporation,, Santa Clara, California

** Microsof Corporation, Redmond, Washington

4

AtoZ KELLATRONICS,INC,

General Programming Information 1-l

IM166-123 DXP Plus Programming Instructions

1.1

Connecting The PC To The DXP Plus

Connect the serial data port of the PC to the maintenance port of the DXP Plus central processor (CPU) board. The maintenance port is a dedicated serial data port reserved exclusively for system programming.

You can connect the PC remotely to the DXP Plus using a modem and a telephone line. The DXP Phs includes its own modem that someone on site can connect between the CPU board’s modem port and an outside telephone line.

NOTE: Do not perform a system software upgrade through a modem connection.

;

.

D

3

PLUS044

3

J

NOTES:

1. Maximum distance between the two dedicated serial data ports and the external data equipment is limited to 25 feet.

2 . Some data devices require


\

\

L Serial Modem Port

L Maintenance Port

I

2 ml 5

6

4

3


1 =RTS

2=CTS

3=RD

4=TD

5=SG

6=PG l-2 General Programming Information

DXP Plus Programming Instructions IlW66-123

1.2

Installing The VMMI Software Program

The VMMI software is your entry to the DXP Plus system. Before you can login to the system, you must first load the VMMI software into your PC’s memory. When installing the VMMI software, your

PC need not be connected to the DXP

Plus.

1 .

Turn on your PC and load your Windows software.

2.

Insert the VMMI software disk in your computer’s floppy disk drive.

3.

4

5.

6.

7.

8.

From the Windows Program Manager screen, select the File pull-down menu.

From the File pull-down menu, select Run..

At the Run window, type A:install, and OK your entry.

The install window gives a default file location to receive the program; however, you can enter a different file location if you wish. OK the default file location or your new entry.

The install window gives a default location of the VMMI software disk; however, if you have installed the disk in a different drive enter that location. OK the default location or your new entry.

The status window appears on the screen and the program loads automatically.

When the status window shows the install to be complete, OK the install.

9.

The Windows Program Manager screen shows the DXP double click your left mouse button.

Plus

group icon. Select this icon and

10. The Windows Program Manager screen shows the VMMI icon. Select this icon and double click your left mouse button. The computer runs the installed VMMI software program.

General Programming lnformation l-3

/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming Instructions

1.3

Performing The Login Procedure

Once you have loaded the VMMI software using the by performing the following procedure.

Section

1.2 discussion, you can login to the system


2 . Select the VMMI program from the Windows Program Manager screen

3 . From the VMMI window, select the DXP pull-down menu.

4 . From the DXP pull-down menu, select Login.

5 . From the Login window, select the login mode:

6 . From the login menu, select the communications port that your PC uses to communicate with the

DXP Plus. If you are operating remotely through a Hayes*-compatible modem, respond to the modem prompt and enter the system requested information.

*Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products

7 . From the port window, select the serial data parameters that matches the requirements for the DXP

Plus. Remember, the DXP Plus reserves the central processor board’s for PC connection. The default parameters for this port are as follows:

Baud Rate In

Baud Rate Out 9 6 0 0 ,

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity Bits

Flow Control None.

programming to reprogram the serial data parameters of the rate

(see Sections

9 6 0 0 ,

8,

19

None,

1.8, 5.0, and 6.4 for details).

maintenance

However, Comdial engineers recommend that you use a baud rate of 19.2 kilobaud to speed up the data transfer process. You can exit the VMMI program and use the Windows terminal emulation

maintenance

serial data port port to this faster baud

8 . If you use the Windows terminal emulation program to set the data parameters of port, return to the VMMI program when you are finished, and repeat steps 3-7.

the maintenance

9 . When you finish selecting the serial data parameters, OK your choices to return to the DXP Plus pull-down menu.

10. In the DXP pull-down menu, type th,: appropriate password. The system defaults all passwords to

I’lic746++; however, you can customize the passwords during programming if you wish.

11. After you finish the login requirements, OK your choices. The system responds by presenting its serial number at the bottom of the VMMI window for your reference and shows an

on-line

message.

12. Proceed with your programming needs by pulling down the appropriate menu and making a selection.

NOTE: If, for some reason, the system does not complete the login procedure, check your cable connections, verify your serial data settings, and repeat the login procedure.

l-4 General Programming Information

1.4

ReLoading Or Up-Grading The System Software

The DXP Plus includes system software when it ships from the factory. At initial system installation, you do not need to load the system software to make the system operational. Should you need to later reload the system software (for software up-grade purposes for example), you can do so using the supplied system software disk. Use Windows File Manager or MS-DOS commands to save the disk’s information from your computer’s floppy drive to its hard drive. Having the software on your computer’s hard drive allows the data to load into the DXP Plus memory much quicker than it would from the computer’s floppy disk drive.

To load the system software information, your PC must be connected to the DXP Plus (see Section 1.1).



3 . From the VMMI window, select the DXP pull-down menu.

7

1 I

‘: ifi, l&yqyJ

4 . If you have not previously archived the system data base, do so now.

[ 9 ‘&CTli?

a . From the DXP pull-down menu, select Archive Database.

b . Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice. Since the data base can be quite large, you should chose a location on your computer’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base.

c . The system automatically archives its data base and prompts you to OK the action.

d . OK the archive and return to the DXP pull-down menu.

5 . From the DXP pull-down menu, select the System Software Upgrade.

6 . Note the on-screen prompt information, and OK to continue.

7 . The system automatically takes itself out of service and makes a backup of its data base.

8 . Note the on-screen prompt information, and OK to continue.

9 . Choose the location where the new software data resides (select disk drive, directory, and file), and

OK your choice.

10. The DXP Plus loads the software data, reloads its data base that it previously backed up (see step 7), resets itself, places itself back in service, and logs out of the software upgrade feature.

General Programming Information 1-5

ItW66- 123 DXP Plus Programming Instructions

1.5

Using VMMI Software To Translate A DXP Database

You can use the VMMI software to translate the database residing in a DXP to a format that is compatible with the DXP Plus, and load that database into the DXP Plus system. While translating data, your PC need not be connected to the DXP Plus.

Before you translate a DXP database, determine the revision level of the DXP system software. If the

DXP system software revision is 8.A or later, you can translate the database without first taking any other action. However, if the DXP software revision is e revision of the PCMMI program to upgrade that da this version of the PCMMI program, you can down

The telephone number for the bulletin board service i t use an 8.A or later it. If you do not have ial bulletin board service.

needadata ’ communications software program and a data modem

1.5. I Upgrading The DXP Data Base .*’ =---I ’

When a DXP contains system software that is at a revision level earlier than 8.A, you must upgrade that

DXP’s database before you can translate it into a DXP Plus database. To do this, employ an XMODEM data communications program to store the database on a magnetic diskette or on your computer’s hard drive. Then employ a revision 8.A or later PCMMI program (obtainable from Comdial’s bulletin board service) to restore the database and save it to a new file. Restoring the database with this revision 8.A or later PCMMI program upgrades the database so that it will translate into a DXP Plus database.

Remember, the saved database includes the following data: system information, station parameters, line parameters, toll restriction and automatic route selection parameters, and system speed dial numbers but does not include the SMDA/SMDR records. If you need these SMDA/SMDR records, you must make a printout of them before you perform the database storage. This is necessary because this procedure does not record the stored records and they will be lost.

1-6 General Programming Information

Saving the DXP Dafabase

NOTE: This programming procedure details steps that one follows when using the communications software program known as PROCOMM (produced by Datastorm Technologies). If you are using a different communications software, your steps may be different.

1. Connect your PC to the DXP, and take the necessary steps to establish communications between the

PC and the DXP.

2 At the banner screen, type the password (default password is: 1%746+K).

3 . Press CONTROL T for the main menu.

4 . From the main menu, select system and press ENTER.

5 . From the system menu, select save/restore database menu and press ENTER.

6 . Type the item number for save database and press ENTER.

7 . Press the page-down button.

8 . Type the prompted number to choose XMODEM protocol.

9 . Install a formatted diskette in the PC’s floppy disk drive or determine a directory location on the

PC’s hard drive. Use this diskette or hard drive directory space as the original DXP database storage area.

10. Type a DOS file name of your choice for the database storage file, and press ENTER. Database save is automatic; however, depending upon the baud rate, the down load may take 5-25 minutes.

Restoring The DXP Database

1 . Load the revision 8.A or later PCMMI program (that you obtained from the Comdial bulletin board service) into your PC, and start the program.

2 . If the saved DXP database is on a diskette, install the diskette in your PC floppy disk drive.

3 . Press CONTROL T for the main menu.

4 . From the main menu, select system and press ENTER.

5 . From the system menu, select save/restore database menu and press ENTER.

6 . Type the item number for restore database and press ENTER,

7 . Type the path location and the DOS file name for the saved database and press ENTER. Database restore is automatic. When finished, the system displays the message: transfer complete, no errors.

8 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4 and 5.

9 . Type the item number for restore database and press ENTER,

10. Type a path location and DOS file name of your choice for the restored database and press ENTER.

Database restore is automatic. (If you choose the same file name as the saved database, the system will ask you to comfirm the overwrite of the current file.)

This restored database is the upgrade version that you translate into a DXP Plus database.

General Programming Information 1-7

/M/66-123


1.5.2

Translating The DXP Data Base

1.

2.

3.

4.



From the VMMI window, select the FILE pull-down menu.

From the File pull-down menu, select Open. System default conditions cause the VMMI program to search for all *.DXP files in the VMMI directory; however, you may need to type the path location and DOS file name of the DXP database that you wish to translate.

From the Open Data Base File window, select the database for translation, and OK your choice.

5.

6.

Select a file location for the translated database and OK your selection The Select Board Type window opens.

7. Use the Select Board Type window to describe the board configuration of the DXP database that you are translating.

(a) Make a record of the DXP’s physical board configuration. You can use the configuration record that you recorded using IMI40-089,

Configuring

The DXP

Hardware.

Or you can create a reference chart by entering product codes in the following table.

(b) Using your charted information, answer the prompts on the Select Board Type window. The prompts first asks for all installed station boards beginning with the DXP’s left-most universal slot in the main cabinet. The prompts then ask for all installed line boards beginning with the

DXP’s right-most slot in the main cabinet.

When a slot in the original DXP contains an auxiliary board, select the No

Board response.

When the prompt asks for a station board but a line board occupies that slot in the original DXP, select the No

Board response.

When the prompt asks for a line board but a station board occupies that slot in the original DXP, select the No

Board response.

When you finish listing the board configuration, OK your selections.

l-8 General Programming information

DXP Plus Programming instructions /M/66-123

(c) The VMMI program presents a screen graphic that depicts the boards installed in a default arrangement in the main and expansion cabinets of a DXP Plus system. The default arrangement places station boards in ascending slot order beginning with slot 1 in the main cabinet; it places line boards in descending slot order beginning with slot 30 in the lower expansion cabinet. The

VMMI program leaves a blank slot for any place that you answered a station or line board prompt with a no board response

(d) Since your system may not include one or both expansion cabinets or you do not care for the software arranged board layout, use your mouse to move the board images to the slots that you would rather that they occupy. Make a record of these board locations so that you or your installer can physically install the boards to match your plan.

DXP Plus Upper Expansion Cabinet

Universal Slot Designation lO(132)/AUXl

11(132)/AUX2



15(1-32)

16(132)

17(132)

19(132)

20(132)

DXP Plus Main Cabinet

Universal Slot Designation l( 132)/AUX

2(132)

3(132)

4(132)

6(132)

7(132)

8(1-32)



7

DXP Plus Lower Expansion Cabinet

Universal Slot Designation

21(132)/AUXl

22(1-32)IAUX2



25(1-32)

26(132)

27(132)

29(1-32)

30( l-32)

8 . From the File drop-down menu, select SAVE. The computer saves the translated DXP database to the file that you named in step 6.

General Programming Information l-9

1.6

Usin VMMI Software To Archive

And iiestore The Data Base

6.

7.

1 .

2.

3.

4.

5.

You can use the VMMI software to archive and restore the DXP Plus database. To archive and restore data, your PC must be connected to the DXP Plus (see Smtion 1.1).

To archive a data base,



From the VMMI window, select the DXP pull-down menu.

From the DXP pull-down menu, select Login.

From the Login window, perform all login requirements, and OK your choices to return to the DXP pull-down menu.

8.

From the DXP pull-down menu, select Archive Database.

Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice. Since the data base can be quite large, you should chose a location on your computer’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base.

The system automatically archives its data base and prompts you to OK the action.

6.

7.

2.

3.

4.

5.

To retrieve a data base,

1 .



From the VMMI window, select the DXP pull-down menu.

From the DXP pull-down menu, select Login.

From the Login window, perform all login requirements, and OK your choices to return to the DXP pull-down menu..

8.

From the DXP pull-down menu, select Restore Database.

Choose the memory storage location that contains an archived data base and OK your choice. Since the data base can be quite large, you should chose a location on your compu’ier’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base.

The system automatically restores its data base and prompts you to OK the action l-10 General Programming Information

DXP Plus Programming Instructions lMl66-123

1. 7 Usin VMMI Software To Perform

The iioard Configuration

You can use the VMMI software to program the DXP Plus board configuration feature. To perform the board configuration feature, your PC must be connected to the DXP Plus (see Section 1.1).



3 . From the VMMI window, select the FILE pull-down menu.

4 . From the File pull-down menu, select Open.

5 . From the Open Data Base File window, select the DXP Plus database, and OK your choice. The

VMMI program presents a screen graphic that depicts the the DXP Plus boards installed in their current configuration. If you do not care for the board layout, use your mouse to move the board images to the slots that you would rather that they occupy. Make a record of these board locations so that you or your installer can physically install the boards to match your plan.

6 . From the File drop-down menu, select SAVE. The computer saves the rearranged board configuration.

NOTE: If you need to add or delete circuit boards, use the programming procedure detailed in Section 15.

General Programming Information 1-l 1

lM166-123 DXP PIUS Programming hstructions

1.6

Configuring The Windows Terminal Emulation

When configuring the terminal emulation program so that it can communicate with the DXP provide full screen editing of database information

Plus, you must arrange it to emulate either an ANSI standard, ANSI color, or WYSE 50 terminal Such emulations

You must match the data configurations of the terminal emulation with those of the DXP board provides a DIP switch that changes the DXP Plus data configuration to a fixed set of parameters.

You can match the terminal emulation to this fixed set of parameters and eliminate any configuration guess work. When you set DIP switch 1 to its ON position, you fix the DXP

Plus

Plus. The CPU serial data ports to the following parameters:

Parameter

Baud Rate In

Baud Rate Out

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity Bits

Flow Control

Maintenance Port Modem Port

9600 2400

9600 2400

1

8

None

None

8

2

None

None

When you set the DIP switch to OFF, you can program the DXP different parameters.

PEus data port configuration to

Prepare the terminal emulation for communications by following the procedure detailed below.

1 . From the Windows Program Manager, select the Accessories window.

2 . From the accessories window, select Terminal.

3 . From the Terminals window, select the Settings drop-down menu.

4 . From the Settings menu, select Terminal Emulation.

5 . From the Terminal Emulation window, select DEC VT-100 (ANSI) and OK your selection.

6 . From the Settings menu, select Communications.

7 . From the Communications window, select the COM port that you are using between the PC and the

DXP

Plus, and select serial data parameters that match the DXP

Plus settings. When finished, OK your selections.

8 . Press ENTER. The PC automatically communicates with the DXP

Plus the PC communications by returning the programming banner screen.

0 The DXP

Pkus responds to

9 . Refer to Sections 5-15 in this manual for the terminal emulation programming procedures.

l-12 General Programming Information


Reviewing General

Programming Considerations

lMi66-123

Since the programming procedure is menu driven, you should consider all of the following points.

l l l l l l l l

The menu presents a list of selections for your consideration. Each selection differs in content and requires a different response.

When you respond to each selection, it either causes the system to present a further breakdown of selections or causes a particular programming action to take place.

Menu lines prompt you for the required response and, where appropriate, will repeat prompts to allow programming of more than one device without you having to make another menu selection.

All of the menus operate in a similar manner. They differ in only the required response that you must make.

Some menus contain more than one page. On these menus, you can press and hold the CONTROL key while you type the N key to display the next page (or type P to display the previous page).

Each prompt requires a response followed by a Carriage Return (RETURN). A more common label for this control on most PC keyboards is ENTER.

Most menu responses usually consists of a one-, two-, or three-digit number or a string of numbers

(or alpha-numeric characters when programming names and messages). Successive entries are separated by a space or a comma (n n n or n,nn,nnn) while blocks of numbers are indicated by hyphen (n-nnn).

Should programmers introduce a numbering conflict while renumbering a feature dialing code, the system will prompt them to remove the conflict. They may have to renumber several features to completely clear any conflicting numbers.

a


General Programming Considerations 2-1

3

Understanding Keyboard And

Terminal Definrtions

3.1

Reviewing The Keyboard Definitions

The following list describes the functional keys on the keyboard.

l Number keys:

Use keys O-9 for selecting menu items, lines of data to edit, or for editing numeric prompts.

l l l

Alphabetic keys:

ESCAPE key:

Punctuation and Symbol keys:

Use keys A-Z and a-z for entering string information such as names and messages. Always begin names of stations, lines, and so forth with a letter or a space.

This key will return you to the previous command prompt and cancel whatever input was in progress. This action may or may not cause the previous screen to be redrawn depending on the current mode. When you enter a change at most of the programming menus, you must press the ESCAPE key and type a y followed by the ENTER key to save the change.

Except for comma (which is a field delimiter), use the punctuation and symbols on the keyboard just as you use the alphabetic keys.

l l

RETURN or ENTER key:

SPACE BAR:

Use this key to terminate the response to a command prompt or to end the editing of a data field.The system ignores a RETURN without any preceding input except when you are editing database information. During this operation, the RETURN key moves the cursor to the next vertical editing position

The space bar steps through the choices for program selections that provide multiple choices.

l l

Tab Key:

Question mark (?):

Use this key during table editing to position the cursor to the next horizontal editing position.

This key will display any help available concerning the currently displayed screen.

Keyboard And Terminal Definitions 3-1


3.2

Reviewing The Control Key Definitionss

The following list describes the control key functions. Unless otherwise noted, control keys are valid input at any time during programming.

0 Control C (C for Cancel): This key will cancel the current mode or function and return you to the last command prompt.

l

0

Control E (E for Edit or Erase):

Control I (I for Increment):

Use this key to edit a selected field or entry. On “smart” terminals, most fields will be automatically cleared when the first character is entered. Some fields allow the you to add to the current entry. On these types of fields, Control E will clear the entry and position the cursor at the beginning of the field.

You can also use this key to erase a field that has blanks for valid input such as an autodial number.

Use this key during table editing to position the cursor to the next horizontal editing position.

l

0 l

0

0 l

Control N (N for Next):

Control P (P for Previous):

Control R (R for Redraw):

Control X (X for exit):

Control S (S for Stop):

Control T (T for Top):

0 Control V:

Use this key to switch to the next page of data for those database items that fill more that one screen. There will always be an on screen note when this key is valid.

This key is identical to the Control N key except that it displays the previous page of information.

When you press this key the system will redraw the current screen display. Usually, you use this key when the terminal display is configured in brief mode.

This key will return you to the previous command prompt and cancel whatever input was in progress. This action may or may not cause the previous screen to be redrawn depending on the current mode. When you enter a change at most of the programming menus, you must press the ESCAPE key and type a y followed by the ENTER key to save the change.

Use this key to stop printouts.

Use this key to cancel whatever input was in progress and return to the top level menu. The top level menu will always be redrawn

Use this key to turn the entry field prompting on or off.

3.3

Reviewing The Terminal Mode Definitions

l

Control A: l

Control D: l Control W:

Use this key to cause the system to send and receive data to an

ANSI style terminal

Use this key to cause the system to send and receive data to a

“dumb” terminal.

Use this key to cause the system to send and receive data to a

Wyse 50 compatible terminal.

3-2 Keyboard And Terminal Definitions


L-l

Reviewing The Command

Prompts and Error Reporting

4.1

Reviewing The Command Prompts

There are four different types of command prompts.

l Menu Selection Prompt: Use this prompt to make a menu selection. The system requires a numeric input and displays the valid range of numbers in the prompt that corresponds to the number of menu items displayed.

l

0 Station, Line or Class Of Service Prompt: Use this prompt to get to the particular item or items that are to be edited. This prompt is waiting for numbers, a range of numbers, or names. You may specify a single item or multiple items separated by commas, Select a range of items by entering two numbers separated by a dash. The prompt shows the valid range of numbers but the system will accept names. The system accepts an item as a name if the fast character is not a number. The system displays the database information of each item one at a time for viewing or editing. When you use the ESCAPE key to exit the database information screen, the system displays the next item in the list. When you use CONTROL C to exit the screen, all list processing stops and the prompt display returns. When you use CONTROL T to exit the screen, the system stops all list processing and displays the top level menu.

l

Edit Line Prompt: Use this prompt on database editing screens to get to the desired line number to be edited. The system requires a numeric input and displays the valid range of numbers in the prompt that corresponds to the number of menu items displayed. A RETURN (ENTER) at this prompt will automatically select the first item.

Multiple Choice Question Prompt: This type of prompt asks a specific question concerning the current screen or function and shows the valid responses. Enter these responses as a single character followed by a RETURN (ENTER).

4.2

Reporting Errors

Pressing unexpected keys (such as letters when only numbers are allowed) or entering an out-of-range value at a prompt causes the keyboard alarm to sound. The system responds to other types of input errors by displaying an error message on the screen as soon as it detects the error. If the system detects a value-out-of-range error, and if the valid range is not currently shown in the display, the error message includes the valid range of values for reference.

There is one circumstance for which the system does not report an entry error and this is when you are listing items at a station, line or COS prompt. In this case, the system processes valid items in the list up to the first invalid item that it encounters. It does not report the encountered invalid item as an error.

/M/66-123

Command Prompts and Error Reports 4-1

Performing The Terminal

Emulation Programming

Once successfully entered, the programming mode causes your PC to display a welcoming menu. From the welcoming menu, type I +k 7 4 6 % (note that you must type a Capital I ), and then press ENTER to display the

I 9

////////////I

/ / / / / / / / / I / / /

/ / / / / / / / I / / / / /

////// /////I

/////I I/////

/////I / / / I / /

////// //////

////// //////

/ / I / / / / / / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / / I / / / / /

////////////// I/////

/////// //////

//////I ///I//

/ / / / / I / / / / / I

////// / / / / I /

/////////I/

I/////

///////I

//////////I

////// //////

////// //////

/////I

//////

COMDIAL DIGITAL EXPANDABLE

REVXJCX

/ / I / / / / / / / / /

/////////////

/////

///I/

/ / / / I

/ / I / /

//////////////

/ / / / / / / I / / / / /

/////

/////

/////

//I//

////I

Note that the main menu shows the currently installed software release number.

t

From the main programming menu, choose the type of programming that is required. Type the number of the choice and press ENTER. d

1. System

2. Stations

3. Lines

4. Intercom Numbers

5. SMDA / SMDR

6. Toll / ARS

7. Printouts

8. Diagnostics

9. Peripherals

10. Logout

Enter Selection (l-9):

Main Menu

Terminal Emulation Programming 5-7

5. I Reviewing The Programming Progression

Program the system in the sequence shown in the following flow diagram.

Determine system programmmg parameters. Record them for future reference.

From Windows, enter terminal emulation modf and use it to enter

DXP Plus programming

5-2 Terminal Emulation Programming

Perform MASTER CLEAR procedure.

(Initial installation procedure only!

Thls action initializes system prior to programming and clears all memory.)

Perform SYSTEM CLOCK procedure*. (Sets time displayed at LCD time.)

I

* Set the system clock even ifno

LCD speakerphones are used.

If analog telephones or consoles are employed, use

TELEPHONE TYPES procedure to identify telephone types to station ports. If digital stations are installed, they automatically identify themselves to ports at power up; however, if they are not installed until after power up,use TELEPHONE

TYPES procedure to identify them to the ports.

Program System, Line,

Station COS, and Station

Features in any order desired and on an as needed basis.


Programming System Features

/M/66-123 l

Default Functional Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1

l

TerminalSetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 2 l

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 3 l

Serial Port (Serial Data Port Parameters) . . . . . . . . . 6 . 4 l l


(SOHVA) Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5

SpeedDial Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 6 l

System Clock (Time and Date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 7 l SystemTiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 8 l

System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 9 l l

Paging Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 1 0

Change Password (Password Programming) . . . . . . 6.11

l

Feature Renumbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 . 1 2


System Features Programming 6- 1

lM166-123 DXP Plus Programming Instructions

6. I

6.1.1

Description.=

Default Functional Programming

Master Clear

The master clear feature in an on-line procedure that returns the entire system to the default operating parameters, clears all stored speed dial numbers, and clears any other custom programming as well. The system takes 15 to 20 seconds to exercise a master clear command depending upon the system size.

You can take one of three different master clear options.

With master clear mode 1 option, the system assumes a set of parameters that reflect a key system arrangement. This means that multiline telephones, except logical station port 1 and 2, receive direct line appearances in their button maps but have no group intercoms assigned to their hunt lists. Logical station ports 1 and 2 have four group intercom numbers assigned to their hunt lists and are button mapped accordingly.

With master clear mode 2 option, the system assumes a set of parameters that reflect a hybrid, or PBX-like, system arrangement. This means that multiline telephones have no direct line appearances in their button maps; however, they do have two unique group intercoms assigned to their button maps and to their hunt lists.

With master clear mode 3 option, the system assumes a set of parameters, that does not map any station buttons, assigns no group intercom access or personal intercom numbers to the stations, and disables both zone and all-call paging features.

Programming:



3. From system menu, select defaults and press ENTER.

4. Select master clear and press ENTER.

5. Type y or n (yes or no) to confirm master clear; press ENTER.

6. Select system default mode (1 = mode 1 9 2 = mode 2,3 = mode 3) and press ENTER.

You can only exercise the master clear when you enter the programming session with the installer password; however, in a defaulted system, the administrator password is the same as the installer password thus giving master clear privileges to the

administrator as well. Refer to Section 6.11 to customize the passwords.

6-2 Sys tern Fea fores Programming

6.1.2

Description:

System Default

The system default sets the system configuration features to the default operating parameters.

When the system default is performed, certain programmed data, such as custom LCD messages and system speed dial numbers, are lost.

Programming;




4. From defaults menu, select system and press ENTER.

5. Type y to confirm default or n to deny.

6.1.3

Description:

Class Of Service Default

There are 32 station class of service (COS) feature sets or grouping of features. Each set can have differently configured features. This default programming returns one or all station COS sets to the default configured parameters.

Programming:


2. From the main menu, select system and press ENTER.

3. From the system menu, select defaults and press ENTER.

4. From the defaults menu, select station COS and press ENTER.

5. Type l-32 to enter class of service to be defaulted. Enter the numbers for the COS sets to be defaulted (n,n,nn) or enter a range of numbers (n-nn).

6.1.4

Description:

Station Default

Each station can have individually configured operating features. The station default sets the configuration of these features to the default parameters.

Programming:

1~ Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From defaults menu, select stations and press ENTER.

5. Type intercom number or station name.

Sys tern Features Programming 6- 3

6.1.5

Description.=

Bufton Mar, Default

Every programmable button at each telephone connected to the system provides line selection, direct station selection, or other functions. Programming action for a particular station assigns a function to each button Unique button function assignment, known as button mapping, at each station is possible. This default erases all unique button function assignments and clears all speed dial locations.

Programming:

1 e Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From defaults menu, select button maps and press ENTER.

5. Type intercom number or station name.

6.1.6

Description:

Line Default

Each line can have individually configured operating conditions. The line default sets these conditions to the default parameters.

Programming:




4. From defaults menu, select lines and press ENTER.

5. Type line port number (l-240) or name.

6. Enter the numbers for the lines to be defaulted (n,n,nn) or enter a range of numbers (n-nnn).

6.1.7

Description:

Tables Default

Various system-wide operating features depend upon tables of information to control their parameters. These tables are programmable to let the features match a broad range of site requirements. This table default procedure resets the following programmable tables to the default conditions: SOHVA tables, toll restriction tables, ARS route tables, and modify digits tables.

Remember, the system erases all programmed entries when you take this defaulting action.

Programming:

1 0 Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From defaults menu, select tables and press ENTER.


6-4 Sys tern Features Programming

6 . 1 . 8

Description:

DID Translation Table, Default

If you have programmed translation tables for DID use

(Section

8.4.4), you can clear them with this procedure.

Programming;




4. From defaults menu, select DID translation table and press ENTER.

5. Type DID table number (1-S) and press ENTER.

6. Repeat step 5 until finished.

7.


6.1.9

Description:

Clear System Status Log

If you have enabled system status reporting

(Section

6.9.6) at a station, you can turn off its status light by using this procedure. Use the

Section

13 procedure to view the status report before turning off the light at the status reporting station.

Programming;




4. From defaults menu, select clear system status log and press ENTER.

5. Select system, Tl-El, or both and press ENTER.

6.


6.1.10

Description:

Voice Prompts/Programming, Default

If your system includes a Digial Voice Announcer (DVA), you can use the following procedure to clear the voice messages, the translation digits, and the voice resource analysis report of all existing information. Refer to

Section

14.3.3 for the programming discussion about these features.

Programming;




4. From defaults menu, select voice prompts/programming and press ENTER.

5. Type letter code for DVA feature to be defaulted.

6.



IMl66- 123 DXP Plws Programming Instructions

6.1.11

Software Reset

Description: You can reset the system software with this procedure. Resetting the software aligns the memory pointers and clears any erronous data from the memory locations. Resetting the software is a memory housekeeping routine and does not default the programmed parameters.

Do not reset the system software while the system is in use. The resetting action will disconnect all in-progress calls.

Programming; 1. Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From defaults menu, select software reset and press ENTER.


6.1.12

Onboard Software Upgrade

Description: Comdial engineers currently reserve this feature for their internal use.

6.2

Description:

Terminal Setup (Display Configurations)

You must match the system to the type of terminal setup that you use for programming.

Programming: 1 1 Press CONTROL T for main menu.


3. From system menu, select terminal setup and press ENTER.

4. From terminal setup menu, type selection (l-4) for terminal choice.

5. Press SPACE bar to change or ENTER to maintain.



6-6 Sys tern features Programming

6.3

Messaging

6.3. I

Description:

LCD Messaging

This procedure enables a class of service messaging feature. It allows station users to set a message at their stations that will be displayed on calling LCD speakerphones. You can use the second part of this procedure to program the actual LCD messages. Alternately, The attendant can program the LCD messages using procedures found in the attendant guide.

Also refer to Section 6.3.2.

Programming:

To enable feature for class of service,




4. Type class of service number (l-32) and press ENTER.

5. From COS programming menu Type item number for feature and press ENTER.





To program LCD Messages,



3. From system menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

4. From LCD messages menu, type selection (l-10) and press ENTER.

5. Type message and press ENTER. Message can be 16 characters long.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all messages. Press CONTROL N for more LCD message lines.



Operation:

Turn message on: press INTERCOM, dial + 02, then dial message code (01 through 30) #.

Turn Message off: press INTERCOM, dial # 02.


/M/66-123 DXP PIus Programming Instructions

6.3.2

Description:

Message Deposit (Response Messaging)

This procedure enables a class of service messaging feature that allows station users to call an

LCD speakerphone and arrange for a message to be left on its display. The message is for the called party to read if she or he is unable to answer the caller.

Refer to Section 6.3.1 for details about programming the LCD messages that can be deposited. Also, you can use the procedure detailed in

Section

7.3 to assign a Response Message button to the telephone; however, users can do this for themselves if they need the button.

Programming:





5. From COS programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.




6.3.3

Description:

Message Waiting (Message Wait Originate)

When you enable this feature, a station user can dial a feature code to control the message waiting light at another station.

Programming.=

Operation:










Turn message waiting light on: press INTERCOM, dial +k 3, dial extension number.

Turn message waiting light off: press INTERCOM, dial # 3, dial extension number.

6-6 Sys tern Fea tares Programming

Description:

Serial Port (Serial Data Port Parameters)

The DXP Plus provides two serial data ports on the CPU board and dedicates them to PC-based programming and the remote maintenance modem. You or your installer can add up to 16 additional serial data ports to the system for interfacing such items as open architecture interface applications, PC attendant positions, and the SMDA data printer. Add these serial data ports by installing communications cards on the services board, the expansion cabinet interface board, and the main cabinet’s auxiliary board. Each of these boards will accept two communications cards in its lower two slots.

The DXP Phs supports a maximum of 18 serial data ports. Serial data ports 1 and 2 are the dedicated ports provided by the cpu board while communications cards provide the remaining

16 undedicated ports (serial data ports 3-18). The system designates serial data ports 3-18 to specific locations as detailed in the following chart.

Serial data ports 3-10 Lower two slots on the services board

Serial data ports 11-18 Lower two slots on one of the three following locations:

- the interface board installed in expansion cabinet 1,

-the interface board installed in expansion cabinet 2,

-the auxiliary board installed in the main cabinet.

* The full compliment of 16 undedicated serial data ports requires four installed communications cards.

There are programming actions that you take to provide serial data port operation. You must match the data port number with the installation location that you choose for the communications card. You can change the baud rates, data bits, stop bits, parity, and flow control for each serial data port in the system to match the data device that you connect there.

The serial data parameters that you set using this procedure remain in effect until you reprogram them. The settings will not change even if you perform a master clear of the system.

The maximum available serial data baud rate is dependent upon the location of the communications card. For cards located on the services board, the maximum baud rate is 19200 baud. For cards located on the auxiliary board or on the interface boards, the maximum baud rate is 9600 baud.

There are some limitations involved. If a device is transmitting / receiving from the DXP Plus at a high rate, engineering sources recommend the use of a communications protocol (RTS /

CTS or XON / XOFF) to prevent buffer overrun and data loss.



6.4. I

Description:

Matching Serial Data Port Numbers

To Communications Card Locations

You must take this programming action to match the serial data ports % l-18 with the installation location that you choose for the communications cards.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select systems and press ENTER.

3 . From system menu, select system parameters and press ENTER.

4 . From system parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar for communications card board location and press ENTER to accept setting.

6 . When finished, press ESCAPE twice.

7 . Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

6.4.2

Description:

Programming:

Setting Serial Data Port Parameters

You can change the baud rates, data bits, stop bits, parity, and flow control for each serial data port in the system to match the data device that you connect there.


2 . From main menu, select system and press ENTER.

3 . From system menu, select serial ports and press ENTER.

4 . From serial ports menu, type item number for main port, services port, or for auxiliary port and press ENTER.

NOTE: The system will not respondfor services or auxiliary ifyou do not have communications cards installed on the services or auxiliary boards

5 . From serial port type menu, select the serial port number and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE bar for feature setting

7 . Press TAB for next parameter.

8 . Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all parameters.

9 . Press ENTER to accept settings.






6.5

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce

(SOHVA) Programming

IMl66-123

6.5. I

Description:

Busv On SOHVA

At default, the system returns a ring back tone to users who make SOHVA calls to busy stations; however, this procedure allows you to arrange for telephone users to receive a busy signal instead of the ring back tone. This feature lets non-LCD telephone users know that a called station is busy.

Programming:






6. Press SPACE BAR for feature setting and press ENTER.




6.5.2

Description:

SOHVA Tone Bursts

(SOHVA Beeps)

You can choose the number of tone bursts that each telephone user hears preceding a SOHVA message to be from one to six.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select station and press ENTER.

3 . From stations menu, select station programming and press ENTER.

4 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for station and press ENTER.

5 . From station programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6 . Type choice (l-6) and press ENTER.

7.

Press ESCAPE twice.





6.5.3

Description:

SOHVA Groups

SOHVA calling groups control the pattern in which station ports receive and/or originate

SOHVA calls to one another. You must first form the SOHVA groups and then assign the groups to individual stations.

Programming:

Form the SOHVA groups with this procedure.



3. From system menu, select SOHVA table and press ENTER.

4. Type t, r, c to select transmit or receive group or to clear SOHVA table and press ENTER.

5.

Type l-66 ENTER to select SOHVA group for programming.

6. Type SOHVA groups (1-16) to receive from or transmit to selected SOHVA group.

Enter the numbers for the groups to be assigned (n,n,nn) or enter a range of numbers

(for example, n-nn) to set.

7. Press ENTER and repeat steps 5 and 6.

8. When finished, press ESCAPE.


EXAMPLE: As illustrated in the following menu, programming action enables group 12 to transmit to groups 3, 5 and 7.

System default enables each group to transmit and receive with itself and enables group 16 to transmit and receive with all groups.

S O H V A R e c e i v e

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

0

H s

1* ~ .~ . . . . . ..O .* .*

2.*............-*

3 .

.

*.- 0.D *.-...* *

4...*.. .

.

.

.

.

* D ..*

5 .

.

o ~ *..........*

6..... * .

.

a .

..e ..*

V

A

7......*........*

T a .

.

.

..." *.....- .* r a

9 .

.

-..* *.*..-...*

10. . s . . . . * . * . . . . . * n 11..........* - .

.

.

*

S 12.. * .* .* . ...* . ..* m 13............

* . . * i t

14...... o . . . 0 ..* * *

15..............**

16* 4 * k k * * ‘k k rt * ‘A * * * *

Use this procedure to assign stations to SOHVA groups.





5. Select SOHVA groups and press ENTER.

6. Type group number O-16 (n,n,nn or n-nn) and press ENTER.




6-12 System Features Programming


6.6

Speed Dial Programming

lMl66-123

6.6. I

Description:

Pause Time

During speed dialing, it is sometimes necessary to have the system delay the sending of digits to give host system switching equipment time to prepare to receive them. A pause, stored in the speed dial number, provides this delay. This programming procedure determines the duration of the pause. The person who stores the speed dial number must press the telephone’s HOLD button at the point in the number digit sequence where he or she needs the pause (for example,

9-pause-18049782200).

Programming:



3. From system menu, select timing and press ENTER

4. From timing menu, type appropriate line number and press ENTER




6.6.2

Description:

Speed Dial Groups

The system provides 500 system speed dial numbers. These numbers are divided into 50 groups with 10 numbers available in each group. Assign none, one, or a range of groups (n-nn) to each station class of service. Also refer to

Section 6.6.4.

Programming:






6. Type desired value (O-50) and press ENTER.





/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming hstructions

6.6.3

Description:

Programming:

Speed Dial Sets

A speed dial set is a group of 10 speed dial locations. The system allocates one speed dial set to each telephone as a default but you can allocate up to 10 sets to a telephone if you wish. When a DSWBLF console is operated as a companion to a telephone, you can allocate speed dial sets at the companion telephone that the system will then share with the console. The system reserves one speed dial set for the telephone’s dial pad buttons O-9.










6.6.4

Description:

Programming:

System Speed Dial

Use this programming feature to provide a list of 500 speed dial numbers to all stations in the system. Choose the prime line/last line used or designate the line or line group that the will be automatically select for speed dialing. Store up to 32 digits including O-9, +Kc, #, Hookflash signalling, and pauses. Also refer to Sections 6.6.2 and

12.6.

Beginning with software release 8.B, you can alternately choose the intercom to be automatically selected for speed dialing. This enhancement allows you to store intercom selection along with feature codes as speed dial numbers for true one-button access to features

(for example; store INTERCOM %l 1 and INTERCOM #l at two locations for system wide availability to music on and music off). This enhancement will not accept WKW or ##746+# as programming entries and it ignores any entered pauses or hookflashes.



3. From system menu, select speed dials and press ENTER.

4. From speed dial menu, type item number to edit or press ENTER for line 1.

NOTE: Pressing ENTER causes the system to accept the entry and move the cursor vertically one location downward. Pressing TAB causes the system to accept the entry and move the cursor horizontally one location to the right. Pressing and holding CONTROL while typing an E erases a number.

5. Press TAB to set cursor to preset column.

6. Press SPACE bar to choose prime/last (line), line, line group or ARS

7. Enter l-240 for line port, l-16 for line group, or leave as group 1 for ARS line to store as prefix to speed dial number.

8. Press TAB for number entry column.

9. Type speed dial number (up to 32 digits of: O-9, %, #, P = pause, F = hookflash) and press ENTER.

10. Repeat steps 4-9 for all speed dial numbers

11 .When finished, press ESCAPE twice.

12.Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER,

Operation:

While on hook, dial + 100 through X 599.

6- 14 Sys tern Features Programming


6.7

Description:

System Clock (Time and Date)

The system clock provides time and date information for display on LCD speakerphones and for

SMDRBMDA timing and reporting. You must set the correct time and date to allow the system to operate properly.

Programming:




4. Type time in 24 hour format (hhxnm) using leading zeros for entries less than 10 and then press ENTER.

5. Type date (mm-dd-yy) using leading zeros for entries less than 10 and press ENTER.

6.8

Sys tern Timing

6.8. I

Description:

Call Park Recall

A call that is left in a park orbit longer than the length of time that you program with this feature will automatically return to a park recall condition at the parking station. Also refer to Section

7.1.6.








6.8.2

Description:

Page Recall

This timing feature determines the amount of time that a Tracker page remains in a Tracker page orbit before recalling to the paging station. Refer to Section 14.2 for complete Tracker programming information.



3. From system menu, timing and press ENTER






6.8.3

Description:

Camp-On Tone

Use this procedure to set the duration of the camp-on tone that the system sends to a busy station. Also refer to Section 7.1.10.

Programming:


2. Form main menu, select system and press ENTER.


4 . From the system timing menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.




6.8.4

DTMF Extended Dialing (Tone Length)

Description:

Use this programming feature to set the length of the DTMF tones. The system generates

DTMF tones of extended length when users take their telephones off-hook and then wait until after the system sounds the extended dialing tone burst before they engage automatic dialing

(for example, press speed dial buttons or saved number redial button) at their stations. Also, if analog telephone users take their telephones off-hook and then wait to begin manually dialing until after the system sounds the extended dialing tone burst, the system will entend the length of the manually dialed DTMF tones. After setting this extended DTMF tone length, you must enable the feature’s use at each station where it is needed

(Section 7.2.31).

Programming:

1 a Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From the system timing menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.





DXP Plus Programming lnsfructions /M/66-123

6.8.5

Timed Recall (Held And Transferred Calls)

Attendant Hold Recall

Description:

After a call has been on hold at an attendant station for a programmed length of time, the call recalls to the attendant station. Use this procedure to set the amount of time before a held call recalls at an attendant station.








Hold Recall

Description: After a call has been on hold at a station for a programmed length of time it recalls to the station that placed it on hold. Use this procedure to set the amount of time before a held call recalls to a station.








Station Transfer Recall

Description: After a transferred call has been waiting at a station for a programmed length of time it recalls to the station that transferred it. Use this procedure to set the amount of time before a transferred call recalls to a station.










6.8.6

Description:

Paging Access

If you have assigned a paging zone and given that zone access to external paging equipment

(Section 6.101) plus enabled paging transmit capability (see Section 6.10.3) at a station, that station has access to external paging equipment. With this paging access procedure, you can set the maximum length of time that a station can stay connected to the external paging equipment.

This timing setting also controls the amount of time a station can stay connected to the system zone paging.

Programming:








6.8.7

Description:

Pause Time

During speed dialing, it is sometimes necessary to have the system delay the sending of digits to give host system switching equipment time to prepare to receive them. A pause, stored in the speed dial number, provides this delay. This programming procedure determines the duration of the pause. The person who stores the speed dial number must press the telephone’s HOLD button at the point in the number digit sequence where he or she needs the pause (for example, g-pause-1 8049782200). See Section 6.7 for speed dial programming.

Programming:

1 s Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From system timing menu, type appropriate line number and press ENTER



7. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER..

6.8.8

Description:

Recall/Flash

A station can generate either a line disconnect signal (recall) or a host system feature access signal (flash) when its user presses the telephone’s TAP button Use this procedure to arrange for either the recall or the flash signal.

Programming:




4. From timing menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.





DXP Plus Programming Instructions /M/66-123

6.8.9

Periodic Tone Time

Description:

After you enable the periodic warning tones that remind users to keep conversations short on certain outside lines (Section 7.1.33), use this procedure to set how often that you wish the periodic warning tones to occur








6.8. IO Maximum Call Duration (Time)

Description: After you enable the maximum call duration feature (Section 7. I .34), use this procedure to set the cut off time.








6.8.11

Internal lnterdigit Dialing

Description: A timer starts running with the dialing of each digit during intercom number dialing. It also starts running whenever the user accesses the intercom number path and does not dial any digits. When the timer times out, the system returns the station to an idle state. Use this procedure to set the intercom dialing timout period for the entire system.

Programming:





5. Press SPACE bar for time and press ENTER.


7. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing.

8. Press ENTER to end.


:

/M/66-123 BXP Plus Programming Instructions

6.8.12

Line-To-Line Connect Duration

Description:

After you have given a station the ability to set up an unsupervised conference between two lines (Section ZI.37), you should use this procedure to set the maximum amount of time that an unsupervised conference can continue between two lines. When the time out occurs, the system recalls the station from where the user enabled the unsupervised conference.

Programming:








6.8.13

Camp-On/Automatic Call Back Ring

Description:

After you use Section 7. I.8 to enable a call waiting tone, use this procedure to set the duration of the camp-on/automatic ringback ring that the system sounds when it returns a camp-on call to the original station..

Programming: 1 D







6.8.14

Out Dial Delav Time

Description: The system will wait for a programmed length of time before sending automatically dialed numbers over an outside line. This delay gives the host system time to return dial tone before the system begins dialing the number. Different host systems require different periods of time between when a line is picked up and when dial tone is returned. Use this procedure to match this system to your host system.

Programming:









6.8.15

Authorization Code Timeout

Description:

Use the

Section

IO.5 procedure to enable the authorization code feature. Once a user uses the authorization code to access his or her telephone features, those features remain in effect until any idle time at the telephone exceeds the authorization code time-out period that you program with this feature.

Programming:








6.8.16

IST Ring Timeout

Description:

Use this procedure to set the number of times that the system sends a ring signal to an industry-standard telephone on a system-wide basis. Although the ringing stops at the industry-standard telephone when the time-out occurs, the system continues to present the call at the telephone for answering until the caller abandons it. See

Section

7.2.35 for other IST programming requirements.

Programming:








6.8.17

/ST DTMF Receiver Timeout

Description:

You can program the amount of time that the system waits to receive a DTMF tone from an industry-standard telephone, after the user has lifted the telephone’s handset and before he or she has pressed a dial pad digit. The system stops sending dial tone to the station and stops waiting for DTMF dialing digits after this time-out occurs.

If this happens, the user must hang up the handset and lift it again to re-establish the dial tone. See

Section


Programming:










6.8.18

/ST Flash Time

Description:

You can program the timed length of the signal that results when a user of an industry-standard telephone presses and releases the telephone hookswitch (or presses the TAP button if available on his or her telephone) on a system-wide basis. Often, a signal with a short time length

(typically 500-750 ms) serves to alert the system to receive a feature code (flash) while a signal with a long time length (typically 1.5-2.0 set) serves to disconnect the line and re-establish dial tone (recall). The value that you set with this procedure is the maximum value for recognizing a flash from an industry-standard telephone. You can also set the minimum value for recognizing a flash from an industry-standard telephone. See

Section


Programming:




4. From system timing menu, type item number for minimum flash time and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar for minimum time and press ENTER to accept setting.

6. Press ENTER to select maximum flash time line item.

7. Press SPACE bar for maximum time and press ENTER to accept setting.


6.8.19

Voice Mail DTMF Tone

Description:

The system provides a means by which you can set the length of the DTMF tones that it generates when a user dials a number from his or her telephone.

Since the voice mail system may require a different DTh4F tone length than that which you have provided for the telephones, the system provides a means for you to set a separate DTMF tone length for voice mail station ports. It defaults the length to 80 msec, but you can program other lengths as needed. Refer to Section 15 for other voice mail programming requirements.

Programming:









6 . 8 . 2 0

Description:

Programming:

Pulse Dial lnterdiait Time

You can set the interdigit time between dial pulses when the system pulse-dials a number over a line. The DXP

Plus defaults this time to 150 msec. and provides a range of timing values between 100 msec. and one sec. that you can set in either 50 or 100 msec. increments. Refer to

Section

8.1.9 to enable pulse dialing.



3. From the system menu, select timing and press ENTER,

4. From system timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER,


6.

Press ESCAPE twice,


6.8.21

Pulse Dial Make/Pulse Dial Break (Pulse Dial Ratio)

Description:

Programming:

5.

6.

7.

8 .

9 .

1.

2.

3 .

4.

Use this procedure to set the make/break ratio for rotary dial signalling to match rotary dial line requirements. You can set the line make/break ratio for rotary dial (pulse dial) signalling in a more flexible manner to match many different rotary dial line requirements. You can set the make time and the break time independently in one msec. increments to any time from one to 99 msec. Refer to

Section

8.1.8 to enable pulse dialing.




From system timing menu, type item number for line pulse make and press ENTER.

Type desired time (l-99) and press ENTER,

From timing menu, type item number for line pulse break and press ENTER,


Press ESCAPE twice,

Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER,

6.8.22

Dialing Complete

Description:

Programming:

With systems operating with the E-l Digital Carrier Line Board feature, you must use this timing feature to set the maximum amount of time that a user can wait between digits when he or she is dialing a number. In the E-l operating enviroment, the central office system will not wait indefinitely for the caller to completely dial a number. Refer to the central office specifications for timing requirements.

1 e Press CONTROL T for main menu,


3. From the system menu, select timing and press ENTER,

4. From system timing menu type item number for feature and press ENTER,


6.

Press ESCAPE twice,



/M/66-123

6.9

Svsfem Parameters

DXP Pius Programming Instructions

6.9. I

Description:

Svnchronized Rinuin~

The system can provide an audible distinction between internal and external call ringing when needed. Enable or disable that feature with this programming procedure. When you enable this feature, line call ringing sounds the same cadience as intercom calls. This feature does not apply to direct inward dial lines (Section 8.4) and E&M lines (Section 8.7)*

Programming:




4. From system parameters menu, select synchronized ringing.





6.9.2

Description:

Automatic Attendant Immediate Transfer

You should choose the automatic attendant immediate transfer mode for voice mail transfers. It allows the system to release the voice mail port as soon as someone answers the transferred call.

However, if you turn on the voice mail screen and confirm options (see the voice mail programming manual for details), do not turn on this immediate transfer mode. Immediate transfer is a system-wide parameter and affects all telephones in the system.

Programming:








6-24 Sys tern features Programmhg

DXP Plus Programming instructions /M/66-123

6.9.3

Description:

A utomafic Roufe Selection (A RS Enable)

You can enable or disable automatic route selection on a system-wide basis. A defaulted system has ARS disabled. Refer to

Section

12 for other ARS programming details.

Programming:



3. From the system menu, select system parameters and press ENTER.

4. From the system parameters menu, select ARS feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE BAR to toggle between enable and disable.



6.9.4

Description:

Automatic Route Selection Dial Tone

You can select one of three ARS dial tones that you hear whenever you enter the ARS access code.

0

0

0

Dial Tone 1 - steady intercom dial tone (dual tones of 480 Hz + 620 Hz),

Dial Tone 2 - same as dial tone 1 only preceded by three short tones (200 ms on,

200 ms off)

Dial Tone 3 - steady similated central office ring back tone (dual tones of 440 Hz +

480 Hz).

Programming:




4 . Select ARS dial tone from the system parameters and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar to toggle between dial tone 1, dial tone 2, and dial tone 3.

6 . When finished, press ENTER.

7 . Press ESCAPE twice to end.



6.9.5

Description:

Toll A RS Dialing Pause

To create toll restriction parameters for the system, program restricted numbers as entries in the toll restriction table using programming details provided in Section 11.6. From that discussion, learn about entering a pause as part of the restricted number’s digit string. Use the following programming procedure to enable the system to accept that pause entry at the end of a restricted number’s digit string.

Programming:




4 . From system parameters menu, select toll/ARS dialing pause and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar for feature setting.



6.9.6

Description:

System Status Reporting

Use this procedure to enable system status reporting. If you enable status reporting, the system will notify certain designated stations when system status conditions occur, and turn on an status light at those stations. Refer to the Section 7.3 procedure to map a status light at a telephone.

Programming:




4. From system parameters menu, select system status reporting and press ENTER.




Operation:

When the status light turns on, use the

Section

13 procedure to view status conditions, and then use the

Section

6.1.9 procedure to turn off the status light at the status reporting station.


6.9.7

Description:

TI--El Siatus Reporting

Use the following instructions to enable the Tl--El status reporting feature. Use the

Section

6.13.2 procedure to program the status reporting and alarm alarting parameters.

Programming:




4. From system parameters menu, select Tl--El status reporting and press ENTER.



7. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER

6.9.8

Description:

Major Alarm Alerting

Use the following instructions to enable the Tl--El alarm alerting feature. Use the

Section

6.13.3 procedure to program the status reporting and alarm alarting parameters.

Programming:




4. From system parameters menu, select major alarm reporting and press ENTER.



7. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER


lMl66-123 DXP Plus Programming Instructions

6.9.9

Description:

Programming:

Central Message Desk

Use this procedure to designate one station as the central message desk to take messages for other system stations, control the message waiting light at those stations, and deliver messages to their users upon request.

NOTE: Do not assign this feature to voice mail station ports since it activates only one port and inhibits all other station ports from having message wait originate capability.




4. From system parameters menu, select central message desk and press ENTER.

5. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for desired station



8.


6.9. IO /ST Ringing Per Phase

Description:

While the installer typically connects one industry-standard telephone per IST station port, he or she can connect two industry-standard telephones per IST station port; however, they will share the same assigned intercom number. When he or she installs one telephone per port, you must set the IST ringing per phase feature to 32. When the installer places two telephones at any IST station port, you must change the IST ringing per phase feature to 8. A setting of 32 allows up to 48 industry-standard telephones per cabinet (main cabinet and expansion cabinet) to ring simultaneously. A setting of 16 reduces this simultaneous ringing total to 24 telephones per cabinet. This programming selection is on a system-wide basis. See

Section

7.2.35 for other industry-standard telephone programming features.

Programming:



3. From system menu, select system parameters menu, and press ENTER.

4. From the system parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ESCAPE once.


6.9.11

/ST Ringing Patterns (Ring Mode)

Description:

You can program the ringing pattern for either IST ring mode one or IST ring mode two. Mode one causes a two-second ring phase while mode two causes a shorter one second ring phase.

For this feature to function properly, insure that the industry-standard telephone interface board contains firmware revision 2C or higher

Programming:




4 . Select IST ring mode from the system parameters and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar to toggle between mode 1 (default) and mode 2.

6. When finished, press ENTER.

7.

Press ESCAPE twice to end.


6.9.12

/ST Ring Frequency

Description:

Programming:

The system will allow you to set a ring frequency of 25 Hz for international applications or set a ring frequency of 21 Hz for domestic applications. Choose a setting that matches the ring frequency of the installed ring generator.




4. Select IST ring frequency from the system parameters and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar to toggle between choices of 21 Hz and 25 Hz.



6.9.13

Operator Station

Description:

Programming:

You can designate the station that you want to ring when system users dial the operator. Usually this station is an attendant position station; however, the operator station can be any station in the system. In other words, the operator station does not have to be an attendant position station

(Section 7.2.30) if you do not want it to be one.

You can change the code that users dial to call the operator. You can change this code from a default of 0 to the dialing code of your choice.

To designate the operator station, use the following procedure:




4. From the system parameters menu, select feature and press ENTER.

5. Type personal intercom number for station and press ENTER.



To change the operator dialing code, use the following procedure:



3 . From system menu, select feature renumbering and press ENTER.

4. From feature renumbering menu, select user feature menu and press ENTER

5 . From user feature menu, type item number for operator access and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE BAR to clear current code and type new code

(type up to four digits-nnnn) and press ENTER.

NOTE: The number block 5040-5999 is unassigned at default.

Use it for code renumbering.

piiiaq

If a number conflict exists between the new code that you need to assign and one that is currently in use, the system will prompt you to remove the conflict. Before responding to this prompt with a y (yes), be sure that doing so will not disturb other programmed features. If is possible to enter a situation where you must make several renumbering changes to completely resolve a number conflict.




System Features programming 6- 29


6.9.14

Line Disconnect Automatic Camp-On

Description:

Programming:

If a user at a current station selects a line that a previous station has released from busy but the system has not yet returned to idle, the system arranges for the current station to camp-on to the line before the system makes the line idle. After the system makes the line idle, it immediately connects the camped-on station to the line. With this feature disabled, a station can not select a line until after the system has returned the line to idle. Refer to Section 8.1.10 to set the time that the system waits before it makes a line idle after a station releases it from busy.










6.9.15

Automatic Station Relocation

Description:

Programming:

Operation:

The system will automatically recognize a particular station should someone relocate it to a different station port. After being installed at a new port location, a relocated station will provide the same class of service parameters and station features that it provided at its original port location. Also, the relocated station will respond to the same personal intercom number that it responded to at its original port location. A relocated station prompts the user to take action to either accept its original programming or accept the programming at the new port. If the user takes no action, the station assumes the parameters and personal intercom number that is determined by the

Section

6.9.16 programming procedure.

Consider these following points when you enable station relocation: ti If someone does a station relocation, you must save the database programming to make the relocation permanent

(Section 1.6).

/ This relocation feature only applies to digital telephones.

4 Users must ensure that the vacated port remains unused until they complete a relocation

If someone connects a telephone to the vacated port before users complete a relocation, the relocated telephone will not retain its original programming.

d When the user accept the original programming for the new port, the vacated port assumes the programming currently assigned to the new port (that is, a parameter exchange takes place between the vacated port and the new port).

4 If a DSS/ElLF console was assigned to the telephone at its original location, the console assignment follows the telephone to the new location even though the console is no longer located physically near the telephone. If you relocate the console, you must connect it to the desired staion port and use the

Section

7.4 and

Section

7.2.26 procedures to program it for use at the new port.

(/ The relocation feature also applies to relocated digital telephone boards, however, the installer must ensure that the vacated port remains unused until the relocation is complete.

All stations connected to the relocated circuit board show the relocation prompt.


2, From main menu, select systems and press ENTER.






For LCD speakerphone with interactive buttons,

- relocate telephone and note

Keep Yes

/No display,

- press YES to keep original programming or press NO to default the station parameters.

For LCD speakerphone without interactive buttons,

- relocate telephone and note Keep display and flashing HOLD light,

- press HOLD to keep original programming or press # to default station parameters.

For Non-LCD telephones,

- relocate telephone and note flashing HOLD light,

- press HOLD to keep original programming or press #to default station parameters.

For all digital telephone types,

- relocate telephone and take no action for 10 seconds,

- relocated telephone assumes parameters determined by

Section

6.9.16 programming.

Remember, station relocation only works with digital telphones.



6.9.16

Defaulf Relocaiion Response

Description:

When someone relocates a digital telephone from one station port to another port, the relocated telephone prompts the user to take action to determine the station parameters. The user can either accept the parameters from the station’s original port or accept those from the new port.

He or she has 10 seconds to make the choice. If the user takes no action, the station assumes the parameters determined by this programming procedure. If you set the programming choice to

YES, the station assumes the parameters from the original station port. If you set the programming choice to NO, the station assumes the parameters from the new port.

Programming:








6.9.17

Ring Back Tone

Description:

By default, when callers call an intercom party, they receive an intercom ring back tone to tell them that the called intercom station is ringing. Also, when callers call over the CO line, they receive a CO-style ring back tone to tell them that the distant CO telephone is ringing. Some system users find intercom ring back tone confusing. If you encounter this situation with your users, you can take this programming action to assign CO-style ring back tone to intercom calls.

Programming:




4. From system parameters menu, type item number for ring back tone and press ENTER.


Tone 1 = intercom ring back tone

Tone 2 = CO-style ring back tone





6.9.18

Day I, Day2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times

Description:

Programming:

With this programming procedure, set the begin and end times of the day 1, day 2, and night ringing time periods. Also refer to

Section

7.2.13 for related flexible ringing assignment programming.




4. From the system parameters menu, select day 1, day 2 or night ringing begin or end times and press ENTER.

5. Type times in 24-hour format (hhmrn) and press ENTER.








6.9.19

Services DTMF Highway

Description:

Programming:

The DXP Plus system allows the use of on-premise industry-standard telephones. To support the DTMF dialing of these industry standard telephones, the services board provides on-board

DTMF receiver circuitry. This circuitry supports dialing of one industry-standard telephone at a time. If you intend to support a population of industry-standard telephones that will generate a large volume of outgoing call traffic, you must install one or more DTMF receiver cards to provide additional DTMF receivers for the telephones. You have three choices as to where to install DTMF receiver cards.

1. One card to top position on the services board.

2. Up to three cards to each expansion cabinet’s interface boards

3. Up to four cards on an auxiliary board

You can add two additional cards to the lower two positions on the services board and use this programming action to enable their use. If you add these two cards and take this programming action, you can only add one card to the lower cabinet interface board instead of the three cards normally allowed there.








6.9.20

Serial Ports II-18 Select

Description: The communications card provides serial data ports for interfacing such items as open architecture interface applications, PC attendant positions, and the SMDA data printer. You can install up to two communications cards in the lower card slots on the services board, the expansion cabinet interface boards, and the main cabinet’s auxiliary board. You can make up to

16 serial data ports available by installing communications cards in every possible location.

You must take this programming action to match the port number of these serial data ports

(11-18) with the installation location that you choose for the communications cards. Also refer to Section 6.4.2 for instructions for programming the serial data port parameters

Programming: 1 a Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From system parameters menu, type item number for serial ports 1 l-18 select and press ENTER.




6-34 System Fea twres Programming

6.10

Paging Programming (Paging Zones)

6.10.1

Zone Programming

(Zone Names, Transmit Stations, Receive Stations)

Description:

Use this programming procedure to arrange stations to transmit and receive voice announcements, to and from a particular group of stations or to all stations in the system. Also use this procedure to assign names to paging zones when a site requires named zones.

Programming:

To place stations in paging zones and name the zones, use the following procedure.



3 . From systems menu, select paging zones and press ENTER.

4 . From paging zones menu, select zone programming and press ENTER.

5 . Enter zone number (l-8) and press ENTER.

6 . From zone programming menu, type item number for zone name and press ENTER.

7 . Type name (up to 16 character) and press ENTER.

8 . From zone paging menu, type item number for transmit stations and press ENTER.

9 . Press CONTROL E to edit station list, type a to add or r to remove and press ENTER.

10. Type station extensions (1001-1480) to add or remove them and press ENTER.


12. Repeat steps 8-l 1 for receive stations and press ENTER.



15. Repeat steps 4-15 for each zone or press ESCAPE to end.

Operation:

Press INTERCOM and dial 70 for zone 1 (all call) or dial 71-77 for zones 2-8.

6.10.2

Paging Access (Paging Access Time)

Description:

If you have assigned a paging zone and given that zone access to external paging equipment

(Section

6.10.1) plus enabled paging transmit capability (see

Section

6.10.3) at a station, that station has access to external paging equipment. With this paging access procedure, you can set the maximum length of time that a station can stay connected to the external paging equipment.

This timing setting also controls the amount of time a station can stay connected to the system zone paging.

Programming:










6.10.3

Paging Transmit

Description:

Use this procedure to give a class of service of stations the ability to transmit voice announcements to one or all other station monitor speakers. Also refer to Section 6.10.2.

Programming:










6.10.4

Paging Receive

Description:

Use this procedure to give a class of service of stations the ability to receive voice announcements with the station monitor speaker.

Programming:


2.

3 .

From main menu, select stations and press ENTER.

From stations menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.

4.

5 .

6.

7.

8 .

Type class of service number (l-32) and press ENTER.

From COS programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

Press SPACE bar for feature setting.



9 .

Repeat steps 4-8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end.

6.10.5

Meet Me Answer Page

Description:

When you enable this feature at a station, the station user can dial a code in response to an all-call or zone page and meet the pager in a private conversation.

Programming: l* Press CONTROL T for main menu.








Operation:

Hear a page, press INTERCOM and dial 78.


6.70.6

Relays

(External Paging Equipment Control)

Description:

If your installer connects customer-supplied external paging equipment to the system’s external paging port and that equipment requires external control, use this programming procedure to assign a relay to control the paging equipment. Also refer to Section 6.10.9.

Programming:






6 . From zone programming menu, type item number for relays and press ENTER.

7 . Type relay number (l-4,0 = none) and press ENTER.




6.70.7

Relays

(Line Answer From Any Station)

Description:

Assign one or more of the four relays located on the central processor board to track the ring signal of any or all line ports. You can arrange for a relay to track the ringing of the direct, delayed, day 1, day 2, or night ringing modes. Typically, installers wire these relays to control loud bells or other external ringers. Users, upon hearing the external ringers, can dial feature codes to answer the call that is ringing on the associated lines.

Programming:

1. Press CONTROL T to return to main menu.


3. From the system menu, select paging zones and press ENTER.

4. From the paging zones menu, select relays and press ENTER.

5. From the relays menu, select relay l-4 and press ENTER.

6. From the relay n menu, type item number for ring type and press ENTER.

7. Press CONTROL E for edit menu.

8. From edit menu, type a to add or r to remove and press ENTER.

9. Type line port numbers l-240 (type as n,nn,nnn or n-nnn to add or remove and press ENTER.

10. Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 6-9 for other ring types.



13. Repeat steps 5-12 for other relays.

14.


Operation: dial 6 5 = relay 1, dial 66 = relay 2, dial 67 = relay 3, dial 68 = relay 4 , dial 6 9 = relays 1 through 4 (when programmed with ringing)


6.10.8

Common Audible Ringer (Common Audible Ringer Inferface)

Description:

If your installer connects customer-supplied external paging equipment to the system’s external paging port, use this programming procedure to arrange for that equipment to sound the ring

signal of any or all lines.

You can arrange for it to track the ringing of the direct, delayed, day

1, day 2, or night ringing modes. Upon hearing the ringing over the external paging equipment, the user can dial feature codes to answer the call that is ringing on the associated lines.

NOTE: You can assign the same ringing pattern to an unused and unconnected relay

(Section

6.10.7) that you assign to the external paging equipment with the following procedure. If you do this, station uSers can dial the call pick up codes associated with the assigned relays to answer the calls that sound over the external paging equipment.

Programming:



3. From system menu, select paging zones and press ENTER.

4. From paging zones menu, select common audible ringer and press ENTER.

5. From common audible ringer menu, select ringing type and press ENTER.

6.

Press CONTROL E.

7. Type a for add, r for remove and press ENTER.

8. Type line port number l-240 (n-nnn or n, nn, nnn) and press ENTER.

9 . Press ESCAPE once and repeat steps 5-7 for next ring type or press ESCAPE twice.

1 0 . Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

Operation:

Directed call pickup = press INTERCOM % 4 then dial extension of ringing telephone

Group call pickup = INTERCOM # 4

Line pick up with relay assigned, press INTERCOM and dial relay code 66-68 or 69.

6.10.9

External Paging Port (External Paging Interface)

Description:

If your installer connects customer-supplied external paging equipment to the system’s external paging port, use this programming procedure to assign the external paging port to a paging zone. When users want to page through the external paging equipment they must dial the code for the paging zone that you assign to the external paging port with this procedure.

Also refer to

Section 6.10.6.

Programming:






6 . From zone programming menu, type item number for external paging port and press ENTER.

Type 1 for yes or 0 for no and press ENTER.

7 .





DXP Plus Programming Instructions lM166-123

6.11

Change Password (Password Programming)

You can use this programming procedure to change the program entry password for both the installer and the administrator and change the main programming station entry code for the system manager and the attendant.

The default sequence for both the installer and the administrator password entries is: I %746 %.

You can change part or all of either or both of these passwords to a customized sequence of up to 15 digits and/or letters. You can enter both upper and lower case letters if you desire but do keep in mind that the programmer must enter the password later just as you program it here with the letters properly placed in either upper or lower case. Thus, a new entry password could be as follows: nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn, or nnn, or just n (n = any number digit or any letter - for example 12345678, or enter, or Jane, or lA, or any other combination that you pick.)

The default system manager station entry code is as follows: INTERCOM button, +#+ # 746 *.

You can change the default password portion of this station entry code (the 6 portion) to a custom value of up to

15 digits. Thus, a new station entry could be as follows: INTERCOM button, +K #74 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn SC.

You can also change the feature code portion of the system manager station entry (the ##74 sequence). You can change the feature code from 4#74 to a custom code of up to four digits (no letters allowed).

Thus, a new system manager entry could be as follows: INTERCOM button, nnnn 6 %.

Further, if you couple the allowed password change with the allowed feature code change, a system manager station programming entry code could be as follows: INTERCOM button, nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn +K.

The default attendant station entry code is as follows: INTERCOM button, +# #0 %.

The feature code part of this entry is the +K#O sequence. You can change the feature code from the +I+#0 code to a custom code of up to four digits (no letters allowed).

Thus, a new attendant entry could be as follows: INTERCOM button, nnnn %.



6.11.1

Changing The Password

Description:

To change the password, follow this procedure.

Programming



3. From system menu, select change password and press ENTER.

4. Type a for administrator, i for installer, or s for station and press ENTER.

5. Type the current password and press ENTER.

6. Type the new password and press ENTER.

7. Retype the new password and press ENTER.

8. Repeat steps 3-7 to create other new passwords.

6.11.2

Changin The Feature Code

(System hianager And Attendant Station Entry Code)

Description:

To change the feature code follow this procedure.

Programing:

1~ Press CONTROL T for main menu


3. From system menu, select feature renumbering and press ENTER.

4. From the feature renumbering menu, select station programming and press ENTER.

5. From station programming menu, select row number for system manager or attendant and press ENTER.

6. Type new feature code (up to four digits - can include # and %) and press ENTER.

NOTE: The new feature code must not conjlicf with existing dialing codes. Either choose a diflerent feature code or use the programming procedure titled

Feature Renumbering to renumber any dialing codes that conflict.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set the other entry code if needed.





6.12

Feature Renumbering

Description: Dialing codes for user features are flexible so that you can renumber them. This may be necessary if site requirements dictate that personal or group intercom numbers fall within a certain block or sequence. Since new number assignments can not conflict with existing number, the system provides a block of unassigned numbers that you can use for renumber assignment. At default, the system assigns blocks of numbers in the following ranges:

1001-1480 = personal intercom,

4001-4480,5000-5039 = group intercom,

5040-5999 = unassigned,

600-899, f, # = feature codes

9 = line group 1



3 . From system menu, select feature renumbering and press ENTER.

4 . From feature renumbering menu, select feature catagory and press ENTER.

5 . From feature catagory menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6 .

Type new code and press ENTER.

NOTE: The number block of 504@5999 is unassigned at default.

Use it for code renumbering.




If a number conflict exists, the system will prompt you to remove the conflict.

Before responding to this prompt with a y (yes), be sure that doing so will not disturb other programmed features that depend upon the removed extension number. It is possible to create a situation where you must make several renumbering changes to completely resolve a number conflict.

Sys tern Features Programming 6- 4 1

6.13

Programming The T&-El Parameters

Description:

When the system is using the Tl--El option, you can program status and alarm alerting parameters. Also, you can program the DXP

Plus loss insertion that affects audio levels in the individual Tl--El channels. The specific programming instructions for the Tl--El parameters are shown int the followign list: l enable Tl--El status reporting and major alarm alerting,

0 program status log parameters,

0 program major alarm alerting parameters, l assign system status button to station, o print and clear the status log, l program DXP

Plus loss insertion.

6.13. I Enabling T&-El Status Reporting And Major Alarm Alerting

Description:

Use the following instructions to enable the Tl--El status reporting and major alarm alerting features. Use the Section 6.13.2 and Section 6.13.3 procedures to program the status reporting and alarm alarting parameters.

Programming:

1. Press CONTROL T to return to main menu


3 . From the system menu, select system parameters and press ENTER.

4 . From the system parameters menu,

- select Tl--El status reporting, and press space bar to select enabled.

- select major alarm alerting and press space bar to select enabled



7.


Relays

(External Tl --El Alamo Reporting)

Description:

Assign one of the four relays located on the central processor board to alert system users if a

Tl--El alarm occurs. Typically, installers wire the relay to control loud bells or other external ringers, but they can use visual devices if desired. Specified users, upon hearing this alarm, can dial a feature code to turn off the alarm. Generally, you should use relays 24 for this purpose since they are normally open. Because relay 1 is normally closed, you must use a specially configured device when using this relay.

Programming:

1 a Press CONTROL T to return to main menu.


3 . From the system menu, select paging zones and press ENTER.

4 . From the paging zones menu, select relays and press ENTER.

5 . From the relays menu, select l-4 and press ENTER.

6 . From the relay n menu, type item number for major alarm ring and press ENTER.

7 . Press space bar to select options.



IQ. Press ESCAPE to end.

6-42 Sys tern features Programming


6.13.2

Programming The T&-El Siatus Log Parameters

Description:

Use the following instructions to program the Tl--El status log parameters.

Programming:



3 . From the system menu, select Tl--El status log parameters and press ENTER.

4 . From the Tl--El status log parameters menu, select the row number for the error type you want to program.The cursor will move to the threshold entry field for that error type. Select any of the following threshold values:

0 = never log the alarm

1 = always log the alarm

(2 to 999) = check this number of alarm occurrences during the selected time period and decide whether or not to log the alarm. (The maximum threshold for the bipolar and CRC alarm trigger is 255.)

5 . After making your entry for the alarm threshold, press ENTER to advance to the next line in the threshold entry field, or press TAB to advance to the time period entry field.

6 . With the cursor in the time period entry field, toggle through the choices using the space bar.When the system displays the time period you want to use, press ENTER to go to the next line in the time period entry field, or press TAB to advance to the next line in the threshold entry field.




6.13.3

Programming The Major Alarm Alerfing Parameters

Description:

Use the following instructions to program the audible alarms for the various Tl--El system errors.

Programming:



3 . From the system menu, select major alarm alerting and press ENTER.

4 . Select the error type you want to program. The cursor will move to the threshold entry field for that error type. From the threshold entry field, select any of the following threshold values:

0 = never go to alert status

1 = go to alert status if the alarm is ever logged

2 to 999 = check this number of occurrences during the selected time period to decide whether or not to elevate the alarm to alert status.

5 . After making the alarm threshold entry, press ENTER to advance to the next line in the threshold entry field, or press TAB to place the cursor in the time period entry field.

6 . With the cursor in the time-period entry field, toggle through the choices using the space bar. When the system displays the time period you want to use, press ENTER to go to the next line in the time period entry field, or press TAB to advance to the next line in the threshold entry field.





/M/66-123 DXP Pius Programming Instructions

6.13.4

Assigning A System Status Button To A Station

Description:

Use the following instructions to program a system status button

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select stations and press ENTER.

3 . From stations menu, select button mapping and press ENTER.

4 . Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

(Screen presents current button map for review.)

5 . Type first level button code (Ll-L25,0-9) and press ENTER.

6 . Type mnemonic of feature (SYSST) and press ENTER


6.13.5

Printing The Status Log

Description:

Use the following program to print a system status log, a TI--El status log, or both. This program gives you the choice of printing the log to your VDT screen or a printer.

Programming:


2. From main menu, select printouts and press ENTER.

3. From printouts menu, select status log printout and press ENTER.

4. Type s for screen printout or p for hard copy printout through the SMDA/SMDR data printer and press ENTER.

NOTE: Press CONTROL C to stop a printout to the VDT screen when necessary. This action will not stop printout to a data printer.

5. When printout is finished, press ESCAPE to return to printouts menu.

6. Repeat steps 3-6 for next desired printout or press ESCAPE to end.

6.13.6

Clearing The Status Log

Description:

The following program allows you to clear either the system status log, the Tl--El status log, or both.

Programming:




4. From defaults menu, select system and press ENTER.

5. From the system defaults menu, select clear status logs and observe prompt.

6. From prompt, select system status log, TIL--El status log or both.


8. Press ESCAPE once to end the programming session.


6.13.7

Pad Level-Transmit, Receive

(Gain And Attenuation Settings For Line Transmit And Receive)

Description:

This feature enhances the DXP

Plus

Tl--El digital carrier transmission option, the pad level programming feature adjusts voice levels for both the transmit and receive circuits in the individual channels.

The choices include: Gain 2, Gain 1, Nominal, Loss 1, Loss 2, Loss 3, Loss 4, and Loss 5.

These settings provide an approximate +6 to -15 dB range of choices. Starting at the nominal setting, each gain level represents an approximate 3 dB amplification of the signal level from the previous setting, and each loss level represents an approximate 3 dB attenuation of the signal level from the previous setting. Because digital transmission does not lose volume level as readily as analog transmission does, it is likely that the receive level may be noticeably higher when using the Tl--El option. Therefore, you may need to select a low setting such as

Loss 2 for the voice level receive parameter when programming this feature for Tl--El lines that are being used exclusively for voice transmission. Further, if you choose a setting to increase the receive gain, you should carefully examine speakerphone operation. It is possible to select a receive gain that will, under certain conditions, interfere with proper speakerphone operation.

Programming:


2 From main menu, select lines and press ENTER.

3 . From the lines menu, select line programming and press ENTER.

4 . Type line port number (l-240) or name and press ENTER.

5 . From line programming menu, type item number for pad level-transmit and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER for pad level-receive.




10. Repeat steps 3-9 for each line or press ESCAPE to end.



Programming Station Features

lMl66-123

71

l

Programming Class Of Service Features . . . . . . . . . 7.1

l

Programming Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2

l

Button Mapping by Station (Square/Non-Square System) 7.3

l l

Phone Types (Telephone Types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4

Copy Model COS, Station,

Button Map (Block Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5

NOTE: When you program the station features, always per$orm the Telephone Types procedure (Section 7.4) before you perform the Button Mapping procedure (Section 7.3).

d

AtoZ K E L L A T R O N I C S , INC

Station Features Programming 7-l


7.

I Programming Station Class Of Service Features

7.1.1

Description:

Account Codes (Forced with Positive Verification)

After you have enabled the account code feature for the system, set its parameters, and programmed its list of account codes into the system (Section 10.3), use this procedure to turn the feature on for a station class of service and make it either forced or optional.

If you make it a forced account code, the user must enter an account code before the system will let him or her dial the number for an outgoing call. Also, on incoming calls a user must enter an account code before the system will allow him or her to make any future outgoing calls. See Section 10.8 for an exception to forced account code entry.

Programming: 1 D

2 .

3.

4.

5.




6.

7.

Type class of service number (l-32) and press ENTER.

From the COS programming menu, type item number for account code and press ENTER.

Press SPACE BAR for feature setting.

When finished, press ESCAPE.

8.

Press CONTROL N as necessary to display line number for forced account code and press ENTER.

9.

Type item number for forced account code and press ENTER.

10. Press SPACE BAR for feature setting.



7-2 Station Features Programming

7.1.2

Automaiic Hold

Automatic Hold On Intercom Number

Description:

The system automatically places a current inside call on hold when a station user presses an intercom button or line button other than the one for the active call.

Programming:





5. From the COS programming menu type item number for feature and press ENTER.





Automatic Hold On Lines

Description:

The system automatically places a current outside call on hold when a station user presses another line or intercom button.

Programming:










Station Features Programming 7-3

7.1.3

Description:

Background Music

Music or other supplied audio information is available at a station through the telephone speaker and is turned on or off by the station user when he or she dials the appropriate codes.

Use this procedure to assign background music to stations.

The music or information source is external to the common equipment and is customer supplied. The system will accept two music sources. You can use one source for this feature and the other source for the music on hold feature (Section 7.1.20).

Programming:








8. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press.ENTER.


Operation:

Music source one: on = INTERCOM % 11 off = INTERCOM # 1

Music source two: on = INTERCOM X 12 off = INTERCOM # 1

7.1.4

Description:

Call Cost Display (Display Of Costed Calls)

If you have arranged for the system to employ call costing (Section 12.5), you can use this procedure to arrange for an LCD speakerphone to display the cost of a call made from that station.

Programming:










7-4 Station Fea fores Programming

7.1.5

Call Forward

Call Forward Of All, Personal, Busy, or Ring-No Answer (RNA) Calls

Description:

Use this procedure to give users of an entire class of service of stations the ability to forward the calls that they receive at their stations to another station for answering. This feature allows these users to forward either all of the calls that their stations receive or just the calls they receive on their prime line and personal intercom number. Further, it can limit them to forwarding only the calls that their stations receive while it is busy or unattended (ring no-answer calls). If you choose this last option you will have to arrange the call forwarding default scheme at individual stations using the procedure in this section titled,

Cull Forward

RNA, Ring (On) Busy (Enhanced Call Forwarding).

Programming:


2 . From the main menu, select stations and press ENTER.

3 . From the stations menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.

4 . From the COS programming menu, select the class of service to be programmed and press ENTER.

5 . From the COS programming menu, type the item number for the style of call forwarding that you wish to enable and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE bar for desired setting and press ENTER.

7 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 5 and 6 for other call forwarding types to be enabled.




Operation:

All calls: INTERCOM +k 52 plus extension

Personal: INTERCOM +k 5 1 plus extension

Cancel: INTERCOM # 5



Call Forward RNA, Ring (On)

Busy (Enhanced Call Forwarding)

Description:

The call forward feature allows a station user to choose to receive several rings for RNA calls before the system forwards them. At default, the system immediately forwards calls that reach a busy station. You can take this programming action to allow calls to a busy station to ring in a subdued manner before they forward if the user chooses them to do so. This subdued ringing of calls to a busy station requires an idle intercom number at the busy station. plus, if you have assigned group intercoms to the station, you must program them into a hunt list, using the

Section 9.3.2 procedure, to ensure that this call forward feature will function properly.

Programming:



3 . From the stations menu, select station programming and press ENTER.

4 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

5 . From the station programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER,

6 . Press SPACE BAR to enable feature (“yes”) and press ENTER

7 . Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press-ENTER.

8 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4-6 for other stations



Operation:

All calls: INTERCOM # 54 plus extension

Personal: INTERCOM +k 52 plus extension



DXP Plus Programming instructions IMIW-123

Call Forward, Default Forward Type (For Busy Or Ring-No Answer Calls)

Description:

Use this procedure to arrange the call forward default scheme for individual stations. With this feature, the system will automatically forward ringing calls to another station after a preset number of rings. Since this is an automatic forwarding of the calls, the station users do not have to take any action; however, any user-enabled call forwarding that they do take at their stations will override this automatic call forwarding.

This procedure determines answers for the following questions: can busy/RNA call forwarding take place at a station, to what intercom number will calls be forwarded to, and what type of calls will the system forward?

You must also program the number of rings that must occur before this automatic call forwarding can take place (Ring No-Answer Rings, Section 7.2.13).

Programming:



3. From the stations menu, select station programming and press ENTER.


5 . From the station programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE BAR to enable feature(choose yes) and press ENTER for

ITCM FWD To menu.

7. From the ITCM FWD To menu, type intercom number to receive forwarded calls and press ENTER for FWD Type.

8. Press SPACE BAR to enable either personal calls or all calls and press ENTER.




Recall Call Forward

Description:

When you enable this feature for a station, any held, parked, and transferred calls that recall to a station while it is busy on another call follow the call forwarding path set up for that station.

Programming:





5. From the station programming menu. type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE BAR to enable feature (choose yes) feature and press ENTER.




Call Forward Outside

This is a planned feature that is not currently available.


lMl66-123 DXP Phs Programming Instructions

7.1.6

Call Park

Call Park Access

Description:

Access to call park enables the station user to place as many as nine calls in park zones, or orbits, where they are retrievable by all system users.

Programming:





5. From COS prog.ramming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.





Operation:

Park call: INTERCOM ?ic 91 through % 99 (for orbits 91-99)

Pick up parked call: INTERCOM # 9 1 through # 99.

Call Park Recall

Description:

A call that is left in a park orbit longer than the length of time that you program with this feature will automatically return to a hold recall condition at the parking station.

Programming:










7.1.7

Call Pick-LJD

Call Pick- Up, Enable

Description:

Operation:

A station user can dial a code plus an intercom number of a ringing or on-hold station to answer the ringing call or to pick up a held call at that station. Turn this call pick-up feature on for a station class of service using this procedure. Remember, you must also assign this class of service to the station that you wish to have this feature.

Programming:










INTERCOM +K 4 then dial intercom number of ringing or on hold station

Call Pick-Up Group

Description:

Operation:

Use this procedure to place a number of stations in a call pick-up group so that one station can answer a call ringing at any other station in the group.

Programming:






6. Type desired value for feature (l-16 = groups l-16,0 = no group) and press ENTER.




INTERCOM # 4


IMl66-123 DXP Plus Programming instructions

7.1.6

Description:

Programming:

Call Waiting (Tone)

Use this procedure to provide a station with the ability to send a tone signal to a busy called station Also, refer to Section 7.1.10 to enable basic camp-on ability at a station.





5 DFrom COS programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.





7.1.9

Description:

Tracker Access

Assign tracker access to a particular station intercom or group of intercoms using the following class of service (COS) programming. (The default is yes for COS 1 and COS32.) Refer to

Section 14.2 for further Tracker programming.

Programming:


2. From main menu, select Stations and press ENTER.

3. From stations menu, select COS Programming and press ENTER.

4. From COS programming, type class (l-32) and press ENTER.

5. From COS (class number) programming, select Tracker Access.

6. Toggle the SPACE bar to select yes/no and press ESCAPE twice.





7.1.10

Camp-On Programming

lMl66-123

Camp-On Originate, Camp-On Receive (Camp-On/Call Back)

Description:

Programming:

If a busy tone or a ring no-answer is encountered when one station calls another, the calling station user can initiate a camp-on to the busy station and wait for it to become idle or initiate an automatic callback when the called station becomes available. Use this procedure to enable camp on/call back for a class of service of stations. Also, use the Section 7.1.8 procedure to enable a call waiting tone, and use the camp-on tone procedure shown below to set the duration of the camp-on/automatic callback ring and the duration of a camp-on tone that the system sends to a busy station.

To arrange for station to initiate and receive camp-on to another station.





5. From COS programming menu, type item number for camp-on initiate and press ENTER.

6. From COS programming menu, type item number for camp-on receive and press ENTER.




Camp-On/Automatic Call Back Ring

Description:

Programming:

After you use

Section 7.1.8 to enable a call waiting tone, use this procedure to set the duration of the camp-on/automatic ringback ring that the system sounds when it returns a camp-on call to the original station..



3. From system menu, select system timing and press ENTER.





Camp-On Tone (Tone Duration)

Description:

Programming:

Use this procedure to set the duration of the camp-on tone that the system sends to a busy station.



3. From system menu, select system timing and press ENTER.





Station Features Programming 7-l 1


7.1.11

Do Not Disturb Programming

Do Not Disturb Inhibit

Description:

This feature prevents a station from entering the do-not-disturb mode of operation.

Programming:










Do Not Disturb Override

Description:

This feature allows a station to override a do-not-disturb condition at another station.

Programming:










Operation:

Make intercom call, hear DND tones, dial +# 03


7.1.12

Description:

Exclusive Hold

When you enable this feature, it prevents a telephone user at one station from picking up a call that someone placed on hold at another station.

Programming:










7.1.13

Executive Override Programming

Executive Override (Enable or Disable)

Description:

You can program a class of stations so its users have the ability to override a busy or a do not disturb condition at other stations.

Programming:










Operation:

Make intercom call, hear DND tones, dial ;ic 03

Executive Override Block

Description:

Use this procedure to arrange a station class of service that blocks executive overrides.

Programming:



3. From the stations menu, select COS programming and press ENTER..









7, 1.14

Idle Line Programming


Description:


Programming:










’


Description:

If you use idle line preference programming to give a station the ability to automatically connect to an idle assigned line when the user takes the handset off-hook, take this programming action to set the priority in which the system chooses the idle lines for use. You can place up to eight lines in this priority list.

Programming:






6. Type any eight line numbers l-240 (type as n,nn,nnn or n-nnn) and press ENTER.




7-l 4 Station Features Programming


7.1.15

Description:

/ST Distinctive Ringing

An industry-standard telephone can sound one ring cadence for intercom calls and a different ring cadence for outside calls or it can sound the same ring cadence for both types of calls. You must select one of these ringing styles on a station class of service basis. All industry-standard telephones with the same class of service have the same ringing style. See Section 7.2.35 for other industry-standard telephone programming requirements.




4. Type class of service number (l-32) that corresponds with class of service assigned to the IST and press ENTER.






7.1.16

LCD Messaging

Description: This procedure enables a class of service messaging feature. It allows station users to set a message at their stations that will be displayed on calling LCD speakerphones. You can use the second part of this procedure to program the actual LCD messages. Alternately, The attendant can program the LCD messages using procedures found in the attendant guide.

Also refer to Section 6.3.2.

Programming:

To enable feature for class of service,




5. From COS programming menu Type item number for feature and press ENTER.





To program LCD Messages,




4. From LCD messages menu, type selection (l-10) and press ENTER.

5. Type message and press ENTER. Message can be 16 characters long.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all messages. Press CONTROL N for more LCD message lines.





7.1.17

Meet Me Answer Page

Description:

Programming:

When you enable this feature at a station, its user can dial a code in response to an all-call or zone page and meet the pager in a private conversation.









Operation:

Press INTERCOM and dial 78.

7.1.18

Message Deposit (Response Messaging)

Description:

Programming:

This procedure enables a class of service messaging feature that allows station users to call an

LCD speakerphone and arrange for a message to be left on its display. The message is for the called party to read if she or he is unable to answer the caller.

Refer to Section 6.3.1 for details about programming the LCD messages that can be deposited. Also, you can use the procedure detailed in Section 7.3 to assign a Response Message button to the telephone; however, users can do this for themselves if they need the button









7x19 Message Wait Originate (Message Waiting)

Description:

Programming:

Operation:

When you enable this feature, a station user can dial a feature code to control the message waiting light at another station










Turn messagewaiting light on: press INTERCOM, dial f 3.

Turn messagewaiting light off: press INTERCOM, dial # 3.

7-16 Station Fea tares Programming

DXP PIUS Programming /nstructions lMl66-123

7.1.20

Music On Intercom Hold (Music Or Tone On Hold)

Description: With this feature enabled, the system supplies music, tone bursts or other audio information to callers while they are on hold. The music or information source is external to the common equipment and is customer supplied. Since the system accepts two music sources, you can use one source for this feature and the other source for the background music feature discussed in

Section 7.1.3.

When the system supplies tone bursts to callers while they are on hold, it sounds two .l second long tone bursts separated by a 0.1 second interval of silence. It repeats this tone burst sequence every 5 seconds.

Programming: For intercom number,










For lines,









Station Features Programming 7-l 7


7.1.21

Paging Receive

Description:

Use this procedure to give a class of service of stations the ability to receive voice announcements with the station handset and monitor speaker. For other paging requirements, refer to Section 6.10.

Programming:










7.1.22

Paging Transmit

Description:

Use this procedure to give a class of service of stations the ability to transmit voice announcements to one or all other station handsets and monitor speakers. For other paging requirements, refer to Section 6.ZO. Also refer to paging access, Section 6.8.6.

Programming:

‘I. Press CONTROL T for main menu.









7-18 Station features Programming

7.1.23

Ringing Preference (Ringing Line Preference)

Description:

When you enable this feature, a station can automatically connect to a ringing line when a user takes his or her telephone off-hook. Refer to Section 7.2. I3 for other ringing considerations.










7.1.24

Day Route Access/Night Route Access

Description:

You must use Section 12.4 to build and assign automatic route selection (ARS) route tables before the system can perform ARS on a dialed number.

Each of the six routes of a route table require a route access level of 1 to 4. ARS uses this route access level to determine if the dialing station has access to dial out on the route. It does this by comparing a station’s route access level to the required dial out access level. If the station route access level is greater than or equal to the route access level that you assign to the route, the system allows the station to access the route. Otherwise, the system will not accept the dialed number, and sounds an error at the station’s speaker or handset. The route access level allows some stations to gain access to the more costly routes in a route table while denying it to others. Just as you program each route from least to most costly, you must also arrange the station’s route access level to increase from a low level to a high level. This is necessary because once the system denies access because of the access level, it will not try another route. The more costly the route is, the higher the access level needed to access it.

Use the following programming procedure to assign a route access level of 1 to 4 to a station class of service for both day and night operation.

Programming:





5. From the COS programming menu, type item number for day route access and press ENTER.

6. Type l-4 for restriction level.

7. Press ENTER for night route access level, and type l-4 for restriction level.






7.1.25

Day Restriction Level/Night Restriction Level

Description:

Use restriction level programming (Section 11.4) to create as many as eight different toll calling categories based on the freedom to dial various numbers or the restriction from dialing them.

You can assign one of eight different restriction (1-8) levels or assign an “‘allow all” level or a

“‘deny all” level. Level

8 is the least restrictive from a station viewpoint but the most restrictive from a restriction table viewpoint. (For example, a station with a restriction of 8 is only restricted from dialing “always deny” numbers and it can dial numbers with restriction levels of l-8. A station with a restriction level of l-7 cannot dial a number with a toll restriction table entry of

8.)

The “allow all” entry ensures that the system applies no dialing restriction to a number (example: 91 I). The “deny all” ensures that station user can never a number (example: l-900).

Use the follwing procedure to ssign a restriction level to a station class of service. Program the restriction level value that accurately reflects the toll restriction dialing freedom expected by telephones with this class of service.

Programming:





5. From the COS programming menu, type item number for day restriction level and press ENTER.

6. Type l-8 for restriction level.

7. Press ENTER for night restriction level, and type l-8 for restriction level.



9. Repeat steps 4-8 for each COS or press ESCAPE to end,

?I. 1.26

System Speed Dial Groups

Description:

The system provides 500 system speed dial numbers. These numbers are divided into 20 groups with 10 numbers available in each group. Assign none, one, or a range of groups (n - nn) to each station class of service. Refer to

Section

6.6 for additional speed dial considerations.

Programming:






6. Type desired value (l-20) and press ENTER.




Operation:

While on hook, dial O-9 or press other speed dial buttons.


7.1.27

Station Monitoring

Description:

When you enable this feature, the busy lamp field (BLF) light of an associated direct station select select (DSS) button provides a visual indication of idle, busy, and ringing status of the station it represents. A station user can press this DSS button to make a one-button pick-up of a ringing station. When you disable this feature, the BLF shows only idle and busy conditions of the DSS station.

Programming:










7.1.28

Directed Station Hold

Description:

This feature, when enabled, allows station users to pick up the last call a user placed on hold at another station. This feature does not allow users to pick up exclusive hold calls or calls that are in the process of being transferred. Also, the feature does not allow users to send a directed call hold to a station where its user is scanning the currently held calls. In addition, this feature allows users to place a call on hold at another station and have this call appear to be the one that has been on hold there for the longest time. Features such as hold recall apply to the station that sent the directed call hold and not to the station that received the directed call hold.

Programming:










Operation:

Directed Hold: INTERCOM +K 90 then dial intercom number of destination station

Directed Pickup: INTERCOM # 90 then dial intercom number of station where call is on hold


/M/66-123


7.1.29

Description:

Remote Station Disable

The remote station disable feature, when enabled, allows users at stations with the proper class of service to dial a code and remotely disable or enable another station. Normally, you should give this capability to the system attendant but you can assign it to any class of service that is appropriate.

Programming:





5. From COS programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER,



8, Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.


Operation:

DisableStation:

Enable Station:

INTERCOM % 05, then dial intercom number of station

INTERCOM # 05, then dial intercom number of station

7.1.30

Remote Day Exception Number/Night Exception Number

Description:

A DISA caller may have access to an outside line where the toll restriction is based on the

DISA authorization code that is associated with a particular class of service. Remote day and night exception numbers allow DISA callers to dial numbers that their toll restriction normally prevents them from dialing. If a toll restriction table exception number matches one of the exception numbers that you assign using this procedure, the DISA caller is allowed to dial the number.

The exception number values that you can assign are 1 through 32 and NONE. You can assign

32 exception numbers to each DISA class of service. You also must assign one exception number to each toll restriction table line entry

(Section

II. 7). Refer to Se&ion 8.8 for complete

DISA programming details.

Programming:





5. From COS programming menu, type item number for day exception number and press ENTER.

6. Type day exception number (O-32) (n, nn, n-nn, or 0 for none) and press ENTER.

7. Repeat step 6 for night exception number.




7-22 Station Fsa tures Programming

7.1.31

Line Answer

Description:

This feature provides station access to a line for call answering purposes for an entire class of service of stations. Also refer to

Section

7.1.32. You must turn on both that feature and this one for a line to be fully usable.

Programming:



3 . From stations menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.

4 . Type class of service number (l-32) and press ENTER.

5 . From COS programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6 .

Press CONTROL E.

7 . Type a for add, r for remove and press ENTER.

8 . Type line port l-240 (type as n,nn,nnn or n-nnn) to be removed or added and press ENTER.

9 . Press ESCAPE three times.



7.1.32

Line Originafe

Description:

Programming:

This feature provides station access to a line for call originating purposes for an entire class of service of stations. Also refer to

Section

7.1.31. Both that feature and this one must be turned on for a line to be fully usable.






6 . Press CONTROL E.


8 . Type line port l-240 ( n, nn,nnn or n-nnn) to be removed or added and press ENTER.





lMl66-123 DXP Pius Programming Instructions

7.1.33

Periodic Line Tone

Description:

This when enabled, provides periodic warning tones to station users while they are busy on certain lines. The warning tone consists of one 500 ms burst, a 100 ms off period, and one100 ms burst. The tone reminds the users to keep their conversations short on these lines. You can enable this feature for a class of service of telephones and then specify the particular lines that you deem applicable. Further, you can select how often the tone sounds. Also refer to Section

7.1.34 for a related feature.

Programming:






6. Press CONTROL E.

7 , Type a for add, r for remove and press ENTER.

8 . Type line port l-240 (n, nn,nnn or n-nnn) to be removed or added and press ENTER.




Periodic Line Tone Time

Description: After you enable the periodic warning tones that remind users to lceep conversations short on certain outside lines, use this procedure to set how often that you wish the periodic warning tones to occur

Programming:









7.1.34

Maximum Call Duration

Description:

The system provides the maximum call duration feature. This feature, when enabled, automatically cuts off calls on certain lines after a preprogrammed time. The system will not cut off calls made to an emergency number (Section 10.4). The system sounds a warning tone at the busy station 10 seconds before it disconnects the call. The warning tone consists of one 800 ms burst followed by eight 100 ms bursts. Also refer to Section 7.1.33 for a related feature.

Programming:






6.

Press CONTROL E.


8 . Type line port l-240 (n, nn,nnn or n-nnn) to be removed or added and press ENTER.




Maximum Call Duration Time

Description:

After you enable the maximum call duration feature, use this procedure to set the cut off time.

Programming:









lMl66-123 BXP Plus Programming Instructions

7.7.35

Line Group Access

Description: Use this procedure to give a station access to line groups. Refer to Section 8.2 for other line group considerations.






6. Type line groups (l-16,0 = none, type as n,n,nn or n-nn) and press ENTER.




7.1.36

Line Group Queue

Description: Use this procedure to give a station the ability to queue for an idle line in a line group. Refer to

Section 8.2 for other line group considerations.



3. From station menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.






7.1.37

Line-To-Line Transfer (Unsupervised Conference)

Description: This programming feature gives a station the ability to set up an unsupervised conference between two lines.

Programming:










Line-To-Line Connect Duration

Description: After you have given a station the ability to set up an unsupervised conference between two lines, use this procedure to set the maximum amount of time that an unsupervised conference can continue between two lines. When the time out occurs, the system recalls the station from where the user enabled the unsupervised conference.








Sfa tion Features Programming 7-27


7.1.36

Voice Announce Block

Description:

When you enable this programming feature a station has the ability to block voice announced internal signalling when its user dials the proper code.

Programming:










Operation:

On: INTERCOM +t+ 2

Off: INTERCOM # 2

7.1.39

Description:

Infernal /ST Hash

If industry-standard telephone users access an outside line using the line group feature and then quickly press and release (flash) the telephone’s hookswitch, the IST will react in one of two different ways depending upon how you program this feature. Refer to

Section 72.35 for other

IST programming considerations.

q q

With this feature disabled, IST users can flash the hookswitch while on an outside line and generate a hookflash signal on the outside line; however, they cannot flash the hookswitch to obtain an intercom dial tone. The

Section

7.2.35 procedure sets the hookflash signal time.

This time determines whether the IST hookflash signal is long enough to recall the outside line dial tone or short enough to access the outside line features. Refer to the CO specifications for actual requirements.

With this feature enabled, IST users can flash the hookswitch while on an outside line and obtain intercom dial tone; however, they must dial + 08 after they flash the hookswitch if they need to generate a hookflash signal on the outside line.

Programming:



3. From stations menu, seIect COS programming and press ENTER.








7.1.40

Forced Account Codes

Description:

After you have enabled the account code feature for the system, set its parameters, and programmed its list of account codes into the system, turn the feature on for a station class of service and make it either forced or optional. If you make it a forced account code, the user must enter an account code before the system will let him or her dial the number for an outgoing call. Also, on incoming calls a user must enter an account code before the system will allow him or her to make any future outgoing calls. See

Section

10.3 for other account code programming considerations and to

Section

10.4 for an exception to forced account code entry.

Programming:





5 . From the COS programming menu, type item number for account code and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE BAR for feature setting.


8 . Press CONTROL N as necessary to display line number for forced account code and press ENTER.

9 . Type item number for forced account code and press ENTER.




7.1.41

Allow Busy Display (Display Of Busy Status)

Description

Programming:

When you activate this feature, users calling a busy station from an LCD speakerphone can read the busy status of the called station on the telephone’s display. (for example, Busy with line 2).

With the feature inactive, the display shows busy but does not reveal the busy status.











/M/66-123 DXP Pius Programming instructions

7.1.42

Clear Major Alarm Ring

Description:

This feature allows users to clear the major alarm ring condition from a telephone station. To make this feature available to users, you must first program a class of service as described below and then assign that class of service to the user’s telelphone station.

Programming:

Operation





5 . From COS programming menu, type CTRL-N to get to the page with the selection for clearing the major alarm ring.

6 . Select clear major alarm ring and press ENTER.

7 . Press SPACE bar to toggle between yes or no.




.

Clear major alarm ring condition: INTERCOM #90

9.1.43

Handset Volume On impacf Telephones

Description:

Programming:

You can program the handset volume feature on Impact telephones to offer the station user more choices in selecting the handset volume level locally from his or her telephone. Normally, users have up to 8 volume levels that they can select. However, when you program the high level, the user’s handset volume choices increase to 13.




4 , Type class of service number (l-32) and press ENTER.

5 . From COS programming menu, type CTRL-N to get to the page with the selection for high level handset volume.

6 . Select high level handset volume and press ENTER.

7 . Press SPACE bar to toggle between yes or no.




Operation:

While on a call, press VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN once for each change of volume.

To set loudness default to a certain level,

- lift handset,

- adjust loudness using VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN,

- press INTERCOM and dial +#7,

- hang up.


DXP Plus Programming Instructions IMl66-123

7.1.44

Restrict A RS Hookflash

(Automatic Route Selection, Hookflash Restriction)

Description: This feature enhances ARS response to hookflash action on an outside line when that action is followed by dialed digits. With the feature enabled, the system delays response to a hookswitch flash until after the ARS feature verifies as valid all subsequent dialed digits. With the feature disabled, the system sends the hookflash over the line without waiting for the ARS feature to verify the validity of subsequent dialed digits. This station class of service feature is applicable only when the ARS feature is active.




4 . Type class of service number (l-32) that corresponds with class of service that you wish to modify and press ENTER.

5 . From COS programming menu, type row number that corresponds with

Restrict ARS Hookflash and press ENTER.





7.1.45

Quick Transfer

Description: The quick transfer feature allows users to perform an automatic screened or unscreened transfer of an incoming line call without pressing their telephone’s TRANSKNF button. The transfer occurs automatically as soon as the user who answers the call dials the intercom number or access code for the transfer location. The system begins the call transfer process as soon as the user dials a digit on his or her dial pad, and effects the transfer as soon as the user hangs up or presses his or her telephone’s RELEASE button. When this feature is active, it greatly reduces the keystrokes that users must take to transfer calls over a tie line.

Programming: 1 e Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4 . Type class of service number (l-32) that corresponds with class of service that you wish to modify and press ENTER.

5 . From COS programming menu, type row number that corresponds with

Quick Transfer and press ENTER.






/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming lnsfrucfisns

7.1‘46 Enhanced LCD Display

Description: Take this programming action to enhance the display of an LCD-equipped telephone so that it shows both the name of the calling station and its personal intercom number.

Programming:

6 .

-7.

8 .

9 .

1 D

2 .

3 .

4 .

5 .




Type class of service number (l-32) that corresponds with class of service that you wish to modify and press ENTER.

From COS programming menu, type row number that corresponds with

Enhanced LCD Display and press ENTER.

Press SPACE bar for feature setting.




7-32 Station Features Programming

DXP Plus Programming instructions lMl66-123

7.2

Programming Station Features

7.2.1

Description:

Personal lnfercom Number

Use this programming procedure to change the station’s personal intercom number.

Also refer to Section 9. I.





5. From station programming menu, type item number for personal intercom and press ENTER.

6 . Type personal intercom number and press ENTER. The system indicates if a number conflict exists and prompts you to select another number or take appropriate action.




7.2.2

Description:

Display Name (Station Name)

You can assign a display name and a full name to a station. A display name is composed of a maximum of seven characters and shows in the display of an LCD speakerphone as a identification aid. A full name is composed of a maximum of 20 characters and shows in some voice mail and open architecture interface applications. You can compose a valid name from any alpha-numeric character; however, the first character of a display name must be an alphabetic character.

You can also add station names by following the procedure described in Section 9. I.

Programming: To assign a name to a station,





5 . From station programming menu, type item number for display name and press ENTER.

6 . Type display name (a-z, A-Z, O-9, punctuation, special characters, and so forth) and press ENTER.

A display name can be up to seven characters long.

7 . Type full name (a-z, A-Z, O-9, punctuation, special characters, and so forth) and press ENTER.

A full name can be up to 20 characters long.



10. Repeat steps 4-8 for each station that requires a name or press ESCAPE to end.


/M/66-123 BXP Pius Programming Instructions

7.2.3

Description:

Class Of Service

You can assign a group of preprogrammed class of service station features to a station. The system makes up to 32 different classes of service available, and you can program the feature values differently in each one.

Programming:










7.2.4

Description:

Si2eed Dial Sets

A speed dial set is a group of 10 speed dial locations. The system allocates three speed dial sets to each telephone as a default but you can allocate up to 10 sets to a telephone if you wish.

When a DSS5LF console is operated as a companion to a telephone, you can allocate speed dial sets at the companion telephone that the system will then share with the console. The system reserves one speed dial set for the telephone’s dial pad buttons &9. For other speed dial considerations, see

Section 6.6.

Programming:










7-34 Station Features Pr63gramming

..-

DXP Plus Programming instructions IMB-123

7.2.5

Description:

Programming:

Idle Line Prioritv

If you use

Section

7.1.14 to give a station the ability to automatically connect to an idle assigned line when the user takes the handset off-hook, take this programming action to set the priority in which the system chooses the idle lines for use. You can place up to eight lines in this priority list.






6. Type any eight line numbers l-240 (type as n,nn,nnn or n-nnn) and press ENTER.




7.2.6

Description:

Intercom Hunt List

Place personal intercom and group intercom numbers in a list with this programming procedure.

Calls to a busy hunt list number will search the list for an idle number at which to ring. Up to eight intercom numbers are allowed in a hunt list. These can be all group intercom numbers or one personal intercom number and seven group intercom numbers. See Section 9 for other intercom number considerations.

Programming:




4. Type personal intercom number of station being programmed and press ENTER.


6. Type intercom numbers for list (up to eight allowed separated with commas - include the personal intercom of station being programmed for intercom call hunting; otherwise, only line calls to the station will hunt) and press ENTER.





7.2.7

Description:

Group Intercom Access

Use this procedure to add group intercom numbers to stations for their use. Also refer to

Section 7.3 to map buttons for group intercom number selection. See Section 9 for other intercom number considerations.

Programming:







7. Type group intercom numbers ( type nnnn,nnnn, nnnn or type nnnn-nnnn) and press ENTER.

8. When finished, press ESCAPE three times.


IO. Repeat steps 4-9 for each station or press ESCAPE to end.


DXP Plus Programming Instructions IMIH-123

7.2.8

Prime Line Programming


Description:


NOTE: You can create an intercom hot line telephone by taking special programming action when you assign a prime intercom number.

Refer to the paragraph titled Prime

Intercom Number in this sectionfor details.

Programming:










Prime Line

Description:


Programming:






6. From prime line menu, type l-240 press ENTER.





/M/66-723 DXP PIUS Pfogramming Instrwctions

Prime Line Group

Description:

Use this procedure to choose the prime line group.

Programming:





5. From station programming menu, select prime line group and press ENTER.

6. From prime line group menu, type 1-16 and press ENTER.





Description: Use this procedure to choose the prime intercom number.

NOTE: You can create an intercom hot line telephone by assigning one telephone’s personal intercom number as the prime intercom of another telephone. When the user takes this programmed telephone ojf hook, it automatically calls the other telephone.

Programming: 1 D






NOTE: Remember, with this step, you can create an intercom hot line by typing a personal intercom number of another telephone.






7.2.9

Description:

Tone Or Voice Signalling (Tone First)

Intercom calls are either tone or voice signalled as a first choice with the other mode available as a second choice. Use this procedure to select the first choice in intercom signalling on a per station basis.

Programming:






6. Press SPACE BAR for feature value and press ENTER,




7.2. IO Call Announce Beeps (Call Announce Tone Bursts)

Description:

You can set the number of call announce tone bursts to be a value of from one to five and you can do this for each station in the system.

Programming:






6.

Type choice (l-5) and press ENTER.





/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming instructions

Z2.

II Default Forward Type

Description:

Programming:

Use this procedure to arrange the call forward default scheme for individual stations. With this feature, the system will automatically forward ringing calls to another station after a preset number of rings. Since this is an automatic forwarding of the calls, the station users do not have to take any action; however, any user-enabled call forwarding (Section 7.1.5) that they take at their stations will override this automatic call forwarding. This procedure determines whether or not intercom busy/RNA call forwarding can take place at a station. You must also program the number of rings that must occur before this automatic call forwarding can take place (Section

7.2.13). For additonal call forwarding considerations, see Se&on 71.5.






6. Press SPACE BAR to enable feature (choose ITCM FWD) and press ENTER.



Intercom Number Forwarded To

Description:

Programming:

Use this procedure to assign the intercom number of a station to receive another station’s forwarded calls.

1 D Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4, Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for station you wish to program and press ENTER.


6. Type intercom number for forward to station and press ENTER.




Forward Type

(For Busy Or Ring - No Answer Calls)

Description:

Programming:

Use this procedure to arrange what type of calls will forward from the station. You must also program the number of rings that must occur before this automatic call forwarding can take place (Section 7.2.13).






6. Press SPACE BAR to enable either personal calls or all calls and press ENTER.



9. Repeat steps 4-9 for each station or press ESCAPE to end..


DXP Plus Programming Instructions IMIW-123

7.2.12

Forward RNA Ring Busy (Enhanced Call Forwarding)

Description:

The call forward feature allows a station user to choose to receive several rings for RNA calls before the system forwards them. At default, the system immediately forwards calls that reach a busy station. You can take this programming action to allow calls to a busy station to ring in a subdued manner before they forward if the user chooses them to do so. This subdued ringing of calls to a busy station requires an idle intercom number at the busy station. Plus, if you have assigned group intercoms to the station, you must program them into a hunt list, using the

Section 9.2.2 procedure, to ensure that this call forward feature will function properly at station.

Refer to

Section

7.1.5 for other call forwarding considerations.

Programming:



3 . From the stations menu, select station programming and press ENTER.



6 . Press SPACE BAR to enable feature (“yes’) and press ENTER


8 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4-6 for other stations



Operation:

All calls: INTERCOM +k 54 plus extension

Personal: INTERCOM +K 52 plus extension



7.2.13

Flexible Ringing Assignments

Program ringing assignments on a per station/per line/per intercom number basis.

Ringing can be immediate, delayed, or special purpose. Use the procedures in this section to customize the ringing features for the system. If needed, use the Section 6.10.7 procedure to arrange for a relay to track the ringing of the direct, delayed, day 1, day 2, or night ringing modes (use Section 6.9.18 to program these ringing modes). plus, if your installer connects customer-supplied external paging equipment to the system’s external paging port, use the Section 6.10.9

procedure to arrange for that equipment to sound the ring signal of any or all lines.


Description:


Programming:





5 . From station programming menu, type the item number for feature and press ENTER.

6 . Press CONTROL E for edit.

7 . Type a for add or r for remove and press ENTER.

8 . Type line port number l-240 (type as n,nn,nnn or n-nnn) and press ENTER.





Description:


Programming:






6.

Press CONTROL E.






Day 1 Ring

Description:

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the day 1 ringing mode time period. Refer to the paragraph below titled, Day 1, Day 2, and Night

Ringing Begin and End Times, to set the beginning and ending times of this ringing.

Programming:







6 . Press CONTROL E to edit.

8 . Type line port number l-240 (n,nn,nnn or n-nnn) and press ENTER.




/M/66-123

Day 2 Ring

Description:

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the day 2 ringing mode time period. Refer to the paragraph below titled, Day I, Day 2, and Night Ringing

Begin and End Times, to set the beginning and ending times of this ringing.

Programming:






6 . Press CONTROL E to edit.








Description:


Programming:





5. Type times in 24-hour format (hhmm) and press ENTER.







Night Ring

(Night Transfer - Of Ringing)

Description:

Choose the line ports that you want to ring, along with the delayed ringing line ports, at stations during the night ringing mode of operation. The ringing arrangement that you configure here is the arrangement that is active both during the automatic night ringing time period and whenever the attendant manually activates the night transfer (of ringing) operation. Do note that the attendant commanded night ringing period supercedes the automatic night ringing period. Refer to the above paragraph titled, Day I, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times, %o set the time for the automatic night ringing period.

Programming:






6. Press CONTROL E.





11 0 Repeat steps 4-10 for each station or press ESCAPE to end.

Operation:

From an attendant station, On: INTERCOM % # 0 +K 031

Off: INTERCOM % ##0 & 032


Caller ID Ring No-Answer (RNA)

Description: This feature offers telephone users the ability to review calls that ring at their stations while they are away. The system stores caller ID RNA records and allows users to review them and use one-button dialing to return those calls that need returning. The feature also denotes the identification of the last station that reviewed the records thus helping prevent multiple call backs to the same number. After users review the caller ID RNA records, the system deletes the records from their telephones yet retains them in the SMDA storage so that they can look at them later if they must. For complete caller ID programming, refer to Section 14.1.






6 . Press CONTROL E for edit table.

7. Type a to add or r to remove and press ENTER.

8 . Enter caller ID line port numbers l-240 (enter n, nn, nnn or n-nnn) to serve feature at this station and press ENTER.





Description: This procedure sets the amount of rings that sound at one station port before the call rolls over to ring at another station port. Any system feature that requires a ring no-answer value (for example, call forwarding) uses the setting that you program here.







6. Type number of rings O-6 and press ENTER.






Description:

Program a station to ring in one of several distinctive tones for proprietary digital telephones and in one of four distinctive tones for analog telephones. While industry-standard telephones do not provide personalized ringing, you can set distinctive ringing for them using the Section

7.2.35 procedure.

Programming:










Operation:

INTERCOM +k +k 4 then dial ring code (l-8)

7.2.14

LCD Contrast (Digital Telephones - Only)

Description:

Adjust the intensity of the display on digital LCD speakerphones with this procedure. The user can also change the display contrast at his or her telephone using instructions provided in the system user’s guide.

Programming: 1 a Press CONTROL T for main menu.





6. Type l-8 and press ENTER.




Operation:

INTERCOM +k +& 5 l-58

7-46 Station Features Prcqamrnin$y

7.2.15

Service Observable (Service Observing)

This feature allows a station to enter an in-progress call in an unannounced, muted mode to monitor the conversation Use this procedure to give a station service observe capability and make other stations available for service observing.

Initiating Service Observe

Description:

Allow a station to perform a service observe operation.

Programming:






6. Press SPACE BAR for feature value and press ENTER.




Operation:

INTERCOM # 03 then dial the extension

Making A Station Service Observable

Description:

Allow a station to be service observed.






6. Press SPACE BAR for feature value and press ENTER.





/M/66-123 DXP Pius Pfogfamming Instructions

7.2.16

Day Exception Number/Night Exception Number

Description: Exception numbers allow stations to dial numbers that they are not normally allowed to dial by their automatic route selection/toll restriction levels. If the toll restriction table exception number matches one of the exception numbers that you assign to the station using the following procedure, the station is allowed to dial the number.


32 exception numbers to each station. You also must assign one exception number to each toll restriction table line entry (Section II. 7).

Programmirzg: 1 e Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4 . Type intercom number or name of station.

5 . From station programming menu, type item number for Day (or Night) exception number.

6 . Type exception numbers O-32 (n,nn or n-nn) or type 0 for none.

7 . Press ENTER for Night (or Day) exception number and repeat step 6.




7.2.17

SOHVA Beeps (SOHVA Tone Bursts)

Description: You can choose the number of tone bursts that each telephone user hears preceding a SOIIVA message to be from one to six.

Programming: 1 0 Press CONTROL T for main menu



4 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for station and press ENTER.


6 . Type choice (1-6) and press ENTER.





7.2.18

SOHVA Groups

Description: SOHVA calling groups control the pattern in which station ports receive and/or originate

SOHVA calls to one another. You must first form the SOHVA groups (Section 6.5.3) and then assign the groups to individual stations with the following procedure.





5. Type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Type group number &16 (n,nn or n-nn) and press ENTER.




7.2.19

Busy On SOHVA

Description: At default, the system returns a ring back tone to users who make SOWA calls to busy stations; however, this procedure allows you to arrange for telephone users to receive a busy signal instead of the ring back tone. This feature lets non-LCD telephone users know that a called station is busy.










Station Features Programming 749

/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming Insfrwetions

7.2.20

Pick-L/x,

Grcxms

Description.=

Use this procedure to place a number of stations in a call pick-up group so that one station can answer a call ringing at any other station in the group.

Programming:






6. Type desired value for feature (1-16 = groups l-16,0 = no group) and press ENTER.




Operation:

INTERCOM # 4

7.2.21

Description:

Thru-Dialing (Through Dialing)


Programming:



3 . From station menu, select station programming and press ENTER.

4 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of station being programmed and press ENTER.





9 . Repeat steps 4-8 level for each station or press ESCAPE to end.

7-50 Station Featwres Programming

7.2.22

Single Line TAP (Single Line Proprietary Telephone TAP Button)

Description:

Use this procedure to set the function of the TAP button on single line proprietary telephones.

Programming:




4 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of station being programmed and press ENTER.





10. Repeat steps 4-8 level for each station or press ESCAPE to end.

7.2.23

Ringing On Busy (Enhanced Subdued Ringing)

Description:

When a telephone is busy on a call and another call comes to that telephone, the system subdues the ringing of the second call to a lower volume but allows the call to continue to ring at this subdued volume until the caller abandons it. The system shortens the ringing of another call to model 8024S, 8124S, 8012S, and 8112s speakerphones that are busy in the speakerphone mode to one quick tone burst; however, if these telephones are busy in an off-hook manner

(non-speakerphone mode), the system still subdues the ringing of the second call to a lower volume and allows the call to continue to ring at this subdued volume until the caller abandons the call.

If a user does not wish to hear subdued ringing while he or she is busy on a call (even the one quick tone burst on those particular models that provide it) you can take this programming action to eliminate all ringing by a second call.

Programming:

1~ Press CONTROL T to return to the main menu.



4 . Type the personal intercom number or the previously assigned name and press ENTER.


6 . Press SPACE BAR to eliminate ringing on busy (sei option to no) and press ENTER.

7 . When finished press ESCAPE twice.

8 . Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end.


7.2.24

Allow Ringer Off (Ringer Volume Off)

Description: On some proprietary telephones, the user selects the ringer volume level by pressing a rocker-type volume control repeatedly to select one of four different volume levels. The lowest volume setting is essentially an off condition as the telephone sounds only one low-volume ring burst when a call rings the station.

Sometimes users would rather not receive even one ring burst. For these cases, program the system so that it completely silences the ringer at a telephone when its user selects the lowest volume setting.

Programming:

1. Press CONTROL T to return to the main menu.



4 . Type personal intercom number or the previously assigned name and press ENTER.


6 . Press SPACE BAR to turn ringer off (set option to yes) and press ENTER.



7.2.25

Disabled (Station Disable)

Description:

Disable a station port with this feature. Refer to Section 7.4 for the procedure for marking the station port as undefined after you disable the port. Use the Secdion 7. I.29 procedure to give a station the capability to disable other stations.











7.2.26

Consoles Installed (DSS/BLF Consoles Installed)

Description:

Use this procedure to assign DSS/BLF consoles to a station and to identify the ports that the consoles occupy.

NOTE: Before you can assign a console and nume the console port with this programming step, you must use the Section 7.4 programming procedure to identify the type of console and the station port to which it is assigned.





5 . Type item number for the consoles installed and press ENTER.


7 . Type item number for console ports and press ENTER.

8 . Type the port number for console ports (l-480,0 for none-up to four allowed) and press ENTER.




7.2.27

Programming Port (Database Programming Station)

Description:

This procedure assigns limited database programming ability to a station.

NOTE: You must ensure that there is an LCD speakerphone connected to the station port that you choose with this feature.




4. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of station and press ENTER.

5. From station programming menu, type item number for the feature and press ENTER.




9. Repeat steps 4-8 level for each station or press ESCAPE to end.



7.2.28

Automatic Transfer On Busy

Description: You can enable automatic attendant transfer on busy for individual station ports if you wish.

With this feature enabled, the system will ring a busy telephone when the voice mail system is attempting to transfer a call to it thus giving the user the option of leaving his or her present call and taking the new one. With the feature disabled, the busy telephone is not signalled by the presence of a new call and the voice mail system will automatically route it to the busy telephone’s voice mail box. For complete voice mail programming, see Section 14.5.










7.2.29

Headset

Description: This procedure enables the use of a headset at a telephone.




4 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned nameof station being programmed and press ENTER.







7.2.30

A ttendan t Position

(Alternate. Ovetflo w)

Description:

The attendant position station provides incoming call direction, and controls system-wide operating features. Additionally, the attendant position is responsible for certain programming features. The system defaults two stations as attendant positions (logical station numbers 479 and 480) but it does not limit the number of attendant positions that it can support. Also refer to

Section 6.9.13.

Programming:





5. From station programming menu. type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE bar for setting and press ENTER.

7. Type personal intercom number for alternate attendant (if needed) and press ENTER.

8. Type personal intercom number for overflow attendant (if needed) and press ENTER.



11. Repeat steps 4-10 for each attendant position or press ESCAPE to end.


lMl66-123 DXP Plus Programming instructions

7.2.31

Extended DTMF Dialing

Description:

You can enable the extended DTMF length dialing feature on a per station basis with this programming procedure. The system generates DTMF tones of extended length when users take their telephones off-hook and then wait until after the system sounds the extended dialing tone burst before they engage automatic dialing. This feature also allows an analog station to generate extended DTMF tones when its user manually dial numbers at the telephone’s dial pad after hearing an extended dialing tone burst. Since digital telephones generate a DTMF tone for as long as the user holds the dial pad button down during manual dialing, this feature is only applicable on automatically dialed numbers at digital telephones. Refer to the following paragraph for the procedure that sets the time length of the DTMF tone.

Programming:










DTMF Extended Dialing (Tone Length)

Description:

Use this programming feature to set the length of the DTMF tones. The system generates

DTMF tones of extended length when users take their telephones off-hook and then wait until after the system sounds the extended dialing tone burst before they engage automatic dialing

(for example, press speed dial buttons or saved number redial button) at their stations. Also, if analog telephone users take their telephones off-hook and then wait to begin manually dialing until after the system sounds the extended dialing tone burst, the system will entend the length of the manually dialed DTMF tones. After setting this extended DTMF tone length, you must use the procedure detailed directly above to enable the feature’s use at each station where it is needed.

Programming:









7.2.32

Softkeys Setup

(Interactive Button Suppotfj

Description:

The system provides support for interactive buttons on LCD LJ of 7010s and 7016s (all revisions), and 7700s (revision H P: buttons and the associated expanded displays provide quick, ,_ straight-forward button programming without the need for 21 interactive button support is disabled; therefore, you must tzk

When you enable them, the system overrides any previous m;;, this new assignment. If, after you have enabled the support, any of the interactive buttons to another assignment, the no button. In addition, the system will clear the remaining two k button support. If you replace any of these LCD speakerphon, the system recognizes it as such and does not assign interactiallows you to enable interactive buttons with station programrr means for assigning interactive buttons with the button maPr.

enabled the interactive buttons, you can look at the button assig procedure, and note that the system identifies them as SOFT ,

Programming:

1. Press CONTROL T to return to the main menu.


3 . From stations menu, select station programming and p:--’

4. Type personal intercom number or the previously assigne,

5. From station programming menu, type the item number for

6 . Press SPACE BAR to enable interactive buttons (set option :


8. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume L

Uvll66-123

Troduct codes interactive

:I features and

..ult, the

.JII to enable it.

. buttons with

LO button map

3 effect at that

%e interactive lay telephone,

:ce the system not provide a

: you have utton mapping

T3.

‘TIER.

ENTER.

zss ENTER.

.NTER to end.

$m7nli”g 7 - 5 7


7.2.33

/ST Hold Confirmation

Description:

Industry-standard telephones sound a special hold confirmation tone when their users place calls on hold. Prior to this software release, these telephones returned to intercom dial tone when their users placed calls on hold. The system defaults with the special confirmation tone enabled; however, you can disable the feature if you wish. The confirmation tone is three 80 ms.

on -80 ms. off tone bursts repeated at 800 ms. intervals. See Section 7.2.35 for other IST programming considerations.

Programming: 1. From main menu, select stations and press ENTER.


3. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for IST and press ENTER.


5. Press SPACE bar to enable or disable feature (yes = enable, no = disable) and press ENTER.




7.2.34

Transfer Ring Cadence

Description:

A telephone user can select the ringing cadence that announces a transferred line call. They have two choices as follows: Ring cadence one provides a 2 sec. on-4 sec. off tone. Ring cadence two provides a 0.5 sec.- 5Ssec. off tone. Ring cadence one is available to telephone users as a default and they can select the other one as they need it. Use this procedure to select the default cadence for each system station.

Programming: 1.

2 .

3 .

6 .

7 .

4 .

5 .

8 .

9 .



From stations menu, select station programming and press ENTER.

Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

From station programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

Press SPACE bar to select cadence choice for default.



Repeat steps 4-8 for each station or press ESCAPE to end.



7.2.35

Industry-Standard Telephone Support

The DXP plus digital communications system supports the use of industry-standard telephones.

It does this through the use of industry-standard telephone station interface circuit boards and a DXRNG ring generator assembly. Refer to the Comdial publication IMI89-184, Installing An Industry-Standard Telephone Station

Board In The DXP Plus Digital Communications System, for installation details. Program the DXP Plus system to operate properly with industry-standard telephones by assigning values to DXP

Plus features using the procedures given below. They are presented in a typical order of progression but you can perform them in any convenient order.

IST Hold Confrmation

Description: Industry-standard telephones sound a special hold confirmation tone when their users place calls on hold. Prior to this software release, these telephones returned to intercom dial tone when their users placed calls on hold. The system defaults with the special confirmation tone enabled; however, you can disable the feature if you wish. The confirmation tone is three 80 ms.

on -80 ms. off tone bursts repeated at 800 ms. intervals

Programming: 1. From main menu, select stations and press ENTER.


3 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for IST and press ENTER.


5. Press SPACE bar to enable or disable feature (yes = enable, no = disable)

6. and press ENTER.

Press ESCAPE twice.



IST Ring Timeout

Description: Use this procedure to set the number of times that the system sends a ring signal to an industry-standard telephone on a system-wide basis. Although the ringing stops at the industry-standard telephone when the time-out occurs, the system continues to present the call at the telephone for answering until the caller abandons it.









lMl66-123 DXP Pius Programming Instructions

IST DTMF Receiver Timeout

Description:

You can program the amount of time that the system waits to receive a DTMF tone from an industry-standard telephone, after the user has lifted the telephone’s handset and before he or she has pressed a dial pad digit, on a system-wide basis. The system disconnects the telephone after this time-out occurs. If this happens, the user must hang up the handset and lift it again to re-establish the dial tone.








IST Distinctive Ringing

Description: An industry-standard telephone can sound one ring cadence for intercom calls and a different ring cadence for outside calls or it can sound the same ring cadence for both types of calls. You must select one of these ringing styles on a station class of service basis.

All industry-standard telephones with the same class of service have the same ringing style.

NOTE: Do not enable distinctive ringingfor voice mail ports.

Programming:

1 0 Press CONTROL T for main menu











IST Flash Time

Description:

You can program, on a system-wide basis, the timed length of the signal that results when a user of an industry-standard telephone presses and releases the telephone hookswitch (or presses the

TAP button if available on his or her telephone).

Often, a signal with a short time length

(typically 5OG750 ms) serves to alert the system to receive a feature code (flash) while a signal with a long time length (typically 1.5-2.0 set) serves to disconnect the line and re-establish dial tone (recall). The value that you set with this procedure is the maximum value for recognizing a flash from an industry-standard telephone. You can also set the minimum value for recognizing a flash from an industry-standard telephone.

Programming: 1 s Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From timing menu, type item number for minimum flash time and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar for minimum time and press ENTER to accept setting.

6. Press ENTER to select maximum flash time line item.

7. Press SPACE bar for maximum time and press ENTER to accept setting.


IST Ringing Per Phase

Description:

While the installer typically connects one industry-standard telephone per IST station port, he or she can connect two industry-standard telephones per IST station port; however, the telephones will share the same assigned intercom number. When he or she installs one telephone per port, you must set the IST ringing per phase feature to 16. When the installer places two telephones at any IST station port, you must change the IST ringing per phase feature to 8. A setting of 16 allows up to 48 industry-standard telephones per cabinet (main cabinet and expansion cabinet) to ring simultaneously. A setting of 8 reduces this simultaneous ringing total to 24 telephones per cabinet. This programming selection is on a system-wide basis.

Programming:



3. From system menu, select system parameters menu, and press ENTER.

4. From the system parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ESCAPE once.



IM166-123 DXP Plus Programming hstructions

IST Ringing On Busy

Description:

You can program industry-standard telephones to provide a ringing on busy signal to users.

With this feature, when an IST telephone is busy on a call and another call comes to that telephone, the system sounds three quick tone bursts in the telephone’s handset receiver. If a user does not wish to hear the ringing on busy tones while he or she is busy on a call, you can take this programming action to eliminate it.

Programming:



3. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for IST and press ENTER.


5. Press SPACE bar to enable or disable feature (yes = enable, no = disable) and press ENTER.



Internal IST Flash

Description:

If industry-standard telephone users access an outside line using the line group feature and then they quickly press and release (flash) the telephone’s hookswitch, the IST will react in one of two different ways depending upon how you program this feature.

q

With this feature disabled, IST users can flash the hookswitch while on an outside line and generate a hookflash signal on the outside line; however, they cannot flash the hookswitch to obtain an intercom dial tone. The previous Section 7.2.35 procedure titled, IST Flash

Time, sets the hookflash signal time. This time determines whether the IST hookflash signal is long enough to recall the outside line dial tone or short enough to access the outside line features. Refer to the CO specifications for actual requirements.

EI With this feature enabled, IST users can flash the hookswitch while on an outside line and obtain intercom dial tone; however, they must dial +K 08 after they flash the hookswitch if they need to generate a hookflash signal on the outside line.

Programming:












IST Ringing Patterns

Description:

You can program the ringing pattern for either IST ring mode one or IST ring mode two. Mode one causes a two-second ring phase while mode two causes a shorter one second ring phase.

For this feature to function properly, insure that the industry-standard telephone interface board contains firmware revision 2C or higher




4. Select IST ring mode from the system parameters and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar to toggle between mode 1 (default) and mode 2.


7 . Press ESCAPE twice to end.

IST Ring Frequency

Description:

The system will allow you to set a ring frequency of 25 Hz for international applications or set a ring frequency of 21 Hz for domestic applications. Choose a setting that matches the ring frequency of the installed ring generator.




4. Select IST ring frequency from the system parameters and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE bar to toggle between choices of 21 Hz and 25 Hz.

6, When finished, press ENTER.


7.2.36

Ring Back On Busy

Description: With this feature enabled, when someone calls another telephone and the calling party is busy on an outside line, the caller hears a ring back tone-not a busy tone. When the caller is using a non-display telephone he or she has no means of knowing the busy status of the called party.

(Remember, LCD speakerphones display called party status- for details on this feature, see

Section 7.1.39.) With this feature disabled, callers hear a busy tone instead of a ring back tone when they call a party who is busy on an outside line. You must enable this feature if you plan to enable the feature titled Automatic Attendant Tranger On Busy (see Section 145.3 for details).

Programming: 1. Press CONTROL T to return to the main menu.





6 . Press SPACE BAR to choose setting( no = busy tone, yes = ring back tone) and press ENTER.



Station Features Programming 743

iMl66-123 DXP Plus Programming Instructions

7.3

Description:

Programming:

Button Mapping By Station (Square/Non-Square System)

The system assigns certain functions to each of the station buttons as a default condition.

Re-assign the button functions with this programming feature. You can assign functions at a first level or at a second level at each button Assign functions at the first level that require status light feedback because the system does not provide status light feedback to buttons at the second level (press CONTROL N to display the second level).

You can also use this procedure to map the buttons on a DWBLF console (press CONTROL N to display the console buttons) but first you must use the Section 7.2.26 procedure to assign the console to the station and name the console port.

To map the telephone buttons with features,



3 . From stations menu, select button mapping and press ENTER.

4 . Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

(Screen presents current button map for review.)

5 . Type first level button code (Ll-L25,0-9) and press ENTER.

6 . Type mnemonic of feature from list (below) and press ENTER. (Press and hold SHIFT and type ‘7 for mnemonic definitions-press any key to return to button map.)

NOTE: If you press ENTER withoutfirst typing a mnemonic, the system “blanks” that button.

Users can program “blanked” buttons as personal speed dial buttons.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all desired buttons.

8 . Press CONTROL N and repeat steps 5 and 6 for second level (or DSS/BLF console).

9 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4-8 for each station.


To map dial pad buttons with speed dial numbers,

1. Repeat steps 1 through 4 from the previous procedure.

2 . Type dial pad button number (1-O) and press ENTER.

3 . Type i for intercom, I for line, g for line group, or p for prime line or last line used, or a for automatic route selection and press ENTER.

4 . Type l-240 to choose line or type 1-16 to choose line group and press ENTER.

5 . Type speed dial number (up to 16 digits) and press ENTER.

6 . Repeat steps l-4 for all desired dial pad buttons and then repeat steps 7-9 from the previous procedure.


7.3.1

Feature Mnemonic List

LCDMS

LNG##

LN###

LOCK

MMEPG

MSGWT

MUSC#

NIGHT

OAI##

OVERFL

PAGE#

PARK#

PRVCY

QUEUE

RLSE

RSPW

S-OBS

SAVE

SDIAL

SILNT

SOHVA

SPLIT

SRIAL

SYSST

TAFS#

TBUSY

TRACK

VABLK

VOLSV

XVM##

DSTAT

EXOVR

FEATR

FWD-A

FWD-P

FWDRA

FWDRP

GPLSN

GPKUP

HDST

HOLD

ITCM

I####

ACCT

ALTRN

ANSWER

APACE

ARD

ARECD

ARING

AUTH

BOTH

CAMP

CID

D N D

DPKUP

(account code button): allows users to enter an accent code

(alternate attendant button): places station in alternate attendant mode

(answer button): answers a ringing call

(auxiliary page button): allows auxiliary page operation (model 80243 and 77OOS-rev I and later)

(automatic redial button): redials last dialed number 10 times with one minute off time

(auxiliary record button): allows auxiliary record operation (model 80243 and 77COS-rev I and later)

(auxiliary ring button): allows auxiliary ring operation (model 80243 and 77OOS-rev I and later)

(authorization code button): prompts for authorization code entry

(both button): conferences current party with last party placed on hold

(camp on button): engages camp on feature at busy station or line

(caller ID button): sends caller ID RNA records to LCD

(do not disturb button): enables/disables do not disturb mode

(directed call pick up button): picks up call ringing at another station

(DSS status button): selects station DSS status view (line and intercom or just intercom)

(executive override button): allows executive override of another station

(feature button): use with feature code to access certain features

(forward all button): enable/disable all call forwarding

(forward personal button): enable/disable prime line and personal intercom call forwarding

(forward all RNA button): enable/disable all call after RNA forwarding

(forward personal RNA button): enable/disable prime line and personal intercom calls after RNA forwarding

(group listen button): allows group listen operation (digital multiline telephones)

(group pick up button): picks up a call that rings anywhere within a group of stations

(headset button): enables/disables headset mode

(hold button): places current call on hold and scrolls list of held calls

(intercom button): accesses personal intercom number

(intercom number button): group intercom number or station DSS

(LCD messaging button): enables/disables LCD message feature

(line group button 1-16): accesses one of 16 line groups

(line button l-240): accesses one of 240 lines

(lock button): prevents/allows station use (prevents station use until someone dials an authorization code)

(meet me page button): answers a page by meeting intercom paging party on line

(message waitng button): turns on/turns off message wating light at another station

(music source button 1,2): turns on/turns off background music

(night mode button): allows attendant to place system in night transfer (of ringing) mode

(open architecture button): special Enterprise functions (used with Total Control PC Attendant and Enterprise Toolkit options)

(overflow button): turns on/turns off overflow mode

(paging zone button l-8): allows group paging

(park orbit button l-9): parks and retrieves calls

(privacy button): releases privacy on line so another station can join a call

(queue button): queues station at busy line group to await idle line

(release button): disconnects current call

(response button l-30, t = universal): sends response message to another station for SOHVA and message deposit

(service observe button): enables station to service observe another station

(dynamic save button): saves last dialed number and line on which it was dialed

(speed dial): saves often dialed number at a button

(silent ringer button): mutes ringing for current call

(SOHVA button): sends SOHVA to another station

(split button): allows station user to talk to two different parties

(serial call button): transfers a serial call to specified stations

(system status report button): indicates system status report

(night answer button l-4, t= all calls): answers call indicated by system’s ringing relay

(line test busy button): views status of busy line

(tracker pager activate button): sends message to pager display

(voice announce block button): blocks/allows voice announcements

(save volume button): saves volume settings (digital multiline telephones)

(transfer to voice mail button l-32): transfers call to voice mail box when used with DSS button

NOTE: Many

of the feature buttons require programming action before they canfunction as described.


/M/66-123 DXP Pius Programming fnnstructions

7.4

Description:

Phone Types (Telephone Types)

This programming feature allows you to identify the particular type of system telephone equipment that you or your installer will connect to each station port.

You can also mark the station port equipment as undefined so that the system will not test the port for a specific type of equipment and will not include the port in any menu presentations.

Also refer to Section 7.2.25 for the procedure for disabling a station port.

Programming:




4 . From station programming menu, select phone types and press ENTER.

5 . From the phone types menu, select desired equipment or none

(for undefined) and press ENTER.

NOTE: Depending upon which equipment you choose, the system will present diflerent sub-menus that allow you tofurther define the equipment as to the quantity of lines it can serve, whether it is a speakerphone, whether it is a DSSZ3LF console, and other defining characteristics.

Follow the sub-menu prompts and press ENTER after you have typed each selection.

6 . Type the station port number (f-480) and press ENTER.


Comdial Express Telephone Types ExecuTech Telephone Types l2xlm4s~

23 Line

6620,6620E, 66208,6620T,

6614,6614E, 66148,6614T 22 Line

17 Line

Proprietary Single Line

3ZButton Console

70-Button Console

A-M-X

OPX-x

VMI-X

66OOE, 6600s

6701X

DB32S

DB70

Al-I-X

OPX-x

VMI-X

19 Line

10 Line

2 Line

Proprietary Single Line

3ZButton Console

6CButton Console

Al-I-X

OPX-x

VMI-X

6116X, 6116s. 6016s

6110X, 61 lOS, 6010s

6102X

6701X

XB32X

XB64X

ATI-X

OPX-x

VMI-X

ExecuTech 67xx Telephone Types

I1xEplUSJ&&&

14 Line

6714S, 6714X

12 Line

6 Line

2 Line

SLPS WI Autodials

3ZButton Console

6700s

6706X

6702X

6709A*

EB32X

DigiTech Telephone Types

I2xEPlu.s~

24 Line

22 Line

17 Line

Single Line

3ZButton Console

77OOs, 7714S, 7714x

Rev H and later

7714x. 7714s

Rev H and earlier

7700s

7701x

DD32X

Americom Telephone Types

DXP Plus Menu List

19 Line

10 Line

2 Line

Single Line

32-Button Console

64-Button Console

ATI-D-1PT

7016S,7116S,7116X

7010s,7110s,7110x

7102X

6701X not currently available

XD64X

ATI-D-1PT

Impact Telephone Types

~lusJ&&&&

24 Line

12 Line

Single Line

6CButton Console

Wireless Telephone Type

I1xEPlusU

Wireless

8024S, 81243

8012S, 8112S, 8112N

8101N

IB64X

9ooMX

* Use the Section 7.3 procedure to “blank” the 12 speed dial buttons on this telephone so that users can custom program them for personal use.


7.5

Copy Model COS, Station, Button Map (Block Programming)

7.5.1

Description:

Block Programming, Class-Of-Service

Program some or all class-of-service categories to match the programming of a model class-of-service category.

Programming; 1 0 Press CONTROL T for main menu.


3. From the station menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

4. Select model COS by typing COS number l-32 for source COS and press ENTER.

5. Type COS numbers of destination COS(s) (n,nn or n-nn) and press ENTER.

Values of source COS is assigned to destination COS(s), and programming is ended.

7.52

Description:

Programming:

Block Programming, Station Features

Program some or all stations to have the same features as a model station. The system does not copy the following features from the model station:

- station name,

- intercom numbers,

- personal speed dial numbers,

- DSS/BLF console installed,

- console port,

- alternate attendant,

- ovefflow attendant,

- interactive button support.



3. From the station menu, select model station and press ENTER.

4. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of source station and press ENTER.

5. Type personal intercom numbers or previously assigned names of destination stations (nnn,nnn or nnn-nnn) and press ENTER. Values of source station is assigned to destination stations, and programming is ended.

7.53

Description:

Block Programming, Button Mapping

Program some or all stations to have the same button features as a model station.

Programming;

1. Press CONTROL T for main menu


3. From stations menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

4. Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name of source station and press ENTER.

5. Type personal intercom numbers or previously assigned names of destination stations (nnn,nnn,or nnn-nnn) and press ENTER.

Button map of source station is assigned to buttons of destination stations, and programming is ended.

Sfa tion Features Programming 7-67


7.6

Description:

Station Hunting

Station hunting is a feature that becomes available to DXP

Plus users with software revision

3.A and later. Station hunting is a means of routing both intercom and outside calls through an installer-determined logical grouping of stations and on to a designated ovefflow location in case of no answer or if all stations in the hunt group are busy. To configure station hunting, you must program the following parameters:

Options:

Programs the control and informational items about the hunt group.

Member List:

Programs the list of stations within a hunt group. This section shows the member stations in their assigned hunting order and allows stations to be added, deleted or inserted at any point in the list.

Delete:

Deletes the selected hunt group from the system and frees its used resources.

Programming:



3. From stations menu, type item number for hunt groups and press ENTER.

4. Type number for hunt group (l-64) and press ENTER.

5. For new hunt groups, type pilot number for hunt group.

6. Type item number for options, member list, or delete hunt group and press ENTER.

7.6.1

Options

(Stat/on Hunting)

Pilot Extension

Description:

This is the extension number that callers use to call or route calls to this hunt group. This number is analogous to a station’s personal intercom or extension number and follows the same numbering plan restrictions.

Programming:






6. Type item number for options, and press ENTER.

7. Type item number for pilot extension and press ENTER.

8. Type pilot extension and press ENTER.

NOTE: The pilot extension can be up to

four

digits long but must not conflict with assigned intercom numbers and feature codes. The system prompts you to remove any conflict before proceeding. Exercise care when you remove conflicts because references to the dialable extension may be used in other parts

of

the system and removing them could cause obscure results.





Name

Description:

The hunt group’s name is the seven character alpha-numeric name of this group that is used for

LCD display and reference.

Programming:







7. Type item number for name and press ENTER.

8. Type name and press ENTER. (Name can be up to seven alphanumeric characters and may begin with a number.)



Full Name

Description:

The hunt group’s full name is the 20 character alpha-numeric name of the group that is used by

OAI applications.

Programming:







7. Type item number for full name and press ENTER.

8. Type name and press ENTER. (Full name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters and may begin with a number.)




lMl66-123 DXP Plus Programming hstructions

Search Type (Type of Hunting)

Description:

There are several distinct types of station hunting.

Terminal Hunting

Terminal station hunting always delivers a call to the first idle station programmed in the hunt group. If the station does not answer within a programmed amount of time (programmed as the

Call Advance Timer), the system delivers the call to the next sequential idle station programmed in the hunt group. The system makes no attempt to balance the distribution of incoming calls as this is a linear search through the programmed list. The search starts at the beginning of the list for each incoming call.

Distributed Hunting

Distributed station hunting delivers a call to the next idle station in the hunt group after the station that received the previous call. If that station does not answer within the programmed call advance time, the system delivers the call to the next sequential idle station programmed in the hunt group. This hunting method is a linear search through the programmed list; however, the search starts wherever it left off after the previous call,

Longest Idle Station Hunting

Longest idle station hunting delivers a call to the station that has been idle for the longest period of time since completing the last call that was routed to it by the station hunting feature. In the case of stations with equal idle times (such as at system startup), the system picks the first of the grouped stations with equal idle times. If that station does not answer within the call advance time, the system delivers the call to the station with the next longest idle period.

Ring AR Station Hunting

Ring all station hunting is not a true hunting method. This method delivers a call to all idle stations simultaneously. This is a good method to use when the site requires that all calls be answered as quickly as possible.

None (No Hunting)

This selection disables hunting for the group. It allows a hunt group to be completely programmed yet disabled. Any intercom calls to this group will receive a busy tone and line ringing ignores any programming within this group.

Programming:







7. Type item number for search type and press ENTER.

8. Press SPACE BAR to choose search type and press ENTER.



7-76J Station Fea turees Programming


Direct Ring

Description:

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at a station hunt group as soon as a calI appears. Direct ringing sounds during the day 1 and day 2 time periods but does not ring during the night ringing mode or during the manual night transfer (of ringing) operation.

Programming:




4. Type number for hunt group (l&I) and press ENTER.



7. Type item number for direct ring and press ENTER.



10. Type line port number l-240 (type as n,nn,nnn or n-nnn) and press ENTER.

11~ When finished, press ESCAPE three times.


Delayed Ring

Description:

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at a station hunt group after waiting a short time period from when a call appears. Delayed ringing sounds during day 1, day

2 time periods, during the night ringing mode, and during the manual night transfer (of ringing) operation.

Programming:







7. Type item number for delayed ring and press ENTER.







lMl66-123 DXP Pius Programming hstrwdions

Day 1 Ring

Descriptions

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the day 1 ringing mode time period. Refer to the paragraph titled, Day 1, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times, to set the beginning and ending times of this ringing.

Programming:







7. Type item number for day 1 ring and press ENTER.




11. When finished, press ESCAPE three times



Day 2 Ring

Description:

Use this procedure to choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the day 2 ringing mode time period. Refer to the paragraph titled, Day I, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times, to set the beginning and ending times of this ringing.

Programming:







7. Type item number for day 2 ring and press ENTER.







DXP Plus Programming Instructions lMl66-123

Night Ring

Description:

Choose the line ports that you want to ring at stations during the night ringing mode of operation. The ringing arrangement that you configure here is the arrangement that is active both during the automatic night ringing time period and whenever the attendant manually activates the night transfer (of ringing) operation. Do note that the attendant commanded night ringing period supercedes the automatic night ringing period. Refer to the paragraph titled, Day

1, Day 2, und Night Ringing Begin and End Times, ringing period.

to set the time for the automatic night

Programming:



3 . From stations menu, type item number for hunt groups and press ENTER.




7. Type item number for night ring and press ENTER.







Description: With this programming procedure, set the begin and end times of the day 1, day 2, and night ringing time periods.

Programming:

1 D



4. From the system parameters menu, select day 1, day 2 or night ringing begin and end times and press ENTER.

5. Type times in 24-hour format (hhmm) and press ENTER.






Station Pea tures Programming 7-73

Queue Ringing Calls

Description:

With this feature enabled, in the case of no answer or if all stations in the hunt group are busy, hunt group calls wait in a queue for a station to become idle. The calls wait in queue until the overflow timer times out. At timeout, the system routes the call to a designated overflow destination. The overflow destination is an intercom number or feature code that calls another station, a group intercom number, a voice mail number, or another station hunt group pilot extension. With the queue ringing calls feature disabled, and if all stations in the hunt group are busy, the system immediately routes hunt group calls to the overflow destination.

Programming:







7. Press SPACE BAR to enable or disable the feature (y = enable) and press ENTER.



OverFlow .Vestination

Description:

In the case of no answer or if all stations in the hunt group are busy the system routes hunt group calls to a designated overflow destination. The overflow destination is an intercom number or feature code that calls another station, a group intercom number, a voice mail number, or another station hunt group pilot extension







7. Type item number for overflow destination and press ENTER.

8. Type extension number for destination and press ENTER.



7-74 Station %a tures Progfamming

DXP Plus Programming Instructions IMltS-123

Call Advance Time

Description:

This is the time interval that a station within a hunt group rings unanswered before the system routes the call to the next station in the group. This timer is programmable from 10 seconds through 5 minutes. The default value is 20 seconds.

Programming:

1, Press CONTROL T for main menu.






7. Type item number for call advance time and press ENTER.

8. Press SPACE BAR to choose time and press ENTER.



Overflow Time

Description:

The overflow timer serves two functions depending upon whether you have enabled the queue ringing calls feature. With the queue ringing calls feature enabled, the overflow time determines how long an unanswered hunt group call remains in queue before the system routes the call to an overflow destination. With the queue ringing calls feature disabled, the overflow time determines how long a call will ring at hunt group stations before the system routes the call to an overflow destination. This timer is programmable from 30 seconds through 15 minutes. The default value is 1 minute.

Programming:







7. Type item number for ovefflow time and press ENTER.





lM166-123 DXP Plus Programming Instrwtions

Recall Time

Description:

This is the maximum time interval that an unanswered transferred call hunts within a group before recalling to the source of the transfer.

This timer is programmable from 30 seconds through 15 minutes. The default value is 2 minutes.

Programming:







7. Type item number for recall time and press ENTER.





7.6.2

Description:

Member List

Use this procedure to add, remove, and insert stations in the hunt groups. A station hunt group may contain all stations in the system but is limited to personal intercom numbers only. The

DXP

Plus supports a maximum of 64 hunt groups. Each hunt group may include the maximum number of stations that the system can support; however, due to system memory limitations, all hunt groups may not contain all stations simultaneously. Since the system makes a total of 32

Kbytes of memory available for station hunt groups, you can use the following formula to determine possible station hunt group capacities.

[32768 Kbytes] - [(Stations per group) x (2) + (220 bytes of memory)] = memory remaining for next hunt group

You may use the system printouts feature to print a list of the station hunt groups if you wish.

Refer to

Section 13 for printout details.

Programming:






6. Type item number for member list, and press ENTER.

7. Type the letter code to choose the action you wish to take

(a = add, r = remove, i = insert) and press ENTER.

NOTE: To add a station at the beginning of the group, press ENTER

8 . At the prompt, type the intercom number or station name and press ENTER.

(Use CONTROL N and CONTROL P to display the next or previous display pages if more pages exist.)



7.6.3

Description:

Delete Hunt Group

Use this procedure to remove station hunt groups. With this programming action, you remove the pilot extension from the system’s dialing directroy as well as remove all member stations and all options that you have assigned to the hunt group.

Programming:






6. Type item number for delete hunt group, and press ENTER.

7. At the prompt, type y for yes or n for no and press ENTER.


Programming Line Features

0 LineProgramming.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..8 .l

l LineGroupProgramming.. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..8.2

l

Copy Model Line (Block Programming, Line) . . . . . . 8.3

l l

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Support . . . . . . . . . . .

8 . 4

GroundStartLineSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.5

l

Loop Start Line Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 . 6 l

TieLineSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..8.7

l

Direct Inward System Access Programming . O s . e - . 8.8

Line Features Programming 8-l

lM166-123 BXP Plus Programming instructions

8.1

Line Programming

8.1.1

Description:

Line Name

You can assign a name to a line. A name shows in the display of an LCD speakerphone as a identification aid. A valid name is composed of any seven alpha-numeric characters but the first character must be an alphabetic character.

Programming:

To assign a name to a line,




4. Type line port number l-240 number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.


6. Type name (a-z, A-Z, O-9) and press ENTER. A name can be up to seven characters long.




8.1.2

Description:

Programming:

Line Type

Condition the line port as to the type of line or function that the port serves.




4. Type line port number l-240 or previously assigned name and press ENTER.






Ground Start Line

Refer to

Section

8.5 for a discussion about ground start lines.

Loop Start Line

Refer to Section 8.6 for a discussion about loop start lines.

E&M Tie Line

Refer to

Section

8.7 for a discussion about E&M tie lines.

DID Line

Refer to Section 8.8 for a discussion about DID lines.

Auxiliary Port

If you type-name a line port as an auxiliary port, you condition the line port to interface with external paging equipment instead of a telephone line.

6-2 Line Features Programming

DXP Plus Programming Instructions MM-123

E&M DNIS Line

Description:

Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) is a Tl service feature for E&M lines. Long distance carriers offer DNIS as a feature to dial 800 and dial 900 lines. DNIS identifies the numbers that callers dial to reach an internal telephone system. Businesses served by a dial 800 or dial 900 service allow calls to ring on any available line within an assigned block of lines and then have their internal telephone system process the DNIS information to route the calls to their proper destinations.

The common carrier supplies DNIS information as DTMF digits. When the DNIS feature is combined with the Automatic Number identification (ANI) feature, the common carrier delimits the ANI information from the DNIS routing information with the asterisk (%) tone so that the

DXP Plus system can process each portion properly.

The DXP Plus uses information that you program in the DID/DNIS translation table to route the call to the proper intercom number. The system also sends the called number information to the

SMDR/SMDA line report and makes the information available to devices that are connected to the DXP Plus’s Open Architecture Interface (OAI).

As a single service, if the call routes to an LCD speakerphone, the speakerphone’s display shows the name that you programmed in the DID/DNIS translation table. If you have programmed no name there, the display shows the DNWDID block name that you assigned to the DID/DNIS block. If you have programmed no name there, the display shows the processed

DNIS digits. (As a DNIS/ANI combined service, the display shows the processed AN1 digits.)

E&M DNIS lines access the Direct Inward System (DISA) feature when the DNIS digits translate into the DISA access code.

Since the DXP Plus system supports the DNIS only on tone dial lines, it supports both wink start and delay start protocols but does not support the immediate start protocol.

Programming:

Program the line type to be E&M DINS using the

Section

8. I.2 procedure.

Program the DID/DNIS translation table using the

Section

8.4.8 procedure.

Program the E&M DNIS tie line attributes using the

Section

8.4.7 procedure.

Line Features Programming 8-3

8.1.3

Description:

Line Disable

Take a line port out of service because of defect or other reason using this programming choice.

Programming:



3. From line menu, select line programming and press ENTER.

4. Type line port l-240 or previously assigned nameand press ENTER.

5 . From line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.





8.1.4

Description.=

Music Or Tone On Hold

With this feature enabled, the system will supply music, tone bursts or other audio information to callers while they are on hold. The music or information source is external to the common equipment and is customer supplied. The system will accept two music sources. You can use one source for this feature and the other source for the background music feature discussed in

Section

7.1.3. When the system supplies tone bursts to callers while they are on hold, it sounds two .l second long tone bursts separated by a .l second interval of silence. It repeats this tone burst sequence every 5 seconds.

Programming.=









8.1.5

Description:

Programming:

Privacy Release

(Automatic Privacy)

Assign privacy release to a line so that a user can press the privacy button on his or her telephone and change a private line into a non-private one as needed. When a line is private, a station user has exclusive use of it during a call.

Also refer to the

Section

7.3 procedure to map a privacy button on the user’s telephone.



3. From the lines menu, select line programming.

4. Type line port number (l-240) or name and press ENTER.


6. Press SPACE bar for desired feature setting.





8.1.6

Description:

SMDR Record

When you enable this feature, the system stores SMDR records for the specified line. Refer to

Section 10 for other SMDAISMDR programming considerations.

Programming:





5. From line programming, type item number for feature and press ENTER.





8.1.7

Description:

Cost Incoming

If you have arranged for the system to cost calls, you can arrange for it to also cost incoming calls on a per line basis. You can arrange for the costing to begin as soon as the call arrives in the system , begin after the user answers the call or begin after a programmed delay. Plus, you can pick the call rate table that you want the system use when it costs the call. Refer to

Section

I2 for other automatic route selection programming considerations.

Programming:


2 . From the main menu, select lines and press ENTER.

3 . From the lines menu, select line programming.


5 . From the line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

6 . From cost incoming prompt, press SPACE bar for desired feature setting and press RETURN.

7 . From incoming cost delay prompt, press SPACE bar for desired feature setting and press ENTER.

8 . From incoming cost route prompt, type l-32 for desired rate table.





/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming fnstructions

8 . 1 . 8

Description:

Pad Level-Transmit, Receive

(Gain And Attenuation Settings For Line Transmit And Receive)

This feature enhances the Tl-El digital carrier transmission option, the pad level programming feature adjusts voice levels for both the transmit and receive circuits in the individual channels.

The choices include: Gain 2, Gain 1, Nominal, Loss 1, Loss 2, Loss 3, Loss 4, and Loss 5.

These settings provide an approximate +6 to -15 dB range of choices. Starting at the Nominal setting, each gain level represents an approximate 3 dB amplification of the signal level from the previous setting, and each loss level represents an approximate 3 dB attenuation of the signal level from the previous setting. Because digital transmission does not lose volume level as readily as analog transmission does, it is likely that the receive level may be noticeably higher when using the Tl option. Therefore, you may need to select a low setting such as Loss 2 for the voice level receive parameter when programming this feature for Tl lines that are being used exclusively for voice transmission. Further, if you choose a setting to increase the receive gain, you should carefully examine speakerphone operation. It is possible to select a receive gain that will, under certain conditions, interfere with proper speakerphone operation.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select lines and press ENTER.



5. From line programming menu, type item number for pad level-transmit and press ENTER,

6 . Press SPACE bar for feature setting and press ENTER for pad level-receive.






8.1.9

Dialing Mode

Description:

Program the line port to match either a DTh4F tone or a rotary (pulse) dialing line as supplied by the central office (CO).










Pulse Dial Make/Pulse Dial Break

(Pulse Dial Ratio)

Description:

Programming: 1.

2 .

3 .

4 .

7 .

8 .

5 .

6 .

9 .

With pulse dialing enabled, use this procedure to set the make/break ratio for rotary dial signalling to match rotary dial line requirements. You can set the line make/break ratio for rotary dial (pulse dial) signalling in a more flexible manner to match many different rotary dial line requirements. You can set the make time and the break time independently in one msec.

increments to any time from one to 99 msec.







Type desired time (l-99) and press ENTER.

Press ESCAPE twice,



Description: with pulse dialing enabled, you can set the interdigit time between dial pulses when the system pulse-dials a number over a line. The system defaults this time to 200 msec. and provides a range of timing values between 100 msec. and one sec. that you can set in 100 msec. increments.

Programming: 1. Press CONTROL T for main menu,








8.1.10

Abandon Hold Release

Description:

When a distant party abandons a hold condition and his or her station disconnects from the line, the central office sends a forward disconnect signal to the system. This signal is either 50 or

350 msec. in length. Use this procedure to program the line port to match the central office signal length.

Programming:





5 . From line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER for feature.





8.1.11

Positive Disconnect Time

Description:

Programming

When a station drops a line after its user has finished using it, the system waits a programmable length of time before it allows another station to access that line. This time delay helps prevent such conditions as call-collision The system holds the line status light on during the time out period.












8.1.12 Toll Groups

Description:

You must identify the individual lines that you do not want users to use when they dial toll restricted numbers. Do this by first assigning the lines to toll groups and then assigning those toll groups to the restricted number. There are 32 toll groups available for line assignment.

Assign one, several, or all lines to any desired toll group or combination of toll groups as needed. See Section II for complete toll restriction programming details.

Programming:




4. Type line name or line number and press ENTER.

5. From line programming, type item number for toll group and press ENTER.

6. Type line number (l-240) and press ENTER.



9. Press ESCAPE to end..

8.1.13

DTMF Level

Description:

Adjust the audio level of the DTMF signals to a low (-5 db), medium (0 db), or high (+3 db) setting. Certain sites may require a higher db level to over come line conditions that could interfere with reliable dialing such as a long loop distance to the central office.



3. From line menu, select line programming and press ENTER.

4. From line programming menu, type item number to select feature and press ENTER.


6 When finished, press ESCAPE twice.



8.1.14

Busy Lead Defection (Auxiliary Equipment Interface)

Description:

When you enable this feature, the system can detect an off-hook condition in a telephony device such as a modem, FAX machine, industry-standard telephone, or similar device that an installer has connected to a line ahead of the system. When the system detects the off-hook condition, it makes a busy indication appear at system stations that have this line appearance.

Programming:












8.1.15

Disconnect Supervision

Description:

When you enable this feature, the system detects a break in loop current anytime one occurs during an outside call.

Programming:










8.1.16

Caller ID Active

Description:

When caller identification (ID) information is available from the central office, take this programming action to match the line port to the feature. You must also assign the caller ID lines to the stations and assign special-purpose station buttons to control the feature. Refer to

Section

14. I for complete caller ID programming details.

Programming:









9 . Repeat steps 4 through 8 for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.

10. Assign caller ID lines to stations-refer to

Sections

7.1.31 and 7.1.32 for d+ails.

11. Assign caller ID button (mnemonic CID) to stations-refer to

Section

7.3 for details.

12. Assign SAVE button (mnemonic SAVE) to stations-refer to

Section

7.3 for details


8.1.17

Voice Mail ID

Description:

You can assign an identification number to each line so that the voice mail system can provide customized call handling on a per line basis. Use voice mail system programming to match this

ID number to a particular personal directory or transaction box within the voice mail system.

When the DXP Plus routes a call that is ringing at a particular line to the voice mail system to be answered, it routes it with the ID number. The voice mail system then sends the call to the box that corresponds to the line’s ID number.

You can use voice mail system programming to construct customized answering prompts for the individual boxes. This allows the IDed DXP

Plus lines to be answered in a customized manner by the voice mail system’s automatic attendant. Refer to Section 14.5 for complete voice mail programming details.



3. Type port number of line to be programmed (l-240) and press ENTER.



6.

Press ESCAPE twice.



8.1.18

DISA And DISA Voice Options

Description:

Use the following programming instructions to enable or disable DISA capability on lines 1 through 240. Also, use the DISA Voice Options 1 through 4 to select digital voice announce

(DVA) messages. For example, selecting DISA voice option 2 will cause welcome greeting 2, day main menu 2, night main menu 2, recall no answer 2, and recall busy 2 prompts to play whenever a DISA line is covered by DVA. Refer to Section 14.3 for complete DVA programming details.

Programming


2 . From main menu, select Lines and press ENTER.

3 . From the lines menu, select Line Programming and press ENTER.

4 . Enter line number you want to program and press ENTER.

5 . From the line (number) programming menu (page 2), select DISA and press ENTER.

6 . Toggle the SPACE bar to select/deselect DISA and press ENTER.

7 . Enter 1 through 4 for the DISA Voice Options and press ESCAPE twice.


9 . Enter the number for the next line you want to program or press ESCAPE to end.

Line Features Programming 8-l 1

8.2

Description:

Line Group Programming

Use this procedure to group similar type line ports together for dial-up access. Up to 16 different line groups are available. During operation, the system searches for an idle line in the line group in the same order that you program them using this procedure.

Programming:



3. From lines menu, select line group programming and press ENTER.

4. Type line group number (1-16) and press ENTER.

5 . From line group programming menu, type a to add lines, r to remove lines, or c to change name of line group and press ENTER.

6. Type line to be removed, added or changed, then press ENTER.




8.2. I

Description:

Line Group Access

Use this procedure to give a station access to line groups.

Programming:

1~ Press CONTROL T for main menu





6. Type line groups (l-16,0 = none, type as n,n,nn or n-nn) and press ENTER.




8.2.2

Description:

Line Group Queuing

Use this procedure to give a station the ability to queue for a busy line group.

Programming: ‘1. Press CONTROL T for main menu.


3. From station menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.





8-12 Line Features PrOgramming

8.3

Description:

Copy Model Line (Block Programming, Line)

Program some or all line ports to have the same programming as a model line port.

Programming:



3. From the lines menu, select model line and press ENTER.

4. Type line port number (l-240) or name of model line to be copied and press ENTER.

5. Type line port numbers of lines to match model and press ENTER.

(Type line port numbers as n,n,nn or n-nn. )

6.




8.4

Dire& Inward Dialing (DID) Support

The DID line board allows incoming CO calls to reach internal DXP Ph intercom extensions by direct dialing.

No attendant assistance is necessary. Since DID lines are incoming only, their direct appearance is limited to attendant stations where status indication may be useful. DID operation requires a group of published directory numbers (400 maximum) provided by the telephone company central office (CO). These directory numbers are incoming only and the DXP Plus translates them to the appropriate personal or group intercom number for ringing. The lines will accept outgoing DTMF digits during a call to support personal identification number dialing and similar uses.

The DXP Plus handles DID calls in the same manner that it handles regular intercom calls and will forward them via a hunt list or a call forwarding scheme. An unanswered DID call will either continue to ring or route to a progmmrned ring no-answer (RNA) destination. If neither forwarding nor RNA is available, the system provides no routing.

The system returns a ringback signal to DID callers when a called station is in the do not disturb (DND) mode.

The system returns an off-hook indication to the CO when a DID line is disabled. The DXP Plus synchronized ringing feature does not have any affect on DID calls, and the Caller ID feature is not available.

The DID line is a reverse-battery, loop-start, two-wire voice circuit.

(The term reverse battery means that it is the

DXP Plus and not the CO that provides tip and ring supervisory battery for the loop.) The DXP Plus sends and receives all supervisory and voice signals across the voice pair and provides all necessary signal control at its line interface.

In the idle state, the loop is open at the CO end, with the DXP Plus maintaining on-hook battery polarity on the circuit. The CO requests service from the DXP Plus by applying a resistance across te line causing a current flow to occur. The DXP Plus recognizes the current flow as a CO connection and prepares for the incoming call. The

CO does not send ringin since the DXP Plus generates it internally and sends it to the stations.

After the DXP Plus receives all of the address digits, it translates them based on the appropriate DID block translation table and attempts to place the call to the desired station. To assure that the caller will always hear ringback prior to the call being answered (for example, when answered by voice mail), the system delays the station ringing until it applies ringback tone.

The called station sounds a distinctive ringing based on the ring code in the translation table.

If the translation table has a name for the CO digit sequence that the DID call is on, the LCD of the called station displays that name. Otherwise, the station displays the DID block name followed by a portion of the CO digit string. If there is neither CO digit string name nor DID block name programmed, the station displays the CO digit string alone.

If an incoming call is for either an unassigned or an uninstalled station, the DXP Plus routes the call to the DID block alternate extension. If the DID Block alternate extension is unavailable, the DXP Phs routes the call to the

Dial 0 attendant. If the Dial 0 attendant is unavailable, the DXP Plus returns reorder tone to the caller.

The DXP Plus returns call progress signals to the CO in the interval after it receives address signalling and before it answers. It does this within 1.5 seconds after completion of address signalling.

When a called station answers a DID call, the DXP Plus sends answer supervision to the CO by applying reverse polarity to the line. The DXP Plus maintains this polarity reversal until either the station goes on-hook or the CO opens the loop.

The CO signals a line disconnect condition to the DXP Plus by opening the loop. When the DXP Plus detects the

CO disconnect, it returns the line to idle polarity and changes the line from busy to idle. The DXP Plus signals a line disconnect condition to the CO by returning the supervision battery polarity to the on-hook state. While immediate start lines return to idle at once, wink and dela start lines maintain busy status until the DXP Plus detects CO release.


8.4. I Direct In ward Dialing Line Examples

Example 1:

Jenny’s Bakery has the following CO numbering blocks:

555-3600 to 555-3619,

555-4520 to 555-4539,

555-1200 to 555-1399.

It will receive the 36nn and 45nn calls through CO lines l-5 and the lnnn calls through CO lines 6-8. The system requires two DID blocks for use: block one for CO lines l-5, and block two for CO lines 6-8. The numbers in

DID block one have two unique digits and the numbers in DID block two have three unique digits. Assume that

DID block one is configured as wink start, tone dial, has a 2-digit string, and is named SALES. Assume DID block two is configured as delay start, tone dial, has a 3-digit string, and is named SERVICE.

Example 2:

Ed’s Telephone Mart starts with 20 CO numbers 555-2320 to 555-2339. Only one DID block is used and is configured as wink start, pulse dial, with a 2-digit string. As the company grows, they add another 20 CO numbers 555-3420 to 555-3439. You cannot simply add these numbers to the existing DID block translation table. This is because a 2-digit string will not uniquely specify which number was dialed. You must either treat these two CO blocks as two different DID blocks or increase the expected digit string quantity to three.

Increasing the expected digits for a DID translation block deletes all entries in that block, and you must reprogram the table.


8.4.2

DID Options

DID/DNIS Block Name

Description:

Choose a T-character name to associate with each DID/DNIS block.

Programming:

Refer to Section 8.43.

DID Control Signalling

Description:

Decide upon which address supervision signalling protocol that you will use. This decision will depend upon the type of supervision that is compatible with the CO requirements.

Immediate Start: Use this protocol for rotary (pulse dial) lines. With this protocol, the CO will not expect address supervision signalling and may begin pulsing the dialing digits as soon as 65 msec. after it connects to the line.

Wink Start: With this protocol, the CO will expect address supervision signalling. After the

CO connects to the line, the DXP Plus will reverse the polarity of the line for a period of 200 msec when it is ready to receive digits (that is, the DTMF receiver is available for tone dial lines). This “wink” signal indicates to the CO that the DXP Pkus is ready to receive incoming digits. After the wink occurs and the line polarity returns to normal, the CO will begin sending the dialing digits. If the CO does not see the wink within 4 to 8 seconds (heavy traffic timings), it may route the call to network reorder or retry the call on another line.

Typically, a CO will try to dial two times. A second failure will result in network reorder. Wink start protocol is the best choice for its combination of integrity checks and retrial capabilities.

Delay Start: With this protocol, the CO will expect address supervision signalling.

Approximately 100 msec. after the CO connects to the line, the DXP Plus will reverse the polarity of the line for a period of at least 140 msec. It will hold this reversal until it is ready to receive incoming digits. At that time, it will return the polarity to normal. After the line polarity returns to normal, the CO will begin sending the dialing digits. If the CO does not see the line polarity return to normal within 4 to 8 seconds, it will route the call to network reorder.

There is no requirement for the CO to retry failures on lines with delay dial signalling.

Programming:

Refer to Section 8.4.3.

8- 16 Line Fea Turks Progranming

Expected CO Digits

Description:

Obtain a block of numbers for use from the CO.

The DXP

Plus supports a maximum of 400 numbers (for example, 555-1000 through 555-1399).

You can have a maximum of four DID blocks with each DID block using its own name, signalling protocol, digit addressing method and number of digits needed to avoid numbering conflicts. As a default, the system assigns all

DID lines to block one. A DID block represents a group of lines that the system will use to receive calls for one or more CO directory number blocks.

NOTE: You will derive maximum user convenience ifyou choose the CO block to match the intercom numbers that you have assigned to the DXP Plus system. (For example, if your intercom numbers are 1000 - 1399, they would match the sample CO block.)

Determine the quantity of unique digits in the string that you expect to receive from the CO.

The number of digits expected should be large enough to avoid numbering conflicts within a

DID block and provide future growth. In the case of the CO block mentioned above, the quantity of unique digits is three to cover 1000 through 1399. If the CO block was 555-l 100 through 555-l 192, the string quantity would be two to cover 00 through 480.

Programming:

Refer to

Section 8.4.3.

Dialing Mode

Description:

Based upon the system’s expected incoming call volume and recommendations and requirements of the CO, determine whether the CO will send address digits by DTMF tones or by loop pulse (rotary) dialing. (Always choose DTMF tones if possible.)

Programming:

Refer to

Section 8.4.3.

ANI Delivery

Description:

Enable or disable the DXP

Plus to process ANI information that is delivered by the long distance common carrier as a Tl feature on dial 800 and dial 900 lines. Refer to

Section 8.7.1

for details about the ANI feature.

Programming:

Refer to

Section 8.4.3.

DISA Voice Options

Description: Use the DISA Voice Options 1 through 4 to select digital voice announce (DVA) message levels. For example, selecting DISA voice option 2 will cause welcome greeting 2, day main menu 2, night main menu 2, recall no answer 2, and recall busy 2 prompts to play whenever a

DISA-configured DID line is covered by DVA. Refer to

Section

I6 for complete DVA programming details.

Programming:

Refer to

Section 8.4.3.

DID Alternate Routing

Description:

Use this procedure to select an attendant station to serve as an alternate routing station. The system will route DID calls to this station if it cannot find the digits it receives from the CO in the translation table. The system will ring this station with a distinctive ring tone or pattern that you program. If you do not select an attendant station with this procedure, the system routes the call to the dial 0 station. If the dial 0 station is not available, the system returns a reorder tone to the caller.

Programming:

Refer to

Section 8.4.3.

Line Features Programming 8-l 7

lM166-123 DXP Pius Programming hsfruefions

8.4.3

DIDlDNlS Programming

Programming:

1.

2 .

3 .

4.

5 .

6.


From the main menu, type the selection for lines and press ENTER.

From the lines menu, type the selection for DID/DNIS block programming and press ENTER.

From the DID/DNIS block prompt line, type the DID/DNIS block number and press ENTER.

From the DID/DNIS block programming menu, select options, and press ENTER

From the options menu, set the parameters for the DID/DNIS block that you are programming:

NZUllt3 Type up to seven characters and press ENTER.

NOTE: End the DID/DNIS block name with a space if you desire a blank space between the name and the CO digits when they show on an LCD speakerphone’s display. Also, the number of CO digits that will show in the display is dependent on the length of the

DID/DNIS block name.

Control Signalling Press SPACE bar for protocol choice and press ENTER.

Expected Digits

Dialing Mode

AN1 Delivery

Type quantity (O-7) of digits and press ENTER.

Press SPACE bar for choice and press ENTER.

Press SPACE bar for Yes or No and press ENTER.

DISA Voice Options Type DVA message identification number (l-4) and press ENTER.

Alternate Routing Type intercom number (up to four digits) for station to handle

Ring Code misdialed calls.

Type code (1-8) to specify the ringing pattern for calls to the alternate station.


8 . Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing then press ENTER to return to the DID/DNIS block programming menu.

iVOTE: If you save the changes and you have changed the expected digits value, additional prompts may appear.

6-16 Line Fea%ures Programming

8.4.4

Description:

DID/DNIS Translation Tables

When you initialize a translation table, you must first enter the string of CO digits that you obtain from the telephone company. Then you must enter the intercom number that you want to match with the first CO digit sequence in the string. With this, the system automatically matches the remainder of the CO digit string to consecutive intercom numbers beginning with the one that you entered. You can edit the translation table by selecting the item number for each entry and making the changes that you deem necessary. The translation table includes the following listed items:

CO Dipit String: This is the actual string of digits expected from the CO. Within a table, each

CO digit sequence in the string must be unique. While each CO digit sequence must have an assigned extension number, you can assign the same extension number to several CO digit sequences if you wish.

Name: As an option, you can enter a seven character name for each CO digit sequence in the string. If you assign a name, the system will use it for LCD display during signalling.

Dav Number: This personal or group intercom number is the one that the system will ring when a DID/DNIS call arrives through the matching CO digit sequence during normal or daytime operations. DID/DNIS will not support Delay Ring, Day 1 ring, or Day 2 ring modes.

Nipht Number: As an option, you can assign a personal or group intercom number that the system can ring when a DID/DNIS call arrives through the matching CO digit sequence during night transfer (of ringing) operations.

Rinp Code: As an option you can choose one of eight distinctive ringing codes for each CO digit sequence in the string. Remember, the proprietary analog telephones provide only four distinctive ring possibilities.


IM166-123 BXP PIUS Programming InsPfi~e~iof9s

DID Translation Tables Programming

Programming: 1~ Press CONTROL T for main menu.

2. From the main menu, type the selection for lines and press ENTER.

3 . From the lines menu, type the selection for DID/DNIS block programming and press ENTER.

4. From the DID/DNIS block prompt line, type the DID block number and press ENTER.

5. From the DID/DNIS block programming menu, select initialize translation table, and press ENTER,

NOTE: Ifyou choose the initialize translation table entry, the system will prompt you to enter a range of CO digit strings (system maximum is 400 strings and maximum digits per string is seven) and a starting extension number corresponding to the first CO digit string*

Once you confirm your changes, the system will update the translation table with sequential extension numbers that are associated with the sequence of CO digit strings.

You can repeat this process, as needed, for other sequences of numbers.

6 . When finished, press ESCAPE to return to the DID/DNIS block programming menu.

7. From the DID/DNIS block programming menu, select edit translation table, and press ENTER.

The screen shows a translation table in which you can perform selective editing.

NOTE:

If

there are more numbers in the DID/DNLS block than the screen can show9 the system places them on underlying pages. Press and hold CONTROL and type N or P to display each next or previous page.

The tab/e will form the screen so the CO digits are displayed in sequential order. You can add additional entries to the end of the table will appear in sorted order the next time you access the table.

that

8 . When finished, press ESCAPE twice


10. Press ESCAPE three times to return to main menu.

You can erase the entries in the translation table using the system default menu.

1 e From the main menu, select system and press ENTER.

2 . From the system menu, select defaults, and press ENTER.

3 . From the defaults menu, select DID translation tables and press ENTER.

4. Type the DID/DNIS block number (1-Q and press ENTER. The system automatically removes all entries in the chosen table.

5 . Press ESCAPE twice to return to main menu.

DIDiDNIS Translation Table, Default

Description:

You can clear programmed translation tables with this procedure.

Programming; 1. Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4. From defaults menu, select DID translation table and press ENTER.

5. Type DID/DNIS table number (l-4) and press ENTER.

6. Repeat step 5 until finished.



8.5

Description:

Ground Start Line Support

The multipurpose line board provides system interface for loop start lines, ground start lines, and E and M tie lines. These are typically the three different line types that the central office

(CO) makes available for connection to the public switched network. With the ground start line type, the DXP Plus momentarily grounds the ring lead to signal the CO to establish a communications link for an outgoing call. When the CO detects this, it acknowledges by momentarily grounding the tip lead. The DXP Plus responds by removing its ground connection and bridging itself across the tip and ring leads. The CO then removes its ground connection and returns dial tone to the DXP Plus.

For an incoming call, the CO grounds the tip lead and places an alternating voltage on the ring lead for the DXP Plus to sense. If you set the incoming alert signal to its ring optional setting, the DXP Plus detects tip-lead ground and then causes its ring generator to generate ringing to the station being called. If you set the incoming alert signal to its ring required setting, the DXP

Plus waits until the CO applies the alternating voltage before the DXP Plus generates ringing to the station. When a station answers the ringing, the circuit is completed as it is for outgoing calls.

Because ground start lines are controlled at both ends, they are capable of a release supervision that provides a sure means of determining when a distant party hangs up his or her telephone.

This is very important in applications where the system costs the calls. Also, since the signalling protocol indicates which end requests the line, it helps prevent call collisions and glare and thus is useful in applications where there is a high volume of incoming and outgoing calls occurring on the same lines.

Ground start lines are standard protocol for remote networking and are useful for connecting the

DXP Plus to private branch exchange (PBX) equipment. For ground start lines to be dependable, you must ensure that you have connected the DXP Plus to a low resistan telephone company ground.

NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires that you inform the central

ofJice that the DXP Plus is configured as an MF (multipurpose) registered device if you connect it to ground start lines.

With ground start lines, set the following feature parameters:

- Incoming Alert Signal

•I For rinz reauired, the DXP Plus must detect a ring signal on the line before it will send a ring signal to a station. This method is normally used with systems that use synchronized ringing to prevent a long first ring.

r~ For r=inP ontional, the DXP Plus sends a ring signal to a station as soon as it detects a ground on the tip lead of the line (put there by the calling equipment) or when it detects a ring signal on the line. This method allows the station to receive a ring signal in less time than the ring required method does; however, phantom ringing can occur on poorly grounded lines or lines that fail from the CO.

- Dialing Mode

- Toll Groups

- Busy Lead

- voice mail ID

- Incoming Alert Signal

- DTMF Level

- Caller ID Active

- Line Group

Programming: Refer to Section 8.5. I.


lMR%G123 DXP PIws Programming hsfrwcfions

8.5. I Ground Start Line Support Programming

Programming: 1 D

2.

3.


From the main menu, select lines and press ENTER.

From the lines menu, select line programming and press ENTER.

Type line port number l-240 or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

4.

5.

6.

7.

The system displays page 1 of the line programming menu.

From line programming menu, type item number for line type and press ENTER.

Press SPACE bar to toggle line type and press ENTER.

From line programming menu, type item number for another parameter and press ENTER.

Respond to prompt action for feature setting, and press ENTER to accept setting.

8.

9.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all required parameters.

10. Press CONTROL and type N and the system will display the menu page 2 of line programming menu.

NOTE: The programming items shown on menu page 2 are for the line port type that you selected in step 7. These items will be different for each line type.

1 1 .

12.

13.

From menu page 2 of line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

Respond to prompt line action for feature setting, and press ENTER to accept setting.

From menu page 2 of line programming menu, repeat steps 1 I and 12 for all required choices,

14. When finished, press ESCAPE twice.


1 6 . Repeat steps for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.

8-22 Line Feafwres Programming

LOOD Start Line Sumort

Description:

The multipurpose line board provides system interface for loop start lines, ground start lines, and E and M tie lines. These are typically the three different line types that the central office

(CO) makes available for connection to the public switched network. With the loop start line type, the DXP Plus bridges a resistance across the tip and ring leads to signal the CO to establish a communications link for an outgoing call. The CO detects the resulting current flow and supplies dial tone to the DXP Plus. The CO signals an incoming call to the DXP Plus by placing an alternating voltage (ring signal) on the tip lead for the DXP Plus to sense. The DXP

Plus then generates ringing to the station being called. When a station answers the ringing, the circuit is completed as it was for outgoing calls. Loop start lines can not provide any sure means of determining when a distant party hangs up his or her telephone. For a system that experiences moderate incoming and outgoing call volume and does not cost calls, loop start lines provide an economical choice for connecting the DXP Plus to the central office (CO) equipment. When you use line 1 for the power-fail mode, you must program that line to be a loop-start line unless the industry-standard telephone that you use as a power-fail station is a ground-start device.

With loop start lines, set the following feature parameters:

- Positive Disconnect Time - Dialing Mode

- Toll Groups

- Abandon Hold Release

- DTMF Level

- Disconnect Supervision - Caller ID Active

- Line Group

- Busy Lead

- Voice Mail ID





The system displays page 1 of the line programming menu.

5 . From menu page 1 of line programming menu, type item number for line type and press ENTER.

6. Press SPACE bar to toggle line type (choose loop start, ground start, or E and M tie line) and press ENTER.

7 . From menu page 1 of line programming menu, type item number for another line parameter, press ENTER.

8 . Press SPACE bar for feature setting, and press ENTER to accept setting.

9 . From menu page 1 of line programming menu, repeat steps 8 and 9 for all required choices.



11. From menu page 2 of line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

12. Press SPACE bar for feature setting, and press ENTER to accept setting.

13. From menu page 2 of line programming menu, repeat steps 11 and 12 for all required choices.



16. Repeat steps for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.


IM166-123 DXP Plus Programming hstruetions

8.7

Pie Line Support

The multipurpose line board provides system interface for loop start lines, ground start lines, and E and M tie lines. These are typically the three different line types that the central office (CO) makes available for connection to the public switched network. The tie line connections (also known as tie trunk access) are special circuits that allow, on either a dial-up or a continuous connection (hot line) basis, the DXP Plus to communicate with remotely located equipment such as: another DXP Plus, a PBX, or other common carrier (OCC) equipment for long distance calls.

NOTE: Tie lines are primarily for incoming calls to a DXP Plus and depend upon sofiare controlling the remote site.

Tie lines can be a part of a private or leased network and can be metallic, carrier current, Tl, or microwave. The E and M line provides control signalling between local and remote systems. When a local DXP Plus puts a request for service on the M lead, the remote equipment detects this request on its E lead. As an option it can also respond by putting an alerting signal on its M lead.

8.7.1

Tie Line Paramefers

Tie Line Types (Connect Mode)

Description:

The DXP Plus supports two different types of E and M lines. The E and M Direct type is for direct connection between two telephone systems and is also known as a metallic connection.

The E and M Carrier type is for tie lines that run through a central off%ze (CO) interface; however, some COs also provide a metallic connection interface.

Programming:

Refer to Section 8.7.2.

Tie Line Standard-Protocol Signalling (Control Signalking)

Description:

The system can respond to either one of three different standard-protocols of E and M signalling. They are known as: immediate signalling, wink signalling, and delayed signalling. You must program the desired protocol type to match that provided by the CO or the remote equipment.

Immediate Signalling:

With this signalling method, the called DXP Plus answers as soon as the calling DXP

Plus initiates the call. This signalling method is usually used if the line is programmed for hot line operation or is programmed for pulse dialing. It is best to avoid this type of signalling in any other circumstances.

Wink SignaIling:

With this signalling method, the called DXP Plus places a momentary signal reversal (wink) on its M lead to alert the calling DXP Plus system that it is ready to receive information The calling DXP Plus controls the status of the M lead and watches for a return signal from the called DXP Plus on the E lead. A wink occurs when the called DXP Plus is ready to receive dialed digits from the calling DXP Plus. Dialing can begin only after the wink is complete. After the wink occurs, the called DXP Plus (if it is programmed for dialing) returns dial tone to the calling DXP Plus as an indication it is ready to receive digits. This signalling method is the preferred protocol for use between two DXP Plus systems.

Delayed Signalling:

With delay dial signalling, the called DXP Plus immediately responds to the calling DXP

Plus by sending an off-hook signal on its M lead. It holds this off-hook condition until it is ready to receive digits and then returns its M lead to on-hook. After this signal exchange occurs, the called DXP Plus (if it is programmed for dialing) returns dial tone to the calling DXP Plus as an indication it is ready to receive digits.

This signalling method is most useful if the DXP Plus is connected to another manufacturer’s PBX with incompatible wink timing parameters.

Programming: Refer to Section 8.7.2.



Tie Line Non-Standard Protocol Signalling (Line Access)

Description:

You can program the system to respond to two types of non-standard tie line signalling protocols. They are known as hot line and intercom dialing.

Hot Line: You can program the system for hot-line operation so that as soon as a user accesses the tie line, the station or stations at the distant system that have access to the personal or group intercom assigned to the hot line will ring. If you arrange for access by hot line, you must enter the extension that will automatically ring when the tie line is seized by the calling DXP Plus. If you do not enter an extension, the system will ring the dial 0 station, and if it is unavailable, the system will return dial tone to the caller.

Intercom Dialing: Alternately, you can program the system for intercom dialing mode so that as soon as users access the tie line they will hear dial tone. Upon hearing dial tone, they can dial either a personal or group intercom number at the distant system.,

NOTE: Intercom feature codes of one DXP Plus are not available to callers from the other DXP

Plus nor can those callers access a line through the distant DXP Plus using line group access codes.

Programming:

Refer to

Section 8.7.2.


Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Delivery

Description:

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) is a Tl service feature for both E&M and DID lines.

Long distance common carriers offer ANI as a feature to dial $00 and dial 900 lines. The ANI feature provides information to an internal telephone system that identifies the telephone number of the calling party. Businesses served by a dial 800 or dial 900 service allow any available user to answer the calls and have their internal telephone system process the ANI information to identify the caller’s telephone number.

The common carrier supplies ANI information as DTMF digits. When the ANI feature is combined with the Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) feature, the common carrier also delimits the DNIS information from the ANI information with an asterisk (%) tone so that the DXP Plus can process each portion properly.

The DXP Plus system decodes the AN1 information and sends the caller’s number to the called telephone and to the SMDRKMDA line reports. If the called telephone is an LCD speakerphone, its display shows the caller’s number. This display is shown for all conditions

(that is, transferred calls, call forward and so forth). The DXP

Plus also sends the calling number information to the SMDR/SMDA line report and makes the information available to devices that are connected to the DXP Plus’s Bpen Architecture Interface @AI).

When you assign ANI to lines that callers reach by diahng access codes, the DXP P&us processes all incoming digits as AN1 digits until it encounters the delimiter. The DXP Plus then processes the remainder of the incoming digits as DNIS call routing digits. When you assign

ANI to lines that callers reach without dialing any digits (such as, E&M hot line or DID lines with 0 digits expected), the DXP Plus processes all incoming digits as ANI digits until it encounters the end delimiter. The DXP Plus then routes the call to one of the followingintercom numbers: the one that services the E&M hot line number, the one that serves as the DID/DNIS default, or the one that serves as the operator for the system.

The DID, E&M DNIS, and E&M tie lines all can access the Direct Inward System Access

(DISA) feature when the caller dials the DISA access code or when the DID/DNIS digits translate to the DISA access code. The system distinguishes the DISA code from the preceding

AN1 information.

Since the DXP Plus supports AN1 only on tone dial lines, is supports both wink start and delay start protocols but does not support the immediate start protocol.

Programming:

Use the

Section

8.7.2 procedure to enable DXP Plus processing of ANI information for tie lines and program the tie line attributes.

8-26 Line Features hogfamming

Call Announce

Description:

This feature, when enabled, allows tie line callers from outside the system to voice announce incoming calls to the DXP Plus station after they hear an alert tone. You must also arrange the

DXP Plus system to respond to voice announce intercom calls.


Dialing Mode

Description:

Program the tie line to match either a DTMF tone or a rotary (pulse) dialing line as supplied by the central office (CO).

Programming: Refer to Section 8.7.2.

Toll Groups

Description:

You must identify the tie lines that you do not want users to use when they dial toll restricted numbers. Do this by first assigning the tie lines to toll groups and then assigning those toll groups to the restricted number. There are 32 toll groups available for line assignment. Assign one, several, or all lines to any desired toll group or combination of toll groups as needed. See

Section II for complete toll restriction programming details.


DTMF Level

Description: Adjust the audio level of the tie line’s DTMF signals to a low (-5 db), medium (0 db), or high

(+3 db) setting. Certain sites may require a higher db level to over come line conditions that could interfere with reliable dialing.


DISA

Description:

Enable or disable DISA capability on the tie line.


DISA Voice Options

Description: Use the DISA Voice Options 1 through 4 to select digital voice announce (DVA) message levels. For example, selecting DISA voice option 2 will cause welcome greeting 2, day main menu 2, night main menu 2, recall no answer 2, and recall busy 2 prompts to play whenever a

DISA-configured tie line is covered by DVA. Refer to Section 14.3 for complete DVA programming details.

Programming: Refer to Section 8.7.2


/M/66-123 DXP Plws Programming hsfrwcfions

8.7.2

Tie Line Support Programming

Programming:




4 . Type line port number l-240 or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

The system displays page 1 of the line programming menu

5 . From line programming menu, type item number for line type and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE bar to toggle line type and press ENTER.

7 . From line programming menu, type item number for another line parameter, press ENTER,

8 . Respond to screen prompt action for feature setting, and press ENTER to accept setting.

9 . Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all required parameter choices.



11 0 From menu page 2 of line programming menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

1 2 . Respond to screen prompt action for feature setting, and press ENTER to accept setting.

1 3 . Repeat steps 11 and 12 for all required parameter choices.

1 4 . When finished, press ESCAPE twice.


1 6 . Repeat steps for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.



8.8

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Programming

Through the DISA programming routines, you can configure a system to allow outside callers to call directly into the system. DISA callers can dial authorization codes that allow them to use the system’s features that are normally available only to inside callers.

NOTE: It is possible to use the automatic route selection (ARS) feature

(Section 12) along with the DZSA feature to route DZSA calls that pass through the system. Zf you enable this application, you may need to add

pauses in the ARS modtfj digits table (Section 14.4.4) to accountfor the time delay the system experiences in obtaining the CO dial tone. The amount of time delay varies for each installation; therefore, you must test your installation to determine the time required to obtain a CO dial tone when using the DZSA feature.

You can then adjust the system timing pause time or add multiple pauses to o$set this delay.

8.8.1

Description:

DISA Cofigura tion (DISA Specific Programming)

The purpose of the DISA specific programming is to perform the following tasks:

- Enable extensions where day/night DISA calls will be routed when call-routing is necessary,

- Enable proprietary voice mail to receive DISA calls and route the calls to a dedicated mailbox that holds the appropriate intercept greetings,

- Select access Iockout time (the amount of time that the line remains locked-out from use after invalid conditions occur-such as, when a caller repeatedly dials an invalid authorization code),

- Select the timeout period for DISA extensions that ring without answer (RNA),

- Select the maximum timeout period for the reminder tone that sounds during an in-process call when the DISA caller is using an outside line and the system has no disconnect supervision. This tone sounds at set intervals to remind the caller that he or she must dial a code (any single digit) or be disconnected within 10 seconds,

- Select the option to either route a DISA call or drop it after caller dials an invalid authorization code


2 . From main menu, select Lines and press ENTER.

3 . From the lines menu, select DISA configuration and press ENTER.

4 . From the DISA configuration menu, select Day Routing Extension and press ENTER.

5 . Type day routing extension number and press ENTER.

6 . Type night routing extension number and press ENTER.

7 . Type voice mail Routing ID (up to eight digits) and press ENTER.

8 . Toggle the SPACE bar to select access lockout times (2,5, 10, 15,30 minutes) and press ENTER.

9 . Type the ring no answer (RNA) rings of 0 through 9, and press ENTER.

10. Toggle the SPACE bar to select Maximum Reminder Timeout periods of (2,5, 10, 15,30 minutes) and press ENTER.

11. Toggle the SPACE bar to select Route or Drop from Route/Drop Invalid Access field and press ESCAPE twice.





8.8.2

Description:

Enabling Or Disabling DISA Lines

Use the following programming instructions to enable or disable DISA capability on lines 1 through 240. Also, use the DISA Voice Options 1 through 4 to select digital voice announce

(DVA) messages. For example, selecting DISA voice option 2 will cause welcome greeting 2, day main menu 2, night main menu 2, recall no answer 2, and recall busy 2 prompts to play whenever a DISA line is covered by DVA. Refer to section 14.3 for complete DVA programming details.

Programming



3 . From the lines menu, select line programming and press ENTER*

4 . Enter line number you want to program and press ENTER.

5 . From the line (number) programming menu (page 2), select DISA and press ENTER.

6 . Toggle the SPACE bar to select/deselect DISA and press ENTER.

7 . Enter 1 through 4 for the DISA Voice Options and press ESCAPE twice.


9 . Enter the number for the next line you want to program or press ESCAPE to end.

8.8.3

Description:

Programming DISA Authorization Codes

DISA callers with assigned authorization codes have access to advanced system features.

Authorization codes are associated with either personal or group intercom numbers; therefore, when a DISA caller enters his or her authorization code, the code alerts the system as to what features to make available to the caller. Once callers access features with authorization codes, the access remains in effect until any idle time exceeds the authorization code time-out period.

Use this programming procedure to assign or modify authorization codes and to tie the authorization codes to accompaning intercom numbers. Use the Section 8.8.4 procedure to assign a station class of service to the intercom numbers.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select SMDABMDR and press ENTER.

3 . From SMDAKMDR menu, type item number for authorization codes and press ENTER.

4 . From authorization code menu, type line number to add, remove, or modify authorization codes and press ENTER.

5 . Type authorization code (up to 6 digits) and press ENTER.

NOTE: You can include a programmed pause as part of the authorization code by typing a p at the point in the code where you wish a pause to occur.

If

you include a pause, a user must wait the programmed pause time at the proper point when he or she dials the DLSA authorization code because the pause is now part of the code.

6 . If adding or modifying a code, type intercom number that it is associated with and press ENTER.

7 . When finished, press ESCAPE once.

8 . Type item number to display authorization codes for review and press ENTER.

9 . When finished, press ESCAPE to end.



8.8.4

Description:

Remote COS Programming

DISA callers that have assigned authorization codes have access to advanced system features.

The features that they have access to are controlled by the station class of service that you assign with this programming procedure. The intercom number that is associated with this remote COS assignment is the same intercom number that is associated with the caller’s DISA authorization code that you set using the Section 8.8.3 procedure.

Programming: 1.

2.

3 .

4.

5 .

6 .

7.


From main menu, select Intercom number and press ENTER.

From Intercom menu, select Modify Intercoms and press ENTER.

Enter intercom number and press ENTER. (Remember, this is the intercom number that you set in Section 8.8.4 to correspond with the DISA authorization code.)

Select Remote COS and press ENTER.

Enter station class of service number l-32 and press ESCAPE twice.


8.8.5

Description:

Remote Day Exception Number/Night Exception Number

A DISA caller may have access to an outside line where the toll restriction is based on the

DISA authorization code that is associated with a particular class of service. Remote day and night exception numbers allow DISA callers to dial numbers that their toll restriction normally prevents them from dialing. If a toll restriction table exception number matches one of the exception numbers that you assign using this procedure, the DISA caller is allowed to dial the number.


32 exception numbers to each DISA class of service. You also must assign one exception number to each toll restriction table line entry (Section II. 7).





5. From COS programming menu, type item number for day exception number and press ENTER.

6. Type day exception number (O-32) (n, nn, n-nn, or 0 for none) and press ENTER.

7. Repeat step 6 for night exception number.






Programming Intercom Numbers

/M/66-123 o Understanding Station Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.1

l l

Modifying Intercom Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 . 2

Adding Intercom Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 . 3 l

Removing Intercom Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 . 4 l

Renumbering Intercom Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.5

3


Intercom Number Programming 9-1

IMl66-123 DXP Bhs Programming Ins trerctions

9.1

Understanding Station Numbering

The system provides a maximum of 1000 intercom slots with 480 slots set up as personal intercom numbers. This means that the system provides up to 520 group intercom numbers. All intercom numbers are four digits, and at default, the system assigns blocks of intercom numbers in the following catagories:

1001-1480 = personal intercom numbers

400 l-4480,5000-5039 = group intercom numbers

5040-5999 = unassigned-used for renumbering purposes

6000-8999 = feature codes

Because there are no dedicated station ports in the DXP Plus, the system uses an automatic configuration method to logically number its stations. Automatic configuration occurs after you perform a mode-+ne or mode-two master clear on the system.

How automatk

With automatic configuration, the system does a search for all installed station boards in the main and expansion cabinets, and assigns a logical number for each provided station configuration encountered during the search. The search begins in the main cabinet at the left-most universal works slot and proceeds left to right. The search then moves to the upper expansion cabinet where it searches left-most slot to right-most slot. The search finally moves to the lower expansion cabinet where it again searches left-most slot to right-most slot. When automatic configuration is finished, the system has logically numbered all station ports in ascending order from the left-most slot to right-most slot throughout the entire system.

How logical number and

The logical number of a station corresponds to its relationship to other stations in the system but is not dependent upon the board’s placement in the cabinet. The physical location of a station

physical location corresponds to the order of the system’s board slots. The main cabinet contains slots l-9, the relate to one upper expansion cabinet contains slots 10-20, and the lower expansion cabinet contains slots another

21-30. Therefore, even if the first encountered station board is located in slot five of the main cabinet, the system still assigns logical number one to the first station provided by that board.

During installation, you can skip slots. For example, you can install 16-station digital station boards in only slots one and 30 if you wish. In this case, slot one yields logical station numbers

1-16 and slot 30 yields logical station numbers 17-32. A newly defaulted system assigns personal intercom number 1001 to logical station one and continues in an assending sequence until it assigns personal intercom number 1480 to logical number 480.

Adding boards

If you install or relocate a station board, this board does not operate until you.take appropriate without programming action (Section 15). If you use an available open slot for adding or relocating a renumbering board, that board’s stations assume logical numbers in sequence after the system’s last assigned logical station number. For example, if the system’s last logical station number is 24, the logical numbers of the newly installed board’s stations begin at logical number 25.

Logical numbers previously assigned to a removed board are available for reassignment.

Stations of an added or relocated board first assume the logical numbers made available by the vacated slot. For example, if the system’s last logical number is 64 and you remove the board providing stations with logical numbers 1-16, the stations on an added board assume logical numbers beginning with 1 instead of 65. However, if you remove an eight-station board and add a 16-station board, the first eight stations stations on the added board assume logical numbers

1-8 and the last eight stations assume logical numbers 65-72.

Remember, should you master clear the system, the automatic configuration feature logically numbers all station ports in ascending order from the left-most slot to right-most slot throughout the entire system. This action renumbers those stations provided by boards that you have added or relocated since you last performed the system master clear.

9-2 In tercsm Number Programming

9.2

Description:

Modifying Intercom Numbers

Use this programming procedure to modify intercom numbers and station names. A display name is composed of a maximum of seven characters and shows in the display of an LCD speakerphone as a identification aid. A full name is composed of a maximum of 20 characters and shows in some voice mail and open architecture interface applications. You can compose a valid name from any alpha-numeric character; however, the first character of a display name must be an alphabetic character. Refer to Section 7.2.2 for the creating station names procedure.

Programming:

1. Press CONTROL T for the main menu.

2 . From main menu, select intercom numbers and press ENTER.

3 . From intercom numbers menu, select modify intercoms and press ENTER.

4 . Type the intercom number to be modified and press ENTER.

5 . Type the row number for extension and press ENTER.

6 . Type the new intercom number and press ENTER.

NOTE: You can select a new intercom numberfrom 5040 to 5999 if the system’s intercom numbers are at default; however, you can select any four-digit intercom number if you remove dialing conflicts that the system prompts you about.

6 . Type display name (a-z, A-Z, O-9, punctuation, special characters, and so forth) and press ENTER.

A display name can be up to seven characters long.

7 . Type full name (a-z, A-Z, O-9, punctuation, special characters, and so forth) and press ENTER.

A full name can be up to 20 characters long.



10. Repeat steps 4-8 for each intercom number or press ESCAPE to end.

9.3

Description:

Adding Intercom Numbers

Use the procedure to add intercom numbers.

Programming:


2. From main menu, select intercom numbers and press ENTER.

3. From intercom numbers menu, select add intercoms and press ENTER.

4. Type intercom number to be added and press ENTER.

5. Type g for group intercom or p for personal intercom and press ENTER.

6. Type the station port number (1480) and press ENTER.

7. If a prompt line indicates a conflict, type y to overwrite or n to reject and press ENTER.


intercom Number Programming 9-3


9.3. I

Description:

Grow Intercom Access

Use this procedure to add group intercom numbers to stations for their use. Also refer to

Section 7.3 to map buttons for group intercom number selection.

Programming:







7. Type group intercom numbers ( type nnnn,nnnn, nnnn or type nnnn-nnnn) and press ENTER.




9.3.2

Description:

Intercom Hunt List

Place personal intercom and group intercom numbers in a list with this programming procedure.

Calls to a busy hunt list number will search the list for an idle number at which to ring.

Up to eight intercom numbers are allowed in a hunt list. These can be all group intercom numbers or one personal intercom number and seven group intercom numbers. Do not place the same group intercom number in more than one hunt list.

Programming:




4. Type personal intercom number of station being programmed and press ENTER.


6. Type intercom numbers for list (up to eight allowed separated with commas - include the personal intercom of station being programmed for intercom call hunting; otherwise, only line calls to the station will hunt) and press ENTER.




9-4 Intercom Nomber Programming


9.4

Description:

Removing Intercom Numbers

Use this procedure to remove intercom numbers.

NOTE:

If you remove or renumber an intercom number, be sure that you do not use the old intercom number in button mapping, hunt lists, call forwarding and similar applications.

Programming:



3. From the intercom numbers menu, select remove intercoms and press ENTER.

4. Type intercom number to be removed and press ENTER.


9.5

Description:

Renumbering intercom Numbers

Use this procedure to renumber one intercom number or a block of intercom numbers

NOTE: Ifyou remove or renumber an intercom number, be sure that you do not use the old intercom number in button mapping, hunt lists, call forwarding and similar applications.

Programming:



3. From the intercom numbers menu, select renumber and press ENTER.

4. Type station ports 1480 (type as n, nn, nnn or n-nnn) to renumber and press ENTER.

5. Type the beginning intercom number in the series to be assigned to the block and press ENTER.


Intercom Number Programming 9-5

Programming Call Costing and

Station Message- Detail

Accounting and Reports fSMDA/SMDR Proaramminal

l l

SMDABMDRParameters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1

SMDAReports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2

l

Account Codes (Forced with Positive Verification) . . . 10.3

l l

Emergency Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4

Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5

Call Costing and SMDAASMDR Programming 10-1


10.1

SMDALSMDR Parameters

IO. 1. I Dial Time Limit

Description.-

Program the amount of time that the system ignores for dialing purposes e The system does not cost dialing time when it records the time of a call for costing purposes. Refer to Section 12.5 for related call costing information.

Programming:


2. From the main menu, select SMDA/SMDR and press ENTER.

3. From SMDA/SMDR programming menu, select SMDBrISMDR parameters and press ENTER.

4. From SMDA/SMDR parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE BAR for feature value.



10.1.2

Answer Time Limit

Description:

Program the amount of time that the system waits before beginning to cost a cab. This time allows for a call to ring and be answered before being costed. Refer to Section 62.5 for related call costing information

Programming: 1.

2 .

3 .

4.

5 .

6 .

7.


From main menu, select SMDA/SMDR and press ENTER.

From SMDA/SMDR programming menu, select SMDAISMDR parameters and press ENTER.

From SMDA/SMDR parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

Press SPACE BAR for feature value.


Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end.

IO. 1.3

SMDR Print Parameter

Description: When you turn on the SMDR with this programming action, the system provides continuous printout of system-wide station call activity as it is collected. You can arrange for the printout to include the cost of each reported call or to report the calls without the costing information

Refer to Section 12.5 for related call costing information

Programming:


2. From main menu, select SMDAKMDR and press ENTER.

3. From SMDAISMDR programming menu, select SMDAISMDR parameters and press ENTER.





1 O-2 CaN Costing and SMDABMDR Programming

IO. 1.4

SMDR Record Format

Description:

Column l - 4

6-8

9-l 1

13-20

22-26

29-33

36-39

43-58

65-7 1

Choose either a station message detail report (SMDR) format or a station message detailed accounting (SMDA) format for the reportThis section (Section 10.1.4) and Section 10.2.1

include examples of some typical reports for your reference.

The system presents each record in an 80-column format and ends it with a carriage return/line feed. The following chart details the formats for both SMDR and SMDA records.

Column l - 5

7-l 1

15-18

21-28

30-34

37-43

4W6

4748

49-52

54-56

57-59

61-76

SMDR Records

Value station number line number not currently used month/day/year time call was initiated (24-hour) call duration (minutes and tenths or NOANS) ring time (incoming call) digits dialed on line (maximum of 16) call cost (if enabled)

SMDA Records

Value month/day time call was initiated (24-hour) station number account code (two lines if greater that 8 digits) call duration (minutes and tenths or NOANS) call cost call type (I = incoming, 0 = outgoing) not currently used ring time (incoming call) line number caller ID line digits dialed on line (maximum of 16)

Format nnnn nnn nnlnnlnn nn:nn nnn.n

nn.n

nnnn. . . n

$nnn.nn

Format nn/nn nn:nn nnnn nnnnnnnn nnn.n

$nnn.nn

n nn.n

nnn

ID nnnn . . . n

Justification left right right right right right left right

Justification left left right right right left left right right left left

Programming:


2. From main menu, select SMDA/SMDR and press ENTER.

3. From SMDA/SMDR programming menu, select SMDA/SMDR parameters and press ENTER.

4. From SMDAKMDR parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.




Operation:

INTERCOM +k # 0 +K 82 then dial code

1 = all records 5 = department records

2 = station reports 6 = automatic reports

3 = line reports 7 = delete all records

4 = account code reports

Call Costing and SMDABMDR Programming IO-3

/M/66-123

SMDR Record Sample Shown In SMDA Format

DXP Plus Progfammhg fns tructions

09/23 f2I27

09/23 12:2s

09/23 12:30

09/23 12~28

09/23 12~30

09/23 12:17

09/23 12:29

09/23 12:31

09/23 12:31

09123 12~32

09/23 12:31

09/23 12~26

09/23 12~32

09,'23 12:32

09/23 12:28

09/23 12~34

09123 12:33

09/23 12:20

09/23 12:32

09/23 X2:34

163

175

117

194

154

139

188

154

143

188

203

144

154

154

154

154

184

140

161

205

14.2

2.0

0.3

0.9

0,3

1.1

2 . 9

0 . 0

0*4

2.4

0.2

6.1

0.5

1.1

5.7

0.1

1.0

14.2

2.6

0.5

I

I

I

0

I

0

I

0

0

I

I

I

0

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.5

4.1

0.1

0.5

3.3

0.0

0.0

3.9

0.0

0.0

0.1

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.4

0.0

0.3 18

0.1 88

82

110

0.1 102

74 o*o 5

0.2 17

75

0.0 5

0.0 16

0.0 8

0.2 18

0.0 17

0.1 21

0.1 16

0.0 8

0.0 7

102

0.0 16

9782280

9782200

9782280

9782200

9782200

104 Call Costing and ShlDALSMDR Programming


IO. 1.5

Account Code (System Parameters)

Description: Account codes are used to identify calls by category or by any other desired grouping, so that the system can record costing by that category. You can arrange the system to force the user to enter an account code and have the system verify it before it allows the user to make a call. Turn on the account code feature for the entire system using this procedure. Also, enable or disable system verification of the entered code. If you enable verification, the system compares the account code entered by a station user with the programmed account code entries that you have assigned. If the system does not find a match and you have enabled the forced account code feature through station class of service, the system prevents any further dialing until the user enters a matching account code. If you have not enabled verification, the system does not check the entered account code for a match. See

Section

10.3 for further account code programming details.



3. From SMDA/SMDR menu, select SMDAKMDR parameters and press ENTER.


5. Press SPACE BAR for desired value.



10.1.6

Account Code Display And Account Code Display Time

Description: As a feature to LCD speakerphone users, a message appears in the telephone’s display to prompt the user to enter an account code during incoming and outgoing calls. If the system does not require such a prompt (for example, because the account code feature is disabled), turn off the prompting message display with this programming operation.

If the system does require the prompting display and you enable it using this procedure, also set the length of time that the prompt shows on the user’s display. See Section 10.3 for further account code programming details.

NOTE: When the account code display is on, the user must enter an account code within the display time when he or she is making an outgoing call; otherwise, the system will drop the line.


2 . From main menu, select SMDAlSMDR menu and press ENTER.

3 . From SMDAKMDR menu select SMDA/SMDR parameters and press ENTER.

4 . From SMDA/SMDR parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5 . Press SPACE BAR for feature value.


7 . If you enabled the display, continue with step 8. If you disabled the display, press ESCAPE once and continue with step 11.


9 . Press SPACE BAR for time.



IMl66- 123 DXP Plus Programming lnstruetions

10.1.7

Account Code Length

Description: An account code can be a minimum of three digits or a maximum of 16 digits. Use this procedure to set the amount of account code digits. See Section 60.3 for further account code programming details.

NOTE If you change the account code length you will delete all currently programmed account codes.

Programming:

1 D

2. From main menu, select SMDA/SMDR and press.

3. From SMDA/SMDR menu, select SMDA/SMDR parameters and press ENTER.

4. From SMDAGMDR parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Type the account digit amount (3-16).



IO. 1.8

SMDA Attendant Delete

Description:

Use this programming feature to provide the system attendant with the ability to delete SMDA records from the system memory.


2. From main menu, select SMDAKMDR and press ENTER.

3. From SMDhVSMDR programming menu, select SMDA/SMDR parameters and press ENTER.





Operation: INTERCOM +k # 0 +K 827

IO. 1.9

SMDLVSMDR Printer Port

Description: Use this programming feature to determine which serial data port the system will route its generated SMDAKMDR through.





5. Type data port number (1-18) and press ENTER.



10-6 Call Cosfing and SMDABMDW Programming

IO. 1.10

Report Option

Description:

You can arrange for the SMDWSMDA parameters to convey either the cost of calls that the stations make or the amount of time that lines have been on hold at the stations.


2. From main menu, select SMDAISMDR and press ENTER.






IO. 1. II SMDR Record

Description: When you enable this feature, the system stores SMDR records for the specified line.





5. From line programming, type item number for feature and press ENTER.





Call Costing and SMDALSMDR Programming 10-7

lMl66-123 DXP PIus Programming Instrwetions

10.2

SMDA Reports

Description:

The SMDA feature allows the system to store various call records and generate reports of these records for printout. These reports include either station, line, account codes, or all of the above.

When the system generates a station report, it will generate a separate report for any and al11 stations that have had outside call activity.

The station report shows all calls that the station user has made and received along with totals and averages. Line reports show the totals for each active line in the system.

The line report shows the number of calls, total minutes busy, number of incompleted calls, and cost for each line. The line report also summarizes line group activity as well.

The account code report provides the same information as the station report except the records are based upon each account code.

The all record report sends all stored SMDA records to the serial data port. This report is not in groups as is the station, line or account code reports but rather is in a chronological order.

You can view the number of free records or you can delete all stored SMDA records to insure that only the latest SMDA reports are being stored or to provide a known starting port for record storage. You can do this from your programming terminal or make this selection from a programming station using the system manager and attendant programming procedure.

NOTE: If your programming terminal shares the same port as your data printer and you command it delete all records, the system will not take this action until you log out of the programming mode-

You can request a manual report or an automatic report on a timed basis. Further, you or the system user can employ the system manager and attendant programming procedure to request reports at a programming station. Finally, the system will automatically generate an automatic report when its memory nears its saturation point (95 percent full), Refer to

Section 10.2.3 for some typical report examples

10-8 CaU Costing and SMDWSMDR Programming

DXP Plus Programming instructions

10.2. I Manual ReDorts

Description:

Use the following programming procedure to manually command a printout to occur.



3. From printouts menu, select SMDAISMDR and press ENTER,

4. From SMDABMDR menu, select SMDA reports and press ENTER.

5. From SMDA reports menu, select desired report and press ENTER.


lMl66-123

10.2.2

Aufomafic ReDor&

Description: Program the system to automatically provide call cost reports for printing.

- Choose the day and time that the printout is desired.

- Choose the type and detail of each report.

- Dictate whether the call records are to be erased from the system memory after they are printed.


2. From the main menu, select SMDAISMDR and press ENTER.

3. From the SMDAKMDR menu, select automatic reports and press ENTER.

4. Type row number to select desired report and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE bar for desired setting or type report print time in 24-hour format

(as directed by menu prompt) and press ENTER.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all desired reports and press ENTER.



Call Costing and SMDNSMDR Programming 19-9

10.2.3

SMDA Retort ExamDIes

LINE GROUP SUMMARY

__D---___--_D_------_o___o________

LINE GROUP

--m-m-----

5

9

1 0

11

12

1

4

ACCESSES

-o

--

3

p

731

8

0

0

0

0

0

FAILURES w-------

1 2

0

0

8

0

0

0

1 3

1 4

0

0

0

0

1 5 0 0

1 6 0 0

__D---D_--___D--_o-_DDDD-Do----poD

10-IQ Call Costing and SMDABMDR Programming


10.3

Account Codes (Forced, with Positive Verification)

10.3.1

Account Code (System Parameters)

Description:

Account codes are used to identify calls by category or by any other desired grouping, so that the system can record costing by that category. You can arrange the system to force the user to enter an account code and have the system verify it before it allows the user to make a call. Turn on the account code feature for the entire system using this procedure. Also, enable or disable system verification of the entered code. If you enable verification, the system compares the account code entered by a station user with the programmed account code entries that you have assigned. If the system does not find a match and you have enabled the forced account code feature through station class of service, the system prevents any further dialing until the user enters a matching account code. If you have not enabled verification, the system does not check the entered account code for a match.

Programming:



3. From SMDAKMDR menu, select SMDA/SMDR parameters and press ENTER.


5. Press SPACE BAR for desired value.



10.3.2

Account Code Display And Account Code Display Time

Description:

As a feature to LCD speakerphone users, a message appears in the telephone’s display to prompt the user to enter an account code during incoming and outgoing calls.

If the system does not require such a prompt (for example, because the account code feature is disabled), turn off the prompting message display with this programming operation. If the system does require the prompting display and you enable it using this procedure, also set the length of time that the prompt shows on the user’s display.

NOTE: When the account code display is on, the user must enter an account code within the display time when he or she is making an outgoing call; otherwise, the system will drop the line.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select SMDA/SMDR menu and press ENTER.

3 . From SMDA/SMDR menu select SMDAKMDR parameters and press ENTER.


5 . Press SPACE BAR for feature value.


7 . If you enabled the display, continue with step 8. If you disabled the display, press ESCAPE once and continue with step 11.


9 . Press SPACE BAR for time.



Call Costing and SMDAISMDR Programming 10-l 1


10.3‘3 Account Code Lengfh

Description:

An account code can be a minimum of three digits or a maximum of 16 digits.

Use this procedure to set the amount of account code digits.

NOTE:

If

you change the account code length you will delete all currently programmed account codes.

Programming:


2. From main menu, select SMDAISMDR and press.

3. From SMDAKMDR menu, select SMDABMDR parameters and press ENTER.

4. From SMDABMDR parameters menu, type item number for feature and press ENTER.

5. Type the account digit amount (3-16).



10.3.4

Account Code Programming (Add, Remove, Display Acwunf Codes)

Description:

Use this procedure to assign up to 1000 account codes (each up to 16 digits in length-see

Section

103.3). Alternately, use this procedure to remove previously assigned account codes from the system. Add or remove one account code at a time or an entire block of account codes all at once. To assign numbers that user’s can dial without entering an account code, refer to

Section 10.4.

Programming:


2. From the main menu, select SMDAISMDR and press ENTER.

3. From SMDABMDR menu, select account code menu and press ENTER.

4. From account code menu, type item number to add or remove one account code or a block of account codes and press ENTER.

5. Type account code (up to 16 digits) and press ENTER. Then, if assigning block of codes, type quantity of account codes (up 1000) and press ENTER

6. When finished, press ESCAPE once.

7. Type item number to display account codes for review and press ENTER.

8. When finished press ESCAPE as necessary to return to main menu.

10-12 CaH Costing and SMBAfSMDR Programming


10.3.5

Account Code (For Class Of Service)

Description:

After you have enabled the account code feature for the system, set its parameters, and programmed its list of account codes into the system, turn the feature on for a station class of service and make it either forced or optional. If you make it a forced account code, the user must enter an account code before the system will let him or her dial the number for an outgoing call. Also, on incoming calls a user must enter an account code before the system will allow him or her to make any future outgoing calls. See

Section

IO.4 for an exception to forced account code entry.





5 . From the COS programming menu, type item number for account code and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE BAR for feature setting.


8 . Press CONTROL N as necessary to display line number for forced account code and press ENTER.

9 . Type item number for forced account code and press ENTER.




10.4

Emergency Numbers

Description:

When the system requires an account code, a telephone user must enter it before the system allows him or her to dial a number; however, the system does not require an account code prior to allowing a telephone user to dial a designated emergency number. Use this procedure to list the designated emergency numbers. The system accepts a total of 16 numbers. Each number can be up to 16 digits long.

Programming:

1.

2 .

3 .

4 .

5 .


From main menu, select SMDA/SMDR and press ENTER.

From SMDA/SMDR menu, select emergency numbers and press ENTER.

From emergency numbers menu, type row number to select entry location and press ENTER.

Type emergency number (up to 16 digits), or press SPACE BAR to delete current number, and press ENTER.



8 . Press ESCAPE to end.

Call Costing and SMDABMDR Programming l&13

10.5

Description:

Authorization Code

Authorization codes provide system users the mobility to use their class of service (COS) features, prime line assignments, and exception numbers on any telephone in the system instead of being limited by what is available to the particular telephone they happen to be using.

One popular term for such a feature is walking class ofservice. Authorization codes are associated with personal intercom numbers as are COS, prime markings, and exception numbers.

Therefore, when a user enters his or her authorization code at any system telephone, the code alerts the system as to what features to make available to the user. The user can employ the telephone for anything allowed by his or her personal intercom number; however, he or she cannot disturb the last number redial stored there by the normal user.

Once a user accesses his or her telephone features, they remain in effect until any idle time at the telephone exceeds the authorization code time-out period.

As an additional feature, when a telephone is mapped with a lock button, a user can press it and then dial an authorization code. This action denies access to that telephone by other users. Use the procedure given here to program and assign authorization codes. Use the Section 7.2.3

procedure to match the COS to the personal intercom number and use the Seectiola 7.3 procedure to assign the lock button to a telephone.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select SMDAISMDR and press ENTER.

3 . From SMDABMDR menu, type item number for authorization codes and press ENTER.

4 . From authorization code menu, type line number to add, remove, or modify authorization codes and press ENTER,

5 . Type authorization code (up to 6 digits) and press ENTER.

NOTE: You can include a two second pause as part of the authorization code by typing a p at the point in the code where you wish a pause to occur. If you include a pause, a user must wait two seconds at the proper point when he or she dials the authorization code because the pause is now part of the code.

6 . If adding or modifying a code, type personal intercom number that it is to be associated with and press ENTER


8 . Type item number to display authorization codes for review and press ENTER.

9 . When finished press ESCAPE as necessary to return to system menu.

10.5. I Authorization Code Timeout

Description:

Once a user uses the authorization code feature to access his or her telephone features, they remain in effect until any idle time at the telephone exceeds the authorization code time-out period that you program with this feature.

Programming:








1 O-14 Cal Costing and SMDALSMDR Programming

Programming Toll Resfricfion

l

Toll Restriction Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1

l

TollRrestriction Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.2

l

Toll Restriction Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3

l l

Restriction Level Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.4

Toll Groups Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.5

l

Restricted Numbers Programming . . . . . . . . . . .

11.6

l

Exception Number Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.7

With the toll restriction feature, the system allows or denies outgoing line calls to selected users over selected lines. Toll restriction meets different dialing needs by allowing users to dial numbers that they are required to dial yet restrict them from dialing numbers they are not allowed to dial. A defaulted system allows station users to dial any number they choose to dial. The toll restriction, automatic route selection, and call costing features may be used separately, together, or not used at all. For a overview illustration of toll restriction, refer Section 11.3

Assign toll restriction in the sequence detailed below.

Step 1. Program the restriction level (Section 11.4).

Step 2. Program the toll groups

(Section 11.5).

Step 3. Program the restriction numbers

(Section 11.6).

Step 4. Program the exception numbers (Section 11.7).

A user can dial any number that his or her station is not restricted from dialing. A station user can dial any numbers restricted by a restriction level that is equal to or lower than the one assigned to his or her station. A station that is restricted from dialing a certain telephone number on a certain line can, if programming permits, dial that number on another line that is not restricted.

As a user dials a number from a station that has toll restriction assigned, the toll restriction feature first makes a comparison between the dialed number and the telephone number entries on the toll restriction table. It compares the dialed number up to the last digit in the entry.

At that point it considers it a match and applies the other restriction tests whether the station user keeps dialing or not.

Example entry A: l-804 555-1212

Example entry B: l-804

In example A, the toll restriction feature continues matching digits (and does not apply any restriction) until the the user dials the entire 1 l-digit number.

In example B, the feature applies restriction after the user dials l-804.

If the feature finds a match in the toll restriction table, it next compares the dialed number to entries in the toll group. If it finds a match here, it next compares the restriction level of the entry against the restriction level of the station. If the restriction level of the station is equal to or less than the restriction level of the matched entry, the toll restriction feature allows dialing over the line specified with the toll group assignment. If the restriction level is greater than the restriction level of the matched entry, the toll restriction feature compares the dialed number to the exception number list. If it finds a match there, it allows the call.

Toll Restriction Programming 1 l-l

/M/66-323 DXP Plus Programming instructions

11.1

Toll Restriction Example “I

In this example, the chief executive can dial all telephone numbers except those numbers with a restriction level of always deny. The section manager can dial all numbers except those in restriction level 8 (international numbers over lines assigned totoll group 1) and those numbers with a restriction level of always deny. The unit manager can dial all numbers except those numbers in restriction levels 7 and 8 (international numbers over lines assigned to toll group 1 and out of state numbers over lines assigned to toll groups 16 and 17) and those numbers with a restriction level of always deny. All other users can dial all numbers except those in restrictiow levels 6

(local calls over lines assigned to toll group 5), 7 (out of state numbers over lines assigned to toll groups 16 and

17), 8 (international numbers over lines assigned to toll group 1) and those numbers with a restriction level of always deny. All toll restricted stations can dial 1800 numbers on all lines. No toll restricted station can dial

1900 numbers on any line. Note that the feature allows dialing on lines that are not in the toll group. As illustrated in this example, there is no restriction for international dialing on lines in toll groups 2,5, 16, and 17 and there is restriction only on lines l-5 in toll group 1.

Catepory

Chief Executive

Section managers

Unit managers

All other users

Dialing

International 011

Out of state

In state

Local calls

9 1 1

1800

1900

7

8

Restriction Level

6

1

Always allow

Always allow

Always deny

5

2

1,

16,17

32

32

3 2

2

5

Toll

1

G r o u p

1 6

1 7

32

Lines Assigned

1,2,3,4,5

637

12,13

14, 15

20,25,26,27,28,29,30

All Lines

3


1 l-2 Toll Resfricfiom Programming


11.2

Poll Restriction Example 2

In this example, assume that you have assigned the following restriction levels and exception numbers to the following people in a company: Keep in mind that you assign restriction level to stations by programming the class of service with a particular restriction level while you assign exception numbers to individual stations through station programming.

Station

President

Executive

Manager

Joe in sales

Sally in sales

Restriction Level

8

7

6

1

1

Exception Number

NONE

NONE

NONE

5

56

Also, assume that you have programmed the following outside numbers, restriction levels and exception numbers into the toll restriction table:

Number

1212

Restriction Level

7

Exceotion Number:

5

1213@@@@@@@ 6

978 2

911

6

NONE

ALWAYS ALLOW NONE

A toll restriction arrangement such as this example permits the following dialing conditions: the president and the executivecan dial all numbers, the executive can dial any 1-212 prefixed number, any 1-213 prefixed number (remember, @ = match any digit),

978 numbers, and 911 (any numbers with restriction level equal to or less than 7), the manager can dial any 1-213 prefixed numbers, 978 numbers and 911 (any numbers with restriction levels equal to or less than 6),

Joe (in sales) can dial 911 (via his restriction level) plus dial any 1-212 numbers through his exception number,

Sally (in sales) can dial 911 (via her restriction level) plus dial any 1-212 and 1-213 numbers through her exception numbers.

(Remember, exception numbers allow Joe and Sally to dial numbers that are denied to them through their restriction levels.)

Toll Restriction Programming 17-3

/M/66-123

11.3

Toll Restriction Flow Diagram

FLOWCHRT

Station Begins

Dialing

Line calls are subjected to toll restriction examination

BXP Plus Programming Instructions

Complete

Dialing

Allowed

YES

YES _

Complete

Dialing

Allowed

Compare Restriction

Level of Matched

Number with

Restriction Levels of

Station Class of Service

Eight (8) levels plus always allow and always deny m One level assigned for each C.O.S. type or assign allow all or deny all

YES

Compare Exception

Number of Matched

Number with Exception

Number of Station

Thirty-two (32) exception numbers m One per Toll Table entry m Up to 32 per station

I l-4 Toll Restriction Programming

11.4

Restriction Level Programming

Description:

Group the system stations into as many as eight different toll calling categories based on the freedom to dial various numbers or the restriction from dialing them. Assign one of eight different restriction (1-8) levels or assign an “allow all” level or a “deny all” level. Level 8 is the least restrictive from a station viewpoint but the most restrictive from a restriction table viewpoint. (For example, a station with a restriction of 8 is only restricted from dialing “always deny” numbers and it can dial numbers with restriction levels of l-8. A station with a restriction level of l-7 cannot dial a number with a toll restriction table entry of 8.) The “allow all” entry ensures that the system applies no dialing restriction to a number (example: 9 11). The “deny all” ensures that a station user can never dial a number (example: l-900).

You actually assign a restriction level to a station by first assigning it to a station class of service and then assigning that class of service to the station. As previously described, the class of service assignment provides features and service that matches the needs of a specific category of stations. Program the restriction level value that accurately reflects the toll restriction dialing freedom expected by a specific category of stations.

Programming: Create eight station categories, and order these categories from those with the most dialing freedom to those with the least and then note the station ports that you plan to each category.

Arrange the toll restriction numbers into these categories so that they correspond to the required dialing freedoms. Assign restriction level numbers to each category. Also, list those numbers that every station must be allowed to dial (such as 911) as “always allow” and list those numbers that should never be dialed, (such as l-900) as “always deny”.

1. From main menu, select TOLL/ARS and press ENTER.

2. From toll restriction menu, select restriction tables and press ENTER.

3 . From toll restriction level menu, type 1 and press ENTER.

4. Select entry line for programming and press ENTER.

5 . Press TAB to position cursor to restriction level column.

6 . Press SPACE BAR to select restriction level l-8, allow all, or deny all.

7. Press ENTER and repeat step 7 for each entry line.



10. Press ENTER to end.

Assign restriction level to class of service with this procedure.

1. Use the work sheet to note the class of service for each restriction level entry.




5 . From COS programming, type class of service number (l-32) ENTER.

6 . From COS programming menu, type item number for day/night restriction level and press ENTER.

7 . Type restriction level number (l-8).





11.5

Poll Groups Programming

Description:

You must assign the individual lines, that you do not want users to use when they dial toll restricted numbers. Do this by first assigning the lines to toll groups and then assigning those toll groups to the restricted number. There are 32 toll groups available for line assignment.

Assign one, several, or all lines to any desired toll group or combination of toll groups as needed.

Programming:




4. Type line name or line number and press ENTER.

5. From line programming, type item number for toll groups and press ENTER.

6. Type group number (O-32) and press ENTER.




DXP Plus Programming instructions M/66-123

11.6

Restricted Numbers Programming

Description: Program restricted numbers as entries in the toll restriction table. The system will accept up to

400 entries. Each restricted number can be up to 16 digits long and can be comprised of the digits O-9 Plus the “match any” digit (@) if needed.

If you program the system to include the automatic route selection (ARS) feature, always fill out the restricted numbers with the @ digit as shown in the following examples: for l+dialing, enter l@@@@@@@@@@, for local dialing, enter @ @ @ @ @ @ @, for l+ 7-digit dialing, enter valid exchanges and the @ digit--either enter 1555 @ @ @ @ or enter

555 @ @ @ @ with the 1 added by the ARS modify digit table.

When you make this arrangement, you ensure that ARS will wait until the user dials all the number’s digits before it determines if all routes are busy. This eliminates the possibility of the user accidentally dialing an intercom number or a feature code.

You can enter a pause at the end of a restricted number’s digit string to indicate that dialing is complete. Do this by typing a P or p after you type the digit string. The pause entry distinguishes this restricted number as unique. You can enter the same digits without the pause but instead followed by additional digits as another unique number. You can assign different routing and toll restriction parameters to each of these entries. There are several applications for this feature. One application is in international dialing where different toll restriction parameters apply depending upon whether the caller dialed 0 or 011. In this case, you can enter 0

pause to access local lines and 01 to access international lines. Another application is with tie line calling where a remote extension is the same digits as an office or area code that you need to enter in the restriction table. By entering nnn pause for tie line access and nnn@ for CO line access, the system can route the call over the proper line. A third application is brought forth with the advent of the new North American Numbering Plan (NANP). With NANP, an area code may be the same digits as a local office code. You can enter nnn@ @ @ @ pause for local line access and nnn @ @ @ @ @ @ @ for long distance line access. In any application, the system resets its pause timer after receiving each caller dialed digit. If the timer expires before the caller dials another digit, the system routes the call based on the digits preceding the pause. If, instead, the system detects more digits instead of a pause, it routes the call based on the entire digit string.

You can enable the pause entry ability using the Section 6.10.5 programming procedure; however, the following Section 11.6.1 procedure for entering the restriction number digits also includes the pause enabling procedure.

Toll Restriction Programming 1 l-7


11.61

Restricted Numbers Programming Procedure

Programming:

Make a list of all of the restricted numbers that the site requires.

Include numbers on the list that should never be restricted, such as 911 (exception). Also include numbers that should never be dialed, such as l-900 (always deny). Use the @ “match any” symbol to encompass a range of numbers wherever possiblele, such as 1 @ @ for any number beginning with a 1. You can enter up to 400 line items on this table.

To enable pause entry,




4 . From system parameters menu, select toWARS dialing pause and press ENTER.




To enter restriction number digits,


2 . From main menu, select TOLL/ARS and press ENTER.

3 . FromTolVARS menu, select restriction tables and press ENTER.

4 . From toll restriction table menu, select entry line for programming and press ENTER.

5 . Type restriction number entry and press ENTER

(Entry can be 16 digits long and can include @ as match any symbol and P for pause.)

6 . Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all entries.


8 Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.


7 7-8 Td Restriction Programming


11.7

Exception Number Programming

Description:

Exception numbers allow stations to dial numbers that are not normally allowed by their restriction levels. When a user dials a number at his or her station, the toll restriction feature compares it to the toll restriction numbers, the toll groups, the restriction level, and to the exception number. If it makes a match, the station is not normally allowed to dial the number.

However, if the exception number of the toll restriction table line entry matches one of the exception numbers assigned to the station, the station is allowed to dial the number. The exception number values that you can assign are 1 through 32 and NONE. You can assign 32 exception numbers to each station. You can assign one exception number to each toll restriction table line entry. The feature provide you with separate line entries expressly for the purpose of specifying special dialing exceptions.

Programming:

Assign exception number to toll restriction table line entry with this procedure.

1. Assign an exception number of 0 to 32 to each listed restriction number that may need it.

2 . Press CONTROL T for main menu.


4 . From toll restriction menu, select restriction tables and press ENTER.

5 . From the restriction table menu, type row number and press ENTER.

6 . Press TAB to position cursor to exception level column.

7. Type exception number O-32.

8 . Press ENTER and repeat step 7 for each line entry.



Assign exception number to station with this procedure.

1.

2 .

3 .

4 .

5 .



From stations menu, select station programming and press ENTER.

Type intercom number or name of station.

From station programming menu, type item number for Day (or Night) exception number.

6 . Type exception numbers O-32 (n,nn or n-nn) or type 0 for none.





Enabling Automatic

Route Selection

Automatic Route Selection Diagram . . . . . . . . . .

12.1

ARSEnable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.2

LineGroupsforARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3

Route Tables (ARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.4

Costing Information (ARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.5

Automatic Route Selection for Speed Dial Numbers . . 12.6

Automatic route selection (ARS) permits the system to select the least costly line group that is available to a station for outgoing call routing. The system modifies the dialed number, if needed, to match the selected line group. Additionally, ARS provides the costing information for the dialed call that is reported by the station message detail accounting feature. ARS makes its routing decisions (which lines to route a call over, when and how to modify a number, and costing information) based entirely upon the programming of the system.

NOTE: When the ARS feature is active, never program a direct line appearance to a station.

If a station user selects a line directly at his or her station, the system will not route the call using the ARS feature.

For an overview of automatic route selection, refer to Section 12. I .

Automatic Route Selection Programming 12-1

/M/66-123

12. I Automatic Route Selection Diagram


Route Call Via

Route Table 32

No

1

No

Test for Route Table

Entry on Toll

Restriction Table

Yes

Dialing

Denied

Select Route

Table

Equal oe

Greater Than

I

I I

/ Pi&L.+ 1

Modify

Dialing Number

Test for

Costing

Information

Complete Dialing

Allowed - Costing

Reported to SMDA cpJso53

12-2 Automatic Route Selection Programming


12.2

ARS Enable

Description:

You can enable or disable automatic route selection on a system-wide basis. A defaulted system has ARS disabled.

Programming:




4. From the system parameters menu, select ARS feature and press ENTER.

5. Press SPACE BAR to toggle between enable and disable.

6.

Press ESCAPE twice.


12.3

Line Groups for ARS

Description:

Before automatic route selection can operate, you must group similar lines together into line groups. The system can have a total of 16 line groups with unlimited lines in each group.

Be sure that you program similar line types together into the same line groups to take advantage of the efficiency and cost savings associated with automatic route selection. Some examples of lines that have similar characteristics and should be grouped together into line groups are as listed below:

- outgoing WATS lines to a particular area,

- FX lines to a frequently called area,

- similar AT&T long distance lines,

- similar MCI lines,

A line group can consist of only one line, (for example, if only one FX line exists, put it into a separate line group). Doing this allows the ARS feature to route calls over that group (FX line) for any calls to the FX line area.

NOTE: To prevent system users from accessing non-ARS line groups, use the Section 6.12

procedure to clear the dialing codes for all non-ARS line groups.

Programming:



3 . From the lines menu, select line group programming and press ENTER.

4 . Type line group number (1-16) and press ENTER.

5 . Type a to add lines, r to remove lines, or c to change name of line group and press ENTER.

6 . Type line to be removed, added, or changed then press ENTER.


8 . Repeat steps 4-7 for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.


/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming lnsfrucfions

12.4

Route Tables (ARS)

Description:

The ARS feature interacts with the toll restriction feature. You must enter a number into the toll restriction table and assign a route table (l-32) to it before the system can perform ARS on the dialed number. The system will route only those numbers that you have both assigned a route number and entered on the toll restriction table.

The route table entry specifies the following parameters:

- over what line group the call will route,

- whether the station is permitted to make a call on that group,

- whether the dialed numbers must be modified to match that line group.

If a dialed number is not matched by an entry in the toll restriction table, it is routed by route table 32-the default route table. The system defaults table 32 to use line group 16 and it defaults line group 16 to use all lines. You must either remove all invalid lines from line group

16 or make table 32 inactive if you do not need default routing.

The entered numbers can be some of the same numbers that you enter as toll restriction numbers or other numbers that are in addition to them. Either way, you can enter a maximum of 400 toll restriction and/or ARS numbers. Each entered number can be up to 16 digits long and can be comprised of digits O-9 Plus the “match any” digit (@) if needed.

NOTE: When the system accepts a number entry into the toll restriction table, it re-orders all of the table entries. The system places a 0 after all other digits in the entries. Also, it places a number with a leading I ahead ofthe same number without a leading 1.

Programming:

To enter a number in the toll restriction table and assign a route table to it, proceed as follows,

1 e Make a list of the numbers to be routed.

2 . Press CONTROL T for main menu.


4 . From the toll restriction menu, select restriction tables and press ENTER.

5 . Select line number and press ENTER. (Press CONTROL and type IN for additional page of line numbers).

6 . Type ARS number entry. Entry can be up to 16 digits long and can include @ as “‘match any” symbol.

7 . Press TAB key to place cursor at route table entry column.

8 . Type l-32 to choose route table and press ENTER.

9 . Repeat steps 5-8 for all required ARS numbers.



12-4 Aufomafic Route Selection Programming


12.4.1

Route Table Warning Tone

Description:

Programming:

You can arrange for the system to sound a warning tone in the user’s handset or station speaker if ARS routes a call on any route other than the least expensive, This tone indicates that the system has chosen a more expensive line group. If a station user hears this tone, he or she should hang up and try again later.

To enable route select warning tone, ’


2 . From the main menu, select TOLL/ARS and press ENTER.

3 . From the TOLL/ARS menu, select route table and press ENTER.

4 . Type l-32 to select route table to be programmed and press ENTER.

5 . Type l-6 to select route number and press ENTER.

7 . Press TAB key to position cursor at route status column.

8 . Press SPACE BAR for feature value and press ENTER.

9. Press ESCAPE.

10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for all six routes.



13. Repeat steps 4-12 for all route tables.




12.4.2

Routes

Description:

There are a total of 32 route tables that you can be program for the system. Each route table can contain up to 6 routes. Each of these routes convey the data listed as follows:

- the line group to route the call over,

- the modify digit table,

- the access level of the route,

- all costing information.

Program the six routes from the least costly routing metbod to the most costly routing method.

The costliness of the route is determined by the line group over which the call is routed. ARS will always try to select route 1 first, and then 2 through 6, when routing a call. If a station, through its class of service assignment, does not have a route access level high enough to allow it access the route selected by ARS, dialing is denied. If the route access level is high enough,

ARS will route the call based on the routing information If the system cannot route the call over the line group that ARS first selects, ARS will try the next route of the route table. Once again the route access level is tested. This process is repeated, up to a maximum of 6 times. If the station has access to at least the first route, but is unable to dial out (because all lines are busy), it will receive a busy tone in the handset or speaker. The station can then camp-on the route so it will ring when a line in the route table becomes available.

Programming:

Assign line groups to routes as follows,

1 e Form line groups and program them as described Secfiola 8.2.

On a work sheet, note the line group for each route.


3. From the main menu, select TOLLJARS and press ENTER.

4. From TOLL/ARS menu, select route tables and press ENTER.

5. Type l-32 to select route table to be programmed and press ENTER.

6. Type l-6 to select route and press ENTER.

7.

Type 1-16 to choose line and press ENTER.

8. Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 6-8 for all six routes.



12. Repeat steps 5-l 1 for all 32 tables and press ENTER.




12.4.3

Route Access Level

Description:

Each of the six routes of a route table require a route access level of 1 to 4.

ARS uses this route access level to determine if the dialing station has access to dial out on the route. Each station, through its class of service, is also assigned a route access level of 1 to 4. Before the system accepts a dialed number, ARS compares the route access level entries. If the station route access level is greater than or equal to the route access level assigned to the route, the station is allowed to access the route. Otherwise, the system will not accept the dialed number, and sounds an error at the station’s speaker or handset. The route access level allows some stations to gain access to the more costly routes in a route table while denying it to others. Just as you program each route from least to most costly, you must also arrange the route access level to increase from a low level to a high level. This is necessary because once the system denies dialing because of the level, it willnot try another route. The more costly the route is, the higher the access level needed to access it.

Programming:

To program the access level for the route,



3 . From the TOLL/ARS menu, select route tables, press ENTER.



6 . Press TAB key to position cursor at route access column.

7 . Type l-4 to choose access level and press ENTER.

8 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 5 through 8 for all six routes.

9 . When finished, press ESCAPE.



To program the access level for the station class of service,



3 . From the stations menu, select COS programming and press ENTER.


5 . From the COS programming menu, type item number for day route access and press ENTER.


7 . Press ENTER for night route access level, and press SPACE bar for feature setting.





12.4.4

Modify Digit Table

Description:

Each of the six routes in each route table has a modify digit table. This modify digit table details any modifications that the system needs to do to the user dialed number.

This need for modification is determined by the type of lines that you include in the line group for the route.

If a line group requires that the dialed number be in a specific format, you must set up an appropriate modify digit table. You must program the index number of this table into the specifications of the route that the line group is found.

The sole purpose of the index number and the corresponding table are to modify the number dialed by the station user.

Example

Assume that a station dials l-202-222-3456 (Washington DC. area) Also, assume that the system has an FX line for the Washington DC. area and that this is the way that ARS is going to route the call. Finally, assume that the route table route contains a modify digit table index number that points to the following modify digit table:

ADD AMCKJNT = 0

DIGITS TO ADD = n/a

DELETE AMOUNT = 4

This situation results in the system deleting l-202 (DELETE AMOUNT = 4), from the beginning of the number and adding 0 digits (ADD AMOUNT = 0). This modification allows the number 222-3456 to be dialed over the FX line to Washington D.C.

There are 16 modify digit tables in the system. Each modify digit table contains the following information:

- numerical sequence of the digits to be added (valid digits are O-9 and the pause

,p, digit) in a digit string that can be up to 20 digits long,

- number of digits to be deleted from the dialed number (this value can be from 0 to 10).

NOTE: When ARS modifies the dialed number, itfirst deletes from the beginning

of the number and then adds to the beginning

of the number.



Programming Modifv Digit Tables

Description:

Use this procedure to program the modify digit table.

Programming:



3 . From the TOLL/ARS menu, select modify digit table and press ENTER.

4 . Type line number for modify digit table to be programmed and press ENTER.

5 . Press TAB key to position cursor at digits to delete column.

6 . Type &lo for number of digits to delete.

7 . Press TAB key to position cursor at digits to add column.

8 . Type digits to add (O-9, pause). A maximum of 20 digits can be entered.

9 . Press TAB key to position cursor for next modify digits table.

10. Repeat steps 6-9 until all modify tables are entered and press ENTER.




Assigning Modify Digit Table To Route

Description:

Use this procedure to assign modify digit tables to routes.

Programming:



3 . From the TOLL/ARS menu, select route table and press ENTER.



6 . Press TAB key to position cursor at modify table column.

7 . Type 1-16 ENTER to choose modify digit table needed.

8 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 5 through 8 for all six routes.


10. Type y to accept entries, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

12. Repeat steps 4-l 1 for all needed route tables or press ESCAPE to end.



/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming hstrwctions

1 2 . 5

Description:

Costing lnforma tion (A RS)

Each route in every route table contains costing information. The costing information includes a surcharge, a first tier cost per minute, a second tier cost per minute, and the amount of time to cost the call at first tier cost before switching to the second tier cost. The surcharge is a dollars and cents value that the system adds to the total cost of a call. You can program both tier costs in one cent increments in the range of $0.0 through $99.99 per minute.

Even if the system does not route a call through ARS, (for example, when a station user direct selects a line), the system will still access the costing information to cost the call.

The system reports call costs as part of the SMDA report. Use Section 10.1 to set the SMDA costing parameters for this report.

Programming: To program call costing,


2. From the main menu, select TOLL/ARS and press ENTER.

3. From the TOLL/ARS menu, select route table and press ENTER.

4. Type l-32 to select route table to be programmed and press ENTER.

5. Type l-6 to select route number and press ENTER.

6. Press TAB key to position cursor at surcharge column

7. Type dollar and cents value ($nn.nn) of the surcharge.

8. Press TAB key to position cursor to tier 1 cost column.

9. Type tier 1 cost ($nn.nn).

10. Press TAB key to position cursor to tier 1 time column

11. Press SPACE BAR to select desired time.

12. Press TAB key to position cursor to tier 2 cost column.

13. Type tier 2 cost ($nn.nn).

14. Press ENTER to accept entries.

15. Press ESCAPE.

16. Repeat steps 5-15 for each route number. When finished, press ESCAPE.

17. Type y to accept entries, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER.

18. Repeat steps 4-l 1 for each route table. When finished, press ESCAPE twice to return to main menu,

12.5. I Call Cost Display (Display Of Costed Cal/s)

Description: If you have arranged fcr the system to employ call costing, you can use this procedure to arrange for an LCD speakerphone to display the cost of a call made from that station

Programming: 1 e Press CONTROL T for main menu.









12-10 Automatic Wowte Selection Programming


12.5.2

Description:

Cost Incoming

If you have arranged for the system to cost calls, you can arrange for it to also cost incoming calls on a per line basis. You can arrange for the costing to begin as soon as the call arrives in the system , begin after the user answers the call or begin after a programrned delay. Plus, you can pick the call rate table that you want the system to use when it costs the call.



3 . From the lines menu, select line programming.



6 . From cost incoming prompt, press SPACE bar for desired feature setting and press RETURN.

7 . From incoming cost delay prompt, press SPACE bar for desired feature setting and press ENTER.

8 . From incoming cost route prompt, type l-32 for desired route table.





lMi66-123 DXP Plus Programming Instructions

12.6

Automatic Route Selection for Speed Dial Numbers

D lescriplion:

You can arrange for the system to process the system speed dial, and any personal speed dial numbers, that you program for the users, through the automatic route selection (ARS) feature. If the users program their own personal speed dial numbers and you have enabled ARS processing of calls, they must prefix their personal speed dial numbers with the ARS preselect code.

Instruct them to follow the procedure given here when they do this. See Section 6.6 for speed dial programming.

Programming:

To arrange for the system to process the system speed dial numbers through the ARS feature.

1. From system menu, select speed dial and press ENTER.

2 . From speed dial menu, type item number for desired speed dial number and press ENTER.

3 . Press TAB to place cursor in preselect column

4 . Press SPACE bar to choose ARS.

5 . Press TAB to place cursor in number column

6 . Type system speed dial number (max. 32 digits, P = pause, F = hookflash) and press ENTER.

7 . Repeat steps 5 through 8 for all desired system speed numbers.


9 . Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER to end

To arrange for the system to process each station’s personal speed dial numbers through the

ARS feature.

1 0 From the stations menu, select button mapping and press ENTER.

2 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for first station to be programmed and press ENTER. Button map with current assignment appears on screen.

3 . Type button code (Ll-L25,0-9) for button to be arranged for personal speed dial use and to be processed through ARS and press ENTER.

4 . Type SDIAL and press ENTER.

(This action arranges the button as a personal speed dial button).

5 . Type a and press ENTER.

(This action arranges for the speed dial number to be processed through the ARS).

6 . Type the speed dial number (max. 16 digits) and press ENTER.

7 . Repeat steps 3-6 for all desired personal speed dial numbers.

8 . Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4-9 for all desired stations.

9 . When finished press ESCAPE to end.

Instruct station users to program personal speed dial numbers per the following sequence when you have enabled ARS call routing for their use:

1. Press INTERCOM,

2. Dial*% 1,

3 . Press speed dial button,

4 . Dial 9 for ARS (on LCD speakerphones, dial 9 when prompted to enter line),

5 . Dial personal speed dial number (max. 16 digits, HOLD = pause, TAP = hookflash),

6 . Press TRNS/CNF to store number,

7 . Repeat steps 3-6 for next button or press SPEAKER to end programming.

12-12 Avfomatic Route Selection Programming

Selecting System Printouts

(Printer Interface)

Description: The system makes a wide variety of printout records available. Use this programming procedure to choose the user’s desired printout types and to direct the printouts to either the

SMDABMDR data printer or the PC screen.

Programming:



3. From printouts menu, select desired printout category and press ENTER.

4. Type s for screen printout or p for hard copy printout through the SMDA/SMDR data printer and press ENTER.

NOTE: Press CONTROL C to stop a printout to the PC screen when necessary.

This action will not stop printout to a data printer.

5. When printout is finished, press any key to return to category menu and repeat steps 4 and 5 for next desired printout or press ESCAPE to return to printouts menu.

6. Repeat steps 3-6 for next desired printout or press ESCAPE to end.

Programming For

Peripheral Devices

0 Caller ID Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.1

l

Tracker Paging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.2

l

Digital Voice Announce Programming . . . . . . . . .

14.3

l

PC Attendant Position Programming . . . . . . . . . .

14.4

l l

Voice Mail Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.5

ModemSetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.6

Peripheral Devices Programming 14-l

14. I Caller ID Programming

The DXP Plus caller ID feature supports an externally connected, customer-supplied caller ID device (product code CIDOS). This hardware device supports eight caller ID conditioned lines, and the installer can serially connect up to eight devices to give the DXP Plus the ability to support a maximum of 64 caller ID conditioned lines, The caller ID unit interfaces with the DXP Plus through any main or auxiliary serial data port (Section 6.5).

Any proprietary digital LCD speakerphone can receive and display caller ID information. The display conveys all available caller ID information from the time the call rings at the station, through al1 line transitions, until the line disconnects. The system stores caller ID information in its SMDA storage and makes it available in the SMDA printout.

In programming for caller ID support, you must match the data baud rate with that of the CID08, you must enable the caller ID lines, and you must assign them to ring on the telephones. You can set the caller ID options, and enter the local area codes and local exchange codes that you want the system to skip when it automatically dials a return call. You can also assign caller ID ring no-answer (RNA) capability to the telephones that are on caller ID lines. Users of these telephones have the ability to review this caller ID RNA information and return the call.

They can also note if anyone else has already viewed a record thus preventing redundant returns.

14.1. I Defeting Viewed RNA Record (for Caller ID)

Description:

When the system makes caller ID RNA information available to a group of stations, any station user in the group can review the information by pressing the telephone’s CID button When he or she does this, the system removes the record from that telephone but continues to flash the

CID button status light for other stations in the group. If you enable this feature, the system will remove the caller ID record from all telephones if any user in the group views a record.

Programming:



3. From caller ID menu, select options and press ENTER.





14.1.2

Setting Absorb Ring Time (for Caller ID)

Description:

Use this procedure to specify the amount of time the system waits while it generates caller ID information before it generates system ringing.



3. From caller ID menu, select options and press ENTER.


5. Press SPACE bar for time (O-8 seconds) and press ENTER.



14-2 Peripheral DewiceS Pssgrammin~


14.1.3

Arranging Local Call Table (for Caller ID)

Description:

When telephone users review caller ID RNA calls, they press their SAVE button to return the call, and the system automatically dials the number. If the area code or office code part of the stored number matches the entries that you program with this procedure, the system will skip that part of the number as it dials.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select caller ID and press ENTER.

3 . From caller ID menu, select local call table and press ENTER .

4 . From the local call table menu, enter area codes or office code and press ENTER.

5 . Repeat step 4 for all desired codes (16 maximum)



14.1.4

Making Caller ID Active

Description:

When caller identification (ID) information is available from the central office, take this programming action to match the line port to the feature. You must also assign the caller ID lines to the stations and assign special-purpose station buttons to control the feature.

Programming:









9 . Repeat steps 4 through 8 for each line port or press ESCAPE to end.

10. Assign caller ID lines to stations- refer to

Sections

7.1.31 and

7. I.32 for details.

11. Assign caller ID button (mnemonic CID) to stations-refer to

Section

7.3 for details.

12. Assign SAVE button (mnemonic SAVE) to stations-refer to

Section

7.3 for details

Peripheral Devices Programming 14-3

lM166-123 DXP Plus Programming instructions

14.1.5

Setting Caller ID Baud Rate

Description:

You must program the parameters of the main or auxiliary serial data port where the installer has connected the CID08 device. The serial data port parameters must match the data parameters of the CID08 device. Usually, this is 9600 baud, eight data bits, no parity bit, and one stop bit.

Programming:



3 . From system menu, select serial ports and press ENTER.

4 . From serial ports menu, type item number for main port or for auxiliary port and press ENTER.

5 . From serial port type menu, select the serial port number and press ENTER.

6 . Press SPACE bar for feature setting

7 . Press TAB for next parameter.

8 . Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all parameters.

7 . Press ENTER to accept settings.




14.1.6

Arranging Calier ID Ring No-Answer (RNA)

Description:

This feature offers telephone users the ability to review calls that ring at their stations while they are away. The system stores caller ID RNA records and allows users to review them by pressing the CID button, and return those calls that need returning by pressing the SAVE button. The feature also denotes the identification of the last station that reviewed the records thus helping prevent multiple call backs to the same number. After users review the caller ID

RNA records, the system deletes the records from their telephones yet retains them in the

SMDA storage so that they can look at them later if they must.

Programming:




4 . Type personal intercom number or previously assigned name for station you wish to program and press ENTER.


6 . Press CONTROL E for edit table.

7 . Type a to add or r to remove and press ENTER.

8 . Enter caller ID line port numbers l-240 (enter n, nn, nnn or n-nnn) to serve feature at this station and press ENTER.




14-4 PeripheraB Devices Programming


14.2

Tracker Paging System Programming

The Tracker Paging System is a paging device that interfaces a DXP

Plus system with Tracker pagers (personal pager devices). When the Tracker Paging System is installed, you must use the following programming routines to establish proper communications between the system and individual Tracker pager users.

14.2. I Programming Tracker Paging System Options

Description:

Tracker Paging System options consist of selecting the serial port that you will use for connecting the base station, enabling or disabling Tracker Paging System operation, and selecting PC Attendant 1 through 4.

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select Peripherals and press ENTER.

3 . From peripherals menu, select Tracker and press ENTER.

4 . From Tracker menu, select Options and press ENTER.

5 . Enter Tracker Paging System base station number (1 through 4) and press ENTER.

6 . From tracker unit options menu, select the serial port where the Tracker base station will be connected (1 through 18) and press ENTER.

7 . Toggle the second field with the SPACE bar to enable/disable the Tracker Paging System option and press ENTER.

8 . Toggle the third field with the SPACE bar to select PC Attendant 1 through 4 (or none) and press ENTER.




NOTE: After you have enabled the Tracker paging system and saved your programming selections, the DXP Plus system connects with the Tracker base station and displays the following message:

Initializing TRACKER unit, please wait. . .

If the Tracker base station is correctly installed and operational, the DXP Plus system then displays the following message:

Installation complete, TRACKER is on line

G however, the Tracker base station is not installed orfails to connect, the DXP Plus system displays the following message:

Installation error, verify programming or installation


/M/66-123

DXP Pius Programming Instructioms

14.2.2

Making Tracker Paging System Assignments

Description:

Programming:

Use the following programming instructions to assign individual Tracker Pagers to a station extension number, select the pager types, and assign a block of pagers to a Tracker Paging

System base station. Use this programming method for making minor modifications after the system has been installed and programmed per instructions in Section 1$.X?.


2 From main menu, select Peripherals and press ENTER.

3 . From the peripherals menu, select Tracker and press ENTER.

4 . From tracker menu, select Pager Assignment Table and press ENTER.

5 , In the first field, enter intercom number and press TAR.

6 . In the third field, enter Tracker Pager number and press TAR. (The second field is the name field that is programmed in the intercom numbers screen.)

7 . In the fourth field, press the SPACE bar to enable/disable the Tracker Pager and press TAB.

8 . In the fifth field, press the SPACE bar to select Tracker Pager type PlOOO through P4000.

NOTE: Tracker pager designations are:

PI 000 (numeric display only)

P2000 (I -line alphanumeric display)

P3000 (2-line alphanumeric display)

P4000 (Ckine alphanumeric display)

9 . After making pager type selection, press TAR.

10. In the fifth field, type Tracker base station’s number (1-4).




14.2.3

Making initial Tracker Pager Assignments

Description:

Programming:

Use the following programming instructions to select intercom numbers, to assign pager types, and to assign individual pagers to a Tracker base station. Use this programming method to make many assignments quickly when first installing the system. This programming method overwrites any assignments previously made using the method described in Section 14.22.


2 . From main menu, select Peripherals and press ENTER.

3 . From the peripherals menu, select Tracker and press ENTER.

4 . From tracker menu, select Initialize Pager Assignments and press ENTER.

5 . From the initialize pager assignments menu, select Intercom Number(s) and press ENTER.

6 . Press CTRL-E to display Intercom Numbers Table.

7 . Select a to add or r to remove intercom numbers and press ENTER.

8 . Enter one intercom number or a group of intercom numbers (example: enter 101-150 to initialize those fifty intercom numbers at one time) and press ESCAPE.

9 . Select Pager Number and press ENTER.

10. Enter pager number located on pager and press ENTER.

11~ Press SPACE bar to enable or disable the intercoms and press ENTER.

12. Press SPACE bar until the pager model number you are using is displayed and press ENTER.

13. Enter the Tracker base station number (l-4) and press ESCAPE twice.



14-6 Peripheral Devices Programming


74.2.4

COS Programming For Tracker Access

Description:

Assign tracker access to a particular station intercom or group of intercoms using the following class of service (COS) programming. (The default is yes for COS 1 and COS32.)

Programming:


2. From main menu, select Stations and press ENTER.

3. From stations menu, select COS Programming and press ENTER.

4. From COS programming, type class of service number (l-32) and press ENTER.

5. From COS (class number) programming, select Tracker Access.

6. Toggle the SPACE bar to select yes/no and press ESCAPE twice.


8.


NOTE: To activate this feature, assign this COS to the desired intercom numbers. See

Programming Station Features in

Section 7.2.

74.2.5

Page Recall

Description:

This timing feature determines the amount of time that a Tracker page remains in a Tracker page orbit before recalling to the paging station.

Programming:









/M/66-123 DXP Plws Programming hstrwctions

14.3

LVigital Voice Announce Programming

The digital voice announce device (DVA) is an optional line-powered unit that connects to a digital station port and plays pre-recorded voice prompts and dialing instructions to incoming callers on the direct inward system access (DISA) lines.

Currently, DISA is the only DXP Plus feature to take advantage of the DVA’s voice prompting capability; therefore, for the DVA to function, you must have DISA lines assigned and programmed. The maximum number of DVA units you can install is limited only by the number of DXF’ Plus station ports (480). Once you or the installer connects the DVA to a digital station port, the DVA identifies itself to the DXP Plus so you do not have any phone-type programming to do. Nor is it necessary for you to program the system to send DTMF or ringing signals to activate the DVA because DISA programming determines the DVA’s actions. When you use a

DVA in conjunction with DISA, the DXP Plus automatically answers the DISA lines and guides the callers with

DVA originated voice prompts.

A DVA accepts and stores up to four recorded messages, with a total maximum recorded time for all messages of two minutes. Using system attendant programming, you can divide this two-minute period as necessary among the four messages or use the entire two minutes for one message. These pre-recorded messages play during an in-process call and prompt callers to dial a single digit to reach a particular intercom number or feature code. For each message type, you can assign up to ten intercom numbers or feature codes and assign a single access digit to each of these intercom numbers.

Each message type has a two-digit system index number (for example: 10 = Welcome Greeting 1, 11 = Welcome

Greeting 2, and so forth). You use this index number to identify the messages when you record them. Many of the messages have a single-digit group option number appended to their names (for example: Welcome Greeting 1,

Day Main Menu 1 s and so forth). You, use this message group number to place messages for a particular catagory of caller together (all group 1 messages for sales calls, all group 2 messages for service calls, and so forth). You assign a message group to a DISA line based on the line’s DISA voice option Group 1 messages correspond with

DISA voice option 1, group 2 messages with DISA voice option 2, group 3 messages with DISA voice option 3 and group 4 messages with voice option 4. You assign a voice option, and thus a messge group, to a DISA line using programming procedures given is Section 8.8.2.


DXP Plus Programming instructions IMIH-123

14.3.1

Understanding The Line/Voice Option/IDVA Relationships

DVA Application

A company with several departments reserves all group 1 messages for the sales department and reserves all group 2 messages for the customer service department. The company attendant records the group 1 and 2 message to have meaning for the sales and customer service departments. The system programmer assigns DISA lines 1,2, and 3 to the sales department and DISA line 4,5, and 6 to the customer service department. He or she also programs DISA line l-3 to have voice option 1 and DISA line 4-6 to have voice option 2. All of this allows callers to DISA line l-3 to receive and respond to messages associated with the sales department and callers to

DISA line 4-6 to receive and respond to messages associated with the customer service department.

Sales Department




Customer Service Deoartment




‘f

DVALDISA Application

You can enhance the security of DISA by using the DVA. The DXP Plus connects to the incoming call based on the programmed DISA parameters and the DVA plays the appropriate prompts to cause the caller to dial the following codes: DISA access code, authorization code, feature access code.

“You have reached the ABC company.

DVA index ~~~~~~ 10 You may dial an extension at any time,

“Welcome Greeting” or dial 9 for advanced feature access.”

- p a u s e -

1 = DISA access code

DVA Index Number 31

“Password Prompt” authorization number now.”

I

DVA Index Number 33

‘Dial Feature”

“Dial the feature access code now.”



DVA Auto Attendant With Single Digit Menu Application

The DVA functions as an automatic attendant by giving callers single-digit dialing options. The DXI? Plus connects to the incoming call based on the programmed DISA parameters and the DVA plays the appropriate voice prompts to the caller such as: welcome greeting, day main greeting-menu choices, recall busy, recall no answer.

DVA Index Number10

“Welcome Greeting I ”



‘Day/Night Menu I ”

“Dial 1 for Service,

“Dial 2 for Advanced Features9

“‘Dial 3 for Assistance.”

I= (Group ITCM #) 2 = @ISA Access) 3 = (Station Number) iervice Department DvA Index

Number 311

“Dial your Authorization Code.’

‘*Password Prompt”

411 phones ring and flash group ITCM.

DVA Index

Number 33

“Dial Feature”

“Dial your Feature Access Code.”



DVA/Tracker Paging System Application

The DVA gives callers single digit dialing access to the Tracker Paging System. The DXP

Plus

connects to the incoming call based on the programmed DISA parameters and the DVA plays the appropriate voice prompts to the caller such as: welcome greeting, day main greeting-menu choices, recall busy, recall no answer.

Main Number


“Welcome Greeting I ”


1

Index Prompt 14

“Day/Night Menu I ” I “If you are calling from a tone-dial telephone, you may dial the extension number at any time.”

“I’m sorry, that extension doesn’t answer,

I

Dial 1 to track,

Index Prompt 22 Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant,

“Recall No Answer I ” Dial 3 to leave a message in the voice mail box.”

3 = Voice Mail Port number 1 = t8 2 = Extension Number

“I’m sorry, that extension is busy.

Dial 1 to Track,

Index prompt 2,5 Dial 2 to leave a message with the attendant,

‘Recall Busy 1”


1 = Hi 2 = Extension Number 3 = Voice Mail Port number


lMl66-123

14.3.2

Defining DVA Messages

The available DVA messsages include the following catagories

I XI-----v-L.-l ht Main Menus l-4

Recall No Answer 14

DXP Plus Programming hstructions is message promp on systems that require forced account

Reminder Prompt

Digit Collection

DISA Callers who are allowed to access advance system features receive this message if they are making a line to line connection through the DXP

Plus. The message periodically prompts them to dial a code to continue the connection.

This message prompts callers to dial a code before the system routes their call. When used with telephony services, this dialed code causes a screen showing caller’s identification and data to appear on computer at called station’s location.

System plays the message requesting the dialed entry after a welcome message and before a day menu message. Digit collection message plays first if there is no welcome message and plays after the default routing extension if there is no day menu message. The caller dialed digits also show on the called station’s display


DXP Plus Programming instructions IMi66-123

14.3.3

Programming For DVA Operation

To program the interaction between DVA and DISA, there are several steps that you must take.

1. Program the day 1, day 2, and night ringing begin and end times using the programming procedure given in

Section 6.9.18. When the system is in the night mode, the night menu message plays versus the day menu message; likewise, the night routing message plays versus the day routing message. The system goes into the night mode either manually by attendant action or automatically when the programmed times occur.

2 . Program the DISA specific parameters using the Section 8.8.1 procedure.

3 .

Use the Section 8.8.2 procedure to assign DISA capability and a DISA voice option to a line.

4. Use procedures in this section to program the DVA parameters.

5.

Use the Section 6. I. 10 procedure to default the parameters.

Programming Intercoms For DVA Messages

Description For each message type, you can assign up to ten intercom numbers and assign a single access digit to each of these intercom numbers. You can assign feature codes as well as intercom numbers. For example, if you have installed the Tracker Paging System option, you can program the Tracker Pager access code (*8) to an appropriate message and assign a single-digit dialing code to the access code. This allows DISA callers to track their called party by dialing the appropriate single-digit when prompted by voice message. The caller then enters his or her call-back number and the # symbol to complete the page.



3 . From peripherals menu, select voice/DVA and press ENTER.

4. Enter voice message number and press ENTER.

NOTE: You may need to refer to step 5 of the following programming instructions to obtain the voice message numberfor the message type.

5 . Make a single digit selection from the list (1 through 0) and press ENTER.

6 . Enter intercom number, feature code, or station hunting pilot extension that you wish to assign to this message and press ENTER.




Obtaining DVA Status Reports

Description: Use this programming procedure to obtain DVA status information (voice digit translation, voice allocation by DVA, voice allocation by message, and voice resource analysis).

Programming: 1. Press CONTROL T for main menu


3 . From printouts menu, select peripherals and press ENTER.

4. From peripherals menu, select voice/DVA and press ENTER.

5 . Make a selection from the voice/DVA menu for the desired status printout and press ENTER.

NOTE:

If

you select the voice resource analysis you get a list

of all message types. You may need this information to complete step 4 in the preceeding programming instructions.

6 . For printout type, press s for screen or p for printer and press ENTER.

7 . Press any key to return to voice programming printouts menu.


Recording The DVA Messages

Description:

You or the system attendant must record the messages that the DVA plays to the callers. You do this in one of two ways: either by delivering them from the telephone handset at the attendant station or by playing the contents of a professionally-supplied tape recording into the DVA memory. Each DVA stores up to four unique messages. The total message storage time is two minutes and you can divide this time as necessary among the four messages or use the entire two minutes for one message if needed. Because of the time constraints, it is a good practice to script your messages ahead of time so that you can read them aloud in a clear and concise manner as you store them in the DVA memory.

piiifq

It is important to keep in mind that the system shares the messages among all installed DVAs. You do not control which DVA stores which message. For example, if you make eight different recordings with two DVAs, the system distributes the messages in both units. If someone later removes one unit from service, the on/y messages that will play are those stored in the remaining DVA. To locate which DVA stores which message, use Section 16.2.2 to obtain a DVA status report.

Programming:

To record a DVA message,

1 D Press INTERCOM and dial % #o % 061 D

2. Choose voice source,

- dial 1 to speak message into handset,

- dial 2 to play tape recorded message into music-on-hold jack,

- dial 3 to play tape recorded message into background music jack,

- dial 1043 to choose message type.

NOTE: As soon as you perform the next step, the two-minute timer starts running. Be ready to speak you message or press the PLAY button on the tape recorder as soon as you dial the replicate choice.

3 . Dial l-9 to choose number of times to replicate message.

4 . Speak your message,

-orpress the PLAY button on the tape recorder to start pre-recorded message).

5 . Press #to end message.

6 . Listen as system automatically plays the message for verification at the attendant station.

7 . Press #to stop verification playback.

8 . Repeat steps 2-8 until you’ve recorded all messages.


Editing The DVA Messages

Description:

After DVA messages exist, you can play them, copy them, and delete them as necessary using the following attendant progamming.

Programming:

To play a previously recorded DVA message,

1. Press INTERCOM and dial % #O # 062.

2 Dial 10-43 to choose message type.

3 . Listen as system automatically plays the message for verification at your attendant station.

4 . Press # to stop verification playback.

5 Dial lo-43 to choose next message type to hear.

To copy a previously recorded DVA message,

1. Press INTERCOM and dial +K # 0 S 063.

2 . Dial 10-43 to choose message type.

3 . Dial l-9 to choose number of times to copy message.

4 . Dial 10-42 to choose next message type to copy.

NOTE: If your installer has connected more than two DVAs to the system, the system automatically selects the DVA that will receive the copied message. Likewise, the system automatically selects the DVA that it uses for playing back the message to a caller.

Additional DVAs become a shared resource for the system’s memory and are not dedicated to particular lines.

To delete a previously recorded DVA message,

1. Press INTERCOM and dial % #O %064.

2 . Dial 10-43 to choose message type.

3 . Dial 937 to confirm delete or dial +i+ to deny delete.

To completely erase all DVA messages (format the DVA).

1. Press INTERCOM and dial +K #O JlcO65.

2 . Dial l-480 to choose DVA port.

3 . Dial 937 to confirm formatting dial +K to deny formatting.

4 . Dial l-480 to choose next DVA port to format.


14.4

PC Attendant Position Programming

The computerized attendant operating position consists of a DOS-based personal computer, a proprietary interface circuit board (factory-installed in the computer expansion slot), a customized keyboard, a program diskette, and all necessary cables for connecting the equipment to the system.

The system will accept four PC attendant positions. Each PC attendant position replaces one telephone from the system because a telephone cannot be connected to the same station location that the programmer assigns to the

Total Control PC attendant position.

Use the following procedures to program the system to operate with the PC attendant position.

NOTE: Follow these procedures in the order that this manual presents them as they provide a logical progression of the programming.

14.4. I Enabling The PC Attendant Position

Description: Each PC attendant position requires a station port, two line ports, a serial data port, and a dedicated line group for operation. You must identify these items through this programming action for each PC attendant position before the equipment will function properly.

Programming:



3. From peripherals menu, select PC attendant and press ENTER.

4. Type PC attendant number (l-4) and press ENTER.

5. Type item number for station port and press ENTER, then type l-480 for station port s

Importantaisconnect any telephone that is currently installed there.

6. For line pair, type odd/even number pair that corresponds to location where cable was connected on common equipment (for example, enter 1,2 or 15,16 or 119,120 and so forth).

Special instruction-Always type the odd line number first. Remember, the line numbers on each line board ascend from bottom line jack (lines 1,2) to top line jack (lines 7,8), and the line ports on the main and expansion cabinets ascend from right to left based on the board slot (line ports l-8,9-17, 18-26 and so forth).

NOTE: The lines that you assign here are exclusively for PC attendant position use and cannot be used for out-going call operations. Do not assign them for any other system use.

7 . For line group, type line group number (1-16).

8 . For serial port, type 1 or 2 for RS-232 port 1 or 2 on the system central processor board where you connected the PC attendant position.




14-16 Peripheral Devices Programfning

14.4.2

Programming A Hunt List For PC Attendant Use

Description:

Assign eight intercom numbers to an intercom hunt list for the PC attendant position’s use. The assigned numbers must include the personal intercom number of the PC attendant position (the number for the station location that the PC attendant position occupies) and seven group intercom numbers that are set aside for its exclusive use (group intercom numbers range from

3 lOl-3292,4110-4292,500&5023) . When you assign group intercom numbers to the hunt list, the system automatically adds them to the group intercom access list for the PC attendant position.

NOTE: Do not assign the same group intercom to more than one stations’s intercom hunt list.

Programming:





5. From station programming menu, type item number for intercom hunt list and press ENTER.

6. Type personal intercom number for PC attendant position first then type seven group intercom numbers and press ENTER.

Separate each entry with a comma (nnn,nnn,nnn,nnn)

NOTE: Reserve these group intercom numbers for exclusive use by the PC attendant position. Do not assign them to any other station.





/M/66-123 DXP Piws Programming instructions

14.4.3

Assigning Lines For PC Attendant Use

Description:

Choose several lines that the PC attendant position can use for call origination; assign them to line group 16; assign line group 16 to a particular class of service; and assign that particular class of service to the PC attendant position The line key on the keyboard is fixed to select line group 16. You must assign lines to line group 16 before the attendant can select a line for use.

Programming:



3 . From lines menu, select line group programming and press ENTER.

4.

Type 16 and press ENTER.

5. Type a to add lines and press ENTER.

6 . Type lines to be added and press ENTER.

7.

Press ESCAPE once.


9 . Press ESCAPE to return to main menu.


11~ From stations menu, select station @OS programming menu and press ENTER.


13. From the COS programming menu, type item number for line group access and press

ENTER. Remember--use CONTROL N to find the correct screen.


15. When finished, Press ESCAPE twice.


17. Press ESCAPE to return to main menu


19. From stations menu, select station programming menu and press ENTER.


21. Type number for class of service and press ENTER.

22. Type class of service number that has line group 16 assigned and press ENTER.





14.4.4

Assigning The PC Attendanf Position Text Messaging Buttons

Description:

Use this programming procedure to assign special text messaging functions to system telephone buttons. User’s can press these buttons to access the text messaging feature provided by the PC attendant position. Program the telephone to provide the following button functions:

Text Message button for the user to press to step forward through the fields of a message that shows in the telephone’s display window,

Print button for the user to press to send the displayed message to an attendant selected data printer for hard copy printout,

Next button for the user to press to sequence through a group of stored messages,

Previous button for the user to press to back-up through the fields of a message that he or she has already read,

Delete button for the user to press to erase a message after he or she has read it or sent it to the data printer,

Quit button for the user to press to end a text messaging session.



3. From the stations menu, select button mapping and press ENTER.

4. Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER. The VDT presents a button map of the current button functions for the requested station shown for your review.

5. Type code (Ll-L25) for button that you wish to program.

6. Type one of the following mnemonics and press ENTER.

OA159 = Delete button

OA160 = Print button

OA161 = Previous field button

OA162 = Next message button

OA163 = Quit button

OAI64 = Text message/next field button

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have assigned all test messaging buttons and press ENTER.

8. Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4 through 7 for each station.




14.4.5

Mapping PC Attendant Position Function Keys

Description:

Programming:

Operation:

The DXP

Plus adds programmable function keys to the PC Attendant Position. The programmable features are in addition to the fixed features currently provided by function keys

Fl through F12. You can assign a different feature to each function key from the list of functions shown in

Section 7.3.1.


2. From main menu, select stations and press ENTER,

3. From stations, select PC attendant and press ENTER,

4. Type attendant number (14) and press ENTER,

5. From PC attendant menu, select button mapping and press ENTER,

6. Press CONTROL E for button map of function keys and press ENTER,

7. Type button number (Ll-L12) and press ENTER,

8. Type mnemonic (type ? for a description of mnemonic if you need it) for desired feature and press ENTER,

9 . Repeat steps 7 and 8 until all feature button are programmed,


Il. Type y to accept changes, n to reject them, or r to resume editing and press ENTER,


To access the programmed functions on the PC Attendant Position, the user must press and hold the CTRL button while pressing the desired function button on the keyboard.

14-20 Peripheral Devices Prc9gramming


14.5

Voice Mail Programming

After connecting an voice mail system to the DXP Plus system, program the DXP Plus to operate properly with it using the procedures detailed below. They are presented here in a typical order of progression but you can perform them in any order that is convenient.

14.5.1

Arranging Station Ports For Voice Mail Use

Description:

Programming:

After you or your installer has connected voice mail ports to the system station ports through the appropriate interface devices (for example, the VMI-X interface device used with analog station ports, the ATI-D-IPI’ interface device used with the digital station ports, or the DXIST station board used with industry-standard telephone ports), you must identify the station ports where these devices are connected.



3. From station menu, select phone types and press ENTER.

4. Type row number for station port type

(ExecuTech = analog, DigiTech = digital, IST = industry standard) and press ENTER.

5. Type row number for device connected to station port (VMI-X or ATI-D-WI) and press ENTER. (This step not required for IST.)

6. Type number of station port (1480) and press ENTER.

7. Repeat steps l-6 for each station port used to interface with the voice mail system.



14.5.2

Assigning Infercorn Numbers To Voice Mail Connections

Description: You must identify the station intercom number of each voice mail connection and link these numbers together to form a circular hunt group for call handling purposes. For example, assign intercom numbers 121, 122, 123, and 124 to voice mail ports 1,2,3, and 4 then link 121 to 122,

122 to 123,123 to 124, and 124 to 121.

Proqamminp Hint:

To

make the LCD readouts at the system telephones more descriptive during call transfers, use the Section 72.2 programming procedure to assign a descriptive name to the personal intercom numbers. If you do this, be sure to name each voice mail port differently. For instance, you can name them VW, VM2, VM3, and VM4; however, do not name each port VM without personalizing it further with a unique suffix (such as 1,2,3,4 or A,

B, C, D for example).



3. From stations menu, select voice mail and press ENTER.

4. From voice mail menu, type the row number for the voice mail port (l-32) and press ENTER.

5. Type the personal intercom number for the station port that this voice mail port is connected to.

6 Press TAB for linked station column and type personal intercom number for station port to be linked to the station port named in step 5.

9. Press ESCAPE and repeat steps 4-6 for next row number.





14.5.3

Arranging Voice Mail Ca// Transfer Parameters

lMi66-123

Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy

Description:

With automatic attendant transfer on busy enabled, the system will ring a busy telephone when the voice mail system is attempting to transfer a call to that station. This action gives the user of the called station the option of interrupting his or her present call and taking the new call.

With automatic attendant transfer on busy disabled, the presence of a new call will not cause the system to ring the busy telephone. In this case, voice mail automatically routes the call to the busy telephone’s voice mail box. You must enable the feature known as Ring Back On Busy

(see Section 7.2.36 for details) if you enable this Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy feature.

Programming:










Immediate Transfer

Description:

You should choose the automatic attendant immediate transfer mode for voice mail transfers. It allows the system to release the voice mail port as soon as someone answers tje transferred call.

However, if you turn on the voice mail screen and confirm options (see the voice mail programming manual for details), do not turn on the DXP Plus immediate transfer mode.

Immediate transfer is a system-wide parameter and affects all telephones in the system.

Programming:


2. From main menu, seIect system and press ENTER.







14.5.4

Assianina Transfer-To-Voice Mail Button

Description:

A system user can use a pre-programmed button to transfer an incoming call directly to a voice mail box so the caller can leave a message. You must use the button mapping programming procedure to assign this Transfer-To-Voice Mail button at a system telephone.

Programming:



3. From stations menu, select button mapping and press ENTER.

4. Type prime intercom number or previously assigned name and press ENTER.

The VDT presents a button map with current button functions for requested station shown for review.

5 . Type code (L l-L25) for button that you wish to program and press ENTER.

6. Type mnemonic for transfer-to-voice mail button and press ENTER.

NOTE:

Type XI04 plus a two-digit code (G32) that equals one of the voice mail ports.

Usually, you will enter the code for the first voice mail port and let the extension number linking (that you have previously arranged) decide which voice mail port actually handles the call. However if you have arranged voice mail ports into groups for department answering, enter the voice mail port code for the group that also includes the telephone that you are button mapping.


14.5.5

Arranging Voice Mail Ringing Options

Description:

The DXP Plus system automatically enables ringing line preference at the voice mail station ports. With this feature enabled, the voice mail system’s automatic attendant will answer calls.

You can use direct, delayed, or night ringing features to determine how quickly or when it does this. With direct ringing, calls ring at the voice mail port immediately. With delayed ringing, the calls wait before ringing the voice mail port. This gives you the flexibility of having calls direct ring at a telephone where they can be answered by a human operator before they delay ring and the automated attendant answers them.

Programming.=

1 I Press CONTROL T for main menu.



4 . Type personal intercom number of voice mail station port and press ENTER.

5 . From station programming menu, type item number for desired ringing and press ENTER.

6. Press CONTROL E.

7 . Type a for add or type r for remove and press ENTER.

8 . Type line port number for lines assigned to voice mail port l-240 (n,nn,nnn, or n-nnn) and press ENTER.



11 n Repeat steps 4-10 for each voice mail port or press ESCAPE to end.



14.5.6

Assigning Voice Mail Identification (ID) Number

Description: As an option, you can assign an identification number to each DXP Plus line so that the voice mail system can provide customized call handling on a per line basis. Use voice mail system programming to match this ID number to a particular personal directory or transaction box within the voice mail system. When the DXP PZus routes a call that is ringing at a particular line to the voice mail system to be answered, it routes it with the ID number. The voice mail system then sends the call to the box that corresponds to the line’s ID number. You can use voice mail system programming to construct customized answering prompts for the individual boxes. This allows the IDed DXP Plus lines to be answered in a customized manner by the voice mail system’s automatic attendant.



3. Type port number of line to be programmed (l-240) and press ENTER.






14.5.7

Enabling Extended DTMF Tones For Voice Mail Use

Description: The system provides a means by which you can set the length of the DTMF tones that it generates when a user dials a number from his or her telephone. Since the voice mail system may require a different DTMF tone length than that which you have provided for the telephones, the system provides a means for you to set a separate DTMF tone length for voice mail station ports. It defaults the length to 80 msec, but you can program other lengths as needed.









/M/66-123 DXP Plws Programming fnstrwcti~ns

14.5.8

Setting The Voice Mail Integration Digits

Description:

You can choose the DTMF digits that the DXP Plus sends to a voice mail system. A voice mail system uses these DTMF digits to determine system and station status so that it can properly process a call. You must be versed in your voice mail’s requirements before you can assign

DTMF integration digits in the DXP Plus. The system defaults the voice mail parameters to match the Comdial voice mail system. Certain applications in countries with dialing plans different than the United States may require different integration digits. The default digits are shown in the following list and discussed below:

Follow Extension ID = 2

Busy = 2


Intercom/Answer Confirmation = 1

Do Not Disturb = 3

Disconnect = A

Follow Extension ID - When the voice mail system receives a forwarded call from a ring no-answer (RNA) or busy station, the DXP Plus sends to the voice mail system the extension number of the forwarded call followed by this DTMF digit (n). The DXP Plus sends this digit within 500 ms of the time the voice mail system answers the call. For example, if extension 101 is forwarded to voice mail and voice mail answers a forward RNA or busy forwarded call, the

DXF’ Plus sends 1Oln to the voice mail system within 500 ms of the answer time.

Intercom/Answer Confirmation - The DXP Pkus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system to confirm that an intercom path (without dial tone) is available for the voice mail system’s call transfer or dialing use. The DXP Plus sends this digit within 500 ms of the time it detects the voice mail system’s off-hook or hookflash condition. The DXP Plus ah immediately sends this digit to the voice mail system when a station answers a voice mail transferred call. This action can alert the voice mail system to disconnect and leave the parties connected.

Busy - If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is busy on a call, the DXP Plus sends this DTh4F digit to the voice system. When the voice mail system receives this digit, it can abandon the transfer, reconnect to the call, and offer the caller whatever options the the voice mai system has available in its programming. If the DXP Plus auto attendant transfer on busy feature is active, the DXP Plus will not send the DTh4F digit to the voice mail system thus allowing the system to transfer a second call to the station.

DND - If the voice mail system transfers a call to a station that is in the do not disturb

(DND) mode, the DXP Plus sends this DTh4F digit to the voice system. Receiving this digit allows the voice mail system to distinguish between a busy and a DND condition and offer the caller the appropriate choices.

Incoming Intercom Answer - The DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system when a station user makes an intercom call to the voice mail system. This action allows the voice mail system to distinguish between internal and external calls and offer the caller appropriate prompts and dialing options.

Disconnect - When an outside line or intercom party hangs up, the DXP Plus sends this DTMF digit to the voice mail system to command an immediate disconnect. For outside calls, the central office (CO) must provide disconnect supervision to the DXP Pkus and you must program the DXP Plus line for abandon hold release and disconnect supervision (see Section 8. I for details). At default, the DXP Plus sends the DTMF tone for the A character as the disconnect digit. Since a caller cannot dial an A from a telephone. This feature eliminates callers from causing an accidental disconnect by dialing this digit on their telephone’s dial pad.



Programming The Voice Mail Integration Digits

Programming:


2 . From main menu, select peripherals and press ENTER.

3 . From peripherals menu, select voice mail and press ENTER.

4 . From the voice mail menu select integration digits and press ENTER.

5 . From the integration digits menu, type row number for item and press ENTER.

6 . Type entry and press ENTER.

7 . Repeat step 6 until finished.




/M/66-123


/M/66-123 DXP Plus Programming hstrwtions

14.6

Modem Setup

Description:

The system supports the operation of the DXMDM serial data modem. The DXMDM is a general-purpose, Hayes*-compatible, 300, 1200, and 2400 automatic baud detect, serial data modem that receives its operating power and configuration programming from the DXP PLUS system. The CPU board provides a dedicated serial data port for DXMDM modem use. Install and connect the DXMDM per the details described in IMI89 185,

Installation Instructions For

The DXMDM Modem. If you connect the modem to a serial data port that you add to the system by installing a communications card, you will need to program the system for modem operation on this port.

The DXMDM modem depends upon the system for both its power and its configuration, and you must set switch SW7, located on the CPU board, to its ON setting to ensure continuous modem operation. This setting ensures that the modem will reset properly if you cycle AC power to the system. You should leave this switch set to its ON position for continuous modem operation.

If you disconnect the modem power cord from the precharge port, you must reset the modem after you reconnect the power cord. Reset the modem by switching SW7 to OFF and then to

ON. (Alternately, you can use the system manager programming from the programming station to reset the modem. To do this, enter the system manager programming mode, and dial a$#.)

Normally, you do not program the initialize string because it defaults with the necessary values for DXMDM operation; however, you may adjust the rings-before-answer value if necessary.

To do this, set the SO= value to the desired number (1 = one ring, 2 = two rings, and so forth).

The initialize string characteristics are the following standard Hayes*-compatible values:

A T so=1

M O

Ql

E O attention modem command number of received rings before modem answers (one) speaker completely off result codes not sent echo off

Regardless of which port you choose for modem connection, the system arranges for that port to automatically match the baud rate and serial data parameters of the modem.

Programming:

To arrange for a serial data port other than the dedicated port to accept modem operation, perform this programming procedure.


2 . From main menu, select peripherals and press ENTER.

3 . From peripherals menu, select modem setup and press ENTER.

4 . From modem setup menu, type item number for port and press ENTER.

5 . Type number for modem port and press ENTER to accept setting.



Hayes is a registered trademark of

Hayes Microcomputer Products.


Configuring The System’s

Board Layout

l l

Understanding The Board Configuration . . . . . . . .

15.1

Examining The Board Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.2

l l

Adding Boards To The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.3

Deleting Boards From The System . . . . . . . . . . .

15.4

l

Moving Boards Within The System . . . . . . . . . . .

15.5

Board Layout Programming 15-1

lMl66-123 DXP Plus Programming hstructions

15.1

Understanding The Board Configuration Feature

Because there are no dedicated station or line ports in the DXP plus, the system uses an automatic configuration method to logically number its stations and lines. Automatic configuration occurs after you perform a master clear on the system.

How automatic configuration works

With automatic configuration, the system does a search for all installed station and line boards in the main and expansion cabinets, and assigns a logical number for each provided station and line encountered during the search. The search begins in the main cabinet at the left-most universal slot and proceeds left to right. The search then moves to the upper expansion cabinet where it searches left-most slot to right-most slot. The search finally moves to the lower expansion cabinet where it again searches left-most slot to right-most slot. When automatic configuration is finished, the system has logically numbered all station and line ports in ascending order from the left-most slot to right-most slot throughout the entire system.

How logical number and physical location relate to one another

Where you can place circuit boards

Adding boards without renumbering

The logical number of a station or line corresponds to its relationship to other stations or lines in the system but is not dependent upon the board’s placement in the cabinet. The physical location of a station or line corresponds to the order of the system’s board slots. The main cabinet contains slots l-9, the upper expansion cabinet contains slots 10-20, and the lower expansion cabinet contains slots 21-30. Therefore, even if the first encountered station board is located in slot five of the main cabinet, the system still assigns logical number one to the first station provided by that board. During installation, you can skip slots. For example, you can install eight-line, loop start, line boards in only slots one and 30 if you wish. In this case, slot one yields logical line numbers 1-8 and slot 30 yields logical line numbers 9-17.

Each installed board requires timing circuits equal to its capacity. For example, a 16-station board requires 16 timing circuits, an eight-line loop start line board requires eight circuits, and a fully configured Tl trunk board requires 24 timing circuits. In the DXP plus, each universal slot provides 32 timing circuits. Because of this timing circuit provision of each slot, you can place any station or line board at any slot location with no restrictions.

If you install or relocate a station or line board, this board does not operate until you take appropriate programming action described in Sections 15.3, 15.4, or 15.5. If you use an available open slot for adding or relocating a board, that board’s stations or lines assume logical numbers in sequence after the system’s last assigned logical station or line number. For example, if the system’s last logical station number is 24, the logical numbers of the newly installed board’s stations begin at logical number 25.

After you remove a board and delete it through programming, that boards’s logical numbers are available for reassignment. This means that you can remove a board, add or move another board, take the appropriate programming action, and have the stations or lines of the added or relocated board assume the logical numbers made available by the removed board. For example, if the system’s last logical number is 64 and you remove the board providing stations with logical numbers 1-16, the stations provided by an added board assume logical numbers beginning with 1 instead of 65. However, if you remove an eight-station board and add a

16-station board, the first eight stations stations on the added board assume logical numbers II-8 and the last eight stations assume logical numbers 65-72.


15-2 Board Layout Programming

152

Description:

Programming:

Examining The Board Status

This programming procedure allows you to examine the board layout for the entire system and determine each board’s operating status.


2. From main menu, select board configuration and press ENTER.

3. From board configuration menu, select status and press ENTER.

4. From the ensuing screen presentation, examine the board status for the system.


15.3

Adding Boards To The System

Description:

When you add a circuit board to the system, the system will not recognize that board’s presence until you take this programming action.

Programming:



3. From board configuration menu, select add and press ENTER.

4. Enter the board slot number (l-30) for the added board and press ENTER.

5. Press the SPACE BAR for mnemonic of added board and press ENTER.


15.4

Deleting Boards From The System

Description:

When you delete a circuit board from the system, the system will not recognize that board’s absence until you take this programming action.


2.

From main menu, select board configuration and press ENTER.

3.

From board configuration menu, select add and press ENTER.

4.

Enter the board slot number (l-30) for the removed board and press ENTER.


15.5

Moving Boards Within The System

Description:

When you move a circuit board within the system, the system will not recognize that board’s relocation until you take this programming action.



3. From board configuration menu, select add and press ENTER.

4. Enter the old board slot number (l-30) for the relocated board and press ENTER.

5 . Enter the new board slot number (l-30) for the relocated board and press ENTER.


Board Layout Programming 75-3

Index

A


Absorb Ring Time (for Caller ID), Setting

Account Code (For Class Of Service)

Account Code (System Parameters)

8.1.10

14.1.2

IO.35

10.1.5, 10.3.1

Account Code Display And Account Code

Display Time

Account Code Length

Account Code Programming

10.1.6, 10.3.2

10.1.7, 10.3.3

10.3.4

Account Codes (Forced with Positive Verificatiori).l.l,lO.3

Account Codes, Add, Remove, Display

Account Codes, Forced

10.3.4

7.1.40

Adding Intercom Numbers

Allow Busy Display

Allow Ringer Off

ANI Delivery

Answer Time Limit

Archive And Restore The Database,

Using VMMI Software To

ARS Enable

ARS Hookflash, Restrict

ARS, Line Groups

ARS Route Tables

Attendant Hold Recall

Attendant Position (Alternate, Overflow)

Authorization Code Timeout

Authorization Code

Automatic Attendant Immediate Transfer

Automatic Attendant Transfer On Busy

Automatic Hold On Intercom Number


Automatic Hold

Automatic Number Identification Delivery

Automatic Privacy

9.3

7.1.41

7.2.24

8.4.2

10.1.2

1.6

6.9.3, 12.2

7.1.42

12.3

12.4

6.8.4

7.2.30

6.8.15, 10.5.1

10.5

6.9.2

14.5.3

7.1.2

7.1.2

7.1.2

8.7.1

8.1.5

Automatic Reports (SMDA)


Automatic Route Selection Diagram

Automatic Route Selection Dial Tone

Automatic Route Selection, Enabling

Automatic Route Selection for Speed Dial Numbers

Automatic Route Selection, Hookflash Restriction


Automatic Transfer On Busy


Auxiliary Port

B

Background Music

Block Programming, Button Mapping

Block Programming, Class-Of-Service

Block Programming, Line

Block Programming, Station Features

Block Programming

Board Configuration Feature, Understanding The

Board Configuration, Using VMMI Software

To Perform The

Board Layout, Configuring The System’s

Board Status, Examining The

Boards, Adding To The System

Boards, Deleting From The System

Boards, Moving Within The System

Busy Lead Detection

Busy On SOHVA

Busy Status, Display Of

Button Map Default

Button Mapping, Block Programming

Button Mapping By Station

10.2.1

6.9.3

12.1

6.9.4

12

12.6

7.1.44

6.9.15

7.2.28

8.1.14

8.1.2

15.4

15.5

8.1.14

7.2.19

7.1.41

1.7

15

15.2

15.3

6.1.5

7.5.3

7.3

7.1.3

7.5.3

7.5.1

8.2.3

7.5.2

7.5

15.1

Index -7

C

Call Announce Beeps

Call Announce Tone Bursts

Call Announce

Call Cost Display

Call Forward

Call Park Access

Call Park Recall

Call Park

Call Pick-Up, Enable call Pick-Up Group

Call Pick-Up

Call Waiting (Tone)

Caller ID Active, Making

Caller ID Active

Caller ID Baud Rate, Setting

Caller ID Programming

Caller ID Ring No-Answer (RNA)

Camp-On/Automatic Call Back Ring

Camp-On/Call Back

Camp-On Originate, Camp-On Receive

Camp-On Programming

Camp-On Tone


Class-Of-Service, Block Programming

Class Of Service Default

Class Of Service Features, Programming

Class Of Service


Clear System Status Log

Command Prompts and Error

Reporting, Reviewing The

Command Prompts, Reviewing The

Common Audible Ringer ( Interface)

Conference, Unsupervised

Configuring The System’s Board Layout

Connecting The PC To The DXP Plus

Console Installed

Control Key Delinitionss, Reviewing The

Copy Model COS, Station, Button Map

Copy Model Line

COS Programming For Tracker Access

Cost Incoming

Costing Information (ARS)

7.2.10

7.2.10

8.7.1

7.1.4, 12.5.1

7.1.5

7.1.6

6.8.1, 7.1.6

7.1.6

7.1.7

7.1.7

7.1.7

7.1.8

14.1.4

8.1.16

14.15

14.1

7.2.13, 14.1.6

6.8.13,7.1.10

7.1.10

7.1.10

7.1.10

6.8.3,7.1.10

6.9.9

75.1

6.1.3

7.1

7.2.3

7.1.42

6.1.9

3.2

7.5

8.2.3

14.2.4

8.1.7, 125.3

12.5

4.1

4

6.10.8

7.1.35

?5

1.1

7.2.26

B

Database Programming Station

Day 1, Day 2, and Night Ringing Begin and End Times

Day 1 Ring

7.2.27

6.9.18,7.2.13

7.2.13

Day 2 Ring

Day Exception Number/Night Exception Number

7.2.13

7.2.16

Day Exception Number/Night

Exception Number, Remote

Day Restriction Level/Night Restriction Level

7.1.30,8.4.5

7.1.25

Day Route Access/Night Route Access

Default, Button Map

Default, Class Of Service

Default, DID Translation Table

7.1.23

6.1.5

6.1.3

6.1.8



Default, Line


7.2.11

6.1

6.1.6

6.9.16

Default, Station

Default, System

6.1.4

6.1.2

Default, Tables

Delayed Ringing

6.1.7

7.2.13

Dial Time Limit

Dialing Complete

Dialing Mode

DID Alternate Routing

10.1.1

6.8.22

8.1.9,8.4.2,8.7.1

8.4.2

DID Control Signalling

DID/DNIS Block Name

DID/DNIS Programming

DID/DNIS Translation Tables

DID Line

DID Options

8.4.2

8.4.2

8.4.3

8.4.3

8.1.2

DID Translation Table, Default

DID Translation Tables Programming

Digital Voice Announce Programming

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Support

8.4.2

6.1.8

8.4.3

14.3

8.4

Direct Inward Dialing Line Examples

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Programming

Direct Ringing


Disabled

8.4.1

8.8

7.2.13

7.1.28

7.2.25

DISA Specific Programming

DISA Voice Options

DISA

DISA Configurations


8.8.1

8.1.18,8.4.%, 8.7.1

8.1.18,8.7.1

8.8.1

8.1.15

Display Configurations

Display, Enhanced LCD

Display Name

Display Of Busy Status

Display Of Costed Calls

6.2

7.2.46

7.2.2

7.1.41

7.1.4, 12.5.1

2- Index




Do Not Disturb Programming

DSS/BLF Consoles Installed

DTMF Extended Dialing

DTMF Level

DVA Application

DVA Auto Attendant With Single Digit

Menu Application

DVA/DISA Application

DVA Messages, Defining

DVA Messages, Editing The

DVA Messages, Recording The

DVA Operation, Programming For

DVA Status Reports, Obtaining

DVAlTracker Paging System Application

E

E&M DNIS Line

E&M Tie Line

Emergency Numbers

Enabling Automatic Route Selection

Enabling Or Disabling DISA Lines


Enhanced Subdued Ringing

Equipment Needs

Exception Number Programming

Exclusive Hold


Executive Override,

Enable/Disable

Executive Override Programming

Expected CO Digits

Extended Dialing, DTMF


8.1.2

8.1.2

10.4

12

8.8.2

7.1.46

7.2.23

1.0

11.7

7.1.12

7.1.13

7.1.13

7.1.13

8.4.2

6.8.3,7.2.31, 145.7

6.10.9

7.1.11

7.1.11

7.1.11

7.2.26

6.8.4,7.2.31

8.1.13,8.7.1

14.3.1

14.3.1

14.3.1

14.3.2

14.3.3

14.3.3

14.3.3

14.3.3

14.3.1

/M/66-123

F

Feature Code, Changing The

Feature Mnemonic List

Feature Renumbering

Flash/Recall

Flexible Ringing Assignments


Forward RNA Ring Busy

Forward Type

6.11.2

7.3.1

6.12

6.8.8

7.2.13,7.6.1

7.140

7.2.12

7.2.11

G

Gain And Attenuation Settings For

Line Transmit And Receive

General Programming Information

Ground Start Line Support Programming


Ground Start Line

Group Intercom Access

6.13.7,8.1.18

1

8.5.1

8.5

8.1.2

7.2.7,9.3.1

H

Handset Volume On Impact Telephones

Headset

Hold, Directed Station

Hold, Exclusive

Hold, Music On Intercom

7.1.43

7.2.29

7.1.28

7.1.12

Hold, Music Or Tone

Hold Release, Abandon

Hold Recall

Hunt List For PC Attendant Use, Programming A

Hunt List, Intercom

7.1.20

7.1.19,8.1.4

8.1.10

6.8.4

14.4.2

7.2.6

Index -3

I


Idle Line Priority

Idle Line Programming

Immediate Transfer

Industry-Standard Telephone Support

Initial Tracker Pager Assignments, Making

Installing The VMMI Software Program


Intercom Hunt List

Intercom Number Forwarded To

Intercom Number, Personal

Intercom Numbers, Modifying

Intercom Numbers, Programming

Intercom Numbers To Voice Mail

Connections, Assigning

Intercoms For DVA Messages, Programming

Internal Interdigit Dialing

Internal IST Flash


IST DTMF Receiver Timeout

IST Flash, Internal

IST Flash Time


IST Ring Frequency

IST Ring Timeout

IST Ringing On Busy

IST Ringing Patterns


14.5.2

14.3.3

6.8.11

7.1.39p7.2.35

7.1.15,7.2.35

6.8.17,7.2.35

7.1.39

6.8.18,7.2.35

7.2.33,7.2.35

6.9.12,7.2.35

6.8.16,7.2.35

7.2.35

6.9.11,7.2.35

6.9.10,7.2.35

7.1.14

7.%.14,7.2.5

7.1.14

14.53

7.2.35

14.2.3

1.2

7.2.32

7.26,9.3.2

7.2.11

7.2.1

9.2

9

K

Keyboard And Terminal Definitions, Understanding

Keyboard Definitions, Reviewing The 3.1

3

L

LCD Contrast

LCD Display, Enhanced

LCD Messaging

Line Answer

Line, Block Programming

Line Default

Line Disable

7.2.14

7.1.46

6.3.1,7.1.16

7.1.31

8.2.3

6.1.6

8~1.3

Line Disconnect Automatic Camp-On

Line Feature Programming

Line Group Access

Line Group Programming

Line Group Queue

Line Group Queuing

Line Groups for ARS

Line Name

Line Originate

Line Programming

Line-To-Line Connect Duration

Line-To-Line Transfer

Line Type

LineNoice OptionlDVA Relationships,

Understanding The

Lines For PC Attendant Use, Assigning

Local Call Table (for caller ID), Arranging

Login Procedure, Performing The

Loop Start Line Support

Loop Start Line

6.9.14

7.1.35.8.2.1

8

8.2

7.1.36

8.2.2

12.3

8.1.1

7.1.32

8.1

6.8.12.7.1.37

7.1.37

8.1.2

14.3.1

14.4.3

14.1.4

1.3

8.6

8.12

n4

Major Alarm Alerting Parameters, Programming The 6.13.3

Major Alarm Alerting

Major Alarm Ring, Clear

6.9.8

7.1.42

Master Clear 6.1.1

Maximum Call Duration Time


Meet Me Answer Page

Message Deposi

6.8.10,7.1.34

7.1.34

6.10.5.7.1.17

6.3.2,7.1.18

Message Wait Originate 6.3.3,7.1.19

Message Waiting

Messaging

Messaging, LCD

Mnemonic List Of Features

Modem Setup

Modify Digit Table To Route, Assigning

Modify Digit Table

Modify Digit Tables, Programming

Modifying Intercom Numbers

Music, Background


Music Or Tone On Hold

6.3.3,7.I.19

6.3

7.1.16

7.3.I

14.6

12.4.4

12.4.4

12.4.4

9.2

7.1.3

7.1.20

7.1.20,8.1.4

4- Index


N

Night Ring

Night Transfer-Gf Ringing

7.2.13

7.2.13

0

On Board Software Upgrade

Operator Station

Out Dial Delay Time

6.1.12

6.9.13

6.8.14

P

Pad Level-Transmit, Receive

Page, Meet Me Answer

Page Recall

Paging Access

Paging Programming

Paging Receive

Paging Transmit

Paging Zones

Password, Changing The

Password Programming

Pause Time

PC Attendant Position, Enabling The

PC Attendant Position Function Keys, Mapping

PC Attendant Position Programming

PC Attendant Position Text Messaging Buttons,

Assigning The

Performing The Login Procedure

Periodic Tone Time

Periodic Line Tone

Peripheral Devices, Programming For


6.13.7,8.1.18

7.1.17

6.8.2, 14.2.5

6.10.2,6.8.5

6.10

6.10.4,7.1.21

6.10.3,7.1.22

6.10

6.11.1

6.11

6.6.1,6.8.7

14.4.1

14.4.5

14.4

14.4.4

1.3

6.8.9,7.1.33

7.1.33

14

7.2.1

lMi66-123


Phone Types

Pick-Up Groups


Prime Intercom Number

Prime Line Group

Prime Line Programming

Prime Line Type

Printer Interface

7.2.13

7.4

7.2.20

8.1.11

7.2.8

7.2.8

Printouts, Selecting System

Privacy Release

Programming Call Costing and Station Message

Detail Accounting and Reports

Programming Considerations, Reviewing General

10

2

Programming DISA Authorization Codes

Programming For Peripheral Devices

Programming Intercom Numbers

Programming Line Features

8.8.3

14

9

8

7.2.27

Programming Port

Programming Station Class Of Service Features

Programming Station Features

Programming System Features

7.1

7,7.2

6

6.13

Programming The Tl Parameters

Programming Toll Restriction 11

Programming Call Costing and Station Message Detail

Accounting and Reports

Pulse Dial Interdigit Time

Pulse Dial Make./Pulse Dial Break

Pulse Dial Ratio

10

6.8.20,8.1.8

6.8.21,g.l.g

6.8.21.8.1.8

7.2.8

7.2.8

13

13

8.1.5

Quick Transfer 7.1.43

Index -6

/M/66-123

R

Recall Call Forward

Recall/Flash

Recall, Timed

Relays , External Paging Equipment Control

Relays (External Tl Alarm Reporting)

Relays, Line Answer From Any Station

Reloading Or Up-Grading The System Software

Remote COS Programming

Remote Day/Night Exception Number


Removing Intercom Numbers

Renumbering Intercom Numbers

Reports, Automatic

Reports, SMDA, Examples

Reports, Manual

Report Option

Reporting Errors

Response Messaging

Restrict ARS Hookflasb

Restricted Numbers Programming Procedure

Restricted Numbers Programming

Restriction Level Programming

Ring Back On Busy

Ring Back Tone

Ring Frequency, IST

Ring Mode (IST)


Ringer Volume Off


Ringing On Busy

Ringing Preference

RNA Record (for CaIIer ID), , Deleting Viewed

Route Access Level

Route Table Warning Tone

Route Tables (ARS)

Routes

7.1.5

6..8.7

6.8.5

6.10.6

6.13.1

6.10.7

1.4

8.8.4

7.1.30,8.4.5

7.129

9.4

9.5

10.22

10.2.3

10.2.1

10.1.10

4.2

6.3.2,7.1.17

7.1.44

11.6.1

11.6

11.4

7.2.36

6.9.17

6.9.12

6.9.11

7.2.13

7.224

7.1.23

7.2.23

7.1.23

14.1.1

12.4.3

12.4.1

12.4

12.4.2

S

Selecting System Printouts

Serial Data Port Numbers To Installation Locations,

Matching

Serial Data Port Parameters, Setting

Serial Data Port Parameters

Serial Number, Obtaining The Systen Software

Serial Port

Serial Ports 1 l-18 Select

Service Observable, Making A Station

Service Observe, Initiating

Service Observing

13

6.4.1

6.4.2

6.4

1.3

6.4

6.9.20

7.2.15

7.2.15

7.2.15

6- index

DXP Pius Programming fnsfrucfions

Services DTMF Highway

Single Line Proprietary Telephone TAP Button

Single Line TAP

SMDA Attendant Delete

SMDA Report Examples

6.9.19

7.2.22

7.2.22

10.1.8

SMDA Reports

SMDAISMDR Parameters

SMDA/SMDR Printer Port

SMDAISMDR Programming

SMDR Print Parameter

SMDR Record Format

10.2.3

10.2

10.1

10.1.9

10

10.1.3

10.1.4

SMDR Record Sample Shown In SMDA Formae

SMDR Record

10.1.4

8.1.6.10.1.11

Softkeys Setup 7.2.32

Software Reset 6.1.11

SOHVA Beeps

SOHVA, Busy On

SOHVA Groups

6.5.2,7.2.17

6.5.1,7.2.19

6.5.3,7.2.18

SOHVA Programming 6.5

SOHVA Tone Bursts 6.5.2,7.2.17

Speed Dial Groups, System

Speed Dial Groups

Speed Dial Numbers, ARS


Speed Dial Sets

7.1.26

6.6.2

12.6

6.6

6.6.3,7.2.4

Speed Dial, System

Square/Non-Square System

Station Default

Station Disable

Station Disable, Remote

6.6.4

7.3

6.1.4

7.2.25

Station Features, Block Programming

Station Features, Programming

Station Monitoring

Station Name

Station Numbering, Understanding

Station Ports For Voice Mail Use, Arrqanging


Status Log, Clearing The

Status Log, Printing The

7.1.29

7.52

7,7.2

7:1.27

7.2.2

9.1

14.5.1

6.8.4

6.13.6

6.13.5


System Clock

System Default

System Features Programming

System Parameters

6.9.1

6.7

6-I-2

6

6.9

System Software, Reloading Or Up-Grading The


System Speed Dial

System Status Button To A Station,Assigning A

System Status Log, Clear


System Timing

1.4

7.1.26

6.6.4

6.13.4

6.1.9

6-9.6

6.8


T

Tl Parameters, Programming The

Tl Status Log Parameters, Programming The

Tl Status Reporting And Major Alarm Alerting

Tl Status Reporting

Tables Default

Telephone Types

Terminal Emulation Programming, Performing The

Terminal Mode Definitions, Reviewing The

Terminal Setup

Thru Dialing (Through Dialing)

Tie Line Non-Standard Protocol Signalling

Tie Line Parameters

Tie Line Standard-Protocol Signalling

Tie Line Support Programming

Tie Line Support

Tie Line Types

Time and Date

Timed Recall

Toll ARS Dialing Pause

Toll Groups Programming

Toll Groups



Toll Restriction Flow Diagram

Toll Restriction, Programming

Tone First

Tone Length

Tone Or Music On Hold

Tone Or Voice Signalling

Tracker Access

Tracker Paging System Assignments, Making

8.7

8.7.1

6.7

6.8.5

6.9.5

11.5

8.1.12,8.7.1

11.1

11.3

7.2.21

8.7.1

3.3

6.2

8.7.1

8.7.1

8.1.2

6.13

6.13.2

6.13.1

6.9.7

6.1.7

1.4

5

11.3

11

7.2.9

6.8.4,7.2.31

7.1.19,8.1.4

7.2.9

7.1.9

14.2.2

/M/66-123

Tracker Paging System Options, Programming

Tracker Paging System Programming

14.2.1

14.2


Transfer-To-Voice Mail Button, Assigning

1.2.34

14.5.4

Translate A DXP Database, Using VMMI Software To 1.5

u

Understanding Station Numbering


Up-Grading Or Reloading The System Software

9.1

7.1.35

1.4

V

VMMI Software Program, Installing The 1.2


Voice Mail Call Transfer Parameters, Arranging

Voice Mail DTMF Tone

7.1.38

14.5.3

6.8.18. 14.5.7

Voice Mail ID 8.1.17. 14.5.6

Voice Mail Identification (ID) Number, Assigning 14.5.6

Voice Mail Integration Digits, Programming The 14.5.8

Voice Mail Integration Digits, Setting The 14.5.8

Voice Mail Programming

Voice Mail Ringing Options, Arranging

14.5

14.5.5

Voice Or Tone Signalling

Voice Prompts

7.2.9

6.1.10

W

Windows Terminal Emulation, Configurating The z

Zone Programming

1.8

6.10.1


Programming Records

The record charts included in this publication reflect software releases through 11A.

Printed in U.S.A.

R

IMI66-125.03

3/97

C E R T I F I E D

I S O 9 0 0 1

Accredited by the Dutch Council for Accreditation for certification and registration activities.

CERTIFICATION

A

C

C

R

E D

I T

E

D

R

E

G

ANSI-RAB

I S T

R

A

R

Comdial's Quality Management System Is


Comdial  strives to design the features in our communications systems to be fully interactive with one another. However, this is not always possible, as the combinations of accessories and features are too varied and extensive to insure total feature compatibility. Accordingly, some features identified in this publication will not operate if some other feature is activated.

Comdial  disclaims all liability relating to feature non-compatibility or associated in any way with problems which may be encountered by incompatible features.

Notwithstanding anything contained in this publication to the contrary, Comdial makes no representation herein as to the compatibility of features.

2/12/97

DXP Plus Programming Records


1 Introduction 1–1

2 System Records 2–1

2.1

VDT Configuration (Terminal Setup) 2–2

2.2

LCD Messages 2–2

2.3

Serial Data Port Records 2–3

2.4

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce Groups 2–4

2.5

Speed Dial Records 2–6

2.6

Timing 2–10

2.7

System Parameters 2–11

2.8

Zone Paging 2–12

2.9

Relays 2–12

2.10

External Paging Port 2–12

2.11

Change Password 2–12

2.12

Feature Renumbering 2–13

2.13

Enabling Status Reporting and Major Alarm Alerting 2–14

2.14

T1 Status Logging 2–14

2.15

Major Alarm Alerting 2–15

3 Station Records 3–1

3.1

COS Programming 3–2

3.2

Station Programming 3–3

3.3

Button Mapping and Telephone Types 3–4

3.4

Copy Model COS 3–26

3.5

Copy Model Station 3–27

3.6

Copy Button Map 3–28

3.7

Hunt Groups 3–29

4 Line Records 4–1

4.1

Line Programming 4–2

4.2

Line Group Programming 4–7

4.3

Copy Model Line 4–7

4.4

System Line Record 4–8

4.5

DID/DNIS Block Programming 4–10

4.6

DISA Configuration Programming Records 4–12

IMI66–125

Table Of Contents – iii

IMI66–125

5 Intercom Numbers 5–1

5.1

Intercom Record 5–2

6 SMDA/SMDR Records 6–1

6.1

SMDA/SMDR Parameters 6–2

6.2

Automatic Reports 6–2

6.3

Account Code Parameter Records 6–2

6.4

Verified Account Codes 6–3

6.5

Emergency Numbers 6–4

6.6

Authorization Codes 6–4

7 Toll/ARS Records 7–1

7.1

Restriction Tables 7–2

7.2

Staion Restriction Level 7–3

7.3

Toll Groups 7–4

7.4

Route Tables 7–5

7.5

Modify Digit Tables 7–13

8 Printout Records 8–1

8.1

Printout Records 8–2

9 Peripherals 9–1

9.1

Caller ID Records 9–2

9.2

Tracker Records 9–3

9.3

Voice/DVA Records 9–5

9.4

PC Attendant Records 9–6

9.5

Voice Mail Records 9–7

9.6

Modem Setup 9–8

10 Board Configuration 10–1

10.1

Board Configuration Records 10–2

DXP Plus Programming Records iv – Table Of Contents

IMI66–125 DXP Plus Programming Records

Introduction

1

Use these record charts along with GCA40-130, DXP Plus Digital Communications System General System

Description, and IMI66-123, DXP Plus Digital Communications System Programming Instructions to plan the system configuration and feature applications that best complement the site requirements.

•

The charts are arranged in the same order that the VDT programming menus are presented.

•

Use the index at the end of this publication to locate a programmable feature by name.

•

Since the Diagnostics menu item does not require any record keeping, this publication contains no entry tables for it. For a discussion of the system diagnostics, see IMI89–239, Understanding The System Diagnostics, that you can find under the troubleshooting section of your system hardware binder.

Main Menu

1. System

2. Stations

3. Lines

4. Intercom Numbers

5. SMDA / SMDR

6. Toll / ARS

7. Printouts

8. Diagnostics

9. Peripherals

10. Board Configuration

11. Logout

Enter Selection (1-9):

Introduction 1–1


System Records

2

•

From main menu, type selection number for system and press ENTER.

•

From system menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125

System

1. Defaults

2. Terminal Setup

3. LCD Messages

4. Save/Restore Database (use VMMI)

5. Serial Ports

6. SOHVA Table

7. Speed Dials

8. Time and Date

9. Timing

10. System Parameters

11. Paging Zones

12. Change Password

13. Feature Renumbering

14. T1–E1 Status Log Parameters

15. Major Alarm Alerting


System Records 2–1

IMI66–125

2.1

VDT Configuration (Terminal Setup)

ANSI Terminal

ANSI Color Terminal

WYSE 50 Terminal (default)

Brief Display Mode

2.2

LCD Messages

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

06

07

08

09

10

Number Message (16 Characters Maximum)

01

02

03

B

C

A a a s l c k l k

T a t h e m

04

05

T

I a k

W i e l l

A

T o H o l d

M e s s a g e

C a l l B a c k

22

23

24

25

26

18

19

20

21

27

28

29

30

Default = bold italic entries


2–2 System Records


2.3

Serial Data Port Records

IMI66–125

Data Port

Main Data Port 1

Main Data Port 2

Aux Data Port 1

Aux Data Port 2

Aux Data Port 3

Aux Data Port 4

Aux Data Port 5

Aux Data Port 6

Aux Data Port 7

Aux Data Port 8

Aux Data Port 9

Aux Data Port 10

Aux Data Port 11

Aux Data Port 12

Baud Rate In Baud Rate Out Data Bits Stop Bits Paity Flow Control

Aux Data Port 13

Aux Data Port 14

Aux Data Port 15

Aux Data Port 16

Baud Rates = 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600 / Data Bits = 7, 8 / Stop Bits = 1, 2 / Parity = None, Even, Odd

Flow Control = None, Xon/Xoff, CTR/DTR

Defaults: Data Port 1 = 9600, 9600, 8, 1, None, None

Data Port 2 = 2400, 2400, 7, 2, None, None

Data Ports 3–10 = 19,200, 19,200, 8, 1, None, None

Data Ports 11–18 = 9600, 9600, 8, 1, None, None

2.3.1 Modem Setup

Feature

Data Port

Initialize String

Default main data port 2

AT S0=1 M0 Q1 E0

Program Setting


IMI66–125

2.4

Subdued Off-Hook Voice Announce Groups


Default = *

S O H V A R e c e i v e

S

O

H

V

A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 * .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

*

2 .

* .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

*

3 .

4 .

5 .

6 .

.

.

.

.

*

.

.

.

.

*

.

.

.

.

*

.

.

.

.

*

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

*

*

*

*

T r

7 .

.

.

.

.

.

* .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

*

8 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

* .

.

.

.

.

.

.

*

9 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

* .

.

.

.

.

.

* a 10 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

* .

.

.

.

.

* n 11 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

* .

.

.

.

* s 12 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

* .

.

.

* m 13 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

* .

.

* i 14 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

* .

* t 15 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

* *

16 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *



2.5

Speed Dial Records

2.5.1 Speed Dial Records 100—199

Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**

Prefix*** Number****

Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**


IMI66–125

*Enter 100–199 for dialing codes 100–199

**Enter line number, line group number, prime line/last line used—Beginning with software release 8.B, you can assign intercom as a preselect choice.

***Enter 1–128 for line or enter 1–16 for line group

****Enter 32 digits maximum—enter P for pause and F for hookflash


IMI66–125


Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**



Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**








2.5.3 Speed Dial Records 300–399

Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**


Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**


IMI66–125






IMI66–125


Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**



Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**








2.5.5 Speed Dial Records 500–599

Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**


Dialing

Code*

Line

Selection**


IMI66–125






IMI66–125

2.6

Timing


Call Park Recall

Page Recall

Camp-on Tone

DTMF Extended Dialing

Hold Recall

Attendant Hold Recall

Paging Access

Pause

Recall/Flash


Periodic Line Tone

Maximum Call Duration Time

Internal Interdigit Dialing

0 sec

0 sec

5 sec

80 ms

0 sec

0 sec

20 sec

500 ms

110 ms

0 sec

1 min

2 min

5 sec

1 min

1 min

10 sec

160 ms

30 sec

30 sec

30 sec

1 sec

300 ms

10 sec

2 min

5 min

10 sec

2 min

2 min

15 sec

240 ms

1 min

1 min

1 min

1.5 sec

500ms

20 sec

5 min

10 min

15 sec

3 min

3 min

30 sec

320 ms

1.5 min

1.5 min

1.5 min

2 sec

600 ms

25 sec

10 min

15 min

20 sec

Max. Line-to-Line Conn. Duration 0 sec

Camp-on/Auto Callback Ring 0 sec

Out Dial Delay Time

Authorization Code Time

IST Ring Timeout

IST DTMF Ring Timeout

IST Min. Flash Time

500 ms

0 sec

1min

5 sec

110 ms

1 min

10 sec

1 sec

5 sec

10 sec

200 ms

5 min

20 sec

1.5 sec

10 sec

1.25 min 1.5 min

15 sec

300 ms

IST Max. Flash Time

Voice Mail DTMF Digit

Pulse Dial Interdigit

Pulse Dial Make

Pulse Dial Break

Dialing Complete

500 ms

80 ms

100 ms

0–90 ms

0–99 ms

2 sec

600 ms

160 ms

200 ms

40 ms

40 ms

2.5 sec

750 ms

240 ms

300 ms

880 ms

320 ms

400 ms

3 sec 3.5 sec

Periodic Conference Tone

Periodic Executive Override Tone

2 sec

2 sec

5 sec

5 sec

10 sec

10 sec

To make a programming record, check the block showing the desired setting.

15 sec

15 sec

Default = value in bold italic type.

9 min

25 sec

2 sec

13 min

30 sec

2.5 sec

15 sec 20 sec

1.75 min 2 min

20 sec

400 ms

25 sec

1 sec

400 ms

500 ms

4 sec

30 sec

30 sec

4 min

4 min

1 min

400 ms

2 min

2 min

2 min

3 sec

750ms

30 sec

15 min

30 min

25 sec

4.5 sec

1 min

1 min

5 min

5 min

2 min

560 min

3 min

3 min

2.5 min

5 sec

880 ms

45 sec

6 min

6 min

3 min

720 ms

4 min

4 min

3 min

7.5 sec

1 sec

1 min

17 min

45 sec

3 sec

25 sec

3 min

30 sec

21 min

1 min

3.5 sec

30 sec

4 min

35 sec

1.5 sec

560 ms

600 ms

720 ms

700 ms

5 sec

2 min

2 min

7 min

4 min

880 ms

5 min

5 min

10 sec

1.5 sec

1.5 min

8 min

8 min

1.04 sec

6 min

6 min

9 min

15 sec

2 sec

2 min

20 sec

2.5 sec

3 min

25 min

1.5 min

4 sec

Never

40 sec

880 ms

800 ms

5.5 sec

3 min

3 min

30 min

2 min

4.5 sec

45 sec

1.04 sec

900 ms

6 sec

5 min

5 min

3 min

5 sec

1 sec

6.5 sec

10 min

4 min

4 min

7 sec 7.5 sec



2.7

System Parameters


Automatic Attendant Immediate Transfer

ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

ARS Dial Tone


1

T1 Status Reporting



No

No

Disabled

2

Disabled

Disabled

None Name

8

IST Ringing Modes

IST Ring Frequency

Operator Station

Line Problem Limit (0 = disabled)

(1–255 = choices)

Master CFOS Control

Line Disconnect Auto Camp-on



Ringback Tone

Day 1 Begin Time (24 Hour)

Day 1 End Time (24 Hour)

Day 2 Begin Time (24 Hour)

Day 2 End Time (24 Hour)

Night Begin Time (24 Hour)

Night End Time (24 Hour)

101

0

None Hour–

None Hour–

None

None

None

None

Mode 1 (2 sec.) Mode 2 (1 sec.)

21 Hz

Name

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

No

Tone 1

Hour–

Hour–

Hour–

Hour–

25 Hz

Number

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Yes

Tone 2

Minute–

Minute–

Minute–

Minute–

Minute–

Minute–

1 = USA

4 = Argentia and Chile

Location Code

2 = South

Africa 5= Israel

3 = Brazil

To make a programming record, check the block showing the desired setting.

Default = values shown in bold italic type.

Yes

Yes

Enabled

3 4

Enabled

Enabled

Number

16

IMI66–125


IMI66–125

2.8

Zone Paging

Zone 1 (Defaults to All-Call) *

Zone Name

Record

Transmit Station (101-292)

Relay Assigned (1-4)

External Paging Port rt Assigned 0=No 1=yes

Zone 2

Zone Name

Record

Transmit Stations (101-292)

Receive Stations (101-292)


External Paging Port Assigned 0=No 1=yes

Zone 3

Zone Name

Record





Zone 4

Zone Name



Record



Zone 5

Zone Name


Record




Zone 6

Zone Name


Record




Zone 7

Zone Name



Record



Zone 8

Zone Name



Record



*Default = zone 1is all-call, zones 2—8 not assigned. This means stations 101—292 are assigned to both transmit and receive in zone 1 and none are assigned in any other zone.

Also, no external paging port is assigned.


2.9

Relays

Relay 1*

Direct Ring LInes (1-128)

Delayed Ring Lines (1-128)

Day 1 Ring Lines (1-128)


Night Ring Lines (1-128)

Relay 2*






Relay 3*






Relay 4*






* Default = no relays assigned

Record

Record

Record

Record

2.10 External Paging Port

Line Type*






* Default = none assigned

Record

2.11 Change Password

Entry

(System Administrator)

Installer

(Installer/programmer)

Station

(Programming Station)

* Entry and Installer Default = I ✳746 ✳

Station Default = ITCM button, ✳ #746 ✳

(6 = password portion)



2.12 Feature Renumbering

Feature Name

Park Orbits

Park Orbit Send 1

Park Orbit Send 2

Park Orbit Send 3

Park Orbit Send 4

Park Orbit Send 5

Park Orbit Send 6

Park Orbit Send 7

Park Orbit Send 8

Park Orbit Send 9

Park Orbit Receive 1









Line Groups

Line Group 1

Default Code

#95

#96

#97

#98

#99

✳96

✳97

✳98

✳99

#91

✳91

✳92

✳93

✳94

✳95

#92

#93

#94

New Code

Line Group 2

Line Group 3

Line Group 4

Line Group 5

Line Group 6

Line Group 7

Line Group 8

Line Group 8

Line Group 10

Line Group 11

Line Group 12

Line Group 13

Line Group 14

Line Group 15

Line Group 16

86

87

88

89

83

84

65

9

80

81

82

60

61

62

63

64

Page and Line Answer from Any Station (TAFAS) Zones

Page Zone 1

Page Zone 2

Page Zone 3

Page Zone 4

70

71

72

73

Page Zone 5

Page Zone 6

Page Zone 7

Page Zone 8

Meet Me Page

TAFAS Zone 1

TAFAS Zone 2

TAFAS Zone 3

TAFAS Zone 4

TAFAS All Zones

66

67

68

69

77

78

65

74

75

76

2.12.1 Station Programming

Station Manager

Programming Entry Code attendant programming

Programming Entry Code

✶#74

✶#0

Feature Name

DSS Programming

Executive Overrride

LCD Messaging Activate

Default Code

User Features

Background Music 1

Background Music 2

Background Music Off

Volume Save

✴11

✴12

#1

✴✴7

Operator

Account Code Entry

Call Forward Cancel

0

✴04

#5

✴51 Call Forward Personal

Call Forward All Calls ✴52

Call Forward Personal (RNA) ✴53

Call Forward All (RNA)

Camp-On Activate

Camp-On Cancel

Call Pickup Directed

✴54

✴6

#6

✴4

Call Pick Up Group

Authorization Code Entry

#4

#08

✴✴3

✴03

✴02

LCD Messaging Cancel

Message Wait Activate

Message Wait Cancel

Call Divert

Query

Personal Ring Tone 1






Directed Station Hold On

Service Observe


Directed Station Hold Off

Voice Announce Block On

Voice Announce Block Off

#02

✴3

#3

✴55

✴✴8

✴✴41

✴✴42

✴✴43

✴✴44

✴✴45

✴✴46

✴90

#03

✴✴1

#90

✴2

#2

LCD Contrast

(Analog Telephone)

✴✴5

Response Message ✴✴6

Pick Up Last Line*

Broker’s Mode*

✴08

✴07

Access Code For Speed Dial* ✴01

Saved Number Redial*

Dial Saved Number*


✴06

✴09

✴05

Remote Station Enable

Message Wait Retrieval*

#05

#00

Tracker Page Pick Up

Tracker Access

Pager Disable

Pager Enable


Call Forward Off Site

DISA Access

#8

✴8

#06

#07

#09

✴56

No Default Provided

DND Code Access* #01

Station Lock (On/Off toggle) #04

Mark Problem Line No Default Provided

TAP Dialing Code* # #

*For Single-Line Proprietary and Industry-Standard Telephones

New Code

IMI66–125



2.13 Enabling T1 Status Reporting And Major Alarm Alerting

Feature Settings*

T1 Status Reporting Enabled

Major Alarm Alerting Enabled

*Mark block to match desired setting

Disabled

Disabled

Default

Disabled

Disabled

NOTE: The T1 status reporting and major alarm alerting parameters are described in the instructions, “Installing And Programming

The DXPT1 Digital Carrier Transmission Option,” IMI89-193. These instructions should be located in this book under the installation tab.

2.14 T1 Status Logging

Error Type

^

1. Bipolar Error Alarm Trigger

2. Bipolar Error Logging

3. CRC Error Alarm Trigger

4. CRC Error Logging

5. Slip Errors

6. PLL Errors

7. Transmit Slip Errors

8. Loss of Sync

9. Blue Alarms

10. Loss of Signal

Threshold

Range

0-255

0-999

0-255

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

Selection

Time Period

Range

None

See Note A

None

See Note A

See Note B

See Note A

See Note B

See Note B

See Note B

See Note B

+

Selection

1 Sec

1 Sec

11. Primary/Sec Sync Ref Switch

12. Sync Phase Lock Error

0-999

0-999

See Note B

See Note B

13. Yellow Alarms

14. Red Alarms

0-999

0-999

See Note B

See Note B

Defaults: Thresholds = 0; Time Periods = 1 Sec ( for Error Types 1-4 and 6 ) and 1 Min (for Error Types 5 and 7-14)

NOTE A: Choices are 1, 5, 30 Sec; 1, 5, 10 Min; 1 Hr

NOTE B: Choices are 1, 5, 10, 30 Min; 1, 2, 12, 24 Hr



2.15 Major Alarm Alerting

Error Type

1. Bipolar Error

2. CRC Error

3. Slip Errors

4. PLL Errors

5. Transmit Slip Errors

6. Loss of Sync

7. Blue Alarms

8. Loss of Signal

9. Primary/Sec Sync Ref Switch

10. Sync Phase Lock Error

Threshold

Range

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

Selection

Time Period

Range

See Note A

See Note A

See Note B

See Note A

See Note B

See Note B

See Note B

See Note B

See Note B

See Note B

Selection

11. Yellow Alarms

12. Red Alarms

0-999

0-999

See Note B

See Note B

Defaults: Thresholds = 0; Time Periods = 1 Sec (for Error Types 1, 2, and 4) and 1 Min (for Error Types 3 and 5-12)

NOTE A: Choices are 1, 5, 30 Sec; 1, 5, 10 Min; 1 Hr

NOTE B: Choices are 1, 5, 10, 30 Min; 1, 2, 12, 24 Hr

IMI66–125



Station Records

3

•

From main menu, type selection number for station menu and press ENTER.

•

From station menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

Stations

1. COS Programming

2. Station Programming

3. Button Mapping

4. Phone Types

5. Copy Model COS

6. Copy Model Station

7. Copy Model Button Map

8. Hunt Groups


IMI66–125

Station Records 3–1


3.1

COS Programming

Feature

Account Code

Auto Hold on Intercom

Auto Hold on Lines

Background Music

Call Cost Display

Call Forward All



Call Forward Off Site (CFOS)

Call Park Access

Call Pick-up

Call Waiting

Tracker Access


Intercom Studder Dial Tone

Camp-On Originate

Camp-On Receive



Exclusive Hold

Executive Override




LCD Messaging

Meet Me Page

Message Deposit


Music/Tone On Intercom Hold

Paging Receive

Paging Transmit

Ringing Preference

Day Route Access

Night Route Access




Station Monitoring

(Copy This Sheet As Needed To Meet System COS Capacity)

Choice COS Defaults* Class Of Service Records

(Enter COS number at column head.)

32 1 2–31

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NONE, 1–9

YES NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

1–4

1–4

1–8

1–8

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NONE 1, 2, Tone

NO

NO

NO

NONE, 1–20

NO

4

4

1

1

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

1–9

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

1

Yes

Yes

Yes

1-20

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

1–9

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

None

No

No

No

4

4

Yes

Yes

1

1

1-20

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes No

None None

No No

1

1

No

No

1

1

None

No



Remote Day Exception Numbers

Remote Night Exception Numbers

YES

YES

NO

NO

NONE, 1–32

NONE, 1–32

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

None None None

None None None

Conference Advisory Tone ** None, Once, Period None None None

Executive Override Advisory Tone ** None, Once, Period None None None

Line Answer

Line Originate

Line No.

Line No.

1-128

1-128

1–128

1–128

None

None

Periodic Line Tone


Line Group Access

Line Group Queue

Line to Line Transfer


Internal IST Flash


Allow Busy Display

Line No.

Line No.

NONE, 1–16

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

None None

None None

None

None

1–16 1–16 None

Yes No No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No


High Handset Volume

Restrict ARS Hookflash

Quick Transfer

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

*Defaults: Stations 101 and 102 = COS 1, all other stations = COS 32, and COS 2-31 are unassigned.

**Default = none when system parameters location code is 1, 2, , or 5; however default = periodic when system parameters location code is 3.

3–2 Station Records


3.2

Station Programming

(Copy This Sheet As Needed To Meet System Station Capacity)

Port Type and Number

Telephone Model

Location

Feature


Choice

101

101

Station Defaults

Others

Station Number

Voice Mail

Station Number

Station Name

Class Of Service

Speed Dial Sets

Idle Line Priority

Intercom Hunt List

Group Intercom Access

Prime Type

Line

Line Group

Intercom

Tone First

Call Announce Beeps


Itcm No. Fwd. To

Fwd. Type

Forward RNA Ring Busy

Allow Multiple CFOS

Direct Ring

Delayed Ring

Day 1 Ring

Day 2 Ring

Night Ring

Caller ID Ring-No Answer

Ring-No Answer Rings

Personal Ringing Tone

LCD Contrast


Service Observable

ARS Day Exception No.

ARS Night Execption No.

SOHVA Beeps

SOHVA Groups

Busy On SOHVA

Pickup Group

Through Dialing

Single Line TAP

Ring On Busy

Allow Ringer Off

Disabled

Console Installed

Console Ports

Programming Port

Auto Attdt. Xfer. On Busy

Headset

Recall Call Forward

End-toEnd Itcm Signalling

Attendant

Alternate Attendant

1–32

1–10

None, 1–28

Intercom Numbers

Intercom Numbers

None, Line Group, Intercom

Name, Number

1–16

Name, Number

Yes, No

1–6

Intercom Fwd., No Fwd.

Intercom Number

Personal, All

Yes, No

Yes, No

None, 1–max sta. qty.





None, 1–max. line. qty.

None, 1–6

1–8

1–8

Yes, No

Yes, No

None, 1–32

None, 1–32

1–6

None, 1–16

Yes, No

None, 1–16

Yes, No

Call Wait, Ans. Xfer

Yes, No

Yes, No

Yes, No

Yes, No

None–max sta. qty.

Yes, No

Yes, No

Yes, No

Yes, No

Yes, No

Yes, No

Name, Number

1

3

None

None, 101, 3101–3104

3101–3104

None

1

1

1

No

1

No Fwd.

101

Personal

No

No

1–max sta. qty.

None

None

None

None

None

4

Defaults with each station port number

5

No

No

1–3

1–3

6

None

No

1

No

Call Wait

Yes

Yes

No

No

None

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

102

32

3

None

Station Number

None

None

1

1

1

No

1

No Fwd.

Station Number

Personal

No

No

None

None

None

None

None

None

4

5

No

No

1–3

1–3

6

None

No

1

No

Call Wait

Yes

Yes

No

No

None

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

None

32

3

None

None

1

1

None

None

1

Yes

1

Intercom Fwd.

Linked Station Number

All

No

No

None

None

None

None

None

None

3

5

No

No

1–3

1–3

6

None

No

1

Yes

Call Wait

Yes

Yes

No

No

None

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

None

Overflow Attendant


Softkey Setup


Name, Number

Yes, No

Yes, No

Yes, No

102

No

No

No

None

No

No

No

None

No

No

No

Transfer Ring Configuration

Ringback On Busy

Cadence 1, Cadence 2

Yes, No

Cadence 1

No

Cadence 1

No

Cadence 1

No

Line Out Softkey Option* CONF SAVE ARDL

CONF SAVE RLSE

CONF SAVE RLSE not applicable

* Default = ARDL when system parameters location code is 1, 2, 4, or 5; however, default = RLSE when system parameters locatioon code is 3.

IMI66–125

Station Record



3.3

Button Mapping and Telephone Types

3.3.1

ExecuTech LCD Speakerphone Mapping Record


LCD Speakerphone

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.2

ExecuTech 5x20 Telephone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


IMI66–125

3.3.3

ExecuTech 10x14 Telephone Mapping Record



... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.4

Express 19-Button Telephone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

L18 L19 L20 L21

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


IMI66–125

3.3.5

Express 10-Button Telephone Mapping Record



... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.6

Express 2-Line Telephone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

TRANS CONF

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...



3.3.7

ExecuTech 12-Line LCD Speakerphone Mapping Record


... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.8

ExecuTech 14-Line Telephone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

L14 L15

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


IMI66–125

3.3.9

ExecuTech 6-Line Telephone Mapping Record



TRANS CONF

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

L10 L1

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.10 ExecuTech 2-Line Telephone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...



3.3.11 DigiTech 24-Line LCD Speakerphone Mapping Record


... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.12 DigiTech 24-Line Telephone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...



3.3.13 Impact 24-Line LCD Speakerphone Mapping Record



3.3.14 Impact 24-Line Speakerphone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...



3.3.15 Impact 12-Line LCD Speakerphone Mapping Record


... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.16 Impact 12-Line Speakerphone Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


IMI66–125

3.3.17 Impact 12-Line Telephone Mapping Record



... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.18 Express 32-Button DSS/BLF Console Mapping Record

IMI66–125

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L09 L08 L07 L06 L05 L04 L03 L02 L01

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...



3.3.19 Express 64 Button DSS/BLF Console Mapping Record


L61 L53

L60 L52

L59 L51

L58 L50

L57 L49

L64 L56

L63 L55

L62 L54

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.20 ExecuTech 70-Button Console Mapping Record

IMI66–125

DSS/BLF Console

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


IMI66–125

3.3.21 Impact 64-Button Console Mapping Record



... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

... ...

. ..

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ...


3.3.22 Scout 900MX Digital Wireless Telephone Mapping Record

Button Mapping The Scout 900

MX

Digital Wireless Telephone

Complete one record sheet for each station.

Copy this blank record sheet as required for additional stations.

IMI66–125

L01

L02

Scout 900mx

Digital Wireless

Telephone

T/C

TAP

HOLD

MEMO TALK

1

4

GH I

7

PRS

2

ABC

5

JKL

3

DEF

6 MNO

8 TUV

9

0

OPER

#

WXY

F1 F2 F3 F4

F1 F2 F3 F4

L03

L04

BUTTON ASSIGNMENT CHART

L01

L02

L03

L04

Default:

L01 = Line 1

L02 = Line 2

L03 = Line 3

L04 = Intercom

PORT NUMBER

INTERCOM NUMBER

STATION NAME

STATION LOCATION

TELEPHONE

TYPE

MODEL

CAJS068X

BUTTON

ACCT

. . .

ALTRN

. . .

ANSWER

.

APAGE

ARD

. .

. . .

ARECD

. . .

ARING

. . .

AUTH

BOTH

CAMP

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

CID

DND

DPKUP

. . .

. . .

DSTAT

. . .

EXOVR

FEATR

. . .

. . .

FWD-A

. . .

FWD-P

. . .

FWDRA

. .

DESCRIPTION

Account Code Entry

Alternate Attendant Btn.

Answer Button

Auxiliary Page Btn.

Auto Redial Button

Auxiliary Record Btn.

Auxiliary Ring Button

Authorization Code Btn.

Both Button

Camp On Button

Caller ID Button

Do Not Disturb Button

Directed Call Pick Up

DSS Status Button

Executive Override

Feature Button

Forward All Button

Forward Personal

Forward All RNA Btn.

Forward Personal RNA Btn.

BUTTON

GPLSN

. . .

GPKUP

. . .

HDST

HOLD

ITCM

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

I####

LCDMS

. . .

LNG##

LN###

LOCK

. . .

. . .

. . .

MMEPG

MSGWT

MUSC#

. . .

NIGHT

. . .

. . .

OAI##

PAGE#

. . .

. . .

PARK#

PRVCY

. . .

. . .

DESCRIPTION

Group Listen Btn.

Group Pick Up Btn.

Headset Mode

Hold Button

Intercom Button

Intercom Number Btn.

LCD Messaging Btn.

Line Group Btn. 1-16

Line Button 1-128

Lock Button

Meet-Me Page Btn.

Message Waiting Btn.

Music Source (1, 2)

Night Mode Button

Open Architecture Btn.

Overflow Button

Paging Zone Btn. 1-8

Park Orbit Button 1-9

Privacy Button

BUTTON

QUEUE

. . .

RLSE

RSP##

. . .

. . .

S-OBS

SAVE

SDIAL

SILNT

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

SOHVA

. . .

SPLIT

SRIAL

SYSST

TAFS#

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

TBUSY

. . .

TRACK

. . .

VABLK

. . .

VOLSV

. . .

XVM##

. . .

DESCRIPTION

Queue Button

Release Button

Service Observe Button

Dynamic Save Button

Speed Dial

Silent Ringer Button

SOHVA Button

Split Button

Serial Call Button

System Status Report Btn.

Line Test Busy Button

*

Tracker Pager Activate Button

Voice Announce Block Btn.

Save Volume Button

Transfer To Voice Mail Btn. 1-32



3.4

Copy Model COS (Block Programming Record For Class Of Service)

Model Class Of Service Matching Class Of Service



3.5

Copy Mode Station (Block Programming Record For Stations)

Copy this chart as needed for each station board.

Model Station

(Intercom Number or Name)

Matching Stations

IMI66–125



3.6

Copy Button Map (Block Programming Record For Button Mapping)

Copy this chart as needed for each station board.

Model Station

(Intercom Number or Name)

Matching Stations



3.7

Hunt Groups

(Copy This Record Sheet As Needed To Meet System Hunt Group Capacity)

IMI66–125

Hunt Group Options

Hunt Group Number (1–64)

Options

Pilot Extension (4 digits)

Name (7 characters)

Full Name (20 characters)

Search Type

Direct Ring Lines (0–240)

Delayed Ring Lines (0–240)

Day 1 Ring Lines (0–240)

Day 2 Ring Lines (0–240)

Night Ring Lines (0–240)

Queue Ringing Calls

Overflow Destination (Any valid ext.)

DID/DNIS Display

Multiple Call Handling

Call Advance Time

Overflow Time

Recall Time

Default

None

None

None

None

None

None

No

None

No

No

20 sec.

None

Yes

Terminal

Programmable Parameter

Distributed Longest Idle

No

Ring All

1 min.

2 min.

Yes

Yes

10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec

3.0 min 3.5 min 4.0 min 4.5 min 5.0 min

No

No

1 min 1.5 min 2.0 min 2.5 min

10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec 1 min 1.5 min 2.0 min 2.5 min

3.0 min 3.5 min 4.0 min 5.0 min 6.0 min 8.0 min 10 min 12 min 15 min

30 sec 40 sec 50 sec 1 min 1.5 min 2.0 min 2.5 min 3.0 min 3.5 min

4.0 min 5.0 min 6.0 min 8.0 min 10 min 12 min 15 min

Member List

(The entry order during programming determines the searching order during station hunting )



Line Records

4

•

From the main menu, type selection number for line menu and press ENTER.

•

From the line menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125

Lines

1. Line Programming

2. Line Group Programming

3. Copy Model Line

4. DID/DNIS Block Programming

5. DISA Configuration


Line Records 4–1

IMI66–125

4.1

Line Programming


4.1.1

AUX And Loop Start Line Types

(Complete one record sheet for each line. Copy this blank sheet as needed to provide a record for each line in the system.)

Line Port__________________________________

Dialing Code (if applicable)___________________

Name_____________________________________

AUX (Auxiliary)

Loop Start Line

Feature

Disabled


Ringback On Transfer

Privacy Release

SMDR Record

Cost Incoming

Incoming Cost Delay

Incoming Cost Route

Pad Level Transmit

Pad Level Receive

Dialing Mode



Toll Groups

DTMF Level

Busy Lead


Caller ID Active

Voice Mail ID

DISA

DISA Voice Options

CFOS Enable

CFOS Private Station

Yes

Tone

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Delay

6 sec.

1–32

Gain

2

Gain

2

Tone

Gain

1

Gain

1

50 msec.

400 msec.

1 sec.

1.6 sec

0 32

Low

Yes

Yes

Yes

None 8 digits

Yes

1–4

Yes

1001–1480

Source 1

12 sec.

Nom.

Nom.

High

Loss

1

Loss

1

Setting*

18 sec.

No

Source 2

No

No

No

No

24 sec.

Loss

2

Loss

2

Pulse

Normal

No

No

No

No

No

30 sec.

Loss

3

Loss

3

None

36 sec.

Loss

4

Loss

4

500 msec.

350 msec.

800 msec.

2 sec.

3 sec.

4 sec.

5 sec.

On Ans.

Loss

5

Loss

5

Nominal

Nominal

Tone

350 msec.

2 sec.

1

Normal

No

No

No

None

No

1

No

Default

No

Source 1

No

No

Yes

No

No

Delay

32

*Mark block to match desired setting.

NOTE: DISA is not recommended for loop start line configurations.

1 2 3 4

Record The Group Assignment For This Line (0-16)

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

4–2 Line Records

DXP Plus Programming Records IMI66–125

4.1.2

Ground Start Line Type


Line Port__________________________________


Name_____________________________________

Feature

Disabled



Privacy Release

SMDR Record

Cost Incoming

Incoming Cost Delay

Incoming Cost Route

Pad Level Transmit

Pad Level Receive

Incoming Alert Signal

Dialing Mode

Toll Groups

DTMF Level

Busy Lead

Caller ID Active

Voice Mail

DISA

DISA Voice Options

CFOS Enable

CFOS Private Station

Yes

Tone

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Delay

6 sec.

1 32

Gain

2

Gain

2

Gain

1

Gain

1

Ring Required

Tone

0 32

Low

Yes

Yes

None 8 digits

Yes

1 4

Yes

1001–1480

Source 1

12 sec.

Nom.

Nom.

High

Loss

1

Loss

1

Setting*

18 sec.

No

Source 2

No

No

No

No

24 sec.

Loss

2

Loss

2

Normal

No

No

No

30 sec.

3

Loss

3

Ring Optional

Pulse

Loss

None

36 sec.

Loss

4

Loss

4

On Ans.

Loss

5

Loss

5

Default

No

Source 1

No

No

Yes

No

No

Delay

32

Nominal

Nominal

Ring Req.

Tone

1

Normal

No

No

No

1

No


1 2 3 4


5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16



4.1.3

E & M Tie Line Type


Line Port__________________________________


Name_____________________________________

Feature

Disabled



Privacy Release

SMDR Record

Cost Incoming

Incoming Cost Delay

Incoming Cost Route

Pad Level Transmit

Pad Level Receive

Connect Mode

Control Signalling

Line Access Hot Line

Extension

ANI Delivery

Call Announce Active

Dialing Mode

Toll Groups

DTMF Level

DISA

DISA Voice Options

CFOS Enable

CFOs Private Station

Yes

Tone

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Source 1

Setting*

No

Source 2

No

No

No

No

None

No

Delay

6 sec.

1 32

Gain

2

Gain

2

Gain

1

Gain

1

Direct (Metalic)

Delay Start

12 sec.

Nom.

Nom.

18 sec.

Loss

1

Loss

1

24 sec.

Loss

2

Loss

2

30 sec.

Loss

3

Loss

3

36 sec.

Loss

4

Loss

4

On Ans.

Carrier (Central Office)

Immediate Start Wink Start

Loss

5

Loss

5

Default

No

Source 1

No

No

Yes

No

No

Delay

32

Nominal

Nominal

Direct

Wink

Hot Line Ext. # Dialing Dialing

Yes

Yes

Tone

0 32

Low

Yes

1 4

Yes

1001–1480

High

No

No

Pulse

Normal

No

No

No

No

Tone

1

Normal

No

1

No


1 2 3 4


5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16



4.1.4

DID Line Types


Line Port__________________________________DID/DNIS Block____________________


Name_____________________________________

Feature

Disabled



Privacy Release

SMDR Record

Cost Incoming

Incoming Cost Delay

Incoming Cost Route

Pad Level Transmit

Pad Level Receive

DID/DINS Block

Yes

Tone

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Delay

1 32

Gain

2

Gain

2

1–4


Source 1

Setting*

No

Source 2

No

No

No

No

None

6 sec.

12 sec.

18 sec.

24 sec.

30 sec.

36 sec.

On Ans.

Default

No

Source 1

No

No

Yes

No

No

Delay

32

Gain

1

Gain

1

Nom.

Nom.

Loss

1

Loss

1

Loss

2

Loss

2

Loss

3

Loss

3

Loss

4

Loss

4

Loss

5

Loss

5

Nominal

Nominal

1

1 2 3 4


5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16



4.1.5

E & M DNIS Line Types

(Complete one record sheet for each line. Copy this blank sheet as needed to provide a record for each line in the system.)

Line Port__________________________________DID/DNIS Block__________________________


Name_____________________________________

Feature

Disabled



Privacy Release

SMDR Record

Cost Incoming

Incoming Cost Delay

Incoming Cost Route

Pad Level Transmit

Pad Level Receive

DID/DINS Block

Call Announce Active

Toll Groups

Yes

Tone

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Delay

1 32

Gain

2

Gain

2

1–4

Yes

1–32


Source 1

Setting*

No

Source 2

No

No

No

No

None

6 sec.

12 sec.

18 sec.

24 sec.

30 sec.

36 sec.

On Ans.

Default

No

Source 1

No

No

Yes

No

No

Delay

32

Gain

1

Gain

1

Nom.

Nom.

Loss

1

Loss

1

Loss

2

Loss

2

Loss

3

Loss

3

Loss

4

Loss

4

Loss

5

Loss

5

Nominal

Nominal

No

1

No

1

1 2 3 4


5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16



4.2

Line Group Programming

IMI66–125

1

Group Group Name

11

12

13

8

9

10

14

15

16

5

6

7

2

3

4

Lines Assigned ARS Access

Default: Group 1 = lines 9–16, Group 2 = lines 17–21, Group 3 = lines 25–32, Groups 4–16 = no lines assigned

4.3

Block Programming Record For Lines

Model Line Matching Lines


IMI66–125

4.4

System Line Record

Number Name

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

49

50

51

52

44

45

46

47

48

60

61

62

63

64

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

Bd. Type* Port

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

6

7

10

11

12

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

18

19

20

21

13

14

15

16

17


Grp.

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

Bd. Type* Port

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

85

86

87

88

80

81

82

83

84

Number Name Grp.


*Enter either DXPCO-LP4 or DXPCO-LP8 for board type


System Line Record—continued

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

187

188

189

190

191

192

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

Bd. Type* Port

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

Number Name Grp.

IMI66–125


IMI66–125

4.5

DID/DNIS Block Programming

4.5.1

DID/DNIS Options

Feature

Option Block Number (1–8)

Block Name (7 char. max.)

Control Signalling

Expected CO Digits

Dialing Mode

ANI Delivery

DISA Voice Options

Alternate Routing—Extension

Alternate Routing—Ring Code

CFOS Enable

Information Digits

Yes

Yes

* Mark each block to match your desired setting.

Wink Start

0–7

Tone

Yes

1–4

0, nnnn

1–8

Feature



Control Signalling

Expected CO Digits

Dialing Mode

ANI Delivery

DISA Voice Options



CFOS Enable

1–8

Yes

Information Digits Yes


Wink Start

0–7

Tone

Yes

1–4

0, nnnn

Feature



Control Signalling

Expected CO Digits

Dialing Mode

ANI Delivery

DISA Voice Options



CFOS Enable

Information Digits

Yes

Yes


Wink Start

0–7

Tone

Yes

1–4

0, nnnn

1–8

Feature



Control Signalling

Expected CO Digits

Dialing Mode

ANI Delivery

DISA Voice Options



CFOS Enable

Information Digits

No

Yes


Wink Start

0–7

Tone

Yes

1–4

0, nnnn

1–8

Immediate Start

Immediate Start

Immediate Start

Immediate Start

Choice

Pulse

No

No

No

Choice

Pulse

No

No

No

Choice

Pulse

No

No

No

Choice

Pulse

No

Yes

No


Delay Start

Delay Start

Delay Start

Delay Start

No

1

—

1

No

No

—

—

Wink

7

Tone

Default

—

—

Wink

7

Tone

No

1

—

1

No

No

Default

—

—

1

—

1

Wink

7

Tone

No

No

No

Default

—

—

Wink

Default

7

Tone

No

1

—

1

No



4.5.2

DID/DINS Translation Table

(Complete one record sheet for each DID block. Copy this blank sheet as needed to provide a record for every CO digit sequence.)

DID Block_______________

CO Digits Name Day Itcm. Number Night Itcm. Number Ring Code*

*Default: ring code = 1 for all intercom numbers


IMI66–125

4.6

DISA Configuration Programming

Use the table below for recording DISA configuration parameters.


Feature

Day Routing Extension

Night Routing Extension

Voice Mail Routing ID

Lockout Time: 2, 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes.

RNA Timeout: 0 through 9 rings (see note below table).

Maximum Reminder Timeout: 2, 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes.

Route/Drop Invalid Access

Setting Default

10 minutes

3 rings

10 minutes

Drop

NOTE: The RNA timeout (number of rings with no answer) you select here must be less than the RNA rings that

you select on the station programming record (Section 3.2).



Intercom Numbers

5

•

From the main menu, type selection number for intercom numbers and press ENTER.

•

From the intercom numbers menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125

Intercoms

1. Modify Intercoms

2. Add Intercoms

3. Remove Intercoms

4. Station Intercom Renumber


Intercom Records 5–1

IMI66–125

5.1

Intercom Record

Bd. Type Port

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

47

48

49

50

51

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

9

3

4

5

1

2

18

19

20

21

22

23

14

15

16

17

Number

Df’lt As’gnd

1001

1002

1003

1004

1005

1006

1007

1008

1009

1010

1011

1012

1013

1014

1015

1016

1017

1018

1019

1020

1021

1022

1023

1024

1025

1026

1027

1028

1029

1030

1031

1032

1033

1034

1035

1036

1037

1038

1039

1040

1041

1042

1043

1044

1045

1046

1047

1048

1049

1050

1051

Name

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

1052

1053

1054

1055

1056

1057

1058

1059

60

61

1060

1061

62 1062

*Enter: DXDST-8, DXDST-16, DXAST-8, DXAST-16

DXIST-8, or DXIST-16

COS


Bd. Type Port

87

88

89

90

83

84

85

86

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

1070

1071

1072

1073

1074

1075

1076

1077

1078

1079

1080

1081

1082

1083

1084

1085

1086

1087

1088

1089

1090

Number


1063

1064

1065

1066

1067

1068

1069

Name

95

96

97

98

91

92

93

94

99 1099

100 1100

101 1101

102 1102

103 1103

1091

1092

1093

1094

1095

1096

1097

1098

104 1104

105 1105

106 1106

107 1107

108 1108

109 1109

110 1110

111 1111

112 1112

113 1113

114 1114

115 1115

116 1116

117 1117

118 1118

119 1119

120 1120

121 1121

122 1122

123 1123

124 1124



COS

5–2 Intercom Records


Bd. Type Port

Number


125 1125

126 1126

127 1127

128 1128

129 1129

130 1130

131 1131

132 1132

133 1133

134 1134

135 1135

136 1136

137 1137

138 1138

139 1139

140 1140

141 1141

142 1142

143 1143

144 1144

145 1145

146 1146

147 1147

148 1148

Name

149 1149

150 1150

151 1151

152 1152

153 1153

154 1154

155 1155

156 1156

157 1157

158 1158

159 1159

160 1160

161 1161

162 1162

163 1163

164 1164

165 1165

166 1166

167 1167

168 1168

169 1169

170 1170

171 1171

172 1172

173 1173

174 1174

175 1175

176 1176

177 1177

178 1178

179 1179

180 1180

181 1181

182 1182

183 1183

184 1184

185 1185

186 1186



COS Bd. Type Port

Number


187 1187

188 1188

189 1189

190 1190

191 1191

192 1192

193 1193

194 1194

195 1195

196 1196

197 1197

198 1198

199 1199

200 1200

201 1201

202 1202

203 1203

204 1204

205 1205

206 1206

Name

228 1228

229 1229

230 1230

231 1231

232 1232

233 1233

234 1234

235 1235

236 1236

237 1237

238 1238

239 1239

240 1240

241 1241

242 1242

243 1243

207 1207

208 1208

209 1209

210 1210

211 1211

212 1212

213 1213

214 1214

215 1215

216 1216

217 1217

218 1218

219 1219

220 1220

221 1221

222 1222

223 1223

224 1224

225 1225

226 1226

227 1227

244 1244

245 1245

246 1246

247 1247

248 1248



COS



Bd. Type Port

Number


249 1249

250 1250

251 1251

252 1252

253 1253

254 1254

255 1255

256 1256

257 1257

258 1258

259 1259

260 1260

261 1261

262 1262

263 1263

264 1264

265 1265

266 1266

267 1267

268 1268

269 1269

270 1270

271 1271

272 1772

Name

273 1273

274 1274

275 1275

276 1276

277 1277

278 1278

279 1279

280 1280

281 1281

282 1282

283 1283

284 1284

285 1285

286 1286

287 1287

288 1288

289 1289

290 1290

291 1291

292 1292

293 1293

294 1294

295 1295

296 1296

297 1297

298 1298

299 1299

300 1300

301 1301

302 1302

303 1303

304 1304

305 1305

306 1306

307 1307

308 1308

309 1309

310 1310




Number


311 1311

212 1312

313 1313

314 1314

315 1315

316 1316

317 1317

318 1318

319 1319

320 1320

321 1321

322 1322

323 1323

324 1324

325 1325

326 1326

327 1327

328 1328

329 1329

330 1330

Name

352 1352

353 1353

354 1354

355 1355

356 1356

357 1357

358 1358

359 1359

360 1360

361 1361

362 1362

363 1363

364 1364

365 1365

366 1366

367 1367

331 1331

332 1332

333 1333

334 1334

335 1335

336 1336

337 1337

338 1338

339 1339

340 1340

341 1341

342 1342

343 1343

344 1344

345 1345

346 1346

347 1347

348 1348

349 1349

350 1350

351 1351

368 1368

369 1369

370 1370

371 1371

372 1372



COS

5–4 Intercom Records


Bd. Type Port

Number


373 1373

374 1374

375 1375

376 1376

377 1377

378 1378

379 1379

380 1380

381 1381

382 1382

383 1383

384 1384

385 1385

386 1386

387 1387

388 1388

389 1389

390 1390

391 1391

392 1392

393 1393

394 1394

395 1395

396 1396

Name

397 1397

398 1398

399 1399

400 1400

401 1401

402 1402

403 1403

404 1404

405 1405

406 1406

407 1407

408 1408

409 1409

410 1410

411 1411

412 1412

413 1413

414 1414

415 1415

416 1416

417 1417

418 1418

419 1419

420 1420

421 1421

422 1422

423 1423

424 1424

425 1425

426 1426

427 1427

428 1428

429 1429

430 1430

431 1431

432 1432

433 1433

434 1434




Number


435 1435

436 1436

437 1437

438 1438

439 1439

440 1440

441 1441

442 1442

443 1443

444 1444

445 1445

446 1446

447 1447

448 1448

449 1449

450 1450

451 1451

452 1452

453 1453

454 1454

455 1455

456 1456

457 1457

458 1458

459 1459

460 1460

461 1461

462 1462

463 1463

464 1464

465 1465

466 1466

467 1467

468 1468

469 1469

470 1470

471 1471

472 1472

473 1473

474 1474

475 1475

476 1476

477 1477

478 1478

479 1479

480 1480

Name



COS



SMDA/SMDR Records

6

•

From the main menu, type selection number for SMDA/SMDR menu and press ENTER.

•

From the SMDA/SMDR menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125

SMDA/SMDR Programming

1. SMDA/SMDR Parameters

2. Automatic Reports

3. Account Codes

4. Emergency Numbers

5. Authorization Codes


SMDA/SMDR Records 6–1

IMI66–125

6.1

SMDA / SMDR Parameter Records

Mark blocks for desired programming choices or write information where appropriate.


Features

Dial Time Limit

Answer Time Limit

Print Parameter

Record Format

SMDA/SMDR Printer Port

Report Option

SMDA Attendant Delete

Call Time On Answer

0 sec

Default

0 sec

Costing

Standard

3

Call Cost

Off

Off

0 sec 6 sec

42 sec 1 min

0 sec 6 sec

42 sec 1 min

Costing

Standard select 3–18

Call Cost

Off

Off

Choices

12 sec 18 sec 24 sec 30 sec 36 sec

1.5 min 2 min

12 sec 18sec

2.5 min

24 sec

3 min

30 sec

3.5 min

36 sec

1.5 min 2 min

No Costing

2.5 min

No Print

3 min

SMDA Format

3.5 min

Hold Time Meter Pulses

On

On

6.2 Automatic Reports

Make blocks for desired programming choices or write information where appropriate.

Report Print Day

Report Print Time

24 Hour Format—hh.mm

Station Report

Account Report

Line Report

Department Report

None

00:00

No Report

No Report

No Report

No Report

Print All Report

Delete After Print

Yes

Yes

Default = values shown in bold italic type.

Daily

Detail

Detail

Detail

Detail

Sunday through Saturday

Summary

Summary

Summary

Summary

No

No

6.3

Account Code Parameter Records

Make blocks for desired programming choices or write information where appropriate.

Detail/Summary

Detail/Summary

Detail/Summary

Detail/Summary

Features

System Verification

Display Prompt

Display Time Length

Account Code Length


Default

No Account

Code

No Account

Code

Verify

No Display No Display Incoming

2 sec

2 sec 4 sec

12 sec 14 sec

3 select 3–16

No No Yes

Choices

No Verify

Outgoing

6 sec

16 sec

In/Out

8 sec

18 sec

10 sec

6–2 SMDA/SMDR Records


6.4

Account Codes

Account Code Length* (3—16 digits) ______________

Account Code Record* (up 1000 entries allowed—copy this chart as needed)

Active Number Active Number Active Number Active Number Active Number

IMI66–125

* Default = no account codes assigned

SMDA/SMDR Records 6–3

IMI66–125

6.5

Emergency Numbers

911

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Enter 1—16 digits. Default = bold italic entry.

6.6

Authorization Codes

Itcm No.

Code Itcm. No.

Code


Itcm. No.

Code Itcm. No.

Code

6–4 SMDA/SMDR Records


TOLL/ARS Records

7

•

From the main menu, type selection number for TOLL/ARS and press ENTER.

•

From the TOLL/ARS menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125

1. Restriction Tables

2. Route Tables

3. Modify Digit Table


Toll / ARS

Toll/ARS Records 7–1

IMI66–125

7.1

Restriction Tables


The system allows a total of 400 entries. Copy this sheet as needed to provide additional record space.

Dialed Number Restriction

Level

Exception

Number

Route/Costing

Table*

0 2 1 1

1@ 2 2 1

@ 2 3 1

Toll

Group

1

1

1

*The Route/Costing Table records are not needed unless you program call costing or ARS for the system.

Default = bold italic entries

7–2 Toll/ARS Records


7.2

Station Restriction Level

5

4

7

6

Restriction Level Class Of level Service

Allow All

8

3

2

1

Deny All

Toll

Category

Stations

Assigned

IMI66–125


IMI66–125

7.3

Toll Groups

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

31

32

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

Toll

Groups

Lines Assigned To Each Toll Group




7.4

Route Tables

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)

MODIFY DIGIT TABLE (1-16)

SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)

TIER 1 COST ($nn.nn)

TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

IMI66–125

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 1

ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3

16

1

1

0.00

0.00

0 sec

0.00

ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 x

ROUTE 6

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 2

ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6 SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 3


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 4


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE


IMI66–125

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE



ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 5

ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 ROUTE 4 ROUTE 5 ROUTE 6

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 6


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 7


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 8



ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 9


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 10


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 11


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 12


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE


IMI66–125

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE



ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 13


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 14


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 15


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 16



ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 17


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 18


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 19


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 20


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE


IMI66–125

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE



ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 21


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 22


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 23


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 24



ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 25


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 26


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 27


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 28


LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE


IMI66–125

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE

SPECIFICATION

LINE GROUP (1-16)

ACCESS LEVEL (1-4)


SURCHARGE ($nn.nn)


TIER 1 TIME (sec)


ACTIVE WITH TONE

ACTIVE WITHOUT TONE

NOT ACTIVE



ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 29


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 30


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 31


ROUTE 1

ROUTE TABLE 32



7.5

Modify Digit Tables

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

MODIFY DIGITS TABLE 1








IMI66–125


IMI66–125

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)

NUMBER SEQUENCE OF

ADDED DIGITS (0-20)

QUANTITY OF DELETED

DIGITS (0-10)












Printout Records

8

•

From main menu, type selection number for printouts menu and press ENTER.

•

From printouts menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125

Printouts

1. System

2. Station

3. Lines

4. Intercom Number

5. SMDA/SMDR

6. Toll/ARS

7. Peripherals

8. Complete System Data

9. Abort Printouts


Printout Records 8–1

IMI66–125

8.1

Printout Records

Record desired printouts.

System

Station

Lines

Intercom Numbers

Ext/Name

Group Intercom

SMDA/SMDR

Toll/ARS

Peripherals

Complete System Data


8–2 Printout Records


Peripherals

9

•

From main menu, type selection number for desired peripheral menu and press ENTER.

•

From selected peripheral menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125

1. Caller ID

2. Tracker

3. Voice/DVA

4. PC Attendant

5. Voice Mail

6. Modem Setup


Peripherals

Peripherals Records 9–1

IMI66–125

9.1

Caller ID Records

9.1.1 Caller ID Options

Delete Viewed Records

Abort Ring Time 0

Yes

1

Mark blocks to indicate programming choices.

Default = bold italic entries.

2

9.1.2 Caller ID Local Call Table

Row Number


3 4

No

5 6 7 8

9–2 Peripherals Records


9.2

Tracker Records

9.2.1 Tracker Options

Tracker Base

Station


(1—18)

None

1

Remote Installation

PC Attendant

2 3

1

2

3

4

Defaults: Serial Port =1, Remote Installation = None, Status = Disabled

IMI66–125

4

Status

Enabled Disabled



9.2.2 Tracker Pager Assignment (Copy This Chart As Needed For Additional Record Space)

Station

Intercom Name

Pager

Number

Enable

Yes No

Tracker Pager Model Tracker Base Station

P1000 P2000 P3000 P4000 1 2 3 4

Default = None Assigned



9.3

Voice/DVA Records

9.3.1 Voice Digit Translation (Copy This Chart As Needed For Additional Voice Messages)

IMI66–125

DVA Voice Option Number_______________

Message Type

Extension

Number

1

2

9

0

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

0

7

8

5

6

3

4

7

8

9

0

3

4

5

6

1

2

9

0

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Prompt Digit

Default = None Assigned


F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

IMI66–125

9.4

PC Attendant

9.4.1 Position Record


Feature

Station Pair

Line Pair

Line Group

Serial Port

1

1

1

1,2

Attendant Position 1

Default Record

1

2

2

3,4

PC Attendant Position


Default Record


Default Record

3

5,6

1

3

9.4.2 Function Key Record (Button Map)

1

4

4

7,8


Default Record

Function Key

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

Default = none assigned

Assigned Feature (Button

Mnemonic)

Esc

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Help Mute Headset Overflow I.D.

Split

Both

Serial Conf

F9 F10 F11 F12

Page Pick Park

Retrieve

Message

Print

Screen

SysReq

Scroll

Lock

Pause

Break

Num

Lock

Caps

Lock

Scroll

Lock

Silent

!

1

Tab

Next

Screen

Q

@

2

W

#

3

Caps Lock

A S

E

D

$

4

R

%

5

F

T

^

6

G

Y

&

7

H

U

*

8

J

I

Ctrl

Shift

Z

Alt

X C V B N M

(

9

K

O

)

0

L

-

_

P

:

:

Alt

/

?

Line

'

"

+

=

TAP

Backspace

Intercomm

Enter

Shift

2nd

Function

Ctrl

Insert Home

Page

Up

Delete End

Page

Down

Num

Lock

0

QZ

1

GHI

4

PRS

7

#

ABC

2

JKL

5

TUV

8

*

DEF

3

MNO

6

WXY

9

Transfer

Hold s a e e l

R e

A n s w r e

Volume Volume key_brd3.cdr

ACCT

ALTRN account code button alternate attendant button

ANSWER answer button

APAGE auxiliary page button

ARD

ARECD

ARING

AUTH automatic redial button auxiliary record button auxiliary ring button authorization code button

BOTH

CAMP

CID

DND

DPKUP

DSTAT

EXOVR

FEATR

FWD-A

FWD-P

FWDRA both button camp on button caller ID button do not disturb button directed call pick up button

DSS status button executive override button feature button forward all button forward personal button forward all RNA button


FWDRP

GPLSN

GPKUP

HDST

HOLD

ITCM

I#### forward personal RNA button group listen button) group pick up button headset button hold button intercom button intercom number button

LCDMS

LNG##

LN###

LOCK

LCD messaging button line group button 1–16 line button 1–128 lock button

MMEPG meet me page button

MSGWT message waitng button

MUSC#

NIGHT music source button 1, 2 night mode button

OAI## open architecture button

OVERFL overflow button

PAGE#

PARK# paging zone button 1–8 park orbit button 1–9

PRVCY

QUEUE

RLSE

RSP##

S-OBS

SAVE

SDIAL

SILNT

SOHVA

SPLIT

SRIAL

SYSST

TAFS#

TBUSY

TRACK

VABLK

VOLSV

XVM## privacy button queue button release button response button 1–30 service observe button dynamic save button) speed dial button silent ringer button

SOHVA button split button serial call button system status report button

night answer button 1–4, ✳= all calls line test busy button tracker pager activate button voice announce block button save volume button transfer to voice mail button 1–32


9.5

Voice Mail Records

9.5.1 Link Table

ExecuMail Port

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

13

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

14

15

16

17

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Default = No intercom numbers assigned or linked

9.5.2 Integration Digits

Feature

Follow Extension ID

Intercom/Answer Confirmation

Busy

Do Not Disturb

Incoming Intercom Answer

Disconnect

Intercom Number

Record

3

9

A

2

1

2

IMI66–125

Linked Intercom Number

Default


IMI66–125

9.6

Modem Setup

Feature

Data Port (1–18)

Initialize String (Alphanumeric String)

Default

2

AT S0=1 M0 Q1 E0


Record




10

•

From main menu, type selection number for desired peripheral menu and press ENTER.

•

From board configuration menu, type selection number for feature and press ENTER.

IMI66–125


1. Status

2. Add

3. Delete

4. Move



IMI66–125

10.1 Board Record

18

19

20

15

16

17

Slot Location

10 (AUX1)

11 (AUX2)

12

13

14

8

9

6

7

2

3

4

5

Slot Location

1 (AUX)

28

29

30

25

26

27

Slot Location

21 (AUX1)

22 (AUX2)

23

24

Upper Cabinet

Board Description


Main Cabinet


Lower Cabinet


10–2 Board Configuration

DXP Plus Programming Instructions

Index

A

Account Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 6-2, 6-3

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Display Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Allow Busy Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Allow Multiple CFOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Allow Ringer Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Answer Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

ARS Day/Night Exception Number . . . . . . 3-3

Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Authorization Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Automatic Attendant Transfer on Busy . . . . 3-3

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Automatic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

AUX And Loop Start Line Types . . . . . . . 4-2

B

Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Block Programming

Button Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-28

Class Of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-26

Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-27

Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-1

Board Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-2

Busy On SOHVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Button Mapping and Telephone Types . . . . 3-4

C

Call Announce Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Call Cost Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Call Forward All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Call Forward Busy/RNA . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Call Forward Outside System (CFOS) . . . . . 3-2

Call Forward Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Call Park Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Call Pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Caller ID Ring No-Answer . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Camp-On

Originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12

Class Of Service

Station Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

Clear Major Alarm Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Conference Advisory Tone . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Console Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Consoles Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Copy Button Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-28

Copy Mode Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-27

Copy Model COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-26

COS Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

IMI66–125

D

Day 1, Day 2 Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Day Restriction Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Day Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Default Forward Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Delayed Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

DID Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

DID/DINS

Block Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Translation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

DigiTech 24-Line LCD

Speakerphone Mapping Record . . . . . . 3-14

DigiTech 24-Line Telephone

Button Mapping Record . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Direct Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Directed Station Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

DISA Configuration Programming . . . . . . 4-12

Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Do Not Disturb

Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

E

E & M DNIS Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

E & M Tie Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Emergency Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Enabling T1 Status Reporting and Major Alarm Alerting . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Enhanced LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

ExecuTech 10x14 Telephone

Button Mapping Record . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

ExecuTech 12-Line LCD Speakerphone


ExecuTech 14-Line Telephone




ExecuTech 5x20 Telephone




ExecuTech 70-Button Console


ExecuTech LCD Speakerphone


Executive Override

Advisory Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Express 10-Button Telephone


Express 19-Button Telephone


Express 2-Line Telephone

Button Mapping Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Index –1

IMI66–125

Express 32-Button DSS/BLF Console

Button Mapping Record . . . . . . . . . .

3-21

Express 64 Button DSS/BLF Console


3-22

Extended DTMF Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

External Paging Port . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12

F

Feature Renumbering . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-13

Forced Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

G

Ground Start Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Group Intercom Access . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

H

Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

High Handset Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Hunt Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-29

I

Idle Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Idle Line Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Impact 12-Line LCD Speakerphone


3-18

Impact 12-Line Speakerphone


3-19

Impact 12-Line Telephone


3-20

Impact 24-Line LCD Speakerphone


3-16

Impact 24-Line Speakerphone


3-17

Impact 64-Button Console


3-24

Initiate Service Observe . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Intercom Hunt List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Intercom Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Intercom Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Internal IST Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

IST Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

IST Hold Cofiguraion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

L

LCD Contrast

LCD Messages

LCD Messaging

3-3

2-2

3-2


Line

Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Group Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Group Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Group Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 4-8

Line Out Softkey Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Line To Line Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

M

Major Alarm Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Maximum Call Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Meet Me Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Message Deposit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Message Wait Originate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Modem Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Modify Digit Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Music/Tone On Intercom Hold . . . . . . . . . 3-2

N

Night Restriction Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Night Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Night Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

P

Paging

Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Periodic Line Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1, 10-1

Personal Intercom Number . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Personal Ringing Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Pick-Up Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Prime Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Printout Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-2

Programming Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Q

Quick Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

R

Recall Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Remote Day/Night Exception Numbers . . . . 3-2

Remote Station Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Restrict ARS Hookflash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Restriction Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Ring Back On Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Ring No-Answer Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Ring On Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Ringing Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Route Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

2– Index


S

Scout 900MX Digital Wireless

Button Telephone Mapping Record . . . .

3-25

Secure Account Code Display . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Serial Data Port Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Service Observable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Single Line TAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

SMDA Attendant Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

SMDA/SMDR

Parameter Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

SMDR

Print Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Record Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Softkey Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

SOHVA

Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3

Speed Dial

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5–2-9

Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Station

Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Restriction Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

IMI66–125

Subdued Off-Hook Voice

Announce Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3

System Line Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

System

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Speed Dial Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

T

T1 Status Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Through Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Toll Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

TOLL/ARS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Tone First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Tracker Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Transfer Ring Cadence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

V

VDT Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Voice Announce Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Z

Zone Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Index –3

R

TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN

Date: January 1997 Issue: TAB003–PLS

Software Enhancements For The

DXP Plus Digital Communications System

This bulletin discusses software enhancements and feature additions to the DXP Plus digital communications system that are available with software release 11A and later.

The software enhancements and additions are as follows:

•

SMDA Report on Answer,

•

SMDA Metering Pulse Totals,

•

ANI / DNIS Enhancements,

•

End to End Signaling,

•

ARS Access per Trunk Group,

•

A-Law DXP Tones,

•

Inhibit Message Wait Stutter Dialtone,

•

Impression Telephone Support.

NOTE: It is always a good practice to save the data base for backup purposes before you up-grade the system software revision.

The pages of this TAB003–PLS present the 11A revision information as separate sheets that, if you wish, you can insert in your system manuals.

Printed in U.S.A.

This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation (the “Company”) and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. While every effort has been made to eliminate errors, the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising for the interpretation of the information contained herein.

The information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be desired, or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes contact, Comdial, Inside Sales Department, P.O. Box


2

Telephone Features

2.1 Using The Comdial Telephones

The DXP Plus system supports many of Comdial’s proprietary telephones as well as industry-standard telephones. The following list details the various telephone models.

• DigiTech Telephones

» 7700S —LCD Speakerphone

» 7714X —Multiline Telephone

» 7714S —Multiline Speakerphone


» DD32X —32-Button DSS/BLF Console

• Impact Telephones

» 8024S —24 Line LCD Speakerphone

» 8124S —24 Line Speakerphone

» 8012S —12 Line LCD Speakerphone

» 8112S —12 Line Speakerphone

» 8112N —Multiline Proprietary Telephone

» 8101N —Single Line Proprietary Telephone

» IB64X —64-Button DSS/BLF Console

• ExecuTech Telephones

» 6620E —23-Line Monitor Telephone

» 6620T —23-Line Speakerphone

» 6614E —22-Line Monitor Telephone

» 6600E —17-Line LCD Speakerphone

» 6700S —12-Line LCD Speakerphone


» 6706X —6-Line Monitor Telephone

Impression Telephones

2022S —22-Line LCD Speakerphone

2122S —22-Line Speakerphone

2122X —22-Line Monitor Telephone

2101N —Single Line Proprietary Telephone

DU32X —32-Button DSS / BLF Console

6714S —14-Line Speakerphone

6714X —14-Line Monitor Speakerphone

6614T —22-Line Speakerphone

DB70 —70-Button DSS / BLF Console

DB32S —32-Button DSS / BLF Console

EB32X —32-Button DSS / BLF Console

TAB003-PLS, page 3



2.2 Understanding The Telephone Features

The DXP Plus supports the following telephone features on both analog and digital proprietary telephones. Some of these features are system-wide and others are specific to individual stations.

Alphanumeric Display

— Displays time, day, and date

—

—

Keeps you apprised of the status of your telephone

Provides programming prompts

Auxiliary Jack (used only with Impact and DigiTech LCD speakerphone)

— Allows you to use your telephone privately and handsfree by allowing you to plug in and use a headset

— Allows you to plug in a tape recorder

—

—

Allows you to plug in an external ringer

Allows addition of a paging speaker

Button Query

— Allows you to see the function of a programmed button on your LCD screen

Hold Button

— Places a line on hold

—

—

Stores pauses in number sequences while programming

Allows you to scroll through multiple held calls on display

Interactive Buttons

— Provide quick and easy access to system and call processing features

— Provide straightforward button programming without dialing codes

(the interactive buttons themselves, however, are not programmable)

Intercom Button

— Selects an intercom line

— Initiates many of the features of the telephone

Message Waiting Light

— Tells you there is a message waiting for you

Mute Button

— Keeps the person on the line from hearing your conversation

Programmable Buttons

— Allow you to program your telephone for automatic dialing functions

— Allow you to program your telephone for Direct Station Selection (DSS)

—

—

Show which lines and intercoms are either in use or on hold

Allow you to store frequently used feature codes at unused buttons

TAB003-PLS, page 4



2.6 Using Impression Telephones

DXP Plus software 11A supports Comdial Impression telephones.

GCA40–130

I

1

4

A C

2

L

D

M O

X

O

OLD A

C M

I CM

2022S (22-Line LCD Speakerphone) unisyn05.cdr

I

1

4

A C

2

L

D

M O

X

O

OLD A

C M

I CM

2122S (22-Line Speakerphone)

2122X (22-Line Monitor Telephone) unisyn01.cdr

R unisyn09.cdr

2101N (Single Line Proprietary Telephone) DU32X (32-Button DSS/BLF Console) unisyn11.cdr

TAB003-PLS, page 5

Telephone Features – 11A

GCA40–130

9.08"


4.78"

3.94"

8.90"

UNIS029

1.13"

TAB003-PLS, page 6

11B – Telephone Features


Speaker

Mute Button

T/C Button

SPKR Button

Message

Waiting Light

Hold Button

TAP Button

ITCM Button

LCD Display

Interactive Buttons

I

1

4

A C

2

L

D

M O

X

O

OLD A

C M

I CM

Feature Buttons,

Line Buttons, and

DSS Buttons

Volume Control

cajs110

Microphone Opening

TAB003-PLS, page 7

Telephone Features – 11C


6

Understanding The Features

6.1 DXP Plus Features List

This list details all of the features available on the DXP Plus. Use it as a pre-installation check list.


Adjunct Feature Module

Access Denied

Account Code Button


Verification

A-Law DXP Tones**

All Call Paging

Allow Ringer Off (Ringer Volume Off)

Alpha-Numeric Calling Party and Line

Display

Alternate Attendant

ANI / DNIS Enhancement**

Answer Button


ARS Access per Trunk Group**

ARS Delayed Dialtone**

Attendant Position


Authorization Code

Automatic Dialing

Automatic Hold - Intercom To

Intercom/Line

Automatic Hold - Line To Intercom

Automatic Hold - Line To Line


Automatic Privacy


Automatic Redial

Automatic Reports





Background Music*

Battery Backup (Chassis, Cable, and

Batteries)


Block Programming

Busy Button Inquiry

Busy On SOHVA

Button Query

Call Announce Beeps

Call Announce With Handsfree

Answer-back

Call Costing and SMDA Reports

Call Forward - All Or Personal

Call Forward- Immediate

Call Forward - Busy Or RNA, All Or

Personal


Call Park

Call Park Recall

Call Pick-Up - Directed

Call Pick-Up - Group

Call Pick-Up - System

Call Transfer - Screened

Call Transfer - Unscreened

With Automatic Camp On

Call Waiting Tone

Caller ID

Caller ID–RNA


Camp-On - Call Waiting

Camp-On - No Answer



Central Processor Switched Data Port

Configuration

Centrex Compatible




Console Support

Console-Less Operation


Consultation Hold

Copy Model

Data Base Program Storage Via PC

Interface

Data Base Programming From Main

Station (Limited)

Data Base Programming With Personal

Computer And Visual Man Machine

Interface (VMMI) Software

Day One and Day Two Ringing

Default Busy/RNA Call Forward


Delayed Ringing

Dial 0 for System Attendant

Dial Plus Interdigit Time


Dialed Number Identification Service

(DNIS)




Direct Line Access by Station





Do Not Disturb



DSS Status Button

Dynamic Save Button


E&M tie Line support

End to End DTMF Signaling

End to End Signaling on Intercom

End to End Signaling on Lines


Exclusive Hold

TAB003-PLS, page 9



Existing Comdial Telephone Support



Feature Inhibit

Feature Renumbering


Flexible Ringing Assignment Of The External

Paging Port


Ground Start Lines

Group Intercoms


Handset Volume Control

Headset Capability

Hold

Hold, Exclusive

Hold Queuing

Hold Time Reporting

Hot Transfer

I Hold and I Use Indications


Idle Line Priority


Inhibit Message Wait Stutter Dialtone**

ISDN-PRI Interface


IST Offhook Treated As Busy

IST Message Wait Retrieval Access Code

IST Ring Frequency

IST Ring Patterns



Intercom Hunt List

Intercom Interdigit Dialing Time-out

Intercom Time-out

Intercom Number


Last Number Redial


Line Answer From Any Station


Line Groups

Line Group Access

Line Names


Line Queuing

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Messaging

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Support

Location Code

Lock Button

Manual Exclusion

Mark Problem Line

Master Clear


Meet-Me Answer Page


Message Deposit

Message Waiting


Modem Support

Modify Digits Table



Music Interface*

Music On Hold*

Mute

Names (Stations And Lines)


Night Transfer (Of Ringing)


On-Hook Dialing

Operator Station

Originating Denied

Out Dial Delay Time

Password Protection

Pause Time

PBX/Centrex/Central Office Compatible


Paging Access

Periodic Line Tone



Pooled Line Access


Preselection Prime Line

Printer Interface

Privacy

Privacy Release

Private Lines

Program Printout


Programming Port


Quick Transfer

Remote Programming and Diagnostics


Release Button

Reminder Alert

Restrict ARS Hookflash (Automatic Route

Selection, Hookflash Restriction)

Restricted Dial Error Tone

Response Messaging


Ring Back Tone

Ring No Answer Call Forward

Ring On Busy




Saved Number Redial

Self Diagnostics

Serial Data Port

Service Observing

Shift Button

Silent Mode Button


SMDA Metering Pulse Tones**

SMDA Report On Answer**

SMDA Reports

SOHVA Beeps (SOHVA Tone Bursts)


Split Button


Station Hunting


Station Message Detail Accounting (SMDA)


Station Monitoring with DSS Call Pickup

Station Names

Station Speed Dial



Subdued Ringing


System Clock

System Speed Dial

System Status Reports


Tap (Flash)/Recall

Telephony Services Application Programming

Interface (TSAPI) Support

Through Dialing

Tie Lines

Time And Date


Toll Restriction


Tone or Voice Signaling on Internal Calls






Manual Reset Ring Back On Busy Zone Paging

*The system is equipped with two inputs for separate customer-supplied music sources.

**DXP Plus 11A features.

TAB003-PLS, page 10



A-Law DXP Plus Tones

Software 11A supports the call progress tone plan for the A-Law DXP Plus available for South Africa.

ANI / DNIS Enhancements

Software 11A enhances the DNIS feature by adding an option to support the DTMF ANI / DNIS with two information digits. When programmers enable this feature option, the format of the digit string changes from the ✳ANI✳DNIS✳ format to a format that includes a two-digit code that indicates the presence of

ANI digits (I ANI DNIS where I equals the two-digit string). The ANI digit string indicates the calling party’s telephone number. The DNIS digit string identifies the call destination station.

48A – Understanding The Features

TAB003-PLS, page 11


ARS Access Per Trunk Group

DXP Plus software 11A allows the access code for any line group in the system to provide access to ARS.

By default, the line group 1 access code will provide ARS access when ARS is enabled. You can program this item on a line group parameter.

ARS Delayed Dialtone

DXP Plus software 11A adds a delay option for ARS Dialtone (Dial Tone 4). When the telephone user selects an outside line, there is a 1 second delay before dialtone is presented to the caller. The dialtone frequency is the same as the system intercom dialtone, but the delay gives the impression a “fresh” dialtone for outbound dialing.

TAB003-PLS, page 13

Understanding The Features – 49A


End-to-End Signaling On Intercom

After establishing an intercom call, the system can continue to send and receive dialing signals (DTMF tones) through the intercom path. Use station parameter programming to set the extension to receive

DTMF digits. End-to-End signaling can be enabled on any station port and is useful when connecting voice mail systems or door boxes.

76A – Understanding The Features

TAB003-PLS, page 15


Inhibit Message Wait Stutter Dialtone

Software 11A allows you to enable or disable the stutter intercom dialtone received at a station to indicate a message waiting. You can program this item as a station COS parameter.

TAB003-PLS, page 17



ISDN–PRI Interface

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) provides integrated voice and data over a common telephone company facility. There are two methods of ISDN access currently available: ISDN–BRI (basic) and

ISDN–PRI (primary). ISDN–BRI provides a way for subscribers to get digital service from the telephone company supplier for two telephones or a telephone and a data device over one special pair of wires.

ISDN–PRI provides a way for subscribers to get digital service from the telephone company supplier for

24 lines over two special pairs of wires. This latter method is the concern of this publication.

ISDN–PRI access directly connects a multiple-station, digital communications system to the telephone company’s ISDN network through a single high-speed line. This high-speed line is commonly known as

T1 in North America and consists of 24 digitized channels. ISDN–PRI access consists of a grouping of 23 voice channels (B–channels) and one signaling or control channel (D–channel). B–channels are clear channels suitable for voice or data transmission while the D–channel is a packet-switched link for call set-up and signaling. When you use ISDN–PRI access with T1, one of the T1 channels serves as the signaling channel. This arrangement is sometimes referred to as 23B+D ISDN service.

The DXPRI is a circuit card that you install on a revision B or later DXPT1 line board with special-purpose firmware to provide ISDN–PRI access to the digital communications system. The DXPRI card handles the D–channel signaling protocol and passes messages to the DXPT1 board. A single

DXPRI card can control multiple DXPT1 boards when you tie the boards together through board programming action. This arrangement (known as NFAS or Network Facility Associated Signaling) allows the system to derive 24 B–channels from all boards except the one where installers have added the the DXPRI card. When installers do this, the DXPT1/DXPRI combination that provides the control is designated as DXPT1–PRI; and the boards being controlled are designated as DXPT1–NFAS. The NFAS boards do not require a DXPRI card as they are slaves to the master –PRI board. Throughout the remainder of this publication, the term T1/PRI means a T1 board specifically configured for ISDN–PRI operation be it either a DXPT1–PRI or a DXPT1–NFAS board.

Since central office protocols differ, the DXPRI card supports several protocol arrangements and provides interface support for several signaling types. The programmer and the end user can select the interface support that the system needs for a particular application. The support they choose determines how the telephone company treats the signal.

The DXPRI card provides a calling number identification feature that provides the following services: delivery of network provided calling numbers, calling line identification presentation (CLIP), or automatic number identification (ANI). On originated calls, the system automatically provides the calling number if available; otherwise, it provides the default directory number. For incoming calls, the called station displays the calling number if available; otherwise, the display shows information determined by station class of service programming. The system programmer can customize the caller ID parameters for outgoing calls as site requirements dictate.

Introducing The T1/PRI Line Board

The revision B or later DXPT1 board with special-purpose firmware serves as host for the DXPRI card and gives gives the digital communications system the capability to handle up to 24 channels of voice and/or data transmissions over a single four-wire cable using multiplexing techniques. The DXPT1 board includes a customer service unit (CSU) to eliminate the need for an external CSU.

Defining T1/PRI Operation

T1/PRI is the digital two-way transmission of telecommunications over a single high-speed circuit. Up to

24 separate voice or data transmissions form digital pulses that are transferred at the rate of 1.544 million bits per second (Mbps) over the T1/PRI trunk. At the receiving end, the digital pulses are decoded into 24 separate circuits.

TAB003-PLS, page 19



Pulse characteristics such as repetition rate, pulse width, pulse amplitude, and average ones density ((ratio of one (1) bits to zero (0) bits)) are as specified by digital signal level 1 (DS-1) described in American

National Standards Institute Specification, ANSI T1.403-1989.

Detailing Where You Can Install T1/PRI Boards and Its Supporting Needs

Since the DXP Plus supports a maximum of 240 lines, and each T1/PRI board handles up to 24 channels, you can install up to 10 boards in the DXP Plus system. You can install these 10 boards in any available universal board slot in the main or expansion cabinets. Of course, any other line boards that you install, such as loop start, DID or multipurpose, reduce the number of lines available for T1/PRI service and thus reduces the number of T1/PRI boards you can install.

Whenever you install one or more boards, and the DXP Plus is receiving its timing signals from an external source (the usual case), you must install one synchronization card (DXOPT–SYN) on the services board. This means when you connect the system to central office (CO) lines, you must include a synchronization card, and the DXP Plus clock must be controlled by CO signaling.

CAUTION

For operation with the DXP Plus, the T1/PRI board must be Revision B or higher and have special-purpose firmware installed.

TAB003-PLS, page 20

85B – Understanding The Features


SMDA Metering Pulse Totals

DXP Plus software 11A enhances the SMDA Metering Pulse Totals by adding a third option to the

Report Option field. You can now select the option “Meter Pulses” as an alternative to “Call Cost” or

“Hold Time” on all reports.

Metering Pulse is a method used in countries other than the United States to determine call duration and cost. Therefore, if you are installing the DXP Plus system in a country that uses E1 lines, selecting this option will allow the DXP Plus to cost calls by monitoring the metering pulses originating from the central office.

SMDA Report On Answer

The SMDA Report On Answer feature enhancement for DXP 11A adds the option to create a report entry only for answered outbound calls. When this feature is enabled, outbound calls initiated on lines which provide answer supervision will not generate a report unless the call is answered. Call cost and time are based on call duration after answer.

TAB003-PLS, page 21


R

TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN

Date: April, 1997 Issue: TAB004–PLS

Software Enhancements For The

DXP Plus Digital Communications System

This bulletin discusses the following software enhancements and feature additions to the DXP plus digital communications system that are available with software release 11B and later.

•

ANI/DNIS Display

•

PCIU/Visual Call Manager Support

•

Phone Types Enhancement

•

Restricted Login

•

System Software Upgrade Enhancement

•

Visual Voice Mail Support

NOTE: It is always a good practice to save the data base for backup purposes before you up-grade the system software revision.

The pages of this TAB present the 11B revision information as separate sheets that, if you wish, you can insert in the appropriate system manuals.

Printed in U.S.A.

This manual has been developed by Comdial Corporation (the “Company”) and is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. While every effort has been made to eliminate errors, the Company disclaims liability for any difficulties arising for the interpretation of the information contained herein.

The information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be desired, or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes contact, Comdial, Inside Sales Department, P.O. Box

7266, Charlottesville, Virginia 22906.

GCA40-130 General Description

ANI/DNIS Display

Software 11B adds the ANI/DNIS display feature. Automatic Number Identification (ANI) describes a code delivered by the subscriber service along with an incoming call. ANI identifies the number that the caller calls from. Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) also describes a code delivered by the subscriber service; however, DNIS identifies the number that the caller dialed. Systems can make use of these two services in different ways. One use is to show the ANI or DNIS information on the display of an LCD speakerphone. Through programming action, you can set the system for which bit of information

(ANI or DNIS) that you wish to have display priority or you can set the system to show both bits of information in the display.

(TAB004–PLS p3)


PCIU/Visual Call Manager Support

Beginning with software release 11B you can use the Personal Computer Interface Unit (PCIU) to operate the Visual Call Manager (VCM) capability of the Versatile Voice Processing (V.V.P.) voice mail system.

VCM provides a series of computer-displayed menus that V.V.P. users can use to simultaneously view and manage voice message activity. By using a series of PC screen menus, users click their computer mouse to send, forward, save, delete, and listen to voice mail messages with the system digital speakerphone providing the sound. In addition, users select from different personal greetings, annotate saved messages, see the length of messages, and perform many other functions from the PC screen.

Installers connect the PCIU between a digital station port and that port’s proprietary digital speakerphone and also to a user-supplied PC. The PCIU includes Service Provider Interface (SPI) and desk-top VCM software that installers load on the user-supplied PC. The SPI software, in conjunction with the VCM software, allows the PCIU to use the serial data path between it and the user-supplied PC to send messages to the PC and to the telephone’s display.

Making the PCIU/Visual Call Manager operational requires only that installers make the proper connections as described in IMI89–286, Installing The Personal Computer Interface Unit, and load the

SPI and VCM software on the user-supplied PC. There are no telephone system software programming requirements to activate the PCIU; however, installers must consider the following hardware parameters:

• the user-supplied PC must be running the Windows 3.1* or Windows 95* operating system;

• the user-supplied PC must provide a serial data port (the PCIU includes a 9-pin to 9-pin cable serial data cable);

•

•

• the system software revision must be at 11B or later; the V.V.P. software revision must be at 8.2 or higher; the system station must be a Comdial proprietary LCD speakerphone with interactive buttons;

• the revision of the firmware on the digital station board must be at 5A or later.

*Windows 3.1* and Windows 95* are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond, Washington

NOTE: Contact your Inside Sales Representative for complete details concerning hardware availability dates.

(TAB004–PLS p5)


Phone Types Enhancement

(Telephone Types)

This programming feature allows you to identify the particular type of system telephone equipment that you or your installer will connect to each station port.

Beginning with software 11B, the digital communications system supports the installation of an integrated voice processing board as a digital station type selection. The model number of the Comdial integrated voice processing board is as follows: IVPC

You can also mark the station port equipment as undefined so that the system will not test the port for a specific type of equipment and will not include the port in any menu presentations.

NOTES:(1) Depending upon which equipment you choose, the system will present different sub-menus that allow you to further define the equipment as to the quantity of lines it can serve, whether it is a speakerphone, whether it is a DSS/BLF console, and other defining characteristics. Follow the sub-menu prompts and press ENTER after you have typed each selection.

(2) Contact your Inside Sales Representative for complete details concerning hardware availability dates.

(TAB004–PLS p7)


Restricted Login

Software release 11B, provides upward and backward compatibility between the different revisions of the

VMMI programming software and the software of the system being programmed. This compatibility is for certain critical features and is known as restricted login. For example, restricted login permits programmers to use 11A VMMI software to execute certain programming features on an 11B system or use 11B VMMI software on 10A systems. Restricted login permits the programming of the following critical features across software revision platforms:

• archive any database;

• restore any database that has the same revision software as does the system to which the VMMI is connected;

• up-grade system software;

•

• reset the system; change the system passwords.

(TAB004–PLS p9)


System Software Upgrade Enhancement

Beginning with software release 11B, digital communications system installers no longer need to accept an automatic save of an existing database during a system software upgrade. Installers can choose to maintain the existing data base by first archiving the data base, then upgrade the software, and finally restore the database after the upgrade is complete. Alternately, installers can choose to allow the system to clear the existing database with the master clear operation.

(TAB004–PLS p11)


Visual Voice Mail Support

Visual Voice Mail (VVM) support provides proprietary, two-line display LCD speakerphone stations with visual messages and interactive buttons. This message and button functionality enhances the stations with visual messages and interactive buttons. This message and button functionality enhances the station’s use with Comdial Versatile Voice Processing (V.V.P.) voice mail equipment.

The V.V.P. prompts the user to enter a password (if programmed to require one) before it plays the new messages. Once entered, the V.V.P. system provides presents convenient dynamic VVM features that enhance the voice message processing. A dedicated V.V.P. user guide (GCA70–347), provides

complete V.V.P. and VVM operating details causes the speakerphone to display a VMAIL button that users press to call the voice mail system. After they press this button, the system prompts them to enter a password. (This password is one that the programmer assigns to the stations.) Once users enter the password, the speakerphone’s display shows the V.V.P.’s main menu. From there, users can select the operation they wish to pursue. When there is a message waiting, the display shows the message quantity in place of the VMAIL button (for example, 5 MSG). Users press the MSG button to play the stored messages.

The system does not require any programming action to implement VVM support; however, there are four additional now available DTMF integration digits that are used to signal call progress information to the Comdial V.V.P. voice mail system. The system defaults these values during a master clear operation and they will save across databases from one system to another. These defaulted values are applicable exclusively for Comdial V.V.P. voice mail systems and are detailed below.

Logon Digit

The telephone system transmits the logon digit to the V.V.P. voice mail system along with the station extension number whenever a station calls the V.V.P. voice mail system and finds that the voice mail system has no messages for that station. The V.V.P. voice mail system requires a value of 9.

Logon With Messages Digit

The telephone system transmits the logon with messages digit to the V.V.P. voice mail system along with the station extension number whenever a station calls the V.V.P. voice mail system and finds that the voice mail system does have messages for that station. The V.V.P. voice mail system requires a value of 8.

Ringing Digit

The telephone system transmits the ringing digit to the V.V.P. voice mail system when the voice mail system is calling a station and that station is ringing. The V.V.P. voice mail system requires a value of 4.

Invalid Extension Digit

The telephone system transmits the invalid extension digit to the V.V.P. voice mail system when the voice mail system has dialed an invalid extension while attempting to call a station. The V.V.P. voice mail system requires a value of 5.

(TAB004–PLS p13)

VMMI Programming

Upgrading The DXP Plus Software

The DXP Plus digital communications system includes system software when it ships from the factory.

At initial system installation, you do not need to load the system software to make the system operational.

Should you need to later reload the system software (for software up-grade purposes for example), you can do so using the supplied system software disk. Use Windows File Manager or MS–DOS commands to save the disk’s information from your computer’s floppy drive to its hard drive. Having the software on your computer’s hard drive allows the data to load into the system’s memory much quicker than it would from the computer’s floppy disk drive.


CAUTION

The system does not automatically save the existing database during a software upgrade. If you need to preserve the existing database, you must archive it before you upgrade the software. After you upgrade the software, you can restore the existing database to the system.

1. Archive the existing the database.

(a) From the Switch pull-down menu, select the Connect To...

menu item, connect VMMI to the system, and return to the Switch pull-down menu.

(b) From the Switch pull-down menu, select the Archive Database menu item.

(c) Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice. Since the data base can be quite large, you should chose a location on your computer’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base.

(d) The system automatically archives its data base.

2. From the Switch pull-down menu, select the Connect To..

. menu item, connect VMMI to the system, and return to the Switch pull-down menu.

3. From the Switch pull-down menu, select the System Software Upgrade menu item.

4. The system automatically takes itself out of service.

5. Choose the location where the new software data resides (select disk drive, directory, and file), and

OK your choice. The system loads the software data, resets itself, and places itself back in service.

6. Restore the exiting database (if desired).



(b) From the Switch pull-down menu, select the Restore Database menu item.

(c) Choose the memory storage location that contains an archived data base and OK your choice. The system automatically restores its data base.

(TAB004–PLS p15)

Printed in U.S.A.


General Description For

Software Release 12A

This publication reflects software release 12A.

R

GCA40–200.02

10/97

Comdial

® strives to design the features in our communications systems to be fully interactive with one another. However, this is not always possible, as the combinations of accessories and features are too varied and extensive to insure total feature compatibility.

Accordingly, some features identified in this publication will not operate if some other feature is activated.Comdial disclaims all liability relating to feature non-compatibility or associated in any way with problems which may be encountered by incompatible features. Notwithstanding anything contained in this publication to the contrary, Comdial makes no representation herein as to the compatibility of features.

2/12/97

Table Of Contents GCA40–200


Chapter 1 Introducing Software Release 12A .......................................................1

Introducing The 12A Features ..................................................................................1

Chapter 2 Explaining Software Release 12A Features .........................................3

Describing The 12A Features....................................................................................3

Auto Redial Feature .....................................................................................3

Data Interface Unit Support .........................................................................5

Dial By Name.............................................................................................10

System Speed Dial Names ........................................................................10

Digits Q and Z Position.........................................................................10

Using Dial By Name .............................................................................11

Hold Recall Inhibit.....................................................................................11

Flexible System Speed Dial Support..........................................................11

Impact Telephone New Model Support .....................................................12

ISDN Features............................................................................................15

Programmable Speakerphone Functionality ..............................................15

Reserved DTMF Receivers ........................................................................15

Station Blocking.........................................................................................16

VMMI Designation Label Printing ............................................................16

Chapter 3 Programming The 12A Features ........................................................17

Upgrading The DXP Plus Software........................................................................17

Table Of Contents – iii

Introducing Software Release 12A GCA40–200

1

Introducing Software Release 12A

Introducing The 12A Features

Software release 12A contains new features and feature enhancements designed to make the DXP Plus system easier for end users to use. The software changes and additions are as follows:

•

Automatic Redial Feature

•

Data Interface Unit Support

•

Dial By Name

•

Digits Q And Z Position

•

Hold Recall Inhibit

•

Flexible System Speed Dial Support

•

Impact Telephone New Model Support

•

ISDN Features

•

Programmable Speakerphone Functionality

•

Reserved DTMF Receivers

•

Station Blocking

•

System Speed Dial Names

•

VMMI Designation Label Printing

Introducing The 12A Features – 1

Explaining The Software 12A Features GCA40–200

2

Explaining The Software 12A

Features

Describing The 12A Features

Automatic Redial Feature

This feature enhances automatic redial by adding a multiple redial feature.

When installers enable this option, the station can have multiple numbers queued for ARD (automatic redial). You can enable this feature for as many as 240 stations at a time in DXP Plus systems.

When you enable multiple ARD, a station can store up to the last 10 numbers its user dials as the user dials the numbers. As the user dials the 11th number, the system drops the oldest number and adds that last dialed number at the top of the list of the 10 stored numbers. It repeats this sequence as the user makes more calls during the day. The system will compare a selected line along with a newly dialed number with its currently stored list. If it encounters a match, it does not store the number again; however, it does move the matched line/number to the top of the list.

After the station user starts a redial on some of the numbers in the stored list, only the places in the list occupied by numbers not currently being redialed remain available for new number addition.

When the user starts the ARD feature, the telephone will redial the stored number. With multiple ARD, the telephone will redial all stored numbers one at a time, in the order that they are stored in the queue, until (a) the call is answered, (b) the user cancels the automatic redial feature for a particular number, or

(c) the telephone has dialed the number a preprogrammed number of times.

If the system encounters a busy or unavailable line (for lines that have provision for reporting such matters) or if the system encounters a ring-no answer, and it has not dialed the number the preprogrammed amount of times, it moves the number to the bottom of the queue and tries the next queued number just as soon as the redial delay times out.

To completely program the automatic redial feature, the installer must enable the multiple automatic redial feature and adjust the following feature parameters:

Describing The 12A Features – 3

GCA40–200 Explaining The Software 12A Features

Suspend ARD

With this Suspend ARD feature selected, user activity at a station suspends automatic redial action until the user completes the activity. When the user activity ends, the system automatically resumes the automatic redial action. Also, users can dial a code to manually suspend ARD action until they choose to restart it by either pressing the ARD button or by dialing the code once more. With the feature disabled, any user activity cancels further ARD action.

ARD Answer Supervision

With the ARD Answer Supervision feature selected, and the line that the system is using to make the call provides answer supervision capability, the system stops the ARD activity when the called party answers.

Wait For Answer

The ARD Wait For Answer feature sets the maximum time the system will wait for an answer signal or user activity before it cancels the ARD action after it redials the number. If neither call answer nor user activity occurs, the system terminates the call and retries the call unless the maximum number of retries has been reached.

If the line provides busy detection, the system disconnects the call and provides a five second busy tone to the calling station. In this situation, the calling station remains in the redial mode until the busy tone stops. Any user activity during this period deactivates ARD for the number.

ARD Retry Delay

The ARD Retry Delay feature sets the time the system waits before redialing a number or between redialing one number and the next when multiple ARDs are active. If ARD activity is suspended at the time the retry delay timer expires, the number to be redialed next remains at the top of the queue to be redialed first when ARD resumes.

ARD Retries

The ARD Retries feature sets the maximum times the system will automatically redial a queued number.

4 – Describing The 12A Features


Data Interface Unit Support

The Data Interface unit (DIU) provides the capability for using Industry Standard Telephone (IST) devices on a digital station port. These devices include such items as: an Industry Standard Telephone, a

FAX machine, modem, a cordless telephone, or an answering machine.

The DIU connects to a digital station port and provides connections for both a proprietary multiline digital telephone and an IST device. The user can switch between the telephone and the IST device by pressing a DATA button on the telephone. The DATA button’s status light indicates the operating status on the DIU.

Installers can arrange for remote control of the DIU from station ports other that the local station port (for example: those stations in the DIU’s security group) by assigning a DATA button to those stations as well; however, the system blocks their remote command when the local station port is busy with a call.

Installers assign control capability to a system station (either the local station port or a remote port), by mapping a DATA button on the station.

NOTE: The DIU is not compatible with Impact telephones to which installers have connected an

IST module inside the adjustable pedestal.

Installing The DIU

The DIU is a self-contained unit that includes the DIU cabinet, a wall transformer power supply with attached power cable, and a telephone line cord for system connection.



Installing The Mechanical Components For The DSU

Install the DIU in either a free-standing manner or mount it on a wall.

When mounting the DIU on a wall:

1. Select a location that is close to a standard 115 VAC electrical wall outlet. The location you select should also be convenient to the digital telephone and the Industry Standard Telephone (IST), FAX, or modem—whichever one you will be connecting to the DIU.

2. Mark two locations for the mounting screws as follows: a. make the first mark, b. measure 3 13/16 inches horizontally from the first mark and make the second mark.

3. Install two #8 x 3/4-inch screws in the wall at the marked locations. Tighten the screws until the screw heads are 1/4-inch from the surface of the wall.

4. Place the DIU on the wall with the screw heads inserted into the slots provided on the bottom surface of the DIU. Slide the DIU onto the screw heads until it is firmly attached to the screws.


Explaining The Software 12A Features

Measuring The Mounting Holes

GCA40–200

Installing The Mounting Screws



Making The Cable Connections For The DIU

Four cable connections are required to the DIU—station line cord, digital telephone line cord,

IST/FAX/MODEM line cord, and power cable.

1. Disconnect the line cord on the digital telephone from the digital station port connector and plug it into the connector labeled PHONE on the DIU.

2. Plug the line cord from the IST device (such as a FAX machine, or modem) into the DIU connector labeled FAX/MODEM.

3. Plug the power supply transformer into a 115 VAC electrical wall outlet. Connect the other end of the power cable into the DIU connector labeled POWER. The green LED on the DIU will be on to indicate power is being supplied to the DIU.

4. Plug one end of a standard line cord into the connector labeled LINE on the DIU. Plug the other end of the line cord into the digital station port connector.

NOTE:DIU power loss will create the same symptoms as the disconnection of the DIU from the system. If this occurs, plug the multiline digital telephone directly into a digital station port connector.

Arranging DIU Security Groups

Installers can program up to eight security groups and assign them to a particular class of service. Stations that are in the same security group as a Data Interface Unit (DIU) station have access to that DIU station.

Stations that are in different security groups do not.



To KSU

Station Port Station Port

Connection

Typical Multiline

Digital Telephone

( Impact Model

8012S Illustrated) dsu04.cdr

To

Common

Equipment

Cabinet

Making The DIU Cable Connections



Dial By Name

The Dial By Name feature allows users to employ any two-line display, LCD speakerphone and its interactive buttons to search through an index of names, locate a desired station name or system speed dial name, and automatically call the located item.

By pressing the option button, users enter the dial by name menu. From that menu, they either press the

INT button for intercom calling or the EXT button for system speed dial calling, and then dial three digits for the first three letters of the name that they want to locate. The system displays the first match to the dialed digits that it finds. The user can then either press the DIAL (external calls) or CALL (internal calls) button to make the call to the displayed location or press the FWD button to display the next name in the index.

The dial by name feature uses the seven-character station names associated with the station ports for searching through the list of stations for intercom calling. The feature uses the seven-character identifying names for searching through the list of system speed dial entries for system speed dialing.

When users make a sequential search through the stored index of names, the system searches the list as it was entered. If system use requires a uniquely sorted list, programmers or system attendants must arrange the list in the desired sequence as they store the entries.

Programming System Speed Dial For Dial By Name

The installer the system attendant can program a list of system speed dial numbers and accompanying names that all users can access for automatic dialing.

Relocating The Position For The Digits Q And Z

At default, the system arranges for users to dial the 1 digit to represent both letters Q and Z ; however, you can take programming action to move the Q and Z letters to the 7 and 9 digits respectively. After programming, the 7 digit represents the letters PQRS and the 9 digit represents the letters WXYZ . This programming action places the letters Q and Z in alphabetical sequence with the other letters in the alphabet. Some users find this reprogrammed arrangement easier to use than the defaulted arrangement.



Using Dial By Name

To use dial by name,

•

Press OPTION to enter the dial by name menu.

•

Press INT button for intercom calling or press EXT for speed dial calling.

•

Dial up to seven digits for the corresponding letters of the name that you want to locate

(for example, dial 266 for Comdial).

•

1 = QZ

4 = GHI

2 = ABC

5 = JKL

3 = DEF

6 = MNO

7 = PRS 8 = TUV 9 = WXY

Remember, reporogramming allows 7 to represent PQRS and 9 to represent WXYZ with 1 no longer representing any letters.

The displays shows the first existing name match to the dialed digits or shows a No Match message if the system can not find a match.

•

Repeatedly press FWD to display the subsequent names in the index until you reach the name you need then press DIAL to call the displayed location.

•

If the display says No Match , press BACK or enter three new digits to select a new name.

Hold Recall Inhibit

Under typical operating conditions, when a user places a call on hold at his or her telephone and fails to pick that call up within a preprogrammed time limit, the call rings the user’s telephone again. The preprogrammed time limit is a programmable item that installers set for the entire system.

Beginning with software release 11C, the system provides a programming option that allows installers to prevent a call that is on hold at a station from ever recalling from the hold condition. In other words, it extends the hold recall time to infinity. This feature is programmable on a station by station basis and is useful at sites where automatic call distribution is active.

Flexible System Speed Dial Support

Installers can select the quantity of system speed dial numbers (either 500 or 1000) that will be available for use. They make this selection based on individual system needs. Choosing 1000 system speed dials reduces slightly the number of SMDR records that the system can store.

When the system accepts the new speed dial quantity entry, it will reset itself in order to resize its speed dial capacity. When this happens, all stored system speed dial numbers are lost, and the installer must reprogram them.



Impact Telephone New Model Support

Digital communication systems support a group of newly designed Impact telephone models. The model numbers of these telephones are listed below.

8324S — 24 Line Half-Duplex LCD Speakerphone

8324F — 24 Line Full-Duplex LCD Speakerphone

8312S — 12 Line Half-Duplex LCD Speakerphone

8212S — 12 Line Half-Duplex Speakerphone 8212N — Multiline Proprietary Telephone

8201N — Single Line Proprietary Telephone IB48X — 48-Button DSS/BLF Console

IB24X — 24-Button DSS/BLF Console IMIST — IST Pedestal

Button Mapping The New Impact Telephone Models

On Model 8324F, 8324S, 8212S, and 8312S telephones, you can move the intercom button from its defaulted and marked location at the lower rightmost button position to any programmable button location; however, you cannot delete the intercom button assignment from the telephone.

Moving Fixed Feature Buttons On The New Impact Telephone Models

Some Impact telephone models have a block of buttons located along the lower right-hand edge of the housing that are the equivalent of “fixed” buttons on other telephone models. To add user convenience to installations using these telephone models, installers can rearrange the features that these buttons provide.

These Impact telephones fall into three different categories with the button’s feature provisions differing for each category. Specifically, models 8324F, 8312S, and 8324S share a block arrangement, models

8212N and 8201N share a block arrangement, and model 8201N has yet a different arrangement.

Through programming, installers decide the feature arrangement for these buttons for each of these telephone categories. The system applies the arrangement that they select on a system-wide basis.



Illustrating The New Impact Telephone Models

The following illustrations show the outline and dimensional views of the new Impact telephones

I

1

A C

2

4

L

D

M O

X

COMDIAL

M A

I

CO

A

A

M

OLD

8412F

I

1

4

L

A C

2

D

M O

X

COMDIAL

M A

I

A

CO

A

M

OLD

I

1

4

COMDIAL

A C

2

L

D

M O

X

M A

CO

A

A

M

OLD

8212S

COMDIAL

I

1

A C

2

4

L

D

M O

X

I COM

M A

CO

A

M

OLD

8212N

COMDIAL

I

1

A C

2

4

L

D

M O

X

I COM

M A

CO

M

A

OLD

8201N

I

1

A C

4

L

2

D

M O

X

COMDIAL

M A

I

A

A

CO

M

OLD

8312S

IB48X

I 24X

1

Viewing The New Impact Telephone Outlines


GCA40–200

9.065

8.819

8324F,

8312S, 8324S, and IB48X

Explaining The Software 12A Features

6.315

8.819

8212S,

8212N,

8201N, and IB24X image_2.cdr

4.442

3.283

1.550

Viewing The New Impact Telephone Dimensions



ISDN Features

With the release of software revision 12A, several enhancing features become available for the

ISDN–PRI interface. This interface provides integrated voice and data communications over a common telephone company facility to Comdial proprietary telephone systems.

Calling Party Number Type, Called Party Number Type

This feature adds a programming choice that defines the number configuration that the system recognizes for both incoming (called party) and outgoing (calling party) calls over an ISDN line. The configuration that installers choose is based upon the type of service that they request from the service provider.

Several choices are available with the most common choice being Subscriber (default setting) and

Dynamic (for international, national, and subscriber services). When they choose Dynamic , installers must also set the National Prefix to 1 and the International Prefix to 011.

Network Specific Facility

This feature adds another programming choice that defines to the system the type of ISDN service being provided by the service provider. To make the programming choice, installers must contact the service provider to obtain the facility coding value for the provided service. The facility coding value is a number between 0 and 31 and this supplied number is the programming entry that installers use as their programming choice. Alternately, they can enter a 32 to tell the system that there is no supplied ISDN service.

Programmable Speakerphone Functionality

(Force Monitor Mode)

This programming feature will force monitor operation on a system speakerphone on an individual basis.

Monitor operation permits on-hook dialing but the user must lift the telephone handset to talk to the answering party.

Reserved DTMF Receivers

Installers can use this programming feature to allocate, or reserve, DTMF receivers on a per serial port basis for those Open Application Interface (OAI) applications that are aware of that function. This feature assures that an OAI application has a predetermined number of DTMF receivers available when it logs into the telephone system. Installers must make themselves aware of the actual quantity of DTMF receivers available in the system before they can make an accurate allocation entry using this feature.



Station Blocking

Installers can group stations together into blocks, and then arrange those station block groups so that the stations that they have programmed into one system station block group cannot make intercom calls to stations that they have programmed into a different station block group. Station block groups prevent both personal intercom dialing and direct station selection(DSS) as well as voice announce, call forwarding, and screened transfers; however, the feature does allow calls to group intercom numbers and unscreened transfers.

VMMI Designation Label Printing

Software release 12A adds an application to the VMMI programming that allows installers to automatically print designation labels for the following Impact telephone models:

8324S

8324F

24 Line Half-Duplex LCD Speakerphone

24 Line Full-Duplex LCD Speakerphone

8312S

8212S

8212N

8201N

IB48X

IB24X

12 Line Half-Duplex LCD Speakerphone

12 Line Half-Duplex Speakerphone

Multiline Proprietary Telephone

Single Line Proprietary Telephone

48-Button DSS/BLF Console

24-Button DSS/BLF Console

The application automatically creates designation labels for telephone assignments stored within an existing database. Plus,installers can manually customize the automatically created labels as well as create labels for other telephones that are not part of the installed database. Once the application makes designation labels available, it catalogs them by page number, station name, extension number, and form number. Installers can use the dialog bar along the top of the menu to scroll through the created labels for review.

Installers can print the designation labels on their laser printer. The application works with pre-printed, die-cut forms that you can load into your laser printer. these die-cut forms available in packages of 100 forms each. Contact your Inside Sales Representative concerning ordering details.

Die-Cut Form

IMDESI-1B24

IMDESI-IB48

IMDESI-MLPS

IMDESI-SLPS

IMDESI-WIDE

Applicable Telephone Product Code

IB24X

IB48X

8212S, 8212N

8201N

8412F, 8324F, 8324S, 8312S


Programming The 12A Features GCA40–200

Programming The 12A Features

3



At initial system installation, you do not need to load the system software to make the system operational.

Should you need to later reload the system software (for software up-grade purposes for example), you can do so using the supplied system software disk. Use Windows File Manager or MS–DOS commands to save the disk’s information from your computer’s floppy drive to its hard drive. Having the software on your computer’s hard drive allows the data to load into the system’s memory much quicker than it would from the computer’s floppy disk drive.


CAUTION


1. Archive the existing the database.




(c) Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice. Since the data base can be quite large, you should chose a location on your computer’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the data base.

(d) The system automatically archives its data base.





5. Choose the location where the new software data resides (select disk drive, directory, and file), and

OK your choice. The system loads the software data, resets itself, and places itself back in service.

6. Restore the exiting database (if desired).




(c) Choose the memory storage location that contains an archived data base and OK your choice. The system automatically restores its data base.

Upgrading The DXP Plus Software – 17

ISO 9001 Certified

R

Printed in U.S.A.

DXP, DXP Plus, and Impact FX

Digital Communications Systems

General Description for the

Common Code Base Software

Feature Set 15A, Release 170

GCA40–219.01

04/99

The information in this publication is applicable for software feature set 15A, Release 170.


Table of Contents

Table of Contents · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · iii

Introducing The Software Release · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1

Introducing The Software Features................................................................................1

Feature Set 15A Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Stand Alone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Detailing Hardware And Software Considerations For The DXP System ....................2

Detailing The Hardware Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Detailing The Software Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Explaining The Software Release Features · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3

Call Forward To Hunt Groups .......................................................................................3

Centrex Message Waiting with Caller ID (DXP, DXP Plus only) ................................3

Message Waiting Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Programming For Centrex Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Board Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Programming For Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Call ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Absorb Ring Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Delete Viewed RNA Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Caller ID RNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

CID Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Save Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Dial By Name Support For Non-Display Telephones ...................................................7

Programming The Dial By Name Feature For Non-Display Telephones. . . . . . . . 7

Daylight Saving Time ....................................................................................................8

Programming The Daylight Saving Time Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

E911 Caller ID Support For System Stations ................................................................8

Programming For E911 Caller ID Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

E911 Line Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Emergency Number Alarm Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Emergency Call Feature Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

E-911 Feature Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Ground Start Line Board (Impact FX Only)..................................................................9

Idle System Restore .......................................................................................................9

IST Board For Avalon Pull-Cord Support (Impact FX only) ........................................9

GCA40–219

Table Of Contents – iii

GCA40–219 Table Of Contents

SCbus Interface Support (Impact FX only) .................................................................10

Programming For SCbus Interface Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Board Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

PCTB Board Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

SCbus Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Phone Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

OAI Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Port Time Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Ring Monitoring ..........................................................................................................12

Programming For Ring Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Operating A Ring Monitoring Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Detailing Certain Ring Monitoring Operational Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Station Headset Mode ..................................................................................................13

Programming The Headset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

QSIG Networking Support (Stand Alone Feature)......................................................14

Programming For QSIG Networking Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Enabling QSIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Connected Line ID Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Calling Line ID Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Display Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Node Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Network Extension Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

System Networking Feature Enhancements (Stand Alone Feature)............................15

Basic Impact Attendant Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Dial Zero Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Directed Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

DSS/BLF Support (Network Station Monitor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Programming For Network DSS/BLF Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Ten Node Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Transfer To Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Programming For The Transfer To Voice Mail Networking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

VVP Serial Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Programming The Features · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 19

Upgrading The DXP Software.....................................................................................19

Converting The DXP Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Translating An Earlier DXP Database To A Common Code Base Database. . . . 20

Master Clearing The DXP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Upgrading The DXP Plus Software.............................................................................22

Upgrading the Impact FX Software.............................................................................23

Using The System Software Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Enabling The Impact FX System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

iv – Table Of Contents

Introducing The Software Release GCA40–219

1

Introducing The Software

Release

Introducing The Software Features

Software Release 170, Feature Set 15A contains new features and feature enhancements designed to make the common code base (CCB) systems—the DXP, DXP Plus, and Impact FX Systems— easier for end users to use.

CCB began with software release 10A and provides a uniformity of features across the spectrum of digital communications system platforms. While hardware capacities may limit feature availability for some CCB systems, the CCB software is completely compatible for all system models.

The software changes and additions available with software Release 170, as either part of Feature Set

15A or as stand alone features, are named in the following list:

Feature Set 15A Features

•

Call Forward To Hunt Groups

•

Centrex Message Waiting with Caller ID (DXP, DXP Plus only)

•

Dial By Name Support For Non-Display Telephones

•

Daylight Savings Time

•

E911Caller ID Support

•

Ground Start Line Board (Impact FX Only)

•

Idle System Restore

•

Industry-Standard Telephone Circuit Board For Avalon Pull Cord Support (Impact FX only)

•

SCBus Interface Support (Impact FX only)

•

Station Headset Mode

•

Ring Monitoring

Stand Alone Features

•

QSIG Networking Support

•

System Networking Feature Enhancements (Stand Alone Feature for All CCB Systems)

DSS/BLF Support

Dial Zero Extension

Directed Call Pickup

Basic Impact Attendant Support

Ten Node Networking

Transfer To Voice Mail

VVP Serial Integration

Introducing The Software Features – 1

GCA40–219 Introducing The Software Release

Detailing Hardware And Software Considerations For The DXP System

Detailing The Hardware Considerations

The DXP system must be operating on a DXCPU–68K CPU board. Software Release 170 is not compatible with systems using a DXCPU–186 CPU board found in earlier DXP systems.

If you are upgrading a DXP system to Release 170 from software 9C or earlier, you must use the

DXPSW–DLRP package. In addition to the Release 170 software card, this package includes the following items that you must install as part of the software upgrade:

• new cabinet labeling for board configurations,

• new Random Access Memory (RAM) card (DXRAM–EXPC),

•

VMMI programming software.

If you are upgrading a DXP system to Release 170 from software 10A or later, you may only need to change the software card (DXPSW–DLRC) on the existing DXRAM–EXPC Random Access Memory

(RAM) memory card; however, since Release 170 for the DXP digital communications system requires a revision B DXRAM–EXPC memory card, you may also need to upgrade the memory card in your system to revision B.

If your DXP should still include a revision A memory card, you must install an DXRAM–UPC upgrade kit to convert it into a revision B card at the time you upgrade the system software to Release 170. The

DXRAM–UPC kit includes two memory chips (integrated circuit components) and an upgrade label, and it is available through the normal distribution supply channels.

Detailing The Software Considerations

•

The PCMMI (off-line) programming procedure is no longer available with Release 170 software. A windows-based, Visual Man-Machine Interface (VMMI) programming system with help files now replaces the PCMMI.

•

The DXP database must be at least revision 9A before you can translate it to Release 170. You can use the 9A revision of the PCMMI programming software to upload your current DXP database and then download it to a data storage area—such as your computer’s hard drive—as a revision 9A database.* You must then use VMMI to translate this stored 9A data into a Release 170 database before you load it back into the system.

•

The PC Attendant Position software must be at least revision 5A. (You must upgrade the software in your PC Attendant to this level to be compatible with this latest software release.*) It is a good practice to upgrade the PC Attendant Position computer to contain at least 2 megabytes of RAM memory. While this may not be necessary for every installation, upgrading to 2 megabytes of RAM memory ensures that the PC Attendant Position functions properly under all conditions.

*Remember, you can download the latest VMMI, and PC Attendant software from the Comdial Online Support

Server on the World Wide Web at: http://bbs.comdial.com.

2 – Detailing Hardware And Software Considerations For The DXP System

Explaining The Software Release Features GCA40–219

2

Explaining The Software Release

Features

Call Forward To Hunt Groups

Feature Set 15A enhances the existing call forwarding feature by allowing system station users to forward their station intercom calls to station hunting group pilot numbers.

Installers enable this feature by selecting the Intercom Forward To ... button on the

STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/OPTIONS 1. If the database contains station hunting groups, the VMMI includes the pilot numbers for these groups as valid programming selections.

Further, installers must use STATION PROGRAMMING/OPTIONS 1/FORWARDING/DEFAULT

TYPE to select Itcm Forward to enable forwarding to an intercom number, and select Hunt Grp

Forward to enable frowarding to a hunt group.

Centrex Message Waiting with Caller ID

(DXP, DXP Plus only)

Centrex Message Waiting is a new feature supported by the DXPCO-CM8 and -CM4 loop-start line boards. These boards provide message waiting and Caller ID interfaces, and installers can place them in both DXP and DXP Plus common equipment cabinets. With the Centrex Message Waiting feature, a signal from an external message center lights a message waiting light on the system telephones and causes a message waiting display to appear on proprietary LCD speakerphones.

The service provider sends two different message signals to the digital communications system: line number with message waiting status OFF or line number with message waiting status ON. If the message wait status is OFF, the system makes no attempt to process message waiting information. When the system receives message wait status ON, it verifies that the line is enabled for the MW feature and the station is enabled for the external message wait service. If this is so, the system verifies that the incoming message waiting line has either line appearance, direct ring, is assigned as a prime line, or has enhanced direct ringing at the station (system follows the enhanced direct ringing setup). If this is also so, the system updates the appropriate light and LCD display to indicate that a message is waiting for the specific line.

The system queues a maximum of eight messages at a time for each station including internal and external messages; however, it ignores any messages beyond this maximum number.

The system provides 10 dedicated speed dial numbers that installers can program with numbers that call the service provider's message center.

Call Forward To Hunt Groups – 3

GCA40–219 Explaining The Software Release Features

Message Waiting Indications

To allow stations to indicate waiting messages, installers must assign the message wait line to the stations as either a prime line, a direct ringing line or as a direct line appearance. Further, installers must enable line originate at the stations. The message waiting indications and user response varies with the station type. Depending upon the telephone model, the system updates the following buttons and lights to show that messages are waiting to be retrieved by station users.

MESSAGE button—fixed on Impact SCS telephones: Flashes red if messages await retrieval. Users press the MESSAGE button to retrieve messages.

MSG button—installer programmed on Impact telephones: Flashes red if messages await retrieval Users press the MSG button to retrieve messages..

MSGWT button—installer programmed on any system telephone: On steady red if messages await retrieval. Users press MSGWT button to retrieve messages.

NOTE: If an installer has programmed a telephone to have both MSG and a MSGWT buttons, the MSG function prevails, and the MSGWT will not retrieve waiting messages.

HOLD—fixed button on any system telephone: On stations without a programmed MSG button, HOLD button flashes red when messages await. Users press ITCM HOLD to retrieve messages.

CALL, CLEAR buttons—interactive buttons on LCD speakerphones. Users press CALL button to call first message in a message queue, and press CLEAR to both clear current message and display next message if multiple messages await.

MW Light—indicator on industry-standard telephones (IST): (Installers must assign a message waiting line as the station's prime line). User dials #00 to retrieve messages.

Programming For Centrex Message Waiting

To completely enable the Centrex message waiting feature, installers must take the following VMMI programming actions:

Line Assignment

To indicate message wait, installers must assign the message wait line to the stations as either line appearance, a prime line, a direct ring, or an enhanced ringing line.

Installers use STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/GENERAL to assign a message waiting line as prime line to a station, use STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/RINGING ASSIGNMENTS to assign it as either direct or enhanced ringing line, or use STATIONS/STATION

PROGRAMMING/BUTTON MAPPING to assign line appearance to the station.

Use STATIONS/STATION CLASS OF SERVICE/PAGE 5 to assign line originate to a class of stations.

Use STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/GENERAL to assign a class of service to a station.

Station Marking

Under STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/OPTIONS 3, installers select the External Message

Wait control to mark an individual station as a Centrex Message Waiting station.

4 – Centrex Message Waiting with Caller ID (DXP, DXP Plus only)


Centrex Message Waiting Speed Dials

Under SYSTEM/CENTREX MESSAGE WAITING, installers select a Centrex Message Waiting Speed dial (1 through 10) to configure a speed dial location for receiving messages from the provider’s message center.

Retrieve Message Waiting

Under LINES/LINE PROGRAMMING/LINE ATTRIBUTES, installers use Retrieve Msg. Wait to select an index number for a specific Centrex Message Waiting Speed Dial uses for retrieving messages.

Button Mapping

Under STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/BUTTON MAPPING, installers program a MSGWT

(message wait) button for Centrex Message Waiting lamp indications.


Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/SLOT ASSIGNMENTS or BOARD CONFIGURATION/

CABINET VIEW, installers configure the circuit board that supports the Centrex Message Waiting signalling.

Board Programming

As an option, some CO’s may generate and send Abbrevated Incoming Message Wait Ring to the system if a system station’s line was busy when the CO left a message. The CO applies this signal to the system station’s line as soon as that line returns to an idle state. If installers desire to filter out the

Abbrrevated Incoming Message Wait Ring, they do so under BOARD PROGRAMMING/CENTREX

BOARDS/INCOMING RING DEBOUNCE.

Centrex Message Waiting with Caller ID (DXP, DXP Plus only) – 5


Programming For Caller ID

To completely enable the Centrex caller ID feature, installers must take the following VMMI programming actions:

Call ID

Under LINES/LINE PROGRAMMING/LINE TYPE SPECIFIC enable Caller ID Active for the specific lines with the caller ID option.

Absorb Ring Time

Under PERIPHERALS/CALLER ID/OPTIONS/ABSORB RING TIME user the entry to specify the amount of time the system waits as it generates caller ID information before it generates system ring.

Delete Viewed RNA Records

When a system makes caller ID information available to a group of stations, any station in that group can view the information when the station user presses the station’s CID button. Under

PERIPHERALS/CALLER ID/OPTIONS/DELETE VIEWED RNA RECORDS if the installer enables the option, the system deletes the records as station users view them.

Caller ID RNA

If a station with assigned caller ID lines receives a call but does not answer, the system automatically archives the information. Under STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/RINGING

ASSIGNMENTS/CALLER ID RNA, installers can program any station in agroup of stations to receive caller ID RNA information. With this feature enabled, station users can review caller ID RNA numbers by pressing a CID button on their stations. Further, they can automatically redial the caller ID RNA numbers by pressing the SAVE button.

CID Button

Using STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/BUTTON MAPPING, installers must map a CID button on the stations that that are to review caller ID RNA records.

Save Button

Using STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/BUTTON MAPPING, installers must map a SAVE button to stations that are to redial caller ID RNA numbers.

6 – Centrex Message Waiting with Caller ID (DXP, DXP Plus only)


Dial By Name Support For Non-Display Telephones

The dial by name feature provides an index of names for users to search through. When they select a name in the index, the system automatically dials a number associated with that name. Beginning with

Feature Set 15A, Release 170, users can use the dial by name feature with non-display telephones.

Since non-display telephone provides no visual feedback of the index of available names, users of these telephones cannot distinguish between similar names. Because of this limitation, dial by name for non-display telephones works best when programmers use unique names in the system speed dial name field. Further, programmers must use only alpha-numeric characters. Other characters, such as # T or spaces, produce a no dial, no error tone condition.

To use dial by name from a non-display telephone,

•

From the system’s intercom line, dial the installer programmed feature access code.

•

Dial up to the maximum of seven characters for the corresponding letters of the desired name that someone has previously programmed in the system speed dial name field—for example, dial 2663425 for Comdial.

1* = QZ

4 = GHI

7 = PRS

2 = ABC

5 = JKL

8 = TUV

3 = DEF

6 = MNO

9 = WXY

* Location of Q and Z is programmable

The system compares the dialed characters with the name field and if it finds a complete match, it initiates the system speed dial of the number associated with that name. For non-display telephones, the system dials the first match it finds. If there existed similar names in the index, the first match may not be the desired one. The feature works best for non-display telephones if all the names in the system speed dial name field are unique to the dialed sequence (for example, for both boy and Amy, users dial 269—while these are unique names, the number sequence for them is not unique).

Programming The Dial By Name Feature For Non-Display Telephones

To enable the feature through VMMI programming, under SYSTEM/FEATURE NUMBERS, installers select the External Dial by Name feature code and program a dialable string that users can dial to access the Dial By Name feature from their non-display telephones.

Installers must use SYSTEM/SPEED DIALS to build the dial by name list. They can place a maximum of seven alphanumeric characters in the name field and up to 32 dialing digits for the speed dial.

If necessary, installers can reprogram 7 to represent PQRS, 9 to represent WXYZ, and 1 to no longer represent any letters. Under SYSTEM/SYSTEM PARAMETERS/OPTIONS 2, installers select Digits Q

and Z position.

Dial By Name Support For Non-Display Telephones – 7


Daylight Saving Time

With the daylight saving time feature, the system automatically changes its clock to daylight saving time in the Spring and automatically changes its clock back to standard time in the Fall. Presently, the date and time that the switch automatically occurs is fixed at the nationally recognized date and time for

Spring and Fall time changes.

Programming The Daylight Saving Time Feature

Enable or disable the daylight saving time feature from the SYSTEM/PARAMETERS/OPTIONS 1 programming menu.

E911 Caller ID Support For System Stations

With enhanced 911 (E911) service, the service provider's equipment automatically routes 911 calls to the emergency services operator along with identifying information that provides a geographic location of the caller's telephone. In the case of PBX or hybrid telephone systems, E911 calls that originate from a telephone connected to the system cause the service provider's equipment to send along the geographic location of the PBX but not the actual location of the caller's telephone.

Beginning with software Release 170, the CCB software supports outbound automatic number identification (ANI) of individual system telephones for E911 purposes. This software enhancement allows a user-provided proxy device that installers connect to the system to transmit the location of system stations that originate an E911 call.

Programming For E911 Caller ID Support

Program the following VMMI items to fully enable the E911 Caller ID Support.

E911 Line Marking

Under LINE/LINE PROGRAMMING/LINE TYPE SPECIFIC, when configuring an analog domestic

E&M Tie or Ground Start Line, installers select the E911 Outbound ANI to mark or clear the line as one that is connected to a proxy device for caller identification.

Emergency Number Alarm Level

Under SMDA/SMDR/EMERGENCY NUMBERS, installers select the emergency number desired

(911) and specify the Alarm Level to be generated and stored when that number is dialed.

Emergency Call Feature Code

Under SYSTEM/FEATURE NUMBERS, installers select the Make Emergency Call feature code, and enter a dialable string that will originate the emergency call.

E-911 Feature Code Parameters

Under SYSTEM/PARAMETERS/OPTION 2, installers enter a translation that translates the feature code into a dialable string. Installers select the line group for the feature code to use; otherwise, the system chooses line group one as a default.

8 – Daylight Saving Time


Ground Start Line Board

(Impact FX Only)

Software Release 170 adds support for eight-port, ground-start line boards for the Impact FX system.

The product code for this new board type is FXGST-08.

Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/SLOT ASSIGNMENTS or CABINET VIEW, select 8 Port

Ground-Start to configure the new board types. Installers can configure each port of these new line boards as Loop Start, Ground Start, or AUX line types.

Idle System Restore

Prior to Software Release 170, a system performed a system reset after a database restore was complete.

VMMI displayed a warning that the system would reset itself after the database restore.

Beginning with Release 170, a CCB system places all its telephony boards out of service before it begins a database restore operation. VMMI displays a warning that the system is taking all boards out of service before it begins the database restore operation and that the system will reset itself after the restore is complete.

IST Board For Avalon Pull-Cord Support

(Impact FX only)

Engineers have designed a new industry-standard telephone (IST) circuit board that interfaces with an

Avalon Assisted Living pull-cord signalling device. The product code for this board is FXISTA–16. The

FXISTA–16 IST board has no audio circuitry since the pull-cord signalling device requires no audio interface. Software Release 170 provides support for this interface.

Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/SLOT ASSIGNMENTS or CABINET VIEW, installers select IST

for Avalon to configure the new board type.

Ground Start Line Board (Impact FX Only) – 9


SCbus Interface Support

(Impact FX only)

Beginning with Feature Set 15A, Release 170, the software supports the Signal Computer System

Architecture (SCSA) protocol. SCSA is a standard that specifies the signal processing system for

PC-based voice and call processing, and telecom switching. An SCbus is a standard bus for communications within an SCSA node. The SCbus features an architecture that includes a serial message path for signalling and control and a 16-wire parallel Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) data path.

An integral part of the feature is the SCbus interface board. This board connects Computer Telephony

Interface (CTI) applications that reside on one or more SCbus compatible circuit boards in the FXS's computer portion (for example; network, voice, facsimile, speech recognition, video, and so forth) to digital station or line ports installed in the FXS's telephony portion through the SCSA protocol.

The conversion of a CTI application from traditional analog ports to digital SCbus ports provides a more effective and efficient operation.

The SCbus board translates the CTI application’s Application Programming Interface (API), which requests and carries out basic services performed by the computer and telephony portions of the system, to an API that the FXS system supports. Typical API requested services include call control services such as these following items: receive ring events, off- and on-hook, hookflash, dial digits, and so forth.

The SCbus interface board mounts in any universal board slot in telephony portion on an Impact FXS system and cable connects to the CTI application board that is plugged onto the passive backplane in the computer portion of the FXS system. The internal cable connection between the SCbus board and the

CTI application board routes the voice-path signalling between the two locations. In addition to this internal cable, the installation requires external cabling between the system's computer and telephony portions. The particular external cabling required is dependent upon the CTI application being operated.

An SCbus installation includes the following items:

•

SCbus Interface Board (product code FXSCBUS)

•

SCbus Application Board or Boards (as needed)

•

SCbus Application Software Disk or Disks (as needed)

•

Enterprise ToolKit Software (product code ENTRP-SW, release 6A or later)

10 – SCbus Interface Support (Impact FX only)


Programming For SCbus Interface Support

VMMI programming for the SCSA protocol includes support for the SCbus interface board and the

SCbus ports.


Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/SLOT ASSIGNMENTS or BOARD

CONFIGURATION/CABINET VIEW, installers select the desired cabinet slot and program an SCbus board. This will automatically provision 32 SCbus ports within the CCB database.

PCTB Board Programming

Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/BOARD PROGRAMMING/PCTB BOARDS, installers select the

SCbus board to program and configure the board level programming options for that board.

•

Master Clock (Enabled or Disabled)

•

Bus Speed (4.096 / 2.048 Mbps).

SCbus Ports

Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/BOARD PROGRAMMING/SC BUS PORTS, installers select the desired FX-SCB port to configure. Because Release 170 of the CCB supports only Station PCTB ports, the options under port programming are limited to disabling the port or configuring it as a station port.

Phone Types

While the default value is none on the STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/PHONE TYPES, menu for SCbus ports configured as stations, installers can choose any digital station type valid in the data base.

OAI Links

Installers can reserve the Scbus port for use only by an OAI application using a specified serial port (or link). Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/BOARD PROGRAMMING/SC BUS PORTS, installers program the OAI Link feature.

Port Time Slots

Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/BOARD PROGRAMMING/SC BUS PORTS, the system displays, as read-only data, the time slots used by the port. The values are shown as none in a new database, and the system automatically assigns values when the circuit board synchronizes with the

SCbus. These values are dynamic and may change from time to time. The system only displays these values for information and troubleshooting purposes.

SCbus Interface Support (Impact FX only) – 11


Ring Monitoring

Ring Monitoring, which becomes available with Feature Set 15A, Release 170, gives a boss/secretary

(monitored station/monitoring station) functionality to system stations. With this functionality a monitoring telephone rings whenever a monitored telephone rings with either an intercom or outside line call.

Recall ring monitoring is an enhancement to the ring monitoring feature. This enhancement designates whether any calls that are recalling to the monitored station (that is; transfer recalls, hold recalls, park recalls) will trigger a ring monitor event at monitoring stations.

Programming For Ring Monitoring

Using VMMI programming, installers can arrange for a monitored station to have a maximum of four monitoring stations (one boss monitored by four secretaries). The system permits one monitoring station to monitor up to 16 different monitored stations (one secretary monitoring up to 16 bosses).

Under STATION/STATION PROGRAMMING/RINGING ASSIGNMENTS, installers click Ring

Monitor then select up to four stations to monitor the ringing of the station being programmed. The system permits each of these installer-selected stations to serve as a monitoring station for up to 16 different monitored stations.

If installers wish to enhance the ring monitoring feature with a recall feature, they check the Recall Ring

Monitor box. If enabled, this feature is only in effect for the ring monitoring feature. This recall ring monitor enhancement is active as the default setting for a station.

Note that the copy station procedure will not copy ring monitor capability except for the recall ring monitor setting.

Operating A Ring Monitoring Arrangement

Whenever a monitored telephone rings for a call, the associated DSS/BLF on a monitoring station flashes. The display on a monitoring station matches the display on its monitored station. The Orange flash indicates to a monitoring phone which of its monitored stations is currently ringing. If more than one monitored station is ringing, the call with the highest ring priority rings at a monitoring station.

A ring monitor signal appears as an orange flashing light for the DSS/BLF of the monitored station rather than appear at the monitoring station’s personal hunt list; however, after the monitoring user answers, the call does appear under the monitoring station’s hunt list. The ring monitoring feature does not require that a monitoring station have a DSS/BLF for a monitored station; however, if a DSS/BLF is available, it indicates an audible ring monitor event as detailed above.

Users can forward a ring monitoring event; however, that event only follows the Forward All setting for the monitoring station. The station must be idle (that is, not ringing from any other ring monitor events) when users forward their ring monitored calls. When users cancel call forwarding on forwarded stations, only any new ring monitor events will ring at the station.

12 – Ring Monitoring


Detailing Certain Ring Monitoring Operational Rules

•

OAI applications receive normal ringing but stop any ringing for monitoring stations.

•

Voice announce calls will not trigger ring monitoring operation.

•

Zone paging will not trigger ring-monitoring operation.

•

PC Attendant (Total Control) software does not support any ring monitoring functionality.

•

Networking System software does not support ring-monitoring across nodes

•

A station that is ring monitoring other stations cannot be, in turn, ring monitored.

•

A voicemail port cannot be ring monitored.

•

There is no delay ring monitor functionality.

•

All existing line access/originate privileges apply.

•

Installers must not program Direct/Delay Ringing for a monitoring station with same lines as a monitored station.

•

All current ringing priorities remain in effect for ring-monitoring calls (that is; line calls have priority over intercom calls and recalls).

•

If the ring monitoring feature coincides with another direct/delay ring situation then direct/delay ringing light appearance takes precedence.

A monitoring station does not require a DSS/BLF for a monitored station; however, the system uses that

BLF light (if available) to indicate an audible ring-monitor event.

Station Headset Mode

Software release 170 allows installers to program a station as a headset mode port. When programmed in this manner, the station can operate in a headset mode with a customer-supplied headset. Users can activate the headset mode with a HEADSET button (installer-programmed on the telephone) or have he headset mode as a permanent condition at the station.

Programming The Headset Mode

VMMI supports the headset mode feature with a setting labeled Headset under STATIONS/STATION

PROGRAMMING/OPTIONS 3.

Station Headset Mode – 13


QSIG Networking Support

(Stand Alone Feature)

Software Release 170 adds support for Networking QSIG programming. With QSIG support, Comdial systems can network with non-Comdial switches that are QSIG compliant. This means that telephones behind Comdial CCB systems can communicate via intercom with telephones behind non-Comdial

QSIG compliant switches when the systems are combined together in a networking arrangement

Programming For QSIG Networking Support

The VMMI programming adds support for Networking QSIG programming. With a node configured as a networking node, VMMI allows the installer to also mark the node as supporting the QSIG networking protocol.

Enabling QSIG

Under SYSTEM/NETWORKING/NETWORK PROPERTIES, installers select Enabled as QSIG Node in the Network Database Status feature to enable the node as a QSIG network node. This option is only available either if the system or database has QSIG enabled in the software key or if the system type does not require a software key.

Connected Line ID Restriction

Under SYSTEM/NETWORKING/NETWORK PROPERTIES, installers select Connected Line Id

Restriction to enable or disable the presentation of the call identification display. When they check this control, the system restricts the identification display of all connected calls. With the control not checked, all calls provide line identification display.

Calling Line ID Restriction

Under SYSTEM/NETWORKING/NETWORK PROPERTIES, installers select Calling Line Id

Restriction to enable or disable the presentation of the call identification display during calling. With the feature checked, the system restricts identification display of all calls. With the feature un-checked, the system provides line identification for all calls during their calling state.

Display Presentation

Under SYSTEM/NETWORKING/NETWORK PROPERTIES, installers select Display Presentation to enable/disable the name display information. When checked, all calls will have their name displayed on the called party’s display. When un-checked, calls will have only the number displayed (according to the programming of the settings described above).

Node Configuration

When installers configure a database as a QSIG node, VMMI enables the

SYSTEM/NETWORKING/NODE CONFIGURATION. On this dialog, the Node ID, Node Name, and

Enabled controls are enabled. VMMI disables the System Type control for QSIG nodes.

Network Extension Provisioning

VMMI fully enables the SYSTEM/NETWORKING/EXTENSION PROVISIONING dialog for QSIG nodes.

14 – QSIG Networking Support (Stand Alone Feature)


System Networking Feature Enhancements

(Stand Alone Feature)

Basic Impact Attendant Support

Beginning with Software Release 170 basic Impact Attendant operation is available across the network.

The Impact Attendant can request extension information from both the node and hub systems; however the names of remote extensions are not available. Basic Impact Attendant support includes intercom calling and provides the following status indications for remote stations:

Out Of Service—the remote station is out of service at the remote site,

Idle—the remote station is not active on a call,

Busy—the remote station is busy on a call.

Dial Zero Extension

It is possible to override the local node's setting for operator station and, through programming, substitute a network station as the dial 0 extension. If the installer does not select a network station as the dial 0 extension, dial 0 calls on a local node will route to that system's operator station if one is available.

Under SYSTEM/NETWORKING/NETWORK PROPERTIES, installers select the Dial Zero Ext… feature to launch a pop-up dialog. From this dialog, they select the extension that rings when users dials a zero.

Directed Call Pickup

With call pick up, station users can dial a code plus an intercom number of a ringing or on-hold station and answer the call from the users' station. Software Release 170 extends this feature across the nodes of the network so that station users of one network node can pick up calls that are ringing at stations connected to another node on the network.

DSS/BLF Support (Network Station Monitor)

Any station in a networked arrangement can direct station select (DSS) up to 30 remote network stations. Any station in the network can have busy lamp field (BLF) status light appearance for up to 30 remote stations. This feature is available to Impact Attendant as well as telephone stations.

For each node (but not the hub), VMMI configures two extension lists. The Send list, identifies the extension on that node that users elsewhere on the network can monitor. The Receive list identifies extensions elsewhere on the network that users on that node can monitor. While both the Send and

Receive lists each accept up to 30 entries, the combined total of both lists cannot exceed 30 entries.

An extension must either be on the hub or on a Send list of another node for the system to accept its addition to a Receive list. The hub system automatically monitors the Send lists of all nodes.

System Networking Feature Enhancements (Stand Alone Feature) – 15


Programming For Network DSS/BLF Support

Installers use the SYSTEM/NETWORKING menu to choose the Network Station Monitor item. Under this heading, they can choose any node (but not the hub) system and configure the Send and Receive monitor lists. Once the per node limit of 30 remote DSS/BLF appearances is reached, VMMI prevents the addition of further remote appearances.

Under STATIONS/STATION PROGRAMMING/BUTTON MAPPING, installers select the station to receive remote DSS/BLF appearance. Under the appropriate button map LKEY, they type the R#### mnemonic, for an extension on the far node (for example, type R2002 if 2002 is a far node extension).

Installers can select the Browse button to view a list of valid far node extensions to choose from.

Installers may button map a remote extension to any telephone in the network. If the remote extension is not in the Receive list for the node the telephone resides on, the DSS button functions as a speed dial button.

Ten Node Networking

Beginning with Software Release 170, Installers can program and configure up to 10 Nodes in addition to the Hub to comprise a networking system. Previously the limit was 6 network nodes.

Under NETWORKING/NODE CONFIGURATION, NETWORKING/ NETWORK LINKS,

NETWORKING/EXTENSION PROVISIONING/ADD NODE EXTENSIONS, and

NETWORKING/EXTENSION PROVISIONING/REMOVE NODE EXTENSIONS, the number of selectable nodes is 10 nodes.

Transfer To Voice Mail

With the networking status enabled, the system reserves voice mail port 32 for centralized voice mail on the hub. This parameter has the following two consequences:

•

Installers must not use voice mail port 32 for local node voice mail when networking status is active.

The system ignores any parameters programmed for that port.

•

Installers must use port 32 for a Transfer to Voice Mail button whenever that button is planned to cause a transfer to centralized voice mail to occur.

Programming For The Transfer To Voice Mail Networking Feature

The VMMI programming software allows installers to program XVM32 in a station’s button map to create a button that will transfer to centralized voice mail. Additionally, VMMI will not allow installers to program voice mail port 32 in a networking database.

If installers use VMMI to translate a networking database to Release 170 or later (from an earlier revision), or when they enable networking in a Release 170 or later database, VMMI removes any programming from voice mail port 32. Further, VMMI changes the forwarding location of any voice mail port that had been previously forwarded to port 32 to the new port 32 forward-to location.

16 – System Networking Feature Enhancements (Stand Alone Feature)


VVP Serial Integration

A Versatile Voice Processing (VVP) voice mail operation that has one voice mail system connected to the hub providing voice mail boxes to both hub and node stations is available with networked systems.

A serial integration feature that enhances VVP operation at the hub system has been available for some time. Serial integration provides both visual displays and interactive buttons that makes VVP very effective and easy to use.

Beginning with Software Release 170, serial integration provided by the voice mail system to stations connected to the hub is also available to stations connected to node systems. When there are voice mail systems connected to the nodes, every station on a node uses serial integration provided by its local voice mail system through a voice mail port other than port 32 (specifically ports 1, 2, 3 and so forth in that order). If a local voice mail system does not exist, the node stations then use the serial integration provided by the voice mail system connected to the hub.

System Networking Feature Enhancements (Stand Alone Feature) – 17

Programming The Features GCA40–219

3

Programming The Features

Upgrading The DXP Software

To enable VMMI use on the DXP system, you must upgrade the DXP software to at least release 10A

(or to whatever software revision that is now current). Further, to preserve your existing database you must convert it through the use of the PCMMI database programming software that is at software release

9x. The upgrade to software release 10A or later requires that you also install a new RAM card

(DXRAM–EXPC) as well as the software memory card (DXPSW–DLRC) on the DXP’s central processor unit. If you need detailed instructions for installing this circuit board and card, refer to the

DXP System Hardware Instructions in your service literature.

To ensure that you execute the database conversion and software upgrade correctly, you must perform the following detailed operations in the sequence listed below:

1. Convert The Database

2. Translate The Database

3. Install The Memory Card (and RAM Card if needed)

4. Master Clear The System

5. Connect To The System

6. Restore The Converted Database

Discussions located on the following pages explain each of the above steps in detail.

Upgrading The DXP Software – 19

GCA40–219 Programming The Features

Converting The DXP Database

Use this procedure to convert an existing DXP database to a software release 9x compatibility. This action places the database in an arrangement that allows you to translate it. Translating the database makes it compatible with software releases that support VMMI usage (software release 10A and later).

1. Employ a PC with an XMODEM communications program and use the DXP’s embedded MMI programming method to store the current DXP database to the PC’s hard drive. The saved database does not include the

SMDA/SMDR records. If you need these SMDA/SMDR records, you must make a printout of them before you perform the database storage.

2. Disconnect the PC from the DXP.

3. If the stored database is not at least software release 9A, obtain a copy of revision 9A or later PCMMI programming software and load it on your computer.

NOTE: Remember, you can always down load the latest PCMMI software from the Comdial On-Line

Support Server. Reach the Support Server from the Comdial home page on the World Wide Web by connecting at: http://www.comdial.com/.

4. Use this revision 9A or later PCMMI to restore the existing, or current, DXP database file. Restoring the database using the 9A PCMMI makes the database 9n compatible.

5. Save the converted database to your computer's hard drive using a new file name. Using a new file name prevents the computer from overwriting the original file.

Translating An Earlier DXP Database To A Common Code Base Database

Use this procedure to translate a DXP database—which you have first converted to be compatible to software release 9x—to be compatible with a common code base software release of 10A and later.

1. From the VMMI window, select the File pull-down menu.

2. Select Open As . . .

.

3. From the Open database File window, select the database that you wish to open and OK your choice. A prompt asks you to confirm the translation. You must click OK to proceed.

4. Specify a new file location where the translated database can reside.

5. Select the destination platform type for the system and OK your selection. The Select Board Type window opens.

6. Use the Select Board Type window to describe the board configuration of the DXP database that you are translating.

(a) For reference before upgrading the software to 10A or later, make a record of the DXP’s physical board configuration.

(b) Use the board record information to answer the prompts on the Select Board Type window. The prompts first ask for all installed station boards beginning with the DXP’s leftmost universal slot in the main cabinet. The prompts then ask for all installed line boards beginning with the DXP’s leftmost line slot in the main cabinet. When a slot in the original DXP contains an auxiliary board, select the No Board response. When the prompt asks for a station board but a line board occupies that slot in the original

DXP, select the No Board response. When the prompt asks for a line board but a station board occupies that slot in the original DXP, select the No Board response. When you finish listing the board configuration, OK your selections.

20 – Upgrading The DXP Software


NOTE: Under BOARD CONFIGURATION/CABINET VIEW, the VMMI graphically shows the boards installed in the arrangement that you specified and leaves a blank slot for any place that you answered a station or line board prompt with a no board response

(c) A prompt asks that you confirm that conversion has taken place by clicking OK .

7. Select Open As . . .

.

8. Select the file name that you specified in step 4 and OK you selection.

9. Specify the destination revision and destination platform for the translated database and OK your specification. Database translation now occurs.

10. From the File drop-down menu, select SAVE .

11. Check the translated results, and under BOARD CONFIGURATION/CABINET VIEW, use your mouse to move the board images to match your plan for the upgraded system. Remember, you must physically move the boards in the common equipment cabinet to match the arrangement that you set with the VMMI program.

Master Clearing The DXP System

To insure that the DXP will perform properly with the new memory card, master clear the system. The

DXCPU–68K board provides a method for the master clear to occur automatically at the initial power up after you have changed or upgraded the software card.

CAUTION

A master clear operation erases an existing database. If you wish to preserve the existing database, you must archive it before you master clear the system. You can then restore this database after you master clear the system. Remember, if this database is not at software release

10A or later, you must convert and translate it.

Execute the following sequence of events exactly as they are stated here:

1. On the DXPCPU–68K circuit board, set DIP switch 8 to its ON position.

2. Connect the DXP’s AC power cord to the AC outlet and turn on the AC power switch. At power up, the DXP automatically executes a master clear operation. After the master clear sequence is complete, the indicators on the DXCPU–68K and DXSRV boards turn on steady and the indicators on the station and line boards wink

ON for four seconds and OFF for four seconds. The system performs the automatic master clear one time following the initial power up after you have upgraded the software. It will not perform an automatic master clear operation again after subsequent power ups.

3. You can leave DIP switch 8 ON or you can turn it OFF. Leaving it ON will ensure that the DXP will always power up in a master cleared and operational mode after a software upgrade. Turning it off prevents the DXP from becoming operational at power up after a software upgrade. The OFF setting may be acceptable because, should you forget to save your database, you have an opportunity to reconsider your actions before the DXP erases the current database.

Upgrading The DXP Software – 21




At initial system installation, you do not need to load the system software to make the system operational. Should you need to later reload the system software (for software upgrade purposes for example), you can do so using the supplied system software disk. Use Windows File Manager or

MS–DOS commands to save the disk’s information from your computer’s floppy drive to its hard drive.

Having the software on your computer’s hard drive allows the data to load into the system’s memory much quicker than it would from the computer’s floppy disk drive.


CAUTION


1. Archive the existing database.




(c) Choose a memory storage location for the archive operation to use and OK your choice. Since the database can be quite large, you should choose a location on your computer’s hard drive to ensure that you have enough memory to store the database.

(d) The system automatically archives its database.





5. Choose the location where the new software data resides (select disk drive, directory, and file), and OK your choice. The system loads the software data, resets itself, and places itself back in service.

6. Restore the existing database (if desired).




(c) Choose the memory storage location that contains an archived database and OK your choice. The system automatically restores its database.

22 – Upgrading The DXP Plus Software


Upgrading the Impact FX Software

Each system requires a system software keying code. This keying code, or system software key, is an encrypted string of characters, that you obtain from a Comdial representative and enter into VMMI programming during software upgrade operations. The system software key enables feature sets, system capacity, and special stand alone features as ordered. The system software key controls the active feature set of the installed software by controlling access to the database configuration of all features.

Using The System Software Key

Since you use the VMMI program to enable the system software key, you must have the software file

(the xxxxxxxx.bin file) stored on the PC from which you plan to run the VMMI program. Further, you must determine the system serial number and then call a Comdial representative to obtain the system software keying code that the system uses to enable the software.

Download the latest xxxxxxxx.bin file from the Comdial Online Support Server. Reach the Online

Support Server through the Comdial Internet home page on the worldwide web at www.comdial.com.

Once there, follow the prompts to get to the Support Server and then to get to the location where you can download software upgrades for the FX system.

Determine the system serial number by using the VMMI program, and call the Comdial representative at:

— 1-800-669-2663 (calls from within the U.S.A.)

— 1-804-978-2290 (international calls)

NOTE: You do not need to install a hardware mechanism on the serial port of the PC to enable the system software (although you do need to do so when you obtain the magic number needed to turn on the CTI applications). Having that hardware mechanism installed does not interfere with system software enabling.

Upgrading the Impact FX Software – 23


Enabling The Impact FX System Software

The following procedure details the sequential software enabling details:

1. Obtain the software .bin file and store it away on the PC if you have not already done so.

Download the latest xxxxxxxx.bin file from the Comdial Online Support Server. Reach the Online

Support Server through the Comdial Internet home page on the worldwide web at www.comdial.com.

Once there, follow the prompts to get to the Support Server and then to get to the location where you can download software upgrades for the Impact FX system.

2. Log into the system with VMMI and view the system serial number at the lower right corner of the VMMI screen. Remember, the system operates in a test mode for one hour before it turns itself off. (Usually, you can also determine the system serial number from the label that is located on the CPU board’s faceplate.)

3. While not necessary at this point in the software enabling sequence, if you are adding CTI applications, you should run the Key Update Utility program to determine the CTI application’s key serial number and current magic number. You need to provide this information to the Comdial representative so the representative can, in turn, provide the information you need to turn on the CTI applications. Performing step three now will

save making a second telephone call later to obtain this needed application information.

(a) Stop the VVP voice mail manager service from the following location: Start/Settings/Control Panel.

Select the Services icon, highlight voice mail manager, and click Stop.

(b) With the CTI application's hardware mechanism installed on the PC’s parallel printer port, locate the software key icon on the main desktop menu and double click on it. If the icon is not available, use the

Start/Programs/Comdial/Keymod menu to locate the software key program and double click there.

This action opens the Key Update Utility program.

(c) From the update utility, click the Examine Key button. The system responds by displaying the following information in the key update screen: the key’s serial number, the current magic number of the installed key.

4. Once you know the system serial number (and the CTI application information if needed), contact the

Comdial representative:

— 1-800-669-2663 (calls from within the U.S.A.)

— 1-804-978-2290 (international calls)

To obtain the system software key and the CTI application’s magic number, you must provide to the representative the following facts:

— system serial number ( located on the CPU board’s faceplate),

— port size of the system,

— feature set desired,

— system software applications desired,

— stand-alone features desired

— CTI applications desired (if applicable),

— method of payment.

Armed with this information, the representative provides the encrypted alphanumeric character strings that represent the system software key and the CTI application enabling magic number.

24 – Upgrading the Impact FX Software


5. Use VMMI to log into the system, open the Switch drop-down menu, and click on System Software Upgrade.

6. Archive the existing database as prompted (if desired) by going to Switch/Archive Database on the VMMI screen and continue.

7. From the system software upgrade window, click the Provide a New Key line, and type the system software key character sequence into the open block.

8. Click Next, browse for and select the software upgrade xxxxxxxx.bin file that you earlier stored in the PC.

9. VMMI provides a new screen that presents the feature set and release number of the software upgrade.

10. Click Finish on this screen, and observe that the system loads the software and then resets itself.

11. Reconnect VMMI to the system, and restore the archived database or reprogram the features as needed.

12. If CTI applications are a part of the installation, restart the Key Update Utility program (using the same procedure detailed in step three); enter the new CTI application magic number character sequence into the update utility; and then click the Update Key button. The utility menu shows a completion code value to indicate that the procedure is finished. Verify that the completion code matches the completion code that the

Comdial representative provided to you, and click the Done button to end the session.

13. Restart the voice mail manager service.

From the Start/Settings/Control Panel Location, select the Services icon, highlight voice mail manager, and click Start.

By completing the above procedure, you enable the system operating software for the telephony

portion of the system (and enable the CTI applications that run on the PC portion of the system if CTI applications are a part of the installation).

Upgrading the Impact FX Software – 25